INDIANA   UNIVERSITY 

1820-1904 


"IT  •  SHALL  •  BE  .  THE  .  DUTY  •  OF  •  THE  -  GENERAL 
ASSEMBLY  •  AS  .  SOON  •  AS  •  CIRCUMSTANCES  •  WILL 
PERMIT  •  TO  •  PROVIDE  •  BY  •  LAW  •  FOR  •  A  •  GENERAL 
SYSTEM- OF- EDUCATION- ASCENDING. IN- A- REGULAR 
GRADATION  •  FROM  •  TOWNSHIP  •  SCHOOLS  •  TO  -  A 
STATE  -  UNIVERSITY  -  WHEREIN  •  TUITION  -  SHALL  -  BE 
GRATIS  -  AND  -  EQUALLY  -  OPEN  •  TO  -  ALL." 

— Indiana  State  Constitution  of  1816. 


INDIANA  UNIVERSITY 

1820-1904 

Historical  Sketch 

Development  of  the  Course  of  Instruction 
Bibliography 


EDITED   BY 

SAMUEL   BANNISTER    HARDING,    PH.D. 

JUNIOR  PROFESSOR  OF  EUROPEAN  HISTORY 


BLOOMINGTON,  INDIANA 

publisbeO   t)g   tbe 
1904 


Wm.  B.  Burford 

Contractor  for  State  Printing  and  Binding 
Indianapolis 


LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY  OF 

SANTA  BARBARA 


Preface 


The  authorities  of  Indiana  University,  after  mature  deliberation,  decided 
not  to  make  an  exhibit  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition  at  St.  Louis — 
partly  for  lack  of  sufficient  space,  and  partly  because  of  the  great  expense 
necessary  to  make  an  adequate  showing.  Instead,  it  was  determined  to  pre- 
pare a  book  which  should  set  forth  in  permanent  form,  for  those  interested, 
the  salient  features  of  the  history  and  present  status  of  the  University.  Out 
of  this  determination  arose  the  present  volume. 

In  the  first  of  the  three  parts  into  which  the  book  is  divided,  are  set  forth 
the  chief  facts  in  the  external  history  of  the  institution, — its  incorporation 
in  the  fourth  year  after  the  admission  of  Indiana  as  a  State  into  the  Union, 
and  the  steps  by  which  it  passed  successively  from  a  Seminary  to  a  College, 
from  a  College  to  a  University  in  name,  and  ultimately  to  a  University  in 
fact. 

In  the  second  part  the  attempt  has  been  made  to  trace  the  development 
of  the  course  of  instruction,  from  the  condition  presented  in  the  first  cata- 
logue in  1831,  to  the  curriculum  as  at  present  arranged.  This  development, 
it  is  believed,  is  typical  especially  for  Western  State  Universities ;  and  it  is 
hoped  that  the  careful  study  which  is  here  presented,  may  prove  a  real  con- 
tribution to  the  history  of  education  in  America. 

The  third  part  of  the  book  is  given  up  to  a  list  of  publications  by  the 
Faculty,  alumni,  and  students  of  the  University.  One  test — though  by  no 
means  the  sole  one — of  the  efficiency  of  a  University,  is  afforded  by  the 
quality  and  quantity  of  the  publications  put  forth  by  its  members.  From 
the  data  here  presented,  it  is  believed  that  a  fairly  correct  idea  may  be 
formed  of  the  character  of  the  intellectual  discipline  which  has  been  here 
imparted  at  different  stages  of  the  University's  history. 

The  illustrations,  aside  from  the  charts — which  show  the  development 
of  the  course  of  instruction,  and  the  recent  growth  of  the  University  in 
comparison  with  the  total  body  of  colleges  of  Liberal  Arts  in  the  United 
States — have  been  selected  with  a  view  to  affording  means  of  judging  of 


vn 


Indiana  University 

the  work  of  the  University  at  the  present  time.  In  addition,  therefore,  to 
the  ordinary  views  of  buildings,  laboratories,  and  the  like,  considerable  space 
is  devoted  to  representations  of  instruments  devised  for  carrying  on  special 
lines  of  work,  and  to  reproductions  of  photographs  and  drawings  illustrative 
of  results  attained  by  some  representative  researches  in  various  Departments 
of  the  University. 

Many  persons  have  assisted  in  the  preparation  of  this  volume.  The  gen- 
eral plan  of  the  work,  which  was  outlined  with  reference  to  a  possible  exhibit 
at  St.  Louis,  was  submitted  to  Professor  Samuel  B.  Harding  and  has  been 
carried  out  entirely  under  his  editorial  supervision.  The  plan  for  a  study  of 
the  University  curriculum,  which  had  been  developed  by  a  number  of  pre- 
liminary studies,  was  proposed  to  Assistant  Professor  Lewis  C.  Carson  of 
the  Department  of  Philosophy,  and  has  been  carried  out  by  him  with  pains- 
taking thoroughness.  The  historical  sketch  with  which  the  volume  opens  was 
compiled  by  Professor  William  A.  Rawles  of  the  Department  of  Economics 
and  Social  Science.  Mr.  W.  A.  Alexander  of  the  Library  staff  has  aided 
much  in  the  compilation  of  the  bibliography;  Professor  John  A.  Miller  of 
the  Department  of  Mechanics  and  Astronomy,  and  Professor  John  A.  Berg- 
strom  of  the  Department  of  Education,  have  superintended  the  preparation 
of  the  charts;  Associate  Professor  Alfred  M.  Brooks  of  the  Fine  Arts  Depart- 
ment has  rendered  aid  in  the  selection  of  the  illustrations ;  and  the  proof  of 
large  portions  of  the  bibliographical  section  has  been  read  by  Professor  Carl 
H.  Eigenmann  of  the  Department  of  Zoology,  Assistant  Professor  Edgar 
R.  Cumings  of  the  Department  of  Geology,  and  Associate  Professor  Carl 
Osthaus  of  the  Department  of  German. 

WILLIAM  LOWE  BRYAN, 

President  of  the  University. 
HLOOMIXGTON,  INDIANA,  July  14,  1904. 


Vlll 


Table  of  Contents 


PAGE 

PREFACE       ............  vii 

PART  I.— HISTORICAL  SKETCH 1 

By  WILLIAM  A.  RAWLES,  Ph.D.,  Junior  Professor  of  Political  Economy 

PART  II.—  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  COURSE  OF  INSTRUCTION 

By  LEWIS  CLINTON  CARSON,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy 

I.    INTRODUCTORY 35 

II.    DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS 

1.  THE  GENERAL  DEVELOPMENT  TO  1887        .....  36 

2.  SPECIAL  STUDIES         . 67 

3.  THE  MAJOR  SUBJECT  SYSTEM 72 

4.  DEPARTMENTS  AS  NOW  CONSTITUTED 76 

III.  RELATION  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY  TO  THE  SCHOOL  SYSTEM  OF  THE  STATE 

1.  FORMER  PREPARATORY  DEPARTMENT 149 

2.  COMMISSIONED  HIGH  SCHOOL  SYSTEM 152 

IV.  GRADUATE  SCHOOL 161 

V.    SCHOOL  OF  LAW 167 

VI.    SCHOOL  OF  MEDICINE  ..........  176 

VII.     SUMMER  SESSION 180 

VIII.    BIOLOGICAL  STATION 183 

IX.    DEPARTMENTS  NOW  DISCONTINUED 

1.  AGRICULTURAL  DEPARTMENT 188 

2.  NORMAL  DEPARTMENT  AND  MODEL  SCHOOLS      ....  189 

3.  ENGINEERING 191 

4.  MILITARY  DEPARTMENT 192 

PART  HI.— BIBLIOGRAPHY 

I.    PUBLICATIONS  BY  PRESENT  MEMBERS  OF  THE  FACULTY     .        .        .  197 

n.    PUBLICATIONS  BY  FORMER  MEMBERS  OF  THE  FACULTY      .         .        .  225 

HI.     PUBLICATIONS  BY  ALUMNI  AND  STUDENTS    ......  251 

ix 


List  of  Illustrations 


PAGE 

MAXWELL  HALL  ..........         Frontispiece 

DAVID  H.  MAXWELL,  M.D. .         .         .         .        3 

PRESIDENT  ANDREW  WYLIE        ..........        7 

THE  OLD  COLLEGE      ............      14 

OWEN  HALL         . 22 

WYLIE  HALL 24 

KIRKWOOD  HALL          ....         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .26 

SCIENCE  HALL     .         .        .         .         .        .        .         .        .         .        .         .         .28 

MEN'S  GYMNASIUM      ............      29 

STUDENTS'  BUILDING  ..........    facing  30 

CHARTS — Development  of  the  Course  of  Instruction  ....          48-50 

Number  of  Instructors,  Courses,  and  Hours  of  Instruction  .  .  57 
Comparative  Increase  since  1890  in  Number  of  Undergraduates  .  68 
Comparative  Increase  since  1890  in  Number  of  Graduate  Students  .  70 
Comparative  Increase  since  1890  in  Number  of  Members  of  Faculty  71 

Ratio  of  Students  to  Instructors          . 74 

GREEK — A  Recitation  Room       ..........       76 

LIBRARY — General  Reading  Room 78 

Cataloguing  Room       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .79 

WALKS  IN  THE  CAMPUS       ...         . 82-83 

HISTORY — Seminary  Room          ..........       85 

ECONOMICS — Hand  Grist-mill      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .87 

PHILOSOPHY — Main  Lecture  Room     .........       89 

Neurological  Laboratory     .........       89 

Preparation  Room  in  Neurology          .......       90 

Psychological  Laboratory  .  ......       91 

EDUCATION — Pedagogical  Museum     .  .         .         .         .         .         .          92-93 

Pendulum  Chronoscope       .........       94 

Tachistoscope       ...........       95 

Apparatus  for  Combined  Intervals      .         .         .         .         .         .         .96 

Apparatus  for  Experiments  upon  Memory  .....       97 

A  New  Form  of  Ergograph 98-99 

MATHEMATICS — Seminary  Room 100 

xi 


Indiana  University 

PAGE 

ASTRONOMY — Kirkwood  Observatory          .  .     101 

Twelve- inch  Refracting  Telescope       ....  .     102 

Fifteen-inch  Reflecting  Telescope 103 

Photographs  of  the  Moon 104-105 

Drawings  of  Sunspots          .         .  ......     106 

Nebula  of  Orion 107 

Comet  C,  1903 108-109 

PHYSICS — Lecture  Room     .         .         .         .         . 110 

Elementary  Laboratory       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .111 

Modified  Wehnelt  Interrupter     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .112 

Brashear  Mounting  for  Rowland  Grating 113 

Apparatus  for  the  Study  of  N-Rays    .         .         .         .         .         .         .114 

CHEMISTRY — Lecture  Room 116 

Laboratory  for  Organic  and  Physiological  Chemistry        .         .         .116 
Laboratory  for  Qualitative  Analysis  .         .         .         .         .         .116 

Apparatus  for  Measurement  of  Single  Potential  Differences      .         .117 
Laboratory  for  Electro-Chemistry      .......     118 

Laboratory  for  Bacteriology       .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .118 

Rotating  Cathode  for  Rapid  Quantitative  Analysis  by  Electrolysis  .     119 
lodoform  from  Acetone  by  Electrolysis      ......     120 

Differentiation  of  Bacillus  Typhi  Abdominalis  and  Bacillus  Coli 

Communis     ...........     121 

GEOLOGY — Research  Laboratories      ........       122-123 

Geological  Museum     ..........     124 

Mineralogical  Laboratory  .........     124 

Lecture  Room      ...........     125 

ZOOLOGY — Elementary  Laboratory 126 

Office  and  Private  Laboratory     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .127 

Models  to  Illustrate  Lectures 128 

Embryological  Laboratory  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .128 

A  Cuban  Blind-fish  with  Unborn  Young    ......     129 

Ablystoma  Opacum     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .129 

South  American  Fresh- water  Fishes          .  ...     130 

Aberrant  Spelerpes  Maculicanda         .......     131 

Leptocephalus  of  the  American  Eel    .....  .     131 

Leptocephalus      ...........     131 

Differentiation  of  the  Eyes  in  the  Blind-fishes  of  North  America      .     132 

Cave  Farm  near  Mitchell,  Ind. 133 

Photographs  of  Bird-life 134 

xii 


List  of  Illustrations 

PAGE 

BOTANY— Laboratory  for  Plant  Physiology 135 

Photomicrograph  of  a  Vascular  Bundle  of  Sweet  Clover          .         .     136 
Division  of  the  Hereditary  Substance  in  Reproductive  Cells  of 

Higher  Plants 137-140 

Fecundation  of  the  Egg-cell  in  the  Lily     ......     141 

ANATOMY — Private  Laboratory  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .     142 

Anatomical  Laboratory       .........     143 

PHYSIOLOGY — Laboratory 144 

FINE  ARTS — Lecture  and  Drawing  Room  ......       146-147 

SCHOOL  OF  LAW — Law  Library 171-172 

Moot  Court  Room 173 

BIOLOGICAL  STATION — View  of  Winona  Lake,  Ind. 183 

Lecture  Room  .         .  184 


Xlll 


Historical 


"IN  AN  IDEAL  UNIVERSITY,  AS  I  CONCEIVE  IT,  A  MAN  SHOULD 
BE  ABLE  TO  OBTAIN  INSTRUCTION  IN  ALL  FORMS  OF  KNOWLEDGE, 
AND  DISCIPLINE  IN  THE  USE  OF  ALL  THE  METHODS  BY  WHICH 
KNOWLEDGE  is  OBTAINED.  IN  SUCH  AN  UNIVERSITY,  THE  FORCE 
OF  LIVING  EXAMPLE  SHOULD  FIRE  THE  STUDENT  WITH  A  NOBLE 
AMBITION  TO  EMULATE  THE  LEARNING  OF  LEARNED  MEN,  AND  TO 
FOLLOW  IN  THE  FOOTSTEPS  OF  THE  EXPLORERS  OF  NEW  FIELDS 
OF  KNOWLEDGE.  AND  THE  VERY  AIR  HE  BREATHES  SHOULD  BE 
CHARGED  WITH  THAT  ENTHUSIASM  FOR  TRUTH,  THAT  FANATICISM 
OF  VERACITY,  WHICH  is  A  GREATER  POSSESSION  THAN  MUCH 
LEARNING;  A  NOBLER  GIFT  THAN  THE  POWER  OF  INCREASING 
KNOWLEDGE  ;  BY  so  MUCH  GREATER  AND  NOBLER  THAN  THESE,  AS 
THE  MORAL  NATURE  OF  MAN  is  GREATER  THAN  THE  INTELLEC- 
TUAL; FOR  VERACITY  is  THE  HEART  OF  MORALITY." — HUXLEY. 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH 


The  Congress  of  the  Confederation  expressed  its  deep-seated  faith  in   Acts  of  the 

education  in  three  separate  acts.     The  Ordinance  of  1785  reserved  the  six-   ^mted  states 

Government, 
teenth  section  of  every  township  of  public  land  "for  the  maintenance  of 

public  schools  within  the  said  township;"  the  Ordinance  of  1787  declared 
that  "Religion,  morality  and  knowledge  being  necessary  to  good  government 
and  the  happiness  of  mankind,  schools  and  the  means  of  education  shall 
be  forever  encouraged;"  and  ten  days  later  (July  23,  1787)  Congress  granted 
to  the  Ohio  Company  two  entire  townships  of  land  for  the  support  of  a  uni- 
versity. Thus  was  inaugurated  a  policy,  the  continuation  of  which  made  pos- 
sible the  early  establishment  of  an  institution  of  higher  education  in  Indiana. 
The  first  action  of  the  Federal  Congress  affecting  immediately  the  founding 
of  a  university  in  Indiana  was  an  act,  approved  March  26,  1804  —  four 
years  after  the  Territory  of  Indiana  was  organized  —  providing  for  the  sale 
of  public  lands ;  among  other  provisions,  it  reserved  one  entire  township 
of  land,  "to  be  located  by  the  Secretary  of  Treasury,  for  the  use  of  a 
seminary  of  learning"  in  Indiana  Territory.  In  1806,  Albert  Gallatin  des- 
ignated for  that  purpose  a  township  in  what  is  now  Gibson  County.  There- 
upon the  territorial  Legislature  promptly  proceeded  to  incorporate  a  uni- 
versity at  Vincennes.  The  institution  did  not  prosper,  and  when  Indiana 
was  admitted  as  a  State  its  existence  was  ignored. 

The  enabling  act  of  Congress  authorizing  the  formation  of  a  state  gov- 
ernment for  Indiana  contained  among  other  items  the  grant  of  an  entire 
township  to  be  designated  by  the  President  of  the  United  States,  in  addition 
to  the  one  previously  given,  the  title  to  which  was  to  be  vested  in  the 
Legislature  of  the  State  for  the  use  of  a  seminary  of  learning. 

(2) 


Indiana  University 


Action  of  the 
Constitutional 
Convention 
(1816). 


The  convention  which  framed  the  Constitution  under  which  Indiana  was 
admitted  as  a  State  accepted  the  grants  of  Congress  by  a  solemn  ordinance, 
passed  on  the  twenty-ninth  day  of  June,  1816,  which  contains  these  words: 
"That  we  do,  for  ourselves  and  our  posterity,  agree,  determine,  declare 
and  ordain  that  we  will  and  do  hereby  accept  the. propositions  of  the  Con- 
gress of  the  United  States  as  made  and  contained  in  their  act"  of  April 
19,  1816;  "and  we  do,  moreover,  foiv  ourselves  and  our  posterity,  hereby 
declare  and  ordain  that  this  ordinance  and  every  part  thereof,  shall 
forever  be  and  remain  irrevocable  and  inviolate,  without  the  consent  of 
the  United  States."  The  State  of  Indiana  is  therefore  pledged  by  this 
ordinance  to  maintain  inviolate  the  fund  derived  from  this  source,  and 
would  seem  bound  to  cherish  and  sustain  the  institution  founded  with  this 
endowment,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  noble  purpose  for  which  this  generous 
gift  was  made  may  not  be  thwarted,  but  may  be  realized  to  its  fullest  possi- 
bilities. 

This  same  convention,  as  a  further  indorsement  of  the  broad  plan,  de- 
clared in  the  Constitution  (Article  IX,  section  2)  that  "it  shall  be  the  duty 
of  the  General  Assembly,  as  soon  as  circumstances  will  permit,  to  provide 
by  law  for  a  general  system  of  education,  ascending  in  a  regular  gradation 
from  township  schools  to  a  state  university,  wherein  tuition  shall  be  gratis, 
and  equally  open  to  all." 

The  circumstances  of  time  and  place  being  considered,  these  are  notable 
words.  In  that  day  it  was  the  accepted  theory  of  education  that  elementary 
instruction  might  properly  be  undertaken  by  the  State,  but  that  higher  edu- 
cation should  be  left  to  the  control  of  religious  denominations  or  to  indi- 
vidual benevolence.  Xo  other  State  in  the  Union  had  then  incorporated 
into  its  constitution  a  declaration  in  favor  of  a  university  open  to  all 
alike  and  with  free  tuition.  When,  furthermore,  the  social  and  material 
environment  is  remembered,  this  broad  conception  of  education  seems  the 
more  remarkable.  At  that  time  barely  one-fourth  of  the  land  within  the 
State  had  been  purchased  from  the  Indians  and  thrown  open  to  settlement. 
There  were  but  thirteen  counties  represented  in  the  constitutional  conven- 
tion. Settlements  were  few  and  far  apart.  The  only  means  of  communi- 
cation were  the  uncertain  Indian  trails,  the  rough  roads,  and  the  waters 
of  rivers  and  creeks.  Even  the  Ohio  River  could  boast  of  onlv  two  or 


Historical  Sketch 

three  small  steamboats.      The  population  of  the   State,   all  told,   did   not   conditions  of 
exceed  65,000.     According  to  the  accounts  of  this  early  period,  the  people   the  time- 
were  for  the  most  part  illiterate,  impoverished  and  disheartened.     But  there 
were  among  them  men  whose  minds,  though  lacking  the  graces  and  refine- 
ments of  the  highest  culture,  had  a  rude  strength  combined  with  acuteness 
and  insight;  they  were  the  leaven  of  the  lump.     The  members  of  that  con- 
vention were  honest,  simple-hearted,  unpretentious  men,  firm  in  their  con- 
sciousness of  the  rights  of  the  common  people,  clear  in  their  sense  of  equity 


DAVID   H.   MAXWELL,   M.D. 

Foster-father  of  the  University. 

and  justice,  and  blessed  with  that  saving  quality  called  common-sense.  They 
believed  that  education  would  most  surely  quicken  that  unresponsive  mass, 
stimulate  the  people  to  greater  activity,  and  inspire  them  with  higher  ideals. 
In  that  conviction  and  with  prophetic  hope  they  acted.  It  is  a  significant 
fact  that  the  same  man  who  drafted  the  clause  of  the  Constitution  excluding 
slavery  from  this  State  (Dr.  David  H.  Maxwell)  is  also  properly  regarded 
as  the  "founder  of  Indiana  University"  —  an  institution  dedicated  to  intel- 
lectual freedom,  whose  seal  appropriately  bears  the  motto  Lux  et  Veritas. 


Indiana  University 

STATE  SEMINARY,   1820-1828 

The  township  selected  for  the  support  of  a  university  lay  in  what  is  now 
Monroe  County,  and  was  later  named  Perry  Township — the  present  seat 
of  Indiana  University.  It  was  stipulated  in  the  Constitution  that  no  lands 
intended  for  school  purposes  should  be  sold  prior  to  1820.  In  the  first 
Act  establishing  month  of  that  year  an  act  to  establish  a  State  Seminary  was  passed  and 
a  state  seminary  receive(j  executive  approval  on  January  20,  1820 — the  date  now  recognized 
by  the  University  as  Foundation  Day.  This  act  named  as  a  Board  of  Trus- 
tees Charles  Dewey,  Jonathan  Lindley,  David  H.  Maxwell,  John  M.  Jenkins, 
Jonathan  Nichols  and  William  Lowe. 

Throughout  its  history  Indiana  University  has  been  fortunate  in  having 
as  trustees  men  who  were  devoted  to  the  highest  interests  of  the  institution 
and  to  the  cause  of  education  in  general.  Foremost  on  this  honorable  roll 
should  stand  the  name  of  Dr.  David  H.  Maxwell.  "During  the  Seminary 
period,  while  the  institution  was  struggling  for  establishment,  from  1820 
to  1825  especially,  he  was  not  only  the  presiding  officer  of  the  board,  but 
was  also  its  executive  officer  and  corresponding  secretary,  having  the  erection 
of  new  buildings  under  his  supervision,  carrying  on  a  heavy  correspondence 
with  prominent  men  throughout  the  State  in  behalf  of  the  institution,  while 
having  to  contend  with  a  disaffected  element  at  home.  Solely  on  behalf 
of  the  Seminary  he  solicited  election  to  the  Legislature,  and  from  1821 
to  1826  he  was  a  member  of  either  the  lower  house  (where  he  was  once 
Speaker)  or  of  the  senate,  and  at  all  times  he  was  especially  interested  in 
watching  jealously  the  affairs  of  the  new  Seminary.  In  the  establishment 
of  institutions  it  seems  that  the  life  and  services  of  some  one  man  are  para- 
mount and  essential.  In  the  establishment  of  the  Indiana  Seminary  Dr. 
David  H.  Maxwell  was  the  essential  man."1 

In  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  law  of  1820,  the  Board  of 
Trustees  selected  for  the  Seminary  a  site  in  the  reserved  township.  The 
location  of  the  Seminary  upon  its  own  lands  would,  it  was  believed,  greatly 
enhance  the  value  of  the  property  and  would  ultimately  increase  the  revenues 
of  the  institution.  Two  years  later  the  Legislature  passed  an  act  authorizing 
the  sale  of  the  Seminary  township  in  Gibson  County  and  directing  the  appli- 

1  James  Albert  Woodburn,  Higher  Education  in  Indiana  (Washington,  1891),  p.  77. 

4 


Historical  Sketch 

cation  of  the  proceeds  to  the  support  of  the  State  Seminary.  In  justification 
of  this  apparent  confiscation  of  the  property  of  Vincennes  University  it 
was  alleged  that  the  trustees  of  that  institution  had  illegally  sold  a  portion 
of  their  land  and  had  permitted  their  organization  to  lapse.  By  the  decisions 
of  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  in  1852,  and  of  the  Supreme 
Court  of  Indiana  in  1854,  these  funds  were  restored  to  Vincennes  University. 
In  1826  the  General  Assembly  increased  the  number  of  members  of  the 
Board  of  Trustees  of  Indiana  Seminary  to  nine,  and  one  year  later  empow- 
ered the  Board  to  sell  all  the  Seminary  lands  with  the  exception  of  the  three 
sections  contiguous  to  that  section  on  which  the  buildings  of  the  Seminary 
were  located. 

The  Seminary  meantime  was  opened  in  1824  under  the  direction  of  The  Seminary 
Eev.  Baynard  E.  Hall,  an  alumnus  of  Union  College  and  Princeton  Theo-  opened  (1824)> 
logical  Seminary.  Professor  Hall  was  for  three  years  the  only  instructor, 
and  the  only  subjects  taught  were  Latin  and  Greek.  The  number  of  students 
during  the  first  three  years  was,  respectively,  13,  15,  and  21.  In  his 
sketch  of  the  Indiana  Seminary  the  late  Judge  David  D.  Banta  places 
the  following  estimate  upon  the  services  of  Professor  Hall:  "The  choice 
[of  Principal]  could  hardly  have  fallen  upon  a  worthier  man.  He  was 
an  excellent  classical  scholar  and  a  persuasive  and  sometimes  eloquent 
preacher.  As  a  teacher,  he  was  enthusiastic,  faithful  and  painstaking,"1 
He  entered  into  the  pioneer  life  of  the  day  with  sympathy,  but  saw  its 
rude  and  often  ludicrous  side.  Under  the  pseudonym  "Robert  Carlton" 
he  published  in  later  life  (1846)  an  entertaining  account  of  his  experiences, 
entitled  'The  New  Purchase,  or  Early  Years  in  the  Far  West.' 

In  1828  it  was  deemed  advisable  to  appoint  another  instructor  to  teach 
mathematics  and  such  of  the  natural  sciences  as  were  considered  of  "suffi- 
cient importance  to  engage  the  attention  of  aspiring  youth."  John  H.  Har- 
ney,  an  alumnus  of  Miami  University,  was  selected  to  fill  this  position. 
The  election  of  Professor  Harney  elicited  from  local  politicians  and  other 
dissatisfied  persons  a  protest  to  the  General  Assembly,  in  which  were  alleged 
extravagance  and  careless  and  sectarian  management.  Dr.  David  H.  Max- 
well, the  president  of  the  Board  of  Trustees,  reported  to  the  Legislature 
that  the  salary  of  Professor  Hall  was  $250  per  year,  and  that  the  only 

iTheophilus  A.  Wylie,  Indiana  University  (1890),  p.  43. 

5 


Indiana  University 

subjects  taught  were  Latin  and  Greek.  This  evidence,  together  with  other 
statements,  seemed  to  satisfy  the  Legislature  of  the  economy  of  management, 
for  it  took  no  action  against  the  Seminary. 

Even  before  the  manifestation  of  dissatisfaction  just  mentioned,  the 
General  Assembly  had  appointed  (January  26,  1827)  a  Board  of  Visitors 
consisting  of  the  Governor,  the  Lieutenant-Governor,  the  Judges  of  the  Su- 
preme Court,  and  nineteen  other  distinguished  men.  They  were  required 
to  visit  the  school,  inspect  its  records  and  accounts,  examine  the  students 
and  report  to  the  General  Assembly,  embodying  in  their  report  "any  recom- 
mendations they  may  think  proper  to  make  of  such  measures  within  the  com- 
petency of  the  Legislature  as  may  tend  to  sustain,  foster  and  improve  the 
Seminary  aforesaid."  In  November  of  the  same  year  the  Board  of  Visitors 
made  its  first  visit.  It  reported  that  "there  was  but  one  opinion  among 
the  visitors — that  more  ability  to  teach  was  exhibited  by  the  professors 
and  apparent  proficiency  by  the  scholars  than  ever  before  witnessed  on  a 
similar  occasion." 

Upon  this  favorable  report  and  the  specific  recommendations  of  the  Board 
of  Visitors,  the  President  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  and  Governor  Ray, 
the  General  Assembly  proceeded,  by  an  act  approved  January  24,  1828, 
to  raise  the  Seminary  to  the  rank  of  a  college.  From  the  Seminary  period 
"no  records  remain  of  classes ;  no  records  even  of  names  of  students  in  attend- 
ance. But  the  few  old  men  yet  living  who  were  students  during  Seminary 
times  all  speak  in  glowing  terms  of  the  activity  of  the  professors  and  the 
application  of  the  students."1 


Act  establishing 
the  Indiana  Col- 
lege (1828). 


INDIANA  COLLEGE,   1828-1838 

By  the  act  of  January  24,  1828,  the  "Indiana  College"  was  established 
for  the  education  of  youth  in  the  "American,  learned  and  foreign  languages, 
the  useful  arts,  sciences  and  literature."  The  new  institution  was  given 
authority  to  confer  "such  degrees  in  the  liberal  arts  and  sciences  as  are 
usually  granted  and  conferred  in  other  colleges  in  America."  The  Board 
of  Trustees  was  increased  to  fifteen  members,  and  they  were  empowered 
to  fill  vacancies  in  their  own  number.  Provision  was  made  for  a  Board 


iJudge  D.  D.  Banta,  in  Theophilus  A.  Wylie's  Indiana  University  (1890),  pp.  45-6. 

6 


Historical  Sketch 

of  Visitors  consisting  of  five  persons.  Freedom  of  religious  opinions  was 
guaranteed  to  professors  and  students,  and  the  teaching  of  sectarian  prin- 
ciples was  forbidden. 

For  the  responsible  work  of  organizing  and  developing  the  new  college   Dr.  Andrew 

the   Board    of   Trustees   chose   "Rev.    Andrew    Wylie,    D.D.,    at    that   time   Wylie  elected 

'  President 

President  of  Washington  College,  Washington,  Pennsylvania.     At  the  age    (1829). 

of  twenty-one  Mr.  Wylie  was  graduated  from  Jefferson  College,  Canonsburg, 


ANDREW  WYLIE,  D.D. 
President  of  the  University,  1829-51. 

Pennsylvania,  and  immediately  appointed  a  tutor  in  his  alma  mater.  About 
a  year  later  he  was  elected  President  of  that  institution ;  and  in  1817  he 
was  made  President  of  Washington  College.  In  these  positions  he  displayed 
marked  abilities  as  an  administrator  and  a  teacher. 

The  effect  of  Dr.  Wylie's  election  to  the  presidency  of  Indiana  Univer- 
sity, together  with  the  change  in  the  rank  of  the  institution,  was  soon  appar- 


Indiana  University 

ent  in  an  enlarged  faculty,  an  expanded  curriculum,  added  buildings  and 
an  increased  number  of  students.  Dr.  Wylie,  in  addition  to  his  duties  as 
President,  gave  instruction  in  moral  and  mental  philosophy,  political  econ- 
other  members  omy  and  polite  literature.  Rev.  Baynard  R.  Hall,  the  former  Principal 
of  the  Seminary,  was  retained  as  professor  of  ancient  languages;  while 
Professor  John  H.  Harney  occupied  the  chair  of  mathematics,  natural  and 
mechanical  philosophy,  and  chemistry.  Mr.  W.  H.  Stockwell  was  super- 
intendent of  the  Preparatory  Department,  which  was  established  in  1829 
because  the  secondary  schools  of  the  State  were  inadequate  to  prepare  stu- 
dents for  entrance  to  the  College. 

When  the  first  College  catalogue  was  published  in  1831,  there  were  60 
students  in  attendance.  In  the  following  year,  owing  to  the  existence 
of  some  trouble  in  the  Faculty  and  among  the  students,  Professors  Hall 
and  Harney  resigned,  and  the  number  of  students  fell  off,  but  recovered 
quickly  in  the  next  year.  To  fill  the  vacancies  in  the  Faculty,  Ebenezer  X. 
Elliott,  a  graduate  of  Miami  University,  was  appointed  professor  of  natural 
philosophy  and  chemistry,  and  Beaumont  Parks,  a  graduate  of  Dartmouth 
College,  professor -of  languages.  In  1836  Professor  Elliott  resigned  to  accept 
the  presidency  of  Mississippi  College.  The  following  appointments  were  then 
made:  James  F.  Dodds,  an  alumnus  of  Indiana  College,  as  professor  of 
mathematics;  Augustus  W.  Ruter,  an  alumnus  of  Augusta  College,  Ky.,  as 
professor  of  Greek  and  French ;  William  R.  Harding,  a  graduate  of  Trinity 
College,  Dublin,  as  principal  of  the  Preparatory  Department;  and  (in  1837) 
Theophilus  A.  Wylie,  a  graduate  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  as 
professor  of  natural  philosophy  and  chemistry. 

The  character  of  the  students  of  that  period  is  thus  described  by  Dr. 
T.  A.  Wylie,  whose  connection  with  the  institution  was  long  and  intimate: 
"Many  of  the  students  were  young  men  brought  up  on  farms,  and  used 
to  hard  work.  They  came  to  Bloomington,  generally  on  their  own  resources, 
depending  on  money  they  had  earned  or  borrowed.  It  was  not  unusual  for 
students  to  attend  to  their  studies  for  a  year  and  then  absent  themselves 
for  the  same  length  of  time  in  order  to  earn  money  by  teaching  or  otherwise, 
and  to  return  to  complete  their  college  course.  Out  of  this  kind  of  material 
have  many  of  the  graduates  been  made,  who  have  done  honor  to  their  alma 
mater  and  their  country." 

8 


Historical  Sketch 

In  1836  a  new  and  more  commodious  building  was  completed  for  the 
College.  It  has  been  described  as  resembling  "an  old-fashioned  New  Eng- 
land cotton  mill,"  but  it  at  least  furnished  additional  space  for  actual  work. 

INDIANA  UNIVERSITY,   1838-1904 

The  importance  of  the  College,  the  growth  of  the  State,  and  the  need 
for  instruction  in  the  professions  of  law  and  medicine  induced  the  General 
Assembly  in  1838  to  enlarge  the  scope  of  the  institution  and  to  transform 
it  into  a  university.  By  an  act  of  February  25,  1838,  Indiana  College  Act  establishing 

became  the  Indiana  University,  with  authority  to  grant  additional  degrees   the  Indiana  Um' 

•7'  J  .  versity  (1838). 

in  law  and  medicine.  The  Board  of  Trustees  was  to  consist  of  the  Governor 
of  the  State  and  twenty-one  other  members ;  but  three  years  later  the  number 
was  again  reduced  to  nine. 

Dr.  Wylie  continued  as  President  of  the  enlarged  institution,  and  exhib- 
ited during  his  administration  still  greater  power  as  an  executive.  But 
for  two  or  three  years  the  University  did  not  make  much  progress.  In 
1839  the  Faculty  consisted  of  three  members,  including  the  President; 
and  in  the  following  year  there  were  but  64  students.  The  year  1840  proved 
a  turning  point  in  the  University's  history.  In  that  year  was  erected 
another  building  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  Department  of  Natural  Philoso- 
phy and  Chemistry.  Lieutenant  Jacob  Ammen,  a  graduate  of  West  Point 
and  at  that  time  professor  of  mathematics  in  Jefferson  College,  Mississippi, 
was  appointed  professor  of  mathematics  in  Indiana  University;  and  John 
I.  Morrison,  an  alumnus  of  Miami  University,  was  made  professor  of 
languages.  Professor  Ammen  organized  a  Military  Department,  which,  how- 
ever, was  discontinued  soon  after  his  resignation  in  1843.  By  that  year 
the  number  of  students  had  increased  to  115.  Upon  the  resignation  of 
Professors  Ammen  and  Morrison  in  1843  their  places  were  filled  respectively 
by  the  appointment  of  Professors  Alfred  Ryors  and  Daniel  Read,  both  of 
Ohio  University. 

After  several  ineffectual  attempts  a  Law  School  was  established  in  1842 
by  the  election  of  Judge  David  McDonald  as  professor  of  law.  Under 
Judge  McDonald  and  his  successors  the  law  school  prospered  for  many 
years,  and  added  materially  to  the  number  of  students  in  attendance.  During 
the  last  ten  years  of  Dr.  Wylie's  administration  the  University  enjoyed 

9 


Indiana  University 

a  high  degree  of  prosperity.  The  Faculty  and  the  Board  of  Trustees 
acted  in  harmony;  outside  interference  ceased;  and  the  institution  com- 
manded more  and  more  the  respect  and  confidence  of  the  public. 
Death  of  Pres-  Dr.  Wylie's  long  and  successful  administration  ended  with  his  death 
on  November  11,  1851,  from  an  attack  of  pneumonia.  His  place  in  the 
history  of  the  institution  is  thus  summed  up: 

"Dr.  Wylie's  services  to  Indiana  in  the  capacity  of  first  president  of 
her  University,  are  not  easily  estimated.  As  a  class-room  instructor  he  disci- 
plined the  minds  and  molded  the  characters  of  young  men  for  useful  service 
in  the  State.  By  his  personal  power  he  attached  every  student  who  had 
received  the  benefit  of  his  tuition,  to  the  welfare  of  the  University.  As 
a  public  educator  and  lecturer,  and  as  a  man  among  the  people,  he  performed 
an  enormous  amount  of  labor  in  making  known  to  the  citizens  of  the  State, 
and  of  other  States  as  well,  the  advantages  of  higher  education.  He  thus 
popularized  the  University  and  gave  it  strength  in  its  appeals  for  legislative 
support."1  That  he  had  great  magnetic  force  is  shown  by  the  fact  that 
when  he  came  to  Indiana  College  he  was  followed  by  many  young  men 
from  Pennsylvania  and  Virginia  who  had  come  under  his  influence  while 
he  was  teaching  in  the  East;  during  his  entire  presidency  there  was  a 
large  attendance  at  the  University  of  men  from  the  South,  even  from  the 
Gulf  States.  Dr.  Theophilus  Parvin,  formerly  professor  in  Jefferson  Med- 
ical College  of  Philadelphia,  and  a  pupil  of  Dr.  Wylie,  assures  us  "that 
the  students  of  Dr.  Wylie  are  guilty  of  no  blind  idolatry,  or  no  idolatry 
at  all,  when  they  declare  that  in  ability  he  was  one  of  the  first  men  in 
all  the  country."  It  is  interesting  to  have  estimates  of  his  character  from 
his  co-workers  in  the  Faculty.  Judge  David  McDonald,  professor  of  law, 
in  speaking  of  him,  used  the  following  language:  "Andrew  Wylie  was 
a  man  of  truth.  He  was  so  not  merely  because  of  his  views  of  policy, 
but  because  he  loved  the  truth.  In  thought,  in  word,  in  action,  he  was 
truthful ;  and  no  man  during  a  long  life  ever  pursued  the  truth  with  more 
unwearied  search  through  all  the  fields  of  learning  and  science."  Professor 
T.  A.  Wylie  gives  the  following  estimate:  "He  had  many  strong  friends, 
and  there  were  also  some  bitterly  opposed  to  him.  Those  intimately  ac- 
quainted with  him  will  not  find  it  difficult  to  account  for  this  trait  of 

1 J.  A.  Woodburn,  Higher  Education  in  Indiana,  p.  80. 

10 


Historical  Sketch 

character.  He  was  tolerant  and  patient  to  a  fault  of  everything  but  mean- 
ness and  duplicity.  A  person  in  whom  he  had  no  confidence  he  would 
keep  at  arm's  length,  and  although  policy  might  dictate  an  opposite  course 
he  would  hardly  treat  one  thus  regarded  with  common  courtesy.  He  would 
never,  to  use  his  own  expression,  'throw  a  sop  to  Cerberus.'  On  the  other 
hand,  to  those  in  whom  he  had  confidence,  no  one  was  more  affable.  There 
was  sometimes,  however,  an  apparent  want  of  civility,  a  brusque  manner." 
This  was  due,  our  authority  informs  us,  to  his  habit  of  so  concentrating 
his  thought  upon  the  subject  in  mind  that  he  scarcely  noticed  any  one  or 
anything  else. 

Such  was  the  character  of  the  man  who  shaped  the  University  during 
its  formative  period  and  touched  the  lives  of  young  men  as  if  with  a  magic 
wand,  aro vising  within  them  aspirations  for  scholarship,  truth  and  service. 
The  list  of  alumni  of  this  period  is  illumined  with  the  names  of  James  S.  Some  Alumni  of 
Rollins,  founder  of  the  University  of  Missouri  and  prominent  in  the  politics  tbls  Penod- 
of  that  State ;  James  Wilson  Dunn,  lawyer,  business  man,  Lieutenant-Colonel 
of  volunteers;  William  McKee  Dunn,  lawyer,  Congressman,  brevet  Briga- 
dier-General and  Judge  Advocate  General  of  the  United  States  Army ;  An- 
drew Wylie,  Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  District  of  Columbia,  1863- 
1884 ;  James  Darwin  Maxwell,  physician  and  member  of  the  Board  of 
Trustees  of  Indiana  University,  1860-1892 ;  Parker  Campbell,  banker,  sugar 
planter,  and  Major  in  the  Confederate  Army ;  John  S.  Watts,  Chief  Justice 
of  the  Territory  of  New  Mexico;  William  Mitchell  Daily,  President  of 
Indiana  University,  1853-1859;  Addison  Locke  Roache,  Judge  of  the 
Supreme  Court  of  Indiana;  Joseph  A.  Wright,  Governor  of  Indiana,  1849- 
1857,  United  States  Senator  from  Indiana,  and  Minister  to  Prussia ;  George 
Grover  Wright,  Chief  Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  Iowa,  United  States 
Senator  from  Iowa,  1871-1877;  Richard  Taylor  Allison,  lawyer,  Paymaster 
in  the  United  States  Navy  under  Commodore  Perry  in  his  expedition  to 
Japan  in  1854,  and  later  Paymaster  in  the  Marine  Corps  of  the  Confederate 
States;  William  Alexander  Parsons  Martin,  missionary,  diplomatist,  Pres- 
ident of  the  Imperial  College,  Pekin,  author  and  translator,  and  mandarin 
of  the  third  rank ;  Russell  Bigelow  Abbott,  President  of  Albert  Lea  College, 
Minnesota ;  Theophilus  Parvin,  professor  in  Jefferson  Medical  College,  Phil- 
adelphia, and  a  noted  medical  author;  Michael  Steele  Bright,  lawyer  and 

11 


Indiana  University 

banker;  John  Henry  Wise,  Deputy  Collector  of  the  port  of  San  Francisco, 
wool  and  commission  merchant;  George  D.  Wise,  lawyer  and  statesman; 
Obadiah  Jennings  Wise,  editor  of  the  Richmond  (Va.)  Enquirer,  Captain  in 
the  Confederate  Army;  John  James  Wise,  physician  and  Captain  in  the 
Confederate  Army.  To  this  list  might  be  added  the  names  of  many  others, 
who  won  distinction  in  law,  medicine,  education  or  business,  or  in  humbler 
walks  spent  their  lives  in  the  service  of  their  fellow-men,  true  to  their 
youthful  ideals. 

The  Constitution  of  Indiana  adopted  in  1851  does  not  expressly  refer 
to  Indiana  University  as  a  State  institution,  but  it  does  declare  that  "all 
trust  funds  held  by  the  State  shall  remain  inviolate,  and  be  faithfully 
and  exclusively  applied  to  the  purpose  for  which  the  trust  was  created." 
At  the  first  session  of  the  General  Assembly  under  the  authority  of  the 
new  Constitution,  the  University  was  explicitly  "recognized  as  the  Uni- 
versity of  the  State."  (Act  of  June  17,  1852.)  In  1852  the  Federal 
Government  made  an  additional  grant  of  4,166  acres  for  the  use  of  the 
University;  this  yielded  in  time  about  $10,000,  but  the  proceeds  were  not 
immediately  available. 

The  vacancy  caused  by  the  death  of  President  Wylie  in  November,  1851, 
was  not  immediately  filled  by  the  Board  of  Trustees,  and  for  that  school  year 
Professor  Daniel  Read  and  later  Professor  Theophilus  A.  Wylie  acted  as 
President.  The  permanent  position  was  first  tendered  to  Dr.  John  H.  La- 
throp,  Chancellor  of  Wisconsin  University,  and  upon  his  declination  a  sim- 
ilar offer  was  made  to  the  eminent  educator,  Henry  Barnard  of  Connecticut. 
Owing  to  a  carriage  accident  Dr.  Barnard  was  compelled  to  decline  the  invi- 
tation, and  Rev.  Alfred  Ryors,  D.D.,  who  had  been  professor  of  mathematics 
in  1844-48,  and  was  now  President  of  Ohio  University,  was  elected  to  the 
office. 

Presidency  of  Dr.  Ryors  began  his  administration  under  inauspicious  conditions.     The 

Dr- ^lf™d  Ryors  University  was  involved  for  a  number  of  years  in  the  suit  with  Vincennes 
University  over  the  Seminary  lands  in  Gibson  County,  which  terminated 
adversely  to  Indiana  University.  The  decision  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States  threatened  to  curtail  the  revenues  of  the  institution,  and 
the  number  of  students  declined.  Still  more  discouraging  and  annoying 
to  President  Ryors  was  the  presence  of  a  disaffected  and  intriguing  element 

12 


Historical  Sketch 

in  the  Faculty  and  Board  of  Trustees.  So  great  was  the  disappointment 
of  Dr.  Ryors  that  within  six  months  after  his  coming  he  tendered  his 
resignation,  but'  upon  the  earnest  request  of  the  President  of  the '  Board 
he  withdrew  it.  The  situation,  however,  did  not  improve,  and  at  the  end 
of  his  first  year  he  again  presented  his  resignation,  which  was  then  accepted. 
Dr.  Ryors  was  a  man  of  fine  attainments  and  had  been  very  successful 
both  as  a  disciplinarian  and  as  an  instructor,  in  the  position  of  President 
of  Ohio  University.  His  presidency  of  Indiana  University  was  too  brief 
and  was  begun  under  circumstances  too  unfavorable  to  leave  the  permanent 
impression  which  was  properly  anticipated  from  a  man  of  his  talents. 

The  only  important  change  made  during  his  administration  was  the 
establishment  of  a  Normal  Department  under  the  management  of  Professor 
Read,  which  was  discontinued  after  Professor  Read's  resignation  in  1856. 

Rev.  William  Mitchell  Daily,  D.D.,  an  alumnus  of  the  class  of  1836,  Presidency  of 
was  next  chosen  President,  which  position  he  filled  from  1853  to  1859.  Daiiyn  853-59) 
Under  his  presidency  the  University  progressed  favorably,  until  a  disastrous 
fire  in  April,  1854,  completely  destroyed  the  main  building,  the  University 
library  of  1,200  volumes,  and  the  furnishings  and  libraries  of  the  students' 
literary  societies.  This  was  a  severe  blow  to  the  institution;  but  the  loss 
of  material  equipment  was  more  than  compensated  for  by  the  zeal  and 
loyalty  of  the  students,  alumni,  Faculty,  Board  of  Trustees,  and  citizens 
of  Bloomington.  The  Board  of  Trustees  within  three  weeks  appointed 
a  building  committee.  The  people  of  Bloomington  and  Monroe  County 
subscribed  $10,000.  A  sale  of  scholarships  was  authorized  by  the  Board,  and 
the  subscriptions  were  made  convertible  into  scholarships  which  entitled 
the  holders  to  free  tuition.  Money  was  borrowed,  and  a  new  building  was 
ready  for  use  in  1855.  The  nucleus  of  a  new  library  was  acquired  through 
liberal  donations  of  books  from  Mr.  Henry  W.  Derby,  a  bookseller  and 
publisher  of  Cincinnati,  and  from  Mr.  W.  H.  Jones,  of  Ft.  Wayne. 

In  1856  the  Federal  Government  donated  to  the  University  about  22,000 
acres  of  land  in  this  and  in  other  States  to  make  up  the  loss  occasioned  by 
the  decision  of  the  United  States  Supreme  Court  in  respect  to  the  Gibson 
County  lands.  Thus  the  financial  basis  of  the  University  was  made  more 
solid,  and  the  material  equipment  enlarged  and  modernized.  At  the  same 
time  the  inner  life  of  the  institution  was  enriched  by  the  coming  of  two 

13 


Historical  Sketch 

men  who  for  nearly  thirty  years  gave  their  services  and  the  inspiration 
of  their  lives  to  the  University.  In  1854  Elisha  Ballantine,  of  Ohio  Uni- 
versity, came  to  Indiana  University  as  professor  of  mathematics ;  two  years 
later,  upon  the  resignation  of  Professor  Read,  he  was  transferred  to  the 
professorship  of  languages.  At  the  same  time  Daniel  Kirkwood,  then  Pres- 
ident of  Newark  College,  Delaware,  was  made  professor  of  mathematics. 

In  the  resignation  of  Professor  Daniel  Read,  to  accept  the  professorship 
of  ancient  languages  in  Wisconsin  University,  Indiana  University  suffered 
a  loss.  Dr.  Read  was  an  excellent  scholar,  a  superior  teacher  and  a  man 
of  practical  affairs.  His  energy  and  diplomacy  were  of  great  value  during 
the  dark  days  of  the  early  fifties.  He  was  a  member  of  the  Constitutional 
convention  of  1850-51,  and  took  an  active  part  in  the  deliberations  of  that 
body,  especially  upon  all  questions  relating  to  education. 

Dr.  Daily  was  untiring  in  his  efforts  in  behalf  of  the  University.  He 
was  much  liked  by  the  students  on  account  of  his  kindly  disposition  and 
his  interest  in  their  welfare.  But  because  of  some  untoward  circum- 
stances, resulting  in  a  trial  in  an  ecclesiastical  court,  in  which  charges 
were  brought  against  Dr.  Daily,  and  a  popular  clamor  excited,  which  he 
feared  might  be  injurious  to  the  University,  he  handed  in  his  resignation 
January  27,  1859,  which  was  accepted.  During  the  remainder  of  the  college 
year  Professor  T.  A.  Wylie  again  served  as  temporary  President. 

In  this  period  another  change  should  be  noted  in  the  law  governing 
the  number  and  appointment  of  Trustees.  In  1855  the  number  of  mem- 
bers of  the  Board  was  reduced  to  eight — the  present  number — and  the  power 
to  fill  vacancies  in  their  body,  which  they  had  had  from  1838,  was  taken 
away  and  vested  in  the  State  Board  of  Education. 

In  1859  Dr.  Lathrop  was  again  offered  the  presidency  of  Indiana  Uni-   Presidency  of 
versitv,   and  this  time  accepted,   although  he  occupied  the  office  but  one   Dr-  John  **•  La~ 

'  .  throp(  1*50-60). 

year.  With  the  exception  of  an  increase  in  the  number  of  professors 
and  tutors  no  important  changes  were  made  during  that  time.  In  1860 
Dr.  Lathrop  resigned  to  accept  a  professorship  in  Missouri  University, 
of  which  institution  he  had  been  the  first  President,  from  1840  to  1849. 

Dr.  Cyrus  Kutt  was  elected  President  in  1860,  and  at  once  took  up 
the  duties  of  the  office.  His  formal  inauguration  occurred  on  June  7, 
1861,  at  which  time  Governor  Oliver  P.  Morton  delivered  the  address 

of  investiture. 

15 


Indiana  University 


Presidenry  of 
Dr.  Cyrus  Xutt 

|lS»>O-75). 


The  outbreak  of  the  Civil  War  inevitably  reacted  disastrously  on  the 
growth  of  the  University  in  President  Nutt's  administration,  as  is  seen 
in  the  record  of  attendance.  In  1860  the  number  of  students  enrolled, 
exclusive  of  those  in  the  law  and  preparatory  departments,  was  99 ;  in 
1861  it  rose  to  112;  in  1863  it  fell  to  67.  After  the  close  of  the  war, 
the  ground  lost  was  steadily  recovered,  and  by  1869  the  number  of  students 
had  risen  to  182. 

One  of  the  first  questions  to  occupy  the  attention  of  President  Nntt 
and  the  Board  of  Trustees  was  the  disposition  to  be  made  of  Indiana's 
portion  of  the  public  lands  granted  to  the  several  States,  by  an  act  of  Con- 
gress of  July  2,  1862,  for  the  establishment  of  "Colleges  for  the  benefit  of 
agriculture  and  the  mechanic  arts."  Indiana  received  as  her  share  of  this 
donation  the  land  scrip  of  390,000  acres,  from  which  was  realized  by  sale 
and  by  careful  management  of  the  proceeds  about  $340,000.  Three  prop- 
ositions for  the  use  of  this  trust  fund  were  considered  by  the  Legislature: 
(1)  the  endowment  of  agricultural  departments  in  some  five  of  the  leading 
colleges  of  the  State,  including  a  central  institution  of  research  at  Indi- 
anapolis; (2)  the  founding  of  a  separate  agricultural  college;  (3)  the 
establishment  of  an  Indiana  State  Agricultural  College  in  connection  with 
Indiana  University.  Dr.  Nutt  and  the  friends  of  the  University  labored 
zealously  for  the  adoption  of  the  third  plan.  The  claim  of  Indiana  Uni- 
versity would  probably  have  been  stronger  if  the  Board  of  Trustees  had 
previously  established  an  agricultural  department,  which  they  had  authority 
to  do  under  an  act  passed  by  the  Legislature  in  1852.  All  arguments, 
however,  were  overpowered  by  the  generous  gift  of  $150,000  by  John  Purdue 
of  Lafayette,  and  donations  of  $50,000  by  Tippecanoe  County  and  100 
acres  of  land  by  the  town  of  West  Lafayette,  conditioned  upon  the  location 
of  the  institution  at  West  Lafayette. 

However,  at  about  this  time  Indiana  University  received  an  indorsement 
from  the  State  Legislature  which  was  full  of  significance.  Prior  to  1867 
the  University  had  received  no  money  from  the  treasury  of  the  State. 
In  that  year  an  important  innovation  was  made.  The  General  Assembly, 
recognizing  that  the  "endowment  fund  of  the  State  University"  was  "no 
longer  sufficient  to  meet  the  growing  wants  of  education  and  make  said 
University  efficient  and  useful,"  and  believing  that  "it  should  be  the  pride 


16 


Historical  Sketch 

of  every  citizen  of  Indiana  to  place  the  State  University  in  the  highest 
condition  of  usefulness,  and  make  it  the  crowning  glory  of  our  present  great 
common  school  system,"  appropriated  $8,000  to  the  use  of  the  University, 
and  in  1873  increased  the  amount  of  the  annual  appropriation  to  $15,000. 

The  most  important  innovation  during  this  period  was  the  admission    Admission  of 

of  women  to  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the  University  on  equal  terms    Women  to  the 

J  University 

with  men.  Hon.  Isaac  Jenkinson,  then  a  member  and  now  President  of  (1868). 
the  Board  of  Trustees,  had  advocated  this  change  for  several  years,  but  for 
some  time  he  had  stood  alone.  In  the  year  1867  Miss  Sarah  Parke  Mor- 
rison, without  any  knowledge  of  the  discussion  upon  the  subject  within 
the  Board  of  Trustees,  presented  a  petition  to  that  body  requesting  that 
the  privilege  of  attendance  at  the  University  be  granted  to  women.  This 
brought  the  question  to  a  focus,  and  lay  a  vote  of  four  to  three  the  petition 
was  granted.  Miss  Morrison  entered  the  University  the  next  fall,  and 
was  graduated  with  the  class  of  18(39.  To  Mr.  Jenkinson  is  due  the 
credit  for  this  advanced  step.  At  that  time  no  other  State  University 
had  adopted  the  system  of  co-education ;  although  Oberlin  University  and 
two  other  institutions  of  collegiate  rank  were  committed  to  such  a  policy, 
Indiana  University  was,  among  the  State  Universities,  the  pioneer  in  this 
movement. 

In  1868  the  Military  Department  of  the  University  was  revived  under 
the  control  of  Major-General  Eli  Long,  who  began  his  work  in  1869.  In 
the  following  year  he  was  recalled  by  the  War  Department,  and  Colonel 
James  Thompson  was  appointed  professor  of  military  science  and  engi- 
neering. For  two  or  three  years  considerable  interest  was  showTn  in  military 
training;  but  on  account  of  the  time  required  and  the  inconvenience  to 
many  students  their  zeal  declined  and  greater  emphasis  was  put  upon 
the  civil  engineering.  In  1875  the  military  training  was  discontinued, 
but  Colonel  Thompson  remained  as  professor  of  civil  engineering.  An 
effort  at  this  time  to  secure  the  construction  of  a  gymnasium  proved  unsuc- 
cessful. 

For  some  time  the  University  had  felt  the  need  of  a  Medical  Department, 
but  because  the  University  was  in  a  small  town  it  was  deemed  inadvisable 
to  establish  a  department  at  Bloomington.  In  1871  an  arrangement  was 
made  with  the  Indiana  Medical  College  by  which  that  school  became  the 

(3)  ! 


Indiana  University 

Medical  Department  of  Indiana  University;  and  for  a  few  years  it  was 

recognized  in  the  annual  catalogues   as  a  part  of  the  University.      The 

connection,  however,  was  not  close,  and  in  1877  it  was  completely  severed. 

Commissioned          Of  scarcely  less  importance  than  the  admission  of  women  to  the  Uni- 

high  school        versity  was  the  attempt  made  in  1873  to  establish  a  more  intimate  connec- 

SV^tt*lll  l'K'irUIl 

(1873).  tion  between  the  University  and  the  High  Schools  of  the  State.    The  framers 

of  the  first  Constitution  had  as  their  ideal  a  system  of  education  extending 
from  the  graded  schools  to  the  University;  this  had  been  only  partially 
realized.  There  existed  a  hiatus  between  the  common  schools  and  the 
University,  because  of  the  narrow  field  of  the  Preparatory  Department 
and  the  small  number  of  High  Schools  that  were  capable  of  doing  work  of  a 
high  grade,  especially  in  Greek.  In  1873  the  State  Board  of  Education  and 
a  convention  of  school  superintendents  and  teachers  recommended  to  the 
Board  of  Trustees  that  an  increased  amount  of  mathematics  and  science 
be  accepted  as  an  equivalent  for  the  Greek  required  for  admission,  and 
that  the  High  Schools  prepare  students  for  admission  to  the  University. 
The  Board  acceded  to  this  request,  fixed  the  minimum  standard  for 
admission,  and  agreed  to  admit  to  the  University,  without  further  exami- 
nation, all  applicants  bearing  certificates  of  a  satisfactory  examination 
in  the  required  subjects  from  certain  High  Schools,  to  be  thereafter  desig- 
nated by  the  State  Board  of  Education.  As  soon  as  the  arrangement  went 
into  effect,  twenty-one  High  Schools  were  chosen  and  commissioned  by 
the  State  Board  of  Education  to  prepare  students  for  admission  to  the 
Freshman  class.  While  the  number  of  commissioned  High  Schools  did 
not  increase  very  rapidly,  a  standard  was  set  to  which  the  better  High 
Schools  tried  to  conform.  It  was  not  until  the  presidency  of  Dr.  David 
Starr  Jordan  that  the  importance  of  this  relation  was  fully  appreciated 
and  the  unification  made  more  perfect. 

During  this  period  the  Faculty  was  enlarged,  and  there  were  several 
changes  in  its  personnel.  The  most  notable  of  these  was  the  appointment 
in  1863  of  Colonel  Richard  Owen  as  professor  of  natural  philosophy  and 
chemistry.  In  1864  he  was  transferred  to  the  chair  of  physics  and  chem- 
istry, and  in  1868  to  the  professorship  of  natural  science  and  chemistry. 

This  increase  in  the  number  of  instructors,  and  the  growth  in  the  attend- 
ance, reaching  182  in  1869,  caused  a  demand  for  better  equipment  and 

18 


Historical  Sketch 

accommodations.  From  the  beginning  of  the  annual  appropriations  by  the 
State  in  1867,  considerable  sums  of  money  were  spent  upon  apparatus  and 
materials  for  use  in  the  departments  of  physics,  chemistry  and  natural 
science.  In  1870  the  extensive  cabinet  of  the  distinguished  geologist,  David 
Dale  Owen,  of  New  Harmony,  was  purchased  by  the  University.  In  order 
to  utilize  this  valuable  collection  advantageously  and  to  afford  adequate 
accommodations  for  the  library,  the  law  school  and  the  scientific  departments, 
it  was  determined  to  erect  a  new  building,  which  was  completed  in  1874. 

After  fifteen  years'  service,  Dr.  !N"utt  resigned  June  30,  1875.  During 
his  administration  many  important  changes  were  made,  but  in  most  cases 
they  originated  with,  and  their  details  were  worked  out  by,  the  Board 
of  Trustees. 

In  September,  1875,  Dr.  Lemuel  Moss,  who  had  a  few  months  before   Presidency  of 
resigned  the  presidency  of  the  old  Chicago  University,  was  elected  Presi-   Dr.  Lemuel  MOSS 
dent,   and  at  once  assumed,   under  favorable   auspices,   the   duties   of  the 
office. 

In  the  next  year  the  relation  between  the  Indiana  Medical  College 
and  the  University  was  terminated,  and  in  1877  the  Law  School  was 
discontinued  after  an  honorable  existence  of  thirty-five  years.  Inasmuch  as 
tuition  was  free,  according  to  a  ruling  of  the  Board,  the  funds  of  the  Uni- 
versity did  not  justify  so  large  an  expenditure  of  money  as  was  needed  to 
maintain  these  schools  with  high  standards. 

The  administration  of  Dr.  Moss  saw  a  further  expansion  of  the  college 
course.  The  course  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  had  existed 
as  early  as  1854;  in  1867  this  course  was  enlarged.  In  1878  an  additional 
course  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Letters  was  introduced,  which 
permitted  the  substitution  of  French  or  German  in  place  of  the  Greek 
in  the  classical  course. 

Another  innovation  of  this  period  was  the  introduction  of  courses  of 
special  lectures  given  by  the  most  eminent  scholars  in  science  and  letters. 
Among  these  special  lecturers  were  Professor  George  F.  Barker,  M.D., 
LL.D.,  of  the  University  of  Pennsylvania ;  President  James  B.  Angell 
of  the  University  of  Michigan;  Richard  A.  Proctor,  B.A.,  of  Cambridge, 
England;  and  Professor  William  T.  Harris,  LL.D.,  now  Commissioner 
of  Education,  Washington,  D'.  C. 


Indiana  University 


Removal  of  the 
University  to  a 
new  site  (1885). 


The  people  of  the  State  showed  their  increasing  confidence  in  the  Uni- 
versity by  the  provision  made  in  1883  for  the  first  permanent  endowment 
of  the  institution  out  of  State  funds.  For  this  purpose  the  Legislature 
in  1883  authorized  an  annual  levy  of  a  tax  of  five  mills  on  each  one  hundred 
dollars'  worth  of  taxable  property  in  the  State,  to  be  continued  for  thirteen 
years.  From  the  operation  of  this  law  there  was  realized  a  fund  of  $358,333, 
the  interest  on  which  amounts  to  $21,500  annually. 

In  the  summer  of  1883  the  University  again  suffered  a  severe  loss  from 
fire.  Science  Hall,  with  practically  all  of  its  contents — the  library  of 
13,000  volumes,  the  apparatus  of  the  physical  and  chemical  departments, 
the  museum,  and  the  private  collections  of  Dr.  David  Starr  Jordan,  then 
professor  of  biology — was  totally  destroyed.  The  calamity  at  first  seemed 
overwhelming.  But  the  President,  the  Faculty,  the  Board  of  Trustees,  and 
the  loyal  friends  of  the  University  turned  their  faces  resolutely  towards 
the  future.  It  was  a  crisis  of  great  import.  The  momentous  question  was 
whether  the  University  should  be  continued  on  the  old  site,  with  its  narrow 
limits  and  the  annoyances  from  the  noise  of  the  railroad,  or  whether  a 
new  site  should  be  selected  which  would  afford  relief  from  the  existing 
vexations  and  give  wide  opportunity  for  future  growth.  After  careful  delib- 
eration the  Board  of  Trustees  determined  upon  removal,  and  a  beautiful 
tract  of  land  known  as  Dunn's  woods,  lying  on  the  east  edge  of  the  town, 
was  purchased.  With  $20,000  insurance  money,  and  the  liberal  donation 
of  $50,000  from  Monroe  County,  the  erection  of  buildings  was  begun  in 
April,  1884,  the  cornerstone  being  laid  June  10th  in  that  year. 

Until  the  new  buildings  were  ready  for  occupation,  the  regular  work 
of  the  University  was  continued  in  the  one  building  still  remaining  on 
the  old  site.  Notwithstanding  the  difficulties  occasioned  by  the  cramped  quar- 
ters and  the  inadequate  equipment  of  the  library  and  the  laboratories, 
the  students  were  enthusiastic  and  patient,  and  the  attendance  in  the  Collegi- 
ate Department  during  the  first  year  after  the  fire  was  only  24  less  than  that 
of  the  previous  year,  and  in  the  second  year  but  10  less;  while  in  the  next 
year  it  wras  even  35  more  than  in  the  last  year  preceding  the  fire. 

On  November  8,  1884,  the  resignation  of  Dr.  Moss  was  announced. 
Rev.  Elisha  Ballantine,  formerly  professor  of  Greek,  was  made  temporary 
president,  serving  until  January  1,  1885.  Dr.  Moss  was  a  man  of  great 


Historical  Sketch 

intellect  and  power,  and  ah  eloquent  preacher.  As  a  teacher  he  made  a 
deep  impression  upon  his  students.  While  the  University  made  progress 
under  his  administration,  it  was  still  essentially  a  college  with  the  old  ideals 
and  methods. 

The  usefulness  of  the  old  forms  and  methods  should  not,  however, 
be  misunderstood.  That  the  range  of  subjects  was  restricted,  that  the  equip- 
ment of  laboratories  was  meager,  that  the  opportunities  for  investigation 
were  lacking,  must  be  admitted.  But  it  must  not  be  inferred  that  the 
efforts  at  this  time  were  fruitless.  In  spite  of  all  difficulties  the  young 
men  and  women  who  were  graduated  during  the  days  of  the  College 
acquired  a  discipline  and  a  culture  which  made  it  possible  for  them  to 
enter  upon  careers  crowned  with  success  and  honor.  In  some  part,  at  least, 
the  want  of  a  variety  of  courses  was  compensated  for  by  the  close  and 
often  intimate  relation  between  the  student  and  the  teacher.  The  contact 
with  such  men  as  Professors  Wylie,  Owen,  Ballantine  and  Kirkwood  was 
a  liberalizing  and  inspiring  influence  which  wrought  in  the  minds  and 
hearts  of  the  youth  subtle  and  abiding  changes. 

Nevertheless  it  must  be  admitted  that  Indiana  University  had  not  kept 
pace  with  the  younger  universities  of  neighboring  States.  There  was  needed 
an  infusion  of  new  and  vigorous  blood — a  rejuvenation  which  would  put 
the  institution  in  touch  with  the  modern  movement  in  higher  education — 
a  need  fully  supplied  in  the  administration  next  following,  that  of  David 
Starr  Jordan. 

On  January  1,  1885,  Dr.  David  Starr  Jordan,  professor  of  biology  in    Presidency  of 
the  University,  entered  upon  his  duties  as  President,  in  succession  to  Dr.      *'    a_%1 

»  '  Starr  Jordan 

Moss.  His  administration  was  the  beginning  of  a  new  epoch  in  the  history  (1885-91). 
of  the  University,  in  which  it  was  raised  to  the  level  of  other  State  Univer- 
sities and  to  an  honorable  rank  among  the  leading  institutions  of  the  country. 
The  chief  means  by  which  this  was  accomplished  was  the  "reorganization 
of  the  curriculum  to  the  form  in  which  it  now  stands,  a  form  which  har- 
monizes individuality  with  thorough  work,  and  secures  an  education  at 
once  broad  and  of  specific  content," 

Dr.  Jordan's  conception  of  a  university  is  stated  clearly  in  his  own 
words :  "The  highest  function  of  the  real  university  is  that  of  instruction 
by  investigation.  The  essential  quality  of  the  university  is  the  presence 

21 


Historical  Sketch 

in  its  Faculty  of  men  qualified  to  do  university  work.  It  matters  not  how 
many  or  how  few  the  subjects  taught,  or  what  may  be  the  material  equip- 
ment of  the  teacher,  the  school  in  which  study  and  investigation  go  hand 
in  hand  is  in  its  degree  a  university."  It  was  this  ideal  which  determined 
the  course  of  his  entire  policy  in  the  modification  of  the  curriculum  and 
in  the  selection  of  his  staff  of  instructors.  It  was  his  plan  to  choose  as 
professors  young  men  fresh  from  the  best  schools  where  opportunities  for 
graduate  work  of  the  best  type  were  offered.  He  believed  that  these  men, 
imbued  with  the  spirit -of  investigation,  would  instil  into  their  own  students 
the  desire  for  research  work.  His  expectations  were  amply  realized. 

Many  changes  in  the  personnel  of  the  Faculty  were  made  during  his 
administration.  This  was  due  in  part  to  the  fact  that  as  the  success  of 
the  young  teachers  became  known  they  were  called  to  more  responsible  and 
more  lucrative  positions  elsewhere.  But  their  places  here  were  in  turn 
filled  by  men  of  the  same  stamp. 

Second  in  importance  only  to  the  reorganization  of  the  curriculum  was   The  Preparatory 
the  service  of  Dr.  Jordan  in  articulating  more  closely  the  University  and   Department 

,       TT.    ,     _.   ,       ,         ,,     ,       ~  ,    .  ,      .    .  .       TT    .  .  .  .  abolished  (1890) 

the  High  Schools  01  the  State,  and  in  popularizing  the  University  without 
lowering  its  standard.  In  the  belief  that  the  High  Schools  had  attained 
such  a  position  that  they  could  offer  the  secondary  instruction  necessary 
for  admission  to  the  University,  the  Preparatory  Department  was  abolished 
in  1890.  The  number  of  commissioned  High  Schools  was  increased  rapidly, 
and  the  quality  of  their  instruction  was  improved.  In  this  way  the  influence 
of  Dr.  Jordan  touched  not  only  the  University  but  the  High  Schools  and  even 
the  common  schools  of  the  State. 

In  1885  the  buildings  on  the  new  campus — Owen  Hall,  Wylie  Hall  and  a 
frame  chapel  building  now  called  Mitchell  Hall — were  ready  for  occupation. 
In  1890  was  erected  the  present  Maxwell  Hall,  used  for  the  library  and  the 
administration  offices.  Under  Dr.  Jordan's  care  the  equipment  of  the  chem- 
ical, physical  and  zoological  laboratories  was  increased  in  quantity  and  im- 
proved in  quality. 

In  1889,  after  a  discontinuance  of  thirteen  years,  the  Indiana  University   The  School  of 
School  of  Law  was  re-established  with  Judge  David  Demaree  Banta  as  Dean.    Lf70(r^vived 

( lOoD )  • 

Since  that  time  it  has  made  continuous  progress  by  increasing  the  require- 
ments for  admission  and  by  extending  the  length  of  the  course  to  three  years. 

..  -.'.>.. 

23 


a      3 
*     I 


Historical  Sketch 

*• 

In  1891  an  important  change  was  made  in  the  method  of  selecting  part 
of  the  Board  of  Trustees.  Three  members  since  that  time  have  been  elected 
by  the  alumni  of  the  University  residing  in  Indiana.  Each  member  serves 
for  a  term  of  three  years,  one  retiring  annually.  This  arrangement  has 
proved  to  be  quite  satisfactory  and  assists  in  keeping  alive  the  interest  of 
the  alumni  in  their  alma  mater. 

In  1891  Dr.  Jordan  resigned  to  take  the  presidency  of  a  new  university, 
planned  by  Senator  Leland  Stanford  at  Palo  Alto,  California.  His  loss  to 
Indiana  University  was  a  severe  blow.  As  a  teacher  Dr.  Jordan  was  thor- 
ough and  inspiring.  His  success  in  arousing  in  young  men  a  thirst  for 
knowledge  obtained  by  original  investigation  is  shown  by  the  long  list  of  his 
students  who  have  achieved  scientific  distinction.  As  an  executive  he  was 
original  and  positive  in  his  convictions ;  to  many,  his  advanced  conceptions 
seemed  radical.  But  he  comprehended  as  no  one  else  did  at  the  time,  the 
future  possibilities  of  Indiana  University;  and  time  has  only  confirmed  the 
wisdom  and  saneness  of  his  views.  It  is  not  extravagant  to  say  that  the 
present  position  and  tendency  of  the  University  are  due  to  the  influence  of 
Dr.  Jordan  more  than  to  that  of  any  other  one  man. 

The  immediate  successor  of  Dr.  Jordan  was  John  .Merle  Coulter,  pro-   Presidency  of 
fessor  of  botanv  at  Wabash  College,  whose  doctorate  of  philosophy  was  con- 

-     «  ^ 

ferred  by  Indiana  University  in  1884.  Imbued  with  the  same  spirit,  Presi- 
dent Coulter  continued  Dr.  Jordan's  policy ;  his  presidency  was  too  short  for 
him  to  work  out  any  individual  policy  of  his  own.  With  diplomatic  skill  he 
harmonized  some  differences  which  had  arisen  within  the  Faculty.  His 
influence  tended  to  allay  an  unwarranted  alarm  in  some  quarters  lest  the 
spirit  of  scientific  inquiry  at  the  University  might  have  a  detrimental  effect 
on  the  religious  belief  of  the  young  people.  It  was  in  the  first  year  of  his 
administration  that  a  branch  of  the  Young  Men's  Christian  Association  was 
established  in  the  University,  superseding  an  older,  less  defined  organization 
composed  of  men  and  women  students  known  as  the  Christian  Association. 
In  this  movement  Dr.  Coulter  took  an  active  interest,  not  only  in  the  local 
branch  but  in  the  State  Association  as  well.  In  1893  Dr.  Coulter  resigned  to 
take  the  presidency  of  Lake  Forest  University,  and  shortly  after  (1896) 
accepted  the  professorship  of  botany  in  the  University  of  Chicago. 


25 


Historical  Sketch 

Dr.  Joseph  Swain,  who  succeeded  Dr.  Coulter  in  1893,  was  the  second  Presidency  of 
President  of  the  University  who  had  completed  within  its  walls  his  under- 
graduate  course.  He  entered  the  University  in  the  same  year  (1879)  in 
which  Dr.  Jordan  began  his  work  as  professor  of  biology,  and  soon  came 
under  his  influence.  After  graduating  in  1883,  he  held  an  instructorship  at 
the  University  in  mathematics  and  zoology  for  two  years,  and  in  1885  re- 
ceived the  degree  of  Master  of  Science.  The  following  year  he  studied  mathe- 
matics and  astronomy  at  Edinburgh  University,  Scotland,  and  in  1886  he 
returned  to  his  alma  mater  as  professor  of  mathematics.  Dr.  Jordan  was 
so  impressed  with  the  soundness  of  his  opinions  and  the  wisdom  of  his  advice 
that  he  chose  him  among  the  first  of  the  members  of  the  new  faculty  of 
Stanford  University  in  1891  and  made  him  professor  of  mathematics. 
During  the  period  of  organizing  that  institution  he  was  one  of  the  most 
confidential  advisers  of  President  Jordan.  In  this  close  association  he 
acquired  an  intimate  knowledge  of  the  details  of  university  administration, 
and  upon  the  resignation  of  President  Coulter  in  1893,  Professor  Swain  was 
elected  President  of  Indiana  University. 

Dr.  Swain's  educational  policy  was  along  the  lines  marked  out  by  Presi- 
dent Jordan.  New  courses  were  added  to  the  curriculum  and  other  men  of 
the  same  type  as  the  old  were  added  to  the  corps  of  instructors.  There  was 
a  leveling  up  of  the  departments  —  especially  those  dealing  with  the  human- 
ities, which  to  some  seemed  in  danger  of  being  overshadowed  by  the  rapid 
development  of  the  scientific  departments. 

The  maintenance  of  old  standards  and  the  realization  of  new  ideals 
increased  expenditures.  In  the  field  of  university  finance  President  Swain 
rendered  preeminent  service  to  the  University  and  the  cause  of  higher  educa- 
tion in  Indiana.  In  addition  to  special  appropriations  for  the  erection  of 
three  new  buildings  —  Kirkwood  Hall,  a  larger  heating  plant,  and  Science 
Hall  —  the  Legislature,  largely  through  his  influence,  was  induced  to  provide 
a  more  permanent  financial  support  for  the  University.  In  1895  an  act  was 
passed  imposing  an  annual  tax  equivalent  to  one-fifteenth  of  a  mill  upon 
each  dollar  of  taxable  property  within  the  State  for  the  use  of  the  University 
—  a  rate  subsequently  raised  (in  1903)  to  one-tenth  of  a  mill.  The  increased 
revenue  was  expended  with  strict  economy.  The  growth  of  the  institution  in 


27 


Historical  Sketch 

the  estimation  of  the  public  is  attested  by  the  rapid  increase  in  the  attend- 
ance, which  rose  in  this  period  from  638  in  1894,  to  1,285  in  1902. 

In  1900  a  step  was  taken  which  has  made  the  University  more  fully  than  Abolition  of 
ever  before  a  school  for  the  people.  Although  tuition  was  free,  it  had  long 
been  customary  to  charge  a  small  fee  of  five  dollars  per  term  for  contingent 
purposes.  At  the  November  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  in  1900,  all 
contingent  fees,  excepting  those  in  the  School  of  Law,  were  abolished  from 
and  after  January  1,  1901.  This  however  did  not  do  away  with  "reasonable 


I 


MEN'S  GYMNASIUM  (ERECTED  1896) 

charges  for  the  use  of  the  gymnasium,  library,  and  equipment  and  supplies 
for  the  laboratories." 

Equally  with  President  Coulter,  Dr.  Swain  encouraged  the  work  of  the 
Young  Men's  and  Young  Women's  Christian  Associations  and  was  largely 
instrumental  in  making  the  organizations  here  the  leading  branches  of  the 
college  associations  in  Indiana.  Mainly  through  the  interest  and  energy  of 

29 


Indiana  University 


Presidency  of 
Dr.  William 
Lowe  Bryan, 
from  1902. 


his  wife,  Mrs.  Francos  Morgan  Swain,  there  was  raised  from  students, 
alumni,  and  friends  of  the  University,  in  the  last  years  of  President  Swain's 
administration,  a  sum  which,  with  an  equal  amount  given  by  Mr.  John  D. 
Rockefeller,  secures  the  erection  of  a  Students'  Building  to  cost  approxi- 
mately $100,000.  The  building,  which  is  now  in  process  of  construction, 
will  contain  the  women's  gymnasium,  rooms  for  the  Young  Men's  and  Young 
Women's  Christian  Associations,  and  a  small  auditorium ;  and  it  will  become 
a  center  for  the  student  life  of  the  University. 

In  1902  Dr.  Swain  resigned  to  accept  the  presidency  of  Swarthmore 
College,  Swarthmore,  Pennsylvania,  in  response  to  an  urgent  call  from  those 
of  his  own  faith — the  Society  of  Friends.  His  most  distinctive  services 
to  the  University  were  in  enriching  its  material  resources  and  equipment, 
in  defending  it  against  unreasonable  attacks,  and  in  perfecting  its  organi- 
zation. 

Dr.  William  Lowe  Bryan,  who  is  now  President  of  the  University,  was 
graduated  from  Indiana  University  in  1884;  he  was  instructor  in  Greek  in 
the  University  from  January  to  June  in  1885,  and  associate  professor  of  phi- 
losophy from  1885  to  1887.  During  the  year  1886-87  he  was  a  student  at  the 
University  of  Berlin;  and  during  the  year  1891-92,  he  studied  at  Clark 
University,  from  which  institution  he  received  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Phi- 
losophy in  1892.  From  1887  until  his  election  to  the  presidency  in  1902,  he 
was  professor  of  philosophy  in  the  University.  As  Vice-President,  under  Dr. 
Swain,  he  was  closely  associated  with  the  administration  of  the  University ; 
and,  because  of  his  peculiar  fitness  on  account  of  natural  ability,  tempera- 
ment and  special  training,  the  Board  of  Trustees,  the  Faculty,  the  students, 
the  alumni  and  all  other  friends  of  the  University,  with  unanimity  turned  to 
him  as  the  logical  successor  to  the  presidency.  His  formal  installation  took 
place  in  connection  with  the  celebration  of  Foundation  Day,  January  20, 
1903 — a  celebration  made  doubly  memorable  by  the  dedication  at  the  same 
time  of  the  new  Science  Hall. 

In  the  two  years  of  the  present  administration,  the  prosperity  of  the 
University  has  continued  unimpaired,  and  it  is  believed  that  the  efficiency  and 
usefulness  of  the  institution  are  at  as  high  a  level  of  excellence  as  ever  before 
in  its  history.  President  Bryan  has  expressed  one  of  the  chief  objects  of  his 
administration,  as  follows : 


30 


Historical  Sketch 

"For  eighteen  years  the  chief  feature  of  our  curriculum  has  been  the 
major  subject.  The  major  subject  has  meant  some  one  department  of  learn- 
ing— chemistry,  Greek,  or  the  like — in  which  the  candidate  for  graduation 
spends  one  third  or  one  fourth  of  all  his  time  and  in  which  he  has  therefore  a 
chance  to  gain  the  beginnings  of  mastery. 

"Now  I  believe  in  vastly  widening  the  meaning  of  the  major  subject.  It 
has  meant  as  I  have  said  a  department  of  learning.  I  wish  to  see  it  mean 
also  any  group  of  subjects  leading  to  a  learned  occupation.  I  wish  to  see  men 
given  the  degree  of  A.B.  in  law,  medicine,  architecture,  commerce,  journal- 
ism or  any  such  profession.  Second,  I  wish  to  see  the  major  subject  mean 
also  any  group  of  subjects  leading  to  one  of  the  fine  arts.  Our  whole  system 
of  education  is  one-sided  through  the  almost  total  neglect  of  the  arts.  I  hope 
soon  to  see  the  time  when  all  the  great  arts  will  be  adequately  represented  in 
that  free  public  school  system  which  rises  'in  regular  gradation  from  the 
township  schools  to  the  State  University.' 

"Toward  the  accomplishment  of  these  ideals,  there  has  been  no  rash  or 
sweeping  change  but,  as  the  official  announcements  of  the  University  show  in 
detail,  a  rapid  and  substantial  progress." 

In  reviewing  the  history  of  the  four-score  years  of  the  institution,  many   Summary:  the 

vicissitudes  are  noted.     "During  the  first  generation  of  its  history  the  Indi-   Umversity  and 

the  people. 

ana  University  endured  a  continuous  struggle.  It  had  to  contend  against  the 
reluctance  of  the  State  to  give  to  it  a  vigorous  and  liberal  financial  support ; 
its  lands  were  unfortunately,  or  unwisely,  managed,  and  by  their  too  early  sale 
it  never  realized  from  its  land  endowment  an  income  of  more  than  $8,000 ; 
it  was  troubled  by  uncertainty  and  confusion  and  subsequent  litigation  con- 
cerning this  endowment;  it  was  hampered  (in  the  early  history  of  the  State) 
by  the  antagonisms  of  religious  sects,  whose  adverse  influence  was  seen  some- 
times in  the  management  of  the  institution,  but  more  often  in  unkind  and 
uncalled  for  opposition  to  its  management  and  interests ;  it  suffered  two  disas- 
ters by  fire ;  it  had  to  resist  an  unreasonable,  but  common,  feeling  of  suspi- 
cion, among  many  of  the  masses,  toward  higher  education  by  the  State ; — all 
these  causes,  with  some  minor  ones,  have  operated  to  make  the  growth  of 
the  University  slow  and  difficult."1 


1  Woodburn,  Higher  Education  in  Indiana,  p.  84. 

81 


Indiana  University 

As  the  material  resources  of  the  State  have  been  developed ;  as  the  people 
have  acquired  that  competency  which  brings  leisure  and  opportunity  for 
culture  and  refinement ;  as  men  have  become  more  tolerant  in  their  religious 
beliefs ;  as  the  conviction  has  grown  wider  and  deeper  that  trained  leaders 
are  indispensable  in  a  democracy,  the  State  has  become  more  generous  in  its 
support  of  higher  education  and  made  it  possible  to  carry  out  the  ideals  of  the 
founders  of  the  University  and  to  accomplish  its  real  functions  as  conceived 
by  its  recent  presidents.  It  bids  fair  to  do  its  full  share  in  the  education  of 
the  youth  and  in  the  endeavor  to  attain  the  ideal  democracy.  The  spirit  of 
its  administration  is  set  forth  in  these  words,  from  President  Bryan's  inau- 
gural address : 

"What  the  people  need  and  demand  is  that  their  children  shall  have  a 
chance — as  good  a  chance  as  any  other  children  in  the  world — to  make  the 
most  of  themselves,  to  rise  in  any  and  every  occupation,  including  those 
occupations  which  require  the  most  thorough  training.  What  the  people 
want  is  open  paths  from  every  corner  of  the  State,  through  the  schools,  to  the 
highest  and  best  things  which  men  can  achieve.  To  make  such  paths,  to  make 
them  open  to  the  poorest  and  lead  to  the  highest,  is  the  mission  of  democ- 
racy." 


II 
Development  of  tl)e  Course  of  3n0tructfon 


(4) 


"THAT     YOUTHFUL    COMMUNITY     (THE     UNIVERSITY)     WILL    CONSTI- 
TUTE  A   WHOLE,    IT   WILL    EMBODY   A   SPECIFIC    IDEA,    IT   WILL 

REPRESENT  A  DOCTRINE,  IT  WILL  ADMINISTER  A  CODE  OF  CONDUCT, 
AND  IT  WILL  FURNISH  PRINCIPLES  OF  THOUGHT  AND  ACTION.  IT 
WILL  GIVE  BIRTH  TO  A  LIVING  TEACHING,  WHICH  IN  COURSE  OF 
TIME  WILL  TAKE  THE  SHAPE  OF  A  SELF-PERPETUATING  TRADITION, 

OR  A  GENIUS  Loci  AS  IT  is  SOMETIMES  CALLED;  WHICH  HAUNTS  THE 

HOME  WHERE  IT  HAS  BEEN  BORN  AND  WHICH  IMBUES  AND  FORMS 
MORE  OR  LESS  AND  ONE  BY  ONE  EVERY  INDIVIDUAL  WHO  IS  SUC- 
CESSIVELY BROUGHT  UNDER  ITS  SHADOW." — CARDINAL  NEWMAN. 


INTRODUCTORY 


This  history  of  the  development  of  the  course  of  instruction  at  Indiana  Sources  of 
University  is  derived  chiefly  from  the  published  annual  catalogues,  of  which 
the  first  appeared  under  the  date  of  August  17,  1831,  in  the  third  year  of  the 
existence  of  the  institution  as  a  college  and  the  eleventh  from  its  foundation 
as  the  State  Seminary.  With  the  exception  of  these  catalogues,  the  official 
records  of  the  early  and  middle  periods  of  the  institution  were  nearly  all  lost 
in  the  fires  of  1854  and  1883. 

Throughout  the  following  pages  and  in  the  accompanying  tables,  an 
academic  year  is  uniformly  referred  to  by  mentioning  only  the  later  of  the 
two  calendar  years  into  which  the  academic  year  extends, — thus  1850  stands 
for  the  academic  year  1849-50. 

For  convenience  of  reference  a  list  of  the  presidents  of  Indiana  Uni-   List  of  Presi- 
versity  from  the  time  of  its  foundation  as  a  college  is  here  given,  with  the   Universit . 
dates  of  their  administrations. 

1.  Andrew  Wylie,  D.D 1828-1851 

2.  Alfred  Ryors,  D.D 1852-1853 

3.  William  Mitchell  Daily,  D.D.,  LL.D 1853-1858 

4.  John  Hiram  Lathrop,  LL.D 1859-1860 

5.  Cyrus  Nutt,  D.D.,  LL.D 18GO-1875 

6.  Lemuel  Moss,  Ph.D.,  D.D 1875-1884 

7.  David  Starr  Jordan,  Ph.D.,  LL.D 1884-1891 

8.  John  Merle  Coulter,  Ph.D.,  LL.D 1891-1893 

9.  Joseph  Swain.  M.S..  LL.D 1893-1902 

10.  William  Lowe  Bryan,  Ph.D from  1902 

35 


DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS 


GENERAL  DEVELOPMENT  TO  1887 

Rise  of  the  In  the  early  days  of  the  University,  there  was  no  subdivision  of  the 

"  Departments       curriculum  into  separate  courses  of  study  or  separate  departments.      The 

of  Liberal  Arts."  .     .  .        , 

Preparatory  Department,  it  is  true,  existed  at  least  from  1830,  but  this  was 
never  an  integral  part  of  the  "College  proper,"  as  the  main  institution  came 
to  be  called.  A  Law  School  was  established  in  1842,  Normal  and  Agricul- 
tural Departments  were  organized  in  1852,  a  Department  of  Military 
Science  was  added  in  1868,  and  a  Medical  Department  in  1871.  The 
broadening  of  the  course  of  instruction  by  the  addition  of  these  various 
departments  gradually  emphasized  the  need  of  some  distinctive  name  for  the 
"College"  itself.  It  is  not  until  1870,  however,  that  we  find  the  use  of  the 
expression  "Department  of  Literature,  Science,  and  the  Arts."  In  the  cata- 
logue of  the  next  year  no  distinctive  name  is  employed,  but  from  1872,  with 
the  introduction  of  the  course  in  medicine,  the  term  "Collegiate  Department" 
appears.  In  1894  the  appointment  of  a  Dean  of  the  Departments  of  Liberal 
Arts  fixed  the  official  usage  for  all  the  sub-departments  included  in  the 
College  proper. 

Three  periods  in  On  the  lines  of  educational  policy,  the  history  of  the  course  of  instruc- 
tion in  the  Collegiate  Department  of  Indiana  L^niversity  may  be  divided  into 

instruction.  •>          •> 

three  rather  clearly  defined  periods.  From  1831,  when  our  earliest  records 
begin,  through  1840,  the  course  of  instruction  was  formed  with  reference  to 
having  the  student  pursue  "one  principal  study  at  a  time."  This  was  the 
rule,  though  exceptions  were  admitted  "to  suit  the  convenience  of  the  stu- 
dent." 1 


Catalogue  for  1840. 

36 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

From  the  middle  of  President  Wylie's  administration,  beginning  with  the 
year  1841,  a  change  of  policy  appears.  The  new  plan  may  be  considered  as 
announced  in  the  following  statement,  which  appears  in  the  University  cata- 
logue for  1841  and  for  several  years  thereafter: 

The  object  of  the  course  of  instruction  given  to  the  undergraduates  in  this  Insti- 
tution is  to  commence  a  thorough  course,  arid  continue  the  same,  so  far  as  the  time 
of  the  students'  residence  at  the  University  will  permit.  The  course  prescribed  em- 
braces those  subjects  only  which  ought  to  be  understood  by  everyone  who  aims  at 
a  liberal  education.  The  principles  of  science  and  literature  are  the  common  basis 
of  all  high  intellectual  attainments.  They  supply  that  furniture,  and  discipline,  and 
elevation  to  the  mind,  which  are  the  best  aids  in  the  study  of  any  profession.  The 
student,  in  further  prosecution  of  his  professional  career,  may  enter  a  school  of  Law, 
or  Medicine,  or  Theology.  With  these  the  undergraduate  course  is  not  intended  to 
interfere.  The  object  is,  not  to  teach  what  is  peculiar  to  any  one  of  the  professions, 
but  to  lay  a  foundation  which  is  common  to  all. 

The  following  extract  from  the  catalogue  of  a  few  years  later  also  serves 
to  define  the  new  policy  of  the  institution : 

It  is  the  design  of  the  Faculty  of  the  University  to  maintain  the  highest  standard 
of  education  which  the  state  of  the  country  will  admit.  It  is  an  evil  incident  to  a 
new  state  of  society,  that  young  men,  from  the  want  of  means,  from  haste  to  enter 
professional  life,  and  other  causes,  take  only  a  partial  course  of  study.  But  whatever 
studies  the  student  undertakes,  he  is  required  to  pursue  in  a  rigorously  accurate  and 
thorough  manner.  None  are  permitted  to  graduate  unless  they  have  completed  the 
prescribed  course,  which  is  as  extensive  as  is  usual  in  our  oldest  and  best  established 
American  colleges. 

In  other  words,  while  in  the  first  decade  of  the  recorded  history  of  the 
University,  emphasis  was  laid  on  one  chief  subject  and  on  having  that  done 
well,  in  the  second  period  the  student  was  expected  to  divide  his  attention 
between  several  subjects  of  more  or  less  coordinate  rank.  This  second  tend- 
ency is  responsible  for  the  introduction  into  the  curriculum  of  many  new  lines 
of  work,  and  so  perhaps  forms  the  natural  stage  of  transition  from  a  period 
of  too  great  specialization  to  the  period  in  which  specialization  is  combined 
with  breadth  of  interest. 

37 


Indiana  University 

The  third  period  in  the  development  of  the  University's  educational 
policy  was  not  definitely  inaugurated  until  1887.  An  account  of  its  intro- 
duction and  character  will  he  found  on  a  subsequent  page,  in  its  appropriate 
place. 

Number  of  In  the  early  history  of  the  University  the  academic  year  was  divided  into 

two  sessions,  the  first  commencing  with  the  first  of  November  and  ending 
with  the  last  of  April,  the  second  commencing  with  the  first  of  June  and  end- 
ing with  the  last  of  September.  There  were  thus  two  vacation  periods,  com- 
prising respectively  the  month  of  May  and  the  month  of  October.  Later  the 
two  sessions  were  so  shifted  as  to  bring  the  vacations  in  April  and  in  October 
respectively.  The  three-term  plan  was  introduced  in  1850,  or  possibly  the 
year  before,1  and  has  continued  until  the  present  time.  The  divisions  of  the 
year  were  practically  as  at  present,  except  that  the  "summer  term"  so-called, 
corresponding  to  our  "spring  term,"  was  separated  from  the  winter  term  by  a 
vacation  period  of  about  a  month,  thus  bringing  Commencement  about  the 
middle  of  August  instead  of,  as  at  present,  in  the  latter  part  of  June. 

Number  and  Just  how  many  recitations  a  day  students  were  required  to  attend  during 

the  early  period  of  the  University's  existence  it  is  impossible  to  make  out ; 
but  from  the  year  1841  we  read  in  the  catalogues  the  following  rule:  "Each 
of  the  four  classes  attends  three  recitations  or  lectures  in  a  day."  This  is 
practically  equivalent  to  the  present  requirement  in  number  of  periods,  but 
we  have  no  means  of  determining  what  was  the  length  of  the  recitation 
period  at  that  time.  From  1878  the  number  of  lecture  or  recitation  periods 
a  week  was  raised  from  fifteen  to  twenty,  and  we  read:  "Every  student  is 
required  to  attend  four  recitations  or  lectures  a  day,  unless  specially  ex- 
cused." In  the  first  year  of  President  Jordan's  administration  (1885)  the 
number  of  periods  was  reduced  once  more  to  fifteen;  but  by  a  corresponding 
lengthening  of  the  period  itself  it  was  estimated  not  only  that  no  time  would 
be  lost,  but  that  as  a  matter  of  fact  some  time  would  be  gained.  It  was 
thought,  also,  that  more  could  be  accomplished  in  three  studies  a  day  with 
a  relatively  longer  period  than  in  four  with  the  shorter  period.  In  the 
two  years  1808  and  1899,  in  order  to  make  room  on  Tuesdays  and  Fridays 
for  a  chapel  hour,  the  recitation  period  on  those  days  was  shortened  in  the 

!The  University  catalogue  for  1849  is  missing. 

38 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

morning  to  forty-five  minutes,  while  on  the  other  days  of  the  week  it  remained 
fifty-five  minutes  in  length.  From  1900  the  period  has  been  fixed  uniformly 
at  fifty  minutes,  with  ten-minute  intermissions.  With  the  gradual  introduc- 
tion of  fractional  courses,  moreover,  it  was  found  impracticable  to  insist  on 
the  student  dividing  his  work  so  as  to  bring  exactly  three  recitation  periods 
into  each  day,  consequently  since  1895  the  regular  amount  of  work  has  been 
specified  as  fifteen  hours  a  week,  the  student  being  left  to  distribute  those 
hours  as  he  thinks  best. 

In  the  College  proper,  as  distinguished  from  the  Preparatory  and  other    FIRST  PERIOD 

Departments,  one  uniform  course  of  instruction  of  four  vears  leading  to  the   °FTHECouRSE 

OF  INSTRUCTION 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  was  originally  prescribed  for  all  students  who    (1H31-40). 

were  candidates  for  graduation.  In  the  earliest  form  in  which  it  appears  in 
the  University  catalogue,  namely  in  1831,  the  second  year  of  President 
Wylie's  administration,  this  course  was  as  follows : 

FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

Greek  Testament,  Minora,  Majora  1st  vol.,  Majora  2d  vol.  commenced.  Com- 
positions in  English  and  Latin.  Greek  Theses. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

Majora  finished,  the  Iliad.  Colburn's  Algebra,  Cambridge  Mathematics. 
Compositions  and  themes,  as  in  the  Freshman  Class. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

Mathematics  finished.  Mechanics,  Astronomy,  Physics,  Mathematical  and 
Physical  Geography.  Dissertations,  and  themes  and  compositions,  as  before. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

Moral  and  Mental  Philosophy,  Evidences  of  Christianity  in  connection  with 
Natural  Religion,  Rhetoric,  with  a  review  of  select  portions  of  the  Greek,  Latin 
and  English  Classics,  Logic,  Political  Economy,  Constitution  of  the  United  States. 
Dissertations,  and  composition,  in  English  and  Latin. 

At  the  end  of  the  first  decade  already  referred  to  as  marking  a  distinct 
period  in  the  educational  policy  of  the  University,  namely  in  1840,  the 
course  of  instruction  was  as  follows : 

39 


Indiana  University 


FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Session.  Ovid  (three  first  books  and  thirteenth),  Virgil,  Horace,  Rhetor- 
ical Reading  and  Declamation. 

Second  Sfsn'nni.  Greek  Testament.  Collectanea,  Grsrea  Minorn,  Majora  com- 
menced. Rhetorical  Reading  and  Declamation.  These  are  continued  throughout 
the  Course. 

SOPHOMOHE  CLASS— 

First  Session.    Gra?ca  Majcra  finished,  the  Iliad.  Cicero  de  Oratore. 
Second  Session.    Algebra  (Davies'  Bourdon),  Geometry  (Davies'  Legendre). 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Session.  With  the  Professor  of  Mathematics.  Plane  and  Spherical 
Trigonometry,  Surveying,  Analytical  Geometry.  Differential  and  Integral  Cal- 
culus (Davies). 

With  the  Professor  of  Natural  Philosophy  and  Chemistry.  Heat,  Electricity, 
Galvanism,  Electro-Magnetism  (Turner's  Chemistry),  Statics  and  Dynamics 
(Cambridge  Mechanics). 

Second  Session.  Hydrostatics  and  Hydrodynamics  (Cambridge  Mechanics). 
Optics  (Bache's  Brewster),  Inorganic  and  Organic  Chemistry  (Turner),  Astron- 
omy (Herschel). 

The  instructions  in  the  departments  of  Natural  Philosophy  and  Chemistry 
are  conveyed  in  part  by  Lectures,  with  experimental  illustrations,  but  principally 
by  the  study  of  approved  text-books. 

THE  SENIOR  CLASS 

Spends  the  whole  year  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  President  in  the 
following  Studies: 

Rhetoric,  by  lectures,  with  critical  reference  to  select  portions  of  the  Greek, 
Latin  and  English  Classics,  Blair  and  Campbell  used  as  text-books;  Logic 
(WhatelyK  Mental  and  Moral  Philosophy:  Political  Economy;  Evidences  of 
Christianity;  Constitution  of  the  United  States.  On  all  these  subjects  Lectures 
are  given.  Dissertations  and  Syllabuses  are  required,  and  a  course  of  reading 
pointed  out. 

SECOND  PERIOD  The  year  1841  marks  the  beginning  of  the  period  in  the  history  of  the 

OF  THE  COURSE       University  when,  instead  of  emphasizing  "one  principal  study  at  a  time,"  the 
OF  INSTRUCTION  ,,..,.  ,         '          ..  . . 

(I840-N»5i.  student  was  expected  to  pursue  several  distinct  lines  of  work  01  coordinate 

rank.    From  this  time  until  the  end  of  President  Wylie's  administration  the 
course  of  instruction  shows  comparatively  little  development.     Two  speci- 

40 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

mens  are  subjoined,  the  first  remaining  practically  unchanged  from  1841 
through  1845,  and  the  second  from  1846  through  1848  :• 

FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Session.  Horace's   Odes  and  Epodes;  Jacob's  Greek  Reader;   Fiske's    Course  of  study, 

Classical   Manual,  Part   I;   Grammatical   Exercises  and   Written   Translations;    1840-45. 
Algebra. 

Second  Session.  Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles;  Xenophon's  Anabasis;  Fiske's 

Classical  Manual,  Part  II;    Grammatical  Exercises  and  Written  Translations; 
Davies'  Legendre's  Geometry  and  Trigonometry. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS — 

First  Session.  Folsom's  Livy;  Homer's  Iliad,  commenced;  Classical  Manual, 
Parts  III  and  IV;  Anthon's  Greek  Prosody,  with  Scanning;  Davies'  Surveying 
and  Analytical  Geometry. 

Second  Session.  "Virgil's  Georgics  and  Cicero  de  Officiis;  Homer's  Iliad,  fin- 
ished; Classical  Manual,  Part  V,  with  Ancient  Geography;  Greek  Prosody,  with 
Scanning;  DaAries'  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Session.  Cicero  de  Oratore;  Xenophon's  Memorabilia  of  Socrates; 
Davies'  Descriptive  Geometry;  Cambridge  Mechanics,  Statics  and  Dynamics; 
Turner's  Chemistry;  Heat  and  Electricity;  Blair's  and  Campbell's  Rhetoric,  with 
Lectures. 

Second  Session.  Juvenal  and  Persius,  or  Cicero  de  Senectute  and  Cicero  de 
Amicitia;  ^Eschines  and  Demosthenes  de  Corona;  Cambridge  Mechanics,  com- 
pleted; Inorganic  Chemistry;  Whately's  Logic;  Lectures  by  the  President. 

SENIOR  CLASS — 

First  Session.  Tacitus— History;  Longinus;  Optics.  Bache's  Brewster;  Moral 
Philosophy  and  Evidences  of  Christianity,  with  Lectures  by  the  President. 

Second  Session.  Tacitus — Manners  of  the  Germans,  and  Agricola;  Woolsey's 
Greek  Plays;  Gummere's  Astronomy;  Chemistry  completed:  Say's  Political  Econ- 
omy; Reid's  and  Stewart's  Mental  Philosophy,  with  Lectures;  and  Constitution 
of  the  United  States. 

Declamations,  Essays,  and  Rhetorical  Reading,  by  the  Classes,  on  every  Saturday 
during  the  whole  course. 

The  course  of  instruction  as  it  existed  from  1846  to  1848,  inclusive,  was 
as  follows: 

41 


Indiana  University 


Course  of  study,     FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

1846-48. 

First  Session.    Folsom's  Livy;  Grreca  Majora;   Flake's  Classical  Manual,  Part 

I:  Grammatical  Exercises  and  Written  Translations;  Pierce's  Algebra. 

Second  Sexxion.  Horace— Odes  and  Epodes;  Gnvca  Majora:  Kiske's  Classical 
Manual,  Part  II;  Grammatical  Exercises  and  Written  Translations;  Davies' 
Legendre's  Geometry. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

Firxt  Session.  Horace— Satires  and  Epistles;  Grreca  Majora;  Classical  Mnnual. 
Parts  III  and  IV;  Anthon's  Greek  Prosody,  and  Scanning;  Pierce's  Trigonometry 
and  Surveying,  and  Analytical  Geometry. 

Second  Session.  Plays  of  Terence;  Homer's  Iliad,  or  Odyssey;  Classic  il 
Manual,  Part  V,  with  Ancient  Geography;  Greek  Prosody,  with  Scanning; 
Pierce's  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Session.  Tacitus— History,  and  Manners  of  the  Germans;  Greek  Drama 
—Euripides;  Integral  Calculus,  completed;  Cambridge  Mechanics,  Statics  and 
Dynamics;  Chemistry;  Heat  and  Electricity;  Blair's  and  Campbell's  Rhetoric, 
with  Lectures. 

Second  Session.  Juvenal;  Greek  Drama— Sophocles;  Cambridge  Mechanics, 
completed;  Inorganic  Chemistry;  Whately's  Logic;  Lectures  by  the  Presulisit. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Session.  Cicero — De  Oratore;  Pindar — the  Olympic  and  Pythian  Od.js; 
Optics,  Bache's  Brewster;  Moral  Philosophy,  and  Evidences  of  Christianity,  with 
Lectures  by  the  President. 

^cciniil  Si'xxion.  Captivi  or  Miles  Gloriosus  of  Plautus;  Prometheus  Viuctus 
of  .l^schylus;  Astronomy,  Gummere;  Chemistry,  completed;  Say's  Political  EC  :i- 
omy;  Reid's  and  Stewart's  Mental  Philosophy,  with  Lectures;  and  the  Cons  it u- 
tion  of  the  United  States. 


The  following  course  of  study,  taken  from  the  catalogue  for  1850,  repre- 
sents the  closing  years  of  President  Wylie's  administration  and  shows  mi 
early  stage  of  the  three-term  system : 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


FRESHMAN  CLASS— 


First  Term.     Livy  (Folsom);  Grseca  Majora;  Fiske's  Classical  Manual,  Part    Course  of  study 
I;  Bourdon's  Algebra  (Uavies);  Grammatical  Exercises  and  Written  Translations. 

Second  Term.  Horace— Odes;  Grseca  Majora;  Fiske's  Classical  Manual,  Part 
II;  Algebra,  completed;  Cieometry  (Davies  and  Legendre);  Grammatical  Exer- 
cises and  Written  Translations. 

Third  Term.  Horace,  continued;  Grseca  Majora;  Classical  Manual,  Part  II; 
Geometry,  completed. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS — 

First  Term.  Horace— Epistles,  and  Art  of  Poetry;  Grseca  Majora;  Classical 
Manual,  Parts  III  and  IV;  Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry  (Davies'  Legendre). 

Second  Term.  Plays  of  Terence;  Homer's  Iliad,  or  Odyssey;  Classical  Manual, 
Parts  IV  and  V;  Greek  Prosody,  and  Scanning;  Surveying  and  Analytical 
Geometry. 

Third  Term.  Plays  of  Terence;  Homer's  Iliad,  or  Odyssey;  Classical  Manual, 
Part  V;  Analytical  Geometry,  completed. 

JUNIOR  CLASS — 

First  Term.  Tacitus— History,  and  Manners  of  the  Germans;  Greek  Drama- 
Euripides;  Cambridge  Mechanics— Statics  and  Dynamics;  Turner's  Chemistry; 
Integral  and  Differential  Calculus  (Davies);  Rhetoric— Blair,  Campbell,  and 
Lectures. 

Second  Term.  Descriptive  Geometry  (Davies);  Greek  Drama— Sophocles;  Cam- 
bridge Mechanics,  completed;  Logic— Whately  and  Lectures;  Moral  Philosophy. 

Third  Term.  Juvenal;  Political  Economy;  Inorganic  Chemistry;  Mental  Phi- 
losophy. 

SENIOR  CLASS — 

First  Term.  Mental  Philosophy,  continued;  Political  Economy,  Lectures 
(Say);  Cicero— De  Oratore;  Pindar— Olympic  and  Pythian  Odes;  Evidences  of 
Christianity. 

Second  Term.  Optics  (Bache's  Brewster);  Moral  Science,  reviewed;  Plautus— 
Captivi,  or  Miles  Gloriosus;  Prometheus  Vinctus. 

Third  Term.  Astronomy  (Gummere);  Chemistry,  completed;  Reviews  and 
catechetical  examinations  on  the  main  branches  of  the  course;  Declamations, 
Essays,  Dissertations,  and  Rhetorical  Reading  and  by  the  Senior  Class,  Original 
or  Extemporaneous  Speaking. 

43 


Indiana  University 

Under  President  Ryors,  who  held  office  for  one  year  only  (1853),  the 
course  of  instruction  followed  closely  that  laid  down  in  the  later  years  of  his 
predecessor. 

Beginning  of  the  From   1845  a  considerable  body  of  undergraduates  had  been  grouped 

Scientific  course.  together  in  the  catalogue  as  "Scientific  and  Irregular."  In  1854,  the  first 
year  of  President  Daily's  administration,  there  appears  for  the  first  time  a 
list  of  studies  which  "constitutes  the  course  necessary  to  be  completed  in 
order  to  receive  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science."  This  degree  was  first 
granted  in  that  year ;  but  the  course  of  instruction  leading  to  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Science  was  not  graded  until  1860.  From  this  time  on,  however, 
it  appears  as  a  three-year  course,  and  it  is  probable  that  before  this  time  it 
had  covered  the  same  period. 

The  following  courses  of  instruction  for  1856  are  representative  of  the 
work  under  the  administration  of  President  Daily,  for  both  the  regular  and 
the  scientific  students: 

REGULAR  COURSE 

Regular  Course       FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Livy;  Grneca  Majora;  Grecian  and  Roman  Antiquities  (Bojessen); 
Algebra  (Davies'  Bourdon);  Latin,  Greek,  and  English  Composition;  Elocution. 

Second  Term.  Livy;  Grseca  Majora;  Grecian  and  Roman  Antiquities;  Algebra, 
completed;  Geometry  (Davies'  Legendre)  commenced;  Latin,  Greek,  and  English 
Composition;  Elocution. 

Third  Term.  Horace— Odes;  Grseca  Majora:  Geometry  (Davies'  Legendre) 
completed;  History;  Latin,  Greek,  and  English  Composition;  Elocution. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS — 

First  Term.  Horace— Satires  and  Epistles;  Grseca  Majora;  Application  of  Al- 
gebra to  Geometry;  Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry  (Davies);  Mensural  ion 
(Davies);  Descriptive  Geometry  (Davies)  commenced;  History;  Elocution;  Latin, 
Greek,  and  English  Composition. 

Second  Term.  Horace,  finished;  Grseca  Majora;  Descriptive  Geometry;  Sur- 
veying (Davies);  Analytical  Geometry  (Davies),  commenced;  English  Litera- 
ture; Latin,  Greek,  and  English  Composition;  Elocution. 

Third  Term.  Terence;  Homer's  Iliad  or  Odyssey;  Analytical  Geometry: 
Rhetoric  (Blair);  Latin,  Greek,  and  English  Composition;  Elocution. 

44 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Rhetoric  (Campbell);  Elements  of  Criticism;  Chemistry  (Silli- 
man);  Tacitus;  Greek  Drama;  Analytical  Geometry,  completed;  Calculus  (Davies), 
commenced;  Exercises  in  English  Composition  and  Declamation. 

Second  Term.  Mental  Philosophy  (Reid);  Mechanics  (Bartlett),  commenced; 
Agricultural  Chemistry;  Juvenal;  Greek  Drama;  Calculus;  Exercises  in  English 
Composition  and  Declamation. 

Third  Term.  Mechanics,  completed;  Logic  (Whately);  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity; Juvenal;  Greek  Drama;  Calculus,  finished;  English  Composition  and 
Declamation. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Twin.  Geology;  Physiology;  Political  Economy  (Say);  Moral  Philosophy 
(Stewart),  commenced;  Cicero— De  Oratore;  Pindar;  Civil  Engineering;  English 
Composition  and  Declamation. 

Second  Term.  Moral  Philosophy,  completed;  International  Law  (Kent);  Acous- 
tics and  Optics  (Bartlett);  Selections  from  the  Latin  and  Greek  Classics;  German 
Language  and  Literature  (optional);  Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  (optional); 
English  Composition  and  Declamation. 

Third  Term.  Astronomy;  Constitution  of  the  United  States  (Story);  Butler's 
Analogy;  Selections  from  the  Latin  and  Greek  Classics;  French  Language  and 
Literature  (optional);  Hebrew  Language  and  Literature  (optional);  English  Com- 
position and  Declamation. 


The  following  studies  constitute  the  course  necessary  to  be  completed  in  order  to 
graduation  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science: 

Mitchell's  Ancient  and  Modern  Geographies;  Butler's  English  Grammar;  Scientific  Course 
Ray's  Arithmetic;  Algebra  (Davies'  First  Lessons);  Wilson's  American  History;  in  I856- 
English  Composition  and  Declamation;  Algebra  (Davies'  Bourdon);  Geometry 
(Davies'  Legendre);  Application  of  Algebra  to  Geometry;  Plane  and  Spherical 
Trigonometry  (Davies);  Descriptive  Geometry  (Davies);  History;  Analytical  Ge- 
ometry (Davies);  English  Literature;  Rhetoric;  Elements  of  Criticism;  Chemistry 
(Silliman);  Calculus  (Davies);  Mental  Philosophy  (Reid);  Geology  (Hitchcock); 
Agricultural  Chemistry;  Physiology;  Mechanics  (Bartlett);  Logic  (Whately); 
Evidences  of  Christianity;  Political  Economy  (Say);  Moral  Philosophy;  Survey- 
ing (Davies);  Civil  Engineering;  International  Law;  Acoustics  and  Optics  (Bart- 
lett); Astronomy;  Constitution  of  the  United  States;  Butler's  Analogy. 

45 


Indiana  University 

President  Lathrop's  administration  covered  only  the  one  year  1860. 
Km m  this  year  through  1807  the  Scientific  Course  comprised  simply  the 
^Regular  Course  except  the  classics,  and  was  designed  to  cover  three  years. 
The  following  is  the  complete  course  as  announced  in  1860: 


The  course  in       FRESHMAN  CLASS— 
I860. 


First  Term.  Xenoplion— History;  Sallust;  Greek  Grammar;  Algebra;  Ge- 
ometry. 

Second  Term.  Xenoplion:  Horace— Odes;  Grammar;  Algebra;  Geometry; 
Trigonometry. 

Third  Term.  Herodotus;  Horace— Odes;  Grammar;  General  History;  Naviga- 
tion; Surveying;  Latin.  Greek  and  English  Composition,  and  Elocution,  through- 
out the  year. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Analytical  Geometry;  History  of  the  United  States;  Plato,  or 
Xenophon's  Memorabilia;  Greek  Syntax;  Horace— Satires;  Antiquities. 

Second  Term.  Calculus;  English  Analysis;  Demosthenes,  or  Thucydides; 
Horace— Epistles;  Antiquities;  Syntax. 

Third  Term.  Mechanics;  English  Composition;  Homer's  Iliad;  Livy.  or 
Terence;  Antiquities;  Syntax;  Composition  and  Elocution  throughout  the  year. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.    Mental  Philosophy;  Chemistry;  Sophocles;  Tacitus. 
Second  Term.     Logic;  Chemistry;  Physiology;  Euripides;  Juvenal. 
Third  Term.     Rhetoric;  Acoustics;  Optics;   Descriptive  Geometry;   Elocution 
and  Composition  throughout  the  year. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

Fir**  Term.    Criticism;  Ethics;  Astronomy. 

Second  Term.  Geology;  Civil  Polity;  Constitutional  and  International  Law; 
Christian  Evidences. 

Third  Term.  Political  Economy;  English  Literature:  Longinus.  or  Pindar; 
Cicero— De  Oratore:  Composition  and  Elocution  each  term. 

The  course  of  instruction  for  the  year  1865,  which  follows,  differs  from 
that  just  given  in  some  respects,  and  may  be  taken  as  representative  of  the 
period  from  1861  through  1867,  which  fell  in  the  first  half  of  the  administra- 
tion of  President  Xutt : 

46 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

REGULAR  COURSE 
FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Term.     Livy;  Grseca  Majora,  Vol.   I;  Grecian  and  Roman  Antiquities;    The  course  in 
Latin  and  Greek  Composition;  Algebra  (Robinson's  Second  Part);  Introduction 
to  English  Composition  (Quackenbos). 

Second  Term.  Odes  of  Horace;  Grseca  Majora;  Grecian  and  Roman  Antiqui- 
ties; Algebra  (Robinson),  completed;  Geometry  (Robinson),  commenced;  English 
Composition  (Quackenbos). 

Third  Term.  Horace's  Odes;  Grseca  Majora;  Geometry  (Robinson),  completed; 
History  of  the  United  States. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles;  Grseca  Majora;  Plane  and  Spher- 
ical Trigonometry  (Robinson);  Surveying  begun  (Robinson);  English  Composition. 

Second  Term.  Horace,  finished;  Grreca  Majora;  Surveying  and  Navigation 
(Robinson);  Descriptive  Geometry. 

Third  Term.  Terence;  Homer's  Iliad  or  Odyssey;  Analytical  Geometry  (Rob- 
inson); General  History. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mental  Philosophy  (Haven);  Chemistry  (Stoeckhardt);  Tacitus; 
Greek  Drama;  Calculus  (Robinson),  commenced. 

Second  Term.  Logic  (Coppee);  Juvenal;  Greek  Drama;  Calculus  (Robinson), 
completed;  Organic  Chemistry  (Stoeckhardt);  Physiology. 

Third  Term.  Juvenal;  Greek  Drama;  Natural  Philosophy  (Snell's  Olmsted); 
Esthetics  (Moffatt),  and  Lectures;  Civil  Polity,  Lectures. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Political  Economy  (Way land);  Natural  Philosophy  (Snell's  Olm- 
sted); Cicero— De  Oratore;  Pindar;  Elements  of  Criticism  (Kames). 

Second  Term.  Ethics  (Lectures);  Astronomy  (Olmsted);  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity (Lectures);  Selections  from  the  Latin  and  Greek  Classics. 

Third  Term.  Constitutional  and  International  Law;  Geology  (Dana's  Text- 
Books);  English  Literature  (Shaw). 

Weekly  exercise  in  Elocution  and  Composition  throughout  the  Course. 

SCIENTIFIC  COURSE 
The  Scientific  Course  is  the  same  as  the  above,  without  the  Ancient  Languages. 

47 


Indiana  University 


25  =  2  Teachers.  5  Courses 


.499 

hours 


..400 

hours 


.300 

hours 


.  200 

hours 


.  too 
hours 


Admission  of 
Women  to  the 
University 
(1*67). 


DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE   COURSE   OF   INSTRUCTION  - 1 

A  change  of  far-reaching  importance  was  made  in  the  policy  of  the 
institution  in  1867,  when  women  were  admitted  to  equal  privileges  with  men. 
Indiana  University  was  the  first  State  University  to  adopt  this  policy, 
and  among  institutions  of  collegiate  rank  was  preceded  in  the  establishment 
of  co-education  only  by  Oberlin,  Antioch  and  Fort  Wayne  Colleges.  The 
change  at  Indiana  University  is  described  by  the  late  Professor  Theophilus 


48 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


lish 


HHHlMistory/PoMical 

Science 

3Fme   Arts 

Economics  ^  Social 
Science 

Philosophy 
Pedagogy 


,5  Courses 


of  teachmq  done  by  Greek  Professor 


hours 


-500 

hours 


-400 

hours 


-300 

hours 


-200 
hours 


-100 

hours 


DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  COURSE  OF  INSTRUCTION  -  II 

A.  AVylie,  in  his  'Indiana  University,  Its  History  from  1820  to  1890/  as 
follows : 

In  the  preceding  year,  Mr.  [Isaac]  .Tenkinson,  then  of  Allen  County,  a  member  of 
the  Board  of  Trustees,  offered  a  resolution  to  admit  females  to  the  same  studies 


(5) 


..020 

...ooor" 
hours 


...700 

hours 


Mathematics 

Astronomy  and 

Mechanics 

Physics 

Chemistry 

E Geology  and 
Geography 

Zoology 
Botany 


%:•  4  =2  Teachers.  4 Courses. 


.600 

hours 


3OG 
hours 


..400 

hours 


.300 
hour.5 


.zoo 
hours 


.100 
hours 


DEVELOPMENT   OF  THE    COURSE    OF   INSTRUCTION  -  III 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


.and  the  same  standing  as  the  males.  For  some  time  before  this,  the  subject  "The 
co-education  of  the  sexes,"  had  been  agitated  in  various  educational  conventions,  and 
Mr.  Jenkinson  was  a  strong  advocate  in  its  favor.  Co-operating  with  others  like- 
minded,  he  had  been  instrumental  in  opening  the  Fort  Wayne  Female  College  to 
males.  The  other  members  of  the  University  Board  were  not  prepared  for  the  inno- 
vation; no  member  but  himself  approved  of  the  resolution  presented.  At  a  subse- 
quent meeting.  Judge  Rhoads  offered  a  substitute  for  this  resolution  of  Mr.  Jenkinson, 
proposing  to  admit  females  to  partial  rights  and  privileges,  but  this  was  not  agreed 
to  by  the  Board.  The  original  resolution  was  then  pressed,  and  about  the  same  time 
a  petition  was  presented  by  Miss  Sarah  P[arkc]  Morrison,  asking  that  the  law  of  the 
University  should  be  so  changed  that  females,  with  regard  to  their  studies  and 
privileges,  should  be  put  on  the  same  footing  as  the  males.  This  request  of  Miss 
Morrison,  coining  when  the  question  was  before  the  Board,  had,  without  doubt,  influ- 
ence in  the  Board's  deciding  in  favor  of  Mr.  Jenkinson's  resolution.  The  motion, 
however,  was  carried  only  by  a  majority  of  one  —  four  in  favor,  three  against  it. 
Miss  Morrison,  who  knew  nothing  of  the  agitation  of  this  question  by  the  Board, 
received  a  reply  to  her  petition  that  the  laws  of  the  University  with  regard  to  this 
matter  required  no  change,  and  that  its  doors,  with  all  its  rights  and  privileges, 
were  open  to  females.  Miss  Morrison  then  entered  the  Sophomore  Class  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  next  year,  1808-9;  and  about  nine  weeks  after,  a  number  of  young 
ladies  entered  the  Freshman  Class;  and  before  the  end  of  the  second  term  there  were 
twelve  female  students.1 

In  1868  the  Scientific  Course  was  lengthened  to  four  years  and  given  a    Coordination  of 
separate  schedule  of  study.     This  was  in  accordance  with  a  notice  given  in    f"en!:ifi1c^nd 

J  Classical  Courses 

the  catalogue  of  the  preceding  year  :  "The  .  .  .  course  of  study  may  be  (1868). 
modified  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  at  their  coming  session,  since  the  Legis- 
lature, at  their  last  session,  have,  by  an  appropriation  of  eight  thousand 
dollars  per  annum,  greatly  increased  the  resources  of  the  University.  Some 
new  chairs  Avill  likely  be  established,  and  the  corps  of  instructors  enlarged, 
and  the  facilities  for  education  multiplied." 

The  regular  course  also  at  this  time  received  the  designation  "classical," 
by  which  term  the  course  in  languages  continued  to  be  known  until  the  defi- 
nite introduction  in  1887  of  the  "major  subject"  system.  During  the  ten 
years  ending  with  1877,  the  Scientific  Course  and  the  Classical  Course  stood 
side  by  side  as  parallel  and  of  coordinate  rank.  As  representing  this  period, 


iTheophilus  A.  Wylie,  Indiana  University:    Its  History  from  1820  to  1890  (Indianapolis,  1890), 
pp.  74-75. 

51 


Indiana  University 

two  tables  of  courses  are  subjoined,  one  for  the  year  1870,  and  the  other  for 
the  year  1875: 

CLASSICAL  COURSE 

Classical  Course     FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Greek— Xenophon's  Anabasis  (Boise):  Greek  Grammar  and  Com- 
position (Hartley's  Grammar).  Latin— Livy,  Latin  Composition.  Mathematics- 
Algebra  (Ray). 

Second  Term.  Greek— Xenophon's  Cyropspdia,  or  Isocrates'  Orations;  Greek 
History  (Smith).  Latin— Cicero  or  Ovid:  Roman  Antiquities.  Mathematics— Alge- 
bra, completed;  Geometry  (Ray),  commenced. 

Third  Term.  Greek— Herodotus;  Greek  Antiquities  and  Literature  (Bojessen). 
Latin — Odes  of  Horace;  Roman  Antiquities  and  Literature  (Bojessen).  Mathe- 
matics—Geometry, completed.  Physiology. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Greek— Homer's  Iliad  (Boise).  Latin— Horace's  Satires  and  Epis- 
tles. Mathematics— Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry  (Loomis);  Surveying  com- 
menced. English  Composition  (Quackenbos). 

Second  Term.  Greek— Plato's  Crito  and  Phredo.  Latin— Cicero.  Mathematics 
—Surveying  and  Navigation  completed;  Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis)  begun. 
English  Composition  (Quackenbos). 

Third  Term.  Greek— Demosthenes.  Latin— Cicero.  Mathematics— Analytical 
Geometry  completed.  English  Synonyms  and  Sentential  Analysis. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mental  Philosophy  (Haven),  and  Lectures.  Greek— Theocritus, 
Bion,  or  Moschus.  Latin— Tacitus  or  Juvenal.  Chemistry— Inorganic  (Stoeck- 
hardt's).  Mathematics— Calculus  (Loomis). 

Second  Term.  Logic  (Coppee).  Greek— Sophocles'  CEdipus  Tyrannus.  Latin- 
Juvenal  or  Pliny.  Natural  Philosophy— Mechanics  (Olmsted)  begun-.  Chem- 
istry—Organic (Stoeckhardt). 

Third  Term.  Constitutional  Law  and  Civil  Polity,  with  Lectures.  Greek- 
Euripides'  Medea.  Latin— Plautus  or  Terence.  Natural  Philosophy— Mechanics 
completed.  Hydrostatics  and  Pneumatics. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Moral  Science  (Way land)  with  Lectures.  Criticism— Kames' 
Elements.  Greek— Pindar.  Natural  Philosophy— Acoustics,  Optics,  Electricity. 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry)  and  Lectures.  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity (Lectures).  Latin— Selections  from  the  Latin  Classics.  Astronomy 
(Loomis). 

Third  Term.  International  Law  (Halleck).  Astronomy  completed.  Geology 
(Dana).  English  Literature. 

SCIENTIFIC  COURSE- 
FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Term.    Mathematics— Algebra  (Ray).    Latin— Livy.     History.  Scientific  Course 

Second  Term.     Mathematics— Geometry  (Ray)  begun.     Latin— Cicero  or  Ovid.    in  1870. 

History. 

Third  Term.      Mathematics— Geometry   completed.      Latin— Odes   of   Horace, 

Classical  Antiquities.     Physiology.     History. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Trigonometry— Plane  and  Spherical  (Loomis).  Latin,  or  Modern 
Languages.  Botany  and  Physical  Geography.  English  Composition  (Quack- 
enbos). 

Second  Term.  Mathematics— Surveying  and  Navigation  (Loomis).  Analytical 
Geometry  (Loomis)  commenced.  Latin  or  Modern  Languages.  Zoology.  Eng- 
lish Composition  (Quackenbos). 

Third  Term.  Mathematics  —  Analytical  Geometry  completed.  Latin  or 
Modern  Languages.  English  Synonyms  and  Sentential  Analysis. 

JUNIOR  CLASS — 

First  Term.  Mental  Philosophy  (Haven)  and  Lectures.  Mathematics— Cal- 
culus (Loomis),  Descriptive  Geometry  (Davies).  Chemistry— Inorganic  (Stoeck- 
hardt). 

Second  Term.  Logic  (Coppee).  Mathematics— Calculus  (Loomis).  Natural 
Philosophy — Mechanics  commenced.  Chemistry — Organic  (Stoeckhardt). 

Third  Term.  Constitutional  Law  and  Civil  Polity,  with  Lectures.  Practical 
Surveying  and  Civil  Engineering.  Natural  Philosophy— Mechanics  completed, 
Hydrostatics  and  Pneumatics. 

53 


Indiana  University 


SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Moral  Science  (Wayland),  with  Lectures.  Criticism— Kames' 
Elements.  Natural  Philosophy— Acoustics,  Optics  and  Electricity  (Olmsted). 

Seeoinl  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry),  with  Lectures.  Evidences  of 
Christianity  (Lectures).  Astronomy  (Loomis)  commenced. 

Third  Term.  International  Law  (Halleck).  English  Literature.  Geology 
(Dana).  Astronomy  completed. 

Weekly  exercises   in   all   classes,   in   Elocution   and  Composition,    throughout  the 
course. 

The  second  pair  of  courses  mentioned  above,  those  for  1875,  represents 
the  work  as  given  in  the  last  year  of  the  administration  of  President  Xntt : 

CLASSICAL  COURSE 

Classical  Course      FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

in  187f>. 

First  Term,  of  reek  —  Grammar  (Hadley);  Boise's  First  Lessons.  Latin- 
Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  Mathematics— Algebra  (reviewed), 
Geometry  (Loomis)  beginning  at  the  fifth  book.  Outline  Histoi-y.  Weekly 
Lectures  in  Physiology  and  Laws  of  Health. 

Second  Term.  Greek— Grammar,  Lessons,  Anabasis  (Boise's  First  Three 
Books)  begun.  Latin— Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  Mathematics- 
Geometry,  and  Plane  Trigonometry  (Loomis).  Outline  History. 

Third  Term.  Greek— Grammar,  Lessons,  Anabasis  (two  books  completed). 
Mathematics — Spherical  Trigonometry,  Surveying  and  Navigation.  Outline  His- 
tory. Latin— Ovid  (Allen  and  Greenough);  Roman  Antiquities.  .Urjl 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

h'irst  Term.  Greek— Herodotus  (Boise  and  Freeman's  Selections),  Grammar, 
Greek  Prose  Composition  (Jones).  Latin— Horace's  Odes,  Prosody.  Mathematics 
—Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis).  English— Rhetoric  (Hart). 

8emiul  Term.  Greek— Odyssey  in  Selections,  Syntax,  Composition.  Latin— 
De  Amicitia.  Chemistry— Organic.  English— Rhetoric  (Hart). 

Third  Term.  Greek— Thucyd ides  in  Selections.  Syntax.  Composition.  Latin- 
Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles,  Prosody.  Chemistry— Organic.  English— Writing 
and  Analysis  of  Style. 

54 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Xenophon  and  Plato  in  Selections,  Syntax,  Composition.  Elo- 
cution. Mental  Philosophy  (Porter)  and  Lectures.  Lucretius,  Calculus,  Analy- 
tical Chemistry,  Drawing,  or  German. 

Second  Term.  Greek— Demosthenes  in  Selections  (Boise),  Exercises  in  Syn- 
tax. Natural  Philosophy — Mechanics.  Mental  Philosophy  finished,  and  Logic. 
Tacitus,  Calculus,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Drawing,  or  German. 

Third  Term.  Greek— Alcestis  of  Euripides  (Woolsey),  Exercises  in  Syntax 
(Boise).  Constitutional  Law  and  Civil  Polity  (Andrews).  Natural  Philosophy 
—Hydrostatics,  Pneumatics,  Acoustics  and  Magnetism.  Mineralogy  and  Litho- 
logical  Geology. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Moral  Science  (Haven)  and  Lectures.  Natural  Philosophy- 
Optics,  Heat  and  Electricity.  Geology— Stratigraphical.  Greek,  German, 
French,  or  Oratory. 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry)  and  Lectures.  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity (Lectures).  Astronomy  (Looniis).  Geology  (Paleontology),  Greek,  French, 
or  German. 

Third  Term.  International  Law  (Halleck),  or  Social  Science.  Astronomy 
completed.  Latin,  Greek,  French,  or  Dynamical  Geology.  English  Literature 
and  Criticism. 

SCIENTIFIC  COURSE 

FRKSHMAN  CLASS— 

First   Term.      Mathematics— Algebra    (reviewed);    Geometry    (Loomis,    begin-    Scientific  Course 
ning  at  fifth  book).    Latin— Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.    German—    ln  1S7i)- 
Grammar    and    Composition;    Otto's    Grammar    commenced.      Outline    History. 
Weekly  Lectures  on  Physiology  and  Laws  of  Health. 

Second  Term.  Mathematics — Geometry  completed,  Plane  Trigonometry 
(Loomis).  Latin— Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  German— Grammar 
and  Composition;  Grammar  and  Preparatory  Course  of  Reading.  Outline  His- 
tory. 

Third  Term.  Mathematics — Spherical  Trigonometry,  Surveying  and  Naviga- 
tion (Loomis).  German— Syntax,  Selections  and  Composition.  Latin— Ovid 
(Allen  and  Greenough).  Outline  History. 


Indiana  University 


Two  lines  of 
transition  to  the 
Third  Period  of 
the  Course  of 
Instruction. 


SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mathematics— Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis).  German— Selec- 
tions from  German  Literature.  English— Rhetoric  (Hart).  Physical  I  Geography. 

Second  Term.  Mathematics— Analytical  Geometry;  Differential  Calculus. 
English— Rhetoric  (Hart).  German— Scientific  Selections;  or  French.  Chemistry 
—Inorganic  (Eliot  and  Storer's  Manual). 

Third  Term.  Chemistry— Organic.  English— Writing  and  Analysis  of  Style. 
German— Scientific  Selections.  Analytical  Chemistry  (Fresenius). 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mental  Philosophy  (Porter)  and  Lectures.  Mathematics— Inte- 
gral Calculus.  Zoology.  Analytical  Chemistry,  Descriptive  Geometry,  Drawing, 
or  Elocution. 

Second  Term.  Mental  Philosophy,  completed.  Logic.  Civil  Engineering 
(Mahan,  revised  by  Wood).  Natural  Philosophy— Mechanics. 

Third  Term.  Constitutional  Law  and  Civil  Polity.  Natural  Philosophy- 
Hydrostatics,  Pneumatics,  Acoustics  and  Magnetism.  Civil  Engineering 
(Mahan,  revised  by  Wood).  Mineralogy  and  Lithological  Geology. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Moral  Science  (Haven)  with  Lectures.  Natural  Philosophy- 
Heat,  Optics  and  Electricity.  Stratigraphical  Geology.  Oratory;  or  History  of 
Civilization. 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry),  with  Lectures.  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity (Lectures).  Astronomy  (Loomis).  Geology— Paleontology. 

Third  Term.  International  Law  (Halleck);  or  Social  Science.  Astronomy, 
completed.  English  Literature  and  Criticism.  Geology — Dynamical. 

The  third  period  in  the  development  of  the  educational  policy  of  the  Uni- 
versity is  one,  as  has  been  stated,  in  which  specialization  is  combined  with  a 
considerable  breadth  of  interest.  The  student  is  expected  fairly  early  in  his 
college  course  to  select  as  his  major  subject  the  work  of  some  one  Department, 
and  from  the  other  Departments  to  elect  a  sufficient  amount  of  work  to  make 
up  the  prescribed  number  of  hours  of  credit  for  graduation. 

This  last  change  in  the  general  educational  policy  of  the  University  seems 
to  have  worked  itself  out  along  two  distinct  lines  which  finally  contributed  to 
a  single  result.  There  was  first  the  gradual  differentiation  of  the  course  of 
instruction  itself  into  several  different  courses,  representing  emphasis  upon 

56 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


Graph      of 

Crop*     of     HO 


NUMBER    OF    INSTRUCTORS,    COURSES, 
AND   HOURS   OF   INSTRUCTION 


different  lines  of  work  to  suit  the 
choice  of  the  student ;  and  secondly, 
the  introduction  and  development  of 
the  elective  system.  It  is  interesting, 
therefore,  to  find  that  in  the  same 
year  in  which  the  course  of  instruc- 
tion itself  begins  to  be  differentiated 
beyond  the  twofold  division  already 
noticed,  we  find  also  the  first  system- 
atic introduction  of  elective  studies. 
This  was  in  1878,  the  third  year 
of  the  administration  of  President 
Moss. 

For  a  period  of  eight  years,  begin-   (1)  Further  dif- 
ning  with  1878  and  ending  with  the   ^tiation of 

the  curriculum. 

first  year  under  President  Jordan, 
we  find  three  parallel  courses  of  in- 
struction. In  1871  German  and 
French  had  ceased  to  be  special  stud- 
ies and  were  incorporated  in  the 
regular  course.  The  Classical  Course  The  three-course 
was  differentiated,  therefore,  into  epoch (1878-86). 
"The  Course  in  Ancient  Classics," 
leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Arts  (B.A.),  and  "The  Course  in 
Modern  Classics,"  which  led  to  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Letters  (B.L.). 
The  Scientific  Course  continued  to 
be  an  independent  course,  leading  to 
the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science 
(B.S.).  In  the  Junior  and  Senior 
years,  moreover,  a  considerable  range 
of  "electives"  was  allowed,  as  is 
shown  in  the  following  table  of 
courses  for  the  year  1880,  which  fair- 
ly represents  this  period : 


57 


Indiana  University 

A.    THE  COURSE  IN  ANCIENT  CLASSICS 

The  curriculum       FRESHMAN"  CLASS— 

Fhst  Term.      Greek— Goodwin's    Grammar,    First    Lessons.      Latin— Cicero's 
|fll  Ancient 
Classics  Course.  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.     Mathematics— Geometry  (Loomis),  beginning 

at  the  fifth  book.    Outline  History.    Weekly  Lessons  in  Elementary  Ethics. 

Second  Term.  Greek— Grammar,  Lessons,  Anabasis.  Latin— Cicero's  Ora- 
tions, and  Latin  Composition.  Mathematics— Plane  Trigonometry  (Loomis). 
Outline  History.  Weekly  Lessons  in  Elements  of  Mental  Philosophy. 

Third  Term.  Greek— Anabasis,  Prose  Composition.  Latin — Ovid  (Allen  and 
Greenough),  Roman  Antiquities.  Mathematics— Spherical  Trigonometry,  Survey- 
ing and  Navigation.  Outline  History.  Weekly  literary  exercises. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Greek— Extracts  from  Xenophon's  Memorabilia,  and  from 
Plato's  Apology,  Crito,  and  Pha?do;  Prose  Composition.  Latin— Horace's  Odes; 
Prosody.  Mathematics— Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis).  Physiology.  Weekly 
literary  exercises. 

Second  Term.  Greek— Iliad,  Composition.  Latin— Quintilian.  English- 
Rhetoric  (Hart).  Chemistry— Inorganic. 

Third  Term.  Greek— Iliad,  Composition,  Essays  on  Epic  Poetry.  Latin — 
Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles,  Prosody.  English— Rhetoric  (Hart).  Chemistry- 
Organic. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Psychology— Porter's  Elements.  Greek— Demosthenes;  Essays 
on  the  Orators.  English— Writing  and  Analysis  of  Style.  Electives— German, 
Latin,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Zoology,  Elocution. 

Second  Term.  Logic— Gilmore's  Outlines.  Greek— Thucydides;  Historical 
Essays.  Natural  Philosophy— Mechanics.  Electives— German,  Latin,  Biology. 

Third  Term.  Moral  Science  (Calderwood).  Greek— Sophocles  or  Aristophanes; 
Essays  on  the  Drama.  Electives— German,  Latin,  Botany.  Political  History, 
Zoology. 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  History  of  Philosophy.  Natural  Philosophy— Optics,  Heat,  and 
Electricity.  Electives— French,  Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Geology. 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (I'erry's  Introduction);  Lectures.  English 
Classics.  Astronomy  (Loomis).  Electives— Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Ora- 
tory. 

58' 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


Third  Term.     Social  Science.     Astronomy  (Loomis).     History  'of  the  English 
Language.    Electives—  Greek,  Latin,  Political  History. 

B,    THE  COURSE  IN  MODERN  CLASSICS 

FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First    Term.      Mathematics—  Geometry    (Loomis,    beginning    at    fifth    book).    The  curriculum 


Latin—  Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.     French—  Grammar  and  Com-    in 

(6)  Modern 
position.     Outline  History.     Weekly  lessons  in  Elementary  Ethics.  Classics  Course 

Second  Term.  Mathematics—  Plane  Trigonometry  (Loomis).  Latin—  Cicero's 
Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  French—  Grammar  and  Composition;  pre- 
paratory Course  of  Reading.  Outline  History.  Weekly  lessons  in  Elements  of 
Mental  Philosophy. 

Third  Term.  Mathematics  —  Spherical  Trigonometry,  Surveying  and  Naviga- 
tion. French—  Syntax,  Selections  and  Composition.  Latin—  Ovid  (Allen  and 
Greenough).  Outline  History.  Weekly  Literaiy  Exercises. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mathematics  —  Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis)^  German  —  Gram- 
mar and  Composition.  *Latin  —  Horace's  Odes;  Prosody.  Physiology!  Weekly 
Literaiy  Exercises. 

.  Second   Term.      English—  Rhetoric    (Hart).      German—  Composition;    Reading. 
Chemistry  —  Inorganic  (Eliot  and  Storer's  Manual).     *  Latin  —  Quintilian. 

Third  Term.  Chemistry—  Organic.  English—  Rhetoric  (Hart).  German  — 
Selections;  Syntax;  Composition.  *  Latin—  Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles; 
Prosody. 

JUNIOR  CLASS  — 

First  Term.  Psychology—  Porter's  Elements.  German—  Selections.  English 
—Writing,  and  Analysis  of  Style.  Electives—  Latin,  Mathematics,  Analytical 
Chemistry,  Zoology,  Elocution. 

Second  Term.  Logic  —  Gilmore's  Outlines.  German  —  Scientific  Selections. 
Natural  Philosophy.  Electives—  Latin,  Drawing,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Biology. 

Third  Term.  Moral  Science  (Calderwood).  German.  Electives—  Latin,  Botany, 
English,  Political  History,  Zoology. 


*During  the  Sophomore  year,  the  student  in  this  Course  may,  if  he  prefer,  substitute  (for  the 
Latin)  the  Greek  of  the  Freshman  year. 

59 


Indiana  University 


SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  History  of  Philosophy.  Natural  Philosophy.  Electives— Latin. 
German,  Political  History,  Geology. 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry's  Introduction),  with  Lectures. 
English  Classics.  Astronomy  (Loomis).  Electives— Latin,  German,  Political  His- 
tory, Paleontology. 

Third  Term.  Social  Science.  Astronomy,  completed.  History  of  the  English 
Language.  Electives— Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Comparative  Anatomy. 


The  curriculum 
in  1880: 
(c)  Scientific 
Course. 


C.    THE  COURSE  IX  SCIENCE 

FRESHMAN  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mathematics — Geometry  (Loomis,  beginning  at  fifth  book). 
Latin— Cicero's  Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  French  or  Greek.  Outline 
History.  Weekly  Lessons  in  Elementary  Ethics. 

Second  Term.  Mathematics— Plane  Trigonometry  (Loomis).  Latin— Cicero's 
Orations,  and  Latin  Composition.  French  or  Greek.  Outline  History.  Weekly 
Lessons  in  Elements  of  Mental  Philosophy. 

Third  Term.  Mathematics.  Spherical  Trigonometry,  Surveying  and  Naviga- 
tion. French  or  Greek.  Latin— Ovid  (Allen  and  Greenough).  Outline  History. 
Weekly  Literary  Exercises. 

SOPHOMORE  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Mathematics— Analytical  Geometry  (Loomis).  German  or  Greek. 
*Latin— Horace's  Odes;  Prosody.  Physiology. 

Second  Term.  English— Rhetoric  (Hart).  German  or  Greek.  Chemistry— In- 
organic (Eliot  and  Storer's  Manual).  "Latin— Quintiliari. 

Third  Term.  Chemistry— Organic.  English— Rhetoric  (Hart).  German  or 
Greek.  *  Latin— Horace's  Satires  and  Epistles;  Prosody. 

JUNIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  Psychology— Porter's  Elements.  English— Writing,  and  Analysis 
of  Style.  Electives— Physics,  Descriptive  Geometry,  Analytical  Chemistry, 
Zoology,  Elocution. 

Second  Term.  Logic— Gilmore's  Outlines.  Natural  Philosophy.  Electives — 
Physics.  Drawing,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Biology. 

Third  Term.  Moral  Science  (Calderwood).  Zoology.  Electives— Botany,  Civil 
Engineering.  Analytical  Chemistry,  Mineralogy. 


•If  the  student  in  this  Course  is  taking  the  Modern  Languages  instead  of  Greek,  he  may  now, 
if  he  prefer,  substitute  (for  the  Latin  of  the  Sophomore  year)  the  Greek  of  the  Freshman. 

60 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

SENIOR  CLASS— 

First  Term.  History  of  Philosophy.  Natural  Philosophy.  Geology.  Elec- 
tives— French,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Political  History, 

Second  Term.  Political  Economy  (Perry's  Introduction),  with  Lectures.  Eng- 
lish Classics.  Astronomy  (Loomis).  Electives— Analytical  Chemistry,  Paleon- 
tology. Political  History. 

Third  Term.  Social  Science.  Astronomy,  completed.  History  of  the  English 
Language.  Electives— Analytical  Chemistry,  Comparative  Anatomy,  Political 
History, 

In  1886  a  farther  step  was  taken  towards  the  definite  introduction  of  the   Differentiation 

maior  subiect  system  by  the  differentiation  of  the  course  of  instruction  into   *nto  eight,c 
J        f      J  J  J%  _  Courses  (1886). 

eight  distinct  courses,  divided  into  three  groups  as  follows : 

A.  Classical  or  Language  Courses,  leading  to  the  Degree  of  A.B. 

I.     Course  in  Ancient  Classics. 
n.     Course  in  Modern  Classics. 

B.  Courses  in  History,  Philosophy  and  English  Literature,  leading  to  the  Degree 

of  Ph.B. 

III.  Course  in  English  Literature. 

IV.  Course  in  History  and  Political  Science. 
V.     Course  in  Philosophy. 

C.  Courses  in  Science,  leading  to  the  Degree  of  B.S. 

VI.     Course  in  Mathematics  and  Physics. 
VIE.     Course  in  Biology  and  Geology. 
VIII.     Course  in  Chemistry. 

The  germ  of  the  elective  system — the  second  factor  in  the  growth  of  the  (2)  The  Elective 
curriculum  to  its  present  form — appeared  in  1868,  when  students  were  sys 
allowed  an  option  between  Modern  Languages  and  Latin.  With  more  or 
less  variation,  such  options  continued  to  be  permitted  until  1875.  In  this 
year  the  range  of  options  was  considerably  widened  in  the  Junior  and  Senior 
years.  The  following  tables  show  the  development  of  this  optional  or  narrow 
elective  system  from  1875  through  1884.  In  the  first  part  of  this  period  two, 
and  in  the  second  part  three;  courses  of  instruction  were  offered.  The  num- 
bers in  parentheses  refer  respectively  to  the  year  (Freshman,  Sophomore, 
Junior  or  Senior,)  and  term  of  the  course;  the  subjects  named  are  those 
offered  as  electives  for  students  of  that  year  and  term. 

61 


Indiana  University 

1875-1877 
I.     CLASSICAL  COURSE 

Elections  per-         1875.  (HE,  1).     Lucretius,  Calculus,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Drawing,  or  German, 
(in,  2).     Tacitus,  Calculus,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Drawing,  or  German. 
(IV,  1).     Greek,  German,  French,  or  Oratory. 
(IV,  2).     Geology,  (Paleontology,)  Greek,  French,  or  German. 
(IV,  3).     Latin,  Greek,  French,  or  Dynamical  Geology. 

1876.  Same  as  for  1875. 

1877.  (Ill,  2).     Tacitus,  Calculus,  Analytical  Chemistry,  or  German. 
(IV,  1).     Greek,  German,  French,  or  Oratory. 

(IV,  2).     Geology,  (Paleontology,)  Greek,  French,  or  German. 
(IV,  3).     Latin,  Greek,  French,  or  Dynamical  Geology. 

II.     SCIENTIFIC  COURSE 

1875.  (Ill,  1).     Analytical  Chemistry,  Descriptive  Geometry,  Drawing,  or  Elocution. 
(IV,  1)..    Oratory,  or  History  of  Civilization. 

1876.  Same  as  for  1875. 

1877.  (Ill,  1).     Analytical  Chemistry,  Descriptive  Geometry,  or  Elocution. 
(IV,  1).     Oratory,  or  History  of  Civilization. 

(IV,  3).     International    Law    (Woolsey),  Social  Science,  or  Constitution  of   the 
United  States. 

1878-1884 
I.     THE  COURSE  IN  ANCIENT  CLASSICS 

Elections  per-         1878.  (Ill,  1).     German,  Latin,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Zoology,  Elocution. 

mitted,  1878-84:  (111,2).     German,  Latin,  English. 

(a)  In  Ancient 

Classics  Course.  I***'  ")•     German,  Latin,  Botany,  Political  History. 

(IV,  1).     French,  Greek,  Latin,  English,  Political  History. 
(IV,  2).     Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Oratory. 
(IV,  3).     Greek,  Latin,  Political  History. 

1879.  Same  as  for  1878,  with  the  omission  of  English,  which  was  made  a  part  of  the 

prescribed  work. 

1880.  Same  as  for  1878,  except  as  follows: 
(HI,  2).     For  English  substitute  Biology. 
(HI,  3).     Add  Zoology. 

(IV,  1).     Substitute  Geology  for  English. 

62 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

1881.  (Ill,  1).     German,  Latin  (Pliny's  Letters),  Analytical  Chemistry,  Zoology,  Eng- 

lish Language.    (English  forms  also  a  part  of  the  prescribed  work. ) 
'III,  2).     German,  Latin  (Livy),  Biology. 

(Ill,  3).     German,  Latin  (Mostellaria  of  Plautus),  Botany,  Political  History. 
(IV,  1).     French,  Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Comparative  Anatomy. 
(TV,  2).     Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Anglo-Saxon. 
(IV,  3).     Greek,  Latin,  Political  History,  Philosophy  of  English  Literature. 

1882.  Same  as  for  1881,  except  as  follows: 

(IH,  3).     For  Botany  substitute  Physiology. 

1883.  Same  as  for  1882,  except  as  follows: 

(IH,  1).     For  Latin  (Pliny's  Letters)  substitute  Latin  (Cicero's  Letters). 
(HI,  2).     For  Latin  (Livy)  substitute  Latin  (De  Natura  Deorum),  and  add  Eng- 
lish Classics. 

1884.  Same  as  for  1883,  except  as  follows: 
(HI,  1).     Add  Physics. 

(Ill,  3).     Add  Physics. 

(IV,  1).     For  elective  studies  substitute  prescribed  Greek. 

(IV,  2).     Add  History  of  Philosophy. 

H.     THE  COURSE  IN  MODERN  CLASSICS 

1878.  (HI,  1).     Latin,  Mathematics,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Zoology,  Elocution.  Elections  per- 

(IH,  2).     Latin,  Drawing/Analytical  Chemistry,  English.  mitted,  1878-84: 

(6)  In  Modern 
(HI,  3).     Latin,  Botany,  English,  Political  History.  Classics  Course 

(IV,  1).     Latin,  German,  Political  History. 
(IV,  2).     Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Geology. 
(IV,  3).     Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Geology. 
During  the  Sophomore  year,  moreover,  the  student  was  permitted,  if  he  chose, 

to  substitute  for  the  Latin  the  Greek  of  the  Freshman  year.     This  option 

was  allowed  through  1884. 

1879.  Same  as  for  1878,  with  the  omission  of  English  in  HI,  2.     The  English  in  this 

course  was  not  added  to  the  prescribed  studies. 

1880.  Same  as  for  1879,  except  as  follows: 
(HI,  2).     Add  Biology. 

(IH,  3).  Add  Zoology. 

(IV,  1).  Add  Geology. 

(IV,  2).  For  Geology  substitute  Paleontology. 

(IV,  3).  For  Geology  substitute  Comparative  Anatomy. 

63 


Indiana  University 

1881.  (Ill,  1).     Latin,  Mathematics,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Zo6logy,  English  Language. 
(HI,  2).     Latin,  Drawing,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Biology. 

(Ill,  3).     Latin,  Botany,  English,  Political  History. 

(IV,  1).     Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Comparative  Anatomy. 

(IV,  2).     Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Anglo-Saxon 

(IV,  3).     Latin,  German,  Political  History,  Philosophy  of  English  Literature. 

1882.  Same  as  for  1881. 

1883.  Same  as  for  1881,  except  as  follows: 
(HI,  2).    Add  English  Classics. 

1884.  Same  as  for  1883,  except  as  follows : 
(UI,  1).     Add  Physics. 

(HI,  3).     Add  Physics. 

(IV,  2).     Add  History  of  Philosophy. 

III.     THE  COURSE  IN  SCIENCE 

Elections  per-        1878.      (I,  1,  2,  3).     French  or  Greek. 

mitted,  1878-84:  (II>  lf  2,  3).     German  or  Greek. 

Course  ^^'  ^'     German    or   Greek,    Physics,    Descriptive    Geometry,    Analytical 

Chemistry,  Zoology,  Elocution. 

(IH,  2).     German  or  Greek,  Physics,  Drawing,  Analytical  Chemistry. 
(HI,  3).     German   or  Greek,    Botany,    Surveying,    Analytical    Chemistry, 

Geology. 

(IV,  1).    French,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Political  History. 
(IV,  2).     Analytical  Chemistry,  Geology,  Political  History. 
(IV,  3).     Analytical  Chemistry,  Geology,  Political  History. 
If  the  student  in  this  course  took  Modern  Languages  instead  of  Greek,  he  was 
permitted  also  to  substitute  for  the  Latin  of  the  Sophomore  year  the  Greek 
of  the  Freshman  year.     This  option  was  allowed  through  1883. 

1879.  Same  as  for  1878. 

1880.  Same  as  for  1878,  except  as  follows : 

(III,  1,  2,  3).     Omit  the  option,  German  or  Greek. 
(HI,  2).     Add  Biology. 
(IH,  3).     For  Surveying  substitute  Civil  Engineering ;  for  Geology  substitute 

Mineralogy. 

(IV,  2).     For  Geology  substitute  Paleontology. 
(IV,  3).     For  Geology  substitute  Comparative  Anatomy. 

64 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


1881.      (I,  1,  2,  3). 

(II,  1,  2,  3). 

(Ill,  1). 

(in,  2). 

(Ill,  3). 
(IV,  1). 
(IV,  2). 

(IV,  3). 


1882. 
1883. 


1884. 


Same  as  for 

Same  as  for 

(I,  1,  2,  3). 

(HI,  2). 

Same  as  for 

(HI,  3). 


French  or  Greek. 

German  or  Greek. 

Physics,  Descriptive  Geometry,  Zoology,  English  Language. 

Drawing,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Biology. 

Civil  Engineering,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Mineralogy. 

French,  Analytical  Chemistry,  Political  History,  English  Classics. 

Analytical   Chemistry,    Paleontology,    Political   History,    Anglo- 
Saxon. 

Analytical  Chemistry,    Comparative  Anatomy,  Political   History, 

Philosophy  of  English  Literature. 
1881. 
1881,  except  as  follows: 

For  French  or  Greek  substitute  German  or  Greek. 

Add  English  Classics. 
1883,  except  as  follows: 

Add  Physics. 


In  the  year  1885  the  elective  plan  was  modified  somewhat  and  the  range   Extension  of 
of  elective  studies  very  considerably  increased.     This  widening  of  the  range  Sys 

of  electives  was  another  step  from  the  old  option  scheme  to  the  completely 
developed  elective  system  which  was  instituted  in  the  following  year.  Ac- 
cording to  the  plan  adopted  in  1885,  a  list  of  elective  studies  was  offered, 
from  which  in  the  Junior  and  Senior  years  a  student  in  any  one  of  the  three 
courses  might  select  any  two  subjects  he  chose.  The  other  one  of  the  three 
subjects  required  to  make  up  his  full  work  was  prescribed  for  him.  The  list 
of  electives  thus  offered  is  appended  below.  The  studies  marked  with  an 
asterisk  (*)  extended  through  two  or  three  terms  each,  and  students  electing 
any  one  of  these  received  no  credit  for  the  work  until  the  whole  was  finished. 


First  Term 
Greek 

Greek  Philosophy 
Latin 

English  Orations 
English  Language 
Comparative  Study  of  the 

English  Drama 
French  (beginning)* 
French  Classics 

(6) 


Second  Term 
Greek 

Greek  Philosophy 
Latin 

American  Orations 
English  'Language 
Comparative  Study  of  Epic 

Poetry 

French  (beginning)* 
French  Classics 

65 


Third  Term 
Greek 

Greek  Philosophy 
Latin 

English  Classics 
English  Language 
Comparative    Study  of 

Lyric  Poetry 
French  (beginning)* 
French  Classics 


Indiana  University 


Completion  of 
development  of 
the  Elective  sys- 
tem, 188CJ-87. 


First  Term 

German  (beginning)  * 
German  Classics 
Spanish;  Italian 
Sanscrit  * 

Romanic  Philology 
Political  History  of  the 

United  States 
Special  History 
Psychology;  Ethics 
Philosophy 
Calculus 
Quaternions 
Physics  (Elementary)* 
Physics  (Special)* 
Chemistry  (Elementary)* 
Chemistry  (Qualitative 

Analysis) 
Chemistry  (Quantitative 

Analysis) 
Geology  (Special) 
Paleontology 
Botany  (Special) 
Biology 

Comparative  Anatomy 
Zoology  (Special) 


Second  Term 

German  (beginning)* 

German  Classics 

Sanscrit  * 

^Esthetics 

Special  History 

Sociology;  Political  Econ- 
omy 

History  of  Philosophy 

Philosophy 

Engineering  * 

Physics  (Elementary)* 

Physics  (Special) 

Chemistry  (Elementary)* 

Chemistry  (Qualitative 
Analysis) 

Chemistry  (Quantitative 
Analysis) 

Mineralogy 

Geology  (Elementary)* 

Geology  (Special) 

Paleontology 

Botany  (Special) 

Biology 

Comparative  Anatomy 

Zoology  (Special) 


Third  Term 
German  (beginning)* 
German  Classics 
Anglo-Saxon 
Norse 
Sanscrit  * 
Special  History 
International  Law 
Logic;  Rhetoric 
Philosophy  of  Rhetoric 
Engineering  * 
Surveying 
Physics  (Special) 
Chemistry  (Qualitative 

Analysis) 
Chemistry  (Quantitative 

Analysis) 
Meteorology 
Physiology 

Geology  (Elementary)* 
Geology  (Special) 
Paleontology 
Botany  (Elementary) 
Botany  (Special) 
Comparative  Anatomy 
Special  Zoology 
Biology 


Although,  as  has  been  said,  the  major  subject  system  was  not  fully  ma- 
tured until  1S8T,  the  elective  feature  of  the  system  was  complete  in  1886,  in 
so  far,  namely,  that  when  the  student  was  permitted  to  make  an  election  at 
all,  he  was  allowed  to  choose  from  the  entire  range  of  subjects  offered  for 
instruction.  All  that  was  then  needed  to  bring  the  major  subject  system  to 
its  present  form  was  to  remove  the  restriction  which  permitted  students  to 
take  elective  studies  only  in  their  Junior  and  Senior  years,  in  conjunction 
with  other  studies  prescribed  for  those  years.  The  student  is  now  expectc'l  t<> 
choose  his  elective  work  with  the  advice  of  the  head  of  the  Department  in 
which  he  has  elected  his  major  subject,  in  order  that  it  may  bear  some  useful 


G6 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

relation  to  his  other  work;  and  he  is  advised  to  leave  this  general  elective 
work  to  the  latter  part  of  his  course,  as  "he  will  then  know  better  what  to 
choose  and  be  better  prepared  for  the  work  he  may  elect;"  but  with  the 
exception  of  these  general  directions  he  is  allowed  a  range  of  freedom  as  wide 
as  possible  in  shaping  his  own  course  and  in  making  his  work  center  about 
some  one  selected  line  of  study.  Under  the  new  system  the  student  is  re- 
quired to  complete  as  much  work  for  graduation  as  under  the  old,  but  within 
the  course  itself  greater  flexibility  is  made  possible,  both  in  the  kind  of  stud- 
ies pursued  and  in  the  relations  of  various  subjects  to  one  another  in  the 
matter  of  their  sequence.1 

The  more  narrow  use  of  the  term  "department"  to  designate  all  the 
courses  of  instruction  offered  within  some  one  general  field,  as  a  subdivision 
of  the  general  "Collegiate  Department,"  did  not  become  fixed  until  1875.  It 
is  only,  however,  since  1887  that  the  organization  of  instruction  in  the  liberal 
arts  has  been  strictly  on  the  departmental  plan. 

SPECIAL  STUDIES 

From  the  time  of  the  earliest  recorded  history  of  Indiana  University 
until  the  final  development  of  the  departmental  system,  certain  subjects  out- 
side the  regular  curriculum  are  indicated  in  the  University  catalogues,  which 
may  be  taken  by  the  student  as  special  studies.  In  some  cases  students  select- 
ing such  subjects  were  required  to  have  completed  certain  preliminary  work, 
and  in  other  cases  no  such  requirement  was  made. 

In  the  first  catalogue  of  the  University,  for  1831,  it  is  announced  that  Hebrew  and 

"To  such  as  may  wish  it,  and  who  have  completed  the  Latin  Course,  Hebrew   French  made 

Special  Studies, 

and  French  will  be  taught."    Whether  these  two  subjects  were  offered  contiu-  in  1831. 
uously  through  the  first  ten  years  of  the  University's  history,  it  is  impossible 
now  to  make  out.2     It  is  probable  that  instruction  was  given  at  least  in 
French,  in  which  case  French  has  been  offered  continuously  throughout  the 
history  of  the  University;  it  appears  certainly  from  1837.    ISTo  further  notice 

irThe  results  of  the  elective  system  in  Indiana  University  were  set  forth  by  Professor  Richard 
G.  Boone  in  two  papers  in  the  Educational  Review  (New  York)  for  June  and  September,  1892, 
under  the  title,  'Results  Under  an  Elective  System.' 

2The  University  catalogues  in  this  period  are  missing  for  the  years  1832,  1833,  1834,  1836  ; 
and  the  catalogues  that  remain  are  not  clear  in  their  specifications  regarding  extra  subjects. 

67 


Indiana  University 


100^ 


'50% 


too1 


.   50' 


COMPARATIVE  INCREASE  SINCE   1890  IN  THE  NUMBER  OF  UNDERGRADUATE 

STUDENTS   ENROLLED 


DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS,  INDIANA  UNIVERSITY 
COLLEGES  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 


The  standard  of  comparison  is  the  enrollment  for  1890.  To  construct  the  curve,  the  ex- 
cess of  enrollment  for  a  given  year  over  the  enrollment  for  1890  was  found,  and  the  ratio  of 
this  to  the  standard  gave  the  ordinate  for  that  year. 

Number  of  Undergraduate  Students  enrolled  in  the  Departments  1390  190S 

of  Liberal  Arts,  Indiana  University 309  1,139 

Number  of  Undergraduate  Students  enrolled  in  the  Colleges  of  Lib- 
eral Arts  in  the  United  States 45,574  88,979 


68 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

is  made  of  Hebrew,  however,  until  1841,  from  which  time  it  stands  as  an 
extra  or  special  study  until  1855,  after  which  it  disappears  from  the  pages  of 
the  catalogue. 

From  1841,  also,  dates  separate  instruction  in  civil  engineering  and  book-   Engineering  and 
keeping.     The  full  announcement  is  as  follows :     "In  addition  to  the  regular   bookkeePin& 

.  .  .        .  ....        added,  in  1841 ; 

course  of  instruction  here  given,  such  as  desire  it  may  receive  instruction  in 
Hebrew,  French,  Civil  Engineering,  and  Bookkeeping.  And  to  those  who 
wish  to  accomplish  themselves  in  Civil  Engineering,  an  opportunity  is 
offered,  during  the  summer  session,  of  exercising  under  the  direction  of  the 
Professor,  in  practical  operations  with  the  theodolite,  compass  and  level,  and 
in  making  maps  and  draughts  for  bridges,  railroads  and  other  public  works." 
In  the  catalogue  for  1850  the  announcement  of  special  studies  includes  only 
Hebrew  and  French.  The  next  year,  however,  the  announcement  of  all  four 
subjects  is  made  again,  and  so  continues  up  to  and  including  the  year  1853. 
After  this  year  instruction  in  bookkeeping  seems  to  have  been  discontinued 
altogether.  At  the  same  time,  in  accordance  with  a  provision  made  by  the 
Board  of  Trustees  in  1852,  the  work  in  engineering  assumed  a  more  impor- 
tant position  in  connection  with  the  Departments  of  Mathematics  and 
Chemistry. 

In   1854  German  was  introduced   as  a   separate   study,   together  with   German,  in 
French  and  Hebrew,  without  any  extra  expense  to  the  student.     Whether  a    lf?°4;  ^"f,QSpan" 

u  ish,  in  1863. 

separate  fee  had  been  charged  before  this  time  for  instruction  in  the  special 
subjects  does  not  clearly  appear  from  the  catalogues,  but  probably  not. 
German,  French  and  Hebrew  were  offered  as  special  studies  through  1863, 
after  which  Spanish  was  substituted  for  Hebrew. 

In  1868  the  Scientific  Course  was  lengthened  to  four  years  and  placed 
upon  an  independent  basis.  In  this  year,  in  addition  to  being  offered  as 
•special  studies,  "Modern  Languages"  were  made  an  alternative  with  Latin  in 
the  second  year  of  the  Scientific  Course,  and  so  continued  through  1870. 
Probably  there  was  not  much  call  for  the  Spanish,  however,  for  it  is  plain 
that  during  this  time  classes  were  formed  only  in  German  and  French.  The 
•option  here  noted  between  Latin  and  modern  languages  is  the  first  germ  of 
what  later  developed  into  the  elective  system.  Beginning  with  the  year  1871, 
German  and  French  are  regularly  incorporated  in  the  course  of  instruction 
;and  cease  to  be  considered  special  studies. 

69 


Indiana  University 


AOOJ 


•100^ 


COMPARATIVE  INCREASE   SINCE   1890  IN  THE   NUMBER  OF  GRADUATE 
STUDENTS   ENROLLED 

—  —  —    DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS,  INDIANA  UNIVERSITY 

•         COLLEGES  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 

The  standard  of  comparison  is  the  enrollment  for  1890.  To  construct  the  curve,  the  ex- 
cess of  enrollment  for  a  given  year  over  the  enrollment  for  1890  was  found,  and  the  ratio  of 
this  to  the  standard  gave  the  ordinate  for  that  year.  18i>0  j^ 

Number  of  Graduate  Students  enrolled  in  Indiana  University....  12  73 

Number  of  Graduate  Students  enrolled  in  the  Colleges  of  Liberal 

Arts  in  the  United  States 2,176         6,265 

70 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


It  is  worthy  of  note,  in  this  connection,  that  in  1881  instruction,  not 
announced  as  part  of  any  regular  course,  was  given  in  Italian ;  after  this  year 
also  work  in  Spanish  or  Italian  was  offered  as  an  elective  whenever  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  students  applied  for  it.  From  1885,  with  the  introduction  End  of  the 

of  a  wider  range  of  electives,  the  courses  of  instruction  tended  to  become  more    sPecial  studies 

system  (1885). 
flexible,  and  special  studies  ceased,  in  any  formal  way,  to  stand  outside  the 

regular  courses. 


DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS,  INDIANA  UNIVERSITY 
COLLEGES  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 


The  standard  of  comparison  is  the  number  of  members  for  1890.  To  construct  the  curve, 
the  excess  of  membership  for  a  given  year  over  the  membership  for  1890  was  found,  and  the 
ratio  of  this  to  the  standard  gave  the  ordinate  for  that  year. 

Number  in  the  Faculty  of  Indiana  University,  Departments  of  Lib-  1390  1902 

eral  Arts 25  62 

Number  in  the  Faculties  of  Colleges  and  Departments  of  Liberal 

Arts  in  the  United  States  4,509  9,511 


71 


THE  THIRD 
PERIOD  OF  THE 
COURSE  OF  IN- 
STRUCTION (since 
1886). 


Adoption  of  the 
Major  Subject 
system. 


The  Course  as 
outlined  in  1889. 


Indiana  University 

THE  MAJOR  SUBJECT  SYSTEM 

The  major  subject  system  of  instruction,  which  was  the  outcome  of  the 
foregoing  lines  of  development,  was  fully  worked  out  in  1887.  By  that  date, 
the  University  was  organized  on  the  departmental  basis;  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts  (A.B.)  had  become  the  only  degree  offered  in  the  Depart- 
ments of  Liberal  Arts ;  and  the  plan  of  laying  down  a  "course  of  instruction," 
with  specifications  for  each  of  the  four  undergraduate  years,  was  abandoned 
for  a  system  of  "prescribed"  and  "elective  studies"  with  a  "major  subject" 
or  "specialty,"- —  the  whole  constituting  the  University  "requirements  for 
graduation." 

This  last  feature  of  the  plan  resulted  immediately  from  a  report  to  the 
Faculty  by  the  Catalogue  Committee,  under  the  chairmanship  of  Professor 
Hans  C.  G.  von  Jagemann,  which  was  adopted  February  19,  1887.  It  laid 
down,  under  the  four  heads  "General,"  "Special,"  "Collateral,"  and  "Elec- 
tive," the  amount  of  work  required  of  every  candidate  for  graduation ;  and 
added:  "The  above  general  plan  for  the  course  of  study  is  to  go  into  effect 
immediately.  All  questions  concerning  the  adjustment  of  the  present  stu- 
dents to  the  new  course  are  referred,  in  the  case  of  each  student,  to  the 
professor  or  professors  concerned  in  the  adjustment." 

The  following  account  of  the  new  plan,  taken  from  the  University  cata- 
logue for  1889,  may  be  regarded  as  representative  for  the  first  years  of  the 
major  subject  system : 

Every  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  must  complete  the  following 
work: 

GENERAL— 

English,  one  year,  daily.  Mathematics,  one  year,  daily.  Physical  Science 
(Astronomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Geology,  Physics,  Zoology  or  Physiological  Psy- 
chology), three  terms,  daily.  Ancient  or  Modern  Languages,  one  language  two 
years,  or  two  languages  one  year  each,  daily.  English  Prose  Composition  and 
Rhetoric,  three  times  a  week  throughout  the  Sophomore  year. 

SPECIAL— 

Every  student  must  select  for  a  specialty  the  required  work  in  some  one 
department,  extending  over  three  or  four  years. 


72 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


COLLATERAL— 

The  head  of  each .  department  may  lay  out,  in  connection  with  his  course, 
work  in  related  subjects;  such  required  collateral  work  not  to  exceed  six  terms 
of  daily  recitations,  and  to  be  especially  arranged  for  each  student. 

ELECTIVE— 

The  remainder  of  the  student's  work,  six  terms  of  daily  recitations,  he  may 
himself  elect  from  any  department  in  the  University. 

During  the  Freshman  year,  any  three  of  the  required  general  studies  should  be  Explanation 
taken.  The  selection  of  a  specialty  is  made  at  the  beginning  of  the  Sophomore  year. 
The  order  in  which  the  required  general  and  collateral  studies  shall  be  taken  may 
vary  with  the  conditions  in  the  case  of  each  student.  He  is  to  be  guided  in  this 
matter  by  the  advice  of  the  President,  and,  when  he  has  chosen  his  specialty,  by  the 
professor  in  whose  department  he  desires  to  work.  A  student  may  change  his 
specialty  at  the  end  of  a  term,  provided  he  have  the  consent  of  the  professor  in  charge 
of  the  department  which  he  leaves,  and  also  of  the  one  whose  department  he  wishes 
to  enter.  No  student  will  be  graduated  who  has  not  finished  all  the  work  required 
for  graduation  in  some  one  department,  no  matter  how  much  work  he  may  have  done 
in  other  departments. 

A  student  may  choose  his  specialty  in  any  one  of  the  sixteen  departments  now 
organized.  Each  department  offers  a  four  years'  course  leading  to  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts.  All  the  courses  demand  the  same  preparation  for  admission,  all 
require  four  years  for  completion,  and  all  oblige  the  student  to  follow  some  special 
line  of  study  during  three  or  four  years.  In  each  course  three  daily  recitations  or 
lectures  of  one  hour  each  are  required  weekly,  two  hours  of  laboratory  work  being 
regarded  as  the  equivalent  of  one  hour  of  recitations  or  of  lectures. 

In  the  arrangement  of  the  courses  of  study,  several  principles  have  been  recog- 
nized. The  beginnings  of  any  study  are  easy  compared  with  the  difficulties  the  stu- 
dent meets  after  going  beyond  the  mere  elements  of  his  subject,  hence  a  better 
mental  training  can  be  obtained  from  the  continued  study  of  one  subject  during 
several  years  than  from  the  study  of  various  subjects  for  a  short  period  each.  The 
thorough  study  of  any  subject  is  conducive  to  good  mental  discipline,  therefore  all 
the  departments  should  be  placed  on  the  same  footing.  Moreover,  as  no  two  minds 
:are  alike,  and  as  different  minds  require  different  discipline,  the  student  should  be 
granted  great  freedom  in  the  choice  of  studies,  after  the  completion  of  certain  sub- 
jects necessary  to  all  culture,  and  the  continued  studsr  of  a  specialty,  necessary  to 
•efficient  mental  discipline.  The  educational  value  of  the  element  of  personal  choice, 
on  the  part  of  the  student,  is  also  fully  recognized.  "One  of  the  most  important 

73 


Indiana  University 


Success  of  the 
Major  Subject 
system. 


functions  of  the  school  is  to  place  the  individual  on  his  feet,  to  give  him  the  ability 
of  self-direction."  To  this  end  no  method  is  more  effective  than  a  well-guarded 
elective  system. 

This  plan,  in  its  general  outline,  is  still  in  force,  with  one  change  of 
detail,  and  several  changes  in  terminology.  The  "Collateral"  work  has  been 
abolished  so  as  to  increase  the  amount  of  the  "Elective"  work  ;  and  the  terms 
"General"  and  "Special"  (or  "specialty")  are  now  replaced  by  "Prescribed 
Work"  and  "Major  Subject." 

The  course  of  instruction  as  now  established  is  designed  to  secure  a  funda- 
mental uniformity  in  the  work  of  all  students,  and  at  the  same  time  be 


2?  <  S  SS  S?  !? 

RATIO   OF   STUDENTS  TO   INSTRUCTORS 


DEPARTMENTS  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS,  INDIANA  UNIVERSITY 
COLLEGES  OF  LIBERAL  ARTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 


flexible  and  adaptable  to  the  needs  of  individuals.  An  equal  amount  of 
preparation  for  admission  is  required  of  all  students ;  all  must  take  a  group 
of  similar  prescribed  studies,  amounting  to  about  one-third  of  the  student's 
course ;  all  must  follow  some  special  line  of  study  during  three  or  four  years ; 
and  all  students  meeting  the  University  requirements,  receive  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts.  This  curriculum,  with  its  stress  on  the  major  subject,  has 
now  been  in  operation  for  eighteen  years.  Its  success  has  been  generally  rec- 
ognized by  educators,  and  may  be  attributed  to  three  causes:  the  major 
requirement,  which  gives  to  the  student's  work  continuity  and  consistency; 

74 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

the  flexibility,  which  permits  each  student  to  arrange  his  work  as  may  best 
meet  his  needs  and  requirements  as  he  sees  them;  the  responsibility  thrown 
upon  the  student  in  thus  allowing  him  free  choice  of  a  third  of  his  work  and 
a  large  measure  of  freedom  even  in  his  prescribed  studies,  since  compara- 
tively few  courses  are  specifically  prescribed. 

From  the  adoption  of  the  curriculum  in  1887  it  has  been  possible  for  the   Recent  changes 
student  to  arrange  certain  special  courses,  such  as  the  old  Premedical  Course   m  the  concePtlon 

of  Major  Subject, 

(see  p.  178),  which  gave  the  student  second-year  standing  when  he  entered  a   and  of  Depart- 
medical  school.     In  recent  years,  however,  there  has  been  a  tendency  toward   ment- 
a  greater  variety  in  combination.    This  tendency  has  received  official  recogni- 
tion, so  that  the  term  "major  subject"  has  now  a  somewhat  broader  meaning. 
The  major  subject  may,  as  hitherto,  consist  of  three  or  four  years  of  continu- 
ous work  in  some  one  department  of  the  University ;  but  it  may  also  consist  of 
the  same  amount  of  work  in  one  of  the  Schools  of  the  University,  or  in  cer- 
tain correlated  groups  of  courses  chosen  from  the  two  or  more  departments, 
and  leading  to  a  definite  end,  as  for  example  a  vocation  in  life. 

With  this  change  in  the  conception  of  "major  subject,"  has  come  a  change 
in  the  use  of  the  term  "department."  The  term  still  represents  an  instruc- 
tional and  administrative  unit  in  the  University  organization,  but  in  the  case 
of  some  departments  (for  example,  Fine  Arts),  the  instruction  offered  does 
not  constitute  a  major  subject  group  of  studies ;  conversely,  as  has  just  been 
stated,  certain  major  subjects,  as  now  recognized,  fall  not  in  one  but  in  two  or 
more  departments.  Such  cases,  however,  are  exceptions ;  and  the  general 
rule  still  is,  that  each  department  offers  instruction  which  may  be  chosen  by 
students  as  a  major  subject. 


75 


Indiana  University 

DEPARTMENTS  AS  NOW  CONSTITUTED 

A  list  of  the  Departments  of  Liberal  Arts,  as  organized  in  the  University 
at  the  present  time,  together  with  a  brief  description  of  the  aims,  methods 
and  facilities  for  work  in  each,  is  given  below. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  GREEK -A  RECITATION   ROOM 


1.    Department 
of  Greek. 


The  courses  in  Greek  are  designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  two  classes  of 
students:  first  and  primarily,  those  who  desire  a  knowledge  of  the  Greek 
language  and  literature;  secondly,  those  whose  time  is  too  limited  for  this, 
but  who  wish  to  know  something  of  the  language  and  literature  as  supple- 
mentary to  their  other  studies. 

76 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

To  fulfill  the  first  purpose,  graded  courses  are  offered  which  lead  the 
student  from  the  elements  of  the  language,  through  Xenophon's  Anabasis  and 
Hellenica,  Homer's  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  the  lyric,  dramatic  and  bucolic  poets, 
the  historians  and  orators,  the  philosophers,  the  Greek  Testament  and  Church 
Fathers,  to  the  Graduate  Seminary,  which  is  designed  for  those  who  are 
specialists  in  Greek,  and  intend  to  become  teachers  of  the  subject.  In  all  of 
the  more  advanced  classes  regular  lectures  are  given  on  the  literature  and 
antiquities. 

To  meet  the  requirements  of  the  second  class  of  students,  courses  are  pro- 
vided in  Greek  words  in  English,  and  in  Greek  literature  in  English.  The 
former  is  a  brief  course  in  Greek,  designed  to  facilitate  the  understanding  of 
scientific  and  philosophical  terms  and  other  English  words  of  Greek  origin. 
The  latter  is  conducted  by  means  of  lectures  on  the  history  of  Greek  litera- 
ture from  Homer  to  Theocritus,  with  special  reference  to  the  needs  of  the 
general  student.  Reading  of  the  best  available  English  translations,  and 
constant  attention  to  works  in  modern  literature  which  were  inspired  by 
Greek  models,  are  features  of  this  work. 

The  Department  is  well  equipped  for  doing  thorough  and  scholarly  work.; 
The  library  consists  of  about  two  thousand  well  selected  books  covering  the 
entire  fields  of  philology,  literature  and  art,  and  advanced  students  are 
allowed  the  privilege  of  admission  to  the  book-stacks  for  purposes  of  research. 
The  Department  owns  one  of  Walger's  famous  models  of  the  Athenian  Acrop- 
olis, besides  numerous  plaster  casts  and  busts,  the  number  of  which  is  being 
increased  from  year  to  year.  Besides  several  large  and  particularly  fine 
Braun  photographs,  the  number  of  smaller  photographs  of  landscapes,  sites, 
architectural  remains  and  ancient  works  of  art,  is  now  upwards  of  six 
hundred.  The  Department  also  owns  a  stereopticon  and  has  about  five  hun- 
dred slides  illustrative  of  the  various  phases  of  Greek  life,  landscape, 
and  art. 

The  purpose  underlying  the  work  in  Latin  is,  in  general,  to  give  the   2.   Department 
student  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  civilization  of  Rome  and  its  relation  to   of  Latin- 
the  civilization  of  our  own  time.     A  knowledge  of  the  Latin  language  is  the 
first  essential  in  this  investigation,  and  claims,  of  course,  a  large  share  of  the 
student's  time,  because  the  sources  can  be  appreciated  fully  only  by  those  who 

77 


Indiana  University 

can  deal  with  them  directly.  A  small  part  only  of  the  students  of  Latin  take 
the  full  work  offered  in  the  Department,  but  the  courses  are  arranged  with 
the  idea  of  making  even  the  earliest  work  of  interest  and  practical  value  to 
the  student.  The  six  years'  work  is  divided  into  three  parts  of  two  yc;irs 
each:  (1)  the  foundation  courses;  (2)  the  intermediate  courses;  (3)  the 
special  courses. 


UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY  — A   PORTION  OF  THE  GENERAL  READING  ROOM 

The  foundation  courses  form  the  preliminary  work  of  students  who  make 
Latin  their  major  subject,  or  the  full  work  of  those  who  take  Latin  merely 
to  satisfy  the  language  requirement  for  graduation.  As  the  latter  class  of 
students  far  outnumbers  the  former,  the  effort  is  made  to  give  them  a  first- 
hand knowledge  of  the  best  portion  of  the  best  authors  in  connection  with  the 

78 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

language  drill  which  is  believed  to  be  a  valuable  means  of  training  the  mental 
faculties.  Three  hours  a  week  are  devoted  for  two  years  to  the  reading  of 
one  of  the  longer  orations  of  Cicero,  a  book  of  Livy,  a  play  of  Terence, 
selected  odes  of  Horace,  selected  letters  of  Pliny,  the  Agricola  or  Germania 
of  Tacitus.  The  remaining  two  hours  are  devoted  in  the  first  year  to  discip- 
linary drill  upon  the  Latin  sentence — one  hour  to  the  systematic  study  of  the 


UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY -CATALOGUING  ROOM 

new  Latin  syntax,  one  hour  to  composition  based  upon  the  prose  authors  read. 
In  the  second  year  the  composition  is  continued  for  one  hour  a  week,  the 
second  hour  being  given  to  a  study  of  the  private  life  of  the  Romans. 

The  intermediate  courses  complete  the  work  of  those  who  make  Latin 
their  major  subject,  and  are  planned  to  give  the  student  the  general  survey 

79 


Indiana  University 

of  Latin  literature  that  is  necessary  for  the  special  courses  which  are  to 
follow,  together  with  an  elementary  knowledge  of  the  subjects  of  paleography, 
criticism,  epigraphy  and  the  philology  of  the  Latin  tongue.  To  this  end,  a 
choice  is  offered  each  year  of  a  three-hour  course  in  prose  and  poetry,  and  in 
alternate  years  of  the  authors  of  the  Republic  and  the  Empire.  Fixed 
courses,  regularly  repeated,  are  given  in  the  history  of  literature,  the  history 
of  the  language,  the  use  of  manuscripts,  and  the  reading  of  inscriptions. 
Students  are  taught  the  use  of  a  library,  and  are  made  familiar  with  the 
primary  and  secondary  sources  of  knowledge.  Those  who  complete  these 
courses  are  recommended  with  confidence  for  positions  as  teachers  of  Latin 
in  secondary  schools. 

The  special  courses  are  offered  to  graduate  students  only,  and  to  those 
who  expect  to  make  the  study  of  Latin  their  life  work.  The  effort  is  made 
to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  present  position  of  the  several  disciplines  of 
philology,  to  familiarize  him  with  modern  methods  of  research,  and  to  fit  him 
to  undertake  intelligently  investigations  of  his  own.  The  University  is  now 
well  supplied  with  the  material  for  the  study  of  the  language  and  life  of 
Rome,  and  the  courses  offered  aim  to  utilize  this  equipment. 

3.   Department  Courses  are  offered  in  this  Department  in  French,  Spanish,  and  Italian. 

of  Romance  Lan- 


jn  j^gj^h  ^he  work  for  the  first  two  years  is  prescribed  ;  it  is  entirely  lin- 
guages. 

guistic,  the  study  of  literature  being  deferred  until  the  third  and  fourth  years. 

After  two  years  of  training  the  student  is  allowed  to  choose  his  courses. 
During  the  first  year  much  attention  is  given  to  pronunciation.  Oral  drill  is 
insisted  upon,  but  conversation  is  not  emphasized.  The  aim  of  the  second 
year's  work  is  to  give  the  student  a  fair  reading  knowledge  of  the  language. 
The  study  of  grammar  is  continued  and  a  course  in  translation  is  offered 
which  contains  the  largest  possible  variety  of  literary  French.  The  courses  in 
literature  are  so  arranged  as  to  cover  the  seventeenth  and  eighteenth  cen- 
turies and  the  greater  part  of  the  nineteenth.  The  purpose  of  the  work  in 
these  courses  is  primarily  to  enable  the  student  to  distinguish  and  to  enjoy  the 
best  that  is  in  French  literature,  and  secondarily  to  give  him  knowledge  of 
the  history  of  the  literature.  In  pursuance  of  the  first  object  a  large  number 
of  literary  masterpieces  are  read  in  whole  or  in  part,  and  the  best  criticism 
dealing  with  them  is  studied.  The  other  end  is  attained  through  lectures  and 

80 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

frequent  references  to  works  contained  in  the  library.  Courses  in  advanced 
composition,  sight  reading  and  Old  French  are  also  offered.  In  Spanish  and 
Italian  two  courses  are  offered  in  each.  In  the  course  in  advanced  Spanish 
various  authors  are  read.  The  advanced  course  in  Italian  is  devoted  to  the 
study  of  Dante. 

The  elementary  courses  in  German  are  intended  to  give  the  student  a  4.  Department 
command  of  the  language,  more  as  an  approach  to  the  literature  than  for  the 
sake  of  conversational  ability.  This  practical  control  of  the  language  being 
taken  for  granted,  the  more  advanced  courses  are  intended  to  interpret  the 
language,  the  literature,  and  the  general  culture  of  Germany  to  the  student, 
so  that  he  may  be  led  to  a  sympathetic  appreciation  of  the  German  spirit  and 
what  this  spirit  has  contributed  to  modern  civilization. 

The  study  of  the  literature  is  made  central,  at  least  during  the  under- 
graduate course.  To  emphasize  the  various  important  aspects  of  this  study, 
the  courses  offered  are  organized  on  three  different  bases — historical,  bio- 
graphical, and  critical.  Under  the  first  head,  a  cycle  of  courses  is  intended 
to  afford  both  a  rapid  survey  of  the  entire  history  of  German  literature,  and 
a  somewhat  more  detailed  examination  of  important  periods  or  movements, — 
in  each  case,  with  the  reading  and  discussion  of  representative  works  that  will 
illustrate  the  leading  topics  of  the  historical  treatment.  Under  the  second 
head,  a  series  of  courses  treat  as  a  unit  the  life-work  of  a  few  of  the  greatest 
individual  authors.  Under  the  third  head,  the  purpose  is  to  give  the  student 
an  introduction  to  the  methods  and  principles  of  criticism  and  literary 
research.  In  all  these  courses,  the  attempt  is  made  to  relate  the  literature 
studied  to  the  other  great  national  literatures,  ancient  and  modern,  with 
which  a  comparison  may  most  profitably  be  made. 

Parallel  with  the  courses  in  literature,  language  courses  are  offered 
throughout  the  undergraduate  period,  intended  to  give  the  student  greater 
facility  in  writing  and  speaking  the  language,  and  a  better  knowledge  of  the 
formal  structure  and  idiomatic  usage  of  modern  German.  The  more  strictly 
philological  study  of  German — the  history  of  the  language  and  the  study  of 
its  older  historic  forms — is  considered  as  essentially  graduate  work.  The 
philological  courses  in  Germanic  Languages,  formerly  divided  between  the 
Departments  of  English  and  German,  are  now  given  by  a  single  instructor  in 

(7)  81 


5.    Department 
of  English. 


Indiana  University 

the  Department  of  English.  A  short  Teachers'  Course  is  given,  for  the 
discussion  of  books  and  methods  for  the  teaching  of  German,  and  of  the 
relation  of  German  to  the  other  subjects  of  instruction  in  secondary  schools. 
The  University  Library  contains  a  good  collection  of  books  for  the  study 
of  German  philology  and  literature,  and  a  list  of  twenty-six  literary  and 
philological  periodicals,  pertaining  altogether  or  in  part  to  this  Department. 
Five  instructors  devote  their  entire  time  to  the  teaching  of  the  German  lan- 


A   WALK   IN   THE    UNIVERSITY   CAMPUS 

guage  and  literature;  and  most  of  the  time  of  a  sixth  instructor  is  given  to 
the  courses  in  Germanic  Philology. 

The  work  of  the  Department  of  English  falls  into  three  natural  divi- 
sions —  language,  rhetoric,  and  literature. 

An  elementary  knowledge  of  English  philology  is  regarded  as  essential 
to  the  student  who  would  master  the  spirit  of  our  language  and  literature. 

82 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

Each  student,  therefore,  who  makes  a  special  study  of  English  is  required 
to  take  at  least  one  linguistic  course,  Old  English.  Courses  in  Gothic,  Old 
English  poetry,  Middle  English,  the  history  of  the  language,  Old  High 
German,  and  an  introduction  to  the  science  of  language  based  on  the  com- 
parative philology  of  Greek  and  Latin,  are  also  offered ;  and  courses  in 
Old  Norse,  Middle  High  German,  and  Old  Saxon  are  listed  in  this  Depart- 
ment, though  not  at  present  offered. 


A   WALK  IN  THE   UNIVERSITY  CAMPUS 

In  rhetoric,  or  composition,  the  object  is  to  teach  the  student  to  express 
himself  effectively.  The  regular  work  begins  with  a  course  in  narration, 
description,  and  exposition.  This  is  required  of  all  students  who  make 
English  their  major  subject.  Students  who  distinguish  themselves  in  this 
class  may  be  admitted  into  an  advanced  course,  which  has  as  its  specific 
purpose  to  stimulate  original  production  on  the  part  of  those  who  appear 

83 


Indiana  University 

to  have  some  literary  instinct.  Under  the  head  of  rhetoric  comes  also  a 
course  in  the  theory  of  teaching  composition  and  literature.  This  course 
is  open  to  all  students  who  have  taught  English  or  who  intend  to  teach 
it,  and  the  discussion  of  problems  and  the  exchange  of  views  and  experiences 
have  proved  valuable  to  the  University  in  bringing  it  into  closer  contact 
with  the  high  schools  of  the  State.  Courses  in  public  speaking — debate 
and  the  more  formal  address — are  offered.  The  University  does  not  strive 
to  produce  "orators,"  but  encourages  its  students  to  learn  to  express  them- 
selves in  public  easily  and  unostentatiously. 

In  literature,  the  Department  offers  courses  covering  the  more  important 
epochs  and  authors.  An  elementary  course  in  Milton,  Shakespeare  and 
modern  novels  leads  the  student  to  the  study  of  drama,  poetry  and  fiction. 
Accompanying  this  are  elementary  courses  in  American  literature,  in  Ten- 
nyson, Browning,  and  Matthew  Arnold,  in  Shakespeare,  and  in  Chaucer, 
Spenser,  and  Milton.  The  critical  study  of  poetry  begins  in  the  second 
year.  Wordsworth,  Coleridge,  Byron,  Shelley,  and  Keats  are  read.  English 
prose  style — Macaulay,  Be  Quincey,  Carlyle,  Newman,  Arnold — is  made 
the  main  study  of  the  third  year.  Courses  in  eighteenth  century  literature, 
in  textual  criticism,  and  in  metrics,  rank  with  the  work  of  this  year.  The 
fourth  year's  work  deals  with  Elizabethan  and  pre-Shakespearean  drama. 
A  literary  seminary  for  the  encouragement  of  original  research  is  open 
to  graduate  students. 

The  aim  of  the  Department  is  to  give  to  its  students  an  elementary 
knowledge  of  the  development  of  the  language,  a  proficiency  in  the  art  of 
expression,  and  a  genuine  appreciation  of  literature.  These  things  can  not 
be  attained  Avithout  careful  and  sympathetic  study.  Especially  in  the  study 
of  literature  the  student  must  bring  his  intellect  to  bear  on  what  he  reads. 
When  literature  is  understood,  the  love  of  it  will  follow. 

The  Department  hopes  to  send  out  young  men  and  women  of  literary 
insight,  sympathy,  and  judgment ;  to  whom  all  that  is  good  in  literature 
old  and  new  will  constantly  appeal,  and  in  whom  the  forces  that  make 
toward  true  culture  will  find  defenders  discriminating,  ardent,  and  modest. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


The  first  year's  work  of  the  Department  of  History  and  Political  Science   6.    Department 
consists  of  a  term  of  daily  work  each  in  Greek,  Roman,  and  medieval  history, 

J  *  '    Political  Science. 

based  on  such  text-books  as  those  of  Bury  and  Shuckburgh  for  Greece  and 
Rome,  and  supplemented  by  lectures,  collateral  reading,  and  map-drawing. 
For  those  who  are  not  special  students  of  history,  but  wish  to  complete 
the  survey  of  general  history,  a  five-hour  course  is  given  in  the  history 
of  modern  Europe  in  the  Spring  term. 


DEPARTMENT  OF   HISTORY  AND   POLITICAL  SCIENCE- SEMINARY  ROOM 

After  the  first  year's  work,  the  student  taking  history  as  his  major  subject 
may  pursue  either  advanced  courses  in  European  history,  courses  in  Ameri- 
can history,  or  courses  in  political  science.  In  European  history  the  ad- 
vanced work  consists  of  the  following:  a  course  in  modern  Europe  (three 

85 


Indiana  University 

hours  a  "week  throughout  the  year)  ;  a  course  in  the  Renaissance  and  Reform- 
ation (two  hours  a  week  throughout  the  year)  ;  a  course  in  the  political  :m<l 
constitutional  history  of  England  (three  hours  a  week  throughout  the  year)  ; 
and  a  brief  course  in  the  institutions  of  medieval  France.  In  American 
history  a  course  in  colonial  history  to  1750  is  offered,  and  a  general  lecture 
course  covering  the  period  1700-1876,  together  with  a  course  on  American 
diplomatic  history,  1776-1876.  In  political  science  there  are  courses  in 
American  government  and  American  party  machinery ;  in  European  politics ; 
in  international  law ;  and  in  the  history  of  political  ideas,  and  the  theory  of 
the  state. 

Seniors  in  the  Department  are  required  to  take  a  course  in  historical 
method,  and  to  carry  on,  for  at  least  two  terms,  research  work  in  one  of  the 
Seminaries  of  the  Department — in  which  also  graduate  research  work  may 
be  done.  There  are  three  Seminaries  in  history:  one  in  English  history, 
devoted  mainly  to  the  study  of  subjects  connected  with  modern  England ;  a 
Seminary  in  modern  European  history,  in  which  the  topics  are  for  the  pres- 
ent drawn  mainly  from  the  French  Revolution,  and  from  the  history  of 
diplomacy  and  international  law ;  and  a  Seminary  in  American  constitu- 
tional and  political  history.  The  aims  of  the  Department  are  not  merely  to 
teach  the  facts  of  history  and  government,  but  to  inculcate  the  spirit  of 
criticism  and  habits  of  independent  thought  and  work ;  and  in  no  way,  it  is 
believed,  can  this  be  done  so  well  as  by  early  introducing  the  student  to 
research  work  among  the  sources,  under  the  guidance  of  trained  instructors. 

7.    Department  The  work  of  the  Department  of  Economics  and  Social  Science  covers  the 

of  Economics  and   three  closely  related  fields  of  political  economy,  sociology,  and  commerce. 
Social  Science.  •  r  .  tt/J 

The  course  for  students  taking  their  major  subject  in  this  Department  covers 

four  years,  the  first  year's  work  being  taken  in  the  Department  of  His- 
tory and  Political  Science.  In  this  first  year  the  student  is  encouraged  to 
acquire  as  thorough  a  basis  of  historical  and  political  facts  as  possible  which 
may  serve  as  a  preparation  for  the  later  work  in  theory.  In  the  Sophomore 
year  he  takes  up  general  political  economy,  which  is  the  foundation  course  for 
all  succeeding  work  in  the  Department. 

From  this  point,  although  all  "major"  students  are  expected  to  take  most 
of  the  courses  offered,  it  is  possible  to  concentrate  the  interest  on  the  field 

86 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

which  is  particularly  congenial.  In  the  line  of  political  economy  the  sequence 
of  courses  is  usually  commercial  geography,  economic  history,  finance  and 
financial  history,  advanced  economic  and  social  theory,  and  research  work  in 
the  seminary.  The  latter  is  required  of  all  students  who  graduate  in  the 
Department. 


DEPARTMENT    OF  ECONOMICS  AND    SOCIAL  SCIENCE -A  HAND  GRIST-MILL     (PART  OF 
A  COLLECTION  OF  INDIANA  ANTIQUITIES) 

In  sociology  the  foundation  course,  belonging  also  in  the  Sophomore 
year,  is  anthropology.  Here  are  grouped  three  lines  of  study — ethnology, 
primitive  technology,  and  social  origins.  This  is  followed  by  one  year  de- 
voted to  social  pathology,  where  the  work  is  again  divided  into  three  groups — 
charities,  criminology  and  social  problems.  In  the  Senior  year  the  work  is 
the  same  as  that  in  political  economy. 

87 


Indiana  University 

For  students  who  expect  to  enter  business  as  a  career  a  special  curriculum 
is  provided.  The  purpose  is  to  group  together  the  courses  offered  by  this  and 
other  Departments  so  as  to  provide  a  line  of  work  which,  while  its  cult u re- 
value is  thought  to  be  equal  to  that  of  the  ordinary  college  course,  will  give  a 
practical  training  for  business  life.  These  general  courses  are  supplemented 
by  certain  semi-technical  courses  designed  particularly  to  meet  the  needs  of 
such  students.  Of  this  nature  is  the  work  in  commercial  law,  business  organ- 
ization and  management,  transportation,  accounting  and  insurance.  To  stu- 
dents who  complete  the  commercial  course,  a  special  certificate,  in  addition  to 
the  ordinary  diploma,  is  given. 

The  Department  at  present  provides  one  year  of  graduate  study.  While 
the  graduate  student  is  expected  to  take  certain  regular  courses,  the  chief 
stress  is  laid  on  research.  The  Department  is  well  supplied  with  materials 
for  advanced  work  on  state  and  local  finance,  industrial  organization,  munic- 
ipal problems  and  charitable  and  correctional  agencies. 

The  purpose  of  the  Department's  work  is  to  prepare  students  for  law, 
journalism,  business  and  the  public  service.  In  the  earlier  undergraduate 
years  the  student  is  not  encouraged  to  a  narrow  specialization.  In  the  Senior 
year,  however,  it  is  believed  that  he  may,  with  profit,  devote  most  of  his  time 
to  work  in  this  field. 

s.    Department  The  first  year  of  work  in  the  Department  of  Philosophy  consists  of 

'sophy.  courses  in  psychology,  logic  and  ethics.  These  offer  the  student  a  general 
introduction  to  the  fields  of  psychology  and  philosophy.  The  second  year 
is  devoted  to  experimental  psychology  and  a  laboratory  study  of  the  nervous 
system.  The  psychological  laboratory  occupies  four  large  and  fourteen  small 
rooms  of  special  construction.  Among  the  rooms  designed  for  special  uses 
are  a  large  dark-room  for  experiments  on  vision,  equipped  with  large  iris- 
diaphragm,  arc  light,  and  heliostat  attachments;  a  sound-proof  room  for 
the  study  of  minimal  auditory  sensations;  three  small  double  rooms  pro- 
viding convenient  isolation  of  subjects  during  experiments  on  reaction-time, 
circulation,  etc.  The  laboratory  is  supplied  throughout  with  water,  »-as. 
and  electric  light  and  power,  and  has  apparatus  for  both  practice  and  research 
courses.  An  aviary,  an  incubator  and  brooder,  quarters  for  small  animals, 
Artificial  nests  for  ants,  etc.,  and  other  facilities  for  the  study  of  compara- 

88 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHILOSOPHY- MAIN  LECTURE   ROOM 


DEPARTMENT  OF   PHILOSOPHY- MAIN  ROOM  OF   NEUROLOGICAL  LABORATORY 


Indiana  University 

tive  psychology  are  also  included.  The  workshop  of  the  psychological  lab- 
oratory is  equipped  with  two  photographic  dark-rooms;  an  electric  motor; 
a  Reed  lathe,  with  screw-cutting  and  gear-cutting  attachments,  and  the  nec- 
essary tools  for  work  in  wood  and  metal;  it  is  used  both  for  repairing  old 
and  constructing  new  apparatus.  The  laboratory  of  neurology  contains  a 
large  number  of  charts,  a  series  of  models  of  the  nervous  system,  including 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHILOSOPHY- PREPARATION  ROOM  IN  NEUROLOGY 

Auzoux  models  of  brain,  eye,  and  ear;  Ziegler  models  of  the  embryology  of 
the  human  brain;  a  series  of  human  and  animal  brains;  dissecting  outfits; 
microtomes,  microscopes,  and  other  appliances  necessary  to  the  study  of 
the  structure  and  functions  of  the  nervous  system. 

During  the  third  and  fourth  years  the  student  may  choose  between 
courses  in  philosophy  and  those  in  psychology.  The  courses  in  philosophy 
include  the  history  of  philosophy  (which  covers  two  years),  an  introduction 

90 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

to  philosophy,  the  philosophy  of  evolution,  the  philosophy  of  religion,  and 
advanced  ethics.  The  lines  of  advanced  psychology  include  hypnotism  and 
suggestion,  mental  pathology,  advanced  comparative  psychology,  the  psychol- 
ogy of  religion  and  systematic  psychology.  During  the  past  year  a  Philoso- 
phy Club,  open  to  Seniors  and  graduates  in  the  Department,  has  held  fort- 
nightly meetings  for  the  informal  discussion  of  the  philosophical  and  ethical 
significance  of  Emerson. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHILOSOPHY  -  A  ROOM  IN  THE  PSYCHOLOGICAL  LABORATORY 

The  Department  seeks  to  develop  the  spirit  of  investigation  in  psychology 
and  in  general  philosophy,  and  a  considerable  number  of  graduate  stu- 
dents are  engaged  in  research.  Studies  chiefly  in  experimental,  social  and 
comparative  psychology,  mental  hygiene,  and  the  psychology  of  religion  have 
been  successfully  completed  or  are  now  in  progress.  Some  of  these  studies 

91 


Indiana  University 

have  already  been  published  in  the  Psychological  Review,  the  American 
Journal  of  Psychology  and  other  scientific  journals. 

$).    Department  The  work  of  this  Department  naturally  falls  into  four  divisions:     (1) 

courses  designed  to  give  a  general  introductory  survey  of  the  elementary 
facts  of  education,  (2)  those  designed  to  train  the  student  by  an  extensive 
comparative  study  of  educational  facts,  (3)  those  for  the  development  of 


PEDAGOGICAL  MUSEUM  — COLLECTION  OK  SCHOOL  WORK  FROM  DIFFERENT  CITIES  IN  INDIANA 

habits  of  investigation,  and  finally,  (4)  those  to  aid  the  student  in  becoming 
acquainted  with  the  practical  routine  of ,  work  of  the  high  school  readier, 
supervisor,  or  superintendent — the  classes  of  men  the  Department  seeks 
to  train. 

The  introductory  courses  may  comprise  either  a  year's  work  of  one  period 
a  day  devoted  to  elementary  psychology,  logic,  and  ethics ;  or  a  year's  work 

92 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

in  elementary  pedagogy,  in  which  is  given  an  introductory  view  of  the 
general  purposes  and  methods  of  education.  Many  of  the  students  who 
enter  the  Department  have  already  had  the  equivalent  of  the  introductory 


PEDAGOGICAL  MUSEUM  — COLLECTION  OF  TEXT-BOOKS,   MODELS,  ILLUSTRATIVE  MATERIALS  AND 
SCHOOL  WORK  FROM  SCHOOLS  IN  GERMANY 

93 


Indiana  University 

courses,  either  through  private  reading  and  experience  or  by  study  at  other 
institutions. 

A  comparative  study  of  past  and  present  educational  conditions  and 
ideals  is  regarded  as  an  essential  part  of  the  training  of  an  educator.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  two  years  are  given  specifically  to  this  work,  besides  which 
an  historical  treatment  is  given  to  many  of  the  topics  dealt  with  in  other 
courses.  The  work  is  conducted  not  simply  with  a  view  to  acquainting 


PENDULUM   CHRONOSCOPE 

Designed  by  Professor  J.  A.  Bergstrom,  and  described  in  the  Psychological  Review  for 

September,  1900. 

New  features  consist  in  the  mode  of  carrying  and  clamping  the  index,  the  silent  escapement, 
and  a  system  of  movable  keys  which  provide  for  intervals  varying  from  about  T&O  of  a  second 
to  2  or  more  seconds.  The  apparatus  is  of  special  service  in  giving  the  time  of  exposure  in  the 
tachistoscope,  in  experiments  upon  the  perception  of  time  or  the  direction  of  attention  to  simul- 
taneous events,  and  as  a  chronoscope  for  measuring  short  intervals  of  time  with  a  very  high 
degree  of  accuracy. 

94 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

the  student  with  the  leading  facts  of  past  educational  theory  and  practice 
or  with  modern  school  organization,  purpose  and  method,  but  more  espe- 
cially to  the  end  of  developing  a  sense  for  educational  values  and  of  making 
possible  the  balance  of  judgment  and  the  ingenuity  and  fertility  in  expedi- 
ents that  alone  come  from  a  study  of  well  organized  series  of  educational 
facts. 


TACHISTOSCOPE 
Designed  by  Professor  J.  A.  Bergstrom. 

For  exposing  to  view  colors,  pictures,  numbers,  letters,  phrases,  sentences,  and  the  like,  for 
a  very  short  and  (as  far  as  may  be)  for  a  definitely  adjustable  interval,  with  a  view  to  ascertain- 
ing the  degree  of  completeness  of  perception  and  recognition  or  the  extent  of  the  mental  span 
under  such  conditions. 

The  principle  of  construction  is  that  of  producing  a  cone  of  light  which  at  the  apex  passes 
through  a  small  hole  in  the  inclosing  metal  cone;  on  emerging  it  enlarges,  and,  after  reflection 
from  a  mirror,  illuminates  a  considerable  surface  on  which  are  placed  the  objects  to  be  studied. 
Noteworthy  features  are  the  relative  simplicity  of  structure,  the  use  of  direct  illumination  instead 
of  projection,  the  mode  of  securing  adaptation  of  the  eye,  and  the  small  noiseless  electric  shutter 
which  makes  its  use  in  connection  with  the  chronoscope  especially  convenient. 

95 


Indiana  University 

The  importance  for  educational  theory  of  studies  in  modern  psychology 
is  recognized  not  only  by  the  continued  use  of  its  modes  of  interpretation 
in  all  subjects,  but  by  special  courses  requiring  two  years  of  work  of  one 
period  a  day  in  social  and  educational  psychology.  In  addition,  courses 
in  various  other  phases  of  normal,  abnormal  and  experimental  psychology, 


APPARATUS   FOR  COMBINED  INTERVALS 
Designed  by  Professor  J.  A.  Bergstrom. 

Consists  essentially  of  two  large  pendulums  (whose  periods  may  be  varied  by  changing  the 
bobs),  which  are  kept  in  constant  oscillation  by  electrical  means;  and  a  small  pendulum,  which 
may  be  held  at  either  extremity  of  its  swing  by  electromagnets  whose  magnetization  depends 
upon  the  movements  of  either  of  the  large  pendulums.  The  apparatus  is  used  chiefly  to  regulate 
the  duration  of  impressions  and  the  interval  between  them  in  experiments  upon  memory. 

and  in  neurology,  are  offered  by  the  closely  related  Department  of  Philoso- 
phy. Moreover,  many  of  the  problems  which  have  occupied  educational 
seminaries  and  research  students  have  come  from  this  field. 

Facilities  for  observation  and  practice,  furnished  by  courses  in  grade 
supervision  and  school  administration,  have  been  limited  largely  to  the  schools 

96 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

of  Bloomington.  Efforts  to  extend  the  work  to  other  cities  in  the  State  have 
been  only  partially  successful.  The  Department  has  no  practice  school 
of  its  own. 


APPARATUS   FOR   EXPERIMENTS   UPON   MEMORY 
Designed  by  Professor  J.  A.  Bergstrom. 

A  light  drum  is  kept  under  a  certain  pressure  towards  rotation  by  a  weight,  but  is  allowed 
to  move  only  step-fashion  by  the  cogs  and  an  escapement,  which  in  turn  is  regulated  by  the  appa- 
ratus represented  on  the  opposite  page.  Around  the  drum  is  fastened  a  paper  bearing  letters, 
syllables,  words,  or  other  characters,  one  of  the  series  being  brought  into  view  for  a  certain  time 
at  each  step  of  rotation.  This  apparatus  is  especially  convenient  for  the  study  of  the  influence, 
upon  retention  and  recollection,  of  changes  in  the  elementary  factors  of  duration  of  impressions, 
of  intervals  between  them  singly,  or  between  series  of  impressions. 

A  pedagogical  museum  was  begun  seven  or  eight  years  ago,  and  at 
present  contains  a  large  collection  of  American  text-books  and  books  for 
collateral  reading.  The  intention  is  to  make  it  as  far  as  practicable  inter- 
national. An  exhibit  of  text-books,  charts,  specimens,  manuals,  training 

(8)  97 


Indiana  University 

models,  and  samples  of  written  work  and  art  work  prepared  by  Dr.  Ludwig 
Kotelmann  of  Hamburg  is  the  best  of  the  foreign  exhibits;  those  from 
France,  England  and  Sweden  are  relatively  small.  The  museum  contains 
also  a  large  collection  of  samples  of  work  done  in  the  schools  of  a  number 
of  cities  of  Indiana,  including  not  merely  specimens  of  art  work,  but  products 
of  manual  training,  relief  map  work,  and  composition,  also  music  lessons 
recorded  phonographically. 


A  NEW   FORM  OF  ERGOGRAPH  (FRONT  VIEW) 
Designed  by  Professor  J.  A.  Bergstrom.    Described  in  the  Commemorative  Number  of  the 

American  Journal  of  Psychology,  September,  1903. 

For  the  study  of  neuro-muscular  work  and  fatigue,  and  the  kinsesthetic  sensations  of  the 
fingers;  and  for  experiments  upon  the  Weber  law  for  the  discrimination  of  differences  of  re- 
sistance. It  differs  from  other  apparatus  for  this  purpose:  ( 1 )  in  the  greater  degree  of  isolation  of 
the  muscle,  especially  through  the  introduction  of  the  principle  of  suspension,  and  experiments 
with  flexors  of  the  last  phalanges;  (2)  in  its  general  adjustability;  (3)  in  the  higher  degree  of  ac- 
curacy, attained  through  its  special  form  of  finger  clamp  and  its  mode  of  adjusting  the  phalanx  to 
the  lever;  (4)  in  the  possibility  of  employing  different  kinds  of  loads,  including  the  uniform  load 
attained  by  means  of  a  compensating  spring;  (5)  in  its  improved  registration  devices. 

98 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

One  year's  work  in  this  Department,  consisting  of  college  algebra,  plane  10.  Department 
and  spherical  trigonometry  and  analytical  geometry,  is  prescribed  for  all 
candidates  for  the  A.B.  degree.  For  students  who  take  mathematics  as  their 
major  subject  the  Freshman  year's  work  is  the  same  as  the  required  work 
just  mentioned.  For  the  Sophomore  year  the  work  consists  of  calculus 
throughout  the  year,  three  hours  a  week ;  theory  of  equations,  one  term,  two 
hours  a  week ;  and  advanced  conies,  two  terms,  two  hours  a  week.  In 
the  Junior  year  are  given  advanced  calculus  throughout  the  year,  three 
hours  a  week,  and  solid  geometry  and  theory  of  surfaces  throughout  the 


ERGOGRA.PH   (BACK  VIEW) 


year,  two  hours  a  week. 


For  the  Senior  year  the  work  varies,  but  always 
includes  at  least  six  hours  in  differential  equations  and  two  hours  seminary 
work.  The  remaining  part  of  the  work  is  selected  from  courses  in  the  theory 
of  numbers,  theory  of  functions,  group  theory,  substitution  theory,  modern 
geometry,  and  projective  geometry. 

For  students  preparing  for  engineering,  courses  are  given  in  descriptive 
geometry  and  surveying.  The  Department  owns  a  surveyor's  compass,  plane 
table,  two  transits,  two  Y-levels,  a  solar  compass,  leveling  rods,  chains  and 
steel  tapes.  For  the  work  in  drawing  and  platting  there  is  a  well-lighted 

99 


Indiana  University 


room  furnished  with  drawing  tables.  A  number  of  graduate  courses  are 
offered.  The  facilities  for  work  of  this  grade  are  good.  The  mathematical 
library  contains  the  following  works:  'Acta  Mathematical  'American  Jour- 
nal of  Mathematics/  'The  American  Mathematical  Monthly/  'The  Analyst,' 
'Annals  of  Mathematics/  'Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathematical  Society/ 


DEPARTMENT  OF   MATHEMATICS -SEMINARY   ROOM 

'Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Mathematical  Society/  'Bulletin  of  the  French 
Mathematical  Society/  'Cambridge  and  Dublin  Mathematical  Journal/ 
'Crelle's  Journal  fiir  Mathematik/  'Liouville's  Journal  de  Mathematique/ 
'The  Mathematical  Monthly/  'Mathematische  Annalen/  'Mathesis/  'Proceed- 
ings of  the  Edinburgh  Mathematical  Society/  'Proceedings  of  the  London 

100 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

Mathematical  Society/  'The  Quarterly  Journal  of  Mathematics/  and  'The 
Messenger  of  Mathematics.'  The  collected  works  of  Abel,  Cauchy,  Cayley, 
Clifford,  Gauss,  Jacobi,  Lagrange,  Mobius,  Riemann,  Schwartz,  Smith,  and 
Steiner,  and  a  full  line  of  the  leading  English,  French,  and  German  texts  are 
also  in  the  library  of  the  Department. 


and  Mechanics. 


KIRKWOOD  OBSERVATORY   (ERECTED   1900) 

Two  elementary  courses  in  astronomy,  the  one  a  text-book  course,  the  n.  Department 
other  a  series  of  lectures  upon  astronomical  topics  of  current  general  interest, 
are  given  each  year  in  this  Department.  The  more  advanced  and  technical 
courses  that  are  offered  are  intended  to  familiarize  the  student  with  astro- 
nomical instruments,  with  methods  of  computation  and  to  give  him  a  math- 
ematical basis  for  research  in  gravitational  astronomy.  These  courses 


101 


TWELVE-INCH    REFRACTING  TELESCOPE   OF    KIKKWOOI)   OBSERVATORY 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

include  practical  and  spherical  astronomy,  theoretical  astronomy,  celestial 
photography,  and  celestial  mechanics. 


FIFTEEN-INCH   REFLECTING  TELESCOPE 
Designed  by  Assistant  Professor  W.  A.  COGSHALL,  and  built  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy. 


103 


THE  MOON   (SEVEN  DAYS  OLD) 

Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy.    Made  with  the  12-inch  Refracting 
Telescope,  and  enlarged. 


THE  MOON   (EIGHT  DAYS  OLD) 

Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy.    Made  with  the  12-inch  Refracting 
Telescope,  and  enlarged. 


Indiana  University 

Each  student  who  chooses  astronomy  as  his  major  subject  undertakes 
in  his  Senior  year,  either  conjointly  with  or  under  the  direction  of  an  in- 
structor, some  problem  of  astronomical  research.  These  problems  are  usu- 
ally a  continuation  of  some  piece  of  work  suggested  while  he  is  pursuing 
some  of  the  above  named  courses  and  are  selected  according  to  the  taste  and 


DRAWINGS  OF  SUNSPOTS  (STUDENT'S  WORK) 

ability  of  the  individual.  The  major  part  of  the  work  at  this  time  is  done 
with  micrometer,  or  in  celestial  photography.  Most  of  the  accompanying 
illustrations  are  from  photographs  made  by  students  working  in  this  way. 

The  introductory  courses  in  mechanics  are  intended  as  a  preparation 
for  the  more  advanced  courses  in  either  theoretical  and  celestial  mechanics, 

10G 


NEBULA  OF  ORION  (MADE  WITH  5-lNCH   PORTRAIT  LENS) 
Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy. 


NEBULA  OF  ORION   (MADE  WITH   IO-INCH   REFLECTOR) 
Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy. 


Indiana  University 


or  in  applied  mechanics  in  which 
specific  engineering  problems  are 
considered.  While  the  primary 
purpose  in  all  cases  is  to  develop 
the  principle  and  truths  of  me- 
chanics, it  is  equally  necessary 
that  the  student  acquire  facility  in 
applying  mathematical  form  to 
the  investigation  of  physical  phe- 
nomena, and  that  he  should  know 
when  the  condition  of  his  problem 
warrants  the  use  of  mathematical 
formulae  already  learned. 

Kirkwood  Observatory,  which 
is  occupied  by  the  Department, 
contains  a  library  and  computing 
room :  a  lecture  room ;  a  dark- 
room ;  a  transit-room  in  which  is  a 
Bamberg  universal  instrument,  a 
Howard  sidereal  clock,  a  sidereal 
chronometer,  and  a  chronograph; 
a  dome-room  twenty-six  feet  in  di- 
ameter; and  a  room  of  the  same 
size  immediately  below  it.  In  the 
dome  is  the  refractor,  a  cut  of 
which  is  found  on  page  102,  one 
of  the  finest  specimens  of  Amer- 
ican instrument  making.  The  12- 
inch  objective  is  by  Brashear,  and 
is  of  high  optical  excellence,  giv- 
ing upon  a  black  field  stellar  im- 
ages without  distortion  or  wings 
of  any  kind.  The  mounting  is  by 
Warner  and  Swasey  of  Cleveland, 
Ohio.  The  instrument  has  a  focal 


COMET  C    190U  (JULY   24, 
Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

length  of  about  sixteen  feet,  and  is  supplied  with  eyepieces  giving  mag- 
nifying powers  of  from  130  to  nearly  1,000  diameters,  and  with  a  polarizing 
helioscope,  diagonal  eyepiece,  and  an  electrically  illuminated  micrometer; 
there  are  also  both  coarse  and  fine  circles  in  right  ascension  and  declination, 
the  fine  ones  being  provided  with  reading  microscopes  and  electrical  illu- 
mination. 


COMET  C    (BORELLY)    !<)(>:* 
Photographed  by  the  Department  of  Astronomy,  July  21,  1903. 

The  Department  has  now  in  use,  in  a  separate  building,  a  reflecting 
telescope  of  fifteen  inches  aperture,  designed  mainly  for  photographic  work. 
The  optical  parts  are  by  Petitdidier,  of  Chicago ;  the  mounting  was  designed 
and  constructed  by  the  Department.  A  cut  of  this  instrument,  is  shown 

109 


Indiana  University 

on  page  103.    There  is  in  course  of  construction  a  mounting  to  carry  a  IJmxvn 
4-inch  refractor,  and  a  portrait  lens  of  five  inches  aperture. 

12.  Department  The  work  of  the  Physics  Department  is  arranged  to  meet  the  needs 
of  four  classes  of  students.  (1)  For  those  who  desire  a  general  knowledge 
of  the  subject  of  physics,  as  a  part  of  a  liberal  education,  the  development 
and  substantiation  of  fundamental  theories  takes  precedence  over  the  minutiae 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHYSICS  -  LECTURE   ROOM 

of  the  subject.  (2)  For  teachers  and  those  preparing  to  teach  phy-ii-- 
in  the  high  school,  the  work  includes  more  laboratory  practice,  besides  a 
special  course  in  the  manipulation  of  physical  apparatus,  and  another  in 
shop  practice.  In  the  former  of  these  two  courses  the  student  generates 
oxygen  gas,  manipulates  ex-hydrogen,  acetylene  and  electric  stereopticons, 

110 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

projects  interference  fringes  and  vibrating  strings,  demonstrates  the  oscilla- 
tory character  of  the  Ley den  jar  discharge,  reverses  the  D-line,  etc.  In  all 
he  repeats  some  fifty  of  the  more  difficult  lecture  demonstrations.  In 
the  latter  course  he  is  taught  soldering,  tempering,  brazing,  case-hardening, 
simple  glass-blowing,  wood  and  metal  turning,  screw-cutting,  and  such  other 
operations  as  may  be  required  in  the  repair  or  manufacture  of  physical 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHYSICS -A  ROOM  OF  THE  ELEMENTARY  LABORATORY 

apparatus.  (3)  For  students  of  engineering,  the  Department  offers  special 
work  in  advanced  electricity,  a  year's  work  in  dynamo-electric  machinery, 
courses  in  mechanical  drawing  and  thermodynamics,  and  a  more  extended 
course  in  shop  work  than  is  offered  for  teachers.  (4)  For  advanced 
students,  the  Department  offers  text  courses  in  advanced  mathematical 


111 


Indiana  University 

electricity  and  light,  and  facilities  for  research  work  along  almost  any  line  in 
physics.  The  Department  is  already  fairly  well  equipped  with  accurate 
standards  and  delicate  instruments,  and  special  pieces  may  be  provided  when 
needed  in  any  research.  A  well  equipped  shop  and  the  services  of  a  mechani- 
cian are  at  the  disposal  of  research  students.  Investigations  are  now  in 


DEPARTMKNT  OF  PHYSICS-A  MODIFIED  WEHNELT  INTKRRUPTER 
Designed  by  Professor  A.  L.  Foley  and  Mr.  K.  E.  Nyswander. 

progress  in  the  laboratories  along  the  following  lines:  the  spectrum  of 
radium;  the  ^-rays  and  other  radiations;  the  effect  of  radiation  upon  elec- 
trolytic resistance;  the  electromotive  force  in  electrolytes  in  a  variable 
magnetic  field. 


112 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


Besides  a  number  of  rooms  for  special  purposes,  the  Department  of 
Physics  occupies  two  research  laboratories,  and  five  rooms  are  used  for 
elementary  laboratories,  one  devoted  to  general  practice,  and  four  small 
rooms  for  work  in  sound  and  light.  The  lecture  room  has  an  elevated 
floor  and  is  seated  with  tablet-arm  opera  chairs.  It  is  provided  with  auto- 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHYSICS -A  BRASHEAK  MOUNTING  FOR  A  ROWLAND  GRATING 
Constructed  in  the  Department. 

matic  blinds,  screens  and  blackboards,  all  under  the  immediate  control 
of  the  lecturer.  The  lecture  table  is  built  in  three  sections,  and  the  plumb- 
ing and  wiring  are  arranged  so  that  one,  two,  or  three  sections  may  be 
used  at  a  time.  At  the  table  the  lecturer  has  battery  and  dynamo  currents 
(alternating  and  direct),  rheostats,  illuminated  dial  voltmeters  and  amme- 


(9) 


113 


Indiana  University 

ters,  electric  motors,  calcium  and  electric  lanterns,  low  and  high  resistance 
projecting  galvanometers,  water,  steam,  gas,  oxygen,  acetylene,  compressed 
air,  exhaust  cocks,  and  permanent  connections  to  a  standard  clock.  All  the 
laboratories  are  supplied  with  water,  gas  and  electricity.  The  floors  are 
of  concrete.  There  are  fifteen  large  masonry  piers  and  more  than  three 
hundred  lineal  feet  of  six-inch  stone  wall  shelves.  All  the  developing  rooms 


DEPARTMENT  OF   PHYSICS- APPARATUS   KOR  THE  STUDY  OF  N-RAY8 

have  both  gas  and  electric  ruby  lights,  tile  shelves,  and  lockers.  Ten  rooms 
are  provided  with  blinds  for  making  them  light  tight.  There  are  two 
shop-rooms,  equipped  with  forges,  wood  and  metal-working  lathes,  screw- 
cutting  lathes,  power-saws,  a  trimmer,  shaper,  grinder,  miller,  and  other 
wood-  and  metal-working  tools.  In  the  powerhouse  of  the  University  are 

114 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

two  engines,  one  of  twenty  and  one  of  forty  horse-power,  and  an  alternator 
and  direct  current  generator  of  thirty  kilowatts  capacity.  A  one-hundred- 
twenty-five  horse-power  engine  and  an  eighty  kilowatt  generator  are  being 
added  to  the  equipment. 

The  work  of  the  Department  of  Chemistry  is  arranged  to  meet  the  needs    13.  Department 
of  students  preparing  to  become  professional  chemists,  chemical  electro-chem- 
ical mining  or  sanitary  engineers,  and  physicians ;  as  well  as  of  students  in 
other  Departments  of  the  University — such  as  Physics,  Geology,  Zoology, 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY -LECTURE   ROOM 

Botany,  and  Law  (medical  jurisprudence) — who  Avish  to  acquire  a  knowl- 
edge of  general  chemistry,  or  to  emphasize  particular  or  more  advanced 
lines  of  chemical  work.  For  students  who  take  chemistry  as  a  major  subject, 
the  Department  offers  prescribed  and  elective  undergraduate  courses  which 
cover  a  period  of  four  years,  and  consist  of  lectures,  recitations,  and  labora- 
tory seminary  and  research  work.  In  the  laboratories  each  student  works 
independentlv  of  the  others. 

115 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY  — LABORATORY  FOR  ORGANIC  AND  PHYSIOLOGICAL  CHEMISTRY 


^DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY -LABORATORY   FOR  QUALITATIVE   ANALYSIS 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

The  general  policy  of  the  Department  is :  ( 1 )  To  give  the  student  com- 
prehensive training  in  the  fundamentals  of  general,  theoretical,  and  ana- 
lytical chemistry,  both  inorganic  and  organic,  in  certain  prescribed  courses 
covering  eight  terms  of  University  work.  (2)  To  permit  election  of  the 
remainder  of  the  undergraduate  work,  and  specialization  within  the  Depart- 
ment according  to  the  desire  and  purpose  of  the  student.  Special  attention 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY  — APPARATUS  FOB  THE   MEASUREMENT  OF  SINGLE  POTENTIAL 

DIFFERENCES 
Constructed  by  a  student  in  Physical  Chemistry. 

has  been  given,  in  the  past  nine  years,  to  organic,  physiological,  bacterio- 
logical, electro-  and  technical  analytical  chemistry,  and  toxicology ;  arrange- 
ments have  now  been  completed  for  the  expansion  of  the  courses  in  physical 
and  advanced  inorganic  chemistry.  (3)  To  encourage  research  work  in  the 
phases  of  the  subject  undertaken.  It  is  insisted,  however,  that  the  student 


117 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY -LABORATORY  FOR  ELECTRO-CHEMISTRY 


DEPARTMENT  OK  CHEMISTRY-LABORATORY   FOR   HACTERIOLOSY 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

must  first  have  a  knowledge  of  chemistry  as  a  science,  and  have  attained  a 
high  degree  of  accuracy  in  his  work,  before  undertaking  original  investiga- 
tions, which  usually  are  not  begun  before  the  fourth  year.  The  investi- 
gation is  of  some  limited  problem,  usually  emanating  from  the  researches 
conducted  by  the  instructors  in  the  various  divisions  of  the  Department. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY  -  ROTATING  CATHODE  FOR  RAPID  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS 

BY  ELECTROLYSIS 

Many  of  the  themes  have  to  do  with  the  study  of  analogy  between  sulphur, 
selenium,  and  tellurium,  in  combination  with  organic  radicals ;  with  problems 
in  applied  electro-chemistry,  e.g.  the  production  of  chloroform,  bromoform, 
and  iodoform  from  acetone  by  electrolysis  (see  cut,  next  page)  ;  with  the 
study  of  the  salts  of  berberine ;  with  clinical  methods  of  urine  analysis,  e.g.  an 

119 


Indiana  University 

exact  method  for  the  determination  of  albumen ;  with  bacteriological  prob- 
lems, e.g.  a  study  of  pathogenic  yeasts ;  with  the  distribution  of  bacteria  in 
lake  water;  with  the  differentiation  of  bacillus  coli  and  bacillus  typhi  in 
casein-sugar-agars  (see  cut,  opposite)  ;  with  fat-producing  bacteria,  etc. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY -IODOFOEM  FROM  ACETONE  BY  ELECTROLYSIS,  USING  Two 
CATHODES  AND  A  ROTATING  ANODE 

Method  and  apparatus  devised  in  the  Indiana  University  Laboratory  for  Electro-Chemistry,  1904 

The  results  of  these  investigations,  when  sufficiently  meritorious,  are  pub- 
lished in  various  chemical  journals,  as  contributions  from  the  Chemical 
Department  of  Indiana  University.  Fourteen  such  articles  have  appeared ; 

120 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

and  one  electro-metallurgical  process,  worked  out  in  this  series  of  investiga- 
tions, has  been  patented  (U.  S.  patent  742,830). 

The  graduate  work  of  the  Department  follows  in  part  the  lines  above 
described,  and  in  part  is  embodied  in  separate  graduate  courses,  consisting  of 
laboratory  lecture  and  seminary  work. 

The  Department  has  general,  special,  and  private  laboratories  adequately 
equipped  to  accommodate  one  hundred  and  sixty  students.  Special  labora- 
tories are  provided  for  organic  and  physiological  chemistry,  toxicology,  food 
analysis,  assaying  and  electric-furnace  work,  physical  and  electro-chemistry, 


DEPARTMENT  OF  CHEMISTRY -DIFFERENTIATION  OF  BACILLUS  TYPHI  ABDOMINAHS  AND 
BACILLUS  COLI  COMMUNIS  BY  USE  OF  CASEIN  AGAKS 

Method  devised  in  the  Indiana  University  Bacteriological  Laboratory,  1904. 

1.  Casein-lactose-agar.  4.    Casein-dextrose-agar. 

2.  Casein-glycerine-agar.  5.    Casein-lsevulose-agar. 
3  and  6.    Casein-mannit-agar.                  7.    Casein-maltose-agar. 

A  =  bacillus  typhi ;    B  =  bacillus  coli.    Cultures  46  hours  at  37°  centigrade. 

spectrum  gas  and  water  analysis,  and  bacteriology.  The  general  equipment 
for  graduate  work,  including  library  facilities,  has  been  materially  increased 
during  the  past  year. 

In  the  period  of  nine  years  from  1896  to  1904,  the  degree  of  A.B.  in 
Chemistry  has  been  conferred  upon  three  women  and  ninety-four  men.     Of 

121 


Indiana  University 

these  ninety-seven  graduates,  forty-four  have  pursued  or  are  pursuing  the 
study  of  medicine,  thirteen  have  received  the  degree  of  A.M.  in  Chemistry 
after  one  year  of  graduate  study  at  Indiana  University,  four  have  received 
this  degree  elsewhere,  and  eight  have  received  or  are  now  candidates  for  the 
degree  of  Ph.D. — one  each  at  Goettingen  (Germany),  Johns  Hopkins,  Yale 
and  Chicago,  and  two  each  at  Wisconsin  and  Cornell. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  GEOLOGY -RESEARCH  LABORATORY 

14.  Department  The  courses  in  geological  science  are  designed  to  meet  the  needs  as 
well  of  those  who  pursue  the  subject  as  a  part  of  a  liberal  education, 
as  of  those  who  intend  to  become  professional  geologists.  A  five-hour  course 
in  geology,  extending  through  the  entire  year,  and  a  five-hour  course  in 
elementary  physiography,  given  in  the  Spring  term,  are  open  to  all  students 

122 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

who  have  sufficient  preparation  in  physics  and  chemistry,  and  ordinarily 
constitutes  the  entire  work  of  the  first  of  the  two  groups  of  students  mentioned 
above.  These  courses  serve  also  as  an  introduction  to  the  science  and  a 
foundation  for  the  work  of  the  future  specialist.  Besides  these  general 
courses,  there  is  a  special  course  in  field  geology  given  in  the  fall  and 


DEPARTMENT  OF  GEOLOGY -RESEARCH  LABORATORY 

spring,  in  which  attention  is  paid  to  the  methods  of  the  professional  geologist 
in  areal  and  topographic  mapping,  stratigraphy  and  the  collection  of  fossils. 

The  courses  in  mineralogy,  economic  geology,  advanced  physiography  and 
paleontology  are  largely  professional  and  not  designed  for  elementary  stu- 
dents. Two  terms  are  given  to  economic  geology,  one  to  non-metallic  and 
one  to  metallic  products;  field  and  laboratory  work  constitute  an  important 

123 


DEPARTMENT  OF  GEOLOGY-A  CORKER  OF  THE   GEOLOGICAL  MUSEUM 
In  the  foreground  are  several  relief  maps  made  by  members  of  the  Department. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

part  of  this  course.  Paleontology  runs  throughout  the  year,  consisting 
entirely  of  laboratory  work.  The  chief  work  of  advanced  students  consists 
in  the  investigation  of  some  definite  problem  or  problems  with  a  view 
to  publication  of  the  results  when  of  sufficient  merit. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  GEOLOGY -A  CORNER  OF  THE  LECTURE   ROOM 

Several  Zittel  charts  illustrating  groups  of  fossils  are  shown,  and  other  charts  and  maps 
made  by  members  of  the  Department  and  by  students.  To  the  left  are  shown  cases  for  topo- 
graphic sheets  and  geologic  folios. 

The  Department  is  supplied  with  commodious  quarters.  It  has  a  de- 
partmental library,  besides  extensive  collections  of  fossils,  minerals,  rock 
specimens,  products  treated  in  economic  geology — such  as  petroleum,  coal, 
clays,  cements,  ores,  etc. — and  a  large  series  of  maps,  charts,  and  plaster 
models.  Many  of  the  latter  have  been  made  by  students  and  members  of 

125 


Indiana  University 

the  Department.  The  Zittel  charts  in  particular  are  of  great  use  in  pale- 
ontology and  historical  geology.  This  series  is  being  extended  by  the  addi- 
tion of  charts  and  a  series  of  lantern  slides  to  illustrate  the  modern  pale- 
obiological  side  of  paleontology.  An  extensive  series  of  maps,  made  by  a 
member  of  the  Department,  illustrates  the  areal  distribution  of  the  several 


DEPARTMENT  OF  ZOOLOGY  -ELEMENTARY  LABORATORY 

geological  systems  and  the  hypothetical  land  and  water  areas  of  past  geo- 
logical periods.  The  plaster  models  represent  topographic  types  and  regions 
of  peculiar  or  characteristic  structure,  such  as  the  Appalachian  structure 
of  Pennsylvania  and  Tennessee.  The  whole  range  of  geology  is  illustrated 
by  a  large  and  rapidly  increasing  collection  of  lantern  slides.  A  series 

126 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

now  in  preparation  is  designed  to  illustrate  Indiana  geology  and  physical 
geography. 

The  general  policy  of  the  Department  of  Zoology  is  to  give  students    15.   Department 
the  solution  of  original  problems  at  the  earliest  moment  possible,  usually   of  Zool°sy- 
at  the  end  of  their  second  year  in  the  Department.     The  first  courses  open 


DEPARTMENT  OF  ZOOLOGY- OFFICE  AND   PRIVATE  LABORATORY 

to  students  are:  (1)  a  course  in  general  zoology  extending  through  the 
year  and  devoted  to  the  examination  of  a  series  of  invertebrates  and  ver- 
tebrates in  the  laboratory,  for  their  structure,  and  to  the  examination  of 
biological  problems  illustrated  by  living  animals,  chiefly  as  they  are  found 
in  their  native  habitat;  (2)  a  course  of  general  lectures  extending  through 

127 


DEPARTMENT  OF  ZOOLOGY— MODELS  TO  ILLUSTRATE  LECTURES 


DEPARTMENT   OK   7OOLO(JY— A    CORNER   IN  THE    K.MnRvor.ooirAi,    LABORATORY 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


two  terms  on  the  evolution  of  organisms   and   the  laws   and   theories  of 
hereditary  transmission  of  characters. 

The  second  group  of  courses  open  to  students  are:    (1)  courses  dealing 
with  the  minute  structure  and  embryology  of  vertebrates,   and  leading  to 


A   CUBAN   BLIND-FISH  (LUCIFDGA) 

Itself  without  visible  eyes,  but  containing  unborn  young  with  well-developed  eyes.    Prepared  by 
Professor  C.  H.  Eigenmann,  of  the  Department  of  Zoology. 

the  study  of  medicine  or  the  investigation  of  anatomical  problems;  or  (2) 
courses  dealing  with  the  species  of  vertebrates,  chiefly  fishes. 

For  the  course  in  elementary  zoology  and  embryology  the  equipment 


* 


(10) 


ABLYSTOMA   OPACUM 
From  a  water-color  drawing  by  a  student  of  the  Department  of  Zoology. 

129 


SOUTH   AMERICAN   FRESH-WATER   FISHES 

Mylosoma  albiscopus  Cope   (representing  a  new  genus),  Myleopsis  levis  Eigenmann  and 
McAtee  (representing  a  new  genus),  and  Myletes  tiete  Eigenmann  and  Norris. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

of  the  Department  is  equal  to  that  of  the  best  institutions  in  the  country, 
and  comprises  charts,  models,  illustrative  specimens,  and  a  varied  and  prim- 


,  ABERRANT.  SPELERPES  MACULICANDA  (DORSAL  AND   SIDE  VIEWS) 
From  a_drawing  by  Mr.  C.  H.  Kennedy,  a  student  in  the  Department  of  Zoology. 

itive  environment.  During  the  third  year  each  student  works  at  the  solu- 
tion of  some  special  problem.  While  the  work  of  no  two  advanced  students 
is  alike,  their  problems  usually  radiate  from  the  investigations  being  prose- 


LEPTOCEPHALUS   OF  THE  AMERICAN  EEL 

Fromja^drawing  by  Mr.  C.  H.  Kennedy.    The  specimen  represented  is  the  first  recognized 
larva  of  the  American  Eel. 


LEPTOCEPHALUS 

From  a  drawing  by  Mr.  C.  H.  Kennedy.  The  specimen  represented  was  remarkable  for 
its  transparency  and  for  the  fact  that  the  spots  on  the  two  sides  alternate  in  such  a  way  that  they 
appear  as  a  single  regularly  arranged  series. 

cuted  by  the  instructors  in  the  Department.  The  results  of  such  investiga- 
tions are  published  as  'Contributions  from  Zoological  Laboratory  of  Indi- 
ana University.' 

131 


I 

I 

£> 

If 

K     £ 

a     .a 

— i          O 

< 


a  _, 
11 


o  a 
>.  ~i 


f>      p  S 

H    a  E   •* 


ft   05 


en  en 

S3  o3 

O  O 

O  O 

a  a 

o  o 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

Two  chief  lines  of  work  have  been  pursued  by  the  Department:  (1) 
Systematic  zoology.  The  work  along  this  line  has  dealt  very  largely  with 
fishes,  particularly  those  of  the  fresh  waters  of  tropical  America,  including 
the  region  from  the  south  of  Mexico  to  central  Argentina.  A  number  of 
shorter  papers  have  been  published  or  are  in  preparation,  and  the  greater 


THE  CAVE  FARM  NEAR  MITCHELL,  IND.  —  OUTLET  OF  THE  UNDERGROUND  RIVER 

part  of  the  work  of  compiling  a  general  treatise  is  completed.  For  the 
work  on  the  taxonomy  of  fishes,  but  two  other  universities  possess  library 
or  museum  facilities  greater  than  those  of  Indiana  University.  For  the 
work  on  tropical  American  fishes  the  facilities  are  exceeded  only  by  Harvard 
with  her  matchless  collection  of  Brazilian  fishes.  The  University  has  several 
thousand  species  of  fishes  represented  by  perhaps  60,000  specimens.  Dur- 

133 


5  2 

a  s> 

—  (C 

Q  5 

1  i 

£  a 


"     8  $ 

«    S  £ 

"55    S  i 

3    £l 

*o 

O-  — 

ja  5 


c 


5  3 


- 

a 

08      M    60 
fcl      O    C 


M 

0    c 

K  'Sb 


* 

c  -g 


. 

3 


*     7?  •= 


w     .    . 

Q      rH    CO 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

ing  the  past  year  collections  have  been  received  from  Cuba,  Paraguay 
(through  Prof.  J.  S.  Anisits),  the  Hawaiian  Islands  (through  the  Bureau  of 
Fisheries),  and  from  Japan  (through  President  David  Starr  Jordan). 

(2)  The  second  line  of  research  work  is  on  the  problem  of  heredity, 
which  has  been .  approached  from  various  directions,  (a)  The  Department 
has  issued  several  papers  on  the  structure  and  history  of  the  hereditary 
(sex)  cells  in  the  vertebrate,  Gymatogaster.  (&)  A  statistical  inquiry  into 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY  — LABORATORY  FOR  PLANT  PHYSIOLOGY 

the  variation  in  successive  years  of  the  same  species  in  the  same  unit  of 
environment  was  started  in  1895.  To  further  this  work  a  Biological  Station 
was  established  at  Turkey  Lake  and  later  transferred  to  Winona  Lake 
(see  page  183).  While  a  large  amount  of  material  has  been  gathered  and 
a  number  of  papers  published,  this  phase  of  the  subject  has  been  at  least 
temporarily  overshadowed  by  the  line  of  investigation  next  described,  (c) 
An  inquiry  into  the  process,  method,  and  rate  of  ontogenic  and  phylogenic 

135 


Indiana  University 

modification  of  the  sense  organs  in  the  cave  animals  of  North  America, 
particularly  of  the  eyes  of  blind  fishes.  An  important  aid  to  this  work 
was  the  recent  acquisition  by  the  University  of  a  tract  of  about  180  acres 
of  primitive  woodland,  containing  numerous  dry  and  wet  caves  and  an 
underground  stream  which  can  be  traversed  for  over  a  mile.  The  situation 
is  ideal  for  transplanting  cave  animals  into  the  light  and  epigean  forms 
into  the  dark.  Six  papers  on  this  subject  have  been  published,  and  another 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY  —  PHOTOMICKOGRAPH  OF  A  VASCULAR  BUNDLE  OF  SWEET  CLOVER 

(MELELOTUS  ALBA) 

Prepared  by  Mr.  H.  H.  Ratcliff,  a  second-year  student  in  the  Department.    The  cut  illustrates  a 

method  in  histology. 

one  on  the  eyes  of  the  Cuban  blind  fishes  is  being  prepared  by  Professor 
C.  H.  Eigenmann,  with  the  aid  of  a  grant  from  the  Carnegie  Institution. 
(d)  The  Department  has  begun  a  series  of  experiments  to  test  certain 
features  of  Mendel's  law  of  heredity. 


136 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

The  Department  of  Botany  has  three  laboratories,  devoted  respectively    16.  Department 
to  elementary  botany,  histology  and  physiology,  and  morphology  and  cytol-  c 
ogy.     The  morphological  laboratory  is  well  equipped  with  modern  apparatus 
and  accessories  for  the  highest  grade  of  cytological  and  morphological  work. 


tMtioBij^.        D 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY  — DIVISION  OF  THE  HEREDITARY   SUBSTANCE  IN  REPRODUCTIVE 

CELLS  IN  HIGHER  PLANTS.    I 

A— Pollen  mother-cell  with  nucleus  in  the  resting  condition  (  Podophyllum  peltatum). 
B— The  nucleus  at  the  beginning  of  mitosis.    C,  D— Nuclei  showing  the  chromatin  thread  or 
spirem  split  lengthwise  (Lilium  martagon). 

The  physiological  laboratory  is  provided  with  the  usual  apparatus  necessary 
for  physiological  practicum  as  well  as  several  pieces  designed  for  special 
work.  New  additions  are  made  to  this  equipment  yearly.  For  research 
in  plant  physiology  special  apparatus  is  purchased  as  needed,  or  is  designed 

137 


Indiana  University 

and  constructed  by  instructor  and  student.     In  addition  to  the  customary 
equipment  the  elementary  laboratory  is  provided  with  a  Zeiss  projection 

E  F 


H 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY— DIVISION  OF  THE  HEREDITARY  SUBSTANCE  IN  REPRODUCTIVE 

CELLS  m  HIGHER  PLANTS.    II 

E— Pollen  mother-cell ;  the  spirem  has  segmented  into  the  chromosomes,  a  few  of  which  only 
are  shown ;  n,  nucleolus.  F,  G— The  mitotic  spindle  of  the  first  mitosis ;  the  chromosomes  are 
arranged  in  the  equatorial  plate.  H— Metakinesis;  the  daughter  chromosomes  are  separating,  and 
each  is  seen  to  be  split  again  lengthwise. 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 


apparatus  for  the  projection  upon  the  screen  of  both  microscopic  prepa- 
rations and  stereopticon  views. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY— DIVISION  OF  THE  HEREDITARY  SUBSTANCE  IN  REPRODUCTIVE 
CELLS  IN  HIGHER  PLANTS.    Ill 

I— The  anaphase ;  the  pairs  of  grand-daughter  chromosomes  resulting  from  the  second 
longitudinal  splitting  are  passing  to  the  poles  of  the  spindle.  J,  K — Formation  of  the  daughter 
nuclei.  L — The  result  of  the  first  division  (Podophyllum).  M— Daughter  nucleus  ready  for  the 
second  division. 


Indiana  University 

The  work  of  the  department  consists  of  three  years  of  undergraduate 
instruction,  and  graduate  work  leading  to  the  degrees  of  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 


R 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY  —  DIVISION  OF  THE  HEREDITARY  SUBSTANCE  IN  REPRODUCTIVE 

CELLS  OF  HIGHER  PLANTS.  IV 

N  to  R— Successive  steps  in  the  second  division  In  the  pollen  mother-cell  (Podophyllum). 


140 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

Of  the  undergraduate  work  the  first  year  (elementary  course)  is  devoted 
to  a  general  survey  of  the  plant  kingdom  in  the  study  of  selected  types 
from  the  great  group  of  plants,  supplemented  by  simple  physiological  ex- 
periments, with  instruction  also  in  the  adaptation  of  plants  to  their  environ- 
ment. This  course  is  designed  not  only  as  a  preliminary  to  the  advanced 
work  but  especially  for  students  desiring  a  general  knowledge  of  plant  life. 

The  undergraduate  work  beyond  the  first  year  is  in  the  nature  of  ad- 
vanced practicum,  but  its  methods  are  the  same  as  in  original  investigation. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  BOTANY  —  FECUNDATION  OF  THE  EGG-CELL  IN  THE  LILY 

A— Male  and  female  nuclei  in  contact  (Lilium  martagon).    B— Fusion  of  the  sexual  nuciei 
in  tfie  egg-cell  (Lilium  candidum). 

The  student  may  select  any  of  several  courses,  but  his  second  year's  work 
is,  as  a  rule,  histology  and  practice  in  plant  physiology,  and  the  third 
year  some  line  of  special  morphology  or  embryology. 

Candidates  for  advanced  degrees  are  assigned  or  permitted  to  select  prob- 
lems for  research  along  some  line  of  morphology,  cytology  or  physiology, 
the  results  of  which  are  embodied  in  a  thesis.  During  recent  years  the 
research  work  of  the  Department,  carried  on  by  instructors  and  graduate 

141 


Indiana  University 

students,  has  been  along  the  line  of  cytology  and  embryology,  dealing  espe- 
cially with  problems  of  fecundation  and  the  physical  basis  of  heredity. 
The  accompanying  figures  (pp.  136-141)  will  illustrate  the  nature  and  char- 
acter of  the  work  referred  to. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  ANATOMY  — PRIVATE  LABORATORY  AND  PREPARATION  ROOM  IN  HISTOLOGY  j 


17.    Department 
of  Anatomy. 


The  Department  of  Anatomy  was  established  in  the  fall  of  1903.  Its 
work  is  planned  especially  for  students  enrolled  in  the  new  School  of  Medi- 
cine, but  the  courses  which  it  offers  may  also  be  chosen  as  electives  or  as  a 
major  subject  by  students  in  the  Departments  of  Liberal  Arts.  The  equip- 
ment, which  is  entirely  adequate  for  the  number  of  students  in  attendance,  is 

142 


DEPARTMENT  OF  AN  ATOMY -LABORATORY 

The  room  is  over  seventy  feet  long,  and  is  excellently  lighted  from  the  ends  and  from  five 
large  double  windows  at  the  side.  During  the  Fall  and  Winter  terms  the  room  is  used  for  dis- 
section; in  the  Spring  term  it  is  used  for  a  course  in  histology. 


DEPARTMENT  OF  ANATOMY -A  CORNER  OF  THE  DISSECTING  ROOM,  WHERE  BOOKS,  MODELS, 
ETC.,  ARE  KEPT  FOR  STUDENT  REFERENCE 


Indiana  University 

similar  to  that  of  the  best  medical  schools.  The  study-room  collection  will, 
when  completed,  contain  models,  longitudinal  and  transverse  sections  of  the 
body,  dissections  of  every  portion  of  the  body  to  show  superficial  and  deep 
structures,  to  all  of  which  the  student  may  have  access  at  any  time  for  aid  in 
his  work.  The  dissecting  room  is  a  large,  airy,  well-lighted  room.  The 
floor  has  been  specially  prepared  so  as  to  be  easily  cleaned.  Twenty-five 


DEPARTMENT  OF  PHYSIOLOGY -LABORATORY 

Bausch  and  Lomb  microscopes  of  high  grade  are  provided  for  the  work  in 
histology.    Thirteen  courses  are  offered  at  present  in  this  Department. 

18.   Department          The  work  in  physiology  has  hitherto  been  given  in  the  Department  of 

of  Physiology.       Zoology.     For  the  coming  year  (1904-1905)  the  work  will  be  modified  and 

enlarged,  and  for  the  first  time  grouped  into  an  independent  Department  of 

144 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

Physiology.  Five  courses  are  announced,  of  which  two  are  introductory  and 
elementary  and  intended  for  the  general  student,  and  three  are  more  ad- 
vanced and  intended  for  students  in  the  School  of  Medicine,  for  teachers  of 
science,  and  for  others  desiring  a  more  thorough  training  in  physiology.  The 
Department  is  providing  a  well-equipped  laboratory  for  experimental  work 
in  physiology.  It  is  supplied  with  manikin  and  other  models  and  charts, 
kymographs,  inductoria,  sphygmographs,  cardiographs,  plethysmographs, 
stethoscopes,  manometers,  tambours,  htemometers,  hsemocytometers,  peri- 
meters, ophthalmoscopes,  artificial  eyes,  etc.,  necessary  for  the  performance  of 
the  important  experiments  in  physiology  and  for  special  work.  A  sufficient 
number  of  sets  of  these  instruments  is  provided,  so  that  the  students  working 
in  groups  of  two  can  perform  all  of  the  more  important  experiments  for 
themselves,  the  endeavor  being  to  place  the  work  upon  a  thoroughly  experi- 
mental basis.  The  Department  now  takes  about  a  dozen  of  the  more  im- 
portant English,  German  and  French  physiological  journals,  and  possesses 
many  of  the  standard  works  in  physiology. 

Instruction  in  this  subject  was  added  to  the  University  curriculum  in  u>.  Department 
1896,  and  facilities  for  the  work  have  since  been  steadily  increased;  but 
the  work  in  fine  arts  has  not  as  yet  been  constituted  a  study  in  which  a 
major  subject  may  be  chosen.  Accompanying  cuts  give  views  of  the  drawing 
and  lecture  room  of  the  Department.  In  point  of  equipment,  the  aim  has 
been  to  increase  yearly  the  number  of  photographs,  now  amounting  to  sev- 
eral thousand,  of  subjects  in  architecture,  sculpture,  and  painting.  These 
photographs  are  used  to  illustrate  the  lectures  and  are  always  accessible 
to  students.  To  the  same  end  casts,  charts  and  models  are  added  from 
time  to  time,  and  the  University  Library  has  purchased,  besides  the  com- 
moner books  of  reference,  a  considerable  number  of  valuable  works,  old 
and  new,  relating  to  the  fine  arts,  and  especially  to  architecture.  It  lias 
not  been  forgotten  also  that  a  University  Department  of  Fine  Arts  should 
have  its  museum — no  matter  how  small  in  the  beginning — of  really  fine 
things;  because,  in  the  pursuit  of  these  studies,  the  purpose  of  which  is 
to  awaken  appreciation  and  to  develop  critical  power,  original,  even  though 
slight  works  of  masters,  cannot  fail  to  inspire  the  student,  whose  time 
must  be  devoted  mainly  to  reading  and  hearing  about,  and  examining  repro- 

(11)  145 


Indiana  University 

ductions  of,  the  works  of  masters.  Among  the  material  of  this  sort  owned 
by  Indiana  University  may  be  mentioned  a  fine  early  drawing  by  J.  M. 
Turner;  two  drawings,  one  of  them  a  water  color,  by  Samuel  Prout;  a 
typical  piece  of  color  drawing  by  the  English  William  Hunt ;  two  drawings, 
one  very  characteristic,  by  John  Ruskin;  together  with  others  by  living 


DEPARTMENT  OF   FIXE  ARTS-A  PART  OF  THE  LECTURE  AND  DRAWING  ROOM 

artists  of  repute.  The  collection  contains  wood  and  metal  engravings,  and 
etchings  by  Albert  Diirer,  Marc  Antonio  Raimondi,  Hollar,  Richard  Earlom, 
Prout,  Harding  and  John  Lewis,  Hogarth,  and  many  others.  In  addition 
to  these,  all  of  them  original  works  of  first-rate  quality,  there  are  a  number 
of  the  peerless  landscapes  from  Turner's  'Liber  Studiorum ;'  these  represent 
the  rare  etchings  for  this  work,  and  several  states  of  the  completed  mezzo- 
tints. 

i  i<; 


Departments  of  Liberal  Arts 

The  teaching  in  the  Department  consists  of  lectures  and  recitations, 
accompanied  with  instruction  about  the  use  of  lead,  ink  and  water  colors; 
its  aim  is  to  lead  students  to  an  appreciation  and  understanding  of  the 
works  of  the  greatest  masters  of  architecture,  sculpture  and  painting,  rather 
than  to  train  them  technically  for  the  practice  of  any  one  of  these  arts. 


DEPARTMENT  OF   FINE  ARTS  — ANOTHER  PART  OF  THE  LECTURE  AND  DRAWING  ROOM 

Separate  gymnasiums,  and  separate  courses  in  physical  training,  under   Physical 
competent  instructors,    are   provided   for   both   men    and   women   students.    ( 
Both  gymnasiums  are  supplied  with  baths  and  lockers.     The  women's  gym- 
nasium  is  equipped  with   Swedish   apparatus ;   the  men's  with   the   usual 
apparatus  and  appliances.     In  both  gymnasiums  regular  class  work  is  given, 
supplementing  such  athletic  sports  as  tennis  and  basketball  for  the  women ; 

147 


Indiana  University 

tennis,  basketball,  football,  baseball,  and  track  training  for  the  men.  For 
both  the  men  and  the  women  courses  in  physiology  and  hygiene  are  given 
— for  the  men  by  the  director  of  the  men's  gymnasium,  and  for  the  women 
by  a  practicing  woman  physician.  Physical  examinations  are  given  both 
men  and  women,  and  exercises  prescribed  according  to  individual  needs. 
The  director  of  the  women's  gymnasium  gives,  in  the  Spring  term,  a  course 
in  theory  and  practice  for  women  who  wish  to  direct  physical  training 
in  the  public  schools.  Physical  training  in  the  University  is  not  compulsory ; 
but  a  small  amount  of  credit  is  given  those  students  who  take  regular  class 
work,  and  comply  with  certain  other  requirements. 


148 


RELATION   OF   THE   UNIVERSITY  TO   THE 
SCHOOL  SYSTEM   OF  THE   STATE 

FORMER   PREPARATORY    DEPARTMENT 

'  A  Preparatory  Department  was  maintained  in  connection  with  the  reg-   Early  attempts 
ular  Collegiate  Department  from  the  first,  and  was  not  really  discontinued   to  abohsh  Pre" 

1  •*•  ...  paratory  Depart- 

until  after  1890.  This  curtailment  of  the  course  of  instruction  in  the  ment  (1869-73). 
University  was  the  final  outcome  of  a  long  process  of  adjustment  between 
the  University  and  the  high  schools  of  the  State.  In  1869  an  effort  was 
made  hy  the  Board  of  Trustees  to  abolish  this  Department,  in  the  belief 
that  "it  is  no  part  of  the  legitimate  business  of  the  University  to  furnish 
instruction  in  the  branches  usually  taught  in  the  common  schools."  There 
seems  to  have  remained,  however,  a  considerable  demand  for  instruction 
in  work  lower  than  the  Freshman  grade.  In  the  same  year  with  the  state- 
ment that  the  Preparatory  Department  as  such  had  been  discontinued,  we 
find  the  enrollment  of  a  so-called  "sub-Freshman  class;"  and  in  1872  the 
following  announcement  appeared :  "It  is  no  part  of  the  legitimate  business 
of  the  University  to  furnish  instruction  in  the  branches  usually  taught 
in  the  common  schools,  but  opportunity  is  afforded  to  those  deficient  in 
Latin,  Greek  and  algebra  to  bring  up  those  studies  in  a  sub-Freshman 
class."  The  next  year,  however,  sees  a  complete  retreat  from  the  position 
taken  in  1869,  and  it  is  announced  that  "Arrangements  will  be  made  for 
a  Preparatory  Department  in  connection  with  the  University,  in  which 
students  will  be  fitted  to  enter  the  Freshman  class,  and  those  deficient  in 
sub-Freshman  branches  will  have  an  opportunity  of  reviewing  them  under 
the  instructions  of  able  and  thorough  teachers." 

149 


Indiana  University 


Bloom  ingt  on 
High  School  as 
Preparatory  De- 
partment (1874- 
85). 


Revival  of  Pre- 
paratory Depart- 
ment (1885);  its 
abolition  (1890). 


Admission  to 
Preparatory  De- 
partment. 


In  1874,  accordingly,  provision  was  made  "for  a  Preparatory  Depart- 
ment for  the  University,  in  connection  with  the  High  School  at  Blooming- 
ton,"  and  not  only  were  the  principal  of  the  High  School,  with  his  assistants, 
counted  as  members  of  the  University  Faculty,  but  at  least  in  the  later 
period  of  this  arrangement  the  principal  and  the  first  assistant  were  ap- 
pointed and  paid  by  the  University  Board  of  Trustees. 

In  the  first  year  of  President  Jordan's  administration  (1885)  plans 
were  made  for  separating  the  Preparatory  Department  from  the  Bloom- 
ington  High  School;  and  in  the  next  year  the  following  announcement 
appears:  "The  connection  which  formerly  existed  between  the  Preparatory 
Department  and  the  Bloomington  High  School  was  dissolved  at  the  end  of 
the  last  year.  The  work  of  the  Preparatory  School  is  now  carried  on  in 
the  former  main  building  of  the  University,  which  gives  to  all  of  its  classes 
an  abundance  of  room."  The  growth  of  the  Department  from  this  time 
seems  to  have  been  "steady  and  rapid ;"  and  this  new  arrangement  continued 
until  1890,  after  which  date  the  Department  went  out  of  existence. 

The  requirements  for  admission  to  the  Preparatory  Department,  so  far 
as  requirements  were  made  at  all,  did  not  vary  much  at  different  times. 
From  1850,  "It  is  required  that  the  applicant  be  able  to  read  and  write." 
From  1855,  "All  candidates  for  admission  into  the  Preparatory  Department 
must  be  at  least  twelve  years  of  age.  They  will  be  examined,  and  must 
prove  themselves  able  to  write  a  legible  hand,  to  spell  with  correctness 
English  words  in  common  use,  and  to  read  plain  English  prose  with  ease 
and  intelligibleness." 

In  1866  the  age  requirement  was  reduced  to  eleven  years.  But  with 
this  exception  the  admission  requirement  remained  the  same  until  the  De- 
partment was  temporarily  discontinued  in  1869.  After  its  re-establishment 
the  maximum  requirement  was  "a  good  knowledge  of  the  'Common  Branches' 
— arithmetic,  geography,  English  grammar,  reading,  writing  and  spelling, 
with  the  history  of  the  United  States.  Each  applicant  must  be  at  least 
fourteen  years  old  and  should  have  accomplished  the  equivalent  of  the  first 
year  of  the  High  School.  Unless  admitted  on  a  school  certificate  of  profi- 
ciency, or  a  teacher's  license,  he  will  be  examined  on  the  above  mentioned 
subjects." 


150 


Relation  to  School  System 

The  first  catalogue  of  the  University   (1831)    announces   "courses  of  course  of  study, 
instruction"  in  the  Preparatory  Department  as  follows :    "English  grammar,    ] 
arithmetic,  geography,  Ross's  Latin  grammar,  Viri  Roma?,  Csesar  (Mairs' 
Introduction),   Compositions  in  English."     Between  the  Preparatory  De- 
partment and  the  Freshman  class  there  appears  also  in  this  same  catalogue 
a  so-called  "First  Class,"  which  seems  to  have  been  intermediary  between 
the  two.     The  course  of  instruction  in  the  "First  Class"  was  as  follows: 
"Sallust,  Cicero's  De  Omciis,  Cicero's  Select  Orations,  Ovid,  Virgil,  Horace, 
Juvenal,  Cicero's  De  Oratore,  Valpy's  Greek  Grammar,  Compositions,  Latin 
themes." 

In  the  middle  period  of  the  Department's  existence — say,  for  example, 
in  1867,  just  before  the  Board  of  Trustees  decided  upon  abolishing  prepar- 
atory instruction — the  Preparatory  Department  was  represented  by  the  fol- 
lowing course:  "Ancient  and  modern  geography,  Butler's  English  gram- 
mar, arithmetic  (Ray's),  algebra,  Latin  grammar,  Smith's  Principia  Latina, 
Greek  grammar  and  exercises  (Harkness'),  Cornelius  Nepos,  Virgil,  Latin 
and  Greek  exercises,  English  composition  and  declamation." 

The  Preparatory  Department  seems  at  first  to  have  included  work 
for  one  year  only,  but  from  1855  the  students  are  divided  into  two  classes 
for  two  years  of  study.  From  1862,  moreover,  students  pursuing  a  "Pre- 
paratory Scientific"  course  are  distinguished  from  those  pursuing  the  "Regu- 
lar Preparatory"  course. 

After  the  re-establishment  of  the  Preparatory  Department  in  connection   course  of  study 
with  the  Bloomington  High  School,  the  course  covered  two  full  years,  the   at  the  time 

0  °  7  when  abolished 

same  instruction  being  given  to  all  students.  For  1890,  the  last  year  of 
the  Department's  existence,  the  following  course  of  instruction  was  an- 
nounced : 

JUNIOR  YEAR — 

Fall  Term.  Latin  Grammar;  Algebra;  English— (1)  American  Poets,  (2)  Analy- 
sis of  Sentences. 

Winter  Term.  Latin  Grammar;  Algebra;  English— (3)  American  Prose,  (2) 
Principles  and  rules  of  Composition,  with  essay  writing. 

Spring  Term.  Latin— Cfesar;  Algebra;  English— (1)  Victorian  Literature,  (2) 
Figures  and  Essays. 

151 


Indiana  University 


SENIOR  YEAR— 

Fall  Term.     Latin— Cicero;  Geometry;  General  History. 

Winter  Term.    Latin— Cicero,  Latin  Composition;  Geometry;  General  History. 

Spring  Term.    Latin  Composition;  Physiology;  General  History. 


COMMISSIONED  HIGH  SCHOOL  SYSTEM 


Rise  of  the  Com-          The  maintenance  of  a  Preparatory  Department  of  the  University  is  a 
missioned  High 
School  System. 


witness  to  the  unsatisfactory  relation  which  long  existed  between  the  Uni- 


versity and  the  school  system  of  the  State.  The  final  adjustment  of  this 
relation  gave  rise  to  the  system  of  Commissioned  High  Schools.  In  the 
annual  report  of  the  University  for  the  academic  year  1874  (which  includes 
the  University  catalogue)  we  read  the  following:  "The  want  of  a  proper 
adjustment  of  the  High  School  and  Collegiate  courses  of  study  has  been 
long  and  deeply  felt.  This  want  of  unity  has  been,  for  years,  the  subject 
of  earnest  and  protracted  discussions  in  State  Teachers'  and  Collegiate 
Associations,  in  State  Institutes,  Educational  Conventions  and  the  State 
Board  of  Education.  The  much  desired  union  has  at  length  been  reached; 
and  the  method  by  which  it  has  been  attained  will  be  explained  by  the 
following  documents,  together  with  the  reasons  of  the  change  in  the  cur- 
riculum of  the  University.  The  authorities  of  the  University  rejoice  in 
this  happy  adjustment  of  the  whole  course  of  instruction  in  the  educational 
system  of  Indiana,  by  which  the  student  can  pass  without  interruption 
or  delay  through  all  the  grades,  from  the  Primary  through  the  Interme- 
diate, High  School,  Collegiate  and  University  courses  of  instruction,  and 
thus  thoroughly  equip  himself  for  life's  duties.  The  hearty  support  and 
active  cooperation  of  teachers,  principals  of  High  Schools,  County  Super- 
intendents and  all  the  friends  of  education  in  these  new  arrangements 
are  earnestly  desired." 

The  first  of  the  documents  referred  to  is  the  following,  adopted  May 
5,  1873,  at  a  meeting  held  in  Indianapolis: 

Recommenda-  Resolved,  That  the  State  Board  of  Education  recommend  the  Trustees  and  Faculty 

tion  of  State  of  the  Indiana  University,  in  order  to  unite  the  High  Schools  of  the  State  and  the 

Board  of  Educa-     University  more  closely  together,  to  so  modify  the  Preparatory  course  of  study,  as 
tion  (1873). 

152 


Relation  to  School  System 


to  admit  students  to  the  Freshman  class  without  the  knowledge  of  Greek,  putting 
in  the  place  thereof  an  equivalent  in  the  increased  amount  of  Mathematics  and 
Science. 

A  second  document  consists  of  the  record  of  a  meeting  "of  the  Super- 
intendents and  Principals  of  schools  having  an  enrollment  of  four  hundred 
or  more  pupils,"  held  in  the  city  of  Indianapolis,  May  7  of  the  same  year, 
"for  the  consideration  of  matters  pertaining  to  the  welfare  of  the  schools," 
at  which  the  following  resolutions  were  unanimously  adopted: 

Resolved,  That  we,  the  members  of  the  Convention  of  Superintendents  of  the  High    Resolutions  of 

Schools  of  the  State,  respectfully  represent  that  we  fully  approve  the  plan  of  uniting    Superintendents 

and  Principals 
the  High  Schools  with  the  University  by  the  method  proposed,  viz.,  that  the  High    (1873). 

Schools  shall  prepare  pupils  in  Orthography,  Arithmetic,  English  Grammar,  Geog- 
raphy, Physiology,  United  States  History,  Algebra,  Geometry,  Latin  Grammar,  Caesar 
and  Virgil,  which  shall  admit  them  to  the  Freshman  class  without  the  necessity  of 
preparing  them  in  the  study  of  Greek;  and  that  the  study  of  the  advanced  Mathe- 
matics be  considered  an  equivalent  for  the  additional  amount  of  Greek  now  required 
for  admission. 

Resolved,  That  Mr.  Gow  present  the  above  resolution  to  the  Trustees  of  the 
University,  at  their  meeting  in  June,  as  the  expression  of  our  views. 

When  these  resolutions  were  presented  to  the  Faculty  and  Trustees  of 
the  University,  the  following  action  was  taken  by  the  Board  of  Trustees : 

Ordered  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  Indiana  University,  that  the  minimum  stand-    Action  of  the 

ard  of  admission  to  the  Freshman  class  in  the  University,  shall  be  a  creditable  exam-    Board  of 

Trustees, 
ination    in    Orthography,    Reading,    Geography,    English    Grammar,    United    States 

History,  Composition,  Word  Analysis,  Physiology,  Algebra,  Geometry,  Latin  Gram- 
mar, Latin  Prose  Composition,  Caesar  and  Virgil,  or  their  equivalents. 

Second,  in  order  to  bring  the  University  into  closer  connection-  with  the  High 
Schools  of  the  State,  we  recommend  the  following  plan,  viz.,  a  certificate  from  cer- 
tain High  Schools  (the  schools  to  be  hereafter  named  by  the  State  Board  of  Edu- 
cation) of  a  satisfactory  examination  sustained  in  the  Preparatory  Course,  will  entitle 
the  bearer  to  admittance  to  our  Freshman  class.  And  no  one  will  be  admitted 
as  a  student  in  the  University  (except  those  admitted  to  select  studies),  without 
such  certificate  from  the  authorities  of  the  High  Schools,  the  High  School  of  Bloom- 
ington  being  named  among  the  number. 

153 


Indiana  University 


Effects  of  the 
omission  of 
Greek  from  en- 
trance require- 
ments. 


Dr.  Wylie,  in  his  History  of  Indiana  University  (p.  78),  says:  "The 
part  of  this  arrangement  that  Greek  should  not  be  required  for  entrance  into 
the  Freshman  class  was  quite  an  innovation,  and  was  regarded  by  many 
scholars  and  literary  institutions  throughout  the  State  with  great  disfavor, 
and  as  lowering  the  college  standard  and  a  step  downward  and  backward.  No 
evil  seems,  however,  to  have  resulted  from  it;  the  professor  of  Greek,  the 
late  Professor  Ballantine,  found  that  in  a  year  after  the  change  had  been 
made  he  had  the  scholars  as  far  advanced  as  under  the  old  arrangement. 
This  may  be  ascribed  to  the  better  and  more  uniform  training  in  elementary 
instruction  under  the  Professor  himself  than  the  pupil  had  under  different 
instructors,  some  better  and  some  worse,  and  each  having  his  own  peculiar- 
ities." 

In  the  University  catalogue  for  the  year  1875  there  appears  the  following 
report  of  the  Faculty  to  the  State  Board  of  Education,  showing  the  results  of 
the  recent  changes — a  report  which  deserves  to  be  quoted  in  full : 


Report  of  the 
Faculty  to  State 
Board  of  Educa- 
tion (1875). 


The  want  of  a  proper  adjustment  of  the  High  Schools  of  the  State  to  the  Colleges 
had  been  long  and  deeply  felt.  After  much  discussion  in  State,  Collegiate  and  High 
School  Associations,  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Convention  of  Superintendents 
of  Public  Schools,  held  in  the  City  of  Indianapolis  in  the  spring  of  1873,  the  State 
Board  of  Education  recommended  and  the  Trustees  of  Indiana  State  University 
adopted  a  modification  in  the  Collegiate  course  of  study.  This  change  was  made 
for  the  purpose  of  uniting,  harmonizing  and  completing  the  school  system  of  Indiana. 
Middle  education  is  the  problem  of  the  age.  Where  shall  students  be  prepared  for 
college?  This  is  the  real  question.  It  is  proposed  to  make  the  High  Schools  the 
middle  schools  of  Indiana,  and  thus  filling  the  vacuum  before  existing  between  the 
district  schools  and  the  University.  To  perfect  this  union,  it  was  determined  that 
the  study  of  Greek  should  be  commenced  in  the  Freshman  year,  and  continued 
through  the  four  years  of  the  college  course,  thus  making  the  whole  amount  of 
Greek  equal  to  that  of  both  the  preparatory  and  collegiate  Greek  taught  in  the  best 
institutions  in  the  land.  To  compensate  for  this  preparatory  Greek,  transferred  to 
the  collegiate  course,  Higher  Algebra,  Geometry,  Sentential  Analysis  and  Physiology 
were  placed  in  the  preparatory  course,  and  made  requisites  for  admission  to  the 
University.  This  change,  while  it  abates  nothing  from  the  extent  of  thoroughness 
of  the  usual  curriculum,  both  preparatory  and  collegiate,  is  of  the  greatest  impor- 
tance, as  it  unites  together  and  harmonizes  all  the  sections  of  the  public  schools  of 


154 


Relation  to  School  System 


the  State  into  one  complete  system.  The  student  can  now  pass  directly  from  the 
primary,  through  the  intermediate  grades  and  High  Schools,  to  the  University,  with- 
out delay  or  interruption.  He  is  not  now  required,  after  completing  his  High  School 
course,  to  spend,  as  heretofore,  two  years  in  some  preparatory  school  or  academy,  in 
order  to  bring  up  his  Greek,  and  fit  himself  for  the  Freshman  class. 

As  this  modification  aimed  to  make  the  High  Schools  of  the  State  preparatory    "Initiatory 
schools  for  the  State  University,  it  was  also  provided  that  the  work  done  in  the    examinatio 
High  Schools,  which  had  attained  the  proper  grade,  should  be  recognized  and  credited 
by  the  University.    Hence,  applicants  presenting  certificates  from  the  Superintendents 
of  those  High  Schools,  which  are  commissioned  by  the  State  Board  of  Education, 
certifying  that  they  had  completed  the  preparatory  studies,  should  be  admitted  to 
the  Freshman  class,  without  further  examination.    All  applicants  not  thus  furnished 
with  certificates  were  to  be  examined  by  the  Superintendent  and  Principal  of  the 
Higl*  School  of  Bloomington. 

These  examinations  are  conducted  in  writing,  and  are  very  thorough.  They  em- 
brace ten  questions  upon  each  of  the  studies  in  the  preparatory  course;  and  a  high 
grade  in  each  is  required  for  admission. 

The  time  has  been  too  short,  only  eighteen  months  having  elapsed  since  its  adop-  "Results; 
tion,  to  test  fully  the  wisdom  and  feasibility  of  the  present  plan.  Thus  far,  however, 
the  results  have  been  favorable.  In  1873,  one  hundred  and  nine  applied  for  admis- 
sion to  the  University;  of  whom  fifty  passed  satisfactory  examinations,  and  were 
admitted  on  the  certificate  of  the  Superintendent  and  Principal  of  the  High  School 
of  Bloomington.  Fifty-nine,  having  failed  to  pass  satisfactory  examinations,  were 
rejected.  In  1874,  there  were  fewer  rejections;  as  the  terms  of  admission  and  the 
high  grade  of  scholarship  required,  had  become  more  generally  known. 

Of  the  twenty-one  High  Schools  commissioned  by  the  State  Board  of  Education 
to  prepare  and  examine  students  for  the  State  University,  only  a  very  few  have 
sent  students.  Greensburg  has  sent  three;  Evansville,  two;  New  Albany,  two;  Peru, 
one,  and  Bloomington,  twenty-six.  The  larger  part  of  these  twenty-six  had  come 
from  other  sections  of  the  State  to  Bloomington,  to  prepare  for  college.  All  the 
others,  who  have  been  admitted  to  the  Freshman  class,  have  been  examined  by  the 
Superintendent  and  Principal  of  the  High  School  of  Bloomington. 

The  effect  upon  the  High  Schools  of  the  State  has  been  very  beneficial.  They 
have  been  inspired  with  greater  zeal  and  energy  in  the  work  of  education,  and  the 
standard  of  scholarship  has  been  elevated.  The  most  of  the  High  Schools  which 
have  not  already  been  commissioned  to  prepare  students  for  the  University,  are 
striving  to  reach  that  grade  which  will  entitle  them  to  that  honor.  The  failure  to 
send  students  to  the  University  was  not  for  the  want  of  a  disposition  to  do  so, 

155 


Indiana  University 


"The  effect  upon 
the  standard  of 
scholarship  in 
the  University; 


"Classical 
Course ; 


"The  number  of 
students." 


on  the  part  of  the  officers  of  the  High  Schools.  These  have  generally  regarded  it 
an  honor  to  receive  a  commission  from  the  State  Board,  and  have  cordially  coop- 
erated to  make  the  plan  a  success. 

The  grade  of  scholarship  of  the  students  of  the  University  has  been  greatly  ad- 
vanced. In  accuracy,  thoroughness,  comprehensiveness,  and  maturity  of  mind  and 
culture,  the  Freshman  class  is  nearly  equal  to  the  Sophomore  of  former  years;  and 
the  same  may  be  said  of  the  higher  classes.  It  is  gratifying  to  every  lover  of  sound 
learning,  to  witness  the  vigor  of  thought  and  breadth  of  information,  with  which  they 
grapple  with  subjects  presented  for  their  investigation.  Their  command  of  the 
English  language  and  its  resources  is  also  of  a  high  order. 

Since  the  change  has  been  made  by  which  Greek  is  begun  in  the  Freshman  year, 
the  number  of  students  taking  the  classical  course  has  greatly  increased.  Formerly 
one-half  of  the  Freshman  class  were  scientific;  now  nine-tenths  are  classical.  Such, 
according  to  present  indications,  will  continue  to  be  the  result  of  the  present  arrange- 
ments. Instead  of  lowering  the  standard  of  education,  the  present  plan  has  greatly 
elevated  it;  and  instead  of  the  ancient  classics  being  dishonored  and  ignored,  they 
are  now  better  taught,  made  popular,  and  greatly  honored.  Nor  do  we  deem  it  too 
much  to  say,  that  classical  education  has  been  greatly  benefited  by  the  recent  arrange- 
ments. 

While  there  has  been  no  diminution  in  the  number  of  students,  but  on  the  contrary, 
a  steady  increase,  yet  the  number  in  attendance  is  less  by  one  hundred  per  cent, 
probably,  than  it  would  have  been  under  the  old  regime,  several  causes  having  com- 
bined to  produce  this  result: 

1.  The  complete  separation  of  the  preparatory  from  the  collegiate  department 
has  diminished  the  aggregate  number  of  students.     No  student,  in  the  preparatory 
department,  is  permitted  to  recite  in  any  of  the  college  classes,  and  no  student  in 
the  select  course  in  college  is  allowed  to  recite  in  classes  belonging  to  the  preparatory 
department.     This  complete  isolation  of  the  two  departments  cuts  off  a  considerable 
number  of  irregulars,  who  desire  to  recite  in  preparatory  and  collegiate  studies  at 
the  same  time.     This  was  allowed  in  this  University  some  years  ago,  and  is  still  in 
vogue  in  most  of  the  colleges  in  the  West. 

2.  This  arrangement  tends  to  diminish  numbers,  in  the  second  place,  since  the 
preparatory  students  do  not  meet  in  the  University  chapel  for  prayers  each  morning 
with  the  students  of  the  collegiate  and  professional  grade;  nor  do  the  two  departments 
intermingle,  as  they  do  in  most  Western  institutions,  in  which  students  of  the  pre- 
paratory course  mingle  indiscriminately  with  those  of  collegiate  grade,  and  recite  to 
the  same  professors.     Many  prefer  institutions  where  such  irregularity  prevails. 


156 


Relation  to  School  System 


3.  The  rigidness  of  the  initiatory  examinations,  and  the  thoroughness  of  scholar- 
ship required  for  admission  to  the  University  tends  also  to  lessen  the  number  of  stu- 
dents.   The  sifting  process  is  now  applied  at  the  door  of  admission  to  the  University, 
instead  of  being  postponed,  and  too  charitably  applied,  during  the  collegiate  course. 
The  custom  of  most  of  the  colleges  in  the  State  has  been  to  admit  students  upon  an 
oral  and  very  superficial  examination,  leaving  their  subsequent  standing  to  be  deter- 
mined by  their  success  in  their  studies.     This  course  of  necessity  produces  irregu- 
larity, lowers  the  grade  of  scholarship,  and  leads  to  many  difficulties. 

The  State  University  now  admits  only  those  who  pass  satisfactory  examinations, 
and  are  up  in  all  their  studies.  This  arrangement,  while  it  has  introduced  order, 
regularity  and  system,  and  elevated  the  standard  of  scholarship,  has  diminished  the 
number,  which  otherwise  would  have  attended  the  University.  Nearly  one  hundred 
applicants  for  admission  to  the  Freshman  class  in  the  last  two  years  have  been 
rejected. 

4.  The  elevation  of  the  standard  of  scholarship  leads  some  to  prefer  other  insti- 
tutions where  college  honors  are  more  easily  won.    The  grade  of  recitations  requisite 
for  graduation  from  one  class  to  another  higher,  is  seventy  per  cent,  on  the  general 
average,  and  in  no  one  study  must  the  student  fall  below  fifty  per  cent.    A  student 
who  fails  to  reach  this  standard  falls  back  into  the  next  lower  class.    Some  who  have 
thus  failed,  have  gone  to  other  colleges,  rather  than  to  go  back  into  the  lower  classes, 
as  they  could  there  go  on  with  their  class,  and  graduate  a  year  sooner  than  at  the 
State  University.    As,  therefore,  it  might  have  been  reasonably  expected,  the  number 
of  students  in  attendance  is  probably  one  hundred  per  cent,  less  than  it  would  have 
been,  had  the  old  order  and  regulations  continued.     But  what  is  lost  in  quantity  is 
more  than  made  up  in  quality.     Yet  there  has  been  no  decrease  in  the  number  of 
students,  as  has  been  incorrectly  stated,  but  on  the  contrary,  the  increase  has  been 
regular,  as  the  catalogues  of  the  last  five  years  will  show: 

In  the  year  1870-1,  aggregate  number 301 

In  the  year  1871-2,  aggregate  number 358 

In  the  year  1872-3,  aggregate  number 3G8 

In  the  year  1873-4,  aggregate  number 371 

In  the  year  1874-5,  thus  far  in  the  year 389 

The  number  of  students  at  Bloomington,  not  counting  those  of  the  Medical  Depart- 
ment, is  as  follows: 


157 


Indiana  University 


1870-1  (including  Normal  Class) 301 

1871-2  (Normal  Class  abolished) 268 

1872-3,  aggregate  number  264 

1873-4,  aggregate  number 268 

1874-5,  aggregate  number  282 

It  is  the  aim  of  the  Faculty  and  Trustees  to  do  work  of  the  highest  grade  and 
order,  making  thorough  scholars  and  elevating  the  standard  of  scholarship,  and  when 
this  is  secured,  numbers  will  not  be  wanting;  but  the  popular  sentiment  has,  from 
the  beginning,  judged  the  merits  of  institutions  of  learning  by  the  size  of  the  crowd 
that  attends  them,  not  taking  into  account  discipline,  thoroughness  of  scholarship, 
and  training;  as  if  it  were  the  sole  business  of  a  college  to  gain  numbers  and  to 
graduate  a  crowd  instead  of  scholars. 

The  present  plan  we  believe  to  be  working  well  for  the  interests  of  education  in 
Indiana,  and,  if  it  were  comprehended,  it  would  not  only  be  approved,  but  highly 
commended  by  the  people.  It  rests  with  the  educators  and  friends  of  education  in 
Indiana,  whether  the  new  measures  adopted  by  the  University  will  soon  become 
what  it  aspires  to  be,  the  head  and  crown  of  the  public  school  system;  a  University 
not  only  in  name,  but  in  reality,  ranking  among  the  very  first  in  the  land,  an  honor 
to  the  State,  and  a  source  of  pride  to  all  her  citizens. 

CYKUS  NUTT,  President, 

T.  A.  WYLIE,  Professor  of  Natural  Philosophy. 

R.  OWEN,  Professor  of  Natural  Science. 

D.  KIEKWOOD,  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

E.  BALLANTINE,  Professor  of  Greek. 

J.  THOMPSON,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering. 

A.  ATWATER,  Professor  of  Latin. 

G.  W.  Hoss,  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

S.  P.  MORRISON,  Assistant  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

T.  C.  VAN  NttYS,  Professor  of  Chemistry. 

This  report  was  accompanied  by  the  following  circular  of  the  Faculty : 

To  tlie  Superintendents  of  the  Public  Schools,  and  County  Superintendents: 

Circular  of  the  The  founders  of  this   Commonwealth,    in  the  original   Constitution   of  Indiana, 

Faculty,  1875.        provided  for  a  system  of  Free  Public  Schools,  to  include  in  regular  gradation  the 

district  and  intermediate  schools  and  a  State  University.     The  same  wise  and  liberal 

158 


Relation  to  School  System 


provision  is  sanctioned  in  the  present  Constitution,  while  the  laws  of  the  State  recog- 
nize the  institution  at  Bloomington,  Monroe  County,  as  the  State  University. 

Although  the  State  University  and  the  graded  schools  by  the  above  constitutional 
and  legislative  provisions  form  one  and  the  same  system  of  public  instruction,  they 
have  not,  nntil  recently,  harmoniously  cooperated.  A  plan  for  adjusting  the  University 
course  of  study  to  that  of  the  High  Schools  was  very  maturely  considered  by  the  State 
Board  of  Education,  by  a  convention  of  superintendents  of  public  schools,  and  by  the 
Trustees  and  Faculty  of  the  State  University;  and,  as  the  result,  the  classical  course 
was  enlarged  to  include  all  preparatory  Greek,  and  the  mathematical  and  scientific 
courses  correspondingly  diminished;  the  preparatory  Latin  and  the  excluded  mathe- 
matics and  science  being  incorporated  in  the  High  School  course,  which  is  as  follows, 
viz.:  Orthography,  arithmetic,  geography,  English  grammar,  algebra  (both  elementary 
and  higher),  geometry  (four  books),  physiology,  history  of  the  United  States,  Latin 
grammar,  Latin  reader,  Latin  prose  composition,  two  books  of  Caesar,  and  two  books 
of  Virgil,  or  their  equivalents  in  Latin. 

All  High  Schools  in  the  State  which  are  prepared  to  teach  the  above  named 
branches  and  possess  the  other  qualifications  prescribed  by  the  State  Board  of  Educa- 
tion are  entitled  to  a  commission  to  prepare  students  for  the  State  University,  and 
to  grant  certificates  of  proficiency  in  the  above  studies,  which  shall  entitle  the  holder 
to  admission  to  the  Freshman  class  of  the  University  without  further  examination. 
This  commission  also  authorizes  the  superintendent  to  examine  any  person  who  may 
apply,  and  to  grant  a  certificate,  if  the  applicant  is  found  thoroughly  proficient  in  all 
the  studies  of  the  Preparatory  Course.  The  trouble  and  expense  of  a  journey  to 
Bloomington  may  thereby  be  in  some  cases  avoided. 

It  is  earnestly  requested  that  notice  be  given  throughout  the  section  of  the  State 
in  the  vicinity  of  each  designated  High  School,  at  what  time  applications  may  be  made 
for  examination,  and  that  the  President  of  the  University  be  duly  notified  of  the 
results  of  these  examinations. 

This  system  may  not  be  wholly  satisfactory  to  all  of  the  friends  of  the  public 
schools  in  Indiana,  but  it  certainly  has  great  merit;  and  shall  it  not  be  faithfully  sus- 
tained and  its  provisions  executed,  until  an  opportune  moment  for  its  amendment 
shall  arrive? 

The  State  University,  chief  public  school  of  the  State,  may  not  be  free  from 
defects,  but  it  is  progressive,  and  it  will  seek  to  know  the  demands  of  popular  educa- 
tion in  Indiana  and  to  meet  and  satisfy  these  fully,  expecting  in  return  to  be  cor- 
dially sustained  and  liberally  supported.  CYRUS  NUTT, 

A.  ATWATEB,  Secretary.  President  of  the  Faculty. 

Bloomington,  Indiana,  April  15,  1875. 

159 


Indiana  University 


Number  of  com-          The  following  table  shows  the  development  of  the  system  of  Commis- 

missionc " 
Schools. 


sioned  High  Schools  in  Indiana  from  its  inception  in  1874  until  the  present 


time: 


.To.  of  .Vo.  of 

Year.                 Srhools.  }'<-nr.                  Schools. 

1S74 21          1889 100 

1875 27          1890 107 

1870 17          1891 108 

1877 28          1892 110 

1878 29          1893 107 

1879 30          1894 112 

1880 33          1895 118 

1881 21          189G 123 

1882 33          1897 130 

1883 38          1898 143 

1884 34          1899 156 

1885 41          1900 158 

1880 83          1901 177 

1887 85          1902 17G 

1888..               ..99  1903..               ..191 


160 


GRADUATE   SCHOOL 


The  first  advanced  degrees  for  work  done  in  course  in  Indiana  TJniver-   Requirements 


for  advanced 
degree 
announcement  of  the  first  definite  scheme  for  graduate  degrees,  as  follows :        1882. 


sity  were  granted  in  1882.     In  the  catalogue  for  that  year  we  find  the 

degrees  in 


FOR  MASTERS'  DEGREES 

1.  Any  graduate  of  this  University,  as  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Letters,  or  Science,  who 
subsequently  completes  a  course  of  study  of  not  less  than  two  years  in  any  reputable 
professional  school  of  Theology,  Law,  Medicine,  Literature,  Music,  Advanced  Science, 
or  the  Mechanic  Arts,  on  presenting  to  the  Faculty  of  this  University  satisfactory 
evidence  that  he  has  thus  completed  any  of  the  professional  courses  named,  and  that 
he  has  maintained  a  good  character,  may  receive  from  the  University  the  Master's 
Degree  of  the  same  name  as  the  Bachelor's  Degree  he  has  already  received. 

2.  Any  graduate  of  this  University,  or  of  any  similar  and  equal  institution,  who 
does  not  pursue  a  professional   course  as  above  described,   may  receive  from   this 
University  a  Master's  Degree,  corresponding  to  his  Bachelor's  Degree,  at  the  expira- 
tion of  three  years  from  the  date  of  graduation;  provided,  he  gives  evidence  of  good 
character  and  completes  a  course  of  study  fairly  equivalent  to  any  of  the  professional 
courses  above  named  under  the  direction  of  the  Faculty  of  this  University,  either  in 
residence  at  the  University  or  in  private,  or  partly  in  residence  and  partly  in  private. 
The  satisfactoriness  of  the  work  to  be  determined  by  an  examination  of  each  candi- 
date by  the  Faculty  of  this  University,  and  by  the  presentation  on  his  part  of  a  credit- 
able thesis  on  some  theme  prescribed  by  this  Faculty.     Provided,  further,  that  the 
three  years  herein  required  may  be  reduced  to  two,  if  the  entire  time  is  spent  by  the 
candidate  in  residence  at  this  University,  or  under  the  immediate  direction  of  its 
Faculty. 

161 


Indiana  University 

FOR  DEGREE  OF  DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  may  be  received  by  the  graduate  of  this 
University,  or  of  any  other  institution  of  like  character  and  equal  rank,  five  years 
after  graduation;  provided,  the  candidate,  in  addition  to  the  requirements  for  the 
Master's  Degree,  as  above  recited,  shall  still  further  pursue  studies  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Faculty  of  this  University,  pass  satisfactory  examinations  in  the  same, 
present  in  print  a  satisfactory  thesis  upon  some  prescribed  or  accepted  subject,  em- 
bodying original  work,  and  maintain  a  good  character.  Provided,  further,  that  the 
five  years  herein  required  may  be  reduced  to  three,  if  the  entire  time  Is  spent  in 
residence  at  this  University,  or  under  the  immediate  direction  of  its  Faculty. 

Modifications  of  In  1885  and  1886  it  was  further  required  that  "A  copy  of  each  thesis 


Presented  for  a  Master's  degree  must  be  deposited  in  the  University  Li- 
brary." In  1885,  it  was  stipulated  that  "The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy 
will  not  be  given  as  an  honorary  degree,  and  it  will  be  given  to  no  one  who 
has  not  obtained  prominence  as  a  special  student  in  some  department  of 
learning."  In  1886  the  time  requirement  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  was  altogether  omitted,  and  the  last  part  of  the  stipulation 
just  mentioned  was  modified  so  as  to  read  as  follows:  "It  will,  farther, 
not  be  given  as  a  result  of  any  examinations  or  of  any  course  of  study 
alone,  but  only  on  evidence  of  original  work  actually  done,  by  some  person 
who  has  achieved  prominence  as  a  special  student  in  some  department  of 
learning." 

It  appears  that  at  first  not  all  the  departments  of  the  University  were 
prepared  to  offer  instruction  of  a  graduate  character.  In  the  catalogue 
for  1885  we  read:  "Students  holding  a  degree  from  Indiana  University, 
or  from  any  college  having  similar  requirements,  may  select  for  themselves 
a  course  of  advanced  work,  in  any  one  or  more  departments  of  the  Uni- 
versity which  may  be  able  to  provide  for  them.  Facilities  for  such  advanced 
work  are  offered  in  most  departments  of  the  University,  especially  in  the 
Departments  of  Mathematics,  Chemistry  and  Biology." 

In  the  following  year  the  latter  part  of  this  announcement  was  modified 
to  read  as  follows:  "Special  courses,  leading  to  the  Master's  degree  (M.A., 
M.S.),  will  be  arranged  to  meet  the  needs  of  each  individual  student. 
The  advantages  offered  in  the  University  for  special  advanced  or  original 

J162 


work  are  now  very  great/  and  it  is  the  aim  of  those  in  control  of  the  'affairs 
of  the  University  to  make  it  the  center  of  such  work  in  the  State  in  all 
departments  within  its  scope."  In  1887  the  following  explanation  also  was 
added :  "As  a  rule,  no  degree  of  any  sort  will  be  given  by  the  University 
to  any  person  who  has  not,  at  some  time,  been  a  matriculated  student  in 
residence  at  the  University.  It  is  not  desired  to  create  at  the  University 
an  'examining  board'  to  certify :  to  the  value  of  work  done  elsewhere." 
As  thus  modified  and  enlarged,  this  announcement  regarding  the  character 
of  the  graduate  instruction  appears  also  in  the  catalogues  for  1888  and 
1889.  Since  1886  the  degree  of  Master  of  Science  has  not  been  granted. 

In  1887,  in  the  same  year  in  which  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts   Requirements 
was  made  the  only  baccalaureate  degree  conferred  by  the  University,  the   degrees  in  1887 
requirements  for  the  graduate  degrees  were  newly  defined  as  follows: 

MASTER  OF  ARTS 

Any  graduate  of  this  University,  or  of  any  similar  institution,  may  receive  from 
this  University  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  (A.M.)  upon  the  completion  of  a  course 
of  advanced  study,  of  not  less  than  one  year,  in  residence  at  the  University,  under  the 
direction  of  the  Faculty,  the  value  of  the  work  to  be  determined  by  an  examination 
of  each  candidate,  and  by  the  presentation  of  a  satisfactory  thesis  on  some  theme 
prescribed  or  accepted  by  the  Faculty;  but  graduates  of  this  University  may,  in 
special  cases,  be  excused  from  residence  though  not  from  examination  at  the  Uni- 
versity. 

Any  graduate  of  this  University  of  three  years'  standing,  who  has  completed  the 
course  of  study  in  a  reputable  professional  school,  on  presenting  to  the  Faculty  of 
this  University  a  creditable  non-professional  thesis,  with  satisfactory  evidence  that 
he  has  maintained  a  good  character,  may  receive  from  this  University  the  degree  of 
Master  of  Arts. 

DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  (Ph.D.)  may  be  received  by  the  graduate  of 
this  University,  or  of  any  other  institution  of  similar  character  and  rank,  upon  the 
completion  of  an  advanced  course  of  study  of  not  less  than  three  years,  at  least  one 
of  which  must  be  spent  in  residence  at  this  University,  the  value  of  the  work  done 
to  be  shown  by  a  final  examination  and  by  the  presentation  of  a  satisfactory  thesis  in 
print  upon  some  prescribed  or  accepted  subject  embodying  original  work, 

163 


Indiana  University 
subsequent  The  requirement  regarding  evidence  of  good  character  was  omitted  after 

modifications.          -IQQO 

In  1890  it  was  provided  that  the  work  for  the  Master's  degree  be  done 
not  under  the  direction  of  the  Faculty,  as  hitherto,  but  "under  the  direction 
and  supervision  of  the  professor  in  charge  of  the  Department  in  whicli 
studies  are  carried  on,"  and  the  work  for  the  Doctor's  degree  had  also 
to  be  done  "under  the  direction  and  supervision  of  the  appropriate  member 
of  the  Faculty."  This  provision  was  only  in  line  with  the  increasing 
tendency  in  the  University  at  this  time  toward  specialization.  In  the  same 
year  the  rule  that  candidates  for  the  Master's  degree  might  in  some  cases 
be  excused  from  residence,  providing  they  were  graduates  of  the  University, 
was  guarded  by  the  additional  provision  that  "graduates  from  other  institu- 
tions will  in  no  case  be  thus  excused." 

The  more  definite  influence  of  the  major  subject  system  upon  the  plan 
of  graduate  instruction  began  to  be  felt  in  1891.  The  Master's  degree 
now  required  "the  successful  completion  of  three  full  courses  of  study 
occupying  at  least  one  year  of  three  daily  recitations,  or  the  equivalent 
thereof,  in  residence  at  the  University,  such  courses  to  be  chosen  under  the 
advice  of  the  head  of  the  Department  in  which  the  major  part  of  the 
work  is  to  be  done,  and  to  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  general 
Faculty." 

In  1893  provision  was  made,  moreover,  that  "If  at  any  time  during 
the  year  an  undergraduate  has  completed  the  requirements  for  graduation, 
a  written  statement  to  this  effect  is  given  him  by  the  President  of  the 
University,  and  his  work  for  the  remainder  of  the  year  may  be  counted 
toward  his  higher  degree." 

The  number  of  graduate  students  registered  and  the  degrees  granted 
in  successive  vears  have  been  as  follows: 


164 


Graduate  School 


Number  of  Degrees 
Conferred 


Year 
1880-1881. 


In  Residence    In  Absence 
1 


M.S. 

3 
2 

1 
3 
3 


19 
29 
17 
24 
23 


1881-1882 

1882-1883 

1883-1884 

1884-1885 

1885-1886 

1886-1887 

1887-1888 

1888-1889 

1889-1890 12 

1890-1891 19 

1891-1892 28 

1892-1893 22 

1893-1894 47 

1894-1895 49 

1895-1896 62 

1896-1897 65 

1897-1898 84 

1898-1899 77 

1899-1900 69 

1900-1901 69 

1901-1902 82 

1902-1903.  .  82 


Totals 12 


A.M. 


4 
10 
5 
6 
7 
14 
16 
17 
16 
11 
15 
14 
13 
14 
15 
11 
21 
18 
19 

250 


Ph.D. 

1 

2 

1 
2 

1 


14 


Numbers  of 
graduate  stu- 
dents and  de- 
grees, 1880- 
1903. 


School,  1904. 


A  Committee  on  Advanced  Degrees  was  first  appointed  in  1894.     Re-    Organization  of 
cently  (March,  1904),  in  order  to  emphasize  the  facilities  offered  by  the 
University  for  work  of  an  advanced  nature,  a  Graduate  School  has  been 
organized.      The  requirements   for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  and  of 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  are  thus  set  forth  in  the  catalogue  for  1904: 

MASTER  OF  ARTS 

The  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  may  be  conferred  upon  graduates  of  this  University, 
or  of  any  other  institution  of  the  same  standing,  upon  the  completion  in  residence  of 
fifteen  hours  per  term,  carried  during  at  least  one  entire  college  year.  Thirty  of  the 


165 


Indiana  University 


Present  require-     total  of  forty-five  hours  must  be  in  one  department,  or  in  closely  allied  departments. 

merits  for  ad-         Fifteen  hours  must  be  distinctly  graduate  in  character. 
vanced  degrees. 

The  Master's  degree  may  be  conferred  upon  graduates  of  this  University  upon  the 

completion  in  absence  of  fifteen  hours  per  term,  or  their  equivalent,  carried  during  at 
least  two  full  years  under  the  direction  of  the.Paculty,  hours  of  private  work  done 
in  absence  being  estimated  at  one-half  the  credit  value  of  work  done  at  the  University. 

Professional  studies  are  not  accepted  for  this  degree,  but  research  work  on  pro- 
fessional subjects  may  be  accepted  at  the  option  of  the  professor  in  charge  of  the 
major  subject.  .  ./., " 

A  thesis  may  be  required  at  the  option  of  the  professor  in  charge  of  the  major 
subject. 

DOCTOR  OF  PHILOSOPHY. 

The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  may  be  conferred  upon  graduates  of  this  Uni- 
versity, or  of  any  institution  of  similar  character  and  rank,  upon  the  completion  of 
an  advanced  course  of  study  of  not  less  than  three  years.  In  exceptional  cases,  on 
the  recommendation  of  the  professor  in  charge  of  the  major  subject  and  with  the 
concurrence  of  the  Committee  on  Advanced  Degrees,  part  of  this  time  may  be  spent 
in  study  at  other  universities. 

The  course  of  study  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  must  be  pursued 
under  the  direction  of  a  committee  consisting  of  the  heads  of  the  Departments  in 
which  the  work  is  done,  and  its  value  shall  be  determined  by  a  final  examination  and 
by  the  presentation  of  a  satisfactory  thesis  embodying  original  work  upon  some  pre- 
scribed or  accepted  subject.  In  each  case  a  detailed  statement,  which  must  be 
endorsed  by  the  professor  in  charge  of  the  major  work,  must  be  submitted  to  the 
Committee  on  Advanced  Degrees  not  later  than  May  10th  of  the  year  in  which  the 
candidate  presents  himself  for  examination. 

The  thesis  of  every  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  must  be  pre- 
sented to  the  Committee  on  Advanced  Degrees  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  June  of 
the  year  in  which  he  proposes  to  take  the  degree.  The  thesis  must  be  endorsed  by 
the  head  of  the  Department  as  being  in  its  final  form  and  ready  for  the  press.  Ex- 
aminations of  each  candidate  for  this  degree  will  be  conducted  before  a  committee 
consisting  of  all  the  instructors  under  whom  graduate  work  has  been  taken.  If 
the  candidate  is  recommended  for  the  degree,  five  printed  copies  of  the  thesis  shall 
be  deposited  in  the  library  before  the  degree  is  conferred. 

Formal  application  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  must  be  filed  with  the  Dean 
at  least  three  months  before  the  time  when  the  degree  is  to  be  given.  Formal  appli- 
cation for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  must  be  on  file  at  least  one  year  before 
the  candidate  is  admitted  to  examination. 

166 


SCHOOL  OF  LAW 


A  School  of  Law  has  existed  at  two  distinct  periods  at  Indiana  Uni- 
versity, from  1842  to  1877,  and  from  1889  until  the  present  time.  Dr. 
Wylie  says:  "The  organization  of  the  Law  School  was  agitated  in  1835,  steps  toward 

if  not   sooner,   earlv   in   the   administration   of  the   first   President   of   the   or«anizat 

a  Law  School, 

University.     The  earliest  attempt  to  organize  it  as  a  Department  of  the   1835-41. 
L'niversity  must  have  been  some  time  between  1835  and  1837.     A  loose 
scrap  of  paper  containing  a   note  which  the  writer  probably   intended   to» 
transfer  to  the  minutes  has  escaped  destruction,  on  which  is  the  following: 

"Resolved,  That  in  the  opinion  of  the  Board,  a  professorship  of  law  should  be  estab- 
lished, to  be  connected  with  the  college. 

"That  the  law  term  should  consist  of  four  months,  from  December  1st  to- 
March  31st. 

"That  the  salary  of  the  professor  shall  be  $300,  to  be  paid  as  other  salaries  of  the 
college  officers,  and -that  he  also  be  entitled  to  dispose  of  lecture  tickets  for  his  own 
benefit,  the  price  of  which  shall  not  exceed  $10  per  term. 

"Resolved,  That  the  Board  now  proceed  to  the  election  of  said  professor. 

"Mr.  Foster  (who  was  a  trustee  from  1835  to  1838)  was  appointed 
teller,  and  on  counting  the  votes  it  appeared  that  Isaac  Blackford  was 
unanimously  elected  professor.  There  is  no  further  trace  of  Judge  Black- 
ford's  professorship.  From  some  notes  which  had  been  taken  from  the 
old  record  book  of  the  College,  destroyed  in  the  fire  of  1883,  mention 
is  made  of  Charles  Lewis  having  been  chosen  professor  of  law,  September 
20,  1837.  We  have  no  further  notice  of  Mr.  Lewis. 

"At  the  first  meeting  of  the  board,  after  the  College  had  been  made 
a  University,  the  following  appeared  on  record  in  its  proceedings  under 

167 


Indiana  University 

date  of  September  25,  1838 :  'On  motion  of  Mr.  [John]  Law  the  Board  pro- 
ceeded to  the  election  of  a  professor  of  law.  The  result  of  the  election  was 
that  the  Hon.  Miles  G.  Eggleston  was  unanimously  elected.'  Mr.  Eggleston 
declined,  owing  to  circumstances  over  which  he  had  no  control.  Appli- 
cation was  then  made  to  several  distinguished  jurists,  but  no  one  was  found 
willing  to  accept.  The  matter  was  then  dropped  till  1841,  when  Gen. 
Tilghman  A.  Howard  was  elected,  and  a  very  iirgent  letter  was  sent  by 
the  Board  requesting  his  acceptance.  General  Howard,  however,  declined 
this  earnest  request.  About  a  year  after  this  the  names  of  several  dis- 
tinguished jurists  were  presented  'to  the  Board.  Of  this  number  David 
McDonald,  who  was  a  resident  of  Bloomington  and  a  Judge  of  the  Circuit 
Court,  was  duly  elected,  and  on  the  following  day  his  letter  of  acceptance 
was  received."1 

its  first  an-  We  read  in  the  first  announcement  of  the  Law  School,  in  the  catalogue 

nouncement,  for  Ig42j  ^  «In  estabHshing  this  Department,  the  design  of  the  Board 
.-of  Trustees  is  (to  use  their  own  language),  'jSTothing  less  than  the  building 
up  of  a  Law  School,  that  shall  be  inferior  to  none  west  of  the  Mountains; 
one  in  which  the  student  will  be  so  trained  that  he  shall  never,  in  the 
attorney,  forget  the  scholar  and  the  gentleman'.  It  will  be  the  object  of 
the  Professor  to  furnish  a  complete  course  of  legal  education  to  gentlemen 
intending  for  the  bar  in  any  of  the  United  States.  Persons  applying  for 
admission  as  students  will  not  be  examined  touching  their  literary  attain- 
ments. But  no  one  will  be  admitted  who  does  not  produce  satisfactory 
testimonials  of  his  good  moral  character.  The  sessions  will,  in  all  respects, 
be  the  same  as  in  other  branches  of  the  University.  The  course  of  study 
will  occupy  four  sessions  [at  this  time  there  were  two  sessions  each  year]. 
The  students  will  be  divided  into  two  classes — Junior  and  Senior.  Such, 
however,  as  have  elsewhere  made  sufficient  progress  in  the  study  of  law, 
may,  if  they  prefer,  be  at  once  admitted  to  the  Senior  Class.  And  gentle- 
men not  wishing  to  study  municipal  law  as  a  profession,  may  enter  the 
Junior  Class  for  instruction  in  that  part  of  the  course  which  relates  to 
international,  constitutional  and  commercial  law." 

Instruction  in  this  Department  was  in  general  given  by  means  of  reci- 
tations on  prescribed  text-books,  and  by  lectures.     A  moot  court  was  held> 

iWylie,  Indiana  University  (1890),  pp.  88-89. 

168 


School  of  Law 

also,  in  which  the  students  of  both  classes  were  exercised  in  the  preparation 
of  pleadings,  rules  of  practice,  forms  of  record  entries,  and  discussion  of 
legal  questions.  At  first  this  moot  court  was  held  every  Saturday,  but 
from  1874  it  was  convened  four  times  a  week. 

The  changes  from  time  to   time  in   the  course  of  instruction   in   the   Changes  in  the 
Law  Department  may  be  seen  in  the  following  table  of  text-books,  showing 
the  time  during  which  each  of  these  books  was  in  regular  use  r1 

JUNIOR  CLASS 

Blackstone's  Commentaries,  1842-8,  1850-1,  1853-76. 

Story's  Commentaries  on  the  Constitution,  1842-5. 

Chitty  on  Contracts,  1842-8. 

Stephen  on  Pleading,  1842-8,  1850-1,  1853-70. 

Kent's  Commentaries,  1842-8,  1850-1,  1853-61,  1871-6. 

Smith  on  Contracts,  1850-1,  1853-61. 

Parsons  on  Mercantile  Law,  1862. 

Smith  or  Parsons  on  Contracts,  18(53-5. 

Metcalf  on  Contracts,  1869-70. 

Parsons  on  Contracts,  1871-76. 

SENIOR  CLASS 

Kent's  Commentaries,  1842-8,  1850-1,  1853-61. 

Chitty  on  Bills,  1842-8. 

•Chitty  on  Pleading,  1842-8,  1850-1,  1853-4. 

Starkie's  Evidence,  1842-4. 

.Story's  Equity  Pleading,  1842. 

Mitford's  Equity  Pleading,  1843-8,  1850-1,  1853-61. 

Greenleafs  Evidence,  1845-8,  1850-1,  1853-76. 

Adams's  Equity,  1855-65. 

Indiana  Revised  Statutes  of  1852  (selections  with  reference  to  practice  in  the 

State  Courts,  in  Civil  and  Criminal  cases),  1855-61. 
Williams  on  Real  Property,  1862-70. 
Bicknell's  Practice  and  the  Code,  1871-6. 
Washburn  on  Real  Property,  1871-6. 
Story's  Equity,  1871-6. 


!The  University  catalogue  for  1849  is  missing;  in  the  catalogue  for  1852  no  list  of  text- 
books is  given;  also  in  the  catalogue  for  1877,  which  contains  the  announcement  of  the  suspen- 
sion of  the  Law  Department  in  that  year,  no  such  list  is  given. 

169 


Indiana  University 


Suspension  of 
the  Law  School, 
1877-89;  its  re- 
vival In  1889. 


Development 
since  1889. 


Students  were  also  recommended  to  procure  certain  books  in  addition 
to  the  text-books,  as  follows: 

Williams  on  Personal  Property,  1873-5. 
Sedgwick  on  Statutory  Construction,  1873-6. 
May  on  Insurance,  1874-6. 
Cooley  on  Constitutional  Limitations,  1874-6. 
Benjamin  on  Personal  Property,  1876. 

In  1877  the  Law  Department  of  the  University  closed  its  doors  because 
of  legislative  action  cutting  down  the  salaries  of  professors  to  such  a  point 
that  competent  men  could  no  longer  be  secured.  For  twelve  years  the  De- 
partment was  out  of  existence ;  but  at  a  meeting  in  March,  1889,  the  Board 
of  Trustees  made  provision  for  its  reestablishment  in  the  next  academic 
year  with  a  two  years'  course.  Regular  instruction  was  contemplated  in 
the  following  subjects :  "The  first,  or  Junior  year,  is  devoted  to  the  study 
of  the  law  of  real  and  personal  property,  contracts,  negotiable  instruments, 
criminal  law,  the  law  of  bailments,  and  domestic  relations.  The  second,  or 
Senior  year,  is  devoted  to  the  study  of  equity  jurisprudence,  pleading  evi- 
dence, the  law  of  torts,  constitutional  law,  federal  jurisprudence  and  practice, 
and  pleading  and  practice  under  codes." 

During  the  first  year  of  the  reopening  of  the  Law  Department,  instruc- 
tion was  given  during  the  Fall  and  Winter  terms  only,  but  thereafter  the 
terms  were  made  to  correspond  to  the  three  terms  in  other  Departments 
of  the  University.  Beginning  with  1901  the  course  in  law  has  covered 
three  years  instead  of  two.  In  1903  a  fourth  term  of  ten  weeks  was  added, 
beginning  the  day  after  Commencement  and  ending  early  in  the  month  of 
September.  This  is  designed  to  "enable  those  who  are  compelled  to  remain 
out  of  the  School  during  the  Fall  and  Winter  terms  to  make  up  a  portion 
of  their  work  missed  during  those  terms." 

The  Law  Department  has  undergone  a  steady  development  since  its 
reorganization,  so  that  it  now  constitutes  a  School  of  Law,  with  three  pro- 
fessors, one  associate  professor,  and  three  non-resident  lecturers,  besides 
numbering  on  its  Faculty  eight  professors  from  other  Departments  of 
the  University,  representing  regular  instruction  in  history  and  political 
science,  Roman  law,  economics  and  social  science,  medical  jurisprudence, 
and  debating  and  public  speaking.  In  place,  moreover,  of  the  original 

170 


School  of  Law 

weekly  moot  court,  there  are  now  two  regular  practice  courts,  the  Third 
Year  Practice  Court  (Indiana  University  Circuit  Court),  which  meets  once 
a  week,  and  the  University  Supreme  Court,  which  convenes  as  often  as 
may  be  required  by  the  business  before  it,  the  members  of  the  Faculty 
of  the  School  of  Law  acting  as  judges.  Appeals  are  taken  and  writs  of 
error  prosecuted  from  the  Third  Year  Practice  .CouriL.  Besides  these  two 


SCHOOL  OF  LAW -A  CORNER  OF  THE  LAW  LIBRARY 

regular  practice  courts,  club  courts  also  are  organized  for  the  discussion 
of  legal  questions  by  the  students  of  each  class. 

Applicants  for  admission  to  the  School  of  Law  must  be  at  least  eighteen   Requirements 
years  of  age;  and  since  1899  the  requirement  of  scholarship  for  admission,   for admission- 
except  in  the  case  of  special  students,  has  been  the  same  as  for  admission 
to  the  Departments  of  Liberal  Arts.     Before  that  time  the  applicant  was 

171 


Combined  course 
in  Arts  aivcj  S*F, 


Indiana  University 

required  to  satisfy  the  Faculty  by  standing  an  examination  that  he  was 
prepared  profitably  to  undertake  the  work  of  the  Department,  special  em- 
phasis being  laid  on  his  ability  to  use  good  English. 

With  the  beginning  of  the  academic  year  1905,  there  will  be  offered 
^Q  stu(}ents  in  the  Departments  of  Liberal  Arts  a  combined  course  with  law 


SCHOOL  OF  LAW  — ANOTHER  PART  OF  THE  LAW  LIBRARY 

as  special  major  subject,  leading  to  the  degree  of  A.B.  at  the  end  of 
four  years.  The  course  contemplates  the  completion  of  two  full  years  of 
academic  work  before  the  commencement  of  the  law  studies.  During  the 
third  and  fourth  years  the  student  taking  the  combined  course  will  be  re- 
<quirjed  to  ,do  ten  hours  a  week  work  in  law,  and  five  hours  in  prescribed 


172 


School  of  Law 


and  elective  subjects  in  the  Departments  of  Liberal  Arts.  The  A.B.  degree* 
with  law  as  the  major  subject  will  admit  the  holder  to  the  third-year  class 
of  the  School  of  Law,  and  enable  him  to  complete  the  law  course,  with 
the  degree  LL.B.,  in  one  year.  Students  of  the  University  whose  major 
subject  is  other  than  that  of  law,  are  permitted  after  the  completion  of 


SCHOOL  OF  LAW -MOOT  COURT  ROOM 

their  Freshman  year  to  take  one  year  of  law  on  the  A.B.  course.     They 
are  thus  enabled,  after  graduation,  to  complete  the  law  course  in  two  years. 

The  subjects  offered  in  the  Law  Department  in  the  first  year  of  its   Course  of  in-- 
reorganization  in  1889  have  already  been  mentioned.     The  following  table 
shows  the  development  of  the  course  of  instruction  in  this  Department  from 
1890  to  the  present  time.      In  this  table  the  larger  figures  indicate  the 

173 


18S9-- 


Indiana  University 

number  of  hours  per  week,  and  the  index  figures  show  the  terms  of  the  year—- 
whether first,  second  or  third — in  which  the  respective  subjects  were  offered. 
Hyphenated  figures  (e.g.  1-3)  indicate  that  the  subject  was  offered  through- 
out the  three  terms. 

SUBJECTS   OFFERED   IN   LAW   DEPARTMENT 


'90          '91          '92          '93 

'94         '95         '96 

'97 

'98 

'99 

1900 

'01 

'02 

'03 

Agency  

23 

5' 

5l 

22 

52 

S2 

B2 

B3 

Bankruptcy  

1» 

Bills  and  Notes  o3         53         53 

I3 

53 

53 

5:! 

63 

B2 

B2 

43 

Blackstone  62~3 

21-2 

Carriers  and  Bailments  .. 

52 

52 

62 

52 

21 

21-2 

B2 

42 

Code  Pleading:   1                  x.i       ci-s     r.i-s       F.I 
and  Practice    /  

51!3     51!2     31!2 

21 

21 

32 

B1 

B1 

S1 

B1 

Common  Law  Procedure     B1         51 

I3         21 

52 

B3 

53 

B8 

B3 

S8 

B2 

Constitutional  Law  o1         B1         51 

23              23              23 

22 

22 

43 

42-3 

32-3 

B3 

B3 

Contracts  B2"3     B1-3     5J~3     S1   3 

51-3       51-3           51 

51 

5l 

51 

31 

31-2 

B1 

B1 

Criminal  Law     )                   ra          r.3          r.3          Q3 
and  Procedure/  

33              33              33 

53 

53 

51 

B1 

Sl 

6' 

B1 

Damages  

28 

Elementary  Law  61         61         51         61 

51        5l         51 

31 

31 

31 

31 

31 

31 

Equity  Jurisprudence  ...     51         51         51         51 

51        51         51 

51 

51 

5l 

6'32 

B132 

B2 

B1 

Equity  Pleading  ) 
and  Practice      }  

..       I1-3 

32 

32 

31 

22 

22 

2» 

32 

Evidence,  1  S2         B2         B2         42 

42        42        42 

B2 

52 

52 

B^2 

6'32 

31-2 

B1 

Evidence,  II  

6s 

Federal  Procedure  

1' 

I1 

I1 

Guaranty  and  Suretyship 

23 

23 

23 

23 

23 

History  of  English  Law 

B1 

B8 

Indiana  University  1 
Circuit  Court         /  — 

I1-3 

I1-3 

Jl-8 

p-3 

Jl-3 

!»-• 

Indiana  Pleading  ) 
and  Practice        J  

I1-3 

I1-8 

H-s 

31-. 

Indiana  Probate  Law  

21-3 

2i-s 

2i  -s 

International  Law  52         B2         52 

23        23 

2s 

23 

23 

23 

23 

23 

2s 

Insurance  

22 

22 

2a 

32 

3» 

32 

3a 

Judgments  

22 

2* 

B3 

.. 

Justice  Practice  

I1 

I1 

I2 

I1 

174 


School  of  Law 


SUBJECTS   OFFERED   IN  LAW   DEPARTMENT— CONTINUED 


'90 

'91          '92          '93          '94          '95          '96          '97          '98 

'99 

1900 

'01 

'02 

'03 

Legal  Ethics     B3 

Medical  Jurisprudence.. 

I1 

I1 

I1 

MootCourt.I  

_           p-3        p-3        p-3        p-3        p-3        p-3        p-8 

p-3 

I1-3 

11-3 

11-3 

11-3 

Moot  Court,  II  

I1"3 

11-3 

11-3 

11-3 

I1-3 

Mortgages  

4> 

Negligence  

21 

21 

21 

21 

21 

31 

Parliamentary  Law  

11-3 

I1 

I1 

31 

Partnership  

22 

22 

2» 

22 

22 

Patent  Law  and  1 
Trade  Marks   /  *  ' 

I3 

I3 

1" 

Persons  and  Do-     1              cs 
mestic  Relations  j  '  ' 

63        32        23        23        2s        23        21        21 

21 

31 

31 

33 

22 

Personal  Property  

52-3     2263      S2        B2        B2        B2        32        32 

31 

31 

21 

3l 

2» 

Private  Corporations  —      B3 

53        5s        53        53        53        53        53        53 

6s 

B1"2 

61"2 

B1 

B2 

Public  Corporations  

B2        S2 

42 

B3 

B3 

S2 

B3 

Quasi-Contracts  

B3 

Real  Property  S2 

B2        S2        B2        B2        S2        B2        S1        S1 

B1 

51-3 

52-3 

B1 

S1 

Roman  Law  

I1 

Sales  of  Personal  1 
Property              J  '  ' 

B2        B2 

B2 

B3 

8s 

B3 

B» 

Torts  B3 

B3        S3         ..         33        33        3s        6s        B3 

B3 

B1 

B1 

B1 

B1 

Trusts  

33        33 

33 

B3 

B3 

5s 

5» 

University  Su-  1 
preme  Court  j  •  • 

I1-3 

11-3 

11-3 

11-3 

I1-3 

p-8 

Wills  and  Adminis-  1             cz 

trntirm  f\f  TTstntoa  f  ••••        " 

52              52              12           12-3        12-3        12-3           23              23 

I2 

43 

6s 

B3 

6s 

175 


SCHOOL  OF   MEDICINE 


Movement  to 
establish  a 
School  of  Medi- 
cine, 1870. 


Indiana  Medical 
College  made  the 
Medical  Depart- 
ment of  Indiana 
University, 
1871. 


In  the  annual  reports  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  for  1870  and  1871,. 
mention  is  made,  among  the  wants  of  the  University,  of  another  profes- 
sional department,  that  of  Medicine,  in  which  tuition  shall  be  free  for 
all.  "Then  Indiana,  with  her  excellent  common  schools,  her  Graded  and 
High  Schools,  her  Normal  College  at  Terre  Haute,  her  Agricultural  and 
Mechanical  College  at  Lafayette,  and  her  State  University,  embracing  the 
College  of  Sciences  and  Arts,  the  College  of  Law,  the  College  of  Medicine, 
and  that  of  Military  Science,  would  have  her  system  of  education  complete, 
and  equal  to  that  of  any  other  State  in  the  Union.  Then  no  young  men 
or  women  need  leave  their  own  State  in  order  to  secure  the  best  liberal 
and  professional  educations  in  any  vocation  they  may  select.  Indiana  owes 
this  to  herself  and  her  sons  and  daughters.  Her  children  should  not  be 
dependent  upon  other  commonwealths  for  what  she,  herself,  is  abundantly 
able  to  furnish." 

At  a  meeting  of  the  Board  in  1871,  the  Indiana  Medical  College,  located 
at  Indianapolis,  was  made  the  Medical  Department  of  Indiana  University,, 
and  the  annual  announcement  of  this  college  was  incorporated  for  the  first 
time  in  the  University  catalogue  for  1872.  Instruction  was  offered  int 
surgery,  obstetrics,  diseases  of  women  and  children,  principles  and  practice 
of  medicine,  pathology  and  clinical  medicine,  chemistry  and  toxicology,, 
physiology,  diseases  of  the  eye,  ear  and  nasal  passage,  materia  medica 
and  therapeutics,  medical  jurisprudence,  descriptive  and  surgical  anatomy. 
Lectureships  were  also  established  on  the  special  branches  of  diseases  of 
the  nervous  system,  on  comparative  anatomy  and  medical  botany,  and  on 
medical  jurisprudence. 

176 


School  of  Medicine 

In  the  study  of  anatomy  an  abundance  of  material  for  dissection  was 
furnished  at  cost.  Clinics  were  held  twice  each  week  at  the  City  Hospital 
at  Indianapolis.  The  BoLbs  Free  Dispensary  also,  which  was  under  the 
control  of  the  Faculty  and  located  in  the  College  building,  furnished  a 
great  number  and  variety  of  interesting  cases.  The  City  Dispensary,  at 
which  the  greater  portion  of  the  medical  charity  of  the  city  is  furnished, 
was  located  conveniently  near  and  was  under  the  superintendency  of  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Faculty  of  this  Department.  At  least  one  hour  each  day  was 
-devoted  to  clinical  instruction. 

The  requirements  for  graduation  in  this  Department  were  as  follows: 

Candidates  for  graduation  must  furnish  proof  of  good  moral  character,  that  they 
liave  studied  the  science  for  three  years  under  the  instruction  of  a  competent  pre- 
ceptor, and  that  they  have  attended  two  full  courses  of  lectures  in  a  medical  college 
of  good  reputation,  the  last  of  which  must  have  been  in  this  Department.  On  such 
proof,  and  after  satisfactory  examination  in  the  several  branches  of  study,  the  candi- 
date will  be  entitled  to  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Medicine. 

Four  years  of  reputable  practice  considered  equivalent  to  attendance  upon  a  first 
course  of  lectures. 

The   connection,   however,    of   the    Indiana   Medical    College    with    the   The  connection 
University  was  little  more  than  nominal  and  of  no  particular  advantage   l    !f°n  inue  ' 

Io7o. 

to  either  side.  From  1870  tuition  had  been  free  in  all  departments  of 
the  University.  On  this  account  the  Board  of  Trustees  seemed  to  feel 
in  the  case  of  the  Medical  Department,  as  in  that  of  the  Law  Department 
a  year  later,  that  to  undertake  to  continue  its  maintenance  would  require 
an  expenditure  beyond  the  means  at  their  disposal.  Accordingly  in  1876, 
after  continuing  for  five  years,  the  connection  of  the  Indiana  Medical 
College  with  "the  University  was  terminated  by  mutual  consent.  The  grad- 
uates of  the  Department  during  this  period  have  not  been  accounted  alumni 
of  the  University. 

In  1891  a  Medical  Preparatory  Course  was  established  under  the  general   Medical  Prepara- 
direction  of  the  professors  of  chemistry  and  zoology.     This  course  of  four 
years,  leading  to  the  degree  of  A.B.,   was  provided  for  students  who  ex- 
pected afterwards  to  take  up  the  study  of  medicine.      The  major   study 
contained  work  from  both  these  Departments,  and  as  collateral  work  courses 

(13)  177 


Indiana   University 


Indiana  Univer- 
sity School  of 
Medicine  estab- 
lished, 1903. 


Combined  course 
in  Arts  and  Med- 
cine. 


in  botany  and  physics  were  also  required.  Students  completing  this  course 
were  enabled  to  enter  with  advanced  standing  in  the  three  years'  course 
of  most  medical  colleges. 

The  Premedical  Course,  as  thus  planned,  was  continued  through  1895. 
From  1896  until  1902  this  course  was  under  the  direction  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Chemistry,  and  embodied  simply  certain  suggestions  for  a 
scheme  of  study  which  met  the  University  requirements  for  graduation, 
with  chemistry  as  the  major  subject,  and  at  the  same  time  formed  a  suit- 
able preparation  for  students  who  intended  later  to  study  medicine.  The 
plan  of  grouping  together  certain  studies  with  zoology  or  chemistry  as 
a  major  subject,  although  it  enabled  graduates  of  the  University  to  get 
one  year  of  credit  in  reputable  medical  colleges  for  undergraduate  work, 
yet  failed  to  meet  the  needs  of  an  increasing  body  of  students  who  looked 
forward  to  Medicine  as  a  career.  Consequently,  in  the  fall  of  1903,  a 
Department  of  Anatomy  was  established,  and  a  substantial  increase  was 
made  in  the  equipment  for  the  work  in  physiology.  The  situation,  how- 
ever, was  not  relieved.  It  was  found  that  a  large  number  of  students  were 
intending  to  study  medicine  in  medical  colleges  outside  the  State.  Accord- 
ingly in  November,  1903,  in  accordance  with  the  charter  rights  of  the  Uni- 
versity, a  College  of  Medicine  was  organized,  to  be  known  as  the  Indiana 
University  School  of  Medicine.  In  the  fall  of  1904  the  full  work  of 
the  first  two  years  will  be  offered.  Only  the  first  two  years  of  the  medical 
course  are  provided  for  at  present.  The  School  of  Medicine  as  thus  planned 
will  be  represented  by  Departments  of  Anatomy,  Physiology,  and  Chemistry, 
and  will  include  also  work  in  other  departments  of  the  University  in  neu- 
rology and  embryology. 

A  combined  course  in  Arts  and  Medicine  is  now  provided  for,  which  is  an 
integral  part  of  the  University  curriculum.  Requirements  for  admission  to 
this  course  are  the  same  as  to  any  other  Department  of  the  University,  and 
are  practically  identical  with  the  minimum  entrance  requirements  demanded 
by  the  Association  of  American  Medical  Colleges. 

Following  is  given  a  tabular  conspectus  of  the  combined  course  leading 
to  the  collegiate  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  Medicine,  and  giving  the 
student  who  completes  it  third-year  standing  in  any  medical  school  of  the 
State  and  in  many  medical  schools  outside  the  State: 


178 


School  of  Medicine 


Fall   Term 

English 2  hrs. 

German 5  hrs. 

Physics   3  hrs. 

Trigonometry 5  hrs. 


FIRST   YEAR 

Winter  Term 

English 4  hrs. 

German 5  lirs. 

Physics 3  hrs. 

Elective  . .  .3  hrs. 


Spring  Term 

English 4  hrs. 

German 5  hrs. 

Physics 3  hrs. 

Elective  . .  .3  hrs. 


Zoology 5  hrs. 

General  Chemistry . .  5  hrs. 

French 3  hrs. 

Elective  . .  .2  hrs. 


Anatomy 10  hrs. 

Organic  Chemistry.    5  hrs. 


SECOND  YEAR 

Zoology 5  hrs. 

Qualitative  Analysis  5  hrs. 

French          3  hrs. 

Elective  . .  .2  hrs. 


THIRD  YEAR 

Anatomy 10  hrs. 

Physiological  Chem- 
istry       5  hrs. 


Botany    5  hrs. 

Qualitative  Analysis  5  hrs. 

French  3  hrs. 

Hypnotism  and  Sug- 
gestion    3  hrs. 

Histology 10  hrs. 

Physiological  Chem- 
istry    5  lirs. 


Anatomy 5  hrs. 

Physiology 5  hrs 

Toxicology 3  hrs. 

Neurology 2  hrs. 


FOURTH  YEAR 

Physiology 5  hrs. 

Bacteriology 3  hrs. 

Neurology  2  hrs. 

Embryology 5  hrs. 


Surgical  Anatomy  . .  5  hrs. 

Physiology    5  hrs. 

Bacteriology 5  hrs. 


For  the  electives  provided  for  during  the  first  two  years,  the  student  is  recom- 
mended to  take  courses  in  anthropology,  drawing,  general  biology,  French,  Greek, 
history,  hygiene,  philosophy,  and  laboratory  work  in  physics. 


179 


SUMMER   SESSION 


A  Summer  The  Indiana  University  Summer  School  was  organized  in  the  summer 

is^mfdea^'  of  189°  *OT  tte  PurPoses  °^  extending  to  those  who  are  occupied  during 
Summer  Session,  the  school  year  the  advantages  of  advanced  instruction  in  certain  Depart- 
ments, aided  by  the  libraries,  laboratories  and  other  facilities  for  study 
connected  with  the  University.  The  policy  of  the  University  in  presenting 
thorough  courses  of  study  in  each  Department  instead  of  multiplying  short 
unrelated  courses,  was  followed  in  this  school.  In  the  Summer  School 
the  instruction  was  given  by  members  of  the  University  Faculty,  the  build- 
ings and  apparatus  of  the  University  were  at  the  disposal  of  the  school, 
credit  was  given  for  the  work  done,  and  a  general  supervision  over  the 
school  was  maintained  by  the  University  authorities.  Nevertheless,  the 
Summer  School  remained  a  private  venture,  the  instructors  being  remu- 
nerated solely  from  the  fees  paid.  Subsequently,  in  1900  the  University 
assumed  full  control  of  this  work,  and  the  Summer  School  gave  place  to 
the  Summer  Session.  The  instruction  now  given  in  the  Summer  Session 
is  an  integral  part  of  the  University  work.  Under  the  new  arrangement 
it  has  been  found  possible  to  offer  a  greater  number  and  variety  of  courses, 
and  the  instruction  is  given  for  the  most  part  by  the  heads  of  the  respective 
Departments. 

Purpose  of  the  The  purpose  of  the  Summer  Session  remains  the  same  as  that  of  the 

Summer  Session.    summer  School.     It  is  the  aim  of  the  Session  to  present  thorough  courses 

which  in  quality  of  instruction  and  grade  of  work  done  are  equivalent  to 

those  offered   in  the  regular   University  terms.      Some  of  the   courses  of 

instruction  have  been  specially  arranged  for  the  purpose  of  aiding  those 

180 


Summer  Session 

who  teach,  or  wish  to  prepare  themselves  to  teach,  in  high  schools,  academies 
and  other  schools.  Methods  of  teaching  are  treated  incidentally  also  in  other 
courses.  Since  1899  the  session  has  been  six  weeks  in  length. 

The  development  of  the  course  of  instruction  in  the  Summer  Session   Courses  of  in- 
may  be  seen  from  the  following  table:  struction  in  the 

Summer  Session. 
NUMBER  OF  COURSES  OFFERED  IN  EACH  SUBJECT  IN  SUMMER  SESSIONS 


DEPARTMENTS. 
Greek   
Latin  

'90     '91      '92     '93     '94 
1 

'95 
4 

'96 

3 

'97 
3 

'98 
3 

'99 
3 

1900 
1 
3 

'01 
2 
3 

'02 

3 

'03 

4 

Romance  Languages  



2 

4 

5 

2 

2 

3 

3 

3 

Germanic  Languages  

2 

4 

3 

3 

5 

4 

4 

5 

4 

4 

English  

.       44435 

7 

5 

6 

6 

5 

6 

6 

6 

6 

History  and  Political  Science  

.       3 

3 

3 

3 

4 

3 

4 

4 

5 

4 

Economics  and  Social  Science  

1 

3 

3 

3 

3 

Philosophy  

11 

1 

1 

1 

5 

3 

4 

4 

Pedagogy  (now  Education)  

3 

2 

3 

3 

3 

3 

5 

4 

5 

Mathematics  

.       76743 

7 

8 

5 

8 

8 

6 

8 

8 

8 

Mechanics  and  Astronomy  

111-. 

4 

4 

5 

Physics  

.       3      5      5      ..       1 

1 

2 

2 

3 

5 

3 

4 

4 

6 

Chemistry  

.       3      4      4      ..       1 

2 

3 

6 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

7 

Geology  

1 

1 

1 

2 

4 

4 

4 

Zoology  

.       34411 

2 

2 

3 

3 

« 

•• 

Botany  

311 

5 

4 

3 

» 

1 

» 

.. 

3 

Nature  Study  



•• 

I 

3 

1 

3 

The  School  of  Law  began  in  1897  to  offer  work  in  connection  with  the    Work  in  the 
Summer  School  in  the  form,  of  such  special  courses  as  were  applied  for.    Sch°o1  of  Law- 
In  1900  summer  instruction  in  this  Department  became  regularly  organized 
as  a  part  of  the  course  of  the  Summer  Session.     The  general  plan  followed 
was  to  give  instruction  in  law  in  any  course  offered  in  the  regular  University 
session,   providing  a   sufficient  number  of  students   applied   for   it.      The 
following  table  shows  the  scope  of  the  work  offered  in  the  successive  years 

181 


Indiana  University 

from  1900  through  1902;  each  course  was  given  daily  throughout  the  term 
of  six  weeks: 

Elementary  Law,  1900. 

Domestic  Relations,  1900. 

Criminal  Law,  1900-1902. 

Personal  Property,  1900. 

Insurance,  1900. 

Agency,  1900. 

Partnership,  1900. 

Bills  and  Notes,  1900,  1901. 

Pleading  and  Practice,  1900-1902. 

Contracts,  1901,  1902. 

Equity,  1901,  1902. 

Evidence,  1901. 

Torts,  1901. 

Summer  term  Beginning  with  the  year  1903,  there  has  been  a  Summer  term  of  ten 

of  the  school      weekg  [n  the  School  of  Law,  in  which  there  are  offered  such  courses  as 

of  Law. 

are  given  in  the  other  terms  of  the  School.  In  the  Summer  Session  of 
1903  the  following  courses  were  offered,  the  number  in  parenthesis  indi- 
cating the  number  of  hours  a  week : 

First  Ymr  Courses- 
Criminal  Law  and  Procedure  (5). 
Elementary  Law:  Blackstone  (5). 
Common  Law  Pleading  (5). 

Second  and  Third  Year  Courses— 
Equity  Jurisprudence  (5). 
Code  Pleading  (5). 
Personal  Injuries  (5). 
Criminal  Evidence  (5). 
Third  Year  Practice  Court  (2). 


182 


BIOLOGICAL  STATION 


The  Indiana  University  Biological  Station  arose  out  of  a  desire  to 
afford  students  in  connection  with  the  Department  of  Zoology  the  advantage 
of  field  work,  during  the  summer  months,  at  an  inland  biological  observatory. 


INDIANA  UNIVERSITY  BIOLOGICAL  STATION  -  WINONA  LAKE,  INDIANA 

In  November,   1894,  the  Trustees   of  the  University  indorsed  plans   sub-   Organization  of 

mitted  to  them  for  a  biological  station,   and  authorized  the  use,  for  this     ^e    ioiogicai 

Station, 
purpose,  of  the  apparatus  of  the  zoological  laboratories.     This  important 

step  was  taken  in  the  adoption  of  the  following  recommendation :  "That 
Dr.  Eigenmann  be  permitted  to  use  the  zoological  apparatus  for  a  summer 
school  of  zoology  either  at  or  away  from  the  University,  he  being  responsible 
to  the  University  for  such  apparatus."  Subsequent  steps  are  described  as 

183 


Indiana  University 

follows,  in  an  article  in  Science  for  December  22,  1899,  by  Professor  C. 
II.  Eigenmann,  the  founder  of  the  Station : 

its  purpose.  "The   Biological    Station   of   Indiana    University   was   planned   with   a 

well-defined  object  in  view,  the  study  of  the  variation  of  the  nonmigratory 
vertebrates  in  some  unit  of  environment.  The  Station  was  to  be  located 
on  a  lake  which  would  present  circumscribed  boundaries  within  which  the 
conditions  were  supposed  to  be  nearly  uniform  at  any  time  and  from  season 
to  season.  Here  large  numbers  of  the  nonmigratory  vertebrates  were  to 


BIOLOGICAL  STATION  -  LECTURE  ROOM 

be  collected,  their  characteristics  tabulated  and  compared  with  similar  series 
from  other  lakes.  We  were,  in  short,  to  conduct  a  statistical  inquiry  into 
evolution.  For  the  work  in  hand  many  of  the  lakes  were  available.  Our 
location  was  therefore  determined  by  the  finding  of  an  old  boathouse  suit- 
able for  a  laboratory  on  the  shore  of  Turkey  Lake.  For  the  first  year  the 
Trustees  of  the  University  granted  the  use  of  apparatus  of  the  Zoological 
Department,  provided  the  Station  would  in  no  way  be  an  expense  to  the 
University.  After  the  first  year  the  Trustees  provided  generously  for  the 
permanent  equipment  of  the  Station.  To  help  defray  expenses  a  number 

184 


Biological  Station 

of  courses  of  instruction  were  offered  for  a  few  students.  It  was  expected 
that  there  would  be  about  ten  in  the  party  the  first  year,  but  there  were 
nineteen." 

The  work  of  the  first  summer  resulted  in  a  hydrographic  map  of  the 
lake,  a  meteorological  report,  a  description  of  the  physical  features  of  the 
lake,  and  reports  on  the  characteristics  of  its  inhabitants.  These  lines  of 
work  were  continued  in  subsequent  years. 

In  1899  the  Biological  Station  removed  to  Winona  Lake.  In  readiness  Removed  to 
for  its  first  year  in  this  location,  two  buildings  were  erected  on  the  lake- 
front  by  the  Winona  Assembly  and  Summer  School,  and  were  presented 
to  the  Station.  These  buildings  are  each  25x45  feet,  and  two  stories  high. 
An  artesian  well,  situated  between  the  laboratories,  furnishes  a  supply  of 
5,000  gallons  of  water  a  day.  The  Station  owns  boats,  nets,  sounding  and 
temperature  apparatus,  glassware,  etc.  Microscopes  and  other  apparatus 
needed  are  moved  to  the  Station  from  the  University  at  the  opening  of 
each  summer  session.  The  laboratories  will  accommodate  a  hundred  stu- 
dents, and  the  attendance  is  restricted  to  this  number. 

At  the  Biological  Station  the  following  courses  have  been  offered,  in   courses  of  in- 
the  years  indicated:  struction  at  the 

J  Biological  Sta- 

tion. 
Courses  in  Zoology— 

General  Zoology,  1895-1903. 
The  Lake  Fauna,  1895-1903. 

Embryology  (including  Segmentation,  Morphogenesis,  Histogenesis,  and  Hist- 
ology), 1895-1903. 
Special  Investigation,  1895-1902. 
General  Problems  in  Biology,  1898,  1899,  1901-1903. 

Courses  in  Neurology- 
Neurology,  1901-1903. 

Gross  Anatomy  of  the  Nervous  System,  1901-1903. 
Advanced  Neurology,  1903. 

Courses  in  Botany — 

Elementary  Botany,  1897-1903. 
General  Botany,  1898,  1899. 
Advanced  Botany,  1902,  1903. 
Microscopic  Botany,  1898. 

185 


Indiana  University 


Courses  in  Botany  (continued)— 

Morphology  of  Algae,  1899,  1900. 

Comparative  Morphology  of  Archegoniates,  1899. 

Vegetable  Histology,  1899,  1900. 

Research,  1899,  1900. 

Advanced  Work  in  Ecology,  1901. 

Laboratory  and  Field  Work  on  Plant  Relations,  1901. 

Lectures  on  Plant  Relations,  1901. 

Relations  of  Plants  to  Insects,  1901. 

Courses  in  Bacteriology — 

General  Bacteriology,  1899,  1900. 
Bacteriology— Laboratory  Practice,  1899,  1900. 
Advanced  Bacteriology,  1899,  1900. 
Lectures— Selected  Topics,  1899,  1900. 
Research,  1899,  1900. 

A  course  of  ten  lectures  by  Prof.   C.  F.  Hodge,  of  Clark  University, 
on  the  point  of  view  of  Nature  Study  was  given  in  1902. 


186 


DEPARTMENTS   NOW   DISCONTINUED 


After  the  death  of  President  Wylie  in  1851,  the  Board  of  Trustees 
of  the  University  was  entirely  reorganized.  At  one  of  their  first  meetings, 
namely,  on  April  14,  of  the  next  year,  the  new  Board  made  provision  for 
the  adoption  of  each  of  the  following  measures,  "as  calculated  to  render 
the  University  more  useful  and  more  popular:" 

1.  A  course  of  Agricultural  Chemistry,  to  be  commenced  at  such  seasons  of  the    Resolutions  of 

year  as  may  be  agreed  upon  as  most  convenient  and  suitable.    At  this  time  of  excite-    the  Board  of 

Trustees   1852 
ment  and  inquiry  as  to  improvements  in  agriculture,  it  will  be  wise  in  this  University 

to  take  the  lead  in  establishing  a  course  of  instruction  which  lies  at  the  very  basis 
of  all  agricultural  improvement. 

2.  A  Normal   Seminary   consisting  of  departments  for  males  and  for  females. 
There  is  no  measure  in  regard  to  the  State  University  more  urgently  required  by 
public  opinion  than  this.    Through  this  department  the  common  school  system  of  the 
State  will  be  brought  into  connection  and  sympathy  w.ith  the  University. 

3.  Theoretical  and  practical  engineering,   as   connected  with   the  Mathematical 
Department.    The  numerous  public  works  now  in  process  of  construction  render  civil 
engineering  a   most  important  branch  of  University   education,   and  it  can  not  be 
doubted  that  instruction  by  an  able  and  accomplished  mathematician,  in  this  im- 
portant branch,  together  with  practical  illustrations  in  the  field,  would  meet  one  of 
the  present  demands  of  public  education  in  Indiana,  and  add  a  new  class  of  valuable 
students  to  the  University. 

4.  The  adoption  of  regular  graduation  for  that  class  of  students  who  take  what 
is  denominated  a  Scientific  course.     It  has  been  subject  of  complaint,  that  proper 
provision  has  not  been  made  by  our  colleges  to  encourage  that  class  of  students  who 
do  not  complete  a  full  course  of  classical  reading.     In  order  to  induce  that  class  to 

187 


Indiana  University 


continue  in  the  University  until  they  shall  have  completed  a  prescribed  course  in 
Mathematics  and  Philosophy,  it  is  recommended  that  a  Diploma  be  conferred  upon 
them,  on  the  completion  of  a  course  of  studies,  to  be  prescribed  by  the  Faculty,  and 
that  the  same  formalities  be  observed  as  in  the  conferring  of  the  regular  degrees  now 
known  in  the  University. 


AGRICULTURAL  DEPARTMENT 


The  Agricultural 
Department, 
J  853-69. 


In  accordance  with  the  terms  of  these  provisions,  in  the  year  1853  there 
was  established  an  Agricultural  Department  of  the  University.  This  De- 
partment continued  in  existence  for  six  years.  The  work  of  instruction 
embraced  "Natural  philosophy  and  chemistry,  both  organic  and  inorganic, 
including  an  account  of  nutrition,  growth,  and  respiration,  in  the  vegetable 
and  animal  economy,  and  analysis  of  soils  and  manures,  ores,  marls,  etc., 
as  connected  with  agriculture.  The  course  also  includes  Geology." 

In  1862,  under  acts  of  Congress,  public  lands  were  appropriated  to  the 
several  States  for  the  endowment  of  agricultural  colleges.  By  an  act,  ap- 
proved March  6,  1865,  the  General  Assembly  of  Indiana  accepted  and 
claimed  the  benefits  of  the  provisions  of  the  acts  of  Congress  and  obligated 
itself  to  establish  such  an  institution  as  was  therein  contemplated. 

During  this  time  the  friends  of  the  University  were  making  a  strong 
effort  to  have  the  Agricultural  College  located  at  Bloomington  in  connection 
with  the  University,  and  land  and  apparatus  to  the  value  of  $400,000  were 
pledged  to  the  State  by  the  citizens  of  Monroe  County.  During  the  summer 
of  1864,  President  Nutt  delivered  an  urgent  address  in  support  of  this 
plan  in  fifteen  counties  of  central  and  southern  Indiana.1  By  an  act  of 
the  General  Assembly,  however,  approved  May  6,  1869,  the  State  accepted 
donations  made  by  Mr.  John  Purdue  and  other  citizens  of  Tippecanoe 
County,  and  the  college  contemplated  and  thus  provided  for  was  located 
in  Tippecanoe  County  under  the  name  and  style  of  "Purdue  University," 
where  it  has  remained  as  the  State  school  of  agriculture  and  mechanic  arts. 
Thus  was  definitely  defeated  any  hope  of  maintaining  a  distinct  Agricultural 
Department  in  connection  with  the  State  University. 

JFor  the  text  of  this  address,  see  the  University  catalogue  for  1866. 

188 


Departments  Now  Discontinued 

NORMAL   DEPARTMENT  AND  MODEL  SCHOOLS 

In  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  -Board  of  Trustees  already  Normal  Departs 
referred  to,  the  announcement  was  made  in  the  catalogue  for  1852  of  the 
proposed  establishment  of  a  "Normal  Department  in  connection  with  the 
University,  with  a  male  and  female  Model  School  as  schools  of  practice." 
From  the  catalogue  for  1857  the  following  description  of  the  work  is 
extracted : 

This  Department  is  designed  to  prepare  young  men  for  the  profession  of  teaching. 
Through  it,  the  University  designs  to  afford  its  aid  in  carrying  forward  the  great 
scheme  of  public  education,  thus  making  itself  an  ally  of  the  general  school  system  of 
the  State. 

Lectures  are  given  embracing  the  following  subjects:  Education,  its  nature  and 
design;  physical  education;  intellectual  education;  moral  education;  sesthetical  edu- 
cation; the  history  of  education;  an  examination  of  the  powers  of  the  mind,  especially 
with  reference  to  receiving  and  communicating  knowledge;  schoolhouse  architecture, 
including  school  furniture,  grounds,  etc.;  organization  and  classification  of  schools J 
graded  schools;  the  proper  incentives  for  the  school;  rewards  and  punishments; 
modes  of  teaching  different  subjects;  the  office  of  teacher,  his  duties  to  himself,  his 
school,  and  the  public;  duty  of  the  State  in  reference  to  educating  its  citizens;  the 
educational  policy  of  Indiana. 

It  is  intended,  in  this  course  of  lectures,  to  present,  as  nearly  as  may  be,  the  whole 
duty  of  the  teacher,  and  to  point  out  such  modes  of  school  discipline  and  management 
as  shall  assist  the  young  teacher  in  preparing  for  his  great  work.  The  members  of 
this  Department  are  also  required  to  write  on  various  topics  connected  with  education, 
and  to  discuss,  in  form  of  debate,  such  subjects  as  may  be  assigned  by  the  Professor. 

As  auxiliary  to  the  training  of  the  Normal  Class,  the  Board  of  Trustees  have 
fitted  up  a  room  in  one  of  the  college  buildings,  and  established  a  model  school,  under 
a  teacher  who  has  been  trained  in  a  Normal  School,  in  order  to  present  to  the  eye  of 
the  learner  a  common  school,  as  nearly  perfect  as  possible,  in  its  order,  arrangement, 
and  modes  of  teaching;  and  also  as  a  school  of  practice,  in  which  to  exercise  and  test 
the  young  teacher's  ability  and  tact. 

The  course  of  lectures  on  the  theory  and  practice  of  teaching  commences  on  the 
first  day  of  May,  and  continues  during  the  Summer  term  of  the  University.  The  stu- 
dent designing  to  qualify  himself  for  teaching  is,  however,  permitted  to  pursue  any 
of  the  studies  of  the  literary  or  scientific  course,  and  may  with  profit  enter  the  Uni- 
versity at  the  opening  of  any  term,  as  may  suit  his  convenience. 

189 


Indiana  University 

In  addition  to  the  course  of  lectures  on  didactics,  the  student  must  pass  an  ex- 
amination on  the  following  subjects,  in  order  to  entitle  him  to  a  diploma  from  the 
University,  as  a  qualified  professional  teacher,  viz.:  reading,  writing,  linear  drawing, 
mental  and  written  arithmetic,  bookkeeping,  geography,  with  outline  maps  and  the 
use  of  the  globes,  English  grammar  and  composition,  algebra,  geometry,  mensuration, 
surveying,  natural  philosophy,  chemistry,  human  physiology,  history  (United  States 
and  general),  history  of  English  literature.  Constitution  of  the  United  States  and  of 
Indiana,  and  vocal  music. 

Suspended  in  "The  resolution  of  the  Board  to  establish  a  separate  Female  Department 

of  the  Normal  School  was  rescinded  in  August,  1853.  Not  long  after, 
a  resolution  was  passed  to  make  the  Monroe  County  Female  Seminary, 
then  under  the  care  of  Mrs.  E.  J.  McFerson,  its  accomplished  Principal, 
the  Female  Normal  Seminary  of  the  University.  This  resolution  was 
never  carried  into  effect.  After  the  resignation  of  Professor  Read  in  1856 
the  Normal  Department  was  discontinued,  and  in  the  following  year  the 
model  school.  The  model  school  was  hard  to  manage.  The  pay  of  the 
teachers  was  insufficient;  hence  it  was  impossible  to  retain  competent  in- 
structors. It  had  a  change  of  teachers  nearly  every  year  of  its  existence."1 

its  revival  If  we  may  judge  from  its  history,  this  Department  seems  not  to  have  had 

a  very  successful  career.  In  1865  an  attempt  was  made  to  revive  it,  and  in 
the  catalogue  for  that  year  we  find  the  following  announcement : 

The  Normal  Department  of  Indiana  University  has  been  recently  reorganized, 
under  the  charge  of  Mr.  D.  E.  Hunter,  Superintendent  of  the  Graded  Schools  of 
Bloomington,  aided  by  members  of  the  Faculty.  Mr.  Hunter,  from  long  experience 
in  conducting  common  and  graded  schools,  is  eminently  qualified  for  this  Depart- 
ment. It  is  intended  to  form  a  Normal  class  at  the  beginning  of  each  term  of  the 
University,  to  which,  for  a  small  fee,  the  students,  and  other  persons  of  both  sexes, 
who  desire  to  prepare  themselves  thoroughly  for  the  practice  of  the  noble  and  useful 
profession  of  teaching,  will  be  admitted. 

It  is  the  design  of  this  Department  to  furnish  teachers,  who  shall  achieve  the 
highest  degree  of  success  in  their  profession,  and  that  the  University  may  thus  con- 
tribute its  aid  in  carrying  forward  the  great  school  system  of  the  State. 

There  will  also  be  held  in  connection  with  this  Department,  a  Normal  Institute, 
beginning  on  the  first  Monday  of  August  and  continuing  three  weeks. 


JWylie,  Indiana  University  (1890),  pp.  6O-61. 

190 


Departments  Now  Discontinued 

No  students  were  enrolled,  however,  and  the  Normal  Department  does 
not  again  come  to  life  until  1869.  It  is  worth  noting  that  at  this  time 
the  instruction  in  the  theory  and  practice  of  teaching  was  put  into  the  hands 
of  the  former  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction  for  the  State,  Prof. 
G.  W.  Hoss,  A.M.  Several  students  were  enrolled  in  this  and  the  following 
year,  after  which  the  Department  seems  completely  to  have  passed  out  of  Final  discontin- 

existence,  except  in  so  far  as  its  place  was  taken  in  later  years  by  the   uance'  excePfc  for 

r  .  present  Depart- 

present  Department  of  Education.     The  establishing  of  the  State  Normal  ment  of  Educa- 

School  at  Terre  Haute,  in  1865,  was  doubtless  a  factor  in  putting  an  end  to  tion- 
the  attempt  to  maintain  a  Normal  Department  in  connection  with  the  State 
University. 


ENGINEERING 
The  third  of  the  provisions  named  above  was  for  instruction  in  Engi-   Early  work  in 

Engineering 

(1841-58). 


neering.     Instruction  in  this  subject  was  given  from  1853  to  1858  in  con- 


nection with  the  Departments  of  Mathematics  and  Chemistry.  Civil  engi- 
neering had  been  offered  as  a  special  study,  however,  from  the  year  1841. 
Mechanical  instruction  of  this  sort  then  shared  for  a  time  the  same  fate 
as  did  the  work  in  agriculture.  In  this  earlier  period  of  its  existence,  the 
"School  of  Theoretical  and  Practical  Engineering"  proposed,  "besides  the 
collegiate  course  in  mathematics  and  natural  philosophy,  to  afford  instruction 
in  the  theory  of  roads,  railroads,  canals,  and  bridges,  the  laws  of  heat  and 
steam,  theory  and  construction  of  the  steam  engine,  and  topographical  sur- 
veying." 

The  work  in  engineering  was  revived  in  1870  in  connection  with  instruc-   Department  of 

tion  in  military  science.     In  this  year  it  was  announced  that  "a  class  in    Ml^**r5[  Science 
^  and  Civil 

Civil  Engineering,  recently  formed,  is  acquiring  information  likely  to  be   Engineering 
of  important  service,  as  well  as  in  great  demand,  while  our  prosperous  State    (1870-74). 
continues  her  work  of  internal  improvement."      From   1870  to   1874  we 
have  a  distinct  "Department  of  Military  Science  and  Civil  Engineering." 
The  engineering  feature  of  this  Department  included  instruction  "in  prac- 
tical surveying,  in  mechanical  drawing,  in  the  theory  and  the  construction 
of  bridges,  railroads,  turnpikes,  etc.,  and  in  architectural  mechanics." 

"It  so  happened,"  says  Professor  Wylie,   "that  many  of  the  students 
of  the  military  class,  who  lived  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  College, 

191 


Indiana  University 


Continuance  of 
engineering  in 
present  Depart- 
ments. 


found  it  very  inconvenient  to  attend  the  drill,  and  obtained  permission 
to  withdraw.  While  the  military  ardor  was  thus  weakened,  the  zeal  of 
the  students  took  a  new  direction;  the  class  of  civil  engineering  wa* 
enlarged,  and  soon  the  military  feature  of  Colonel  Thompson's  professorship 
became  less  and  less  prominent,  while  engineering,  mechanical  drawing,  the 
construction  of  bridges,  practical  surveying,  etc.,  became  more  and  more 
popular."1 

Accordingly,  the  military  features  of  this  Department  entirely  disap- 
peared, and  from  1874  to  1876  instruction  was  given  only  in  civil  engi- 
neering, in  which  scientific  students  were  required  to  attend  daily  recita- 
tions. From  this  time  on,  both  the  theoretical  and  the  practical  work  of 
this  Department  has  been  undertaken  by  the  Department  of  Mathematics, 
in  conjunction  later  with  the  Department  of  Mechanics  and  Astronomy, 
and  the  Department  of  Physics.  As  was  the  case  with  the  work  in  agricul- 
ture, the  founding  of  Purdue  University  as  a  State  school,  in  1869,  was 
doubtless  an  important  contributory  factor  in  the  decline  of  engineering  as 
a  separate  department. 


Military  exer- 
cises, 1841-42. 


MILITARY  DEPARTMENT 

Instruction  in  military  science  was  given  at  three  different  periods 
in  the  history  of  the  University,  namely,  in  1841  and  1842,  again  in 
1861,  and  again  from  1869  to  1874.  In  the  first  and  third  of  these  periods* 
military  instruction  was  auxiliary  to  the  work  in  civil  engineering.  During 
the  earliest  period  we  find,  under  the  heading  of  "Military  Exercises/'  the 
following  announcement : 

At  such  seasons  as  the  weather  permits,  a  portion  of  the  students  are  instructed 
by  the  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  [Lieutenant  (later  General)  Jacob  Ammen.) 
(himself  a  graduate,  and  formerly  an  Assistant  Professor  at  West  Point)  in  Military 
Exercises.  The  hour  of  drill  is  after  recitation  hours  [every  afternoon  in  the  week 
except  Saturday  and  Sunday]  and  attendance,  on  the  part  of  the  students,  is  volun- 
tary. Arms  have  been  furnished  by  the  Government. 

After  the  resignation  of  Lieutenant  Ammen  in  1842,  the  military  exer- 
cises were  soon  discontinued.  But  in  the  first  year  of  President  Nutt's 


iWylie,  Indiana  University  (1890),  pp.  78-79. 

192 


Departments  Now  Discontinued 

administration  (1861),  there  was  organized  among  the  students  of  the  Uni- 
versity a  company  known  as  the  "University  Cadets."  The  following  account 
is  given  of  the  purpose  and  scope  of  this  organization :  "As  appropriate 
physical  exercise  is  essential  to  health,  and  some  knowledge  of  military  tactics 
is  not  only  desirable,  but  necessary  for  the  complete  education  of  young  men, 
the  students  of  the  University  have  the  opportunity  of  regular  Military 
Drill,  under  competent  instructors,  in  a  company  composed  of  students, 
called  the  University  Cadets."  This  organization  does  not  seem  to  have 
lasted  beyond  this  one  year. 

In  1869  a  distinct  Military  Department  was  organized,  and  arrangements  Military  Depart- 
were  made  for  instruction  in  "Military  Science,  also  for  drill  in  the  school  ment' 1J 
of  the  soldier — company  and  battalion."  In  this  Department,  "tactics,  out- 
post duty,  military  engineering,  and  the  science  of  war"  were  also  to  be 
taught.  Arms  and  accoutrements  for  infantry  and  artillery  drill  were 
obtained,  and  Major-General  Eli  Long  was  detailed  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States  as  Military  Professor  in  the  University.  After  a  few  months 
General  Long,  much  to  the  regret  of  the  Faculty,  was  relieved  from  duty 
by  the  War  Department.  The  Trustees,  however,  secured  for  the  next  year 
the  services  of  Colonel  James  Thompson,  formerly  an  instructor  at  West 
Point,  who,  as  professor  of  military  science  and  civil  engineering,  carried 
on  this  Department  until  1874,  after  which  year  the  military  features 
were  discontinued. 


<14>  193 


Ill 
Bibliography 


(195) 


' '  FOR  BOOKS  AKE  NOT  ABSOLUTELY  DEAD  THINGS  ;  BUT  DOE  CONTAIN 
A  POTENCIE  OF  LlFE  IN  THEM  TO  BE  AS  ACTIVE  AS  THAT  SOULE 
WAS  WHOSE  PROGENY  THEY  ARE  ;  NAY,  THEY  DO  PRESERVE  AS  IN 
A  VIOLL  THE  PUREST  EFFICACIE  AND  EXTRACTION  OF  THAT  LIVING 
INTELLECT  THAT  BRED  THEM.  I  KNOW  THEY  ARE  AS  LIVELY,  AND  AS 
VIGOROUSLY  PRODUCTIVE,  AS  THOSE  FABULOUS  DRAGONS  TEETH; 
AND  BEING  SOWN  UP  AND  DOWN,  MAY  CHANCE  TO  SPRING  UP 
ARMED  MEN.  AND  YET  ON  THE  OTHER  HAND,  UNLESS  WARINESSE 
BE  US'D,  AS  GOOD  ALMOST  KILL  A  MAN  AS  KILL  A  GOOD  BOOK; 
WHO  KILLS  A  MAN  KILLS  A  REASONABLE  CREATURE,  GODS  IMAGE ; 
BUT  HEE  WHO  DESTROYES  A  GOOD  BOOK,  KILLS  REASON  IT  SELFE, 
KILLS  THE  IMAGE  OF  GOD  AS  IT  WERE  IN  THE  EYE.  MANY  A 
MAN  LIVES  A  BURDEN  TO  THE  EARTH;  BUT  A  GOOD  BOOKE  IS 
THE  PRETIOUS  LlFE-BLOOD  OF  A  MASTER  SPIRIT,  IMBALM'D  AND 
TREASUR'D  UP  ON  PURPOSE  TO  A  LIFE  BEYOND  LIFE." — MILTON. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  PRESENT  FACULTY 


***The  following'  list  of  the  publications  of  the  present  members  of  the  Faculty  of 
the  University  is  fairly  complete,  except  for  newspaper  articles,  which  have  been  ex- 
cluded. So  far  as  possible,  the  entries  have  been  arranged  in  chronological  order  of 
publication. 

All  degrees  received  by  members  of  the  Faculty  from  this  University  are  given  with 
the  year  in  which  conferred.  The  omission  of  the  date  in  connection  with  a  degree 
indicates  that  it  was  conferred  by  some  other  institution. 


ROBERT  JUDSON  ALEY,   A.B.    (1888),  A.M. 
(1890),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Mathemat- 


1.  A  practical  education.     In  Univer- 
sity Press,  I,  p.  5.     (Dec.,  1888.) 

2.  Science  in  the  Schools.     In  Univer- 
sity Press,  II,  pp.  18-19.     (March,  1889.) 

3.  Mathematics     in     the     preparatory 
schools.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Col.  Asso.,  1889, 
pp.  46-50.     (Dec.,  1889.) 

4.  Scales   of  notation.     In  University 
Press,  III,  pp.  2-3.     (Dec.,  1890.) 

5.  Preparation  for  teaching.     In  Uni- 
versity Press,  III,  p.  18.     (March,  1891.) 

6.  Modern   synthetic    geometry    versus 
Euclid.    In  Science,  XX,  pp.  297-298.    (Dec., 
1892.) 

7.  Some  old  arithmetics.    In  The  Stu- 
dent, A  Journal  of  Education,  III.     (Feb., 
March,  April,  1893.) 

8.  Bibliography  of  the  history  of  ge- 
ometry, also  a  list  of  mathematical  periodi- 
cals.   In  Am.  Math.  Mo.,  I,  pp.  42-47.    (Feb., 
1894.) 

9.  Daniel    Kirkwood :    biography    and 
bibliography.    In  Am.  Math.  Mo.,  I,  pp.  141- 
149.     (May,  1894.) 


10.  Indiana   University   and   her   presi- 
dent.    In  Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XXXIX,  pp. 
320-323.     (June,  1894.) 

11.  Review   of   Robert   Harris's    'Plane 
geometrical  drawing.'     In  Inland  Educator, 

I,  p.  266.      (Nov.,   1895.) 

12.  Review  of  J.  A.  McLellan  and  John 
Dewey's   'The   psychology    of   number.'      In 
Inland    Educator,    I,    pp.    320-321.       (Dec., 
1895.) 

13.  High  school  mathematical  teaching 
and  text-books.     In  Inland  Educator,  I,  pp. 
334-338.      (Jan.,   1896.) 

14.  Review  of  George  C.  Edward's  'Ele- 
ments  of  geometry.'      In   Inland   Educator, 

II,  p.  54.      (Feb.,  1896.) 

15.  Review   of   W.   W.  Beman   and  D. 
E.  Smith's  'Plane  and  solid  geometry.'     In 
Inland    Educator,    II,    pp.    55-56.       (Feb., 
1896.) 

16.  Review    of    W.    W.    R.    Ball's    'A 
primer  of  the  history  of  mathematics.'     In 
Inland  Educator,  II,  p.  117.     (March,  1896.) 

17.  Daniel  Kirkwood.     In  Indiana  Sch. 
Jour.,  XLI,  pp.  170-177.     (March,  1896.) 

18.  Review  of   Levi   L.   Conant's   'The 
number  concept.'     In  Inland  Educator,   II, 
pp.  174-175.      (April,  1896.) 


19T 


Indiana  University 


19.  Review  of  A.  E.  Hornbrook's  'Con- 
crete geometry.'    In  Ecluc.  llev.,  XI,  pp.  505- 
506.     (May,  189C.) 

20.  Review  of  II.  A.  Wood's  'Short  cuts 
in  arithmetic.'     In  Inland  Educator,  II,  p. 
234.      (June,  189G.) 

21.  Sketch  of  Judge  D.  D.  Banta.     In 
Inland   Educator,   II,   pp.   2G7-2G8.      (June, 
189G.) 

22.  Review    of   Frank    II.    Hall's    'The 
Werner    arithmetic    for    third    and    fourth 
grades.'      In    Inland    Educator,    II,   p.    349. 
(July,   189G.) 

23.  Review    of    E.    S.    Crawley's    'Ele- 
ments of  plane  and  spherical  trigonometry.' 
In    Inland    Educator,    III,   p.   227.      (Nov., 
189G.) 

24.  Review  of  Arthur  Lefevre's  'Num- 
ber and  its  algebra.'      In  Inland  Educator, 
III,  p.  227.     (Nov.,  189G.) 

25.  Review  of  Florian  Cojori's  'A  his- 
tory of  elementary  mathematics.'    In  Inland 
Educator,  IV,  p.  54.      (Feb.,  1897.) 

26.  A  device  for  extracting  the  square 
root    of   certain    surd    quantities.      In    Am. 
Math.  Mo.,  IV,  pp.  204-208.     (Sept.,  1897.) 

27.  Contributions  to  the  geometry  of  the 
triangle.      Philadelphia,    1897.      Pp.    32,    1 
plate. 

28.  Note  on  Charles   Smith's  definition 
of  multiplication.     In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1897,  p.  103. 

29.  Collinear  sets  of  three  points  con- 
nected with  the  triangle.     In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  103-111. 

30.  Counting.     In   Indiana   Sch.  Jour., 
XLII,  pp.  783-785.     (Dec.,  1897.) 

31.  Note  on  Angel's  method  of  inscrib- 
ing   regular    polygons.      In    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.    Sci.    for    1898,   pp.   92-93. 

32.  Concurrent  sets  of  three  lines  con- 
nected with  the  triangle.     In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.   for   1898,   pp.  93-100. 

33.  A    new    triangle    and    some    of    its 


properties.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1898,  pp.  89-91. 

34.  Review    of    Samuel    E.    Ilanvund's 
'Notes  on  method  in  arithmetic.'  In   Inland 
Educator,  V,  p.  301.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

35.  The  elective  system.     In  Jour,  of 
Education,  XLVII,  pp.  4-5.     (Jan.  6,  1898.) 

30.  The  high  school  curriculum.  In 
Inland  Educator,  VI,  pp.  14-18.  (Feb., 
1898.) 

37.  Review  of  M.  A.  Bailey's  'Compre- 
hensive   arithmetic.'      In    Inland    Educator, 
VI,  p.  32.      (Feb.,   1898.) 

38.  History   of  arithmetic.     In   Inland 
Educator,  VI,  pp.  79-80.     (March,  1898.) 

39.  Reasons   for   failure   in   arithmetic. 
In    Inland   Educator,   VI,   p.    127.      (April, 
1898.) 

40.  Algebra  and  geometry  as  a  help  to 
arithmetic.      /«-    Inland    Educator,    VI,    pp. 
108-169.      (May,  1898.) 

41.  Review    of    Fletcher    Durell's    'The 
new  school   algebra.'      In   Inland   Educator, 
VI,  pp.  1G9-170.     (May,  1898.) 

42.  Review  of  W.  W.   Speer's  arithme- 
tics.      In    Inland    Educator,    VI,    p.    210. 
(June,  1898.) 

43.  No  royal  road  to  mathematics.     In 
Inland  Educator,  VI,  p.  254.     (July,  1898.) 

44.  Liliwati  and  the  hour-glass.     In  In- 
land   Educator,   VI,    pp.   254,   255.      (July, 
1898.) 

45.  Christopher  Dock.     In  Inland  Edu- 
cator, VII,  pp.  4-8,  58-G1.     (August,  Sept., 
1898.) 

4G.  The  history  of  arithmetic.  In  In- 
land Educator,  VII,  pp.  20-21,  72-73,  124- 
125,  169,  226-227,  269-270;  VIII,  pp.  28- 
29,  84,  132-133,  183,  226-227,  279;  IX,  pp. 
L»0,  78-79,  126,  170-171,  216,  269;  X,  pp. 
23,  82,  131.  183,  ^19,  267.  In  Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  34-35.  (August,  1898,  to 
Sept.,  1900.) 

47.     Review   of  A.   Jones's  'The  science 


19S 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


of   arithmetic.'      In   Inland   Educator,    VII, 
p.   73.      (Sept.,   1898.) 

48.  Some  suggestions  on  arithmetic.     In 
Inland   Educator,   VII,    pp.    71-72.      (Sept, 
1898.) 

49.  Compound  numbers.    In  Inland  Ed- 
ucator,   VII,   p.    126.      (Oct.,    1898.) 

50.  Review  of  J.  B.  Shcwalter's  'Solu- 
tion book.'    In  Inland  Educator,  VII,  p.  170. 
(Nov.,  1898.) 

51.  Fourth  institute  arithmetic.    In  In- 
land   Educator,    VII,    pp.    169-170.      (Nov., 
1898.) 

52.  Review  of  G.   E.   Fisher   and  I.   J. 
Schwatt's   'Text-book  of  algebra  with   exer- 
cises.'     In    Inland    Educator,   VII,    p.   227. 
(Dec.,  1898.) 

53.  Percentage.      In    Inland    Educator, 
VII,   p.  227.      (Dec.,  1898.) 

54.  Review    of    E.    C.    Hewett's    'The 
Rand-McNally  arithmetics.'     In  Inland  Ed- 
ucator, VII,  pp.  227-228.      (Dec.,  1898.) 

55.  A  proposed  notation  for  the  geom- 
etry of  the  triangle.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1899,  pp.  86-87. 

56.  Some  circles  connected  with  the  tri- 
angle.     In    Proc.    Indiana    Acad.    Sci.    for 
1899,  pp.  88-89. 

."»7.  The  point  7'  and  some  of  its  proper- 
ties. In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1899, 
pp.  90-93. 

58.  Squaring  the  circle.     In  Inland  Ed- 
ucator, VII,  pp.  271-272.     (Jan.,  1899.) 

59.  Review   of   .1.   H.   Walsh's  arithme- 
tics.    In  Inland  Educator,  VII,  pp.  270-271. 
(Jan.,  1899.) 

60.  Review   of   Augustus   De   Morgan's 
'Study  and  difficulties  of  mathematics.'     In 
Inland  Educator,  VIII,  p.  29.     (Feb.,  1899.) 

61.  Review   of   Henry   Goldman's   'The 
arithmachinist.'     In  Inland  Educator,  VIII, 
p.   85.      (March,   1899.) 

62.  The    difference    between    arithmetic 
and    algebra.      In    Inland    Educator,    VIII, 
pp.  84-85.     (March,  1899.) 

63.  Review  of  Hermann  Schubert's  'Es- 


says and  recreations.'     In  Inland  Educator, 

VIII,  p.  133.     (April,  1899.) 

64.  The  equation  in  arithmetic.     In  In- 
land Educator,  VIII,  p.  183.     (May,  1889.) 

65.  Some    large    numbers.      In    Inland 
Educator,  VIII,  p.  184.      (May,  1899.) 

66.  The   order   of   signs   in   arithmetic. 
In  Inland  Educator,  VIII,  p.  228.      (June, 
1899.) 

67.  Apparatus  in  rural  schools.     In  In- 
diana Sch.  Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  331-334.    (June, 
1899.) 

68.  Review  of  J.  W.  Cook  and  N.  Crop- 
sey's  'The  Indiana  arithmetics.'     In  Inland 
Educator,   IX,  pp.   27,  79-80,   127,  171-172. 
(August  to  Nov.,  1899.) 

69.  Review    of    John     Graham's     'The 
farmer's  and  mechanic's  assistant  and  com- 
panion ;  or  a  new  system  of  decimal  arith- 
metic.'     In    Inland    Educator,    IX,    p.    79. 
(Sept.,  1899.) 

70.  Preparation    for    teaching   arithme- 
tic.    In  Inland  Educator,  IX,  pp.   126-127. 
(Oct.,   1899.) 

71.  Short    cuts.      lit,    Inland    Educator, 

IX,  217,  pp.  269-270. ;  X,  23-24,  82-83,  131- 
132,    183-184,    222,    270.       (Dec.,    1899,    to 
July,  1900.) 

72.  Some  properties  of  the  symmedean 
point.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1900, 
pp.  85-88. 

73.  Note  on  McGinnis's  universal  solu- 
tion.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1900, 
pp.  88-90. 

74.  The  beginning  of  the  century.     In 
Inland  Educator,  X,  p.  24.     (Feb.,  1900.) 

75.  How  to  make  mathematics  interest- 
ing.     In    Inland    Educator,    X,    pp.    84-85. 
(March,  1900.) 

76.  Review    of     D.     E.     Smith's     'The 
teaching    of    elementary    mathematics.'      In 
Inland  Educator,  X,  p.  222.     (June,  1900.) 

77.  Review  of  Karl  Fink's  'A  brief  his- 
tory of  mathematics.'     In  Inland  Educator, 

X,  p.  271.      (July,  1900.) 

78.  Review  of  J.  T.   Fairchild's  'Solu- 


199 


Indiana  University 


tion  book.'     In  Educator-Journal,  I,  p.  36. 
(August,  1900.) 

79.  Review  of  W.  W.  Rupert's  'Famous 
geometrical  theorems  and  problems.'    In  Ed- 
ucator-Journal, I,  p.  37.     (August,  1900.) 

80.  Review  of  John  S.  Mackay's  'Arith- 
metic.'    In  Educator-Journal,  I,  pp.   79-80. 
(Sept.,  1900.) 

81.  Review     of     John     F.     Downey's 
'Higher   algebra.'     In  Educator-Journal,   I, 
pp.  79-80.     (Sept.,  1900.) 

82.  Augustus  DeMogan.     In  Educator- 
Journal,  1,  p.  78.     (Sept.,  1900.) 

83.  Explanation    in    arithmetic    work. 
In  Educator- Journal,  I,  pp.  78-79.     (Sept., 
1900.) 

84.  John    J.    Sylvester.      In   Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  125-126.     (Oct.,  1900.) 

85.  Definitions  in  mathematics.     In  Ed- 
ucator-Journal, I,  pp.  126-127.     (Oct.,  1900.) 

86.  Joseph  L.  Lagrange.     In  Educator- 
Journal,  I,  p.   176.      (Nov.,  1900.) 

87.  Problem     solving.       In     Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  177-178.     (Nov.,  1900.) 

88.  Graphical  representation.     In  Edu- 
cator-Journal, I,  pp.  219-220.     (Dec.,  1900.) 

89.  Sir    Isaac   Newton.      In    Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  219-220.     (Jan.,  1901.) 

90.  Karl  Frederick  Gauss.     In  Educa- 
tor-Journal, I,  pp.  274-276.     (Feb.,  1901.) 

91.  Rene     DesCartes.       In     Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  380-381.     (March,  1901.) 

92.  Incommensurable  number.     In  Ed- 
ucator-Journal, I,  p.  424.     (April,  1901.) 

93.  Benjamin     Pierce.       In     Educator- 
Journal,  I,  pp.  479-480. 

94.  Arthur   Caley.     In   Educator- Jour- 
nal, I,  pp.  525-526.     (June,  1901.) 

95.  William   Chauvenet.      In   Educator- 
Journal,  II,  p.  20.     (Sept.,  1901.) 

96.  Counting.    In  Educator-Journal,  II, 
pp.  21-22.     (Sept.,  1901.) 

97.  George  Bruce  Halsted.     In  Educa- 
tor-Journal, II,  p.  80.      (Oct.,  1901.) 


98.  Greater    accuracy.      In    Educator- 
Journal,  II,  p.  80.     (Oct.,  1901.) 

99.  Proof   of   the   elementary   rules   by 
casting  out  the  9's.     In  Educator-Journal, 
II,   pp.    120-127.      (Nov.,   1901.) 

100.  Graphs,  an  appendix  to  Wells's  'Es- 
sentials of  algebra.'    Boston,  1901.    Pp.  359- 
367. 

101.  Graphs,     a     monograph.       Boston, 
1902.     Pp.  iv,  21. 

102.  Arithmetic.      In    Educator-Journal, 
II,   p.   175.      (Dec.,   1901.) 

103.  More   thought.     In    Educator-Jour- 
nal, II,  pp.  175-176.     (Dec.,  1901.) 

104.  Review  of  Arthur  F.  Griffith's  'The 
easy   and   speedy   reckoner.'     In   Educator- 
Journal,  II,  p.  176.      (Dec.,  1901.) 

105.  Review  of  T.  Sundara  Row's  'Geo- 
metric exercises  in  paper  folding.'     In  Edu- 
cator-Journal, II,  p.  178.     (Dec.,  1901.) 

106.  Some  obsolete  arithmetical  subjects. 
In    Educator-Journal,    II,    p.    234.      (Jan., 
1902.) 

107.  Review  of  E.  S.  Loomis's  'How  to 
attack   an   exercise  in  geometry.'     In   Edu- 
cator-Journal, II,  p.  280.     (Feb.,  1902.) 

108.  Review  of  Frank  H.  Hall's  'How  to 
teach  arithmetic.'     In  Educator-Journal,  II, 
pp.  280-281.      (Feb.,  1902.) 

109.  Better    results    in    arithmetic.      In 
Educator- Journal,  II,  pp.  331-332.     (March, 
1902.) 

110.  Some  curiosities  of   the  digits.     In 
Educator- Journal,     II,     p.     332.       (March, 
1902.) 

111.  Review  of  Egbert  More's  'The  tri- 
section  of  an  angle.'     In  Educator-Journal, 
II,   p.  402.      (April,   1902.) 

112.  Abridged    multiplication.      In    Edu- 
cator-Journal, II,  p.  402.      (April,  1902.) 

113.  Preparation  for  teaching  high  school 
mathematics.     In  Educator- Journal,  II,  pp. 
448-450.      (May,  1902.) 

114.  A  peculiar  number.     In   Educator- 
Journal,  II,  p.  451.     (May,  1902.) 


200 


Beedel 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


110.     Greatest  common  divisor.     In  Edu- 
cator-Journal, II,  p.  497-498.     (June,  1902.) 

117.  How  to  make  a  table  of  squares.    In 
Educator- Journal,  III,  p.  17.     (Sept.,  1902.) 

118.  Division  and  partition.     In  Educa- 
tor-Journal, III,  p.  72.      (Oct.,  1902.) 

119.  Review  of  W.  P.  Morgan's  'Teach- 
er's manual  for  the  Indiana  advanced  arith- 
metic.'    In    Educator-Journal,    III,    p.    72. 
(Oct.,  1902.) 

120.  Review    of    David    Hilbert's    'The 
foundations    of    geometry.'      In    Educator- 
Journal,   III,   p.   73.      (Oct.,   1902.) 

121.  The   metric   system.     In   Educator- 
Journal,   III,   p.    113.      (Nov.,    1902.) 

122.  Circulating  decimals.     In  Educator- 
Journal,  III   pp.  162,  214-215.     (Dec.,  1902, 
and  Jan.,  1903.) 

123.  Ratio   and   proportion.      In  Educa- 
tor-Journal, III,  p.  214.      (Jan.,  1903.) 

124.  Involution.      In    Educator-Journal, 
III,   pp.   392-393.      (May,   1903.) 

125.  Review     of     W.     E.     Chancellor's 
'Graded  arithmetics.'     In  Educator-Journal, 
III,   p.  431.      (June,   1903.) 

126.  Review  of  O.  L.  Kelso's  'Arithme- 
tic for  high  schools.'     In  Educator-Journal, 

III,  p.  431.      (June,   1903.) 

127.  Factoring.       In     Educator-Journal, 

IV,  p.  76.      (Oct.,  1903.) 

128.  Counting.       In     Educator-Journal, 
IV,  pp.  76-77.     (Oct.,  1903.) 

129.  Ways  of  paying  a  bill  in  a  distant 
city.    In  Educator-Journal,  IV,  pp.  127-128. 
(Nov.,  1903.) 

130.  The  new  elementary  arithmetic.   Re- 
vision.     (Joint  author  with  O.   L.   Kelso. ) 
New  York,  1903.     Pp.  x,  276. 

131.  The  new  advanced  arithmetic.     Re- 
vision.     (Joint  author  with  O.  L.   Kelso.) 
New  York,   1903.     Pp.  xiii,   327-334. 

132.  Editorials.     In  Educator-Journal,  3 
to   4   pages   in   each    issue,   beginning   with 
Vol.  IV,   Sept.,  1903. 

133.  The   essentials   of   algebra.      (Joint 


author  with  D.  A.  Rothrock. )      New  York, 
1904. 


FRANK  MARION  ANDREWS,  A.B.  (1894), 
A.M.  (1895),  B.A.M.,  Ph.D.  Assistant 
Professor  of  Botany. 

1.  Development  of  the  embryo  sac  of 
Jeffersonia  diphylla.    In  Bot.  Gaz.  XX. 

2.  Karyokinesis  in  Magnolia  and  Liri- 
odendron  with  special  reference  to   the  be- 
havior of  the  chromosomes.     In  Beihefte  z. 
Botan.  Centralblatt,  XI,  pp.  734-742. 

3.  Ueber  die  Wirkung  der  Centrifugal- 
kraft   auf  Pflanzen.      In  Jahrb.   f.  wissens. 
Botanik,  XXXVIII,  pp.  1-40. 


JOSHUA  WILLIAM  BEEDE,  Ph.D.     Instructor 
in  Geology. 

1.  The  McPherson  Equus  beds.     (Joint 
author  with  E.  Haworth.)      In  Univ.  Geol. 
Surv.   Kansas,   II,   pp.   287-296;    1   plate,   1 
map.      (1897.) 

2.  The  stratigraphy  of  Shawnee  coun- 
ty  (Kansas).     In  Trans.  Kansas  Acad.  Sci. 
XV,  pp.  27-34.      (1898.) 

3.  McPherson    Equus    beds.      Revised. 
In  Trans.  Kansas  Acad.  Sci.  XV,  pp.  104- 
110.     1  plate,  1  map.      (1898.) 

4.  Notes  on  Kansas  physiography.     In 
Trans.  Kansas  Acad.  Sci.,  XV,  pp.  114-120 ; 
4  plates.      (1898.) 

5.  New  corals   from   the   Kansas   car- 
boniferous.    In  Kansas  Univ.  Quart.,  VII, 
pp.  180-181;  1  plate.      (1898.) 

6.  Variation    of    external    appearance 
and  internal  characters  of  Spirifer  camera- 
tus  Morton.     In  Kansas  Univ.  Quart.,  VII, 
pp.  103-105;  2  plates.     (April,  1898.) 

7.  Notes   on    Campophyllum   torquium 
Owen,    and    a   new    variety    of    Monopteria 
gibbosa    Meek    and    Worthen.      In    Kansas 


201 


Indiana  University 


\_Beede 


Uuiv.    Quart.,    VII,    pp.    187-190.      1    plate 
(July,  1898.) 

8.  Preliminary   notice  on   the  correla- 
tion of  the  Meek  and  Marcou  section  at  Ne- 
braska City,  Nebraska,  with  the  Kansas  coal 
measures.      In    Kansas    Univ.    Quart.,    VII, 
pp.  231-233.      (Oct.,   1898.) 

9.  Description  of  some  new  forms  of 
Pseudomonotis   from   the   upper   coal   meas- 
ures of  Kansas.     In  Kansas  Univ.   Quart., 
VIII,  pp.  79-84.    2  plates.     (April,  1899.) 

10.  New  fossils   from   the   Kansas  coal 
measures.     In    Kansas   Univ.   Quart.,   VIII, 
pp.  123-icO.     2  plates.      (July,  1899.) 

11.  New    and   little    known    Pelecypods 
from  the  coal  measures.     (Joint  author  with 
Austin  F.  Rogers.)    In  Kansas  Univ.  Quart., 
VIII,  pp.  131-134;  1  plate.     (July,  1899.) 

12.  On  the  correlation  of  the  coal  meas- 
ures  of   Kansas  and   Nebraska.     In   Trans. 
Kansas  Acad.  Sci.,  XVI,  pp.  70-84.     (1899.) 

13.  The  coal  in  western  Atchison  coun- 
ty.     In    A.   C.    H.    S.    Bull.,    VI,    pp.   9-10. 
(1899.) 

14.  Two  new  crinoids  from  the  Kansas 
carboniferous.     In  Kansas  Univ.  Quart.,  X, 
pp.  21-24;  1  plate.     (Jan.,  1900.) 

15.  Carboniferous    invertebrates,    Fora- 
minifera    to    Pelecypods.      In    Univ.    Geol. 
Surv.    Kansas,    VI,    pp.    1-187 ;    22    plates. 
(1900.) 

16.  Reconnaissance  in   the  Blue  valley 
Permian.     In  Kansas  Univ.  Quart.,  IX,  pp. 
191-202;  1  map.     (1900.) 

17.  The   age   of   the   Kansas-Oklahoma 
red-beds.     In  Atner.  Geol.,  XXVIII,  pp.  46- 
47.      (1901.) 

18.  Permian    Fauna   of   central   United 
States,    Part    I.      In    Trans.    Kansas    Acad. 
Sci.,  XVII,  pp.  185-190;  2  plates.     (1901.) 

19.  New  fossils  from  the  upper  carbon- 
iferous  of   Kansas.      In    Kansas   Univ.    Sci. 
Bull.,    XI,    pp.    147-153;    1    plate.      (Sept., 
1902.) 

20.  Invertebrate  paleontology  of  the  red- 


beds.  In  Adv.  Bull.  Geol.  Surv.  Oklahoma 
Territory,  I,  pp.  1-11  ;  1  plate.  (April, 
1902.) 

21.  Fauna   of   the   Shawnee   formation, 
Wabaunsee   formation  and   the   Cottonwood 
limestone.     In  Kansas  Univ.   Sci.   Bull.,   I, 
pp.   163-181.      (Sept.,  1902.) 

22.  Cottonwood    Falls    folio,    geological 
atlas  of  the  United  States.      (Joint  autho* 
with  Charles  S.  Prosser.)     In  U.  S.  Geol. 
Surv.      (In  press.) 

23.  Kansas   coal-measures   faunal   stud- 
ies ;    lower    coal    measures.       (Joint   author 
with  Austin  F.  Rogers.)      In  Kansas  Univ. 
Sci.  Bull.      (In  press.) 


JOHN  ANDREW  BERGSTROM,  Ph.D.,  Professor 
of  Pedagogy. 

1.  Review  of  Mettier's   'Aural  vertigo 
(Meniere's   disease).'       (Jour.    Nerv.    Ment. 
Dis.    1891,    XVI,    p.    19.)      In    Am.    Jour. 
Psych.,  V,  p.  102.      (Oct.,  1892.) 

2.  Experiments      upon      physiological 
memory  by  means  of  the  interference  of  asso- 
ciations.    /M  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  V,  pp.  356- 
369.      (April,   1893.) 

3.  Review    of    Schumann's    'Ueber   die 
Unterschiedsempfindlichkeit  fur  kleine  Zeit- 
grfissen.'     (Zeitschrift  f.  Psych,  u.  Phys.  der 
Sinnesorgane,   II,   p.   294.)      In   Am.   Jour. 
Psych.,  V,  p.  102.     (1893.) 

4.  Review  of  Epstein's   'Die  logisrlini 
Principien  der  Zeitmessung.'     In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  V,  p.   102.      (1893.) 

5.  Review  of  J.  J.  Van  Biervliet's  'La 
momoire.'     In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  VI,  p.  308. 
(1894.) 

6.  An  experimental  study  of  some  of 
the  conditions  of  mental  activity.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Psych.,  VI.  pp.  247-274.     (Jan.,  1894.) 

7.  The  relation  of  the  interference  to 
the   practice   effect   of   an    association.      In 
Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  VI,  pp.  433-442.      (June, 
1894.) 


202 


Brown} 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


8.  Review   of    Fridtjuv    Berg's    'Peda- 
gogiska  biblioteket  i   Stockholm,'  and  of  N. 
G.  W.  Lagerstedt's  'Katalog  b'fver  pedagog- 
iska  biblioteket  i   Stockholm.'  In  Ped.   Sem. 
Ill,  p.  163.     (1894.) 

9.  Review    of   N.    G.    W.    Lagerstedt's 
'Atgiirder     mot     ofveranstrangning     vid     de 
hogre  skolorna  i  Tyskland.'      (In  Verdandi, 
1894.)     In  Ped.  Sem.,  Ill,  p.  1G3.     (1894.) 

10.  Review    of    G.    E.    Miiller    and    F. 
Schumann's     'Experimentelle     Beitriige    zur 
Untersuchung  des  Gecliichtnisses,'    (Zeitschr. 
f.   Psych.»u.   Phys.   d.   Sinnesorgane,   VI,   p. 
299.)      In   Am.    Jour.    Psych.,   IV,,   p.   299. 
(Jan.,  1894.) 

11.  Review  of  Emil  Krsepelin's  'Ueber 
die  Beeinflussung  einfacher  psychischer  Vor- 
giinge   durch   einige   Arzneimittel.'      In   Am. 
Jour.  Psych.,  VI,  p.  301.     (1894.) 

12.  Review     of     Dr.     Emanuel     Rosen- 
baum's  'Warum  miissen  wir  schlafen?   Eine 
neue  Theorie  des    Schlafes.'     In  Am.   Jour. 
Psych.,  VI,  p.  307.      (1894.) 

13.  School  hygiene.     Translation  of  Dr. 
Luclwig    Kotelmann's    'Ueber    Schulgesund- 
heitspflege.       (Joint    author    with    Edward 
Conradi.)     Syracuse,  N.  Y.     1899.     Pp.  391. 

14.  Review     of     Nicholas     Alechsieff's 
'Reactionszeiten  bei  Durchgangsbeobachtun- 
gen.'     (Phil.  Stud.,  XVI,  p.  00.)     In  Psych. 
Rev.,   VII,   p.  520.      (1900.) 

15.  A    type    of    pendulum    chronoscope 
and   attention    apparatus.     In   Psych.    Rev., 
XII,  pp.  483-489.      (Sept.,  1900.) 

1G.  A  magnet  registration  key.  In 
Psych.  Rev.,  VII,  pp.  612-614.  (Nov., 
1900.) 

17.  A  new  type  of  ergograph,  with  a 
discussion  of  ergographic  experimentation. 
In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  XIV,  pp.  246-276. 
(1903.) 


1.  On   phenolphthaleiu    and   methylor- 
ange  as  indicators.     In  Journal  of  Franklin 
Institute.     (April,  1893.) 

2.  The    atomic    weight    of    palladium. 
(Joint  author  with  Edward  H.  Keiser.)     In 
Am.  Chem.  Jour.,  1894. 

3.  The   action    of    magnesium    on   ali- 
phatic alcohols  and  a  new  method  of  pre- 
paring  allylene.      In    Journal    of    Franklin 
Institute,   1895. 

4.  The   polybasic   acids   of  mesitylene. 
Bryn  Mawr  Monographs,  No.  1.     (1901.) 


ALFRED  MANSFIELD  BROOKS,  A.M.     Associ- 
ate Professor  of  the  History  of  Art. 

1.  Decoration  of  school  rooms.     In  In- 
land    Educator,     IX,     pp.     272-274     (Jan., 
1900)  ;   also  in    Indiana   Sch.   Jour.,   XLV, 
pp.  29-32.      (Jan.,   1900.) 

2.  Architecture :     Greek,   Roman,  By- 
zantine, Romanesque  and  Gothic.     In  Prog- 
ress,  No.   3,   pp.    155-189.      (1901.) 

3.  The   study    of    art    in    universities. 
In    Education,    XXI,   pp.   864-371.       (Feb., 
1901.) 

4.  On   the   teaching  of  art   in   univer- 
sities.    In  Proc.  Western  Drawing  Teachers' 
Asso.  for  1903. 

5.  Review   of   Charles    Holroyd's   'Mi- 
chael Angelo  Buonarroti.'     In  Dial,  1904. 

6.  Review    of    William    Bayne's    'Sir 
David  Wilkie.'    In  Dial,  1904. 

7.  Review  of  Arthur  B.  Chamberlain's 
'Thomas  Gainsborough.'    In  Dial,  1904. 


MARY  BIDWELL  BREED,  Ph.D.  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry,  and  Dean  of 
Women. 


OLIVER  W.  BROWN,  A.M.  (1896).    Assistant 
Professor  of  Chemistry. 

1.  Solubility    and    boiling    point.      In 
Jour.  Phys.  Chem.,  I,  p.  784.      (1897.) 

2.  Distribution    of    mercuric    chloride 
between  toluene  and  water.     In  Jour.  Phys. 
Chem.,  II,  p.  51.      (1898.) 


203 


Indiana  University 


frown 


3.  Preparation    of    potassium    persele- 
nate.      (Joint  author  with   L.   M.   Dennis.) 
In  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  XXIII,  p.  358. 
(1901.) 

4.  Efficiency  of  the  nickel-plating  tank. 
In  Trans.  Amer.  Electrochem.  Soc.,  IV,  pp. 
83-99.      (1903.) 


ELMER  BURRITT  BRYAN,  A.B.  (1893).  Pro- 
fessor of  Educational  and  Social  Psy- 
chology. 

1.  School    hygiene.     In    Indiana    Sch. 
Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  393-396.     (July,  1899.) 

2.  School   diseases.      In   Indiana    Sch. 
Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  465-469.     (August,  1899.) 

3.  The  hygiene  of  instruction.     In  In- 
diana Sch.  Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  533-536.    (Sept., 
1899.) 

4.  The  care  of  the  senses.     In  Indiana 
Sch.    Jour.,    XLIV,     pp.    593-594.       (Oct., 
1899.) 

5.  Child  life.     In  Indiana  Sch.  Jour., 
XLIV,   p.  649.      (Nov.,   1899.) 

6.  Nascent  stages  and  arrested  devel- 
opment.   In  Pedagogical  Seminary,  VII,  pp. 
357-396.      (Oct.,  1900.) 

7.  The  Philippine  situation.     In  Edu- 
cator-Journal,    IV,     pp.     215-217.        (Jan., 
1904.) 


WILLIAM  LOWE  BRYAN,  A.B.  (1884),  A.M. 
(1886),  Ph.D.  President  of  the  Uni- 
versity. 

1.  Psychology   at    Indiana    University. 
In  Am.   Jour,  of  Psych.,   Ill,  pp.   283-284. 
(April,  1890.) 

2.  On    the    development    of    voluntary 
motor  ability.     In  Am.  Jour,  of  Psych.,  V, 
pp.  125-204.     (Nov.,  1892.) 

3.  Auditory    and     visual     memory     in 
school   children.      In   Proc.    Internat.   Educ. 
Asso.  for  1893,  pp.  779-781. 


4.  Child  study,  systematic  and  unsys- 
tematic.    In  Proc.   N.  E.  A.  for  1895,  pp. 
412-418. 

5.  On  the  methods  and  results  of  child 
study.    Article  in  Johnson's  Encyclopaedia. 

6.  Science  and  education.     In  Proc.  N. 
E.  A.  for  1895,  pp.  161-165. 

7.  Scientific  and  non-scientific  methods 
of  child  study.     In  Proc.  N.  E.  A.  for  1896. 
pp.  856-860. 

8.  Studies  on  the  physiology  and  psy- 
chology of  the  telegraphic  language.     (With 
Noble  Harter.)     In  Psych.  Rev.  IV,  pp.  27- 
53.     (Jan.,  1897.) 

9.  Hygiene  of  motor  development.     In 
Proc.  N.  E.  A.  for  1897,  pp.  279-280. 

10.  Report  of  special  committee  on  the 
organization   of   a  committee   on  school   hy- 
giene.    In  Proc.  N.  E.  A.  for  1897,  pp.  327- 
328. 

1 1.  Plato  the   teacher ;   being  selections 
from  the  Apology,  Euthydemus,  Protagoras, 
Symposium,  Phaedrus,  Republic,  and  Phaedo 
of    Plato.      Edited    with    introduction    and 
notes.      (Joint   author  with   Mrs.   Charlotte 
Lowe  Bryan.)      New  York,  1897.     Pp.  xli, 
454. 

12.  The     Republic     of     Plato.       With 
studies    for    teachers.      (Joint   author   with 
Mrs.   Charlotte  Lowe   Bryan.)      New  York, 
1898.    Pp.  313. 

13.  Studies     on     the     telegraphic     lan- 
guage.     The   acquisition   of  a   hierarchy  of 
habits.      (Joint  author  with  Noble  Harter.) 
In    Psych.    Rev.    VI.    pp.    345-375.       (July, 
1899.) 

14.  Science  in  the  daily  press.      (Joint 
author   with   Ernest  H.   Lindley.)      In    Sci- 
ence, N.  S.,  XI,  p.  74.     (1900.) 

15.  An     arithmetical     prodigy.      (Jotrt 
author  with  E.  H.  Lindley.)     In  Proc.  Am. 
Psych.    Assoc.    for    1900.      In   Psych.    Rev., 
VII,  p.  135.     (1900.) 

16.  The  case  of  Arthur  Griffith,  arith- 
metical prodigy.      (Joint  author  with  E.  H. 


204 


Cumings  ] 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


Lindley. )  In  Compte  rendu  du  Congres  In- 
ternational de  Psychologic  tenu  a  Paris, 
1900,  p.  178. 

17.  Theory  and  practice.  President's 
address,  American  Psychological  Associa- 
tion, St.  Louis  meeting,  December,  1903.  In 
Psych.  Rev.,  XI,  pp.  71-82.  (March,  1904.) 


LEWIS  NATHANIEL  CHASE,  Ph.D.  Assistant 
Professor  of  English. 

1.  The  English  heroic  play :  a  critical 
description  of  the  rhymed  tragedy  of  the 
Restoration.  New  York,  1903.  Pp.  vii,  250. 


WILBUR  ADELMAN  COGSHALL,  A.M.  (1903). 
Assistant  Professor  of  Astronomy. 

1.  November    meteors.      In    Pop.    As- 
tron.,  VII,  pp.   71-74.      (Jan.,  1899.) 

2.  Double-star    measures.      In    Astro. 
Jour.,  XX,  pp.  173-178. 

3.  Double-star    measures.      In    Astro. 
Jour.,  XXI. 

4.  Double-star    measures.      In   Astro. 
Jour.,  XXII,  pp.   1-9. 

5.  Double-star   measures.      (Joint   au- 
thor with  John  A.  Miller.     In  Astro.  Jour., 

XXIII,  pp.  167-169.     (Sept.,  1903.) 

6.  Double-star   measures.      (Joint   au- 
thor with  John  A.  Miller.)    In  Astro.  Jour., 

XXIV,  pp.   15-16.      (1904.) 

7.  Double-stars    discovered    at    Lowell 
Observatory.     In  Astro.  Jour.     (In  press.) 

8.  Double-star    measures.       (Joint  au- 
thor with  J.  A.  Miller.)     In  Astronomische 
Nachrichten,  CLXI.      (In  press.) 


EDGAR  ROSCOE  CUMINGS,  Ph.D.     Assistant 
Professor  of  Geology. 

1.  Sections  and  thickness  of  the  Lower 
Silurian  formations  on  West  Canada  creek 
and  in  the  Mohawk  valley.  (Joint  author 


with  C.  S.  Prosser. )  In  15th  Ann.  Rep. 
State  Geol.  New  York,  pp.  619-659;  13 
plates  and  3  text-figures.  (1897.) 

2.  Lower    Silurian   system   of   eastern 
Montgomery   county,   New   York.     In  Bull. 
New  York  State  Museum,  No.  34,  VII,  pp. 
419-468  ;  4  plates  ;  4  maps.     ( 1900. ) 

3.  On  the  Waldron  fauna  at  Tarr  Hole, 
Indiana.     In  Proc.   Indiana   Acad.   Sci.   for 
1899,  pp.  174-176.     (1900.) 

4.  The  stream  gradients  of  the  lower 
Mohawk  valley.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1899,  pp.  176-178.     (1900.) 

5.  Notes   on   the   Ordovician   rocks   of 
southern  Indiana.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1900,  pp.  200-215.     (1901.) 

6.  Some  developmental  stages  of  Ortho- 
thetes    minutus    n.    sp.      In    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1900,  pp.  216-218.     (1901.) 

7.  Orthothetes  minutus  n.  sp.  from  the 
Salem    limestone   of   Harrodsburg,    Indiana. 
In  Am.  Geol.,  XXVII,  pp.  147-149 ;  1  plate. 
(March,  1901.) 

8.  The  use  of  Bedford  as  a  formational 
name.     In  Jour,  of  Geol.,  IX,  pp.  232-233. 
(1901.) 

9.  A  section  of  the  upper  Ordovician 
at  Vevay,  Indiana.     In  Am.  Geol.,  XXVIII, 
pp.  361-381 ;  2  plates.     (Dec.,  1901.) 

10.  A   revision  of  the  bryozoan  genera 
Dekayia  Dekayella  and  Heterotrypa  of  the 
Cincinnati  group.    In  Am.  Geol.,  XXIX,  pp. 
197-217 ;  4  plates.     (April,  1902.) 

11.  A  quantitative  study  of  variation  in 
the    fossil    brachiopod    Platystrophia    lynx. 
(Joint  author  with  Abram  V.  Mauck.)     In 
Am.   Jour.    Sci.,   XIV,   pp.   9-16;   2   plates; 
1  textfigure.     (July,  1902.) 

12.  The  morphogenesis  of  Platystrophia. 
A   study    of    the    evolution    of    a    Paleozoic 
brachiopod.      In    Am.    Jour.    Sci.,    XV,    pp. 
1-48,  121-136;    27  text-figures.     (Jan.,  Feb., 
1903.) 

13.  Review  of  E.  J.  Conklin's  'The  em- 
bryology of  a  brachiopod,  Terebratulina  sep- 


2CK 


Indiana  University 


[Cumings 


tentrionnlis,  Couthouy.'  In  Am.  Nat., 
XXXVII,  No.  434,  pp.  121-122.  (Feb., 
1903.) 

14.  Review  of  E.  S.  Morse's  'Observa- 
tions on  living  Brachiopoda.'  In  Am.  Nat., 
XXXVII,  No.  434,  pp.  122-123.  (Feb., 
1903.) 

!."».  Review  of  Naohide  Yatsu's  'On  the 
development  of  Lingula  anatina.'  In  Am. 
Nat..  XXXVII,  No.  434,  pp.  123-124.  (Feb., 
1903.) 

1(5.  Review  of  Naohide  Yatsu's  'Notes 
on  the  histology  of  Lingula  anatina  Brug- 
uiere.'  In  Am.  Nat.,  XXXVII,  No.  434,  p. 
124.  (Feb.,  1903.) 

17.  Development  of  some  Paleozoic 
Bryozoa.  In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  XVII,  pp. 
49-78:  S3  textfigures.  (Jan.,  1904.) 


Louis  SHERMAN  DAVIS,  A.B.  (1891),  A.M. 
(1892),  Ph.D.  Associate  Professor  of 
Chemistry. 

1.  Ueber  die  Alkaloide  der  Samen  von 
Lupinus  Augustifalius   und  Lupinus  Albus. 
In  Archiv  d.  Pharm.,  pp.  85.     (1897.) 

2.  The    qualitative    analysis    of    inor- 
ganic bodies.     (Joint  author  with  Robert  E. 
Lyons.)     Anderson,  Ind.,  18!)7.     Pp.  210. 

3.  A  manual  of  toxicological  analysis. 
(Joint  author  with  II.  E.  Lyons.)      Ander- 
son. Ind.,  1899.     Pp.  112. 

4.  The  qualitative  analysis  of  inorganic 
bodies.       Revised     edition.        (Joint     author 
with   R.   E.   Lyons.)      Anderson,  Ind..   1900. 
Pp.  151. 

5.  A     manual    of    general    chemistry. 
Chicago,  1904.     Pp.  400;  92  plates. 


SCHUYLER  COLFAX   DAMSSON,  A.B.    (1890), 

A.M.    (1892),   D.    Sc.      Associate   Pro- 
fessor of  Mathematics. 

1.  Die  geodiitische  Linie  der  Mannig- 
faltigkeit  ds2=dx2-Hsinzx  .  dy2+dz2.  Tubingen, 
1900.  Pp.  20. 


CARL  II.  EIGENMANN,  A.B.  (1886),  A.M. 
(1887),  Ph.D.  (1889).  Professor  of 
Zoology  and  Director  of  Biological  Sta- 
tion. 

1.  A  review  of  the  American  Eleotridi- 
nw.      (Joint   author   with    Morton   W.    For- 
dice.     In   Proc.   Acad.    Nat.    Sci.   Phila.   for 
1885,  VIII,  pp.  55-80. 

2.  Notes  on  skeletons  of  Etheostomati- 
na?.      (Joint  author  with  David   Starr  Jor- 
dan.)     7;i  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1885, 
VIII,  pp.  68-72. 

3.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Bean 
Blossom     creek,     Monroe    county.     Indiana. 
(Joint    author    with    M.    W.    Fordice.)       In 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.  for  188(5.  pp. 
233-252. 

4.  A  review  of  the  genera  and  species 
of   Diodontida?   found    in   American    waters. 
In  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  Ill,  pp.  297-311. 
(1885.) 

5.  A  review  of  the  American  Gast<>ros- 
teida?.     In    Proc.   Acad.    Nat.   Sci.   Philadel- 
phia for  188(5.  pp.  233-252. 

0.  A  review  of  the  GobiidsR  of  North 
America.  (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan,  i 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1880.  IX,  pp. 
477-518. 

7.  Folk-lore  of  a  German  village.     In 
Current,  V,  No.  124.     (1886.) 

8.  A  review  of  the  Chaetodontidae   of 
North  America.     (Joint  author  with  Jennie 
E.  Horning.)     In  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.  III. 
pp.  1-18.     (1887.) 

9.  Notes  on  the  specific  names  of  < ->T 
tain  North  American  fishes.     In  Proc.  Aciul. 
Nat.  Sci..  Phila.  for  18S7.  pp.  295-296. 

10.  A    review .  of   the    North   American 
species  of  the  genera  Lagodon.  Archosargus, 
and  Diplodus.     (Joint  author  with  Elizabeth 
G.  Hughes.)      In   Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1887,  X.  pp.  C.5-74. 

11.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Ophichthys    (Ophichthys  retropinnis),  from 
Pensacola,  Fla.     In  Proc.  L.  S.  Nat. 

for  1887,  X,  p.  116. 


206 


Eigenmann\ 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


12.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  sent 
by  Mr.  C.  C.  Leslie  from  Charleston,  S.  C. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1887,  X,  pp.  269-270. 

13.  A  list  of  the  American  Gobiidae  and 
Callionymidse,  with  notes  on  the  specimens 
contained    in   the    Museum   of   Comparative 
Zoology,  at  Cambridge,  Mass.     (Joint  author 
with    Rosa    Smith    Eigenmann. )      In    Proc. 
California  Acad.   Sci.,  2d  ser.,  I,  pp.  51-78. 
(Jan.  25,  1888.) 

14.  South      American      Nematognathi. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)      In 
Am.     Nat.    XXIII,    pp.     647-649.       (July, 
1888.) 

15.  Preliminary  notes  on  South  Ameri- 
can Nematognathi.     I.      (Joint  author  with 
R.    S.    Eigenmann.)       In    Proc.    California 
Acad.   Sci.,  2d  ser.,  I,   pp.   119-172.      (July 
18,  1888.) 

16.  Notes    on    some    California    fishes, 
with  descriptions  of  two  new  species.     (Joint 
author  with   R.   S.   Eigeumann.)      In   Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  XI,  pp.  463-466. 

17.  Cyprinodon    californiensis,    Girard. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)      In 
W.  Am.  Sci.,  V,  pp.  3-4.     (Sept.,  1888.) 

18.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Cyprinodon.       (Joint    author    with    R.    S. 
Eigenmann.)      In  California  Acad.   Sci.,  2d 
ser.,  I,  p.  270.     (Jan.  8,  1889.) 

19.  On   the   development   of   California 
food  fishes.     In  Am.  Nat.  XXIII,  pp.  107- 
110.     (March,  1889.) 

20.  Preliminary     descriptions     of     new 
species  and  genera  of  Characinidse.      (Joint 
author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)     In  AY.  Am. 
Sci.,  VI,  pp.  7-8.     (April,  188i/.) 

21.  Description  of  new  Nematognathoid 
fishes  from  Brazil.     (Joint  author  with  R.  S. 
Eigenmann.)     In  AY.  Am.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  8-10. 
(April,  1889.) 

22.  Preliminary  notes  on  South  Ameri- 
can Nematognathi.    II.     (Joint  author  with 


R.  S.  Eigenmann.)  In  Proc.  California 
Acad.  Sci.,  2d  ser.,  II,  pp.  28-56.  (Aug.  18, 
1889.) 

23.  On     the     phosphorescent     spots     of 
Porichthys     margaritatus.        (Joint     author 
with  R.   S.  Eigenmann.)      In  AY.  Am.  Sci., 
VI,  pp.  32-34.     (May,  1889.) 

24.  Contributions  from   the  San  Diego 
Biological    Laboratory.      I.      (Joint   author 
with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)      In  W.  Am.   Sci., 
VI,  pp.  44-47.     (June,  1889.) 

25.  Contributions   from  the   San  Diego 
biological  laboratory.     II.     On  the  genesis  of 
the  color-cells  of  fishes.    In  AY.  Am.  Sci.,  VI, 
pp.  45-46.      (July,  1889.) 

26.  Notes  from  the  San  Diego  biological 
laboratory.     I.     The  fishes  of  Cortez  Banks. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)      In 
AY.  Am.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  123-132.     (Oct.,  1889, 
issued  Nov.  9,  1889.) 

27.  A  review  of  the  Scisenidae  of  Amer- 
ica and  Europe.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In   Ann.    Rep.   Comin.   Fish   and 
Fisheries   for    1886,   pp.   343-451,    4   plates. 
(1889.) 

28.  Notes  from  the  San  Diego  biological 
laboratory.     II.      (Joint  author  with  R.  S. 
Eigenmann.)     In  W.  Am.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  147- 
151.     (Nov.,  1889.) 

29.  A      review      of      the      Erythrininse. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)      In 
Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d  ser.,  II,  pp. 
100-116;  i  plate.      (Nov.  8,  1889.) 

30.  A  revision  of  the  edentulous  genera 
of  Curimatina?.      (Joint  author  with   R.    S. 
Eigenmann.)     In  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  IV, 
pp.  1-32.      (Nov.,  1889.) 

31.  On  the  genus  Clevelandia.     In  Am. 
Nat.,  XXIII,  pp.  916-918.     (Oct.,  1889.) 

32.  The  development  of  Micrometrus  ag- 
gregatus.  one  of  the  viviparous  surf-perches. 
In   Am.   Nat.   XXIII,   pp.  923-927.      (Oct., 
1889.) 

33.  Additions  to  the  fauna  of  San  Diego. 


207 


Indiana  University 


[Eigenmann 


(Joint  author  with  It.  S.  Eigennuinn.)  In 
Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  lid  ser.,  Ill,  pp. 
1-24.  (March  24,  1890.) 

84.  The  evolution  of  the  catfishes.  In 
Zoe,  I,  pp.  10-15.  (18!>(>.) 

35.  Description  of  a  fossil  species  of 
Sebastodes.  In  Zoe,  I,  p.  10.  (1890.) 

3C.  On  the  egg  membranes  and  micropyle 
of  some  osseus  fishes.  In  Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.,  XIX,  pp.  129-154,  3  plates.  (March, 
1890.) 

37.  The  barracuda.     In  Zoe,  I,  pp.  55- 
50.     (1890.) 

38.  The  Point  Loma  blind  fish  and  its 
relatives.    In  Zoe,  I,  pp.  65-72.    2  plates. 

39.  Charles   Harvey   Bollman.      In   W. 
Am.  Sci.,  VII,  pp.  5-6.     (1890.) 

40.  The  coloration  of  fishes.    In  W.  Am. 
Sci.,  p.  35.     (1890.) 

41.  The  food  fishes  of  California  fresh 
waters.     In  Rep.  State  Board  Fish  Comm. 
California  for  1890,  pp.  53-65. 

42.  A  revision  of  the   South  American 
Nematognathi  or  Catfishes.      (Joint  author 
with    R.    S.    Eigenmann.)       In    Occasional 
papers   California  Acad.   Sci.,   I,  pp.   1-508, 
figures,  map.      (July,  1890.) 

43.  Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Se- 
bastodes.     (Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigen- 
mann.)    In  Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d 
ser.,  Ill,  pp.  36-38.     (May  28,  1890.) 

44.  A  review  of  the  genera  and  species 
of  Serranidae  found  in  the  waters  of  Amer- 
ica and  Europe.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  VIII, 
pp.  329-441;  20  plates.      (1890.) 

45.  On  the  precocious  segregation  of  the 
sex  cells  in  Micrometrus  aggregatus  Gibbons. 
In  Jour.   Morph.,  V,   pp.  480-492;   1   plate. 
(1891.) 

46.  A     catalogue     of     the     fresh-water 
fishes  of  South  America.     (Joint  author  with 
R.   S.   Eigenmann.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat. 
Mus.,  XIV,  pp.  1-18.     (1891.) 

47.  On    the    genesis    of    the    chromato- 


phores   in   fishes.     In  Am.   Nat.,   XXV,   pp. 
112-118;  4  plates.     (Feb.,  1891.) 

48.  The  spawning  season  of  San  Diego 
fishes.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XXV.     (June,  1891.) 

49.  Cottus    beldingi,    sp.    nov.       (Joint 
author    with    R.    S.    Eigenmann.)      In    Am. 
Nat.,  XXV,  pp.  1132-1133.     (Dec.,  1891.) 

50.  A  new  Diodont.   In  Am.  Nat.,  XXV, 
p.  1133.     (Dec.,  1891.) 

51.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  the  Pa- 
cific coast  of  America  north  of  Cerros  Island. 
(Joint  author  with  II.  S.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Ann.    N.    Y.    Acad.    Sci.,    VI,    pp.    349-358. 
(June,  1892.) 

52.  The  fishes  of  San  Diego.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1892,  XV,  pp.  123-178 ; 
9  plates. 

53.  Branchiostoma     elongatum     Sunde- 
vall,  at  San  Diego.    In  Am.  Nat.  XXVI,  p. 
70.     (Jan.,  1892.) 

54.  On  the  presence  of  an  operculum  in 
the  Aspredinidae.     In  Am.   Nat.,  XXVI,  p. 
70.      (Jan.,  1892.)     Abstract  in  Proc.  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1891,  p.  175. 

55.  The  Percopsidffi  on  the  Pacific  slope. 
In  Science  for  1892,  p.  233. 

56.  Recent   additions   to   the   fauna   of 
California.     (Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigen- 
mann.)    Abstract  in  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1891,  pp.  159-161.     (1892.) 

57.  New   fishes   from   Western  Canada. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Am.     Nat.,     XXVI,    pp.    961-964.       (Nov., 
1892.) 

58.  The  continuity  of  the  germ  plasm  in 
vertebrates.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1891,  pp.  169-172.     (1892.) 

59.  The  eyes  of  blind  fishes.     Abstract 
in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1891,  p.  175. 
(1892.) 

60.  Biological  stations.     In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana   Acad.     Sci.    for     1891,    pp.     172-175. 
(1892.) 

61.  Preliminary     description     of     new 
fishes  from   the  Northwest.      (Joint  author 


208 


Eigenmann~\ 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


with  R.  S.  Eigenmann.)  In  Am.  Nat., 
XXVII,  pp.  151-154.  (Feb.,  1893.) 

62.  On  the  occurrence  of  tne  spiny  box- 
fish  (genus  Chilomycterus)  on  the  coast  of 
California.  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1892,  XV,  p.  485;  1  plate.  (1892.) 

03.  Catalogue  of  the  fresh-water  fishes 
of  Central  America  and  Southern  Mexico. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1893,  XVI,  pp. 
53-60.  (1893.) 

64.  Preliminary    note    on    the    relation- 
ship of  the  species  usually  united  under  the 
generic    name     Sebastodes.      (Joint    author 
with  C.  H.  Beeson.)     In  Am.  Nat.,  XXVII, 
pp.  668-671.     (July,  1893.) 

65.  Early  stages  in  the  development  of 
Cymatogaster.     In  I'roc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1892,  pp.  58-62.     ( 1893. ) 

66.  Explorations    in    Western    Canada. 
Abstract  in  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  p. 
56.     (1893.) 

67.  Local  variations.     Abstract  in  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  p.  81.     (1893.) 

68.  A  revision  of  the  American  Cichli- 
dte.     (Joint  author  with  William  L.  Bray.) 
In  Ann.  New  York  Acad.  Sci.,  VII,  pp.  607- 
624.     (Jan.,  1894.) 

69.  Notes     on    some     South     American 
fishes.     In  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  VII,  pp. 
625-637.     (Feb.,  1894.) 

70.  On     the    viviparous     fishes    of    the 
Pacific  coast  of   North  America.     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fisn  Comm.  for  1892,  pp.  381-478;  27 
plates.     (1894.) 

71.  Results  of  explorations  in  Western 
Canada    and    Northwestern    United    States. 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1894,  pp.  101- 
132;  4  plates.     (July  7,  1894.) 

72.  Biological  survey  of  Indiana  :     Zool- 
ogy.    In   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   tor   1893,  pp. 
67-76.     (Aug.,  1894.) 

73.  The    effect   of   environment   on    the 
mass    of    local    species.      In    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.    Sci.   for   1893,   pp.   226-229.      (Aug., 
1894.) 


74.  A  revision  of  the  fishes  of  the  sub- 
family   Sebastinee    of    the    Pacific    coast    of 
America.        (Joint     author     with     C.      H. 
Beeson.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVII, 
pp.  375-404.     (1894.) 

75.  The   fishes   of   Indiana.      Report   of 
the  Indiana  State  Biological  Survey.     (Joint 
author    with    C.     H.     Beeson.)       In    Proc. 
Indiana    Acad.    Sci.    for    1893,    pp.    76-108. 
(1894.) 

76.  The    fishes   of   Indiana.      Reprinted 
from  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893.     In 
Rep.  Indiana  State  Fish  Comm.  for  1894,  pp. 
40-64. 

77.  Names    and    locations    of    Indiana 
streams.    In  Rep.  State  Fish  Comm.  Indiana 
for  1894,  pp.  65-79. 

78.  Leuciscus    balteatus     (Richardson). 
A  study  in  variation.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XXIX, 
pp.  10-25;  5  plates.     (Jan.,  1895.)     Also,  in 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  87-99. 
(Oct.,  1895.) 

79.  Development    of    sexual    organs    in 
Cymatogaster.     hi  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1894,  p.  138.     (Oct.,  1895.) 

80.  A    new    biological    station    and    its 
aim.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1894, 
pp.  34-35.      (Oct.,  1895.) 

81.  First  report  of  the  Indiana  Univer- 
sity   biological    station.      In    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.    Sci.   for   1895,   pp.   203-296.     Plates. 
(Feb.,  1896.)     Editor,  and  author  of  papers 
on  'Turkey  lake  as  a  unit  of  environment.' 
'Plankton,'    'The    fishes,'    'The   Testudinata,' 
'The  study  of  variation.' 

82.  The  bearing  of  the  origin  and  dif- 
ferentiation of  the  sex  cells  in  Cymatogaster 
on  the  idea  of  the  continuity  of  the  germ 
plasma.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XXX,  pp.  265-271. 
(April,  1896.) 

83.  Sex-differentiation  in  the  viviparous 
teleost    Cymatogaster.      In    Archiv    f.    Ent- 
wickelungsmechanik,    IV,    pp.     125-179 ;    6 
plates.      (April,  1896.)      Abstract  in  Trans. 
Am.  Micro.  Soc.  XVII,  pp.  172-173. 


(15) 


209 


Indiana  University 


[  Eigtnmann 


83«.  Steindachneria.  hi  Am.  Nat. 
XXXI,  pp.  158-159. 

84.  Viviparous     fishes.        In     Overland 
Monthly.     (  IS'.lS.  i 

84«.  The  Amblyopsida?,  the  blind  fish  of 
America.  In  Hep.  British  Assoc.  for  1897, 
pp.  OS5-080.  (IS! is.  i 

85.  The  origin  of  cave  faunas.    Abstract 
in  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  229-230. 
(185)8.) 

80.  The  Amblyopsidae  and  eyes  of  blind 
fishes.  Abstract  in  I 'roc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1897.  pp.  2:10-231.  (1898.) 

87.  A  new  blind  fish.     Abstract  in  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  p.  231.     (1898.) 

88.  A  ca.se  of  convergence.     In  Science. 
N.  S..  IX.  Xo.  217.  280-282.     (Feb.,  1899.)  : 
also  in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  pp. 
247-257.      (1899.) 

89.  Biological      station*.       ///      Indiana 
Woman  for  April.  1898. 

90.  The    Indiana    University    Biological 
Station.     In  Science.  X.  S.,  IX.  pp.  925-929. 
(Dec.  22,  1899.)      Also  in   Inland  Educator 
for  1900,  pj>.  01 -(55.     Figures. 

91.  Plans  for  the  new  buildings  of  the 
Biological    Station.   /;/    Proc.    Indiana   Acad. 
Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  55-58.      ( 1S99. ) 

92.  Explorations    in    the   caves   of   Mis- 
souri    and     Kentucky.       /;/     Proc.     Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1898.  pp.  58-01.     (1899.) 

!>.'!.  The  blind  fishes  of  Xorth  America. 
In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  LVI.  pp.  47:5-480.  (Feb., 
1899.) 

94.  The  eyes  of  the  blind  vertebrates  of 
North  America.  I.  The  eyes  of  the  Ambly- 
opsid;v.  Archiv  f.  Entwickelungsmechanik. 
VIII.  pp.  545-017  :  5  plates.  ( March.  18! (9.  i 

!>5.  Xotes  on  the  blind  fishes.  In 
Science,  X.  S..  IX.  p.  370.  (March  1(1. 
1899.) 

90.  Preliminary  notes  upon  the  arrange- 
ment of  rods  and  cones  in  the  retina  of  fishes. 
(Joint  author  with  George  Ilansell.)  In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci  for  1X98.  p.  239. 
(1899.) 


97.  Degeneration    in    the    eyes    of    the 
Amblyopsida',   it.s   plan,    process  and   causes. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   1898,  pp. 
239-241.     (1899.) 

98.  The  ear  and  the  hearing  of  the  blind 
fishes.    (Joint  author  with  Albert  ('.  Yoder.) 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   T-'.is.   pp. 
242-247  ;  2  plates.     (1899. ) 

99.  Chologaster   agassizii   and   its  eyes. 
Abstract   in    Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.    for 
1898,  p.  251.     (1899.) 

100.  The  eye   of  Typhlomolge  from   the 
artesian  wells  of  San  Marcos,  Texas.     Ab- 
stract in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898, 
p.  251.     (1899.) 

101.  The   eyes    of   Typhlotriton   spelrus. 
(Joint   author   with   W.   A.   Denny.)      Ab- 
stract in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898, 
pp.  252-253.      (1899.) 

102.  The    blind   rat    of    Mammoth   cave. 
(Joint  author  with  James  Rollin  Slonaker.) 
In    Proc.   Indiana    Acad.   Sci.   for   1898,   pp. 
253-257.     Figures.      (1899.) 

102«.  Cave  animals,  their  character,  ori- 
gin and  their  evidence  for  or  against  the 
transmission  of  acquired  character: .  In  Sci- 
ence. X.  S.  X.  p.  88'i.  (Dec.  15.  !«»:».  i 

1(13.  The  blind  fishes.  In  Biol.  Lectures 
Marine  Biol.  Lab.  of  Woods  Hole  for  1S99. 
pp.  113-12(5.  (1900.) 

104.  The  mosaic  of  single  and  twin  cones 
in  the  retina  of  fishes.      (Joint  author  with 
d'eorge     Daniel     Shafer. )        In     Am.     Xat.. 
XXXIV,  pp.  1(1-118:  1  plate.     (Feb.,  1900.) 

105.  Degeneration    in    the    eyes    of    the 
cold-blooded  vertebrates  of  the  Xorth   Amer- 
ican caves.     In  Science,  X.  S.,  XL  pp.  492- 
5(1.",.      Figures.      (March  30.  1900.) 

100.  The  structure  of  blind  fishes.  In 
Pop.  Sci.  Mo..  LVI1.  pp.  49-58.  (May, 
1900.) 

107.  The  eyes  of  blind  vertebrates  of 
Xorth  America.  II.  The  eyes  of  Typhlo- 
molge rathbuni  Stejneger.  In  Tran.s.  Am. 
Micr.  Soc..  XXI.  pp.  49-00 :  2  plates. 
(May.  1900.) 


210 


Eigenmann\ 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


108.  Causes    of    degeneration     in    blind 
fishes.    In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  LVII,  pp.  397-407. 
(August,  1900.) 

109.  Some  cases   of  saltatory   variation. 
(Joint    author     with     Ulysses     Cox.)       In 
Science,    N.    S.,    XII,    p.    300.      (Aug.    24, 
1900.) 

110.  A  contribution  to  the  fauna  of  the 
caves  of  Texas.     In  Science,  N.  S.,  XII,  p. 

301.  (Aug.  24,  1900.) 

111.  Sobre  alguns  peixes  de   Sao  Paulo, 
Brazil.      (Joint  author  with  Allen  A.  Nor- 
ris.)      In  Revista  do   Museu   Paulista,   IV, 
pp.  349-362.     (1900.) 

112.  Degeneration  in  the  eyes  of  the  cold- 
blooded vertebrates  of  the  North  American 
caves.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1899, 
pp.  31-46.     Illustrations.      (1900.) 

113.  Convergent  evolution  as  illustrated 
by  the  blind  lizard  Rhineura.     In   Science, 
N.  S.,  XII,  p.  302.     (Aug.,  1900.) 

114.  The  development  of  the  eyes  in  the 
blind-fish    Amblyopsis.      In    Science,    N.    S., 
XII,  p.  302.     (Aug.  24,  1900.) 

115.  The   eyes   of   the   cave    salamander 
Typhlotriton.      In    Science,    N.    S.,    XII,   p. 

302.  (Aug.  24,  1900.) 

116.  The  development  of  the  Conger  eel. 
In  Science,  X.  S.,  XII,  pp.  401-402.     (Sept. 
14,  1900.) 

117.  The   eyes   of   the   blind   vertebrates 
of  North  America.     III.     The  structure  and 
ontogenic   degeneration   of   the   eyes    of   the 
Missouri   cave   salamander.      (Joint   author 
with  Winfield  Augustus  Denny.)      In  Biol. 
Bull.  II,  pp.  33-40 ;  1  plate.     (Oct.,  1900.) 

118.  Description    of    a    new    cave    sala- 
mander, Spelerpes  stejnegeri,  from  the  caves 
of   Southwestern   Missouri.     In  Trans.  Am. 
Mic.    Soc.,    XXII,    pp.    189-192;    2    plates. 
(1900.)      Abstract  in  Proc.   Indiana   Acad. 
Sci.  for  1900,  pp.  167.     (1901.) 

119.  Some  cases   of  saltatory  variation. 
(Joint   author   with   U.    S.   Cox.)      In   Am. 
Nat.,  XXXV,  pp.  33-38.     (Jan.,  1901.) 


120.  Bergiaria.        (Joint     author     with 
Allen    A.    Norris. )       In    Com.    Mus.    Nac. 
Buenos  Aires,  I.,  p.  272.     (March  18,  1901.) 

121.  Unilateral  coloration  with  a  bilater- 
al effect.     (Joint  author  with  Clarence  Ken- 
nedy.)      In     Science,     XIII,    pp.    828-830. 
(1901.) 

122.  Description   of   a   new   oceanic   fish 
found  off  southern  New  England.     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  XXI,  p.  35.     (1901.)     Ab- 
stract in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1900, 
p.  166.      (1901.) 

123.  The    egg    and    development    of    the 
Conger  eel.    In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Com.,  XXI, 
pp.  37-44.    Illustrations.     (1901.)     Abstract 
in  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   1900,  pp. 
165-166.      (.1901.) 

124.  Investigations    into    the    history   of 
the  young  Squeteague.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,     XXI,     pp.     45-51.       Illustrations. 
(1901.)      Abstract  in  Proc.   Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1900,  p.  166.      (1901.1 

125.  The  Leptocephalus  of  the  American 
eel      and      other      American      Leptocephali. 
(Joint  author  with  Clarence  Hamilton  Ken- 
nedy.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  XXI, 
pp.  81-92.    Illustrations.     (1901.)     Abstract 
in  Science,   N.   S.   XIV,  p.  631.      (Oct.  25, 
1901.) 

126.  The    mounting   of    the    remains    of 
Megalonyx   jeffersoni   from   Henderson,   Ky. 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1900,  p.  166. 
(1901.) 

127.  The  solution  of  the  eel  question.    In 
Trans.  Am.  Micr.  Soc.,  XXIII,  pp.  5-18;  4 
plates.     (May,  1902.) 

128.  The  physical  basis  of  heredity.     In 
Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  LXI,  pp.  32-44.    Illustrations. 
(May,  1902.) 

128a.     The  blind  fish  of  Cuba.     In   Sci- 
ence. N.  S.  XVI,  p.  347.     (Aug.  29,  1902.) 

129.  The  Carnegie   institution.     In  Sci- 
ence. N.   S.,  XVI,   pp.  792-793.      (Nov.  14, 
1902.) 

130.  The  eyes  of  the  blind  vertebrates  of 


211 


Indiana  University 


\_Eigenmann 


North  America.  IV.  The  eyes  of  Khineuru 
floridaiiii.  /'/  I 'roc.  Washington  Acad.  Sci., 
IV,  pp.  533-538;  3  plates.  (Sept.,  1902.) 
Abstracts  I'M  I'roc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1901,  p.  107  (1902),  and  in  Science,  N.  S. 
XIV,  p.  031.  (Oct.  25,  1901.) 

131.  The  history  of  the  eye  of  Amblyop- 
sis.     Abstracts  in  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1901,  pp.   101-106   (1902)  ;    in  Science, 
N.  S.  XIV,  p.  631   (Oct.  25,  1901)  ;    and  in 
Science,   N.   S.   XV,  pp.   523-524    (April   4, 
1902.) 

132.  Zoological  miscellany.     In  Proc.  In- 
diana   Acad.    Sci.    for    1901,    pp.    107-113. 
(1902.) 

133.  The  solution  of  the  eel  problem.    In 
World    Today,    IV,    pp.    478-482.       (April, 
1903.) 

134.  In  search  of  blind  fishes  in  Cuba. 
In  World  Today,  V,  pp.  1129-1136.    Illustra- 
tions.    (Sept.,  1903.) 

135.  Auf  der  Suche  nach  blinden  Fischen 
in   Cuba.     In   Die  Umschau,   VII,  pp.  365- 
367.      (May  2,  1903.) 

136.  Variation     notes.        (Joint     author 
with  C.   II.  Kennedy.)      In   Biol.  Bull.,  IV, 
pp.  227-2SO.      (April,  1903.) 

137.  Report  on  the  freshwater   fishes  of 
Western  Cuba.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Coniin. 
for    1902,    pp.    211-236;    4    plates.       (July. 
1903.) 

138.  The  water  supply  of  Havana,  Cuba. 
In    Science.    N.    S.,    XVIII,    pp.    281-282. 
(Aug.    28,    1893)  ;     and    in    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1902,  pp.  65-67.     (1903.) 

1.''!).  On  a  collection  of  fishes  from  Para- 
guay with  a  synopsis  of  the  American  gen- 
era, of  Cichlids.  (Joint  author  with  C.  II. 
Kennedy.)  In  Proc.  Acad.  Sci.,  Phila.  for 
1903,  pp.  497-537.  (Sept.,  1903.) 

140.  Some  new  genera  of  South  Ameri- 
can  fresh-water  fishes   and   new   names   for 
some  old  genera.     In  Smithson.  Misc.  Colls., 
XLV,  pp.  14^-148.     (Dec.,  1903.) 

141.  The  eyes  of  the  blind  vertebrates  of 
North  America.     V.     The  history  of  the  eye 


of  Amblyopsis  from  the  beginning  of  its  de- 
velopment to  its  disintegration  in  old  age. 
In  E.  L.  Mark  anniversary  volume,  pp.  167- 
204:  plates  xii-xv.  (1904.)  Abstract  in 
I'roc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901,  pp.  101- 
105. 


AUTIIUU   LKE   FOLEY,  A.B.    (is'.ioi.   A.M. 
(1891),  Ph.D.     Professor  of  Physics. 

1.  The  surface  tension  of  liquids.     /// 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  67-75. 

2.  Surface     tension     of     liquids.       In 
Phys.     Kev.,     Ill,     No.     5,     pp.     381-386. 
(March-April,   1896.) 

3.  Arc    spectra.      In    Electrical    Eng., 
XXIV.     (Sept.  16,  1897.) 

4.  Arc  spectra.     In  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S., 
XL VI,  pp.  93-94.     (1897.) 

5.  Arc  spectra.     In  Phys.  Rev.,  V.  No. 
8,  pp.  129-151:  5  plates.     (Sept.,  1897.) 

6.  Variations    in   the  spectrum   of  the 
open  and  closed  electric  arc.     In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1897.  pp.  95-9  f. 

7.  Electrolytic    nature   of   the   electric 
arc.     In  I'roc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897, 
pp.  100-103. 

8.  The     spectrum     of    cyanogen.       In 
I'roc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for  1897,   pp.  97- 
100. 

9.  X-ray   transparency.      In    Proc.    In- 
diana Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  74-75. 

10.  Diamond  fluorescence.    In  I'roc.  In- 
diana Acad.  Sci.  for  1899,  pp.  94-95. 

11.  Review     of     Cojori's     'History     of 
physics.'     In   Phys.  Rev.,  XIII,   No.  5,  pp. 
315-316.     (May-June,  1899.) 

12.  Diamond-glass       fluorescence.        In 
Science,  XIII.  pp.  7:52-734.     (1901.) 

13.  A  method  of  measuring  the  absolute 
dilation     of     mercury.       In    Proc.     Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1900,  p.  99. 

14.  An    improved   Wehnelt   interrupter. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   1900,  pp. 
97-98. 


212 


Hepburn] 


Bibliography:     Present  Faculty 


15.  A  modified  Wehnelt  interrupter.     In 
Elec.  World  and  Eng.,  XXXIX,  pp.  373-374. 
(March  1,  1902.) 

16.  On  the  use  of  nickel  in  the  core  of 
a  Marconi  magnetic  detector.     In  Proc.  In- 
diana Acad.  Sci.  for  1903. 

17.  A  remarkable  distribution  of  carbon 
on  the  bulb  of  a  'Ilylo'  incandescent  lamp. 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903. 

18.  On  the  use  of  manganese  dioxide  in 
the   generation   of   oxygen   from   potassium- 
chlorate.    (Joint  author  with  II.  It.  Kamsey.) 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903. 

19.  On  the  use  of  nickel  in  the  core  of  a 
Marconi  magnetic  detector.     In  Phys.  Rev., 
XVIII,  pp.  349-354.     (May,  1904.) 

20.  A    remarkable    distribution    of    the 
carbon  deposit  on   the  bulb  of  a   'Hylo'  in- 
candescent lamp.    In  Science  for  1904. 

21.  A  peculiar  deposit  of  carbon  on  the 
bulb  of  a  'Hylo'  lamp.     In  Elec.  World  and 
Eng.  for  1904. 

22.  A    modified    magnetic   detector.      In 
Elect.  World  and  Eng.  for  1904.    ( In  press. ) 


SAMUEL  BANNISTER  HARDING,  A.B.  (1890), 
Ph.D.  Junior  Professor  of  European 
History. 

1.  American  history,  1781-1829.     (Syl- 
labus of  the  university  extension  department 
of  the  University  of  the  State  of  New  York.) 
Albany,  X.  Y.,  1892.     Pp.  61. 

2.  The     'minimum'     principle     in     the 
tariff   of    1828,    and   its   recent   revival.      In 
Annals   Am.   Acad.   Pol.   and   Soc.   Sci.,   VI, 
July,  pp.  100-11G.     (1895.)     Published  sep- 
arately as  No.  153  of  the  publications  of  Am. 
Acad.  of  Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci. 

3.  Party  struggles  over  the  first  Penn- 
sylvania   constitution.      In   Ann.    Rep.    Am. 
Hist.  Asso.  for  1894,  pp.  371-402.      (1895.) 

4.  The  contest  over  the  ratification  of 
the    federal     constitution     in     the    state    of 


Massachusetts.     (Harvard  historical  studies, 
No.  2.)       New  York,  1896.     Pp.  vi,  194. 

5.  Review    of    Edward    Channing    and 
Albert    B.    Hart's    'Guide    to    the   study    of 
American    history.'      In    Inland    Educator, 
III,  pp.  315-317.     (Jan.,  1897.) 

6.  Greek    gods,    heroes,    and    men ;    a 
primer  of  the  mythology  and  history  of  the 
Greeks.      (Joint  author  with  Mrs.   Caroline 
H.  Harding.)     Chicago,  1897.     Pp.  vi,  195; 
illustrated. 

7.  The  city  of  the  seven  hills  ;  a  book 
of  stories  from  the  history  of  ancient  Rome. 
(Joint  author  with  Mrs.  Caroline  II.  Hard- 
ing.)     Chicago,  1898.     Pp.  274;  illustrated. 
Revised  edition,  1902,  pp.  268. 

8.  The  story  of  the  Middle  Ages.     Chi- 
cago, 1901.    Pp.  224  ;  illustrated. 

9.  Missouri  party  struggles  in  the  Civil 
War  period.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist.  Asso. 
for  1900,  I,  pp.  85-103.     (1901.) 

10.  Review    of    Lewis    Einstein's    'The 
Italian   Renaissance   in    England.'      In   Am. 
Hist.  Rev.,  VIII,  pp.  124-126.     (Oct.,  1902.) 

11.  Review  of  George  M.  Wrong's  'The 
British   nation ;     a   history.'     In   Am.    Hist. 
Rev.,  IX,  pp.  348-350.     (Jan.,  1904.) 

12.  Essentials  in  mediaeval  and  modern 
history.     (In  consultation  with  Albert  Bush- 
nell   Hart.)      New   York,   1904.      Pp.   about 
500;    illustrations  and  maps.      (In  press.) 

13.  Life  of  George  R.  Smith,  founder  of 
Sedalia,  Mo.     Privately  printed,  1904.     Pp. 
about  400  ;    illustrated.     (In  press. ) 


CHARLES  M.  HEPBURN,   A.M.,  LL.B.     Pro- 
fessor of  Law. 

1.  The  historical  development  of  code 
pleading  in  America  and  England.     Cincin- 
nati,  1897.     Pp.  xvi,  318. 

2.  A  selection  of  cases  and  statutes  on 
the  principles  of  code  pleading.     With  notes. 
Cincinnati,  1899.     Pp.  xxxvi,  651. 


213 


Indiana  University 


\_Hershey 


AMOS  SHAKTI.E  HERSIIEY,  Ph.D.  Associate 
Professor  of  European  History  and 
Politics. 

1.  Die  Kontrolle  iiber  die  Gesetzgebung 
in  den  Vereingten  Staaten  von  Nord  Amer- 
ika.     Heidelberg,  1894.     Pp.  72. 

2.  The  recognition   of  Cuban  belliger- 
ency.   In  Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci., 
VII,  pp.  450-401.     (May,  1896.)     Published 
separately  as  No.  175  of  the  publications  of 
the  Am.  Acad.  Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci. 

3.  Intervention  and  the  recognition  of 
Cuban   independence.     In  Ann.   Am.   Acad. 
Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci.,  XI,  pp.  353-381.     (May, 
1898.)     Published  separately  as  No.  228  of 
the  publications  of  the  Am.  Acad.   Pol.  and 
Soc.  Sci. 

4.  Higher   education   in    Indiana.      In 
Normal    Vidette,    VII,    pp.    113-119;    illus- 
trated.    (April,  1900.) 

5.  The   Venezuelan  affair  in  the  light 
of   international   law.      In   Am.    Law   Reg., 
N.  S.,  XLII,  pp.  249-268.     (May,  1903.) 

6.  The  importance  of  dates  and  maps 
in  the  teaching  and  study  of  history,  or  the 
location  of   events   in   time  and  space.     In 
Educator-Journal,  IV,  pp.  113-118.      (Nov., 
1903.) 

7.  The    Panama   question.      In    Green 
Bag,  XVI,  pp.  265-267.     (April,  1904.) 

8.  Some  questions  in  international  law 
arising  from   the   Russo-Japanese  war :      I. 
Failure  to  declare  war  and  violation  of  Ko- 
rean    neutrality.       In     Green     Bag,     XVI. 
(May,  1904.) 

9.  Some  questions  in  international  law 
arising  from  the  Russo-Japanese  war :     II. 
The  Hay  note  and  Chinese  neutrality.     In 
Green  Bag,  XVI.     (June,  1904.) 


.TCschylus.     /;/   Indiana  University  Bulletin. 
March,  1888. 

2.  The  study  of  man  through  language 
and  literature.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Coll.  Asso. 
for  1889. 

3.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Greece, 
with  notes  on  the  names  now   in  use  and 
those  employed  by  classical  authors.     (Joint 
author  with  David  Starr  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
Acad.    Nat.    Sci.    Philadelphia,    August    17, 
1892. 


HOBACE  ADDISON  HOFFMAN,   A.B.    (1881), 
A.M.     Professor  of  Greek. 

1.     The  religious  and  ethical   views   of 


HAROLD     WHETSTONE    JOHNSTON,     L.H.D. 
Professor  of  Latin. 

1.  The    Roman    commonwealth.      Chi- 
cago, 1891.     Pp.  25. 

2.  M.  Tulli  Ciceronis  orationes  et  epis- 
tolae  selectae.     Selected  orations  and  letters 
of   Cicero   with   historical    introduction,   an 
outline  of  the  Roman  constitution,  notes,  ex- 
cursuses,  vocabulary,   and   index.     Chicago, 
1892.     Pp.  814. 

3.  Revision  of  C.  M.  Lowe  and  J.  T. 
Ewing's    'Caesar's    Gallic    war.'      Chicago, 
1894.     Pp.  542. 

4.  Latin  manuscripts.     Chicago,  1897. 
Pp.  130;  illustrated. 

5.  A   collection   of  examples   illustrat- 
ing the  metrical  licenses  of  Vergil.    Chicago, 
1898.     Pp.  54. 

6.  The    teaching  of   Vergil.      Chicago, 
1898.     Pp.  10. 

7.  Review  of  Macmillan's   'Latin   dic- 
tionary.'     In    School    Rev.,    VI,   pp.    136-7. 
(Feb.,  1898.) 

8.  Cicero's  orations  and  letters.    (Joint 
author   with   F.   W.    Sanford,   A.M.)      Chi- 
cago, 1899.     Pp.  797. 

9.  Review  of  Gudeman's  'Latin  liter- 
ature of   the   Empire.'     In   School   Review, 
VIII,  pp.  179-180.     (March,  1899.) 

10.  The  teaching  of  second-year  Latin, 
with  prefatory  note  by  W.  G.  Hale.  Chicago, 
1901.  Pp.  16. 


214 


Lindley~\ 


Bibliography :     Present  Faculty 


11.  The    Roman    name.    Chicago,    1901. 
Pp.  1C. 

12.  The  teaching  of  Latin  in  the  second 
year.      In    School    Review,    X,    pp.    G9-7G. 
(Jan.,  1902.) 

13.  The    private    life    of    the    Romans. 
Chicago,  1903.     Pp.  344;  illustrated. 

14.  Caesar's  Gallic  war.     (Joint  author 
with  F.  \V.  Sanford,  A.M.)     Boston,  1904. 


Hermann    und    Dorothea.'      In    Jour.    Ger. 
Phil.,   Ill,  pp.  380-383.      (1901.) 


ALBERT     FREDERICK     KUERSTEINER,     Ph.D. 
Professor  of  Romance  Languages. 

1.  Review   of   J.    A.    Perez    Bonalde's 
'El  Kuerbo  por  Edgar  Allan  Poe,   Traduk- 
zion  direkta  del  Ingles.'    In  Le  Maitre  Pho- 
netique, X,  pp.  146-147.     (Aug.,  1895.) 

2.  Note  sur   Ye  muet.     In  Le   Maitre 
Phonetique,  X,  pp.  154-155.     (Sept.,  1895.) 

3.  Apuntes  sobre  la  pronunciaci6n  cas- 
tellana.     In  Le  Maitre  Phonetique,  XI,  pp. 
217-221.      (Dec.,  1896.) 

4.  Review   of  B.   Roettger's   'Die  Alt- 
franzosischen  Lautgesetze  in  Tabellen.'     In 
Le    Maitre     Phonetique,     XII,     pp.     84-85. 
(March,  1897.) 

5.  Review   of    Peter   E.   Traub's   'The 
Spanish  verb,  with  an  introduction  on  Span- 
ish pronunciation.'      In   Mod.   Lang.   Notes, 
XVIII,  pp.  182-184.      (June,  1903.) 


EUGENE  LESER,  Ph.D.     Assistant  Professor 
of  German. 

1.  Fehler  und  Liicken  in  der  Li   Ser- 
mon saint  Bernart  benannten  Predigtsamm- 
lung.      Nebst   einem   lexicalischen    Anhange. 
Sondershausen,  1887.     Pp.  119. 

2.  Parler    fransais    comme   une    vache 
espagnolc.      In    Mod.    Lang.    Notes,    IX,    p. 
224. 

3.  Modern   French  gene  =  Old  French 
gchinc  (from  gehir.)     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes, 
X,  pp.   168-169. 

4.  Review  of  J.  T.  Hatfield's  'Goethe's 


ERNEST  HIRAM  LIXDLEY,  A.B.  (1893),  A.M. 
(1894),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Psychology 
and  Philosophy. 

1.  Review  of  Theodore  Kses's  (a)  'Bei- 
triige    zur    Kenntniss    des    Reichtums    der 
Grosshirnrinde    des    Menschen   an    markhal- 
tigen  Nervenfasern' ;    (b)   'Ueber  den  Mark- 
fasergehalt  der  Grosshirnrinde  eines  1*4  jahr- 
igen  miinnlichen  Kindes' ;   (c)  'Ueber  Gross- 
hirnrindenmasse    und    liber    Anordnung    der 
Markfasersysteme   in    der    Rinde   des    Men- 
schen, zugleich  ein  Beitrag  zur  Frage :     Un 
terscheidet  sich   die   Rinde  des   Kulturmen- 
schen  von  den  niederen  Racen  in  Bezug  auf 
Kaliber,      Reichtum     und     Anordnung     der 
markhaltigen  Nervenfasern  V     In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  VII,  pp.  281-284.     (Jan.,  1896.) 

2.  A  preliminary  study  of  some  of  the 
motor  phenomena  of  mental  effort.     In  Am. 
Jour.    Psych.,    VII,    pp.    491-517.       (July, 
1896.) 

3.  Some  mental  automatisms.      (Joint 
author  with  G.  E.  Partridge.)    In  Ped.  Sem., 
V,  pp.  41-60.      (July,  1897.) 

4.  A  study  of  puzzles,  with  special  ref- 
erence to  the  psychology  of  mental  adapta- 
tion.    In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  VIII,  pp.  431- 
493.      (July,  1897.) 

5.  Ueber  Arbeit  und   Ruhe.      In  Psy- 
chologische  Arbeiten,  herausg.  von  E.  Kraepe- 
lin.     Heidelberg,  III,  3  Heft,  pp.  481-534. 

6.  Child  study  in  Germany.     In  Indi- 
ana Sch.  Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  159-160.    (March, 
1899.) 

7.  Science  in  the  daily  press.      (Joint 
author  with  William  L.  Bryan.)    In  Science, 
N.  S.  XI,  p.  74.     (1900.) 

8.  An    arithmetical    prodigy.       (Joint 
author  with  W.  L.  Bryan.)      In  Proc.  Am. 
Psych.  Asso.,  New  Haven,  1900.     In  Psych. 
Rev.,  VII,  p.  135.     (1900.) 


215 


Indiana  University 


\_Lindley 


9.  The  case  of  Arthur  Griffith,  arith- 
metical prodigy.  (Joint  author  with  W.  L. 
Bryan.)  In  Comte  rendu  du  IVe  Congres 
International  de  Psychologie  tenu  a  Paris, 
1900,  p.  178. 

10.  Review  of  J.  H.  Leuba's  (a)  'The 
state  of  death'  (Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  XIV,  pp. 
133-145)  ;  (b)  'Introduction  to  a  psychologi- 
cal study  of  religion'  (Monist,  XI,  pp.  195- 
225)  ;  (c)  'The  contents  of  religious  con- 
sciousness' (Monist,  XI,  pp.  536-573)  ;  (d) 
'Religion,  its  impulses  and  its  ends'  (Monist, 
1902-03).  In  Am.  Jour.  Religious  Psych, 
and  Educ.,  I.  (May,  1904.) 


ROBERT  EDWARD  LYONS,  A.B.  (1889),  A.M. 
(1890),  Ph.D.     Professor  of  Chemistry. 

1.  A  method  for  the  estimation  of  al- 
bumin in  urine.      (Joint  author  with  T.  C. 
Van  Niiys.)     In  Am.  Chem.  Jour.  XII,  pp. 
1-17.      (1890.) 

2.  Carbon  di-oxide  in  the  urine.    (Joint 
author   with    T.    C.    Van    Niiys.)      In    Am. 
Chem.  Jour.,   XIV,   pp.   14-20.      (1892.) 

3.  Die  Phenylverbiudungen  von  Schwe- 
fel,    Selen    und    Tellur.      Heidelberg,    1894. 
Pp.  40. 

4.  Ueber   Diphenylselenide   und  einige 
Derivate  desselben.      (Joint  author  with  F. 
Krafft.)      In  Ber.  d.  Deutsch.   Chem.   Ges., 
XXVII,  pp.   1760-17(58.      (1894.) 

5.  Ueber     Diphenyltellurid     und     eiu 
Verfahren   zur   Darstellung   von    Sulphiden, 
Seleniden    und    Telluriden.       (Joint    author 
with  F.  Krafft.)     In  Ber.  d.  Deutsch.  Chem. 
Ges.  XXVII,  pp.  1768-1773.      (1894.) 

6.  The  effect  of  grape  sugar  upon  the 
composition   of   certain    fat   producing   bac- 
teria.   In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895, 
pp.  85-88. 

7.  Ueber  Diphenylselenon,  C6H6 .  SeO2. 
C0H6.      (Joint  author  with  F.  Krafft.)      In 
Ber.  d.  Deutsch.  Chem.  Ges.  XXIX,  pp.  424- 
429.     (1896.) 


8.  The    qualitative    analysis    of    inor- 
ganic   bodies.       (Joint    author    with    L.    S. 
Davis.)      Anderson,  Ind.,  1897.     Pp.  210. 

9.  Analyses  of  certain  Indiana  shales 
and  fire  clays.     (Assisted  by  O.  W.  Brown.) 
In  Ann.  Rep.  State  Geologist  for  1898,  pp. 
68,  69,  114,  115,  130,  134. 

10.  A     manual     lexicological     analysis. 
(Joint  author  with  L.   S.  Davis.)      Ander- 
son, Ind.,  1899.    Pp.  112,  and  color  plate. 

11.  The  qualitative  analysis  of  inorganic 
bodies.      (Joint  author  with   L.   S.   Davis.) 
Anderson,   Ind.,   1900.      Second  edition,  pp. 
151. 

12.  Analyses  of  certain  Indiana  mineral 
waters.     In   Ann.   Rep.   of   State   Geologist 
for   1901,  pp.  70,  76,  83. 

13.  The    quantitative   determination   of 
selenium  in  organic  compounds.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  F.  L.  Shinn.)    In  Jour.  Am.  Chem. 
Soc.,  XXIV,  pp.  1085-1094  (1902)  ;  also  in 
Zeits.    f.    anal.    Chem.,    XLII,   pp.   659-661. 
(1902.) 

14.  Review   of   William   Dodge   Frost's 
•Laboratory   guide   in   elementary   bacteriol- 
ogy.'    Second  edition.     In  Jour.  Am.  Chem. 
Soc.,  XXIV,  pp.  595-596.     (1902.) 

15.  Analyses  of  certain   Indiana   coals. 
(Assisted  by  F.  C.  Mathers.)     In  Ann.  Rep. 
of  State  Geologist  for  1903. 

16.  Analyses   of   certain    Indiana   lime- 
stones and  limes.     (Assisted  by  F.  C.  Math- 
ers.)     In   Annual    Report   of    State   Geolo- 
gist, 1903. 

17.  Review  of  R.   H.  Aders  Plimmer's 
'Chemical    changes    and    products    resulting 
from   fermentations.'     In  Jour.  Am.   Chem. 
Soc.,  XXVI,  pp.  113.      (1904.) 


VERNON    FREEMAN    MARSTERS,   A.M.      Pro- 
fessor of  Geology. 

1.     Triassir  trajKs  of  Nova  Scotia,  with 
notes  on  other  intrusives  of  Pictou  and  An- 


216 


Bibliography :     Present  Faculty 


tigonish    counties,    Nova    Scotia.      In    Am. 
Geol.,  V,  pp.  140-145.     (1890.) 

2.  On    certain    camptonite    dikes    near 
Whitehall,      Washington      county,      N.      Y. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  F.  Kemp.)      In  Am. 
Geol.,  IV,  pp.  97-102.     (1889.) 

3.  The  trap  dikes  of  the  Lake  Cham- 
plain    region.       (Joint    author    with    J.    F. 
Kemp.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.,  No.  107, 
pp.  11-62.     (1893.) 

4.  Geologic      literature      of      Indiana 
stratigraphic  and  economic.      (Joint  author 
with  E.  M.  Kindle.)    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1893.     (1894.) 

5.  Camptonites  and  other  intrusives  of 
Lake  Memphramagog.     In  Am.  Geol.,  XVI, 
pp.  25-39;  1  map.     (1895.) 

6.  Aids    in    teaching    physical    geogra- 
phy.   In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1899, 
pp.  54-60;  1  pi.     (1900.) 

7.  Topography  and  geography  of  Bean 
Blossom  valley,  Monroe  county,  Indiana.    In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901,  pp.  222- 
237;  4  figures,  6  plates.      (1902.) 


JOHN  ANTHONY  MILLER,  A.B.  (1890),  Ph. 
D.  Professor  of  Mechanics  and  Astron- 
omy. 

1.  A  trigonometry  for  beginners.    New 
York,  1896.     Pp.  vii,  147 ;  67  plates. 

2.  An   infinite  system  of  forms  satis- 
fying the  requirements  of  Hilbert's  law.     In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  80-84. 

3.  The  leonids  of  1898.     In  Proc.  In- 
diana Acad.   Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  151-153.     1 
plate. 

4.  A    linear    relation    between   certain 
of  Klein's  X-functions  and  Sigma-functions 
of  lower  division  value.     In  Proc.   Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  154-157. 

5.  Meteor   showers.      In    Inland   Edu- 
cator, VII,   pp.    147-151;   2   plates.      (Nov., 
1898.) 


6.  The  perseids  of  1898.     In  Pop.  As- 
tron.,  VII,  p.  406;  1  plate.      (Sept.,  1899.) 

7.  Kirkwood     observatory.       In     Pub. 
Ast.  Soc.  of  the  Pacific,  XIII,  pp.  139-140 ; 
1  plate. 

8.  Meteor   showers.      In    Inland    Edu- 
cator, IX,  pp.  116-121.     (Oct.,  1899.) 

9.  The  leonids  of  1900.     In  Proc.   In- 
diana Acad.  Sci.  for  1900,  pp.  73-74. 

10.  The  Kirkwood  observatory  of  Indi- 
ana University.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1901,  pp.  85-87. 

11.  Inorganic   nature  study:     the   sky. 
In  Teachers'  Journal,  III,  pp.  20-21,  75-77, 
121-124,     235-241,     273-276,     384-416.      14 
plates. 

12.  Photographic  observations  of  comet 
c   1902.     In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.   for 
1902,  p.   80. 

13.  Double-star    measures.      In    Astro. 
Jour.,  XXIII,  pp.  167-169.      (Sept.,  1903.) 

14.  Double-star    measures.      In    Astro. 
Jour.,  XXIV,  pp.  15-16.      (1904.) 

15.  Measures  of  new  double  stars,  se- 
lected from  the  Leipzig  A.  G.  catalogue.     In 
Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CLXI.     (1904.) 

16.  Concerning     certain     elliptic     func- 
tions of  square  rank.     In  Am.  Jour.  Math., 
XXVI.     (In  press.) 


WILLIAM  J.  MOEXKHAUS,  A.B.  (1894), 
A.M.  (1895),  Ph.D.  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Physiology. 

1.  Variation    in    the    color-pattern    of 
Etheostoma     caprodes.        (Abstract.)        In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  231- 
232. 

2.  Some  cases  of  mimicry  in  fishes.    In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1894,  p.  86. 

3.  Variation      of      North      American 
fishes.      I.      The    variation    of    Etheostoma 
caprodes  Rafinesque.    In  Am.  Nat.,  XXVIII, 
pp.  641-658;  4  plates.      (August,  1894.) 


217 


Indiana  University 


\_Moenkhaus 


4.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Dubois  county,   Indiana.     In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.   for  1893,  pp.   150-162. 

5.  Variation      of      North      American 
fishes.     II.     The    variation    of    Etheastorna 
caprodes    Rafinesque    in    Turkey    lake    and 
Tippecanoe   lake.      In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad. 
Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  278-29G ;  9  figures. 

6.  Material  for  the  study  of  the  vari- 
ation of  Etheostoma  caprodes  Rafinesque  and 
Etheostoma   nigruui    Rafinesque    in   Turkey 
lake  and  Tippecanoe  lake.    In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  207-228;  6  figures. 

7.  Contribuigao   para   o    conhecimento 
das   aranhas   de   S.    Paulo.      In   Revista   do 
Museu   Paulista,   III,  pp.   77-112.     1  plate. 
(1898.) 

8.  The  spinning  of  the  egg-sac  in  Ly- 
cosa.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901, 
pp.   113-114. 

9.  Experiments  in  the  hybridization  of 
fishes.     (Abstract.)     In  Proc.  Indiana.  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1901,  p.  114. 

10.  An  aberrant  Etheostoma.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901,  pp.  115-11G. 

11.  The   individuality   of   the   maternal 
and  paternal  chromosomes  in  the  hybrid  be- 
tween   Fundulus    heteroclitus    and    Menidia 
notata.       (Abstract.)       In     Proc.     Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1902,  p.  111. 

12.  An  extra  pair  of  appendages  modi- 
fied  for   copulatory   purposes   in    Cambarus 
viridis.      In    Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.   for 
1902,  pp.  111-112;  2  figures. 

13.  Description   of   a   new  darter   from 
Tippecanoe    Lake.      In    Bull.    U.    S.    Fish 
Com.,  XXII,  pp.  397-398;  1  figure.      (Au- 
gust,  1903.) 

14.  The  development  of  the  hybrids  be- 
tween   Fundulus    heteroclitus    and    Menidia 
notata  with  especial  reference  to  the  beha- 
vior of  the  maternal  and  paternal  chromo- 
somes.    In  Amer.  Jour.  Anat.,  Ill,  pp.  29- 
67;  4  plates.     (1904.) 


KmvAKi)   I'AYSON   MOUTON,  A.M.,   Assistant 
Professor  of  English. 

1.  A  lesson  in  English  from  a  recent 
novel.    In  Inland  Educator,  II.  pp.  150-152. 
(April,  1896.) 

2.  Shakespeare  in  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury.     In    Jour.    Ger.    Phil.,    I,    pp.    31-44. 
(1897.) 

3.  Review    of    Myra    Reynolds's  '  The 
treatment  of  nature  in  English  poetry  from 
Pope  to  Wordsworth.'     In  Jour.  Ger.  Phil., 
I,  pp.  262-263.     (1897.) 

4.  Review    of     Francis     Turner    Pal- 
grave's   'Landscape   in   poetry   from    Homer 
to  Tennyson.'     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XII, 
pp.  414-417.      (Nov.,  1897.) 

5.  Review     of     Oscar     Kuhns's     'The 
treatment    of    nature    in    Dante's       Divma 
Commedia.'     In  Mod.   Lang.   Notes,  XII,  p. 
495-498.      (Dec.,    1897.) 

6.  Goldsmith's    'Vicar    of    Wakefield.' 
Chicago,  1898.     Pp.  xxv,  254. 

7.  Shakespeare's  'Julius  Caesar.'     Chi- 
cago, 1900.    Pp.  xxvi,  131. 

8.  Ruskin's     'Pathetic     fallacy,'     and 
Keats's  treatment  of  nature.     In  Poet  Lore, 
XII,  58-70.      (Jan.-March,   1900.) 

9.  A  method  of  teaching  metrics.     In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XV,  pp.  193-202.     (April, 
1900.) 

10.  Review   of   Mark   Harvey   Liddell's 
'An   introduction  to  the  scientific  study  of 
poetry.'     In  Mod.   Lang.   Notes,   XVII,  pp. 
431-434.      (Nov.,  1902.) 

11.  Chaucer's     Identical     rhymes.       In 
Mod.     Lang.     Notes,     XVIII,     pp.     73-74. 
(March,  1903.) 

12.  Shakespeare's  'Twelfth  Night.'   New 
York,  1903.     Pp.  xiii,  179. 

13.  Review     of     Raymond     Macdonald 
Alden's    'English    verse.'      In    Mod.    Lang. 
Notes,  XVIII,  pp.  174-176.     (June,  1903.) 

14.  Review      of      Joseph      Bickersteth 
Mayor's    'A    handbook    of    modern    English 
metre.'     In  Mod.  Lang,  Notes.      (In  press.) 


218 


Mottier~\ 


Bibliography :     Present  Faculty 


CHARLES  ALFRED  MOSEMILLER,  A.B.  (1890), 
Assistant  Professor  of  Romance  Lan- 
guages. 

1.  Concerning    the    etymology    of    the 
French  word  son  (=bran).     In  Mod.  Lang. 
Notes,  XVIII,  p.  224.     (Nov.,  1903.) 

2.  The    origin    of    the    French    word 
canncltcrge.    In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XIX,  pp. 
46-47.      (Feb.,    1904.) 


DAVID  MYERS  MOITIER,  A.B.   (1891),  A.M. 
(1892),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany. 

1.  Notes  on  the  apical  growth  of  liver- 
worts.   In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVI,  p.  141.     1  plate. 
(1891.) 

2.  On  the  archegonium  and  the  apical 
growth  of  the  stem  in  Tsuga  canadensis  and 
Pinus   sylvestris.     In   Bot.   Gaz.,   XVII,   p. 
141;  1  plate.     (1892.) 

3.  On  the  development  of  the  embryo- 
sac  of  Arisaema  triphyllum.     In  Bot.  Gaz., 
XVII,  p.  258;  1  plate.  (1892.) 

4.  The  phylogeny  of  ferns.     A  review 
of    J.    Bretland    Farmer's    'On    the    embry- 
ogeny  of  Angiopteris  evecta  Hoffm.'     (Ann. 
Bot.,  VI,  p.  265.)     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVIII,  p. 
106.      (1893.) 

5.  On  the  embryo-sac  and  embryo  of 
Senecio  aureus.     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVIII,  pp. 
245-253;  2  plates.     (1893.) 

6.  Development  of  the   embryo-sac  of 
Acer   rubrum.      In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XVIII,   pp. 
375-377;   1  plate.      (1893.) 

7.  Contributions  to  the  life-history  of 
Notothylas.     In  Ann.    Bot.,  VIII,   pp.  391- 
402;  3  plates.     (1894.) 

8.  Contributions  to  the  embryology  of 
the  Ranunculacea?.     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XX,  pp. 
241-248,  296-304 ;  4  plates.     (1895.) 

9.  Beitrage  zur   Kenntniss   der   Kern- 
theilung   in   den   Pollenmutterzellen    einiger 


Dikotylen  und  Monokotylen.  In  Jahrb.  fin* 
wiss.  Bot.,  XXX,  pp.  169-204;  6  plates. 
(1897.) 

10.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  der  Kerne  bei 
der  Entwickelung  des  Embryosacks  und  die 
Vorgjinge  bei   der  Befruchtung.     In  Jahrb. 
fiir    wiss.    Bot.,     XXXI,    pp.     125-158;    3 
plates.      (1897.) 

11.  Ueber  den  zweiten  Theilungsschritt 
in  Pollenmutterzellen.      (Joint  author  with 
Edonard  Strasburger.)     In  Ber.  der  Deutsch. 
Bot.  Gesellschaft,  XV,  pp.  327-332 ;  1  plate. 
(1897.) 

12.  Ueber  die  Chromosomenzahl  bei  der 
Entwickelung  der  Pollenkorner  von  Allium. 
In  Ber.  der  Deutsch.  Bot.  Gesellschaft,  XV, 
p.  474.      (1897.) 

13.  Das    Centrosom   bei    Dictyota.      In 
Ber.   der  Deutsch.   Bot.   Gesellschaft,   XVI, 
pp.  123-128.     (1898.) 

14.  The    centrosome    in    cells    of    the 
gametophyte  of  Marchantia.     In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1898. 

15.  Endosperm  haustoria  of  Lilium  can- 
didum.      In    Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.    for 
1898. 

16.  Nuclear  division  in  vegetative  cells. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898. 

17.  The  effect  of  centrifugal  force  upon 
the  cell.     In  Ann.  Bot.,  XIII,  pp.  325-361 ; 
1  plate.     (1899.) 

18.  Nuclear  and  cell  division  in  Dicty- 
ota dichotoma.    In  Ann.  Bot.,  XIV,  pp.  163- 
192;  2  plates.     (1900.) 

19.  A  practical  laboratory  guide  for  the 
first    year    in   botany.      Bloomington,    Ind., 
1902. 

20.  The  behavior  of  the  chromosomes  in 
the  spore  mother-cells  of  higher  plants  and 
the  homology  of  the  pollen  and  embryo-sac 
mother    cells.      In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XXXV,   pp. 
250-282  ;  4  plates.      (1903.) 

21.  The  development  of  the   spermato- 
zoid   of   Chara.     In   Ann.    Bot,   XVIII;    1 
plate.      (1904.) 

22.  Further   studies   on    anomalous    di- 


219 


Indiana  University 


[Mottier 


cotyli'donous  plants.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  11H)4. 

23.     Fecundation    in   plants.      Washing- 
ton,  I'.MU. 


BURTON  DORB  MYERS,  M.D.    Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Anatomy. 

1.  The  Chiasma  of  the  toad  (Bufo  len- 
tiginosus)    and   of   some   other   vertebrates. 
In  Zeitschrift  f.  Morphologic  u.  Anthropol- 
ogie,  III,  pp.  183-207;  2  plates.     (1901.) 

2.  Beitrag   zur    Kenntniss    des    Chias- 
mas   und   der   Commissuren   am   Boden   des 
dritten    Ventrikels.     In  Archiv   f.   Anat.   u. 
Physiologie    for    1902,    Anatomische    Abth., 
pp.  32  ;  15  plates. 

3.  Fixation  of  tissues  by  injection.    In 
Jour.  App.   Micr.  for  Nov.,  1903. 

4.  Review  of   Gerrish's   'Text-book   of 
anatomy.'      In    Johns    Hopkins    Bull,    for 
April,  1903. 

5.  Review  of  Karl  Camillo  Schneider's 
'Lehrbuch  der  vergleichenden  Histologie  der 
Thiere.'     In  Science,  Sept.  25,  1903. 


JOHN    SCHOLTE   NOLLEN,  Ph.D.      Professor 
of  German. 

1.  Gcethes  Gotz  von  Berlichingen  auf 
der  Biihne.    Leipzig,  1893.    Pp.  134. 

2.  Review     of    Elias     J.     MacEwan's 
translation  of   Freytag's  'Technique  of   the 
drama.'     In  Dial,  XVIII,  pp.  77-79.     (Feb., 
1895.)      Also  In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  X,  pp. 
76-77.     (Feb.,  1895.) 

3.  Review  of   Louis  P.   Betz's   'Heine 
in  Frankreich.'     In  Mod.   Lang.   Notes,  X, 
pp.  441-443.      (Nov.,   1895.) 

4.  Heinrich  von  Kleist's  'Prinz  Fried- 
rich    von    Homburg.'      Boston,    1899.      Pp. 
Ixxii,  172. 

5.  Review   of   A.   B.   Faust's   'Heine's 
prose.'     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XV,  pp.  103- 
108.      (Feb.,  1900.) 


6.  Notes  on  the  modern  drama :    Ibsen 
and  Hauptmaun.     In  Faculty  Corner,  Grin- 
nell,  pp.  47-64.     (1901.) 

7.  Heine    and    Wilhelm    MUller.      In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XVII,  pp.  207-218,  261- 
276.      (April,  May,   1902.) 

8.  Kritisches      und      Prinzipielles      zu 
Wolffs  'Jugendlustspielen  von  Heinrich  von 
Kleist.'     In  Jour.  Ger.  Phil.,  IV,  pp.  483- 
519.     (1902.) 

9.  Review  of  R.  M.  Meyer's  'Grundriss 
der  neueren  deutschen  Litteraturgeschichte.' 
In  Mod.   Lang.   Notes,  XVII,  pp.  391-395. 
(June,  1902.) 

10.  College  and  university  in  the  middle 
west.     In  Iowa  College  Circulars,  II,  pp.  1- 

10.  (Oct.,  1902.) 

11.  Elective  studies  and  courses  in  sec- 
ondary schools.     In  Iowa  College  Circulars, 

11,  pp.  47-59.      (Dec.,  1902.) 

12.  Review  of  Edward  Stockton  Meyer's 
'Franz  Grillparzer's  Der  Traum  em  Leben.' 
In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  XVIII,  pp.  122-124. 
(April,  1903.) 

13.  A  chronology  and  practical  bibliog- 
raphy of  modern   German  literature.     Chi- 
cago, 1903.     Pp.  118. 

14.  Outline  history  of  modern  German 
literature,   introductory   to  the  texts  of  the 
'Lake'  German  series.     Chicago,  ly03.     Pp. 
122. 

15.  German  poems,  1800-1850.    Chicago, 
1904. 

16.  Review  of  John  G.  Robertson's  'A 
history    of    German    literature.'      In    Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  XIX,  pp.  17-20.     (Jan.,  1904.) 

17.  Schiller's  poems.     New  York,  1904. 


CARL  WILHELM  FERDINAND  OSTIIAVS,  A.M. 
(1890).   Associate  Professor  of  German. 

1.  Review  of  Hager's  'Freytag's  Aus 
dem  Staat  Friedrichs  des  Grossen.'  In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  V,  pp.  301-303.  (May, 
1890.) 


220 


Rothrock~\ 


Bibliography :     Present  Faculty 


2.  Gei'stacker's  'Germelshausen.'    With 
introduction    and    English    notes.      Boston, 
1801.    Pp.  vii,  56. 

3.  Eichendorff's  'Aus  dem  Leben  eines 
Taugeniehts.'      With   introduction  and  Eng- 
lish notes.     Boston,  1892.     Pp.  ix,  176. 

4.  Review  of  Carruth's  'Schiller's  Wil- 
holm  Tell.'     In  Jour.  GPI-.  Phil.,  II,  pp.  125- 
126.      (1898.) 

5.  Ein      litterarischer       Vandalismus? 
(Erwiderung).      In    Psedagogische    Monats- 
hefte,  I,  pp.  8-10.     (March,  1900.) 

6.  Abridged    editions    of    modern    Ger- 
man   authors.       Reviews    of    nine    different 
novels.      In   Jour.   Ger.    Phil.,    IV,   pp.   248- 
259.      (1902.) 

7.  Where    empire    and    republic    meet. 
In  Western  Camera  Notes,  IV  pp.  221-225; 
5  plates.     (Sept.,  1903.) 

8.  Revision  of  Mary  A.  Frost's  edition 
of    Schcffel'a     'Trompeter    von     Siikkingen,' 
with    introduction    and    notes.     New    York, 
1904. 


ROY    HENDERSON    PERKING,    A.B.     (1894), 
A.M.  (1896).     Instructor  in  German. 

1.  An  English  criticism  of  Schiller's 
'Robbers.'  In  Germ.  Amer.  Ann.  N.  S.,  I, 
pp.  304-315.  (June,  1903.) 


ROLLA  ROY  RAMSEY,  A.B.  (1895),  A.M. 
(1898),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of 
Physics. 

1.  A  photographic  study  of  electrolytic 
cells.      In   Phys.    Rev.,   IV,   pp.    189-190;    1 
plate.      ( 1899. ) 

2.  Eine  photographische  Untermahung 
elektrolytercher    Tellen.       In    Physikalische 
Zeitschrift,  I,  p.  269.      (1900.) 

3.  The  effect  of  gravity  and  pressure 
on  electrolytic  cells.     In  Phys.  Rev.,  XIII, 
pp.   1-30;   17  plates,  9  tables.      (1901.) 


4.  Die     Wirkung     von     Schwere     und 
Druck    auf    die    elektrolyteschen    Vorgange. 
In   Physikalische   Zeitschrift,    ill,    pp.    177- 
182  ;  4  tables.     ( 1902. ) 

5.  The  change  of  volume  in  chalk  and 
cadmium  cells  and  its  relation  to  change  of 
electromotive    force    due    to    pressure.      In 
Phys.   Rev..   XVI,   pp.    105-111  ;    1   plate,   3 
tables.      (1903.) 


WILLIAM  A  RAWLES,  A.B.  (1884),  A.M. 
(1895),  Ph.D.  Junior  Professor  of  Po- 
litical Economy. 

1.  The    government    of    the    people    of 
the   State   of   Indiana.      Philadelphia,   1897. 
Pp.  vi,   172.     12  plates. 

2.  Centralizing   tendencies    in   the   ad- 
ministration of  Indiana.     New  York,   1903. 
Pp.  336. 


GEORCE  Louis  REINHARD,  LL.D.     Professor 
of  Law  and  Dean  of  the  School  of  Law. 

1.  Indiana   criminal   law.      Cincinnati, 
1879.     Pp.  xxii,  523. 

2.  Judicial    opinions   and   decisions   as 
judge  of  Indiana  Appellate  court.     In  Indi- 
ana App.  Ct.   Rep.,   I-XVI1.      (1891-1897.) 

3.  Agency.     A  treatise  on  the  law  of 
principal    and    agent.       Indianapolis,    1903. 
Pp.   cxi,  656. 

4.  The     right     to     practice     law.       In 
Proc.    Indiana    State    Bar    Asso.    for    1902, 
pp.  129-151, 

5.  American  law  schools  and  the  teach- 
ing of  law.     In   Green  Bag,  XV.      (March, 
1904.) 


DAVID  ANDREW  ROTHROCK,  A.B.  (1892), 
A.M.  (1893),  Ph.D.  Associate  Profes- 
sor of  Mathematics. 

1.  Invariants  of  the  finite  continuous 
groups  of  the  plane.  In  Am.  Math.  Mo., 
V,  pp.  249-264.  (Nov.,  1898.) 


221 


Indiana  University 


\_Rothrock 


2.  Point  invariants  of  the  Lie  groups. 
In.  Proc.  Indiana  Ac-ad.   Sci.   for  1898,   pp. 
119-135. 

3.  Differential  invariants  derived  from 
point   invariants.      In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad. 
Sci.   for   1898,   pp.   135-147. 

4.  An  algebra  for  high  schools.     (Joint 
author  with  R.  J.  Aley.)      New  York,  1904. 
(In  press.) 


MABTIN  WRIGHT  SAMPSON,  A.M. 
of  English. 


Professor 


1.  Milton's  lyric  and  dramatic  poems. 
New  York,  1901.     Pp.  1,  345. 

2.  Webster's   'Duchess  of   Malfy,'   and 
'The  white  devil.'     Boston,  1904. 

3.  About     250     to    300    reviews     and 
articles    in    Critic,    Dial,    Anglia,    Outlook, 
Nation,  Modern   Language  Quarterly,  Jour- 
nal of  Germanic  Philology,  etc. 


GTJIDO  HERMANN  STEMPEL,  A.M.  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  Comparative  Philol- 
ogy. 

1.  Sein  und  haben.    In  Germania,  III, 
pp.  132-1:55.      (June  1,  1891.) 

2.  Review    of    Charles    F.    Johnson's 
'English  words.'     In  School  and  College,  I, 
pp.  255-250.     (April,  1892.) 

3.  Review    of    Emil    Trechmann's    'A 
short    historical    grammar    of    the    German 
language,  translated  and  adapted  from  Pro- 
fessor   Behaghel's    Deutsche    Sprache.'      In 
Academy,  VII,  pp.  308-309.      (June,  1892.) 

4.  Wilhelm  Miiller.     In  Germania,  VI, 
14-18.      (May,  1894.) 

5.  Review  of  Charles  Sears  Baldwin's 
'The    inflections    and    syntax    of    the    Mort.e 
d'Arthur.'     In   Dial,   XVIII,  p.  25.      (Jan. 
1,  1895.) 

0.  Review  of  Francis  B.  Gummere's 
'Old  English  ballads.'  In  Dial,  XVIII,  p. 
87.  (Feb.  1.  1895.) 


7.  Review    of    Alfred    M.    Williams's 
'Studies   in    folk-song   and   popular   poetry.' 
In  Dial,  XVIII,  pp.  182-183.     (March  16, 
1895.) 

8.  Review  of  Oliver  Farrar  Emerson's 
'The  history  of  the   English  language.'     In 
School     Rev.,     Ill,     pp.     229-233.       (April, 
1895.) 

9.  Review     of     Edward     S.     Joynes's 
'Schiller's   Maria   Stuart.'     In   Educ.    Rev., 
X,  pp.  499-500.     (Dec.,  1895.) 

10.  Review  of  Walter  W.  Skeat's  'The 
student's    Chaucer.'      In    School    Rev.,    V. 
(Oct.,  1897.) 

11.  Review    of    Hermann    B.    Boisen's 
'Preparatory   book   of    German    prose.'      In 
Alumnus,  I,  No.  2,  pp.  32-33.     (Nov.,  1898.) 

12.  Review  of  Caroline  H.  Harding  and 
Samuel    B.    Harcling's    'Greek   gods,   heroes, 
and   men.'      In   Alumnus,    I,   No.   2,   p.   33. 
(Nov.,  1898.) 

13.  Review  of  Carl  Osthaus's   'Eichen- 
dorff's   Aus    dem   Leben   eines   Taugenichts.' 
In  Alumnus,  I,  No.  2,  p.  34.      (Nov..  1898.) 

14.  Review  of  Caroline  H.  Harding  and 
Samuel  B.  Harding's  'The  city  of  the  seven 
hills.'     In    Alumnus,    I,    No.    3,    pp.    35-V,u. 
(Feb.,  1898.) 

15.  Review    of    Harold    W.    Johnston's 
'Latin  manuscripts.'     In  Alumnus,  I,  No.  3, 
pp.  3G-37.     (Feb.,  1898.) 

10.  Review  of  Edward  P.  Morton's 
'Goldsmith's  The  Vicar  of  Wakefield.'  In 
Alumnus,  I,  No.  4,  pp.  24-25.  (May.  1899.) 

17.  Questions,  etc.,  and  a  bibliography. 
Contributed  to  Marsh  and  Royster's  'Teach- 
ers' manual  for  the  study  of  English  class- 
ics.'    Chicago,  1902.     Pp.  95. 

18.  The  Yale  bicentennial  and  compara- 
tive  philology.      Review   of   Hanns   Oertel's 
'Lectures    on    the   study    of   language' ;     E. 
Washburn    Hopkins's   'India   old   and  new,' 
and  'The  great  epic  of  India' ;    E.   P.  Mor- 
ris's  'On   principles   and   methods   in   Latin 
.syntax.'   In  Dial,  XXXIII,  pp.  92-94.    (Aug. 
10,  1902.) 


222 


JVoodburn 


Bibliography :     Present  Faculty 


HENRY    TIIEW     STEPIIENSON,     B.S.,     A.B. 
Assistant  Professor  of  English. 

1.  The     Elizabethan    play-house.       In 
Inland  Educator,  X,  pp.   158-164;  2  plates. 
(May,  1900.) 

2.  Patroon   Van    Volkenberg :      A  tale 
of  old  Manhattan  in  the  year  sixteen  hun- 
dred  and   ninety-nine.      Indianapolis,    1900. 
Pp.  380.     Illustrated. 

3.  The  fickle  wheel :     A  tale  of  Eliza- 
bethan    London.      Indianapolis,    1901.      Pp. 
380.     Illustrated. 

4.  Elizabethan  London  :     A  topograph- 
ical description.     (In  press.) 

5.  Elizabethan   manners   and  customs. 
(In  preparation.) 


ULYSSES  GRAXT  WEATIIERLV,  Ph.D.     Pro- 
fessor of  Economics  and  Social  Science. 

1.  Louis  VI,  the  founder  of  the  French 
monarchy.     Hamilton,  X.  Y.,  1891.     Pp.  27. 

2.  A       miniature       European       state : 
Liechtenstein.      In    Cornell    Magazine,    VI, 
pp.  205-208.      (March,   1894.) 

3.  Comparative  politics.    Albany,  N.  Y., 
1895.     Pp.  39. 

4.  Review    of    Herbert    Tuttle's    'His- 
tory of  Prussia  under  Frederick  the  Great, 
1750-1757.'     In  Am.  Hist.  Rev.,  II,  pp.  145- 
148. 

5.  The   relation    of    history    and   geog- 
raphy.     In    Indiana    Sch.   Jour.,    XLII,   pp. 
226-251.      (April,   1897.) 

6.  Recent  books  on  historical  method. 
In  Inland  Educator,  V,  pp.  247-249.     (Dec., 
1897.) 

7.  Review  of  Georges  Pariset's  'L'etat 
et  les  eglises  en  Prusse  sous  Frederic  Guil- 
laume    I,    1715-1740.'      In   Am.    Hist.   Rev., 
Ill,  pp.  352-355.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

8.  History  in  the  high  school.     In  In- 
land   Educator,    VI,    pp.    201-262.       (July, 
1898. ) 


9.  Review  of  Godefroy  Cavaignac's  'La 
formation  de  la  Prusse  contemporaine,  1808- 
1813.'  In  Am.  Hist.  Rev.,  IV,  pp.  149-151. 
(Oct.,  1898.) 

10.  Stein's  German  policy  at  the  Con- 
gress of  Vienna.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist. 
Asso.  for  1900,  I,  pp.  521-534.      (1901.) 

11.  Why  charities  ought  to  be  organized. 
In    Indiana    Bull.    Char,    and    Corr.,    June, 
1902,  pp.  91-92. 


JAMES  ALBERT  WOODBURN,  A.B.  (1876), 
A.M.  (1885),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Amer- 
ican History  and  Politics. 

1.  The  race  problem  in  the  South.     In 
Indiana  Student.     (Nov.,  1885.) 

2.  Government  by  the  people.     In  In- 
diana Student.      (Nov.,  1886.) 

3.  The  Johns  Hopkins  University.     In 
Indiana  Student.     (Jan.,  1887.) 

4.  Needed  changes  in  the  school  law  of 
Indiana.      In    Indiana    Sch.    Jour.       (Feb., 
1888.) 

5.  The  slave  trade.    A  series  of  articles 
on   the    recent   slave   trade   of   the    Moham- 
medans in  Central  Africa.     In  United  Pres- 
byterian.     (Jan.,  Feb.,  1888.) 

6.  Review  of  Sir  Henry  Maine's  'Lec- 
tures on  international  law  delivered  before 
the  University  of  Cambridge.'     In  Christian 
Union.      (June  27,  1889.) 

7.  The   study    of    history ;     an    article 
on    the    study    of   history    in    America   sug- 
gested by  the  proceedings  of  the  6th  annual 
session  of  the  American  Historical  Associa- 
tion at  Washington,  D.  C.,  Dec.,  1889.     In 
Christian  Union.     (Jan.  9,  1890.) 

8.  The  speaker  and  the  quorum.     An 
essay     on     the     notable    decision     of     Hon. 
Thomas  B.  Reed,  Speaker  of  the  House  of 
Representatives,    Feb.,    1890.      In    Indiana 
Student.      (March,   1890.) 

9.  Chautauqua  :  the  growth  of  its  sum- 
mer school.     7«  Christian  Union.     (Aug.  21, 
1890.) 


223 


Indiana  University 


[  Woodburn 


10.  History  of  higher  education   in  In- 
diana.    Washington,  1801.     Bureau  of  Edu- 
cation, Circulars  of  Information,  No.  1.     Pp. 
200. 

11.  States     made    from     colonies.       In 
Chautauquan.     (Dec.,  1891.) 

12.  States   made   from    territories.      In 
Chautauquan.      (Feb.,  1892.) 

13.  Causes  of  the  American  Revolution. 
In   Johns  Hop.   Univ.   Studies,  X,  pp.   557- 
016.      (Dec.,  1802.) 

14.  Select  orations  of  Burke  and  Web- 
ster,  with   introduction   and  notes.      (Joint 
author  with  C.  W.  Hodgin.)     Boston,  1892. 
Pp.  583. 

15.  The    historical    significance    of    the 
Missouri  Compromise.     In  Ann.  Rept.  Am. 
Hist.  Asso.  for  1893,  pp.  251-297. 

1C.  The  study  of  politics  in  American 
colleges.  In  Am.  Jour,  of  Pol.  (May, 
1894.) 

17.  American    political    orations,    re-ed- 
ited   with    historical    notes.      4    vols.      New 
York,  1896. 

18.  The  tariff  in  legislation.     In  Chau- 
tauquan.    (April,  1896.) 

19.  The   Monroe  doctrine  and  some   of 
its   applications.      In  Chautauquan.      (Feb., 
1896.) 

20.  To  what  extent  may  undergraduate 
students  of  history  be  trained  in  the  use  of 
the  sources.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist.  Asso. 
for  1897,  pp.  45-49. 

21.  France  in  the  American  Revolution. 
In  Chautauquan.     (June,  1897.) 

22.  The    American     Revolution,     1763- 
1783,   being   the  chapters   and   passages   re- 
lating to  America  from  Lecky's   history  of 


England  in  the  18th  century.  Edited  with 
bibliographical  and  historical  notes.  New 
York,  1898.  Pp.  xviii,  518. 

2."..  The  making  of  the  Constitution:  a 
syllabus  for  Madison's  Journal.  Chicago, 
1898.  Pp.  41. 

24.  Washington's  foreign  policy  and  the 
Philippines.     In  Independent,  L.     (Oct.  27, 
1898.) 

25.  Our  plighted  word  and  the  Philip- 
pines.     In    Independent,    L,   pp.   1381-1383. 
(Nov.  17,  1898.) 

26.  The  American  republic  and  its  gov- 
ernment :  an  analysis  of  the  government  of 
the  United  States  with  a  consideration  of  its 
fundamental   principles  and  of  its  relations 
to  the  States  and  Territories.     New  York, 
1902.     Pp.  iv,  410. 

27.  Political  parties  and  party  problems 
in  the  United  States  :  a  sketch  of  American 
party   history   and   of   the   development  and 
operations     of    party     machinery,     together 
with  a  consideration  of  certain  party  prob- 
lems in  their  relation   to  political  morality. 
New   York,  1902.     Pp.  ix,  314. 

28.  Party  politics  in  Indiana  during  the 
Civil  War.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist.  Assoc. 
for  1902,  I,  pp.  225-251. 

29.  Review  of  U.  B.  Phillip's  'Georgia 
and  state  rights.'     In  Am.  Hist.  Rev.,  VIII, 
pp.  785-786.     (July,  1903.) 

30.  Review  of  Lecky's  'Leaders  of  pub- 
lic opinion  in  Ireland.'     In  Am.  Hist.  Rev., 
IX.  pp.  375-377.     (Jan..  1904.) 

31.  Review  of  William   Henry   Smith's 
'A  political  history  of  slavery.'    In  Am.  Hist. 
Rev..  IX.  pp.  .?85-.?80.      (Jan..  1904.) 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  FORMER  FACULTY 


***In  the  following  list  the  attempt  has  been  made  to  gather  together  the  publica- 
tions of  former  members  of  the  Faculty  up  to  the  times  when  their  connections  with 
Indiana  University  ceased.  The  list  is  made  as  complete  as  the  difficulty  of  the  task  and 
the  time  at  the  disposal  of  the  compilers  will  permit;  but  it  is  realized  that  there  must 
be  many  omissions,  both  of  names  of  authors  and  of  titles  of  publications,  which  the  list 
as  planned  should  include. 


EDWIN  GEORGE  BALDWIN,  M.A.     Instructor 
in  Latin,  1898-1899. 


1.  The  laws  of 
text  and  translation. 
1899.  Pp.  8. 


the    twelve    tables : 
Bloomington,    Ind., 


ELISHA  BALLANTINE,  D.D.,  LL.D.  Pro- 
fessor of  Mathematics,  1854-1856  ;  Pro- 
fessor of  Greek,  1856-1863;  1867-1878. 
Acting  President,  1884 ;  Vice  President, 
1884-1886.  Died  March  31,  1886,  at 
Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Christ,    His    own    witness ;    or    the 
words   of  Jesus  concerning  Himself.      New 
York,  1877. 

2.  Old  age  ;  two  discourses  delivered  at 
Bloomington,  Ind.    Bloomington,  Ind.,  1879. 
Pp.  22. 


DAVID  DEMABEE  BANTA,  Dean  of  the  School 
of  Law,  1890-96.     See  Alumni  list. 


EARL     BAKNES,     Professor     of     European 
History,   1889-90.     Sec  Alumni  list. 


CHARLES  HENRY  BEESON,  Tutor  in  Latin, 
1894-95;  Instructor  in  Latin,  1895-96. 
See  Alumni  list. 


SANFORD  BELL,  Assistant  Professor  of  Ped- 
agogy, 1898-1900.    See  Alumni  list. 


GEORGE  AUGUSTUS  BICKNELL,  A.B.,  LL.B., 
LL.D.  (1864).  Professor  of  Law,  1861- 
70. 

1.  Commentary      on      bankrupt      law. 
New  York,  1841. 

2.  About    250    judicial     decisions,    as 
judge    of    the    Second     (Indiana)     Judicial 
Circuit    (1852-76). 

3.  Bicknell's   civil   practice.      Pp.    700, 
2d  edition,  1871. 

4.  Bicknell's    criminal   -practice.      Pp. 
500,  2d  edition,   1871. 


ERNEST  LUDLOW  BOGART,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor  of  Economics  and 
Social  Science,  1898-1900.  Now  Pro- 
fessor of  Economics  and  Sociology, 
Oberlin  College,  Oberlin,  Ohio. 

1.  Financial    procedure    in    the    State 
legislatures.     In  Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Soc.  Pol. 
Sci.,  VIII,  pp.  236-253.      (Sept.,  1896.) 

2.  Geschichte   der   Volkspartei   in   den 
Vereinigten  Staaten  von  Nord-Amerika.     In 
Jahrbiicher  fiir   Nationalokonomie  und  Sta- 
tistik,   LXVII,   pp.  577-624.      (Oct.,   1896.) 

3.  Die  Finanzverhaltnisse  der   Einzel- 
staaten    in    den    Vereinigten    Staaten    von 
Nord-Amerika.    Jena,  1897.     Pp.  xiii,  157. 


225 


Indiana  University 


\_Eogart 


4.  Die   Geschichte   der    Nationalschuld 
der  Vereinigten  Staaten  von  Nord-Amerika. 
In    Jahrbiicher    fiir    Nationalokonomie    und 
Statistik,   LXX,   pp.   06-88.      (Jan.,   1898.) 

5.  Housing  of  the   working  people  in 
Yonkers.     In  Economic  Studies  of  Am.  Econ. 
Assoc.,  Ill,  pp.  373-347.      (Oct.,  1898.) 

6.  Public  employment  bureaus   in   the 
United    States    and    Germany.      In    Quart. 
Jour.    Econ.,    XIV,    pp.    341-377.       (May, 
1900.) 

7.  Ten    or    twelve    review    articles    in 
Political    Science   Quarterly,   Annals  of  the 
American    Academy,    and    Jahrbiicher     fiir 
Nationalokonomie. 


RICHARD  GAUSE  BOONE,  Ph.D.  Professor  of 
Pedagogics,  1886-1893.  Now  editor  of 
'Education.' 

1.  Education    in    the    United    States. 
New  York,  1889.     Pp.  xii,  402. 

2.  History    of    education    in    Indiana. 
New  York,  1892.     Pp.  xi,  454. 

3.  Results    under    an   elective   system. 
In    Educ.    Rev.,    IV,    53-73,    142-156;     16 
tables.      (June,   Sept.,   1892.) 


JOHN  CASPER  BRANNER,  Professor  of  Geol- 
ogy, 1885-91.    See  Alumni  list. 


JAMES  RAY  MCCORKLE  BRYANT,  Professor 
of  Law,  1856-1861.    Died  Feb.  25,  1866. 

1.  A  baccalaureate  address  to  the  grad- 
uating class  of  the  Law  Department  of  In- 
diana University,  March  24,  1858.  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1858.  Pp.  19. 


DOUGLAS  HOUOHTON  CAMPBELL,  Ph.D. 
Professor  of  Botany,  1888-1891.  Now 
Profesor  of  Botany,  Leland  Stanford 
Junior  University,  Stanford  University, 
Cal. 
1.  The  Botanical  Institute  at  Tttbin- 

gen.     In  Bot.  Gaz.  for  Jan.,  1888. 


2.  The  staining   of   the   living   nuclei. 
In   Untersuchungen  aus  dem  Bot.  Inst   zu 
TUbingen.     (1888.) 

3.  A  meeting  of  the  German  Botanical 
Society.    In  Bot.  Gaz.  for  June,  1888. 

4.  The   paraffin    imbedding   process   in 
botany.     In  Bot.  Gaz.  for  June,  1888. 

5.  The     systematic     position     of     the 
Rhizocarpese.     In  Bull.  Tor.   Bot.  Club  for 
Oct.,  1888. 

6.  Report  of  the  Cleveland  meetings  of 
the  Botanical  Club  of  the  A.  A.  A.  S.     In 
Torrey  Bull,  for  Oct.,  1888. 

7.  The  development  of  Pilularia  glob- 
ulifera.    In  Ann.  of  Bot,  II,  No.  3.     (1888.) 

-  8.  Einige  Notizen  iiber  die  Keimung 
von  Marsilia  a>gyptaca.  In  Berichte  der 
Dent.  Bot.  Gesell.  for  Dec.,  1888. 

9.     On   the    affinities   of   the   Filicinese. 
In  Bot.  Gaz.  for  Jan.,  1890. 

10.  Studies    in   cell-division.      In    Bull. 
Tor.  Bot.  Club  for  March,  1890. 

11.  Elements    of    structural    and    sys- 
tematic botany.     New  York,  1890. 

12.  Contributions   to  the  life-history  of 
Isoetes.     In  Ann.   Bot.,  V,  pp.  231-258;    6 
plates.     (1891.) 

13.  Notes  on   the  apical  growth   in   the 
roots  of  Osmunda  and  Botrychium.     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XVI,  pp.  37-42;    1  plate.     (1891.) 


JOHN  ROGERS  COMMONS,  A.M.  Professor  of 
Economics  and  Social  Science,  Indiana 
University,  1892-1895.  Now  Assistant 
Secretary,  National  Civic  Federation, 
New  York  City. 

1.  The  Christian   minister  and   sociol- 
ogy.    In  Lend  a  Hand,  VIII,  p.  117.     (Feb., 
1892.) 

2.  Proportional       representation.       In 
Ann.   Am.  Acad.   Pol.   Sci.,  II,  pp.  700-707. 
(March,  1892.) 

3.  Natural  monopolies  and  protection. 
In    Quar.    Jour.    Econ.,    VI,    pp.    479-484. 
(July,  1892.) 


226 


Griggs  ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


4.  How    to    abolish    the    gerrymander. 
In  Rev.  of  Rev.,  VI,  p.  541.     (Dec.,  1892.) 

5.  The   church   and   poverty   in   cities. 
In  Charities  Rev.,   II,  pp.  347-356.      (May, 
1893.) 

6.  The    distribution    of    wealth.     New 
York,  1893.    Pp.  x,  258. 

7.  Social  reform  and  the  church.     New 
York,  1894.     Pp.  x,  176. 

8.  State    supervision    for    cities.      In 
Ann.   Am.  Acad.   Pol.   Sci.,   V,  pp.   865-881. 
(May,  1895.) 

9.  Progressive  individualism.     In  Am. 
Mag.  Civics,  VI,  pp.  561-574.     (June,  1895.) 

10.  Taxation  in  Chicago  and  Philadel- 
phia. In  Jour.  Pol.  Econ.,  Ill,  pp.  434-460. 
(Sept..  1895.) 


JOHN  MERLE  COULTER,  President  of  the  Uni- 
versity and  Professor  of  Botany,  1891- 
93.  See  Alumni  list. 


RICHARD  HEATH  DABNEY,  Ph.D.     Professor 
of  History,  1886-89. 

1.     The    causes    of   the   French   revolu- 
tion.    New  York,  1888.     Pp.  x,  297. 


WILLIAM  MITCHELL  DAILY,  D.D.,  LL.D. 
President  of  the  University,  1853-59. 
See  Alumni  list. 


GEORGE  FLAVEL  DANFORTH,   Ph.B.     Libra- 
rian, 1898-1903.     Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Catalogue  of   the  Barnes  reference 
library,  Cornell  University.     Ithaca,  N.  Y., 
1897. 

2.  United     States     catalog,     books     in 
print,  1899.     Bloomington,  Ind.,  1900.     Pp. 
1112. 

3.  Quarterly  bibliography  of  books  re- 
viewed in  leading  periodicals.     Bloomington, 


Ind.,   vol.   1    (1902),  pp.   207;     vol.   II    (in 

press ) . 


FLETCHER  BASCOM  DRESSLAR,  Instructor  in 
Psychology,  Sept-Dec.,  1892.  See 
Alumni  list. 


FRANK    DREW,    Instructor    in    Philosophy, 

1895-96.     See  Alumni  list. 


FRANK  ALBERT  FETTER,  Professor  of  Eco- 
nomics and  Social  Science,  1895-98. 
See  Alumni  list. 


SAMUEL  GARNER,  Professor  of  Romance 
Languages,  1882-1887.  Now  Professor 
of  Romance  Languages,  U.  S.  Naval 
Academy,  Annapolis,  Md. 

1.  Review   of  Julius   Siede's   'Syntak- 
tische     Eigentttmlichkeiten     der     Umgangs- 
sprache     weniger     gebildeter     Pariser.'      In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  I,  pp.  73-75.     (1886.) 

2.  A   much   needed  reform.      In   Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  I,  pp.  52-53.      (1886.) 

3.  Report  on  Romania.     In  Am.  Jour. 
Philol.,  VII,  No.  1.     (1886.) 

4.  The   gerundial   construction    in   the 
Romanic  languages.     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes, 
II,  pp.  109-117.     (1887.) 


CHARLES     HENRY    GILBERT,     Professor    of 
Zoology,  1888-1891.    See  Alumni  list. 


OLIVER  EDMUNDS  GLENN,  Instructor  in 
Mathematics,  1902-1903.  See  Alumni 
list. 


EDWARD  HOWARD  GRIGGS,  Instructor  in 
English,  1889-90  ;  Associate  Professor  of 
English,  1890-91 ;  Professor  of  General 
Literature,  1891-93.  See  Alumni  list. 


Indiana  University 


\_Hall 


BAYNARD  RUSH  HALL,  Principal  of  Indiana 
Seminary,  1824-1828;  Professor  of  An- 
cient Languages,  1828-1831.  Died  Jan. 
23,  1863,  at  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

1.  Righteousness    the    safe-guard    and 
glory  of  a  nation  ;    a  sermon  preached  in  the 
Representative   Hall,  at   Indianapolis,   Indi- 
ana, December  31,  182G.     Pp.  23. 

2.  Something     for     everybody.      New 
York,  1846.     Pp.  viii,  223. 

3.  The  new  purchase ;    or   early   years 
in  the  far  West.     1st  ed.,  New  York,  1843. 
Vol.  I,  pp.  300;    vol.  II,  pp.  316.     2d  ed., 
New  Albany,  Ind.,  1855.     Pp.  v,  471. 


LAUNCELOT  MINOR  HARRIS,  Ph.D.  Instruc- 
tor in  English,  1893-94  ;  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  English,  1894-96.  Now  Pro- 
fessor of  English,  College  of  Charles- 
ton. Charleston,  S.  C. 


I.     The   Creoles   of   New   Orleans. 
Southern  Collegian  for  1896. 


In 


MARTIN   LUTHER   HOFFMAN,    Instructor   in 
Mathematics,  1896-97.    See  Alumni  list. 


WALTER  RALEIGH  HOUGHTON,  Principal  of 
the  Preparatory  Department,  1873-84. 
See  Alumni  list. 


JOSEPH  HENRY  HOWARD,  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin,  1894-1901.  See  Alumni 
list. 


GEORGE     MAXWELL     HOWE,     Instructor     in 
German,  1893-95.     See  Alumni  list. 


ERNEST  WILSON  HUFFCUT,  LL.B.,  Professor 
of  Law,  1890-92.  Now  Dean  of  the 
School  of  Law,  Cornell  University, 
Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

1.  English  in  the  preparatory  schools. 
(Monographs  on  education.)  Boston,  1892. 
Pp.  28. 


JEREMIAH  WIIIPPLE  JENKS,  Ph.D.  Profes- 
sor of  Economics  and  Social  Science, 
1889-1891.  Now  Professor  of  Political 
Economy  and  Politics,  Cornell  Univer- 
sity, Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

1.  Road   legislation  for   the  American 
state.     In  Monog.  Am.  Econ.  Assoc.     (May, 
1889. ) 

2.  The    development    of    the    whiskey 
trust.    In  Pol.  Sci.  Quart,  for  June,  1889. 

3.  The    economic    outlook :    review    of 
David  A.  Wells's  'Recent  economic  changes.' 
In  Dial  for  Dec.,  1889. 

4.  Trusts  and  the  people.     In  States- 
man for  Dec.,  1889. 

5.  Review   of   Yeijiro   Ono's    'The   in- 
dustrial   transition    in   Japan'    (Monograph 
of  Am.   Econ.  Asso.).     In  Pol.   Sci.  Quart, 
for  1890. 

6.  The  needs  of  the  farmer.    In  West- 
ern Home  and  Farm  for  Dec.,  1890. 

7.  Review      of      Theodora      Hertzka's 
'Freiland.'      In    Pol.    Sci.    Quart,    for   Dec., 
1890. 

8.  Schoolbook  legislation.    In  Pol.  Sci. 
Quart,  for  March,  1891. 

9.  Die     Trusts     in     den     Vereinigten 
Staaten  von  Amerika.    In  Jahrb.  f.  Nation- 
alok.  u.  Stat.  for  Jan.,  1891. 

10.  Review  of  J.  N.  Keynes's  'The  scope 
and   method  of  economic  science.'     In   Pol. 
Sci.  Quart,  for  June,  1891. 

11.  Land  transfer  reform.    In  Ann.  Am. 
Acad.  Pol.  Soc.  Sci.  for  June,  1891. 

12.  The  university  extension  movement 
in  Indiana.     In  Book  Notes  for  May,  1891. 


HANS  CARL  GUNTHER  VON  JAGEMANN, 
Ph.D.  Professor  of  Germanic  Lan- 
guages and  Philology,  1885-1889.  Now 
Professor  of  Germanic  Philology,  Har- 
vard University,  Cambridge,  Mass. 


1.     On  the  relation  of  the  Anglo-Nor- 
man vowel  system  to  the  Norman  words  in 


228 


Jordan  ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


English.     In  Trans.  Am.  Philol.  Asso.,  XV, 
pp.  66-87.      (1884.) 

2.  On  the  genitive  in  old  French.     In 
Proc.  Mod.  Lang.  Asso.,  I.      (1884.) 

3.  On  the  genitive  in  old  French.     In 
Trans.  Mod.  Lang.  Asso.  of  Am.,  I,  pp.  64- 
83.     (1884-1885.) 

4.  On  the  use  of  English  in  teaching 
foreign   languages.     In   Trans.    Mod.   Lang. 
Asso.  of  Am.,  I,  pp.  216-226.     (1884-1885.) 

5.  On   the   etymology   of  inveigle.     In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  I,  pp.  18.     (1886.) 

6.  Review  of  E.   Courtonne's   'Langue 
Internationale  Neo-Latine.'     In  Mod.  Lang. 
Notes,  1,  pp.  38-39.      (1886.) 

7.  Review    of    E.    Pillissier's    'French 
roots  and   their   families.'     In   Mod.   Lang. 
Notes,  I,  p.  125.     (1886.) 

8.  Review    of    R.     Kleinpaul's    'Men- 
schen  und  Volkernamen.'     In  Science,  VII, 
pp.  403-404.      (1886.) 

9.  Review  of  Jean  Roemer's  'Origin  of 
the    English    people    and    the    English    lan- 
guage.'     In   Dial   for    Feb.,    1887 ;    also    in 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes  for  March,  1888. 

10.  Review      of     Balg's      'Comparative 
glossary  of  the  Gothic  language.'     In  Mod. 
Lang.  Notes  for  April,  1888. 

11.  Fouque's    Undine ;     a    new   edition, 
with    notes    and    vocabulary.      New    York, 
1889. 


DAVID  STARR  JORDAN,  LL.D.  Professor  or 
Biology,  1879-1885;  President  of  the 
University,  1885-1891.  Now  President 
of  Leland  Stanford  Junior  University, 
Stanford  University,  Cal. 

1.  The  colors  of  vegetation.     In  Am. 
Nat.,  VII,  pp.  65-70.     (1873.) 

2.  Hoof-rot     in     sheep.       In     Prairie 
Farmer,  1873. 

3.  A  popular  key  to  the  birds,  reptiles, 
batrachians,    and    fishes    of    the    Northern 
United  States,  east  of  the  Mississippi  River. 


(Joint  author  with  Balfour  H.  Van  Vleck.) 
Appleton,  Wis.     Pp.  100.      (1874.) 

4.  The   flora  of    Penikese  island.      In 
Am.  Nat,  VIII,  pp.  193-187.     (1874.) 

5.  A   key    to    the  higher   alga?   of   the 
Atlantic   coast  between   Newfoundland   and 
Florida.     In  Am.    Nat.,   VIII,  pp.   398-403, 
479-493.     (1874.) 

6.  The   Sisco  of  lake  Tippecanoe.     In 
Am.  Nat.,  IX,  pp.  135-138.     (1875.) 

7.  The   Sisco  of  lake  Tippecanoe  and 
its  relatives.     In  Rep.  Geol.   Surv.  Indiana 
for  1876. 

8.  A  synopsis  of  the  fishes  to  be  looked 
for  in  Indiana.     In  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Indi- 
ana for  1876. 

9.  The     genus     Pomoxys     Rafinesque. 
(Joint   author   with    Herbert   Edson    Cope- 
land.)      In  Proc.   Acad.   Nat.   Sci.   Philadel- 
phia, XXVIII,  pp.  68-71.     (1876.) 

10.  Concerning    the   fishes   of   the   Ich- 
thyologia   Ohiensis.      In   Bull.    Buffalo   Soc. 
Nat.  Hist,  1876,  pp.  91-97.     (1876.) 

11.  Manual   of   the   vertebrates   of   the 
Northern  United   States,   including  the  dis- 
trict east  of  the  Mississippi  river  and  north 
of  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee,  exclusive 
of  marine  species.     Chicago,  1876. 

12.  Johnny     darters.        (Joint     author 
with   H.   E.   Copeland.)      In  Am.   Nat.,   X, 
pp.  335-341.     (1876.) 

13.  The    sand-darter.       (Joint    author 
with  H.  E.  Copeland.)      In  Am.  Nat.,  XI, 
pp.  86-88.     (1877.) 

14.  List  of  fishes   of   Indiana.      (Joint 
author   with   Charles   Henry    Gilbert.)      /» 
Indiana  Farmer,  Jan.  17,  1877. 

15.  A  story  of  a  stone.     In  St.  Nich- 
olas, Feb.    1877. 

16.  Check-list  of  the  fishes  of  the  fresh 
waters   of   North   America.      (Joint   author 
with    H.    E.    Copeland.)      In   Bull.    Buffalo 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  II,  pp.  33-164.     (1877.) 

17.  On  the  fishes  of  Northern  Indiana. 
In    Proc.     Acad.     Nat     Sci.     Philadelphia, 
XXIX,  pp.  42-82.     (1877.) 


229 


Indiana  University 


[  Jordan 


18.  On  the  genera  of  North  American 
fresh-water  fishes.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci.   Phila- 
delphia, XXIX,  pp.  83-104.     (1877.) 

19.  A  partial  synopsis  of  the  fishes  of 
Upper  Georgia.     In  Ann.   Lye.  Nat.   Hist., 
New  York,  XI,  pp.  307-377.     (1877.) 

20.  Contributions    to    North    American 
ichthyology,     I.       Review     of     Rafinesque's 
'Memoirs    on   North    American    fishes.'      In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  p.  53.     (1877.) 

21.  Contributions    to    North    American 
ichthyology,    II.      A.      Notes    on    Cottidse, 
Etheostomatidffl,       Percidse,       Centrarchidse, 
etc.,  with  revisions  of  genera  and  descrip- 
tions  of   new   or   little  known   species.     B. 
Synopsis    of    the    Siluridse    of    the    United 
States.    In  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  X,  p.  116. 
(1877.) 

22.  On     Lagochila,     a    new    genus     of 
catostomoid     fishes.       (Joint     author     with 
Alembert    Winthrop    Brayton.)       In    Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  XXIX,  pp.  280-283. 
(1877.) 

23.  On  the  distribution  of  fresh-water 
fishes.      In    Am.    Nat.,    XI,    pp.    607-613. 
(1877.) 

24.  On  the  distribution   of  fresh-water 
fishes  of  the  United  States.     In  Ann.  N.  Y. 
Acad.  Sci.,  I,  pp.  92-120.     (1878.) 

25.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Illi- 
nois.      In     Illinois    Lab.     Nat.     Hist.,     II. 
(1878.) 

26.  Catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Indiana. 
In  27th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  State  Board  of 
Agr.  for  1877,  XIX.      (1878.) 

27.  Manual    of   the   vertebrates   of   the 
Northern  United   States,  including  the  dis- 
trict east  of  the  Mississippi  river  and  north 
of  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee,  exclusive 
of  marine  species.     Second  edition,  revised 
and  enlarged.    Chicago,  1878.     Pp.  407. 

28.  Contributions    to    North    American 
ichthyology,   based   primarily   on   the  collec- 
tions of  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.     III.      (Joint 
a  ii  1 1  mi-  with  A.  W.  Brayton.)      A.     On  the 


distribution  of  the  fishes  of  the  Alleghany 
region  of  South  Carolina,  Georgia,  and 
Tennessee,  with  descriptions  of  new  or  little 
known  species.  B.  A  synopsis  of  the  fam- 
ily Catostomida?.  In  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
XII,  p.  237.  (1878.) 

29.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Clackamas   river,  Oregon.     In  Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  I,  pp.  69-119.     (1878.) 

30.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the  Rio  Grande  at  Brownsville,  Texas.     In 
Bull.   U.   S.  Geol.   Surv.  Ter.,   IV,  pp.  397- 
406.      (1878.) 

31.  A   catalogue   of   the    fishes    of    the 
fresh   waters   of  North  America.     In  Bull. 
U.    S.    Geol.    Surv.    Ter.,    IV,   pp.    407-442. 
(1878.) 

32.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the  Rio  Grande  at  Brownsville,  Texas,  con- 
tinued.   In  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Ter.,  IV, 
pp.  663-667. 

33.  Report   on   the   collection   of   fishes 
made   by   Dr.    Elliott   Coues,    U.    S.    A.,    in 
Dakota    and    Montana,    during   the   seasons 
of   1873   and   1874.      In   Bull.    U.    S.    Geoi. 
Surv.,  IV,  pp.  777-799.     (1878.) 

34.  Report  on  the  fishes  collected  during 
the  years  1875,  1876,  and  1877,  in  California 
and  Nevada.     (Joint  author  with  Henry  W. 
Henshaw.)      In  Rep.  Geol.   Surv.  W.  100th 
Mer.,  for  1878.     Appendix  K,  pp.  187-200. 

35.  Notes    on    the    fishes    of    Beaufort 
Harbor,    North    Carolina.       (Joint    author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat. 
Mus.,  I,  365-388.     (1879.) 

36.  Notes  on  certain  typical  specimens 
of  American  fishes   in  the  British   Museum 
and  in  the  Museum  d'Histoire  Naturelle  at 
Paris.     In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,  II,   pp. 
218-226.     (1880.) 

37.  Description  of  new  species  of  North 
American  fishes.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
II,  pp.  235-241.     (1880.) 

38.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  ob- 
tained in  the  streams  of  Guanajuato,  and  in 
Chapala   lake,   Mexico,   by   Prof.   A.   Duges. 


230 


Jordan ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  II,  pp.  298-301. 
(1880.) 

39.  Manual   of   the   vertebrates    of   the 
Northern  United   States,   including   the  dis- 
trict east  of  the  Mississippi  river  and  north 
of  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee,  exclusive 
of    marine    species.      Third    edition,    revised 
and  enlarged.     Chicago,  1880,  p.  406. 

40.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
East  Florida,   obtained  by  Dr.  J.  A.   Hen- 
shall.     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
17-21.     (1880.) 

41.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
St.   John's  river,   Florida,   obtained   by   Mr. 
A.  H.  Curtiss.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  p.  22.     (1880.) 

42.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
San  Diego,  California.      (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  23-34.     (1880.) 

43.  Description     of     a     new     flounder 
(.Xystreurys  liolepis)    from  Santa  Catalina 
island,     California.        (Joint     author     with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Must, 
III,  pp.  34-36.      (1880.) 

44.  Description   of   a   new   ray    (Platy- 
rhina  triseriata)   from  the  coast  of  Calif  or 
nia.      (Joint   author   with   C.    H.    Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,   pp.  36-38. 
(1880.) 

45.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
rock    cod     ( Sebastichthys    serriceps)     from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  38-40.     (1880.) 

46.  On  the  occurrence  of  Cephaloscyl- 
lium  laticeps    (Dumeril)    Gill  on  the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with   C.   H. 
Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill, 
pp.  40-42.     (1880.) 

47.  On  the  oil  shark  of  Southern  Cali- 
fornia ( Galeorhinus  galeus ) .     (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  42-43.     (1880.) 

48.  Description     of     a     new     flounder 
(Pleuronichthys   verticalis)    from   the  coast 


of  California,  with  notes  on  other  species. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)  In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  49-51. 
(1880.) 

49.  Notes  on  sharks  from  the  coast  of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
51-52.     (1880.) 

50.  On   the  generic  relations  of   Platy- 
rhina  exasperata.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat  Mus.,  Ill,  p. 
53.      (1880.) 

51.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Sebastichthys       (Sebastichthys      miniatus) 
from    Monterey    Bay,    California.       (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  70-73.      (1880.) 

52.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  rock- 
fish     (Sebastichthys     carnatus)     from     the 
coast     of     California.      (Joint   author    with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  73-75.     (1880.) 

53.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  ray 
(Raia  stellulata)  from  Monterey,  California. 
(Joint    author    with    C.    H.    Gilbert.)      In 
Proc.     U.     S.     Nat.     Mus.,     pp.     133-135. 
(1880.) 

54.  Description     of     new     species     of 
Xiphister  and  Apodichthys,  from  Monterey, 
California.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
135-140.     (1880.) 

55.  Description   of  two  new  species  of 
Sebastichthys        ( Sebastichthys       entomelas 
and  Sebastichthys  rhodochloris )   from  Mon- 
terey Bay,  California.      (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  142-146.     (1880.) 

56.  Description  of  a   new  Agonoid  fish 
(Brachyopsis    xyosternus)     from    Monterey 
Bay,  California.      (Joint  author  with  G.  H. 
Gilbert.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.,   Ill 
pp.  152-154.     (1880.) 

57.  Description     of     a     new     flounder 
(Hippoglossoides  exilis)    from  the  coast  of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gii- 


231 


Indiana  University 


[Jordan 


bert.)       In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
154-156.     (1880.) 

58.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  ray 
(Raia  rhina)   from  the  coast  of  California. 
(Joint    author    with    C.    H.    Gilbert)      In 
Proc.    U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   251-253. 
(1880.) 

59.  Description  of  two  new  species   of 
fishes   (Ascelichthys  rhodorus  and  Scytalina 
cerdale)   from  Neah  Bay,  Washington  terri- 
tory.     (Joint  author  with   C.   H.   Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  264-268. 
(1880.) 

60.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
Scopeloid  fishes   (Sudis  ringens  and  Mycto- 
phum  crenulare)  from  Santa  Barbara  Chan- 
nel, California.      (Joint  author  with   C.  H. 
Gilbert.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill, 
pp.  273-276.     (1880.) 

61.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
flounders    (Parophrys   ischyrus   and   Hippo- 
glossoides    elassodon)     from    Puget    Sound. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  276-280.      (1880.) 

62.  Description  of  seven  new  species  of 
Sebastoid  fishes  from  the  coast  of  California. 
(Joint    author    with    C.    H.    Gilbert.)      In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   287-298. 
(1880.) 

63.  Description   of   a   new   Embiotocoid 
(Abeona  aurora)  from  Monterey,  California, 
with    notes    on    a    related    species.       (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  299-301.      (1880.) 

64.  Description     of     a     new     flounder 
( Platysomatichthys  stomias)   from  the  coast 
of  California.      (Joint   author   with   C.   H. 
Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill, 
pp.  301-303.      (1880.) 

65.  Description   of   a   new   Embiotocoid 
fish  ( Cymatogaster  rosaceus)  from  the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with   C.   H. 
Gilbert.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,  Ill, 
pp.  303-305.      (1880.) 

66.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
deep-water  fish  (Icichthys  lockingtoni)  from 


the  coast  of  California.  (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  305-308.  (1880.) 

67.  Description   of  a   new    Embiotocoid 
fish    (Ditrema   atripes)    from    the   coast   of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
320-322.     (1880.) 

68.  Description    of    a    new    Scorpaenoid 
fish   ( Sebastichthys  maliger)   from  the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with   C.    H. 
Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
322-324.    (1880.) 

69.  Notes  on  a  forgotten  paper  of  Dr. 
Ayres,  and  its  bearing  on  the  nomenclature 
of  the  Cyprinoid  fishes  of  the  San  Francisco 
markets.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
325-327.      (1880.) 

70.  Notes  on  Senia  and  Dacentrus.     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  p.  327.     (1880.) 

71.  Description    of    a    new    Scorpsenoid 
fish     (Sebastichthys    proriger)     from    Mon- 
terey Bay,  California.      (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  327-329.     (1880.) 

72.  Description     of     a     new     Agonoid 
(Agonus  vulsus)   from  the  coast  of  Califor- 
nia.    (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)  In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   330-332. 
(1880.) 

73.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Hemirhamphus   (Hemirhamphus  rosse)  from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  335-336.     (1880.) 

74.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Notidanoid  shark  (Hexanchus  corinus)  from 
the    Pacific    coast    of    the    United    States. 
(Joint    author    with    C.    H.    Gilbert)      In 
Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   352-355. 
(1880.) 

75.  Scientific  names  of  the  black  bass. 
In   Forest  and    Stream,   Nov.  28,   1880,   p. 
340.      (Reprinted  in  Henshall's  'Book  of  the 
black  bass.) 

76.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 


232 


Jordan  ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


Nemichthys  (Nemichthys  avocetta)  from 
Puget  Sound.  (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Gilbert.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill, 
409-410.  (1881.) 

77.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Paralepis    (Paralepis   coruscans)    from    the 
Straits    of   Juan   de   Fuca.      (Joint   author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  I).  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,   pp.   411-413.      (1881.) 

78.  List  of  the  fishes  of  the  Pacific  coast 
of  the  United  States,  with  a  table  showing 
the    distribution     of   the     species.        (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  452-458.     (1881.) 

79.  On  the  generic  relations  of  Belone 
exilis  Grd.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill,  p. 
459.     (1881.) 

80.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Utah  Lake.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
459-465.      (1881.) 

81.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  rock 
fish    ( Sebastichthys   chrysomelas)    from  the 
coast    of    California.       (Joint    author    with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  p.  465.     (1881.) 

82.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Caranax    (Caranax   beani)    from   Beaufort, 
North  Carolina.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  486-488.     (1881.) 

83.  Observations  on  the  salmon  of  the 
Pacific.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XV,  pp.  177-186.     (1881.) 

84.  Check-list    of    duplicates    of    fishes 
from   the   Pacific   coast   of   North   America, 
distributed  by  the  Smithsonian  Institution  in 
behalf  of  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.     (Joint  author 
with  Pierre  Louis  Jouy.)      In  Proc.  U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  1-18.     (1881.) 

85.  Notes   on  the   fishes   of  the  Pacific 
coast  of  the  United  States.      (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  IV,  p.  29-70.     (1881.) 

86.  Description   of    Sebastichthys   mys- 
tinus.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 


In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,    IV,  pp.   70-72. 
(1881.) 

87.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Pty- 
chochilus  (Ptychochilus  harfordi)  from  Sac- 
rainento  river.      (Joint  author   with   C.   H. 
Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp. 
72-73.     (1881.) 

88.  Note    on     Raia    inornata.       (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  73-74.     (1881.) 

89.  Story   of  a  salmon.      In   Pop.    Sci. 
Mo.,  XIX,  pp.  1-6.     (188.1.) 

90.  On  the  movements  of  plants.     Re- 
view of   Darwin's    'Power   of   movement   in 
plants.'     In  Dial,  March,  1881. 

91.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  made 
by  Lieut.  Henry  E.  Nichols,  U.  S.  N.,  on  the 
west  coast  of  Mexico,   with  descriptions  of 
new  species.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)    In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,   IV,  pp. 
225-233.     (1881.) 

92.  List    of    fishes    collected    by    Lieut. 
Henry  E.  Nichols,  U.  S.  N.,  in  the  Gulf  of 
California,  and  on  the  west  coast  of  Lower 
California,    with    descriptions    of   four    new 
species.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  273-279. 
(1882.) 

93.  Description  of  thirty-three  new  spe- 
cies of  fishes  from  Mazatlan,  Mexico.     (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  338-365.     (1882.) 

94.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Pomadasys  from  Mazatlan,  with  a  key  to  the 
species  known  to  inhabit  the  Pacific  coasts 
of  tropical  America.     (Joint  author  with  C. 
H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IV, 
pp.  383-388.     (1882.) 

95.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Xenichthys   (Xenichthys  xenurus)   from  the 
west    coast    of    Central    America.       (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  p.  454.     (1882.) 

96.  Descriptions  of  five  new  species  of 
fishes     from     Mazatlan,      Mexico.       (Joint 


233 


Indiana  University 


[Jordan 


author  with  C.  II.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  458-4G3.     ( 1882. ) 

97.  Ascent  of  the  Matterhorn.     In  Our 
Continent,  Nov.  2,  1882. 

98.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
sharks     from     Mnzatlan,     Mexico.       (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)   In  I'roc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  102-110.     (1882.) 

99.  Description  of  a  new  shark    (Car- 
charias    lamiella)     from    San    Diego,    Cali- 
fornia.    (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.   110-111. 
(1882.) 

100.  Bull-trout  and  Pompano.    In  Forest 
and  Stream,  April  20,  1882. 

101.  Darwin.    In  Dial,  May  2,  1882. 

102.  Review    of    Huxley's    'Science    and 
culture.'     In  Dial,  May  9,  1882. 

103.  Descriptions  of  nineteen  new  species 
of  fishes  from  the  Bay  of  Panama.     (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  I,  pp.  30G-335.     (1882.) 

104.  Some     ichthyological     terms.        In 
Forest  and  Stream,  Aug.  20,  1882. 

105.  The    air    we    breathe.      Review    of 
Tyndall's  'Floating  matter  in  the  air.'     In 
Dial,  Sept.,  1882,  pp.  90-93. 

106.  Description   of  a  new  Cyprinodont 
(Zygonectes  inurus)   from  southern  Illinois. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  143-144.     (1882.) 

107.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Uranidea    (Uranidea  pollicaris)    from   Lake 
Michigan.      (Joint  author  with  C.   H.   Gil- 
bert.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  222- 
223.     (1882.) 

108.  Notes  on  fishes  observed  about  Pen- 
sacola,  Florida,  and  Galveston,  Texas,  with 
description   of  new  species.      (Joint  author 
with  C.  II.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  241-307.     (1882.) 

109.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Blenny  (Isesthes  gilberti)  from  Santa  Bar- 
bara, California.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
V,  pp.  349-351.     (1882.) 

110.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Con- 


don (Condon  serrifer)  from  Boca  Soledad, 
Lower  California.  (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Gilbert.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp. 
351-352.  (1882.) 

111.  Catalogue  of  the  fishes  collected  by 
Mr.  John  Xantus  at  Cape  San  Lucas,  which 
are  now  in  the  United  States  National  Mu- 
seum, with  descriptions  of  eight  new  species. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  353-371.     (1882.) 

112.  List  of  fishes  collected  by  Mr.  John 
Xantus  at  Colima,   Mexico.      (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  371-372.     (1882.) 

113.  List   of   fishes  collected  at   Panama 
by  Capt.  John  M.  Dow,  now  in  the  United 
States    National    Museum.       (Joint    author 
with  C.  II.   Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  373-378.     (1882.) 

114.  List  of  a  collection  of  fishes  made 
by  Mr.   L.   Belding,  near   Cape  San  Lucas, 
Lower  California.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp. 
378-381.     (1882.) 

115.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Panama 
by  Rev.  Mr.  Rowell,  now  preserved  in  the 
United    States    National    Museum.      (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  381-382.      (1882.) 

110.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes  ( Sebastichthys  umbrosus  and  Cithar- 
ichthys  stigmaeus)  collected  at  Santa  Bar- 
bara, California,  by  Andrea  Larco.  In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  410-412.  (1882.) 

117.  The    Gasper-Gou.      In    Forest    and 
Stream,  Oct.  5,  1882,  p.  192. 

118.  A    review    of    the     Siluroid    fishes 
found  on  the  Pacific  coast  of  tropical  Amer- 
ica, with  descriptions  of  three  new  species. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)    In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comrn.,  II,  pp.  34-54.     (1882.) 

119.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Mazatlan. 
Mexico,   by   C.   H.   Gilbert.      (Joint   author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,  II,  pp.  105-108.     (1882.) 

120.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Panama 


234 


Jordan ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


by  C.  II.  Gilbert.  (Joint  author  with  C. 
H.  Gilbert.)  In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
II,  pp.  109-111.  (1882.) 

121.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Goby  (Gobiosoma  ios)   from  Vancouver's  is- 
land.     (Joint  author  with  C.   II.   Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  437-438. 
(1882.) 

122.  The     blue-back     trout     (Salvelinus 
oquassa).      In    Forest    and    Stream,    Dec., 
1882,  p.  389. 

123.  Dr.   Henshall's  scientific  nomencla- 
ture again.     In  Am.  Angler,  Dec.  16,  1882, 
p.  391. 

124.  The  nomenclature  of  our  birds.    Re- 
view of  the  Coues  check-list.    In  Dial,  Dec., 
1882,  pp.  165-167. 

125.  Report  on  the  fishes   of  Ohio.     In 
Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Ohio,  sec.  IV,  vol.  IV,  pp. 
735-1002.     (1882.) 

126.  On  certain  neglected  generic  names 
of  Lacepede.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In   Proc.   U,    S.   Nat.   Mus.,   V,   pp. 
570-576.     (1883.) 

127.  On    the    synonymy    of    the    genus 
Bothus  Rafinesque.      (Joint  author  with  C. 
H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V, 
pp.  576-577.     (1883.) 

128.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Ar- 
tedius     (Artedius    fenestralis)     from    Puget 
Sound.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  577-579. 
(1883.) 

129.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Uro- 
lophus     (U.    asterias)     from    Mazatlan    and 
Panama.    (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.   Mus.,  V,  pp.  579-580. 
(1883.) 

130.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Charleston,    South    Carolina,    with    descrip- 
tions of  three  new  species.      (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  580-620.     (1883.) 

131.  List  of  fishes  now   in  the  museum 
of   Yale   College,   collected  by   Prof.   Frank 
H.   Bradley   at   Panama,   with    descriptions 


of  three  new  species.  (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
V,  pp.  620-632.  (1883.) 

132.  Description  of  two   new  species  of 
fishes    (Myrophis  vafer  and  Chloroscombrus 
orqueta)  from  Panama.     (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
V,  pp.  645-647.     (1883.) 

133.  Description   of   a   new   eel    (Sidera 
castanea)    from    Mazatlan,   Mexico.     (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  647-648.     (1883.) 

134.  On  the  nomenclature  of  the  genus 
Ophichthys.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)     In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   V,   pp. 
648-651.     (1883.) 

135.  Striped  bass  or  rock-fish.     In  For- 
est and  Stream,  Jan.  4,  1883,  p.  450. 

136.  New  methods  of  anatomical  dissec- 
tion.    Review  of   Wilder  and  Gage's  'Ana- 
tomical   technology    as    applied    to    the    do- 
mestic cat.'     In  Dial,  Jan.,   1883,   pp.   202- 
203. 

137.  Contributions    to    North    American 
ichthyology,   based  primarily   on   the  collec- 
tions of  the  U.   S.   National  Museum.     IV. 
A  synopsis  of  the  fishes  of  North  America. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  p.  1145.     (1883.) 

138.  Notes  on  the  nomenclature  of  cer- 
tain North  American  fishes.     (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat. 
Mus.,   VI,  pp.   110-111.      (1883.) 

139.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes     (Aprion     ariommus    and    Ophidium 
beani)  from  Pensacola,  Florida.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  C.  H.   Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  142-144.     (1883.) 

140.  A  review  of  the  American  Carangi- 
nae.      (Joint   author   with   C.    H.    Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  198-207. 
(1883.) 

141.  Note  on  the  genera  of  Petromyzon- 
tidse.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 
In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VI,    p.    208. 
(1883.) 


235 


Indiana  University 


[  Jordan 


142.  Description  of  a  new  Murienoid  eel 
(Sidera  chlevastes)   from  the  Galapagos  is- 
lands.     (Joint  author  with  C.  II.  Gilbert.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  208-210. 
(1883.) 

143.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Khinobntus       (Ithinobatus       glaucostigma) 
from  Mazatlan,  Mexico.     (Joint  author  with 
C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
VI,  pp.  210-211.     (1883.) 

144.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  the  Clear 
Fork   of   the   Cumberland,   Whitley   county, 
Kentucky,    with   descriptions    of   three   new 
species.     (Joint  author  with  Joseph  Swain.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  248-251. 
(1883.) 

145.  Notes  on  American  fishes,  preserved 
in  the   museums  of   London,  Paris,   Berlin, 
and  Copenhagen.     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci., 
Phila.,  XXXV,  pp.  281-293.     (1883.) 

146.  Review    of    Boulenger's    'Catalogue 
of  Batrachia  gradientia  in  the  British  Mu- 
seum.'    In  Science,  II,  pp.  810.     (1883.) 

147.  Sketch  of  Felipe  Poey.    In  Pop.  Sci. 
Mo.,  XXV,  pp.  547-552.     (1884.) 

148.  Some    gossip    about    Darwin.      In 
Am.  Nat.,  XVIII,  p.  108.     (1884.) 

149.  The  beginning  of  life.     Review  of 
G.    Hilton    Scribner's    'Where   did    life   be- 
gin?'    In  Science,  III,  p.  264.     (1884.) 

150.  Review    of    Yarrow's    check-list    of 
North  American  reptilia  and  batrachia.     In 
Science,  III,  p.  264.      (1884.) 

151.  The  fishes  of  the  Florida  Keys.     In 
Bull.    U.    S.    Fish    Comm.,    IV,    pp.    77-80. 
(1884.) 

152.  Proposed  propagation  of  catfish  as 
a   food-fish.     In   Bull.   TJ.   S.   Fis.i   Comm., 
IV,  p.  292.      (1884.) 

153.  Notes  on  fishes  improperly  included 
in    the    fauna    of    the    United    States.      In 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.   Sci.  Phila.,  XXXVI,  pp. 
99-103.      (1884.) 

154.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Calamus.      (Joint  author   with   C.   H.   Gil- 


bert.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp. 
14-24.     (1884.) 

155.  Descriptions  of  ten  new  species  of 
fishes  from  Key  West,  Florida.      (Joint  au- 
thor with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.    Mus.,   VII,   pp.   24-32.      (1884.) 

156.  Note  on  Caranx  ruber  and  Caranx 
bartholomaei.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Gil- 
bert.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp. 
32-33.     (1884.) 

157.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Pensacola,      Florida,      obtained     by      Silas 
Stearns,  with  descriptions  of  two  new  spe- 
cies    (Exocoetus    volador    and    Gnathypops 
mystacinus.)      In   Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus., 
VII,  pp.  33-40.     (1884.) 

158.  Notes  on  ^Elurichthys  eydouxii  and 
Porichthys    porosissimus.      In    Proc.    U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  40-41.      (1884.) 

159.  List   of   fishes   from   Egmont    Key, 
Florida,  in  the  museum  of  Yale  College,  with 
description   of   two  new  species.     In   Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  XXXVI,  pp.  42-46. 
(1884.) 

160.  The  Canadian  sea  trout  ( Salvelinus 
fontinalis    immaculatus).      In    Am.    Field, 
July,  1884. 

161.  The   rainbow   trout    (Salmo   gaird- 
neri  irideus).     In  Forest  and  Stream,  July, 
1884. 

162.  Note  on  Calamus  proridens,  a  new 
species  of  Calamus.     (Joint  author  with  C. 
H.   Gilbert.)      In   Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.   Mus., 
VII,  p.  150.     (1884.) 

163.  Descriptions  of  Scaroid  fishes  from 
Havana  and  Key  West,  including  five  new 
species.     (Joint  author  with  J.  Swain.)     In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat   Mus.,    VII,   pp.   81-102. 
(1884.) 

164.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Key  West, 
Florida,   with    notes   and    descriptions.      In 
Proc.    II.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VII,    pp.   81-102. 
(1884.) 

165.  An    identification   of   the   figures  of 
fishes  in  Catesby's  'Natural  history  of  Caro- 
lina, Florida,  and  the  Bahama  islands.'     In 


236 


Jordan  ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.   Mus.,   VII,   pp.    190-199. 
(1884.) 

166.  Notes  on  fishes  collected  by  D.   S. 
Jordan  at  Cedar  Keys,  Florida.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  J.  Swain.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  VII,  pp.  230-234.      (1884.) 

167.  List   of   fishes   observed   in   the    St. 
John's      river      at      Jacksonville,      Florida. 
(Joint  author  with  Seth  Eugene  Meek.)     In 
Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.    Mus.,   VII,   pp.   235-237. 
(1884.) 

168.  Notes  on   fishes  collected  at  Guay- 
mas,   Mexico,   by   Mr.   H.   V.   Emeric,   with 
a   description   of   Gobiosoma   histrio,   a  new 
species.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp. 
260-261.     (1884.) 

169.  A   review  of  the  American  species 
of   marine   Mugilidae.      (Joint   author    with 
J.  Swain.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII, 
pp.  261-275.      (1884.) 

170.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Hsemulon.      (Joint  author  with  J.  Swain.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  281-317. 
(1884.) 

171.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  the  vicin- 
ity of  New  Orleans  by  Dr.  R.  W.  Shufeldt, 
U.   S.  A.     In   Proc.   U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII, 
pp.  318-322.      (1884.) 

172.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  lake  Jes- 
sup    and    Indiana    river,    Florida,    by    Mr. 
R.  E.  Earll,  with  descriptions  of  two  new 
species.      In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.    Mus.,    VII, 
pp.  322-324.      (1884.) 

173.  A  review   of  the  American  species 
of  Epinephelus  and  related  genera.      (Joint 
author   with    J.    Swain.)      In    Proc.    U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  358-410.     (1884.) 

174.  A  review  of  the  species  Lutjaninse 
and  Hoplopagrinae  found  in  American  wa- 
ters.     (Joint   author  with  J.    Swain.)      In 
Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.   Mus.,   VII,   pp.   427-474. 
(1884.) 

175.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
Cyprinidse    in    the    United    States    National 
Museum.     (Joint  author  with  S.  E.  Meek.) 


In   Proc.    U.    S.   Nat.    Mus.,   VII,   pp.   474- 
477.      (1884.) 

176.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
Poecilichthys  in  the  United  States  National 
Museum.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII, 
pp.  477-480.     (1884.) 

177.  Description  of  Sciaena  sciera,  a  new 
species  of  Sciaena  from  Mazatlan  and  Pan- 
ama.     (Joint  author  with   C.   H.   Gilbert.) 
In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VII,    p.    480. 
(1884.) 

178.  Description   of   Zygonectes    zonifer, 
a  new  species  of  Zygonectes  from  Nashville, 
Georgia.      (Joint  author  with  S.  E.  Meek.) 
In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,  VII,    p.    482. 

(1885.) 

179.  Description  of  three  new  species  of 
fishes    (Prionotus   stearnsi,    Prionotus   oph- 
ryas,  and  Anthias  vivanus)  collected  at  Pen- 
sacola   by    Mr.    Silas    Stearns.      (Joint   au- 
thor with  J.  Swain.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  VII,  pp.  541-545.      (1885.) 

180.  Supplementary     notes     on      North 
American  fishes.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 

VII,  pp.  545-548.     (1885.) 

181.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Hy- 
bognathus    (Hybognathus   hayi)    from   Mis- 
sissippi.    In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   VII, 
pp.  548-550.     (1885.) 

182.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Iowa  and 
Missouri  in  August,  1884,  with  descriptions 
of  three  new  species.      (Joint  author  with 
S.   E.   Meek.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus., 

VIII,  pp.   1-17.      (1885.) 

183.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
flying    fishes    (Exocoetus).       (Joint    author 
with    S.   E.   Meek.)      In   Proc.   U.   S.    Nat. 
Mus.,  VIII,  44-67.      (1885.) 

184.  Notes  on  skeletons  of  Etheostomat- 
ihse.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VIII,  pp.  68-72. 
(1885.)  •  -| 

185.  Note  on  the  scientific  name  of  the 
yellow   perch,    the   striped    bass,   and   other 
North  American  fishes.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  VIII,  pp.  72-73.     (1885.) 


237 


Indiana  University 


[Jordan 


180.  Note  on  Mr.  Carman's  paper  on  the 
American  salmon  and  trout.  In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mns.,  VIII,  pp.  81-83.  (1885.) 

187.  Identification  of  the  species  of  Cy- 
prinidae  and  Catostomidse,  described  by  Dr. 
Charles   Girard    in   Proc.   Acad.    Nat.    Sci., 
Phila.,    185G.      In   Proc.    U.   S.    Nat.   Mus., 
VIII,   pp.   118-127.      (1885.) 

188.  On    the    Etheostoma    variatum     -jf 
Kirtland.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VIII, 
pp.   163-165.      (1885.) 

189.  Note  on  Bpinephelus  nigritus.     In 
Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.   Mus.,  VIII,   pp.  208-209. 
(1885.) 

190.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  known  to 
inhabit  tne  waters  of  North  America  north 
of  the  Tropic  of  Cancer,  with  notes  on  the 
species  discovered  in  1883  and  1884.    Wash- 
ington :     Government  Printing  Office,  Oct., 
1885.      (Also   in   Rep.   U.    S.    Fish   Comm., 
XIII,  pp.  789-973.)      (1885.) 

191.  A  list  of  the  fishes  known  from  the 
Pacific  coast  of  tropical  America,  from  the 
Tropic  of  Cancer  to  Panama.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VIII,  pp.  361-394.     (1885.) 

192.  Note   on   some   Linnaean   names   of 
American  fishes.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
VIII,  pp.  394-396.     (1885.) 

193.  The  habits  and  the  value  for  food 
of  the  American  channel  catfish   (Ictalurus 
punctatus,  Kafinesque.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.,  V,  p.  34.      (1885.) 

194.  Notes    on   fishes   observed   in   Lake 
Superior.     In   Hull.   U.   S.   Fish  Comm.,   V, 
pp.  191-192.      (1885.) 

195.  The   mountain   or  salmon    trout   of 
Oregon.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  V,  p. 
310.     (1885.) 

196.  The  fisheries  and  fishery  industries 
of  the  United  States.    Prepared  through  the 
cooperation  of  the  Commissioner  of  Fisher- 
ies   and    the    Superintendent   of    the   Tenth 
Census,  by  George  Brown  Goode,  Assistant 
Director  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum,  and 
a   staff  of  associates.     Section    1,   Natural 
history  of  useful  aquatic  animals,  with  an 


atlas  of  227  plates.  Washington  :  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office,  1884  (Feb.,  1885). 
Pp.  895.  (Discussions  of  fresh-water 
fishes,  chiefly  by  David  S.  Jordan  ;  of  Pa- 
cific coast  fishes,  in  collaboration  with  C. 
H.  Gilbert.) 

197.  A  manual  of  the  vertebrates  of  the 
eastern  United  States,  including  the  region 
east  of  the   Mississippi   river  and   north   of 
the   northern    boundary   of   Nortn    Carolina 
and  Tennessee,  exclusive  of  marine  species. 
Fourth  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.     Chi- 
cago, 1885. 

198.  The  standard  natural   history,  III, 
110-173.        (Part     relating     to     soft-rayed 
fishes.)      Boston,  1885. 

199.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Arkansas, 
Indian  Territory,  and  Texas,  in  September, 
1884,  with  notes  and  descriptions.      (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  pp.  1-25.      (1886.) 

200.  Notes  on  fishes   collected  at  Beau- 
fort, North  Carolina,  with  a  revised  list  of 
the  species   known   from   that   locality.     In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    IX,    pp.    25-30. 
(1886.) 

201.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Havana, 
Cuba,   in   December,   1883,    with   notes  and 
descriptions.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IX, 
pp.  31-55.      (1886.) 

202.  A  review  of  the  genera  and  species 
of    Julidinse    found    in    American    waters. 
(Joint  author  with  Elizabeth  G.  Hughes.) 
In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  pp.  56-70. 
(1886.) 

203.  Notes   on   some   fishes   collected  at 
Pensacola,   by   Mr.   Silas   Stearns,  with   de- 
scriptions   of    one   new    species    (Chsetodon 
aya).     In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.   Mus.,  IX,  pp. 
225-229.      (1886.) 

204.  A  review  of  the   American  species 
of     Tetraodontidse.        (Joint     author     with 
Charles  L.  Edwards.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  IX,  pp.  230-247.     (1886.) 

205.  Rafinesque.       In     Pop.     Sci.     Mo., 
XXIX,   pp.  212-221.      (1886.) 


238 


Jordan^ 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


206.  A   review  of  the  American  species 
of    the    genus    Prionotus.       (Joint    author 
with  Elizabeth  G.  Hughes.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  pp.  327-338.     (1886.) 

207.  A  review  of  the   American  species 
of  Belonidap.      (Joint  author  with  W.  For- 
dice.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.,   IX,  pp. 
339-361.      (1886.) 

208.  A    review    of    Seeley's    'The    fresh- 
water   fishes    of    Europe.'      In    Dial,    June, 
1886,  pp.  34-35. 

208a.  The  duty  of  the  scholar  towards 
the  community,  being  the  baccalaureate  ad- 
dress delivered  to  the  graduating  class  of 
1886  of  Indiana  University.  Richmond,  Ind., 
1886.  Pp.  10. 

209.  A  review  of  the  'A.  O.  U.  code  and 
check-list    of    North    American    birds.'      In 
Auk,  July,  1886,  pp.  393-398. 

210.  Description    of   six   new    species    of 
fishes  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  with  notes 
on  other  species.     (Joint  author  with  B.  W. 
Evermann.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IX, 
pp.  466-476.     (1886.) 

211.  A  review  of  the  Gobiidse  of  North 
America.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigen- 
mann.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  pp. 
466-476.      (1886.) 

212.  Notes     on     typical     specimens     of 
fishes  described  by  Cuvier  and  Valenciennes, 
and  preserved  in  the  Musee  d'Histoire  Nat- 
urelle  in  Paris.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
IX,  pp.  525-546.     (1886.) 

213.  Ulrich    von    Hutten.      In    Current, 
Dec.  4  and  11,  1886. 

214.  The  origin  of  the  httest.     A  review 
of   Professor   E.    D.    Cope's    'Origin    of   the 
fittest.'     In  Dial,  March,  1887. 

215.  Thoreau  and  John  Brown.     In  Cur- 
rent, April,  1887. 

216.  A  preliminary  list  of  the  fishes  of 
the  West  Indies.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
IX,  pp.  554-608.      (1887.) 

217.  Note  on  Polynemus  californiensis  of 
Thominot.     In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.    Mus.,   X, 
p.  3:^2.     (1887.) 


218.  The  food-fishes  of  Indiana.      (Joint 
author  with   B.   W.   Evermann.)      In   Rep. 
Dept.  Agr.  Indiana  for  1886.      (1887.) 

219.  A  review  of  the  flounders  and  soles 
( Pleuronectidae )     of    America    and    Europe. 
(Joint  author  with  David  Kopp  Goss.)     In 
Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1886,  pp.  225- 
342;   pi.   i-ix.      (1887.) 

220.  A  review  of  the  sciaenoid   fishes  of 
America  and   Europe.      (Joint  author  with 
C.    II.   Eigenmann.)      In    Rep.    U.    S.   Fish 
Comm.     for    1886,    pp.    343-351 ;     pi.    i-iv. 
(1887.) 

221.  Science    sketches.      Chicago,    1887. 
Pp.  261. 

222.  The  dispersion  of  fresh-water  fishes. 
In  'Science  sketches,'  pp.  82-132.    (1887.) 

223.  Darwin.     In  'Science  sketches,'  pp. 
1/1-195.      (1887.) 

224.  The  evolution  of  the  college  curric- 
ulum.    In    'Science   sketches,'    pp.    228-260. 
(1887.) 

225.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  sent 
by  Mr.  Charles  C.  Leslie  from  Charleston, 
S.    C.      (Joint   author   with   C.    ri.    Eigen- 
mann.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  X,  pp. 
269-270.      (1887.) 

226.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Thalassophryne       (Thalassophryne      dowi) 
from   Punta  Arenas  and   Panama.      (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.,   X,   p.  388.      (1887.) 

227.  Note    on   the   'Analysis    de   la    Na- 
ture'  of  Rafinesque.      In    Proc.   U.   fc>.   Nat. 
Mus.,   X,   pp.  480-481.      (1887.) 

228.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Cal- 
lionymus     (Callionymus    bairdi)     from    the 
Gulf  of  Mexico.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
X,  pp.  501-502.     (1887.) 

229.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Xy- 
richthys   (Xyrichthus  Jessie)  from  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  X,  p. 
698.     (1887.) 

230.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes    from   South    America    ( Mycteroperca 
xenarcha ;       Cristiceps       eigenmanni).       In 


239 


Indiana  University 


[Jordan 


Proc.  Acnd.  Nat.   Sci.  Phila.,  XXXIX,  pp. 

387-388.     (1887.) 

231.  Note  on  Achirus  lorentzi.     In  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.   Sci.,  Phila.,  XXXIX,  pp.  389- 
391.     (1887.) 

232.  The   fisheries   and    fishery    interests 
of   the   United    States.      By   George   Brown 
Goode   and   a   staff   of   associates.      Section 
II.       A   geographical   review  of   the   fishery 
industries   and   fishing  communities  for  the 
year    1880.      Pp.    787.      Washington,    1887 
(issued  January,  1888).     (Part  on  fisheries 
of  California,  Oregon   and  Washington,  by 
Jordan  and  Gilbert.) 

233.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Eth- 
eostoma    (E.  longimana)    from  James  river, 
Virginia.     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila., 
XL,  p.  179.      (1888.) 

234.  On  the  generic  name  of  the  tunny. 
In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  XL,  p.  180. 
(1888.) 

235.  The   octroi  at   Issoir ;   a  city   made 
rich     by     taxation.       In     Pop.     Sci.     Mo., 
XXXIII,  pp.  433-456.      (Reprinted  in  'Sci- 
ence sketches,'  2d  ed.,  pp.  181-223,  as  'The 
fate  of  Iceodorum.)     (1888.) 

23G.     Science    sketches.      Second    edition. 
Chicago,  1888.     Pp.  27G. 

237.  Silas     Stearns.       In     Forest     and 
Stream,  Sept.  27,  1888. 

238.  A  manual  of  the  vertebrate  animals 
of    the    northern    United    States,    including 
the   district   north    and   east   of   the   Ozark 
mountains,   south    of    the   Laurentian    hills, 
north  of  the  southern  boundary  of  Virginia, 
and    east    of    the    Missouri    river,    inclusive 
of   marine  species.      Fifth   edition,   entirely 
rewritten     and    much     enlarged.       Chicago, 
1888.    Pp.  375. 

239.  Darwinism  :     A  brief  account  of  the 
Darwinian  theory  of  the  origin  of  species. 
Chicago,  1888.     Pp.  63. 

240.  On    the    occurrence    of    the    Great 
Lake  trout   (Salvelinus  namaycush)    in  the 
waters  of  British  Columbia.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  XI,  p.  58.      (1888.) 


241.  The  Spanish  missions  in  California. 
In  Cornell  Review,  Oct.,  1888. 

242.  List  of  fishes  collected  by  Alphonse 
Forrer    about    Mazatlan,    with    descriptions 
of  two   new  species.     In   Proc.  U.   S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  XI,  pp.  329-334.      (1888.) 

243.  Descriptions  of  fourteen  species  of 
fresh-water  fishes  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Fish 
Commission    in    the   summer    of    1888.      In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XI,  pp.  351-363;  pi. 
xliii-xlv.      (1888.) 

244.  List   of    fishes    now   in   the   United 
States   National   Museum,  collected   in   Nic- 
aragua by  Dr.  Louis  F.  H.  Birt.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XI,  pp.  411-416.     (1888.) 

245.  List    of    fishes    collected    at    Green 
Turtle  Cay  in  the  Bahamas  by  Charles  L. 
Edwards,    with    descriptions    of    three    new 
species.      (Joint  author  with   Charles   Har- 
vey Bollman.)      In   Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
XI,  pp.  549-553.     (1889.) 

246.  Studies    of    insect    life.      A   review 
of  Sir  John  Lubbock's  'The  senses,  instincts, 
and  intelligence  of  animals.'   In  Dial,  March, 
1889. 

247.  Description  of   new  species  of  fish 
collected  at  the  Galapagos  islands  and  along 
the  coast  of  the  United  States  of  Colombia, 
1887-1888.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XII, 
pp.  149-183.     (1889.) 

248.  A   catalogue   of    fishes   collected   at 
Port  Castries,  Saint  Lucia,  by  the  steamer 
Albatross.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XII, 
pp.  645-652.      (1889.) 

249.  Report  of  explorations  made  by  the 
U.   S.  Fish  Commission  during  the  summer 
of  1889,  in  Colorado  and  Utah,  with  an  ac- 
count   of    the    fishes    found    in    each    river 
basin  examined.    In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
IX,  pp.  1-40.     (1889.) 

250.  Report    of    an    exploration    of    the 
waters  of  the  Yellowstone  Park  made  under 
the  direction  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission. 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IX,  pp.  41-63. 
(1889.) 

251.  Description     of     the     yellow-finned 


240 


Karsten  ] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


trout  of  Twin  Lakes,  Colorado  (Salmo  my- 
kiss  macdonaldi).  (Joint  author  with  B. 
W.  Evermann. )  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 

XII,  pp.  453-454.     (1889.) 

252.  A  review  of  the  flounders  and  soles 
(Pleuronectidae)     of    America    and    Europe. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  K.  Goss. )      In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Goram.  for  1886,  XIV,  pp.  225- 
342;  9  plates.     (1889.) 

253.  A  review  of  the  species  of  Seranidae 
found  in  the  waters  of  America  and  Europe. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Rep.    U.    S.    Fish    Comm.    for    1886,    XIV, 
pp.  343-351;   4  plates.      (1889.) 

254.  Report   of   explorations   made    dur- 
ing the  summer  and  autumn  of  1888,  in  the 
Alleghany  region  of  Virginia,  North   Caro- 
lina,  and  Tennessee,   and   in   western   Indi- 
ana,  with   an   account   of   the   fishes   found 
in  each  of  the  river  basins  of  those  regions. 
In  Bull.   U.   S.   Fish  Comm.,  VIII,  pp.  97- 
173,  plates  xiii-xv.     (1889.) 

255.  A  list  of  fishes  collected  in  the  har- 
bor  of   Bahia,    Brazil,   by    the   U.    S.    Fish 
Commission  steamer  Albatross.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XIII,  pp.  313-336.     (1890.) 

256.  Description  of  a  new  darter  (Ethe- 
ostoma    tippecanoe)     from    the    Tippecanoe 
river,   Indiana.      (Joint   author  with  B.   W. 
Evermann.)      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus., 

XIII,  pp.  3-4. 

257.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  the  waters 
of  southern  Florida  by  Dr.  James  A.  Hen- 
shall,  under  the  direction  of  the  U.  S.  Fish 
Commission.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for 
1890,  VIII,  pp.  371-379.     (1890.) 

258.  Notes  on  fishes  of  the  genera  Agosia, 
Algansea,  and  Zophendum.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.,   XIII,  pp.  287-288.      (1890.) 

259.  Science  in  the  high  school.    In  Pop. 
Sci.  Mo.,  XXVI,  pp.  721-727.     (1890.) 

260.  Evolution    and   the   distribution   of 
animals.     In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  XVII,  pp.  313- 
322,  505-513.      (1890.) 

261.  The  fishes  of  the  Yellowstone  Park. 
In  Zoe,  I,  pp.  38-40.     (1890.) 


262.  On  the  fishes  described  in  Miiller's 
supplemental  volume  to  the  Systema  Naturae 
of    Linnaeus.      In    Proc.    Acad.    Nat.    Sci., 
Phila.,  XLII,  pp.  48-50.     (1890.) 

263.  Relations  of  temperature  to  verte- 
brae   among   fishes.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat. 
Mus.,  XIV.  pp.  107-120.     (1890.) 

264.  The  colors  of  letters.     In  Pop.  Sci. 
Mo.,   XXXIX,   pp.   367-373.      (1891.) 

265.  The  story   of   a  strange   land.      In 
Pop.   Sci.   Mo.,   XL,   p.   447.      (1891.) 

266.  The   Sunapee  trout   (Salvelinus  al- 
pinus    aureolus).      In    Forest    and    Stream, 
Jan.,   1891. 

267.  A  review  of   the   Labroid   fishes  of 
America  and  Europe.     In  Rep.  U.   S.  Fish 
Comm.  for  1887,  XV,  599-699.      (1891.) 


GUSTAF  E  KARSTEN,  Ph.D.  Professor  of 
Romance  Languages,  1886-1890 ;  Pro- 
fessor of  Germanic  languages,  1890- 
1903.  Now  Instructor  in  German,  Cor- 
nell University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

1.  Speech    unities    and    their    roll    in 
sound  change.     Paper  read  before  the  Mod. 
Lang.   Asso.   of  Am.   at   Philadelphia,   Dec. 
30,  1887. 

2.  Final  /  in  French  soif,  bief,  etc.    In 
Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  III,  pp.  85-88.    (1888.) 

3.  Dantesca.     Osservazioni  su  alquanti 
passaggi  della  Divina   Commedia.     In  Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  III,  pp.  119-123.     (1888.) 

4.  The    origin     of    the    suffix    re    in 
French.     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  III,  pp.  187- 
188.     (1888.) 

5.  Review  of  Neumann's  'Die  roman- 
ische    Philologie' ;     Korting's    'Encyclopaedie 
und   Methodologie    der   romanischen    Philol- 
ogie' ;   Grober's   'Grundriss  der  romanischen 
Philologie.'     In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  III,  No. 
5.     (1888.) 

6.  Review  of  the  chief  scientific  works 
on  Romance  philology  published  in  America. 
In    Litteraturblatt   f.    german.    und    roman. 
Philol.  for  1888.     No.  6. 


(17) 


241 


Indiana  University 


\_Karsten 


7.  The   third  annual   Neuphilologentag 
at  Dresden,  Germany.    In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes, 
III,  241-244.     (1888.) 

8.  Secretary's  report  on  the  work  done 
in  the  Phonetic  Section  of  Mod.  Lang.  Asso. 
of  Am.      In  Trans.   Mod.   Lang.   Asso.   Am. 
for  1889. 

9.  The    origin    and    etymology    of    the 
name   America.     In    Mod.   Lang.    Notes   for 
1889. 

10.  Review    of   J.    Ferrette's    'Ecriture 
fonetique.'    In  Victor's  Phouetische  Studien, 
Marburg,  Germany,  for  1889. 

11.  Review  of  R.   J.   Lloyd's  'Phonetic 
attraction.'       In    Phonetische     Studien     for 
1889. 

12.  The  Journal  of  Germanic  Philology 
(editor).       Bloomington,    Ind.      Vols.    I-V. 
(1897-1902.) 

13.  Fauststudien.         In       Philologische 
Studien,  1896. 

14.  On   the   Hildebrandslied.      In    Jour. 
Ger.  Phil.,  I,  No.  1.      (1897.) 


CYRUS  AMBROSE  KING,   Instructor   in   Bot- 
any, 1900-1902.     8ce  Alumni  list. 


JOHN  STERLING  KINGSLEY,  Protessor  of 
Zoology,  1887-1889.  Now  Professor  of 
Biology,  Tufts  College,  Mass. 

1.  The  development  of   the  compound 
eye  of  Crangon.     In  Jour,  of  Morph.,  I,  pp. 
49-69;  1  plate.     (1887.) 

2.  The    embryology    of    Crangon.      In 
Bull.  Essex  Inst.,  XVIII,  pp.  60 ;  2  plates. 
(1887.) 

3.  Editpr  of  the  'Standard  natural  his- 
tory.'   6  vols. 


DANIEL  KIRKWOOD,  LL.D.  Professor  of 
Mathematics,  1856-1886.  Died  1895  at 
Riverside,  Cal. 

1.     A  new  analogy  in  the  periods  and 


rotation  of  planets.     In   Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and 
Arts,  2d  ser..  IX.  pp.  359-397.     (1850.) 

2.  Law  of  rotation  of  planets.    In  Am. 
Jour.   Sci.   and   Arts.  2d  ser.,   XI,  pp.   .'19-1- 
398.     (1851.) 

3.  On   Saturn's   rings.      In  Am.  Jour. 
Sei.   and   Arts,   2d   ser.,    Xil,    pp.    109-110. 
(1851.) 

4.  On   certain   analogies    in   the   solar 
system.    In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  2d  ser., 
XIV,  pp.  210-219.      (1852.) 

5.  The     lunar     world.       In     Southern 
Presbyterian  Review,  Oct.,  1854. 

6.  An  aurora  of  1859.     In  Am.  Jour. 
Sci.  and  Arts.  2.1  ser.,  XXVIII,  pp.  396-389. 
(1859.) 

7.  Propositions   relating   to   a   particu- 
lar    curve.       In     Runkle'.s     Math.     Mo.,     I. 
(1859.) 

8.  Distances    and    magnitudes    of    the 
fixed  stars.     In  Literary  Record,  I.    (1859.) 

9.  On  the  nebular  hypothesis.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  2d  ser.,  XXX,  pp.  161- 
181.     (1860.) 

10.  Instances  of  nearly  commensurable 
periods    in    the  solar   system.      In    Runkle's 
Math.  Mo.,  II.     (1860.) 

11.  The  asteroids.     In  Literary  Record, 
II.     (1860.) 

12.  The  meteors  of  July  13,  1846.     In 
Literary  Record,  II.     (1860.) 

13.  The  new   planets.      In    New     Eng- 
lander.  XVIII.     (1860.) 

14.  November    meteors,    1860.      In    Am. 
Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts.  2d  ser..  XXXI,  p.  169. 
(1861.) 

15.  Astronomical  discoveries.     In  Liter- 
ary Record,  III.     (1861.) 

16.  On  the  probable  existence  of  undis- 
covered  planets.      In    Literary    Record,    III. 
(1861.) 

17.  Solar    phenomena.      In    New    Eng- 
lander.  XIX.   (1861.) 

18.  Articles     contributed      to      Indiana 
School  Journal  as  mathematical  editor  from 
1859  to  1863. 


Kirkwood~\ 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


19.  Orbits    of    binary    stars.      In    Am. 
Jour.   Sci.   and  Arts,  2d  ser.,   XXXVII,  p. 
233.      (1864.) 

20.  Harmonies  of  the  solar  system.     In 
Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  2d  ser.,  XXXVIII, 
pp.  1-18.     (1864.) 

21.  Planetary  distances.     In  Am.  Jour. 
Sci.  and  Arts,  2d  ser.,  XXXIX,  pp.  55-59. 
(1865.) 

22.  On  the  theory  of  meteors.     In  Proc. 
A.  A.  A.  S.  for  1866,  pp.  8-14. 

23.  The   November    meteors.      In    Iowa 
Instructor  and  School  Journal,  VII. 

24.  The    aurora    borealis    of    Feb.    20. 
1866.       In     Iowa     Instructor     and     School 
Journal,  VII. 

25.  Meteoric   astronomy.      Philadelphia, 
1867. 

26.  Asteroids    and    minor    planets.      In 
Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XII.      (1867.) 

27.  Meteor  of  July,  1867.    In  Am.  Jour. 
Sci.    and    Arts,    2d    ser.,    XLIV,    p.    288. 
(1867.) 

28.  The  meteors  of  Nov.   12,  1867.     In 
Mo.  Notices  Royal  Ast.  Soc.,  XXVIII,  p.  33. 
(1868.) 

29.  Meteors   of   November   12-14,   1868. 
In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  X. 

30.  Comets  of  1812  and  1845.     In  Am. 
Jour.    Sci.   and  Arts,   2d  ser.,   XLVIII,   pp. 
255-258.     (1869.) 

31.  Periods  of  meteoric  rings.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  2d  ser.,  XLIX,  p.  429. 
(1869.) 

32.  On  the  nebular  hypothesis  and  the 
approximate  commensurability  of  the  plan- 
etary periods.     In  Mo.   Notices   Royal  Ast. 
Soc.,   XXIX,   pp.  96-102.      (1869.) 

33.  The  meteors  of  Nov.  13-14.     In  Mo. 
Notices  Royal  Ast.   Soc.,  XXIX,  pp.  62-63. 
(1869.) 

34.  On   certain  harmonies   of  the  solar 
system.     In  Danville  Quart.  Rev.      (1869.) 

35.  On   comets  and  meteors.     In   Proc. 
Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XI,  pp.  215-220.     (1869.) 


36.  Asteroids  between  Jupiter  and  Mars. 
In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XI.     (1869.) 

37.  Periodicity  of  sun-spots.     In  Proc. 
Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XI,  pp.  94-102.     (1869.) 

38.  Periodicity     of     certain     planetary 
rings.      In    Proc.    Am.     Philos.     Soc.,    XL 
(1869.) 

39.  On  comets  and  meteors,   1st  paper. 
In  Scientific  Opinion,  March  23,  1870. 

40.  On  comets   and  meteors,  2d   paper. 
In  Scientific  Opinion,  March  30,  1870. 

41.  Mass  of  asteroids  between  Mars  and 
Jupiter.     In  Am.   Jour.    Sci.   and  Arts,   3d 
ser.,  I,  p.  71.     (1871.) 

42.  Sun-spots   of   1843.      In  Am.   Jour. 
Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  I,  p.  275.     (1871.) 

43.  Testimony    of    the   spectroscope    on 
nebular  hypothesis.     In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and 
Arts,  3d  ser.,  II,  pp.  155-156.      (1871.) 

44.  On     the    formation    and    primitive 
structure  of  the  solar  system.    In  Proc.  Am. 
Philos.  Soc.,  XII,  pp.  163-167.      (1871.) 

45.  Sidereal  systems.     In  Our  Monthly, 
III.      (1871.) 

46.  Astro-meterology.     In  Pop.  Sci  Mo., 
I,  pp.  335-339.     (1872.) 

47.  Mean   motions   of   Jupiter,    Saturn. 
Uranus,  and  Neptune.     In  Amer.  Jour.   Sci. 
and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  Ill,  pp.  208-209.     (1872.) 

48.  Meteors    of    April    30-May    1.      In 
Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  IV,  pp.  52- 
53.      (1872.) 

49.  Certain  relations  between  the  mean 
motions  of  the  perihelia  of  Jupiter,  Saturn, 
Uranus,   and  Neptune.     In  Am.   Jour.    Sci. 
and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  IV,  pp.  225-226.      (1872.) 

50.  The   antiquity   of   man.      In    Scien- 
tific American.     (1872.) 

51.  On  the  disintegration  of  comets.     In 
Nature,  VI,  p.  148.     (June  20,  1872.) 

52.  Meteors    of    April    30-May    1.     In 
Nature,  VI.     (August  8,  1872.) 

53.  On      some      remarkable      relations 
between  the  mean  motions  of  Jupiter,   Sat- 
urn,  Uranus   and   Neptune.     In   Proc.   Am. 
Philos.  Soc.,  XII,  pp.  435-436      (1872.) 


243 


Indiana  University 


\_Kirkwood 


54.  Changes    in    celestial    scenery.     In 
Our  Monthly.  IV.      (1872.) 

55.  Total  eclipses  of  the  sun.     In  Our 
Monthly,  IV.      (1S72.) 

5(5.  Comets  and  meteors.  Philadelphia, 
1873.  Pp.  97. 

57.  Meteors  of  November  14th.     In  Am. 
Jour.    Sci.    and    Arts,   3d   ser.,    VI,    p.    392. 
(1873.) 

58.  Biela's    comet.     In    Nature,    VIII, 
pp.  4-5.     (May  1,  1873.) 

59.  On  the  meteors  of  Janury  2d.     In 
Proc.  Am.   Philos.   Soc.,  XIII,  pp.  501-502. 
(1873.) 

60.  Solution  of  a  problem.     In  Analyst, 
I.     (1814.) 

01.  On  the  relative  positions  of  the  as- 
teroidal  orbits.  In  Analyst,  I.  (1874.) 

62.  Distribution    of    the    asteroids.     In 
Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.  for  1875,  pp.  74-77. 

63.  Relations    between    the    motions    of 
some   of   the   minor   planets.      In    Mo.    Not. 
Royal  Ast.  Soc.,  XXXV,  pp.  62-63.     (1875.) 

64.  Meteors    of    Nov.    14.     In    Nature, 
XII,  pp.  85-86.     (June  3,  1875.) 

65.  Reminiscences  of  William  L/enhart, 
Esq.    In  Analyst,  II.     (1875.) 

66.  Mars    and    its    satellites.     In    Pop. 
Sci.  Mo.,  XI,  p.  706-709.      (Oct.,  1877.) 

(.7.  The  meteors  of  Dec.  21,  1876.  In 
Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XXII,  pp.  75-76. 
(1877.) 

68.  Satellites  of  Mars  and  the  nebular 
hypothesis.     In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d 
ser.,  XIV,  pp.  327-328.      (1877.) 

69.  On  eight  meteoric  fireballs  seen   in 
the  United  States  from  July,  1876,  to  Feb., 
1877.     In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XVI,  pp. 
590-596.     (1877.) 

70.  Ages  of  the  sun  and  fixed  stars.     In 
Proc.   Am.   Philos.   Soc.,   XVI,  pp.   022-625. 
(1877.) 

71.  The  eclipse  of  July   29,   1878.     In 
Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XXIII.     (1878.) 

72.  November   meteors.     In   Am.   Jour. 
Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  XV,  p.  76.     (1878.) 


73.  Solar    and    sidereal    heat.      In    Am. 
Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  ser.,  XV,  pp.  291- 
293.      (1878.) 

74.  The  meteors  of  August  11,  1878.    In 
Analyst,  V.     (1878.) 

75.  Aerolitic  epoch  of  Nov.   12-13.     In 
Proc.  Am.  Philos.   Soc.,  XVII,  pp.  339-341. 
(1878.) 

76.  Cosmogony    of    LaPlace.     In    Proc. 
Am.     Philos.     Soc.,     XVIII,     pp.     324-326. 
(1879.) 

77.  Meteoric  fireballs  seen  in  U.  S.  dur- 
ing  the   year   ending   March  31,   1879.     In 
Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XVIII,  pp.  239-246. 
(1879.) 

78.  The  great  southern  comet  of  1880. 
In     Indiana     Sch.     Jour.,     XXV,     p.     449. 
(1880.) 

70.     On  the  variation  in  the  length  of  the 
day.     In  Analyst,  VII.     (1880.) 

80.  On  the  origin  of  planets.     In  Proc. 
Arf.  Philos.  Soc.,  XIX,  p.  15.     (1880.) 

81.  The  meteors  of  Nov.  13-15.    In  Pop. 
Sci.  Mo.,  XVIII,  pp.  542-544.     (Feb.,  1881.) 

82.  November  meteors.   In  Indiana  Sch. 
Jour.,  XXVI,  p.  543.      (1881.) 

83.  On  the  limit  of  planetary  stability. 
In  Analyst,  VIII.     (1881.) 

84.  Astronomical  panics.     In  Pop.   Sci. 
Mo..  XXI,  pp.  182-186.      (June,  1882.) 

85.  The    August   meteors.     In    Sidereal 
Messenger,  I,  pp.  141-143.     (Oct.,  1882.) 

80.     The  relative  ages  of  planets,  comets 
and  meteors.    In  Science,  II,  p.  12.     (1883.) 

87.  Some  facts  in  the  early  history  of 
Indiana  University.     In  Indiana  Sch.  Jour. 
XXVIII,  pp.  503-504.     (1883.) 

88.  A  large  meteor.     In   Sidereal  Mes- 
senger, II.     (1883.) 

89.  The  zone  of  asteroids  and  the  rings 
of    Saturn.      In    Proc.    Am.    Philos.    Soc., 
XXI,  pp.  203-260.     (1883.) 

90.  The  comet   of  1812  and   1883.     In 
Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  XXIV,  pp.  488-491.     (Feb., 
1884.) 


244 


Kirkwood] 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


91.  On    temporary    stars.     In    Science, 
IV,  p.  291.      (1884.) 

92.  Note  on  a  meteor.    In  Sidereal  Mes- 
senger, II.     (1884.) 

93.  Temporary  stars.     In  Proc.  A.  A.  A. 
S.  for  1884,  p.  78. 

94.  The    limit   of  stability   of   nebulous 
planets.     In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XXII, 
pp.  104-113.     (1884.) 

95.  New   telescopes   and   their   prospec- 
tive relations.     In  Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XXX, 
pp.  495-497.     (1885.) 

9G.  The  limits  of  stability  of  the  solar 
system.  In  Sidereal  Messenger,  IV,  pp.  65- 
78.  (April,  1885.) 

97.  Recently    discovered    asteroids.     In 
Sidereal  Messenger,  IV,  pp.  114-116.     (May, 
1885.) 

98.  The  comet  of  1866  and  the  meteors 
of  Nov.  14.     In  Sidereal  Messenger,  IV,  pp. 
228-230.     (Oct.,  1885.) 

99.  Commensurability    of    motions.     In 
Sidereal  Messenger,  IV,  pp.  257-259.     (Nov., 
1885.) 

100.  The  comet  of  1866  and  the  meteors 
of    Nov.    14.      In    Proc.    Am.    Philos.    Soc., 
XXII,  pp.  424-428.     (1885.) 

101.  Appleton's  Annual  American  Ency- 
clopaedia.    Articles  on  astronomy,  from  be- 
ginning to  1885. 

102.  The  comets  of  1812-1,  and  1846-IV. 
In  Sidereal  Messenger,  V,  pp.  13-14.     (Jan., 
1886.) 

103.  The    Biela     meteors.      In    Sidereal 
Messenger,  V,  p.  29.     (Jan.,  1886.) 

104.  About    comets.      In     Indiana     Sch. 
Jour.,  XXXII,  pp.  459-460.     (1887.) 

105.  Origin    of    comets.     In    Am.    Jour. 
Sci.    and    Arts,    3d    ser.,    XXXIII,    p.    50. 
(1887.) 

106.  Note  on  the  origin   of  comets.     In 
Sidereal  Messenger,  VI,   pp.   77-78.      (Feb., 
1887.) 

107.  Distribution   of   the  minor  planets. 
In  Sidereal  Messenger,  VI,  p.  116.     (March, 
1887.) 


108.  The   eccentricities   and   inclinations 
of  the  asteroidal  orbits.     In  Sidereal   Mes- 
senger, VI,  pp.  169-170.     (May,  1887.) 

109.  The  relation  of  aerolites  to  shooting 
stars.     In  Sidereal  Messenger,  VI,  pp.  248- 
250.     (Sept.,  1887.) 

110.  Relation    of    aerolites    to    shooting 
stars.      In   Proc.   Am.    Philos.    Soc.,   XXIV, 
pp.  111-112.     (1887.) 

111.  Biela's  comet  and  the  large  meteors 
of  Nov.  27-30.     In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc., 
XXIV,  pp.  242-243.     (1887.) 

112.  The  asteroids.     Philadelphia,   1888. 
Pp.  60. 

113.  Notes  on  the  progress  of  astronomy. 
In     Sidereal     Messenger,     VII,     pp.    29-30. 
(Jan.,  1888.) 

114.  The    relation    of    the    short    period 
comets  to  the  zone  of  asteroids.    In  Sidereal 
Messenger,  VII,  p.  95.     (Feb.,  1888.) 

115.  On  the  inclination  of  asteroids.     In 
Sidereal  Messenger,  VII,  pp.  177-179.   (May, 
1888.) 

116.  Note   on   279th   asteroid.     In   Side- 
real   Messenger,    VIII,    pp.    83-84.       (Feb., 
1889. ) 

117.  On  the  inclination  of  the  asteroids. 
In    Sidereal   Messenger,   VIII,   pp.   305-307. 
(Aug.,  1889.) 

118.  Notes  on  the  densities  of  the  planets. 
In  Proc.  Ast.  Soc.  Pacific,  II,  pp.  1-3.    (Jan., 
1890.) 

119.  On  the  similarity  of  certain  orbits 
in  the  zone  of  asteroids.     In  Proc.  Ast.  Soc. 
Pacific,  II,  pp.  48-49.     (Feb.,  1890.) 

120.  On    the    possible    existence   of    fire- 
balls and  the  meteors  in  the  stream  of  the 
Bielids.     In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XXVII. 

121.  On  the  inclination  of  the  asteroids. 
In  Proc.  Am.  Philos.  Soc.,  XXVII. 

122.  The  origin   of  gaps  in  the  zone  of 
asteroids.      In    Sidereal    Messenger,   X,    pp. 
194-196.     (April,  1891.) 

123.  Groups    of    asteroids.     In    Sidereal 
Messenger,  XI,  pp.  785-789.     (Oct.,  1892.) 


245 


Indiana  University 


[  Kirkwood 


124.  The   mutual    relations    between    the 
orbits  of   certain   asteroids.      In   Proc.   Am. 
Philos.  Sot-.,  XXX,  pp.  2159-270.      (1802.) 

125.  The  development   of   the  solar  sys- 
tem.    In   Sidereal  Messenger,  p.  94.     (June, 
1893.) 

12(1.  Holme's  comet;  its  probable  relation 
to  the  zone  of  asteroids.  In  Sidereal  Mes- 
senger, XII,  pp.  182-183.  (Feb.,  1893.) 

127.  The  Leonids,  or  meteors  of  Nov.  13. 
In    Sidereal    Messenger,    XII,    pp.    38G-390. 
(May,  1893.) 

128.  Relations  between  the  mean  motions 
of  Jupiter,  Saturn,  and  certain  minor  plan- 
ets.    In   Sidereal  Messenger,  XII,  pp.  302- 
303.     (April,  1893.) 

129.  Tuttle's  comet  and  the  Perseids  or 
August    meteors.      In    Sidereal    Messenger, 
XII,  pp.  789-792.     (Nov.,  1893.) 


CHARLES  TOBIAS  KNIPP,  Instructor  in  Phys- 
ics, 1893-1900;  Assistant  Professor, 
1900-1903.  Sec  Alumni  list. 


JOHN  HntAM  LATHUOP,  LL.D.  President  of 
the  University,  1859-60.  Died,  1866,  at 
Columbia,  Mo. 

1.  Inaugural  address,  as  fourth  presi- 
dent of  Indiana  University.  Indianapolis, 
1861.  Pp.  32. 


THOMAS  McCABE,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Ger- 
manic Languages  and  Literature.  1889- 
1890.  Died  Feb.  22,  1891,  at  Bryn 
Mawr,  Pa. 

1,  The  Geste  of  Auberi   le  Bourgoing. 
In  Trans.  Mod.  Lang.   Asso.  for  1889,   IV, 
No.   1. 

2.  Review     of     Super's     'Preparatory 
French  reader.'     In  Mod.  Lang.   Notes,  IV, 
pp.  26-27.     (1889.) 


3.  Arsene    Darmesteter ;    an    obituary. 
In  Mod.  Lang.  Notes,  IV,  p.  95.     (1889.) 

4.  Review   of  Grober's  'Grundriss  der 
Romanischen    Philologie.'      In    Nation,    for 
May  9,  1889. 

5.  Review   of   C.    Fontaine's   'Les   Po- 
etes   frane.ais   du   XlXme  siecle.'     In   Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  V,  p.  108.     (1890.) 


DAVID  MCDONALD,  Professor  of  Law,  1841- 

1852. 

1.  Address  on  the  study  of  law,  deliv- 
ered  in   the   chapel   of   Indiana   University, 
Dec.  5.  1842.     Bloomington,  Ind.,  1843.     Pp. 
22. 

2.  Treatise  on  the  justices  of  the  peace 
and  constables  in  Indiana.    Cincinnati,  1857. 
Pp.  1063. 

3.  Many  judicial  opinions,  in  Reports 
for  the  U.  S.  courts  for  the  7th  circuit. 


JOHN  ERNST  MATZKE,  Ph.D.  Professor  of 
Romance  Languages,  1890-1891.  Now 
Professor  of  Romanic  Languages,  Le- 
land  Stanford  Junior  University,  Stan- 
ford University,  Cal. 

1.  The    historical    Hernani.      In    Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  VI,  pp.  37-41.      (1891.) 

2.  Some  remarks  on  the  development  of 
ct    in    the    Romance    languages.      In    Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  VI,  pp.  136-139.     (1891.) 

3.  Study  of  the  versification  and  rimes 
in  Hugo's  Hernani.     In  Mod.   Lang.  Notes, 
VI,  pp.  168-171.     (1891.) 

4.  Victor  Hugo's  Hernani,  with  intro- 
duction  and   English   notes.      Boston,   1891. 
Pp.  228. 


HAMILTON  BYRON  MOORE,  Instructor  in 
English,  1898-1901;  Assistant  Profes- 
sor, 1901-1903.  See  Alumni  list. 


246 


Bibliography :     Former  Faculty 


SAIIAII  PARKE  MORRISON,  Adjunct  Proft-ssoi 
of  English  Literature,  1873-75.  See 
Alumni  list. 


JOHN  FLESHER  NEWSOM,  Instructor  in  Ge- 
ology, 1894-96 ;  Assistant  Professor, 
189G-99.  See  Alumni  list. 


CYRUS  NUTT,  D.D.,  LL.D.  President  of  the 
University,  1860-1875.  Died  Aug.  24, 
1875,  at  Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Baccalaureate  sermon   to  the  grad- 
uating class  of  the  Indiana  State  University, 
June  23,  1861.     Indianapolis,  1861.     Pp.  25. 

2.  Baccalaureate  sermon  to  the  grad- 
uating  class   of   Indiana   University,    1862. 
Cincinnati,  1862. 

3.  Baccalaureate  sermon   to  the  grad- 
uating  class    of   Indiana    University,    1863. 
Cincinnati,  1863. 

4.  Prayer  gauge ;    a  sermon.     Cincin- 
nati, 1874.     Pp.  19. 


RICHARD  OWEN,  LL.D.  Professor  of  Nat- 
ural Philosophy  and  Chemistry,  1863- 
1867 :  Professor  of  Natural  Science  and 
Chemistry,  1867-1879.  Died  March  25, 
1890,  at  New  Harmony,  Ind. 

1.  Keport     on     geological     survey     of 
Wisconsin,    Iowa,    and   Minnesota.      (Joint 
author  with  David  Dale  Owen.)      Philadel- 
phia, 1852.     Pp.  xxxviii,  638. 

2.  Key    to   the   geology   of   the   globe. 
Boston,  1857.     Pp.  256. 

3.  Report   on    a   geological    reconnais- 
sance   of    Indiana,    made    during    the    years 
1859,  and  1860,  under  the  direction  of  the 
late  David  Dale  Owen.     Indianapolis,  1862. 
Pp.  xvi,  368. 

4.  On  quatenery  rock  salt  deposits  in 


Louisiana.     In  Trans.  St.  Louis  Acad.  Sci., 
II,  pp.  250-252.     (1868.) 

5.  Remarks  on  E.  W.   Hilgard's  'Geo- 
logical history  of  the  Gulf  of   Mexico.'     In 
Am.  Nat.,  V,  pp.  522-523.     (1871.) 

6.  Contribution   to   physiographic   and 
dynamical  geology,  involving  the  discussion 
of   terrestrial   magnetism.      In   Proc.   A.   A. 
A.  S.,  XX,  pp.  208-216.      (1872.) 

7.  Arkansas  geological  formations.     In 
Macfarlane's    Geological    R.    R.    Guide    for 
1879,  p.  206. 

8.  The    law    of    land-forming    on    our 
globe.      In   Proc.   A.   A.  A.    S.,   XXIX,  pp. 
437-446.      (1881.) 

9.  On  the  unification  of  geological  no- 
menclature.     In    Science,    II,    pp.    438-440. 
(1881.) 

10.  R6surae  d'un  rapport  sur  1'unifica- 
tion  de  la  nomenclature  geologique.    In  Con- 
gres  G6ol.  Internat.,  Compte  Rendu,  2d  ses- 
sion, pp.  623-626.     Boulogne,  1882. 

11.  Contribution    to   seismology.      (Ab- 
stract.)    In  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.,  XXXI,  pp. 
329-336.      (1883.) 

12.  Law    of    fracture    or    fissuring,    ap- 
plied to  inorganic  and  organic  matter.     In 
Proc.    A.    A.    A.    S.,    XXXI,    pp.    337-344. 
(1883.) 

13.  The  earth's  orographic  framework  ; 
its  seismology  and  geology.     In  Proc.  A.  A. 
A.  S.,  XXXII,  pp.  253-256.      (1884.) 

14.  The  continental  type,  or  normal  oro- 
graphy and  geology  of  continents.     In  Proc. 
A.  A.  A.  S.,  XXXII,  pp.  256-260.     (1884.) 

15.  British  earthquakes  and  their  seis- 
mic relations.     (Abstract.)     In  Proc.  A.  A. 
A.  S.,  XXXIII,  pp.  438-443.     (1885.) 

16.  Arkansas    (in    part).      In    Macfar- 
lane's  Geol.    R.    R.   Guide,   2d   edition,    for 
1890,  pp.  406-407. 


FREDERICK  AUSTIN  OGG,  Instructor  in  His- 
tory, 1902-1903.     See  Alumni  list. 


247 


Indiana  University 


'terce 


GEORGE  JAMES  PIERCE,  Assistant  Professor 
of  Botany,  1890-1897.  Now  Associate 
Professor  of  Plant  Pnysiology,  Leland 
Stanford  Junior  University,  Stanford 
University.  Cal. 

1.  Certain   changes   in   the   pith   cells, 
preliminary   to  the   formation  of  cavities  in 
the    stems    of    grasses.      In    Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.  for  1896. 

2.  The  microscopic  examination  of  cer- 
tain drinking  waters.      (Joint  author  with 
F.  M.  Andrews  and  A.  C.  Life.)     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1896. 

3.  Review   of   F.    W.    Keeble's   paper, 
'Observations   on    the   Loranthacese   of   Cey- 
lon.'    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  August,   1896. 


JAMES  P  PORTER,  Instructor  in  Psychology, 
1900-1903.    See  Alumni  list. 


ERNEST  WILLIAM  RETTGER,  Instructor  in 
Mathematics,  1898-1900.  Sec  Alumni 
list. 


HERBERT    GILSON    REDDICK,    Instructor    in 
Chemistry,  1897-1899.    See  Alumni  list. 


RUFUS  BYRAM  RICHARDSON,  Ph.D.  Pro- 
fessor of  Greek,  1880-1882.  Recently 
director  of  American  School  of  Clas- 
sical Studies,  Athens,  Greece.  New 
York  City. 


1.     Andersonville. 
(1881.) 


In  New  Englander. 


EDWARD  ALSWORTH  Ross,  Professor  of  Eco- 
nomics, 1891-1892.  Now  Professor  of 
Sociology,  University  of  Nebraska,  Lin- 
coln, Neb. 

1.     Turning  toward  Nirvana.   In  Arena, 
IV,  pp.  736-743.     (Nov.,  1891.) 


2.  Sinking  funds.     In  Pub.  Am.  Econ. 
Asso.,  VII,  p.  10(5.     (1892.)      ' 

3.  A  new  canon  of  taxation.     In  Pol. 
Sci.  Quart..  VII,  pp.  585-597.     (Dec.,  1892.) 


EDWARD  EARNEST  RUBY,  Tutor  in  Greek, 
1897-98;  Tutor  in  French,  1898-99;  In- 
structor in  French,  1901-1902.  See 
Alumni  list. 


HARRY  FLETCHER  SCOTT,  Tutor  in  Latin, 
1899.  Now  Associate  Instructor  in 
Latin,  University  High  School,  Chicago. 

1.     Revision    of   J.    D.    S.    Riggs's   'In 
Latinum.'     Chicago,  1899. 


JAMES  R.  SLONAKER,  Ph.D.  Instructor  in 
Zoology,  1896-1899.  Now  Assistant 
Professor  of  Physiology,  Leland  Stan- 
ford Junior  University,  Stanford  Uni- 
versity, Cal. 

1.  A  comparative  study  of  the  point  of 
acute  vision  in  the  vertebrates.   In  Am.  Nat., 
XXX,  pp  24-32.     (Jan.,  1896.) 

2.  A  comparative  study  of  the  area  of 
acute  vision  in  the  vertebrates.     In  Jour,  of 
Morph.,  XIII,  pp.  445-502.     (May.  1897.) 

3.  The  fovea.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1896,  pp.  304-310. 

4.  A  method  of  preserving  the  eye  for 
sectioning,  or  for  demonstrating  the  area  of 
acute  vision.     In  Jour.  Applied  Microscopy, 
I,  p.  18.     (Feb.,  1896.) 

5.  The  eye  of  the  Mammoth  Cave  rat. 
In   Proc.   Indiana   Acad.   Sci.   for   1898,   pp. 
255-257. 


WILLIAM     WESLEY     SPANGLER,     Librarian, 
1880-1893.    Sec  Alumni  list. 


248 


Wylie} 


Bibliography:     Former  Faculty 


EDGAR  HOWARD  STURTEVANT,  Tutor  in 
Latin,  1895-98;  Instructor,  1901-1902. 
See  Alumni  list. 


JOSEPH  SWAIN,  Instructor  in  Zoology  and 
Mathematics,  1883-85;  Professor  of 
Mathematics,  1886-91 ;  President  of  the 
University,  1893-1902.  tiee  Alumni  list. 


FREDERICK  WILSON  TRUSCOTT,  Instructor  in 
German,  1891-93.     See  Alumni  list. 


ALBERT     BRENNUS     ULREY,     Instructor    in 
Zoology,  1892.     See  Alumni  list. 


THOMAS  CARLTON  VAN  NUYS,  M.D.     Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry,  1874-1895. 

1.  Analysis    of    water   from    the   deep 
wells    in    Indianapolis.      In    Rep.    Indiana 
Board  of  Health  for  1883. 

2.  Apparatus  for  the  estimation  of  car- 
bonic acid  in  the  air.    In  Amer.  Chem.  Jour., 
VIII,  pp.  190,  315.     (1886.) 

3.  Estimation  of  carbonic  acid  in  the 
air.     (Joint  author  with  B.  F.  Adams,  Jr.) 
In  Amer.  Chem.  Jour.,  IX,  p.  64.      (1887.) 

4.  Chemical    analysis    of    healthy    and 
diseased    urine.      Philadelphia,    1888.      Pp. 
188 ;  39  cuts. 

5.  A  method  for  the  estimation  of  al- 
bumin in  urine.      (Joint  author  with  R.  E. 
Lyons.)       In    Amer.    Chem.   Jour.,    XII,   pp. 
336-352.     (1890.) 

6.  Suggestions  to  teachers  of  science  or 
mathematics   in  the  high  school.     In   Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.,  1891,  p.  6. 

7.  Carbon      di-oxide      in      the      urine. 
(Joint  author  with  R.  E.  Lyons.)     In  Amer. 
Chem.  Jour.,  XIV,  p.  14.     (1892.) 

8.  Analysis  of  certain  Indiana  mineral 
waters.     In  Rep.  State  Geol.  of  Indiana  for 
1901,  pp.  71,  80,  93,  151. 


ARTHUR  BURNHAM  WOODFORD,  Ph.D.  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  Social  Science  and 
Economics  and  Instructor  in  History, 
1885-1886;  Professor  of  Social  Science 
and  Economics,  1886-1889.  Now  In- 
structor, Hopkins  Grammar  School, 
New  Haven,  Conn. 

1.  Recent    economic    discussion.      Re- 
view of  books  and   pamphlets  by   Denslow, 
Ely,    Ingram    and    others.      In   Dial,    Nov., 
1888. 

2.  Review    of    Karl    Marx's    'Capital.' 
In  Dial,  March,  1889. 

3.  Review  of  Marshall's  'Principles  of 
economics,'  Vol.  I.     In  Dial,  Oct.,  1891. 


ANDREW  WYLIE,  D.D.  President  of  the  Uni- 
versity, 1829-1851.  Died  Nov.  11,  1851, 
at  Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  An  English  grammar.    Washington, 
Pa.,  1817. 

2.  Religion  and  state,  not  church  and 
state  ;    a  sermon  delivered  July  4,  1830,  at 
Bloomingtou,  Ind.     Bloomington,  Ind.,  1830. 
Pp.  16. 

3.  A  discourse  delivered  before  the  In- 
diana    Historical     Society.        Indianapolis, 
1831.     Pp.  26. 

4.  An   address  delivered  at  Blooming- 
ton,  Oct.  29,  1829.     Indianapolis,  1833.    Pp. 
30. 

5.  An  address  delivered  to  the  gradu- 
ates in  Indiana  College.     Bloomington,  Ind., 
1833. 

6.  Baccalaureate  delivered  at  the  fifth 
commencement  of  Indiana  College,  Septem- 
ber 24,  1834.     Bloomington,  Ind.,  1834.     Pp. 
11. 

7.  An    eulogy    on    Lafayette.     Cincin- 
nati, 1835.     Pp.  32. 

8.  The    propriety    of    retaining    Greek 
and  Roman  classics  in  their  place  as  a  part 
of  study  necessary  in  the  course  of  a  liberal 


249 


Indiana  University 


[  Yoder 


education.  An  address  delivered  at  Craw- 
fordsville,  I  ml.,  July,  1838.  Bloomington, 
Ind.,  1838. 

9.  Address  to  the  citizens  of  Monroe 
count}'  and  to  the  members  of  the  County 
Lyceum.  Bloomington,  Ind.,  1840.  Pp.  26. 

10.  Sectarianism   is  heresy.     Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1840.     Pp.  132. 

11.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior class  of  Indiana  University,  at  the  late 
commencement.  September,  1841.    Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1841.    Pp.  24. 

12.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior   class,    on    the    day    of    commencement, 
1843.    Bloomington,  Ind.,  1843.     Pp.  19. 

13.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior class  of  Indiana  University,  at  the  late 
commencement.  September,  1845.    Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1845.    Pp.  18. 

14.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior  class   of    1840,    of    Indiana    University, 
Bloomington,  Ind.,  1846.     Pp.  22. 

15.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior class  of  Indiana  University,  at  the  late 
commencement,  September,  1847.    Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1847.     Pp.  22. 


16.  Baccalaureate,  addressed  to  the  sen- 
ior class  of  Indiana  University,  at  the  late 
commencement,    August,     1850.      Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1850.    Pp.  23. 

17.  The  individual ;    a  baccalaureate  de- 
livered to   the  class  of  seniors  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  Indiana  University,  Aug. 
13,  1851.    Indianapolis,  1851.    Pp.  24. 

18.  Numerous  sermons  and  translations 
from  Plato.     In  Equator. 


THEOPHILTJS  ADAM  WYLIE,  LL.D.  Profes- 
sor of  Natural  Philosophy,  1837-1852; 
1854-1886;  Emeritus  Professor  of  Nat- 
ural Philosophy,  1886-95.  ined  June 
9,  1895,  at  Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Baccalaureate  discourse  to  the  grad- 
uating  class   of    Indiana   University,    1859- 
Indianapolis,  1859.     Pp.  30. 

2.  Andrew  Wylie,  D.D.,  first  President 
of    Indiana    University.      In    Indiana    Sch. 
Jour.,  XIII,  pp.  175-180.     (May,  1868.) 


PETER  A.  YODER,   Instructor  in  Chemistry, 
1894-96.    Sec  Alumni  list. 


250 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  ALUMNI 


***The  list  which  follows  is  intended  to  include  all  books,  pamphlets  and  articles 
(other  than  newspaper  articles)  published  by  alumni  and  students  of  Indiana  University; 
but  persons  connected  with  the  University  only  by  the  receipt  of  an  honorary  degree  have 
been  omitted  from  this  list.  Degrees  conferred  by  this  University  are  indicated  by  add- 
ing the  year  in  which  conferred  ;  where  the  year  is  not  given,  it  is  to  be  understood  that 
the  degree  was  taken  elsewhere. 


BENJAMIN    FRANKLIN    ADAMS,    JR.,    A.B. 
(1883).     Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Analysis   of   oolitic  limestone    (buff 
and  blue)  from  Dunn  &  Dunn's  quarry.    In 
Rep.    Indiana    Geol.    Surv.    for    1881,    pp. 
32-33. 

2.  Estimation  of  carbonic  acid  in  the 
air.     (Joint  author  with  T.  C.  Van  Niiys.) 
In  Am.  Chem.  Jour.,  IX,  p.  64. 


ROBERT  JUDSON  ALEY,  A.B.    (1888),  A.M. 
(1890),  Ph.D.    See  Faculty  list. 


FRANK    MARION    ANDREWS,    A.B.     (1894), 
A.M.   (1895),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


CHARLES     ELLSWORTH     ATKINSON,     A.B. 
(1897).     Kokomo,  Ind. 

1.  Why     study     music?       In     College 
Index  for  1892. 

2.  Christ    in    his   sanctum    sanctorum. 
1903.     Pp.  18 ;  1  plate. 

3.  Spirit   life.     In   Christ.   Advoc.   for 
1904. 

4.  Upon    what    rests    the   stability    of 
truth?    Pp.  100.     (In  press.) 


SAMUEL    WEIR    AXTELL,     LL.B.       (1874).- 
Hoopeston,  111. 

1.  The    secret    told,    a    text-book    of 
psychic  healing.    Hoopeston,  111.    Pp.  250. 

2.  Know  thyself,  from  a  mental  science 
standpoint.     Hoopeston,  111.     Pp.  70. 

ORLAN    FRANKLIN    BAKER,   LL.B.    (1864).. 
Died  Sept.  9,  1888,  at  Vincennes,  Ind. 

1.  The   primitive  dwellers:    a   history 
of  the  population,  aboriginal  and  colonial. 

2.  Annals  of  Vincennes. 


DAVID  DEMAREE  BANTA,  B.S.  (1855)  ; 
LL.B.  (1857)  ;  LL.D.  Dean  of  the, 
School  of  Law,  Indiana  University,. 
1890-1896.  Died  April  9,  1896,  at 
Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  A  historical  sketch  of  Johnson  coun- 
ty, Indiana.     Chicago,  1881.     Pp.  170. 

2.  Making    a    neighborhood ;     an    ad- 
dress delivered  at  the  Shiloh  reunion,  May 
26,  1887.     Franklin,  Ind.     Pp.  49. 

3.  The   Indiana   Seminary.     In  T.   A.. 
Wylie's  'Indiana  University,  its  history  from 
1820  to  1900,'  pp.  5-37. 

4.  A     history     of     the     Presbyteriani 
church  of  Franklin,  Ind. 


251 


Indiana  University 


\_Banta 


•GEORGE    BANTA,    A.B.    (1876). 
Wis. 


Menasha, 


1.  Flying  leaves  :  being  a  collection  of 
poems,  stories,  articles,  etc.,  of  various  mem- 
bers of  tne  Banta  and  Pleasants  families. 
Menasha,  Wis.  Pp.  300. 


EARL  BARNES,  A.B.  (1890),  M.S.  Pro- 
fessor of  European  History,  Indiana 
University,  1889-1890.  Now  editor  and 
lecturer,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

1.  Studies  in  education.     First  series. 
;  Stanford  University,  1896-1897.    Pp.  400. 

2.  Sheldon's  studies   in  American  his- 
tory.     (Joint    author   with    Mary    Sheldon 
Barnes.)      Boston,  1898    (Revised  edition). 
Pp.  x,  433. 

3.  Studies  in  education.    Second  series. 
Philadelphia,  1902.    Pp.  400. 


_FRED  HENRY  BATMAN,  A.B.    (1901).     Chi- 
cago. 

1.  Pneumococcal  bronchiolitis  (capil- 
lary bronchitis).  (Joint  author  with  C.  P. 
•  ClarK.)  In  Jour,  of  Infectious  Diseases,  I, 
-pp.  229-235.  (March  19,  1904.) 


•CHARLES   ORVILLE   BECHTOL,   A.B.    (1898), 
M.D.     Huntington,  Ind. 


1. 

-cast. 
1903. 


An  easily  detachable  plaster-of-paris 
In   Jour.    Am.   Med.   Asso.,   Sept.   5, 


•CHARLES  HENRY  BEESON,  A.B.  (1893), 
A.M.  (1895).  Tutor  in  Latin,  Indiana 
University,  1894-95 ;  Instructor  in 
Latin,  1895-96.  Now  teacher  of  Latin, 
High  School,  Peoria,  111. 

1.     Second  Latin  book   (Intercollegiate 


Latin  series.)      (Joint  author  with  Frank  J. 
Miller.)     Chicago,  1902.    Pp.  644. 

2.  Second  Latin  book.  (Text  edition.) 
(Joint  author  with  Frank  J.  Miller.)  Chi- 
cago, 1902.  Pp.  178. 


SANFORD  BELL,  A.B.  (1899),  A.M.  (1900). 
Assistant  Professor  of  Pedagogy,  Indi- 
ana University,  1898-1900.  Now  Pro- 
fessor of  Education,  University  of  Colo- 
rado, Boulder,  Colo. 

1.  Methods  of  observing  children.     In 
Child-Study  Mo.,  Ill,  pp.  578-584.      (April, 
1898.) 

2.  A  study  of  the  teacher's  influence. 
In    Ped.    Sem.,    VII,    pp.    492-525.       (Dec., 
1900.) 

3.  An    educational    object-lesson.      In 
Ped.  Sem.,  IX,  pp.  237-247.     (June,  1902.) 

4.  A  preliminary  study  of  the  emotion 
of  love   between   the  sexes.      In  Am.   Jour. 
Psych.,  XIII,  pp.  325-354.     (July,  1902.) 

5.  The  significance  of  activity  in  child 
life.      In    Independent,    LIV,    pp.    911-914. 
(April  16,  1903.) 

(>.  An  introductory  study  in  the  psy- 
chology of  foods.  In  Am.  Jour.  Psych., 
1904. 


LEE  FENT  BENNETT,  A.B.  (1898).  Profes- 
sor of  Geology  and  Mineralogy,  North- 
ern Indiana  Normal  School,  Valparaiso, 
Ind. 

1.  Four  comparative  cross  sections  of 
the  Knobstone  group  in  Indiana.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   1897,   pp.  258-262; 
1  plate. 

2.  Notes  on  the  eastern  escarpment  of 
the    Knobstone    formation    in    Indiana.     In 
Proc.  Indian  n  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  283- 
287;  1  plate. 

3.  Head-waters  of  Salt  creek  in  Porter 
county,   Ind.     In  Proc.    Indiana  Acad.   Sci. 
for  1899,  pp.  164-166 ;  1  plate. 


252 


Blotch  ley  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


4.     Rocks    and 
1903.     Pp.  83. 


minerals.      Valparaiso, 


WILLIS  STANLEY  BLATCHLEY,  A.B.  (1887), 
A.M.  (1891).  State  Geologist  of  Indi- 
ana, Indianapolis. 

1.  On    the    American    species    of    the 
genus   Umbra.     In  Proc.   Phila.   Acad.    Sci. 
for  1885,  pp.  12-13. 

2.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Pimephales.     In  Proc.  Phila.  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1885,  pp.  63-71. 

3.  On    the    genus    Aphredoderus.      In 
Proc.   Phila.   Acad.   Sci.   for  1885,  pp.   136- 
137. 

4.  A   gnatcatcher's   strategy.      In   Au- 
dubon  Magazine,  March,  1888. 

5.  Some       Indiana       Acrididae.         In 
Canadian    Ent.,    XXIII,    pp.    74-81,    98-100 
(1891)  ;  XXIV,  pp.  28-34    (1892)  ;  XXVI, 
pp.    217-222,    241-245    (1894)  :     XXX,    pp. 
54-64  (1898). 

6.  Notes  on   the  batrachians  and  rep- 
tiles of  Vigo  county,  Ind.     I.     In  Jour.  Cin- 
cinnati   Soc.    Nat.    Hist,    XIV,    pp.    23-35. 
(1891.) 

7.  Entomologizing  in  Mexico.     In  Ent. 
News,  pp.  111-114,  131-134.     (1892.) 

8.  Cnicus   discolor   as   an   insect   trap. 
In  Canadian  Ent.,  pp.  310-311.     (1892.) 

9.  The  Gryllidae  of  Indiana.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  pp.  126-144. 

10.  A  catalogue  of  the  butterflies  known 
to   occur    in    Indiana.      In    17th    Ann.    Rep. 
Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Hist,  for  1893, 
pp.  365-408. 

11.  Some  new  Locustidse  from  Indiana. 
In  Canadian  Ent.,  XV,  pp.  89-93.     (1893.) 

12.  On  a  collection  of  batrachians  and 
reptiles  from   Mount  Orizaba,  Mexico,  with 
descriptions  of  two  new  species.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  37-42.      (1893.) 

13.  The  Locustidse  of  Indiana.   In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  92-153. 


14.  The  Blattidae  of  Indiana.  In  Proc.- 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  153-165. 

J5.  Notes  on  the  winter  insect  fauna  of 
Vigo  county,  Indiana.  In  Psyche,  June, 

1895,  pp.  247-250;   August,   1895,   pp.  267- 
270;    Sept.,  1895,  pp.  279-283;   Feb.,   1896, 
pp.  336-340 ;  May,  1896,  pp.  379-381 ;  July, 

1896,  pp.  399-401  ;  Oct.,  1896,  pp.  434-437 ; 
Dec.,  1896,  pp.  455-458. 

16.  A  preliminary  report  on   the  clays 
and  clay  industries  of  the  coal  bearing  coun- 
ties of  Indiana.    In  20th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana 
Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  1895,  pp.  23- 
185,  4  plates.     (1896.) 

17.  Insects  in  general  and  the  Orthop- 
tera   of   Indiana   in    particular.      In    Trans. 
Indiana  Hort.  Soc.  for  1896,  pp.  1-23. 

18.  How  plants  and  animals  spend  the- 
winter.     In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  LI,  pp.  496-507. 
(Feb.,  1897.) 

19.  The   natural   resources  of   Indiana.- 
In  21st  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and 
Nat.  Res.  for  1896,  p.  1-25.     (1897.) 

20.  The  petroleum  industry  in  Indiana. 
In  21st  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and 
Nat.  Res.  for  1896,  pp.  27-96,  1  plate,  1  map. 
(1897.) 

21.  Indiana  caves  and  their  fauna.     In 
21st  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat, 
Res.  for  1896.  pp.  122-212,  9  plates.    (1897.) 

22.  A    catalogue     of     the    uncultivated 
ferns  and  fern  allies  and  the  flowering  plants 
of  Vigo  county,  Indiana.     In  21st  Ann.  Rep. 
Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  1896, 
pp.  577-708.     (1897.) 

23.  Notes  on  some  phanerogams  new  or 
rare  to  the  State.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  130-143. 

24.  Review    of     Samuel    H.    Scudder's 
'Revision   of   the   Melanopli.'      In   Canadian 
Ent.,  March,  1898. 

25.  Two     new     Melanopli     from     Les 
Cheneaux    Islands,    Michigan.      In    Psyche, 
April,  1898,  pp.  195-197. 

26.  The    geology    of    Lake    and    Porter 
counties,  Indiana.     In  22d  Ann.  Rep.  Indi- 


253 


Indiana  University 


[B latch  ley 


.ana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  185)7,  pp. 
-25-104,  1  map.     (1898.) 

27.  The    clays    and    clay    industries    of 
northwestern    Indiana.     In  22d   Ann.    Rep. 
Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  1897, 
pp.  106-153,  1  plate.     (1898.) 

28.  The  petroleum  industry  in  Indiana 
in  1897.     In  22d  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 

•Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  1897,  pp.   155-181. 
(1S98.) 

29.  Gleanings   from   nature.      Indianap- 
olis, 1899.     Pp.  348.     Illustrated. 

30.  The   natural   resources   of    Indiana. 
In  24th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and 
Nat.  Res.  for  1899,  pp.  3-40.     (1900.) 

31.  Notes  on  the  batrachians  and  rep- 
tiles of  Vigo  county,  Indiana.     II.     In  24th 
Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for 
1900,  pp.  537-552. 

32.  On  the  species  of  Nemobius  known 
to  occur   in   Indiana.     In   Psyche,    IX,   pp. 
51-54.      (1900.) 

33.  Portland  cement ;   its  history,  uses, 
composition,  process  of  manufacture,  meth- 
ods of  testing,  etc.     In  25th  Ann.  Rep.  In- 
diana  Dept.  Geol.   and  Nat.   Res.   for   1900, 
pp.  1-30,  4  plates.     (1901.) 

34.  The  lakes  of  northern  Indiana  and 
their  associated  marl  deposits.      (Joint  au- 
thor with  Geo.  II.  Ashley.)      In  25th  Ann. 
Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for 
1900,  pp.  31-121.     Illustrated.      (1901.) 

35.  Oolite   and   oolitic   stone   for   Port- 
land  cement    manufacture.      In    25th    Ann. 
Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for 
1900,  pp.  322-330,  1  plate.      (1901.) 

36.  The  petroleum  industry  in  Indiana 
in  1900.     In  25th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 
•Geol.   and  Nat.  Res.  for  1900,  pp.  481-527. 

(1901.) 

37.  On  a  small  collection  of  batrachians 
and  reptiles,  with  descriptions  of  two  new 
species.     In  25th  Ann.  Rep.   Indiana  Dept. 
•Geol.   and  Nat.   Res.   for  1900,  pp.   759-763. 
41901.) 


38.  What  the  teacher  of  science  can  do 
to   make  the  teaching  of  science  in  second- 
ary  schools   more   popular.      In   Proc.    Nat. 
Educ.  Assoc.  for  1901,  pp.  777-784. 

39.  A  nature-wooing  at  Ormond  by  the 
sea.     Indianapolis,  1902.     Pp.  245.     Illus- 
trated. 

40.  The     mineral    waters    of     Indiana. 
In  26th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and 
Nat.   Res.    for    1901,    pp.    1-158,    19   plates. 
(1902.) 

41.  The  petroleum  industry  in   Indiana 
in  1901.     In  26th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 
Geol.  and  Nat.   Res.  for  1901,  pp.  303-331. 
(1902.) 

42.  Gold  and  diamonds  in  Indiana.     In 
27th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat. 
Res.  for  1902,  pp.   11-47,  4  plates,  2  maps. 
(1903.) 

43.  The     orthoptera     of     Indiana.       In 
27th    Ann.    Rep.    Indiana    Dept.    Geol.   and 
Nat.  Res.  for  1902,  pp.  123-471.    Illustrated. 
(1903.) 

44.  The  petroleum  industry  in   Indiana 
in  1903.     In  27th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 
Geol.  and  Nat.   Res.  for  1902,  pp.   571-576. 
(1903.) 

45.  On   some  mollusca  known   to  occur 
in    Indiana.      A    supplementary    paper    to 
Gall's  catalogue.     (Joint  author  with  L.  B. 
Daniels.)     In  27th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 
Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.   for  1902,  pp.  517-628. 
Illustrated.      (1903.) 

46.  The  petroleum  industry   in  Indiana 
in  1903.     In  28th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana  Dept. 
Geol.  and   Nat.   Res.   for  1903,  pp.  78-209. 
(1904.) 

47.  The    lime    industry    in    Indiana    in 
1903.     In    2Sth    Ann.    Rep.     Indiana    Dept. 
Geol.    and    Nat.    Res.,    1903,    pp.    211-257. 
(1904.) 

48.  The  Indiana  of  Nature :   its  evolu- 
tion.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903. 
(In  press.) 


254 


Bollman 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


EUGENE  WILLIAM  BOHANNON,  A.B.  (1890), 
A.M.  (1892).  President  State  Normal 
School,  Duluth,  Minn. 

1.  Plato   and   education.      In    Indiana 
Sch.   Jonr.,   XXXIV,    pp.   535-542.      (July, 
1889.) 

2.  Peculiar    and    exceptional   children. 
In  Ped.  Sem.,  IV.  pp.  3-00.     (Oct.,  1896.) 

3.  The  only  child  in  a  family.     In  Ped. 
Sem.,  V,  pp.  475-496.      (April,  1898.) 

4.  The  undue  emphasis  of  method.  In 
Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  1-16.     (Jan., 
1899.) 


MARIE  BOISEN.     Sec  Mrs.  Morton  C.  Brad- 
ley. 

CHARLES  HARVEY  BOLLMAN,  A.B.    (1889). 
Died  July  13,  1889,  at  Waycross,  Ga. 

1.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the  Allegheny  river.     (Joint  author  with  B. 
W.   Evermann.)      In  New  York  Acad.   Sci. 
for  1886,  pp.  335-340. 

2.  A  list  of  fishes  observed  in  the  vi- 
cinity of  Brookville,  Franklin  county,   Indi- 
ana.     In    Bull.    Brookville    Soc.    Nat.    Hist, 
for  1886,  pp.  1-11. 

3.  Preliminary  descriptions  of  ten  new 
North  American  Myriapods.     In  Am.   Nat., 
XXI,  pp.  81-82.    (Jan.,  1887.) 

4.  Notes    on    North    American    Litho- 
biidse  and   Scutigeridse,  with   description  of 
new  species.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1887,  pp.  255-266. 

5.  Descriptions     of     new     genera     and 
species  of  Myriapods.     In    Ent.   Amer.,   II, 
pp.  225-228.      (1887.) 

6.  Notes   on   North   American   Julidse. 
In    Ann.    New    York   Acad.    Sci.    for    1887, 
pp.  25-44. 

7.  Some  new  species  of  Myriapods.    In 
Ann.   New  York   Acad.   Sci.  for   1887. 

8.  List  of   Myriapods  of  Bloomington, 
Ind.    In  Ann.  New  York  Acad.  Sci.  for  1887. 


9.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the  Escambia  river,  with  description  of  a 
new  species  of  Zygonectes.  In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1886.  (1887.) 

10.  New    North    American    Myriapods. 
In  Ent.  Amer.,  Ill,  pp.  81-83.      (1887.) 

11.  New  genus  and  species  of  Polydes- 
midse.     In  Entomologica  Americana,  III,  pp. 
45-46.     (June,  1887.) 

12.  Notes   upon   a  collection  of   Myria- 
poda   from   East  Tennessee.     In  Ann.   New 
York  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  for  1888,  pp.  106-112. 

13.  A  preliminary  list  of  the  Myriapoda 
of  Arkansas.     In  Ent.  Amer.,  IV,  pp.   1-8. 
(1888.) 

14.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Green  Tur- 
tle Cay  in  the  Bahamas,  by  Charles  L.  Ed- 
wards.    (Joint  author  with  David  Starr  Jor- 
dan.) In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  pp. 
549-553. 

15.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  in- 
sect,   Fontaria    pulchella,    from    Strawberry 
Plains,  Jefferson  county,  Tenn.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  p.  316. 

16.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  Myriapoda 
from  Cuba.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1888,  pp.  335-338. 

17.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  Myriapoda 
from   Mossy   Creek,   Tenn.,   with   a  descrip- 
tion of  a  new  species.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.   for   1888,   pp.  339-342. 

18.  Notes  upon  some  Myriapods  belong- 
ing   to    the    U.    S.    National    Museum.      In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  pp.  403-410. 

19.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the  U.   S.   Fish   Commission   Steamer  Alba- 
tross.  No.  IV.   Descriptions  of  a  new  species 
of  fishes  collected  at  the  Galapagos  Islands 
and   along   the   coast  of   the   United   States 
of  Colombia,  1887-1888.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.   for   1889,   p.   149. 

20.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  Myriapods 
from  the  Bermuda  islands.     In  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1889,  pp.  127-129. 

21.  A   report   upon   the  fishes  of  Kala- 


255 


Indiana  University 


[  Bollman 


mnzoo,  Cnlhoun  and  Antrim  counties.  Mich- 
igan. In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  181)0. 
22.  The  Myriapodn  of  North  America. 
In  Bull.  r.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  No.  4(5,  Wash- 
ington, 1893.  Pp.  210.  (Edited  by  L.  M. 
Underwood. ) 


LEWIS  BOLLMAN,  A.B.  (1831),  LL.B. 
(1840).  Died  Sept.  3,  1888,  at  Bloom- 
iugton,  Ind. 

1.  The  State  University  of  Indiana ; 
the  causes  of  its  want  of  prosperity  consid- 
ered. Indianapolis,  1882.  Pp.  37. 


MARIE  (BOISEN)  BRADLEY  (Mrs.  Morton  C. 
Bradley),  A.B.  (1900),  A.M.  (1900). 
New  York  City. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1900.  Pp.  288. 


EDITH  CLEMENTINE  BRAMHALL.  A.B. 
(1895),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  History, 
Rockford  College,  Rockford,  111. 

1.  The   origin   of   the   temporal    privi- 
leges  of   crusaders.      In   Am.   Jour.   Theol., 
V,  pp.  279-292.     (April/1901.) 

2.  The    early    Christian    persecutions. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  C.  Munro.)     In  Univ. 
Penn.  Translations  and  Reprints,  IV,  No.  1. 

3.  Review  of  Ed.  Heyck's  'Die  Kreuz- 
ztige  und  das  heilige  Land.'     In  Am.  Jour. 
Theol.,  V.      (Oct.,  1901.) 


JOHN  CASPER  BRANNER.  Ph.D.  (1885), 
LL.D.  Professor  of  Geology,  Indiana 
University,  1885-91.  Now  Professor  of 
Geology,  Leland  Stanford  Junior  Uni- 
versity, Stanford  University,  Cal. 

1.     The  course  and  growth  of  the  fibro- 


vascular  bundles  in  palms.  In  Proc.  Am. 
Phil.  Soc.  for  1884,  XXI,  pp.  459-483.  12 
figures. 

2.  The  pororoca  or  bore  of  the  Ama- 
zon.    In    Science,    IV,  pp.  488-492.      (Nov. 
28,  1884.)      Published  as  separate,  with  ad- 
ditional notes.     Boston,  1885.     4  figures. 

3.  Rock    inscriptions    in    Brazil.      In 
Am.  Nat.,  XVIII,  pp.  1187-1192.     2  figures, 
3  plates.     (Dec.,  1884.)     The  separates  con- 
tain also  pp.  1192a  and  1192b. 

4.  Preliminary  report   of  observations 
upon  insects  injurious  to  cotton,  orange,  and 
sugar-cane    in    Brazil.      In   U.    S.   Dept.   of 
Agr.,  Division  of  Entomology,  Bulletin  No. 
4,   pp.    6*3-69.      (1884.)      The  same   report 
reprinted  as  a  separate,  Boston,  1884. 

5.  The    Batrachichthys.      In    Science, 
III,  p.  37G.     1  figure.     (March  28,  1884.) 

6.  Flexible  sandstone.     In   Am.    Nat.r 
XVIII,  p.  927.     (Sept.,  1884.) 

7.  In.scripc.oes  em  rochedos  do   BraziL 
Translated   by  Dr.  Joao  Baptista   Regueira 
Costa  and  published  by  the  Institute  Archeo- 
logico    e     Geographico     Pernambucano.       4 
plates.     Pernambuco,  Brazil,  1885. 

8.  Claciation  of  the  Lackawanna  val- 
ley.   In  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.  for  1885,  XXXIV, 
pp.  212-214.     Abstract  in   Science,  VI,  ppu 
221-222.      (1885.) 

9.  The   reputation    of   the    lantern-fly. 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XIX,   pp.   835-838.     1  plate. 
(Sept.,  1885.) 

10.  A  Gitiranaboia.   In  Liberal  Mineiro, 
Ouro  Preto,  Brazil.      (Dec.  19,  1885.) 

11.  Cotton  in  the  Empire  of  Brazil:  the 
antiquity,   methods  and  extent  of  its  culti- 
vation,  together  with  statistics  of  exporta- 
tion and  home  consumption.     Dept.  of  Agr. 
Special  Report  No.  8.     Pp.  79.     (1885.) 

12.  Cotton  caterpillars   in  Brazil.     Ap- 
pendix V.  pp.  49-">4,  Fourth  Rep.  U.  S.  En- 
tomological Comm.  on  cotton  worm  and  bol! 
worm.      (1885.) 

13.  Glaciation    of    the    Wyoming    and 
Lackawanna   valleys.      In    Proc.    Am.   Phil. 


256 


Branner] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


Soc.  for  3886,  XXIII,  pp.  337-357,  2  maps. 
Abstract  in  Science,  VIII,  p.  422.     (1886.) 

14.  Geographical  and  geological  explora- 
tion in  Brazil.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XX,  pp.  687- 
690.     (August,  1886.) 

15.  'Notes  upon  a  native  Brazilian  lan- 
guage.     In    Proc.    A.    A.    A.    S.    for    1886, 
XXXV,  pp.  329-330.     (1886.) 

16.  The  thickness  of  the  ice   in  north- 
eastern    Pennsylvania     during    the    glacial 
epoch.     In  Am.  Jour,  of  Sci.,  CXXXII,  pp. 
362-366.     (Nov.,  1886.) 

17.  Geological  map  of  Indiana,  colored 
according    to    the    scheme    of    the    Interna- 
tional Congress  of  Geologists,  2  f t.x4  ft.    In- 
dianapolis, 1886. 

18.  The  railways   of  Brazil.     In  Rail- 
way Age,  XII,  pp.  470-473.     (July  8,  1887.) 
Reprinted  with  notes  and  additions.    26  pp., 
2  maps.     Chicago,  1887. 

19.  Annual  report  of  the  geological  sur- 
vey of  Arkansas  for  1887.     Pp.  15.     (1887.) 

20.  Additional  notes  on  the  lantern-fly 
of  Brazil.     In  Trans.  New  York  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1887,  VII,  pp.  66-68. 

21.  Notes  on  the  glacial  striae  observed 
in    the    Lackawanna-Wyoming    region.      In 
Lackawanna  Inst.  Hist,  and  Sci.,  I,  pp.  19- 
27.     Scranton,  Pa.,  1887. 

22.  Topographical  map  in  ten-foot  con- 
tours of  a  portion  of  the  Lackawanna  valley 
between    Scranton   and   Carbondale,   Lacka- 
wanna county,  in  the  Northern  Anthracite 
coal  field;  scale  1600'=!".     Preliminary  to- 
pographical map,  Lackawanna  valley  sheets 
Nos.    I   and    II.      In   Ann.    Rep.,   2d   Geol. 
Surv.  Pennsylvania  for  1886.      (1887.) 

23.  The  so-called  gold  and  silver  mines 
of  Arkansas ;    an  official  report  to  Governor 
S.  P.  Hughes.     In  Engineering  and  Mining 
Journal,  N.  Y.,  August  18,  1888. 

24.  Notes  on  the  fauna  of  the  islands  of 
Fernando  de  Noronha.    In  Am.  Nat.,  XXII, 
pp.  861-871,  2  figures.     (Oct.,  1888.) 

25.  Notes   on  the  Botocudus   and  their 


ornaments.      In    Proc.    Am.    Phil.    Soc.    for 
1888,  XXVI,  pp.  171-173 ;  10  figures. 

26.  The  Cretaceous  and  Tertiary  geol- 
ogy of  the  Sergipe-Alagoas  basin  of  Brazil. 
In   Trans.   Am.    Phil.    Soc.   for   1888,   XVI, 
pp.  369-434,  5  plates,  10  figures. 

27.  On    the    manufacture    of    Portland 
cement.    In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1888,  II,  chap,  xxix,  pp.  291-302. 

28.  Introduction  to  'The   Neozoic  geol- 
ogy  of    Southwestern   Arkansas.'     In   Ann. 
Rep.    Geol.    Surv.    Arkansas    for    1888,    II, 
pp.   xi-xiv. 

29.  Administrative  report  and  introduc- 
tion to  'Geology  of  Western  Central  Arkan- 
sas.'   In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas  for 
1888,  I,  pp.  xv-xxxi. 

30.  Preface  to  'Geology  of  the  coal  re- 
gions.'   In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1888,  III,  pp.  vii-x. 

31.  Glaciation ;  its  relation  to  the  Lack- 
awanna-Wyoming   valley.     In    Lackawanna 
Inst.  Hist,  and  Sci.,  I,  pp.  3-18;  4  plates. 
Scranton,  Pa.,  1888. 

32.  Arkansas  gold  and  silver  mines  ;  an 
official  report  to  Governor  S.  P.  Hughes  in 
reply    to   certain    charges.      In   Engineering 
and  Mining  Jour.,  XLVI,  pp.  325-327.    (Oct. 
20,  1888.) 

33.  Arkansas     state     weather     service. 
Appendix  V  to  the  Ann.  Rep.  Chief  Signal 
Officer,  1888,  pp.  72-75.     (1889.) 

34.  The  geology   of  Fernando   de   Nor- 
onha.     In   Am.    Jour.    Sci.,    XXXVII,    pp. 
145-161,  map,  7  figures.     (Feb.,  1889.) 

35.  The  convict  island  of  Brazil — Fer- 
nando   de    Noronha.      In    Pop.     Sci.    Mo., 
XXXV,  pp.  33-40.     (May,  1889.) 

36.  The  age  and  correlation  of  the  Me- 
sozoic  rocks  of  the  Sergipe-AlogOas  basin  of 
Brazil.      In    Proc.   A.    A.    A.    S.    for    1889, 
XXXVII,  pp.  187-188. 

37.  The  age  of  the  crystalline  rocks  of 
Arkansas.     In  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.  for  1889, 
XXXVII,  p.  188. 


(18) 


257 


Indiana  University 


banner 


38.  The     peridotite     of     Pike     county, 
Arkansas.       (Joint     author     with     R.     N. 
Brackett.)     In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  CXXXVIII, 
pp.  50-56;  1  figure,  1  plate.     (1889.)      Re- 
printed in  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1890,  vol.  II,  pp.  378-391;   1   figure,  1 
plate.     Abstract  in   Proc.   A.   A.  A.   S.  for 
1889,  XXXVII,  pp.  188-189 ;  also  in  Neues 
Jahrbuch  f.  Mineralogie  for  1893,   pp.  500- 
501. 

39.  Analyses  of  Fort  Smith  clay  shales. 
In   Brick,  Tile  and  Pottery  Gazette,  X,  p. 
114.     (June,  1889.) 

40.  Building   stones    of   Arkansas.      In 
Stone,  II,  pp.  92-93.     (Oct.,  1889.) 

41.  Geology  of  Arkansas.     Abstract  of 
a  lecture  delivered  at  Pine  Bluff,  Arkansas. 
In  Minutes  State  Teachers'  Asso.  Arkansas 
for  1889,  pp.  34-38. 

42.  Professor  Hartt  in  Brazil.    In  Cor- 
nell Mag.,   Ithaca,  N.  Y.,   II,  pp.  186-192. 
(Feb.,  1890.) 

43.  The  training  of  a  geologist.    In  Am. 
Geologist,  V,  pp.  147-160.     (March,  1890.) 

44.  The  aeolian  sandstone  of  Fernando 
de  Noronha.    In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  CXXXIX, 
pp.  247-257,  8  figures.     (April,  1890.) 

45.  Geologia  de  Fernando  de  Noronha. 
No.  36  of  the  Revista  do  Institute  Archae- 
ologico  e  Geographico  Pernambucano.     Per- 
nambuco,  Brazil,   1890.     Pp.  21;   1  map,  7 
plates. 

46.  The  relation  of   the  state  and   na- 
tional geological  survey  to  each  other,  and  10 
the  geologists  of  the  country.    In  Am.  Geol., 
VI,  pp.  295-309.     (Nov.,  1890.)     In  Science, 
XVI,  pp.  120-123.     (August,  1890.)     Also  in 
Proc.  A.  A.  A.   S.  for  1891,  XXXIX,  pp. 
219-237. 

47.  The  pororOca  or  bore  of  the  Amazon. 
In  Pop.   Sci.  Mo.,  XXXVIII,   pp.  208-215. 
(Dec.,  1890.) 

48.  A     preliminary     report     upon     the 
bauxite    deposits    of    Arkansas,    with    loca- 
tions  and   analyses.     In   Bien.   Rep.    State 


Comm.  Mines,  Mfrs.  and  Agr.  for  1893-94, 
pp.  119-126 ;  also  in  Bien.  Rep.  of  the  same 
for  1895-96,  pp.  105-112. 

49.  Bauxite  in  Arkansas.    In  Am.  Geol., 
VII,    pp.    181-183.       (March,    1891.)       In 
Science,  XVII,  p.  171.     (March  27,  1891)  ; 
also  in  Engineering  and  Mining  Jour.,  LI, 
p.  114.     (1891.) 

50.  Introduction    to    'The    geology    of 
Washington  county'    (Arkansas).     In  Ann. 
Rep.    Geol.    Surv.    Arkansas   for   1888,   IV, 
pp.  xi-xiv. 

51.  A  list  of  the  plants  of  Arkansas. 
(Joint    author    with    F.    V.    Coville.)       In 

Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas  for  1888, 
IV,  pp.  152-242. 

52.  Preface  to  'The  geology  of  Crowley's 
Ridge.'    In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1889,  II,  pp.  xi-xix. 

53.  Preface    to    'Manganese ;    its    uses, 
ores  and  deposits."    In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv. 
Arkansas  for  1890,  I,  pp.  xxiii-xxvii. 

54.  Preface    to    'The    igneous    rocks    cf 
Arkansas.'     In  Ann.   Rep.  Geol.   Surv.  Ar- 
kansas, II,  pp.  xi-xv.     (1891.) 

55.  Analyses  of  Hot  Springs  waters.  In 
Rep.  Supt.  Hot  Springs  Reserv.  to  Sec.  of 
Interior,  pp.  9-16.     (1891.) 

56.  David  Starr  Jordan,  LL.D.     A  bi- 
ographical notice.     In  Delta  Upsilon  Quart., 
IX,  pp.  195-198.     (May,  1901.) 

57.  The    mineral    waters   of   Arkansas. 
In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas  for  1891, 
I,  pp.  144,  map. 

58.  The  cotton  industry  in  Brazil.     In 
Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  XL,  pp.  666-674.     (1892.) 

59.  The   training  of  a  geologist.      San 
Francisco,  1892.     3d  ed.     19  pp. 

60.  Preface  to  'Whetstones  and  the  No- 
vaculites  of  Arkansas.'     In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol. 
Surv.  Arkansas  for  1890,  III,  pp.  xv-xviii. 

61.  Preface  to  'The  iron  deposits  of  Ar- 
kansas.'   In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1892,  1,  p.  xi. 

62.  The  lip  and  ear  ornaments  of  the 


258 


fBranner'\ 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


Botocfidus.     In  Pop.   Sci.  Mo.,   XLIII,   pp. 
753-757,  5  figures.     (Oct.,  1893.) 

63.  The  supposed  glaciation  of  Brazil. 
In    Jour.   Geology,     I,    pp.    753-772,    illus. 
(1893.) 

64.  Preface  to  'Marbles  and  other  lime- 
stones.'   In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1890,  IV,  pp.  xvii-xxi. 

65.  Observations  upon  the  erosion  in  the 
hydrographic   basin   of   the   Arkansas   river 
above    Little    Rock.      In    Wilder    Quarter- 
Century  Book,  pp.  325-337.     Ithaca,  N.  Y. 
1893.     Also  separate,   Ithaca,   N.  Y.,   1893. 

66.  The    coal    fields    of    Arkansas.      In 
Mineral  Resources  of  the  U.  S.  for  1892,  pp. 
303-306,  1  figure.     (1893.) 

67.  Proverbs   from   the    Portugese.      In 
the   Overland   Monthly,   2d   ser.,    XXI,    pp. 
501-503.     (May,  1893.) 

68.  Elevations  in  the  State  of  Arkansas. 
In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas  for  1891, 
II,  pp.  77-152,  2  figures.     (1894.) 

69.  Observations  upon  the  erosion  in  the 
hydrographic   basin    of   the    Arkansas   river 
above  Little  Rock.    In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv. 
Arkansas  for  1891,  II,  pp.  153-166.     (1894.) 

70.  Magnetic  observations  and  meridian 
monuments    established    in    Arkansas.      In 
Ann.   Rep.  Geol.   Surv.   Arkansas  for  1891, 
II,  pp.  167-176,  10  figures.     (1894.) 

71.  Introduction  to  Sampson's  'Prelim- 
inary list  of  the  Mollusca  of  Arkansas.'     In 
Ann.   Rep.   Geol.   Surv.  Arkansas  for  1891, 
II,  pp.  179-180.      (1894.) 

72.  Introduction  to  Meek's  'Catalogue  of 
the  fishes  of  Arkansas.'    In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol. 
Surv.   Arkansas   for   1891,   II,  pp.   216-220. 
(1894.) 

73.  Bibliography  of  the  geology  of  Ar- 
kansas.   In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.  Surv.  Arkansas 
for  1891,  II,  pp.  319-340.     (1894.) 

74.  Introduction  to  and  translation  of 
the  political  constitutions  of  Brazil.    In  The 
Convention  Manual  of  the  Sixth  New  York 
State  Constitutional  Convention,  1894.    Part 
2,  III,  pp.  57-138. 


75.  Preface  to  'The  Tertiary  geology  of 
Southern   Arkansas.'      In   Ann.   Rep.   Geol. 
Surv.    Arkansas   for   1892,    II,   pp.   xiii-xiv. 
(1894.) 

76.  Report  on  road  making  materials  in 
Arkansas.     In  U.   S.  Dept.  Agr.,   Office  of 
Road    Inquiry,    Bulletin    No.    4.       (1894)  ; 
also   in  4th    Bien.   Rep.    Bureau   of   Mines, 
Mfrs.  and  Agr.   (of  Arkansas)   for  1895-96, 
pp.  90-101.     Also  in  5th  Bien.  Rep.  of  that 
bureau  for  1897-98,  pp.  131-141. 

77.  The  geological  survey  of  Arkansas. 
In  Jour.  Geology,  II,  pp.  826-836.     (1894.) 

78.  Os  gres  eolios  de  Fernando  de  Nor- 
onha.    In  Institute  Archeologico  e  Geograph- 
ico  Pernambucano,  8  figures.     Pernambuco, 
Brazil,  1894. 

79.  Syllabus    of    lectures    on    economic 
geology.      (Joint  author  with  John  F.  New- 
som.)     Palo  Alto,  1895.    Pp.  282. 

80.  Great   mountain   railways.      (Joint 
author  with  John  H.  Means.)     In  Chautau- 
quan,  July,  1895,  pp.  426-433. 

81.  Report   upon   the   condition    of   the 
geological    survey    of   Arkansas.      Appendix 
to  Bien.  Mess,  of  Gov.  Wm.  M.  Fishback  to 
General    Assembly   of   Arkansas,   pp.    26-33 
(1895). 

82.  Decomposition   of   rocks    in   Brazil. 
In  Bull.  Geol.  Soc.  Am.,  VII,  pp.  255-314 ;  5 
plates,  6  figures.     (1895-96.) 

83.  Thickness  of  the  Paleozoic  sediments 
in   Arkansas.      In   Am.   Jour.    Sci.,   II,   pp. 
229-236,  8  figures.     (Sept.,  1896.) 

84.  The  phosphate  deposits  of  Arkansas. 
In  Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  Engineers  for 
1896,  XXVI,  pp.  580-598,  map.     (1896.) 

85.  Bibliography   of  clays   and   the   ce- 
ramic arts.     In  Bull.  143  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv., 
114  pp.,  2961  titles.     (1896.) 

86.  Review  of  F.  H.  King's  'The  soil.' 
In  Jour.  Geol.,  IV,  p.  243.     (1896.) 

87:  The  decomposition  of  rocks  in 
Brazil.  In  Jour.  Geol.,  IV,  pp.  630-631. 
(1896.) 


259 


Indiana  University 


\fBranntr 


88.  On   the  size  of  geological   publica- 
tions.     In    Jour.    Geol.,    IV,    pp.    214-217. 
(189G.) 

89.  A  supposta  glaciacao  do  Brazil.    In 
Revista  Brazileira,   VI, -pp.  49-55,   10G-113. 
(April,  189G.) 

90.  The  study  of  science.      (Part  of  a 
lecture   delivered   at   the   Mount   Tamalpais 
Military  Academy.)     In  Overland  Monthly, 
Oct.,  1896. 

91.  Abstract    of    F.    Katzer's     'Oldest 
fossiliferous    beds    of    the    Amazon    region.' 
In  Jour.  Geol.,  IV,  pp.  975-976.     (1896.) 

92.  Review   of   the   proceedings   of   the 
Indiana  Academy  of  Sciences,  geological  sub- 
jects.   In  Jour.  Geol.,  IV,  p.  981.     (1896.) 

93.  Geological  map  of  Arkansas.     Scale 
80  mi.=l".     (18960 

94.  Note   on    'O   fim   da   creagHo,    pelo 
Visconde     do     Rio     Grande.'       In     Revista 
Brazileira,  August  1897,  pp.  254-255,  Rio  de 
Janeiro,   Brazil ;   also  in  Annuario   do   Rio 
Grande    do    Sul,    1898,   pp.    261-265,    Porto 
Alegre   (Brazil),  1897. 

95.  Bacteria  and  the  decomposition  of 
rocks.     In  Am.  Jour.   Sci.,  CLIII,  pp.  438- 
442    (1897),   and  as  separate;    abstract  in 
Neues  Jahr.  f.  Mineralogie,  II,  Referate,  84. 
(1899.) 

96.  The  cement  materials  of  southwest 
Arkansas.    In  Trans.  American  Inst.  Mining 
Engineers   for   1897,   XXVII,   pp.   42-63,   6 
figures.      Also   separate,   22   pp.,   map,    and 
illustrations. 

97.  Reply  to  criticism  of  R.  T.  Hill  on 
'The    cement    materials    of    southwest    Ar- 
kansas.'    In  Trans.  Am.   Inst.  Mining  En- 
gineers for  1897,  XXVII,  pp.  945-946. 

98.  The  bauxite  deposits   of   Arkansas. 
In  Jour.  Geol.,  V,  pp.  263-289,  2  plates,  2 
figures.      (April-May,  1897.)     Also  as  sepa- 
rate with  10  pp.  additional  matter,  Chicago, 
1897. 

99.  The  Red  River  and  Clinton  mono- 
clines.    (Joint  author  with  J.  F.  Newsom. ) 


In  Am.  Geologist,  XX,  pp.  1-13,  1   map,  3 
figures.     (July,  1897.) 

100.  Protection    for    American    colleges. 
In  Nation,  May  27,  1897,  p.  395. 

101.  The   introduction  of  new   terms   in 
geology.     In   Science,   V,  pp.  912-913;   VI, 
pp.  133-134.     (June  11  and  July  23,  1897.) 

102.  Mineral    wealth   of    Arkansas.      In 
Engineering   and   Mining   Jour.,   August   7, 
1897,  p.  153. 

103.  Geology   in   its   relations   to   topog- 
raphy.    In  Proc.  Am.  Soc.  Civil  Engineers 
for  1897,  XXIII,  No.  8,  pp.  473-495,  1  plate, 
16  figures. 

104.  Introduction  to  Ashley's  'Geology  of 
the    Paleozoic    area   of   Arkansas   south    of 
the  Novaculite  region.'     In  Proc.  Am.  Phil. 
Soc.  for  1897,  XXXVI,  pp.  217-220. 

105.  The    former    extension    of   the   Ap- 
palachians    across     Mississippi,     Louisiana, 
and  Texas.     In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  CLIV,  pp. 
357-371,  2  figures.     (November,  1897.)     Ab- 
stract in  Rep.  British  Asso.  for  Advanc.  Sci- 
ence,  Toronto   meeting,    1897,   pp.   643-644 ; 
in  Annales  de  Geographic,   7me  Annee,  pp. 
245-246  (Sept.  15,  1898)  ;  in  Nature  LVII, 
p.  70  (Nov.  18,  1897)  ;  also  in  Jour.  Geol., 
V,  pp.  759-760  (Oct-Nov.,  1897.) 

106.  Review  of  T.  C.  Hopkin  and  C.  E. 
Siebenthal's  'The  Bedford  Oolitic  limestone 
of   Indiana,'    published   in   21st   Ann.    Rep. 
State  Geologist  Indiana.     In  Jour.  Geol.,  V, 
pp.  529-531.      (July- August,  1897.) 

107.  Reviews  of  the  'Unpublished  reports 
of  the  Commissao  Geologica  do  Brazil,'  pub- 
lished in   the  Boletim  do  Museu  Paraense. 
In  Jour.  Geol.,  V,  pp.  756-757.     (Oct.-Nov., 
1897.) 

108.  Review  of  Katzer's  'Devonian  fauna 
of  the  Rio  Maecurfl,'  published  in  the  Bole- 
tim  do   Museu   Paraense.     In   Jour.    Geol., 
V,  pp.  757-758.     (1897.) 

109.  Geology   in   its   relations   to   topog- 
raphy    (with    discussion).      In    Proc.    Am. 
Soc.  Civil  Engineers,  XXXIX,  pp.  53-95,  18 
plates.     (June,  1898.) 


260 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


110.  On   the   origin   of  certain   siliceous 
rocks.      (Joint  author  with   O.  A.  Derby.) 
In    Jour.    Geol.,    VI,    pp.    366-371.      (May- 
June,   1898.)      Abstract  in  Neues  Jahrb.  f. 
Mineralogie,  I,  p.  408.      (1900.) 

111.  A    geologist's    impression     (of    the 
Grand  Canyon   of  the  Colorado,  and  Black 
Crater,    Flagstaff,    Arizona).      In    Land   of 
Sunshine  Mag.,  IX,  pp.  149-152,  illustrated. 
(August,  1898.) 

112.  The    Spanish    University    of    Sala- 
manca.     In    Maryville    Coll.    Monthly    for 
1898,   Maryville,   Tenn. 

113.  Syllabus     of     elementary     geology. 
Stanford    University,    1898.      Pp.    300;    69 
plates. 

114.  Review  of  J.  Geikie's  'Earth  sculp- 
ture.'    In  Science,  N.  S.,  VIII,  pp.  957-959. 
(1898.) 

115.  Some  old  French  place  names  in  the 
state  of  Arkansas.     In  Mod.  Lang.   Notes, 
XIV,  No.  2,  pp.  65-80.     (Feb.,  1899.) 

116.  The   recent   ascent   of   Itambe.      In 
Nat'l  Geog.  Mag.,  X,  p.  183.     (1899.) 

117.  Notes  upon  the  Sao  Paulo  sheet  of 
the  Commissao  Geographica  e  Geologica  de 
Sao  Paulo.     In  Revista   Brazileira,   Rio  de 
Janeiro,  1899 ;  republished  in  the  Cidade  de 
Santos,  Santos,  Brazil,  January  10,  1900. 

118.  The   Sao   Paulo  sheet  of  the   topo- 
graphic survey  of  the  Sao  Paulo,  Brazil.    In 
Jour.  Geol.,  VII,  pp.  788-789.     (1899.) 

119.  The   manganese    deposits   of    Bahia 
and   Minas,    Brazil.      In   Trans.    Am.    Inst. 
Mining    Engineers,    XXIX,    pp.    756-770,    5 
figures.   (Sept.,  1899.) 

120.  The  stone  reef  at  the  mouth  of  Rio 
Grande  do  Norte.     (Joint  author  with  C.  E. 
Gilman.)       In  Am.  Geol.,  XXIV,  pp.  342- 
344,  2  figures.      (Dec.,   1899.) 

121.  A   recife   de   pedra   na   foz   do   Rio 
Grande  do  Norte.     (Joint  author  with  C.  E. 
Gilman.)       Traduzido    por    Dr.    Alfredo    de 
Carvalho.     In   Revista   do   Rio   Grande   do 
Norte,  1900,  Nos.  1,  2,  Natal,  pp.  267-271. 
(Jan.  and  Feb.,  1900.) 


122.  Note   upon   John   M.   Clarke's   'The 
Upper  Silurian  fauna  of  the  Rio  Trombetas, 
State  of  Para,  Brazil,'  and  'Devonian  mol- 
lusca  of  the  State  of  Para,  Brazil,'  published 
in  Archives  do  Museu  Nacional,  X,  pp.  1-48, 
49-174.      In    Journal   of   Geology,    VII,   pp. 
813-814.     (Dec.,  1899.) 

123.  Gold  in  Brazil.     In  Mineral  Indus- 
try, VIII,  p.  281.      (1900.) 

124.  Diamonds    in    Brazil.      In    Mineral 
Industry,  VIII,  pp.  221-222.     (1900.) 

125.  Ants    as    geologic     agents    in    the 
tropics.     In  Jour.  Geol.,  VIII,  pp.  151-153, 
3  figures.      (Feb.-March,  1900.) 

126.  The  oil-bearing  shales  of  the  coast 
of  Brazil.    In  Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  En- 
gineers  for   1900,   vol.   XXX,   pp.   537-554. 
Illustrated,  map.    Review  in  Neues  Jahrb.  f. 
Mineralogie,  II,  pp.  267-268.      (1901.)     Ab- 
stract   in    Engineering    and    Mining    Jour., 
LXX,  pp.  308-309.     (Sept.  15,  1900.) 

127.  Syllabus      of      economic      geology. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  F.  Newsom.)      Stan- 
ford   University,    1900.     2d    ed.     Pp.    viii, 
368,   141   figures. 

128.  Review  of  G.  D.  Harris  and  A.  C. 
Veatch's  'A  preliminary  report  on  the  geol- 
ogy of  Louisiana.'    In  Jour.  Geol.,  VIII,  pp. 
177-179.     (April-May,  1900.) 

129.  Two  characteristic  geologic  sections 
on  the  northeast  coast  of  Brazil.     In  Proc. 
Washington  Acad.  Science  for  1900,  II,  pp. 
185-201 ;  3  plates,  5  figures. 

130.  Beach  cusps.     In  Jour.  Geol.  VIII, 
pp.  481-484,  3  figures.     (Sept.-Oct.,  1900.) 

131.  The  zinc  and  lead  region  of  North 
Arkansas.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Geol.   Survey  Ar- 
kansas,   vol.    V.      Little    Rock,   Dec.,    1900. 
Pp.  xiv,  395;  38  plates,  92  figures,  atlas  of 
7  sheets. 

132.  Review  of  F.  W.  Simonds's  'A  rec- 
ord of  the  geology  of  Texas,  etc.'     In  Jour. 
Geol.,  IX,  p.  91.     (1901.) 

133.  Review  of  Henri  Carpentier's  'Geol- 
ogie     et     mineralogie     appliquees.        (Paris, 


261 


Indiana  University 


1900.)      In   Jour.    Geol.,    IX,    pp.    198-199. 
(Feb.-March,  1901.) 

134.  Os  recifes  de  gres  do  Rio  Formoso, 
Brazil.     In  Revista  do  Institute  Archeolog- 
ico   e   Geographico   Pernambucano,   No.   54, 
pp.  131-136.     Illustrated.     (1901.) 

135.  The  origin  of  travertine  falls.     In 
Science,  XIV,  pp.  184-185.     (August,  1901.) 

130.  The  zinc  and  lead  deposits  of  North 
Arkansas.  In  Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  En- 
gineers, vol.  XXXI,  pp.  572-603;  27  illus- 
trations. Republished  in  Lead  and  Zinc 
News  of  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  II,  Nov.  4,  1901,  pp. 
4-6,  Nov.  11,  1901,  pp.  4-6,  Nov.  18,  1901, 
pp.  4-6,  Nov.  25,  1901,  pp.  4-5.  Abstract  in 
Engineering  and  Mining  Jour.,  Nov.  30, 
1901,  pp.  718-719.  1  figure. 

137.  Editorial    upon    giant    ripples.      In 
Jour.  Geol.,  IX,  pp.  535-536.      (Sept.-Oct.. 
1901.) 

138.  Apontamentos  sobre  a  fauna  das  II- 
has  de  Fernando  de  Noronha.    Publicacao  do 
Institute   Archeologico    e    Geographico   Per- 
nambucano.     Pernambuco,    1901.      Pp.    14 ; 
2  figures. 

139.  Depressions   and    elevations   of   the 
southern   archipelagoes   of   Chile.      Transla- 
tion    (with    introduction)     of    a    paper    by 
Francisco    Vidal    Gormaz    in    the    Revista 
Nueva  of  Santiago  de  Chile,  1901.     Trans- 
lation and  introduction.     In  Scottish  Geog. 
Mag.,    XVIII,    pp.    14-24,    1    map.      (Jan., 
1902.) 

140.  Notes  upon  the  surface  geology  of 
Rio  Grande  do   Sul,  Brazil.     By  James  E. 
Mills.      Edited    from    his    letters.      In    Am. 
Geol.,  XXIX,  pp.  126-127.     (Feb.,  1902.) 

141.  The  occurrence  of  fossil  remains  of 
mammals   in   the   interior  of  the   States  of 
Pernambuco  and  Alagoas,  Brazil.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Sci.,  CLXIII,  pp.  133-137,  1  map,  1 
plate.      (Feb.,   1902.) 

142.  Geology   of   the   northeast   coast   of 
Brazil.     In  Bull.  Geol.  Soc.  America,  Roch- 
ester, XIII,  pp.  41-98;  16  figures,  9  plates. 


143.  The  palm  trees  of  Brazil.     In  Pop. 
Sci.  Mo.,  LX,  pp.  386-412 ;  25  figures. 

144.  Discussion  of  Eric  Hedburg's  paper 
on  'The  Missouri  and  Arkansas  zinc  region.' 
In    Trans.    Am.    Inst.    Mining    Engineers, 
XXXI,   pp.   1013-1014. 

145.  The   phosphate  rocks  of  Arkansas. 
(Joint   author   with    J.    F.    Newsom.)      In 
Bull.    74,    Arkansas    Agr.    Exper.    Station, 
pp.  59-123;  23  figures,  15  analyses.     (Sept., 
1902. ) 

146.  Syllabus  of  a  course  of  lectures  on 
elementary   geology.    2d  ed.     Stanford   Uni- 
versity,   1902.     Pp.    370.     109    figures,    25 
plates. 

147.  The   Carnegie   institution.      In    Sci. 
ence,   Oct.  3,   1902.     N.   S.,  XVI,  pp.   527- 
528. 

148.  Bibliography  of  the  geology,  miner- 
alogy,   and   paleontology   of   Brazil.      (1288 
titles.)      Published  by   the   Bibliotheca   Na- 
cional  de  Rio  Janeiro,  Brazil.    (1902.) 

149.  Geologia    elementar.      (An   elemen- 
tary treatise  on  geology  for  the  use  of  Bra- 
zilian students.     Published  in  Portuguese.) 
Rio  de  Janeiro,  1902.    Pp.  256 ;  264  figures, 
15  plates. 

150.  Biographical    notice    of    James    E. 
Mills.     In  Bull,  of  the   Geol.   Soc.  of  Am., 
XIV.     (1904.)      (In  press.) 


JAMES  RONALD  BRANSON,  A.B.  (1903),  In- 
dianapolis, Ind. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1903.  Pp.  287. 


WILLIAM  L  BRAY,  A.B.  (1893),  Ph.D.  As- 
sociate Professor  in  charge  of  School 
of  Botany,  University  of  Texas,  Austin, 
Tex. 

I.     Revision    of    the    South    American 
Cichlidae.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigen- 


262 


Brooks  ] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


mann. )     In  Ann.  New  York  Acad.  Sci.,  VII, 
pp.  607-637.      (Jan.,  1894.) 

2.  Synopsis  of  North  American  Ama- 
ranthaceae.       (Joint     author     with     E.     B. 
Uline.)      In   Bot.   Gaz.,   XIX,   pp.   267-272, 
313-320;    XX,    pp.    155-161;   337-344,   449- 
453.      (July,   August,   1894 ;   April,  August, 
Oct.,  1895.) 

3.  The  geographical  distribution  of  tin; 
FrankeniaceaB  considered  in  connection  with 
their  general  relationship.     In  Jahrb.  f.  sys- 
tem.,    Phlanzengeschichte     u.     Pflanzengeo- 
graphie,  XXIV,  pp.   395-418.      (1897.) 

4.  On  the  relation  of  the  flora  of  the 
Lower    Sanoran   zone   in   North   America    to 
that  of  the  arid  zones  of  Chili  and  Argen- 
tine.     In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XXVI,    pp.    121-147. 
(August,  1898.) 

5.  Texas  as  a  field  for  botanical  study. 
In  the  Univ.  of  Texas  Record,  I,  pp.   153- 
171.      (April,  1899.) 

6.  The  relation  of  plant  physiology  to 
the  other  sciences.      Translation   of   an  ad- 
dress by  Dr.  Julius  Wiesner.     In  Ann.  Rep. 
Smithson.     Inst.     for     1898,     pp.     427-444. 
(1900.) 

7.  The  relation   of   the   North  Ameri- 
can   flora   to   that   of    South   America.      In 
Science,  XII,  pp.  709-716.     (Nov.,  1900.) 

8.  Botany  in  the  high  school.     In  Bul- 
letin   No.     1     of    Committee    of    Affiliated 
Schools,  Univ.  of  Texas,  pp.  55-61.      (Feb., 
1901.) 

9.  Destruction  of  timber  by  the  Gal- 
veston  storm.     In  Forester,  VII,  pp.  53-56. 
(March,  1901.) 

10.  Texas   forests   and   the   problem   of 
forest    management   for    the    long-leaf    pine 
lands.       In     Forester,     VII,     pp.  .  131-138. 
(June,  1901.) 

11.  The  ecological  relation  of  the  veg- 
etation  of   Western   Texas.      In  Bot.   Gaz., 
XXXII,   pp.   99-123,    195-217,   262-291;    24 
text  figures.     (Aug.,  Sept.,  Oct.,  1901.) 

12.  Forest    management   by   the   Kirby 


Lumber  Company.     In  University  of  Texas 
Record,  V,  pp.  36-45.      (April,   1903.) 

13.  The  tissues   of  some  plants  of  the 
Sotol  region.    In  Bull.  Tor.  Bot.  Club,  XXX, 
pp.  621-633,  10  text  figures.     (Nov.,  1903.) 

14.  Forest    conditions    and    forest    re- 
sources   in    Texas.      In    Bull.    U.    S.    Dept. 
Agriculture,  Bureau  of  Forestry.    Numerous 
maps  and  plates.      (In  press.) 

15.  Relation  of  the  timber  covering  the 
Edwards  plateau  in  Texas  to  water  supply. 
(A    report    now     in     hands    of    editor    of 
Bureau   of   Forestry,   U.    S.    Dept.    Agricul- 
ture. )     10  plates. 

16.  The  vegetation  of  the  Sotol  country. 
(Bulletin  of  University  of  Texas.)      (1904.) 


OLIVER  W  BROWX,  A.M.  (1896).     See  Fac- 
ulty list. 


ELMER  BURRITT  BRYAN,  A.B.  (1893).     See 
Faculty  list. 


WILLIAM  LOWE  BRYAN,  A.B.   (1884),  A.M. 
(1886),  Ph.D.    See  Faculty  list. 


ROBERT  CLARKSON  BROOKS,  A.B.  (1896), 
Ph.D.  Instructor  in  Economics,  Cor- 
nell University,  Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

1.  The  Merchants'  Municipal  Commit- 
tee of  Boston.     In  Municipal  Affairs,  I,  pp. 
1-508.     (Sept.,  1897.) 

2.  Review   of  W.   T.   Stead's   'Satan's 
invisible  world  displayed.'    In  Municipal  Af- 
fairs, II,  pp.  304-306.      (June,  1898.) 

3.  Review  of  Gustav  Herzfeld's  'Gross 
New  Y'ork,  eine  Studie  zur  Einverleibungs- 
frage.'     In  Municipal  Affairs,  III,  pp.  351- 
352.      (June,  1899.) 

4.  The   three-class   election   system   in 
Prussian  cities.     In  Municipal  Affairs,  III, 
pp.  396-433.     ( Sept. ,  1899. ) 

5.  Review  of   'A   municipal   program.' 
(H.  E.  Deming  and  others,  editors).   In  Mu- 


263 


Indiana  University 


[  Brooks 


nicipnl  Affairs,  IV,  pp.  235-238.      (March, 
1900.) 

6.  Political    clubs    in   Prussian   cities. 
In    Municipal    Affairs,     IV,    pp.    375-384. 
(June,  1900.) 

7.  A  bibliography  of  municipal  admin- 
istration  and  city  conditions.     New  York, 
1897.     Pp.  ix,  224.     Second  edition,  revised 
and  enlarged,  New  York,  1901.     Pp.  346. 

8.  Translation   of   Karl   Biicher's   'Die 
wirtschaftlichen     Aufgaben     der     modernen 
Stadtgemeinde.'    In  Municipal  Affairs,   VI, 
pp.  167-179.    (June,  1902.) 

9.  Review  of  Charles  Zeublin's  'Amer- 
ican municipal  progress.'     In  Charities,  X, 
pp.  185-186.     (Feb.,  1903.) 

10.  Review  of  S.  N.  Patten's  'Theory 
of  prosperity.'  In  Philos.  Rev.  XII,  pp. 
689-690.  (Dec.,  1903.) 


PERCY  BENTLEY  SUBNET,  A.B.  (1884),  A.M. 
(1887).  Professor  of  Modern  Lan- 
guages, Iowa  College,  Grinneli,  Iowa. 

1.  French-English  and  English-French 
dictionary.      (Joint  author  with  A.  J.   Ed- 
gren.)     New  York,  1901.     Pp.  xvi,  1252. 

2.  La  Familia  de  Alvareda.  New  York, 
1901.     Pp.  iv,  196  (30  pages  of  notes.) 

3.  Spanish  grammar.     Chicago,   1902. 
Pp.  iii,  135. 

4.  Review  of  M.  M.  Ramsey's  'Lo  Es- 
encial    del    Lenguaje    Castellano.'     In   Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  Dec.,  1902. 


BESSIE  BUSHING. 
Ridgeley. 


See  Mrs.  Douglas  Clay 


AMOS  WILLIAM  BUTLER,  A.B.  (1894),  A.M. 
(1900).  Secretary  Indiana  State  Board 
of  Charities,  Indianapolis. 

1.  The  birds  of  Franklin  county,  Ind. 
In  Atlas  of  Franklin  County,  Indiana,  etc. 
(Chicago,  1882),  pp.  11-12. 

2.  Ornithological    notes    from    Brook- 


ville,  I iid.     In  Jour.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist., 
V,  pp.  192-193.     (1882.) 

3.  Local  weather  lore.    In  Am.  Meteor. 
Jour.,  I,  pp.  313-317.      (Dec.,  1884.)      Ab- 
stract in  Proc.  A.  A.  A.   S.,  XXXIII,  pp. 
609-613.     (1884.) 

4.  Hibernation    of    the    lower    verte- 
brates.     In    Am.    Nat.,    XIX,    pp.    37-40. 
(1885.)      Abstract   in   Proc.   A.   A.   A.    S., 

XXXIII,  pp.  543-545.     (1885.) 

5.  The     habits    of    some    Arvicolinse. 
(Joint  author  with   Edgar  H.   Quick.)      In 
Am.  Nat.,  XIX,  pp.  113-118.     (Feb.,  1885.) 
Abstract  in   Proc.   A.   A.   A.    S.,   XXXIII, 
pp.  539-542.     (1884.) 

6.  The   sacrificial   stone   of   San  Juan 
Teotihuacan.    In  American  Antiquarian,  pp. 
149-152.     (May,  1885.)     Abstract  in  Proc. 
A.  A.  A.  S.,  XXXIII,  pp.  601-603.     (1884.) 

7.  Observations  on  faunal  changes.    In 
Bull.  No.  1,  Brookville  Society  of  Nat.  Hist., 
1885,   pp.   5-13.    Reprinted  in  Ornithologist 
and  Oologist,  X,  p.  32.     (1885.) 

8.  Land  and  fresh-water  mollusca  ob- 
served in  Franklin  county.      (Joint  author 
with  D.  R.  Moore.)     In  Bull.  No.  1,  Brook- 
ville Soc.  of  Nat.  Hist,  1885,  pp.  41-44. 

9.  Observations   on   the   muskrat.      In 
Am.    Nat.,    XIX,    pp.    1044-1055.       (Nov., 
1855.)      Abstract    in    Proc.    A.    A.    A.    S., 

XXXIV,  pp.  324-329.     (1885.) 

10.  The  remains  at  San  Juan  Teotihua- 
can.   Abstract  in  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.,  XXXIV, 
pp.  418-420.     (1885.) 

11.  A    list    of    the    birds    observed    in 
Franklin  county,  Indiana.     In  Bull.  No.  2, 
Brookville    Soc.    of   Nat.    Hist.,   pp.    12-39. 
(1886.) 

12.  Meadow  mice  in  Southeastern  Indi- 
ana.    In  Hoosier  Naturalist,  I,  pp.  144-145. 
(April,  May,  1886.) 

13.  The  periodical  Cicada  in  Southeast- 
ern Indiana.     In  Bull.  No.  12,  U.  S.  Dept. 
Agriculture,  pp.  24-31.      (1886.)      Abstract 
in  Proc.  A.  A.  A.  S.,  XXXIV,  pp.  328-329. 
(1885.) 


264 


Butler] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


14.  The  cerulean  warbler.    In  Ornithol- 
ogist and  Oologist,  IX,  pp.  27-28.     (1884.) 

15.  Zoological     miscellany.       In     Jour. 
Gin.   Soc.   Nat.  Hist.,  pp.  261-266.      (Jan., 
1887.) 

16.  Zoological    miscellany- — some    notes 
on    Indiana    amphibians    and    reptiles.     In 
Jour.    Gin.    Soc.    Nat.    Hist.,    pp.    147-150. 
(Oct.,  1887.) 

17.  Zoological  miscellany.   In  Jour.  Cia. 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist.,  pp.  214-216.     (Jan.,  1888.) 

18.  Notes  on  the  range  of  the  protho- 
notary  warbler  in  Indiana.     In   Ornitholo- 
gist and  Oologist,  XIII,  pp.  33-34.     (March, 
1888.) 

19.  On    a    new    subspecies    of    Amrno- 
dramus     sandwicliensis     from     Mexico.      In 
Auk,  V,  pp.  264-266.     (July,  1888.) 

20.  A  catalogue  of  the  birds  of   Indi- 
ana.   In  Proc.  Indiana  Hort.  Soc.,  appendix 
C,  pp.  1-135.      (1890.) 

21.  Our  birds  and  what  they  do  for  the 
farmer.     In  Rep.  State  Board  of  Agric.  In- 
diana for  1890,  pp.  113-125. 

22.  Notes  on  the  range  and  habits  of 
the    Carolina   parakeet.      In   Auk,    IX,    pp. 
49-56.     (Jan.,  1892.) 

23.  Our  smaller  mammals  and  their  re- 
lation  to  horticulture.     In   Trans.   Indiana 
Hort.  Soc.  for  1891,  pp.  117-123. 

24.  Contributions  to  Indiana  Herpetol- 
ogy.     No.  3.     In  Jour.  Cin.  Soc.  Nat.  Hist, 
for  1892,  pp.  169-179.     (1892.) 

25.  Some  notes  concerning  the  evening 
grosbeak.    In  Auk,  IX,  pp.  238-247.     (July, 
1892.) 

26.  On  Indiana  shrews.    In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1891,  pp.  161-163. 

27.  Notes  on  Indiana  birds.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1891,  pp.  164-166. 

28.  Further  notes  on  the  evening  gros- 
beak.     In    Auk,    I,    pp.    155-157.      (April, 
1893.) 

29.  The  range  of  the  crossbills  in  the 
Ohio   valley,    with   notes    on    their    unusual 
occurrence   in   summer.      In    Proc.    Indiana 


Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  pp.  63-72  ;  in  Am.  Nat., 
XXVIII,  pp.  136-146  (Feb.,  1894  )  ;  in  Pa- 
pers presented  to  the  World's  Congress  of 
Ornithology  (1893),  Chicago,  1896,  pp. 
47-58. 

30.  The  fruit  lands  of  southeastern  In- 
diana.    In   Trans.   Indiana   Hort.    Soc.   for 
1893,  pp.  56-61. 

31.  Bibliography  of  Indiana  ornithology. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for  1893,   pp. 
108-116. 

32.  Notes  on  Indiana  birds.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  116-120. 

33.  Bibliography  of  Indiana  mammals. 
(Joint  author  with  B.  W.  Evermann.)      In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  120- 
124. 

34.  Preliminary    list   of   Indiana   mam- 
mals.   In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893, 
pp.   124-139. 

35.  Notes    on    the    birds    of    1894.      In 
Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  73- 
80. 

36.  The  mammals  of  Indiana.    In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  81-86. 

37.  An  orchard  talk.     In  Trans.   Indi- 
ana Hort.  Soc.  for  1895,  pp.  149-152. 

38.  With  the  birds  of  Winona.     In  In- 
diana Synod,  II,  pp.  78-80.      (Dec.,  1895.) 

39.  Notes    on    the    birds    of    1894.      In 
Oologist,  pp.  73-80.      (1895.) 

40.  Indiana — a   century    of   changes   in 
the  aspects  of  nature  (President's  address.) 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for  1895,  pp. 
31-42  ;  in  Inland  Educator,  II,  pp.  313-318. 
(July,  1896.)      Reprint  in  Studies  in  Indi- 
ana Geography,  Terre  Haute,  1897,  pp.  72- 
81. 

41.  Additional  notes  on  Indiana  birds. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for   1895,  pp. 
162-168. 

42.  From  wilderness  to  civilization.    In 
Proc.  Indiana  Hort.  Soc.  for  1896,  pp.  19- 
29. 

43.  The    bobolink    (Dolichonyx    oryziv- 


265 


Indiana  University 


\_Butltr 


orus)   iu   I  in ii. -111:1.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  189G,  pp.  227-24:5. 

44.  Some  additions  to  the  Indiana  bird 
list,    with   other    notes.      In   Proc.    Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.  for  1896,   pp.  244-l>4f>. 

45.  Some     Indiana     crow     roosts.       In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  175- 
178. 

46.  Notes    on    Indiana    heronries.      In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  201- 
202. 

47.  The  recent  occurrence  of  the  raven 
in    Indiana.      In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci. 
for  1897,  pp.  201-202. 

48.  The  birds  of  Indiana.     In  22d  Rep. 
Indiana   State  Geologist  for  1897,  pp.  515- 
1187. 

49.  Brunnich's    murre     (Uria    lomvia), 
an   addition   to   the   birds   of    Indiana.      In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  180- 
183. 

50.  The   unusual    occurrence   of   Brun- 
nich's murre  (Uria  lomvia)  far  inland,  with 
notes  on  other  rare  birds.     In  Auk,  XIV, 
pp.  197-200.     (April,  1897.) 

51.  Bird    life    in    Indiana.      In    Trans. 
Indiana  Hort.  Soc.  for  1898,  pp.  30-38. 

52.  Life  in  the  forest — Mammals.     In 
Nature    and    Art,    I,    Chicago,    pp.    53-57. 
(Feb.,  1898.) 

53.  State  care  of  dependent  children  in 
Indiana.     In  Ohio  Bull,  of  Char,  and  Cor., 
June,  1899,  pp.  5-9;  in  Indiana  Bull.  Char, 
and  Cor.,  June,  1899,  pp.  8-12. 

54.  The    value   of   horticulture   to   our 
public     institutions.       In     Trans.     Indiana 
Hort.  Soc.  for  1899,  pp.  119-124 ;  in  Indiana 
Bull,  of  Char,  and  Cor.,  March,  1900,  pp. 
10-16. 

55.  Notes  on   Indiana  birds.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1899,  pp.  149-151. 

56.  Development  of  the  reformatory  idea 
in  Indiana.    Read  before  the  Local  Council 
of  Women,  Indianapolis,  1899.     Printed  for 
general  distribution  by  the  Indiana  Reform- 


atory,  pp.   12.     Republished   in   Ohio   Bull. 
Char,  and  Cor.,  March,  1900,  pp.  21-30. 

57.  Advantages    and    disadvantages    of 
the   present  system   of   public  care   of   the 
poor.     Read  before  Indiana  Trustees'  Asso- 
ciation,  Dec.   27,   1899.     In   Indiana  Bull. 
Char,  and  Cor.,  March,  1900,  pp.  2-10. 

58.  Facts   about   the   operation   of   the 
new  poor  relief  laws.     In  Proc.  Sixth  An- 
nual Meeting  Indiana  State  Board  of  Com- 
merce, Feb.,  1900,  pp.  1-26 ;  in  Bull.  No.  10, 
Indiana  Bureau  of  Statistics,  March,  1900, 
pp.  8-14 ;  in  Eighth  biennial  report  Indiana 
Bureau  of  Statistics,  1900,  pp.  289-297. 

59.  The    condition    and    needs    of    our 
jails.     From  Proc.  Indiana  State  Conference 
of  Char,  and  Cor.,  1899.     In  Indiana  Bull. 
Char,  and  Cor.,  June,  1900,  pp.  20-25. 

60.  Saving  the  children.    In  Proc.  Nat. 
Conf.  Char,  and  Cor.  for  1901,  pp.  204-213. 

61.  A  notable  factor  of  social  degenera- 
tion.     Vice-presidential   address,    Section   of 
Anthropology.      In  Proc.   A.   A.   A.    S.,   for 

1901,  L,  pp.  337-353.     Reprinted  for  gen- 
eral distribution  in  England  by  the  Lanca- 
shire and  Cheshire  Society  for  the  Perma- 
nent   Care    of    the    Feeble-minded,    pp.    10. 
Also  in   Science,  N.   S.,  XIV,  pp.  444-453. 
(Sept.  20,  1901)  ;  and  in  Indiana  Bull.  Char, 
and  Cor.,  Dec.,  1901,  pp.  17-27. 

62.  State    visitation    of    children.       In 
Proc.  Illinois  Conf.  of  Char.,  1901,  pp.  14-19. 

63.  Education  and  crime.     In  Ad.  and 
Proc.  Nat.  Edu.  Asso.,  Detroit,  Mich.,  1901, 
pp.   560-564 ;   also   in   Ann.    Rep.    Supt.   of 
Pub.   Inst.,  for   1901,  p.   13-20. 

64.  State  supervision  and  administration 
— the  experience  in  Indiana.     In  Proc.  Nat. 
Conf.  Char,  and  Cor.  for  1902,  pp.  144-146. 

65.  The  prevention  of  crime.     In  Proc. 
Minnesota   State  Conf.   Char,  and  Cor.  for 

1902,  pp.  61-68. 

66.  Report  of  committee  on  discharged 
prisoners.     In  Proc.  Nat.  Pris.  Asso.,  1902, 
pp.  283-323.     Reprinted  for  general  distri- 


266 


Callahan  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


bution  by  the  Indiana  Boys'   School,   1903, 
pp.   44. 

67.  County   and   municipal   corrections. 
In  Proc.  Nat.  Conf.  Char,  and  Cor.  for  1903, 
pp.  392-400 ;  extract  in  Indiana  Bull.  Char, 
and  Cor.,  Dec.,   1903,  pp.  4-7. 

68.  Child  problems  and  their  treatment. 
From  Proc.  Ohio  State  Conf.  Char,  and  Cor. 
for   1903.      In  Ohio   Bull.   Char,   and   Cor., 
XIX.  pp.  75-81.     (Dec.,  1903.) 

69.  Conditions  affecting  the  distribution 
of  birds   in   Indiana.      (Contributions   from 
the  Zoological  Laboratory,  Indiana  Univer- 
sity, No.  37.)     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci. 
for  1903. 

70.  Ethnology.    Article  in  Encyclopedia 
Americana,  VII.      (1904.) 

71.  The  success  of  an  Indiana  experi- 
ment.    In  Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Pol.   Soc.   Sci., 
XXIII,  pp.  202-204.      (March,  1904.) 


RICHARD  ELLSWORTH  CALL,  A.B.  (1890), 
A.M.  (1891).  Curator,  Children's  Mu- 
seum, Brooklyn  Institute  of  Arts, 
Brooklyn. 

1.  On  the  quaternary  and  recent  Mol- 
lusca  of  the  Great  Basin,  with  descriptions 
of  new  forms.     In  U.   S.  Geol.  Surv.  Bull. 
II,  pp.  355-420.      (1884.) 

2.  Memoranda  on  a  collection  of  fishes 
from    the    Ozark    region    of    Missouri.      In 
Proc.  Davenport  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  V,  p.  73. 
(1887.) 

3.  Description  of  new  Unios  from  the 
Ozark  region  of  Missouri.     In  Proc.  U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1889,  X,  pp.  498-500,  2  plates. 

4.  On  a  new  Post-Pleiocene  Limna?id 
from  California.     In  Am.  Geol.,  I,  p.  146. 
(1888.)     In  Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1889, 
p.  17. 

5.  On   the   gross   anatomy   of   Campe- 
loma.     In   Am.    Nat.,   for    1889.      In   Proc. 
Iowa  Acad.   Sci.  for  1889,  p.  16. 

6.  On  the   ferns   of  the  Ozark  region 


of  Missouri.     In  Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1889,  pp.   15-16. 

7.  The  parvus  group  of  Uuionidse.    In 
Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1889,  pp.  45-51. 

8.  The  geology  of  Crowley's  Ridge,  Ar- 
kansas.    In  Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1889, 
pp.  52-53. 

9.  The  chemistry  of  soils.     In  North- 
west, VII,  No.  404,  p.  11 ;  VI,  No.  410,  p.  7. 

10.  The   geology   of   eastern   Arkansas. 
In  Proc.  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1889,  pp.  87-95. 

11.  The  life  and  writings  of  Rafinesque. 
(Publications   Filson  Club,   Louisville,   Ky., 
vol.  X.)     Louisville,  1895.     Pp.  227. 

12.  Sketch  of  the  life,  the  ichthyologic 
work,   and  the  ichthyologic  bibliography  of 
Rafinesque.     In  Rafinesque-Schmaltz's  'Ich- 
thyologia  Ohiensis'    (Cleveland,  1899).     Pp. 
175. 


JAMES  MORTON  CALLAHAN,  A.B.  (1894), 
A.M.  (1895),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  His- 
tory and  Political  Science,  University 
of  West  Virginia,  Morgantown,  W.  Va. 

1.  Outlines    of    physiology.      Chicago, 

1890.  Pp.  50. 

2.  Outlines  of  civil  government.     Chi- 
cago,  1890.     Pp.  48. 

3.  Outlines   of   United    States   history 
(with  notes).     Chicago,  1891.     Pp.  60. 

4.  Outlines    of    geography.      Chicago, 

1891.  Pp.  51. 

5.  Outlines    and    experiments    in    bot- 
any.    Chicago,  1892.     Pp.  53. 

6.  Outlines  and  experimental  work  in 
physiology.     Boston,  1892.     Pp.  121. 

7.  A  guide  to  actual  work  in  practical 
physiology.     Chicago,   1893.     Pp.   108. 

8.  The  agreement  of  1817 — Reduction 
of  naval  forces  on  the  American  lakes.     In 
Ann.   Rep.   Am.  Hist.   Assoc.   for   1895,  pp. 
369-392.     (1896.) 

9.  The  northern  lake   frontier   during 
the  Civil  War.     In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist.  As- 
soc. for  1896,  I,  pp.  337-359.     (1897.) 


267 


•  Indiana  University 


[  Callahan 


10.  Cuba  aud  Anglo-American  relations. 
In  Ann.  Rep.  Am.  Hist.  Assoc.  for  1897,  I, 
pp.  195-215.     (1898.) 

11.  Review  of  Jesse  Macy's  'The  Eng- 
lish constitution.'    In  Citizen  for  July  1898. 

12.  The    neutrality    of    the    American 
Lakes,  and  Anglo-American  relations.     Bal- 
timore, 1898.     Pp.  199. 

13.  Diplomatic  relations  of  the  Confed- 
erate States  with  England  (1861-1865).    In 
Ann.   Rep.   Am.   Hist.   Assoc.  for  1898,  pp. 
267-283.      (1899.) 

14.  Cuba    and    international    relations. 
Baltimore,  1899.     Pp.  503. 

15.  American   relations    in    the   Pacific 
and  the  Far  East.     Baltimore,  1901.     Pp. 
177. 

16.  Great    heroes    and    leaders.      New 
York,   1901.     Pp.  250. 

17.  Central  America  and  the  American 
foreign  policy.     Washington,  1902.     Pp.  25. 

18.  Confederate  archives.    In  South  At- 
lantic Quarterly  for  1903,  pp.  14. 

19.  The     American     expansion     policy. 
Baltimore,  1904.     Pp.  350. 

20.  Introduction    to    American    foreign 
policy.     I.     The  Monroe  Doctrine  and  inter- 
American  relations.     1904.     Pp.  300. 

21.  The  United  States  and  Canada  :     A 
study  in  international   history.     Pp.  275. 


JOHN  WESLEY  CARR,  A.B.  (1885),  A.M. 
(1890).  Superintendent  of  Schools, 
Anderson,  Ind. 

1.  The  province  of  the  supervisor.    In 
Proc.  Nat.  Edu.  Asso.  for  1897,  pp.  235-236. 

2.  Course  of  study  for  pupils  who  can 
not  complete   high   school   work.      In   Proc. 
Nat.  Edu.  Asso.  for  1899,  pp.  378-379. 

3.  Response  to  address  of  welcome  at 
Charleston,  S.  C.    In  Proc.  Nat.  Edu.  Asso. 
for  1900,  pp.  52-54. 

4.  Does  Indiana  need  additional  Nor- 
mal School  facilities?     (In  conjunction  with 
R.  A.  Ogg  and  C.  M.  McDaniel.)     In  Rep. 


Indiana    Town    and    City    Superintendents' 
Asso.    for    1902. 

5.  Best    methods    of    electing    school 
boards.    In  Proc.  Nat.  Edu.  Asso.  for  1903, 
pp.  159-161. 

6.  The   school    curriculum.      In    Proc. 
Nat.  Edu.  Asso.  for  1903,  p.  263. 

7.  Educational  progress  in  Indiana.  In 
Proc.  Nat.  Edu.  Asso.  for  1903,  pp.  798-800. 

8.  Teaching  of  religion   in  the  public 
schools.      In    Proc.    Nat.    Educ.    Assoc.    for 
1903,  p.  361. 

9.  Percentage    of    boys    leaving    high 
school.    In  Proc.  Nat.  Educ.  Assoc.  for  1903, 
p.  798. 

10.  Moral  and  religious  training  of  chil- 
dren in  the  public  schools.     In  Proc.  Reli- 
gious Edu.  Asso.  for  1903. 

11.  Moral  instruction  in  the  Anderson 
public    schools.      In    Proc.    Religious    Edu. 
Asso.  for  1904. 

12.  Course  of  instruction  in  morals.    In 
New  York  Sch.  Jour. 

13.  A    permanent    teaching    profession. 
In  New  York  Sch.  Jour. 


WILLIAM  DAVIS  CHAMBERS,  A.B.    (1898). 
Teacher,  Muncie,  Ind. 

1.  Mid-winter   science.      In    Educator- 
Journal,  III,  p.  294.     (Jan.,  1903.) 

2.  Mid-winter  science — iron  and  steel. 
In     Educator-Journal,     III,     pp.     344-345. 
(April,  1903.) 


OSCAR  CHRISMAN,  A.B.  (1888),  A.M. 
(1893),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Paidology, 
Ohio  University,  Athens,  Ohio. 

1.  The  hearing  of  children.     In  Ped. 
Sem.,  II,  pp.  397-441.     (Dec.,  1893.) 

2.  Secret '  language    of    children.      In 
Science,  XXII,  pp.  303-305;  XXIII,  pp.  18- 
19.     (Dec.  1,  1893,  and  Jan.  12,  1894.) 

3.  Child-study,   a   new   department   of 
education.      In    Forum,    XVI,    pp.    728-736. 
(Feb.,  1894.) 


268 


Chrisman] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


4.  The  science  of  the  child.     In  South 
Dakota   Educator,   VII,   pp.   11-12. 

5.  Vertical    writing.      In    Texas    Sch. 
Jour,  for  1894. 

6.  Contribution    to    a    symposium    on 
child-study.      In    Interstate    Sch.    Rev.    for 
June,  1894,  p.  225. 

7.  One    year    with    a    little    girl.      In 
Edu.  Rev.,  IX,  pp.  52-71.      (Jan.,  1895.) 

8.  Paidologie,  Entwurf  zu   einer  Wis- 
senschaft  des  Kindes.     Inaugural  Disserta- 
tion der   philosophischen  Fakultat  der  Uni- 
versitiit    Jena    zur    Erlangung    der    Doktor- 
wiirde.     Jena,  1896.     Pp.  96. 

9.  Children's     secret     language.        In 
Child-Study   Mo.,   II,   pp.  202-210.      (Sept., 
1896.) 

10.  How  a  story  affected  a  child.     In 
Child-Study  Mo.,   II,  pp.  650-661.      (April, 
1897.) 

11.  The  hearing  of  school  children.     In 
North- Western  Mo.,  VIII,  pp.  31-35.     (July 
1897.) 

12.  Child-study    in    Texas.     In    Child- 
Study  Mo.,  Ill,  pp.  287-289.     (Nov.,  1897.) 
(Rep.     Child-Study     Section    Texas     State 
Teachers'  Asso.,  held  at  Waco,  June  29-July 
2,  1897.) 

13.  Motor   control :      Its    place    in   the 
physical  and  psychical  life  of  the  child.     In 
State  Normal  Mo.,  X,  pp.  3-4.     (Oct.,  1897/1 

14.  The  secret  language  of  children.    In 
North-Western  Mo.,  VIII,  pp.  187-193,  375- 
379,  649-651.      (Oct.,   1897,  Jan.   and  June, 
1898.) 

15.  Exceptional.       In     State     Normal 
Mo.,  X,  pp.   51-52.      (Jan.,   1898.) 

16.  Religious     ideas     of     a     child.      In 
Child-Study  Mo.,  Ill,  pp.  516-528.      (Jan., 
1898.) 

17.  Results   of  child-study.     In   Educa- 
tion, XVIII,  pp.  323-332.      (Feb.,  1898.) 

18.  How  to  use  the  library.     In  West- 
ern    College     Mag.,     XIX,     pp.     502-505. 
(March,  1898.) 

19.  Paidology,  the  science  of  the  child. 


In  Educ.  Rev.,  XV,  pp.  269-284.      (March, 
1898.) 

20.  The   secret   language   of   childhood. 
In  €entury,  LVI,  pp.  54-58.      (May,  1898.) 

21.  Religious    periods    of    child-growth. 
In    Educ.     Rev.,    XVI,    pp.    40-48.      (June, 
1898.) 

22.  Review  of  Nathan  Oppenheim's  'De- 
velopment   of    the    child.'      In    Educ.    Rev., 
XVI,  pp.  279-282.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

23.  Child  and  parent.     In  North-West- 
ern Mo.,  IX,  pp.  135-138,  180-183.      (Nov. 
and  Dec.,  1898.) 

24.  Opening  remarks  as  president  of  the 
Kansas  Society  for  Child-Study.     In  Child- 
Study  Mo.,  IV,  pp.  451-452.     (Feb.,  1899.) 

25.  Editorial   for   the    Child-Study   De- 
partment.    In  North-Western  Mo.,  IX,  pp. 
275-276.      (Feb.,  1899.) 

26.  The    pubescent    period.     In  Educa- 
tion, XIX,  pp.  342-347.     (Feb.,  1899.) 

27.  Child  and  teacher.     In  Jour.  Ped., 
XII,  pp.  112-125.      (May,  1899.) 

28.  Courses     of     study     for     Normal 
Schools.    In  Arena,  XXII,  pp.  56-60.    (July, 
1899.) 

29.  Outline     in     Paidology — the     child 
among  ancient   peoples.     Arranged   for   the 
'Study    Outlines     for     Clubs,'   prepared    by 
the  Educational  Committee  of  the  National 
Congress  of  Mothers,  1900. 

30.  Review  of   Stuart  H.   Rowe's  'The 
physical    nature   of   the   child   and    how   to 
study  it.'     In  Educ.   Rev.,  XIX,  pp.  87-89. 

(Jan.,  1900.) 

31.  Evolution  and  definition  of  Paidol- 
ogy.     In    Paidology,    I,    pp.    2-20.      (July, 
1900.) 

32.  The  science  of  the  child.    In  Quart. 
Rep.   Nat.   Cong,  of  Mothers,   I,  pp.   35-46. 
(Sept.,   1900.) 

33.  Review      of      Milicent      Washburn 
Shinn's    'Notes    on    the    development    of    a 
child.'      In    Educ.    Rev.,    II,    pp.    192-184. 
(Sept.,  1900.) 

34.  One   child's   disposition   toward   the 


269 


Indiana  University 


[Chrisman 


opposite  sex.     In  Paidology,  I,  pp.  10C-112. 
(Oct.,  1900.) 

35.  Bibliography     of     Paidology.       In 
Paidology,  I,  pp.  200-226.     (Jan.,  1901.) 

36.  Education  of  the  home-woman.     In 
Paidology,  I,  pp.  303-333.     (April,  1901.) 

37.  Editor    of    'Paidology,    the    Science 
of  the  Child.'     A  magazine  devoted  to  the 
scientific    and   practical    study   of    children. 
Published  quarterly.     Volume  I,  1900-1901. 

38.  Education  for  the  home.    In  Arena, 
XXX,  pp.  401-409.     (Oct.,  1903.) 

39.  The    department    of    Paidology    in 
Ohio   University.     In  Jour.   Childhood   and 
Adolescence,  III,  pp.  50-56.     (Jan.,  1904.) 


WILBUR  ADELMAN  COGSHALL,  A.M.  (1903). 
See  Faculty  list. 


CHARLES    PATTON    CLARK,    A.B.     (1901). 
Student,  Rush  Medical  College,  Chicago. 

1.  Pneumococcal  Bronchiolitis  (capil- 
lary bronchitis).  (Joint  author  with  F.  H. 
Batman.)  In  Jour,  of  Infectious  Diseases, 
I,  pp.  229-235.  (March  19,  1904.) 


HOWARD  WALTON  CLARK,  A.B.  (1896),  A.M. 
(1902).  Preparator  in  Zoology,  Field 
Columbian  Museum,  Chicago. 

1.  The  flora  of  Eagle  Lake  and  vicin- 
ity. In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901, 
pp.  128-192.  7  plates. 


HAIRY  EVAN  COBLENTZ,  A.B.  (1894),  A.M. 
Teacher  of  English,  South  Division 
High  School,  Milwaukee. 

1.  The   blank   verse    of   Matthew    Ar- 
nold's  'Sohrab  and   Rustum.'    In   Poet-Lore 
VII,  pp.  497-505.      (Oct.,  1895.) 

2.  A  Rime-Index  to  the  parent  cycle  of 
the  York  mystery  plays  and  of  a  portion  of 
the  Woodkirk   'Conspiracio   et   Captio.'      In 
Pub.  Mod.  Lang.  Asso.,  X,  pp.  487-557. 

3.  Irving's  Life  of  Goldsmith.    Edited 
with    notes    and    questions.     Boston,    1904. 
Pp.  xxix,  296. 


EDWARD  CONRADI,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
(1898).  Fellow  in  Clark  University, 
Worcester,  Mass. 

1.  School  hygiene.     Translation  of  Dr. 
Ludwig    Kotelmann's    'Ueber    Schulgesund- 
heitspflege.'      (Joint     author    with     J.     A. 
Bergstrom.)      Syracuse,   N.   Y.,   1899.     Pp. 
391. 

2.  Children's  interests  in  words,  slang, 
stories,  etc.    In  Ped.  Sem.,  X,  pp.  359-404. 


JAMES  B.  COOK,  A.B.    (1890).     Died  July 
19,  1895,  at  Brookville,  Ind. 

1.     The  sugar  trust.    In  Statesman  for 

1890. 


JOHN  MERLE  COULTER,  Ph.D.  (1884).  Pres- 
ident of  Indiana  University  and  Profes- 
sor of  Botany,  1891-93.  Now  head  of 
the  Department  of  Botany  and  Profes- 
sor of  Morphology,  University  of  Chi- 
cago. 

1.  Botany  of  the  U.  S.  Geological  Sur- 
vey of  Montana,  Idaho,  Wyoming,  and  Utah. 
Pp.  747-792.      (April,  1873.) 

2.  Snyopsis   of   the  flora  of  Colorado. 
(Joint  author  with  T.  C.  Porter.)      In  the 
U.  S.  Geological  and  Geographical  Survey  of 
Territories.     Misc.   publication   No.  4.     180 
pages.    Washington.     (March,  1874.) 

3.  A  partial  list  of  the  flora  of  Jeffer- 
son county,  Indiana.     In  Geological  Survey 
of  Indiana  for  1874,   pp.   230-273.      (Dec., 
1874.) 

4.  Koliftions    of    the    scientific    to    the 
practical    in    botany.      In    Trans.    Indiana 
Hort.  Soc.  for  1881,  pp.  29-39.    (Dec.,  1880.) 

5.  Catalogue  of  the  plants  of  Indiana. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  R.  Barnes.)      Craw- 
fordsville,  Indiana,  1881.     Pp.  38. 

6.  The    native    flora   of    Indiana.      In 


270 


Coulter  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


Trans.  Indiana  Hort.  Soc.  for  1882,  pp.  70- 
78.     (Dec.,  1881.) 

7.  Development  of  a  dandelion  flower. 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XVII,  pp.  1211-1217.      (Dec., 
1883.) 

8.  Some  lessons  in  botany.    The  seed ; 
germination,  or  the  seed  in  action ;  the  root. 
In  Indiana  Farmer.     (1884.) 

9.  Manual  of  the  botany  of  the  Rocky 
Mountain   region.      New   York,    1885.      Pp. 
xvi,  452. 

10.  Pollen  spores   of  Tradescantia  vir- 
ginica.     (Joint  author  witn  J.  N.  Rose.)     In 
Bot.  Gaz.,  XI,  pp.  10-14.     (Jan.,  1886.) 

11.  Sketch  of  Edmond  Boissier.   In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XI,  pp.  39-40.     (Feb.,  1886.) 

12.  Revision  of  North  American  Hyp- 
pericacese.      In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XI.    pp.    78-88, 
106-112.     (April,  May,  1886.) 

13.  Primula  cusickiana  Gray.     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XI,  p.  91.     (April,  1886.) 

14.  Synopsis  of  North  American  pines. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  N.   Rose.)      In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XI,  pp.  256-262,  302-309.     (Oct.,  Nov., 
1886.) 

15.  Some  notes  on  Hypericum.    In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XI,  pp.  275-276.     (Oct.,  1886.) 

16.  Notes  on  Umbelliferaj  of  the  East- 
ern United  States.     (Joint  author  with  J.  N. 
Rose.)      In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XII.      (1887.) 

17.  Some  western  plants.    In  Bot.  Gaz., 
XII,  p.  252.     (Oct.,  1887.) 

18.  Evolution  in  the  plant  kingdom.    In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1887,  pp.  322- 
335. 

19.  Revision   of   North   American    Um- 
belliferse.      (Joint  author  with  J.  N.  Rose.) 
Washington,  1888.    Pp.  144.  9  plates. 

20.  Continuity  of  protoplasm.     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XIV,  pp.  82-83.     (March,  1889.) 

21.  Some  notes  on  Hypericum.    In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XIV,  p.  200.     (August,  1889.) 

22.  Notes   on   North   American   Umbel- 
liferse.      (Joint   author   with   J.    N.   Rose.) 
In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XIV,    pp.    274-284     (Nov., 
1889)  ;  XV,  pp.  259-261  (Oct.,  1890). 


23.  Manual  of  the  botany  of  the  North 
ern  United  States.     (Joint  author  with  Asa 
Gray    and    Sereno    Watson.)       New    York, 
1889.     Pp.  760.     25  plates. 

24.  A     new     genus     of     Umbelliferae. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  N.   Rose.)      In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XV,  pp.  15-16.     (Jan.,  1890.) 

25.  A  revision  of  North  American  Cor- 
nacea?.      (Joint  author  with  W.  H.  Evans.) 
In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XV,  pp.  30-39,  86-97.     (Feb., 
April,  1890.) 

26.  Sketch  of  Charles  C.  Parry.   In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XV,  pp.  66-68.     (March,  1890.) 

27.  Penicillium  and  corrosive  sublimate. 
In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XV,    pp.    69-70.       (March, 
1890.) 

28.  Geographical  distribution  of  North 
American  Umbelliferse.     In  Proc.  A.  A.  A. 
S.,  XXXIX,  pp.  292-298.     (August,  1890.) 

29.  Pithecolobium     texense.       In     Bot. 
Gaz.,  XV,  pp.  269-270.     (Oct.,  1890.) 

30.  Actinella     texana.       (Joint     author 
with  J.  N.  Rose.)     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVI,  pp. 
27-28.      (Jan.,   1891.) 

31.  New      or      noteworthy      Compositse 
from  Guatemala.     In  Bot.   Gaz.,   XVI,   pp. 
95-102.     (April,  1891.) 

32.  Some  new   Solanacese  from  Guate- 
mala.    In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XVI,    pp.    144-145. 
(May,  1891.) 

33.  Practical    education.      Indianapolis, 
1891.     Pp.  16. 

34.  The    future    of   systematic    botany. 
In     Proc.     A.    A.     A.     S.,     XL,    pp.    3-14. 
(August,  1891.) 

35.  The    future    of   systematic    botany. 
In   Bot.    Gaz.,   XVI,   pp.   243-254.      (Sept., 
1891.) 

36.  Botany  and  horticulture.    In  Trans. 
Indiana    Hort.    Soc.    for    1891,    pp.    30-33. 
(Dec.,  1891.) 

37.  Sketch  of  Sereno  Watson.     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XVII,  pp.  137-141.     (May,  1892.) 

38.  Some  new  North  American  plants. 
(Joint  author  with  E.  M.  Fisher.)     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XVII,  pp.  348-353.     (Nov.,  1892.) 


271 


Indiana  University 


[  Coulter 


39.  Sullivantia      hapemani.        In     Bot. 
Gaz.,  XVII,  p.  421.     (Dec.,  1892.) 

40.  Notes  on   North  American  Umbel- 
lifera1.       (Joint   author   with   J.    N.    Rose.) 
In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XVIII,    pp.    54-56.       (Feb., 
1893.) 

41.  Preliminary  revision  of  North  Amer- 
ican   species    of    Cactus,    Anhalonium,    and 
Lophophora.     In  Contrib.  U.  S.  Nat.  Herb- 
arium, III,  pp.  91-132.     (March,  1894.) 

42.  Botany     of     Western     Texas.       In 
Contrib.  U.  S.  Nat.  Herbarium,  li,  p.  588. 
(1891,  1892,  1894.) 

43.  Formula?  for  life  histories.     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XX,  pp.  31-32.     (Jan.,  1895.) 

44.  New      or      noteworthy      Composites 
from  Guatemala.     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XX,  pp.  41- 
54.     (Feb.,  1895.) 

45.  Musineon    of    Rafmesque.       (Joint 
author   with   J.   N.   Rose.)      In   Bot.   Gaz., 
XX,  pp.  258-260.     (June,  1895.) 

46.  The  botanical   work  of  the  govern- 
ment.     In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XX.    pp.    264-268. 
(June,  1895.) 

47.  The     botanical     outlook.      Lincoln, 
1895.     Pp.  28. 

48.  Deanea,    a    new    genus    of    Umbel- 
liferse    from    Mexico.      (Joint    author    with 
J.  N.  Rose.)      In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XX,  pp.  372- 
373.     (August,  1895.) 

49.  Preliminary   revision  of  the   North 
American  species   of   Echinocactus,   Cereus, 
and  Opuntia.    In  U.  S.  Nat.  Herbarium,  III, 
IV,  pp.  355-462.     (Dec.,  1895.) 

50.  Plants   in  their  environment.     Chi- 
cago, 1896.     Pp.  12. 

51.  Review  of  'Missouri  Botanical  Gar- 
den,   7th    Annual    report.'     In    Bot.    Gaz., 
XXII,  pp.  59-60.     (July,  1896.) 

52.  Review  of  E.  Warming's  'Lehrbuch 
der  b'kologischen  Pflanzengeographie.'  In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXII,  pp.  173-175.     (August,  1896.) 

53.  Review  of  Mitford  Freeman's  'The 
bamboo   garden.'    In  Bot.   Gaz.,   XXII,  pp. 
177-178.     (August,  1896.) 

54.  Review   of   N.    L.    Britton    and   A. 


Brown's  'An  illustrated  flora  of  the  north- 
ern United  States,  Canada  and  the  British 
possessions.'  In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXII,  pp.  269- 
270;  XXIV,  pp.  120-121;  XXVI,  pp.  281- 
282.  (Sept.,  1896 ;  Aug.,  1897 ;  Oct.,  1898.) 

55.  Evolution.     Chicago,  1897.     Pp.  14. 

56.  Notes  on  the  fertilization  and  em- 
bryogeny  of  Conifers.    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIII, 
pp.  40-43.     (Jan.,  1897.) 

57.  Review  of  W.  P.  Hiern's  'Catalogue 
of  the  African  plants  collected  by  Dr.  F. 
Welwitsch.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIII,  pp.  210- 
211.     (March,  1897.) 

58.  Review  of  W.  J.  Beal's  'Grasses  of 
North    America.'      In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XXIII, 
pp.  212-213.     (March,  1897.) 

59.  Review  of  J.  C.  Willis's  'A  manual 
and  dictionary  of  the  flowering  plants  and 
ferns.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIII,  pp.  213-214. 
(March,  1897.) 

60.  Revision  of  Lila?opsis.      (Joint  au- 
thor with  J.  N.  Rose.)     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIV, 
pp.  47-49.     (July,  1897.) 

61.  Review  of  Asa  Gray's   'Synoptical 
flora    of    North    America.'      In    Bot.    Gaz., 
XXIV,  pp.  121-122.     (August,  1897.) 

62.  Review  of  M.  Gurke's  'Plants  Eu- 
ropaeae.'      In    Bot.    Gaz.,    XXIV,    p.    122. 
(August,  1897.) 

63.  Review  of  A.  W.  Chapman's  'Flora 
of   the  southern   United    States.'      In   Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXIV,  p.  123.     (August,  1897.) 

64.  Review  of  M.  W.  Morley's  'A  few 
familiar  flowers.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIV,  p. 
124.     (August,  1897.) 

65.  Review  of  'Cytologische  Studien  aas 
dem    Bonner    botanischen    Institut,'    by    E. 
Strasburger,  W.  J.  Osterhout,  and  others.    In 
Bot.    Gaz.,    XXIV,    pp.    216-220.       (Sept., 
1897.) 

66.  Review   of   C.    C.   Curtis's   'A   text 
book  of  general  botany.'     In  Edu.  Rev.  for 
1898. 

67.  .Review  of  J.  R.  Green's  'A  manual 
of  botany.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXV,  pp.  62-63. 
(Jan.,  1898.) 


272 


Coulter  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


68.  Review  of  W.  W.  Bailey's  'Botan- 
ical note  book.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXV,  pp. 
63-64.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

69.  Notes  on  Lilaeopsis.     (Joint  author 
with  J.  N.  Rose.)     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXV,  pp. 
53-54.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

70.  Contribution  to  the  life  history  of 
Ranunculus.    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXV,  pp.  73-88. 
(Feb.,  1898.) 

71.  Review    of    Mrs.    L.    L.    Wilson's 
'Nature   study   in   elementary   schools.'      In 
Botanical     Gazette,     XXV,     pp.     209-210. 
(March,  1898.) 

72.  Review   of  H.   Christ's   'Die   Farn- 
krauter  der  Erde.'  In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXV,  pp. 
283-284.     (April,  1898.) 

73.  Review  of  C.  H.  Clark's  'A  labora- 
tory manual  in  practical  botany.'     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXV,  pp.  367-368.     (May,  1898.) 

74.  The  origin  of  Gymnosperms  and  the 
seed  habit.     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVI,  pp.  153- 
168.     (Sept.,  1898.)     Also  in  Science,  VIII, 
pp.  377-385.     (Sept.,  1898.) 

75.  Review  of  C.  R.  Barnes's  'Plant  life.' 
In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVI,  pp.  280-281.      (Oct., 
1898.) 

76.  Review      of      'Missouri      Botanical 
Garden,  9th  annual   report.'    In  Bot.   Gaz., 
XXVI,  pp.  282-283.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

77.  Review    of    Th.     Durand    and     H. 
Schinz's    'Conspectus    Florae    Africae.'      In 
Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVI,  pp.  283-284.    (Oct.,  1898,) 

78.  Review  of  A.   Schneider's  'A  guide 
to    the    study    of    lichens.'      In    Bot.    Gaz., 
XXVI,  pp.  284-285.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

79.  Review   of   G.    F.   Atkinson's    'Ele- 
mentary botany.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVI,  pp. 
440-441.      (Dec.,  1898.) 

80.  Plant  relations.     New   York,  1899. 
Pp.  vii,  266.    214  plates. 

81.  Plant  structures.   'New  York,  1899. 
Pp.  vii,  348.     289  plates. 

82.  Review  of  A.  Engler's  'Monograph- 
ien      afrikanischer      Pflanzenfamilien      und 
Gattungen.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVII,  pp.  72- 
73.      (Jan.,  1899.) 


83.  Review   of    S.    H.    Vine's   'An  ele- 
mentary text-book  of  botany.'  In  Bot.  Gaz., 

XXVII,  pp.  141-142.     (Feb.,  1899.) 

84.  Review  of  D.  Grecescu's  'Conspec- 
tus florei  Romainei.'    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVII, 
pp.   142-143.      (Feb.,   1899.) 

85.  Review    of    I.     Urban's    'Symbolse 
Antillanse  seu  fundamenta  florae  Indise  occi- 
dentalis.'     In   Bot.    Gaz.,   XXVII,   p.    143. 
(Feb.,  1899.) 

86.  Review   of   G.    F.   Atkinson's   'Ele- 
mentary botany.'     In  Sch.  Rev.,  Feb.,  1896, 
pp.  114-115. 

87.  Review  of  Gibb  E.   Hughes's   'The 
making  of  a  daisy.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVII, 
pp.  217-218.     (March,  1899.) 

88.  Review  of  Alice  M.  Davidson's  'Cal- 
ifornian    plants   in   their   homes.'      In    Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXVII,  p.  218.     (March,  1899.) 

89.  Review  of  D.   H.  Campbell's  'Lec- 
tures on  the  evolution  of  plants.'     In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXVII,  p.  219.     (March,  1899.) 

90.  Plant  societies.     In  Pratt  Institute 
Mo.,  May,  1899,  172-173. 

91.  Review  of  F.  L.  Parson's  'How  to 
know  the  ferns.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVII,  p. 
484.     (June,  1899.) 

92.  Review  of  J.  M.  Lawson's  'A  text- 
book   on    botany.'      In    Bot.    Gaz.,   XXVII, 
484-485.     (June,  1899.) 

93.  Review    of    Alice    LounsDerry's    'A 
guide  to  the  wild  flowers.'     In  Bot.   Gaz., 

XXVIII,  p.  72.     (July,  1899.) 

94.  Review    of    Maud    Going's   'Field, 
forest,  and  wayside  flowers.'     In  Bot.  Gaz., 
XXVIII,  p.  72.     (July,  1899.) 

95.  Review     of     Edw.     Knobel's     'The 
grasses,  sedges,  and  rushes  of  the  northern 
United  States.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVIII,  p. 
72-73.     (July,  1899.) 

96.  The  origin  of  the  leafy  sporophyte. 
In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXVIII,  pp.  46-59.      (July, 
1899.) 

97.  Review  of  Engler  and  Prantl's  'Die 
natiirlichen      Pflanzenfamilien.'        In      Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXVIII,  pp.  217-218.     (Sept.,  1899.) 


273 


Indiana  University 


[Coulter 


98.  The  proper  use  of  science  by  the 
pulpit.  In  Amer.  Jour.  Theology,  III,  pp. 
G41-G53.  (Oct.,  1899.) 

!>'.*.  Analytical  key  to  flowering  plants. 
New  York,  1900.  Pp.  93. 

100.  A  synopsis  of  Mexican  and  Central 
American  Umbellifera?.     (Joint  author  with 
J.  N.  Rose.)     In  Proc.  Wash.  Acad.  Sci.,  I, 
pp.  111-159.     10  plates.      (Jan.,  1900.) 

101.  Review    of    L.    II.    Bailey's   'Cyclo- 
pedia of  American  horticulture.'    Vols.  I-IV. 
In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXIX,  pp.  282-283 ;  XXX,  p. 
277 ;  XXXI,  p.  436 ;  XXXIII,  pp.  467-468. 
(April,  Oct.,  1900 ;  June,  1901 ;  June,  1902.) 

102.  Review  of  G.  F.  Atkinson's  'Lessons 
in  botany.'     In   Bot.   Gaz.,   XXIX,  p.   358. 
(May,  1900.) 

103.  A  pattern   flower.     In  Nature  and 
Art,  VIII,  pp.  2-7.     1  plate.     (June,  1900.) 

104.  Review  of  Harriet  L.  Keeler's  'Our 
native  trees.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXX,  pp.  132- 
133.     (August,  1900.) 

105.  Review       of       Neltje       Blanchan's 
'Nature's  garden.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXX,  pp. 
132-133.     (August,  1900.) 

106.  Review    of    Alice    Lounsberry's    'A 
guide  to  the  trees.'    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXX,  pp. 
132-133.     (August,  1900.) 

107.  Review  of  D.  H.  Scott's  'Studies  in 
fossil  botany.'    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXX,  pp.  352- 
354.     (Nov.,  1900.) 

108.  Morphology        of        Gymnosperms. 
( Joint  author  with  C.  J.  Chamberlain. )    New 
York,  1901.    Pp.  x,  188.     10  plates. 

109.  The  polity  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.    Chi- 
cago, 1901.    Pp.  16. 

110.  The  student  Y.  M.  C.  A.  as  it  relates 
to  the  entire  association  movement.    Chicago, 
1901.     Pp.  14. 

111.  Plant    studies.      New    York,    1901. 
Pp.   ix,  387.     336  plates. 

112.  Review    of   J.    Percival's    'Agricul- 
tural botany  ;  theoretical  and  practical.'     In 
Bot.  Gaz.,  XXXI,  pp.  67-68.     (Jan.,  1901.) 

113.  Review  of  L.  H.  Bailey's  'Botany, 


an  elementary  text-book  for  schools.'  In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXXI,  pp.  129-130.     (Feb.,  1901.) 

114.  Some    problems    in    education.      In 
Educator- Journal,    I,   pp.   405-407,   459-460. 
(April,  May,  1901.) 

115.  Review  of  W.  L.  Jepson's  'A  flora 
of  western  middle  California.'    In  Bot.  Gaz., 
XXXI,  pp.  435-436.     (June,  1901.) 

116.  Review    of    Charles    Mohr's    'Plant 
life  of  Alabama.'     In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXII,  pp. 
371-372.      (Nov.,   1901.) 

117.  Review  of  N.  L.  Britton's  'Manual 
of  the  flora  of  the  northern  states  and  Can- 
ada.'    In   Bot.   Gaz.,   XXXII,  pp.   426-427. 
(Dec.,  1901.) 

118.  Organic  evolution  as  illustrated  by 
plants.     Chicago,  1902.     Pp.  20. 

119.  Review    of    D.    H.    Campbell's    'A 
university  text-book  of  botany.'  In  Bot.  Gaz., 
XXXIV,  pp.  67-68.     (July,  1902.) 

120.  Review  of  A.  Schnedier's  'Powdered 
vegetable  drugs.'    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XXXV,  pp. 
60-61.     (Jan.,  1903.) 

121.  Review  of  H.   Kraemer's  'A  course 
in    botany    and    pharmacognosy.'      In    Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXXV,  pp.  60-61.     (Jan.,  1902.) 

122.  The  embryogeny  of  Zamia.     (Joint 
author  with   C.  J.  Chamberlain.)      In  Bot. 
Gaz.,  XXXV,  pp.  184-195.     (Marcn,  1903.) 

123.  Morphology  of  Angiosperms.    (Joint 
author  with  C.  J.  Chamberlain.)     New  York, 
1903.     Pp.    x,   348.     113   plates. 


EDWIN  COOK  CRAMPTON,  LL.B.  (1889). 
Associate  Editor,  on  editorial  staff  of 
West  Publishing  Co.  and  Keefe-Davisou 
Co.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

1.  'Articles  on  :   False  pretenses ;  false 
personation  ;  fixtures ;  forcible  entry  and  de- 
tainer ;  grand  jury  ;  health  ;  and  infants.    In 
Century  Edition,  American  Digest  of  Law. 
(1900-1901.) 

2.  Articles   on :    Lis   pendens ;   licenses 


274 


Daily  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


to  enter  on  land  ;  life  estates ;  remainders ; 
reversions  ;  powers  ;  supervision  of  the  power 
of  alienation  ;  poor  ;  religious  societies  ;  post- 
ponement ;  principal  and  agent ;  stipula- 
tions ;  subscriptions ;  recording  written  in- 
struments ;  records,  registers.  In  Abbott's 
New  York  Cyclopedic  Digest.  (1901-1903.) 

3.  Articles  on  :  Account ;  action  or  suit 
for  cancellation  of  written  instruments ;  bill 
of  review ;  drainage ;   discovery  and  inspec- 
tion ;   election   of   officers ;    equity ;    eminent 
domain  ;  highways  ;  new  trial ;  garnishment ; 
attachment ;  reformation  of  instruments  ;  in- 
toxicating liquors  ;  injunction  ;  rescission  of 
contracts.      In    Illinois    Cyclopedic    Digest. 
(1902-1903.) 

4.  Articles   on  :   Accounting ;   accounts 
stated  and  open  accounts ;  agency ;  arbitra- 
tion and  award ;   attorneys  and  counselors  ; 
appeal    and    review ;    alteration    of    instru- 
ments ;  writs  of  assistance ;  arrest  and  bind- 
ing over  ;  auction  and  auctioneers  ;  appear- 
ance ;  attachment ;  bail  in  civil  actions ;  bail 
in  criminal  proceedings  ;  breach  of  marriage 
promise  ;    brokers  ;    bridges  ;    canals,    cancel- 
lation of  written  instruments ;  confession  of 
judgment ;  clerks  of  courts  ;  contracts  ;  con- 
flict  of   laws ;    contempt ;    continuance    and 
postponement ;     discovery    and     inspection ; 
equity  ;   eminent  domain.     In  Current  Law 
for  1903-1904. 


NELSON  KENDALL  CROWE,  A.B.  (1851),  A.M. 
(1854).     Clintonville,  Pa. 

1.     A  history  of  the  freedmen's  mission 
of  the  Reformed  Presbyterian  church. 


ELLWOOD  P  CUBBERLEY,  A.B.  (1891),  A.M. 
Associate  Professor  of  Education,  Le- 
land  Stanford  Jr.  University.  Stanford 
University,  Cal. 

1.     Determinative     mineralogy.        Vin- 
cennes,  1895.     Pp.  xx,  200. 


2.  School  organization.     In  Edu.  Rev  , 
XIII,  pp.  163-171.     (1897.) 

3.  Report  of  the  public  schools  of  San 
Diego,    Cal.,   with    courses   or    study.      San 
Diego,  1897.     Pp.  199;  illustrated. 

4.  Report  of  the  public  schools  of  San 
Diego,  Cal.     San  Diego,  1898.     Pp.  15. 

5.  Courses    of    study    for    the    public 
schools  of   San  Francisco.      San  Francisco, 
1900.     Pp.  311. 

6.  A    proposed   act   permitting   of   the 
consolidation  of  rural  schools,  rural  super- 
vision, and  the  transportation  of  pupils.    In 
West.   Jour.   Educ.,   V,  pp.   3-11;   VIII,  pp. 
180-186.      (1900,  1903.) 

7.  Syllabus     of     school     management. 
Boston,  1901.    Pp.  19. 

8.  The  school  situation  in   San  Fran- 
cisco.     In  Educ.    Rev.,    XXI,   pp.   364-383. 
(1901.) 

9.  A  state  tax   for   high   schools.     In 
West.     Jour.     Educ.,     VII,     pp.     604-607. 
(1902.) 

10.  Our    country    school    problem.      In 
West.     Jour.     Educ.,     VIII,     pp.     278-282. 
(1903.) 

11.  Consolidation  of  schools  and  trans- 
portation of  pupils.    In  West.  Jour.  Educ., 
VIII,  p.   80.      (June,   1903.) 

12.  Syllabus  of  lectures  on  the  history 
of  education   in   Europe.     New  York,   1902. 
Pp.  302  ;  7  charts  :  7  maps  ;  39  illustrations. 


GEORGE    ADAMS    CUSTER,    LL.B.     (1897). 
Logansport,  Ind. 

1.  Legal  counselor  and  form  book. 
(Joint  author  with  Charles  A.  Hawkins.) 
Logansport,  Ind.,  1901.  Pp.  645. 


WILLIAM  MITCHELL  DAILY,  A.B.  (1836), 
D.D.  (1851),  LL.D.  President  of  the 
University,  1853-59.  Died  Feb.  5,  1877, 
at  New  Orleans,  La. 

1.     Funeral   discourse  delivered   in   the 


275 


Indiana  University 


I  Daily 


chapel  of  Indiana  University,  Nov.  13,  1851, 
over  the  remains  of  the  late  Rev.  Andrew 
Wylie,  President  of  Indiana  University. 
Indianapolis,  1852.  Pp.  20. 

2.  Inaugural  address  as  President  of 
Indiana  University,  August  2,  1854.    Indian- 
apolis, 1854.     Pp.  20. 

3.  The  heroic  man  :   a  baccalaureate  to 
the  graduating  class  of  the  Indiana  Univer- 
sity at  the  commencement  of  1855.     Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1855.    Pp.  22. 

4.  Our  banner :   a  baccalaureate  to  the 
graduating    class    of    Indiana    University, 
1856.    Bloomington,  Ind.,  1856.     Pp.  22. 

5.  Zaph-nath  Pa-a-ne-ah :    a  baccalau- 
reate to  the  graduating  class  of  Indiana  Uni- 
versity, 1857.    Bloomington,  Ind.,  1857.    Pp. 
24. 

6.  Urim  and  Thummim :    a   baccalau- 
reate to  the  graduating  class  of  Indiana  Uni- 
versity, 1858.    Bloomington,  Ind.,  1858.    Pp. 
23. 


CHARLES  GIDEON  DAVIS,  A.B.  (1898),  Ph.D. 
Instructor  in  German,  University  of 
Illinois,  Urbana,  111. 

1.  Die  Substantiva  auf  ling  im  acht- 
zehnten  Jahrhundert.  Strassburg,  1903.  Pp. 
49. 


Louis  SHERMAN  DAVIS,  A.B.  (1891),  A.M. 
(1892),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


SdlUYLER   COLFAX   DAVISSON,   A.B.    (1890), 

A.M.  (1892),  Sc.D.    See  Faculty  list. 


ALONZO  ALVIN  DEL.ARME,  A.B. (1887),  A.M. 
(1890).  Pastor  First  Baptist  Church, 
Paterson,  N.  J. 

1.  History  of  the  First  Baptist  Church 
of  Norristown,  Pa.  Philadelphia,  1897.  Pp. 
229.  20  plates. 


JOHN    FRANKLIN    DILLON,    B.S.     (1874), 
LL.B.   (1876).     Pierre,  S.  D. 

1.     Pleading  and  practice  in  Dakota. 


J.  B.  DOLAN,  Student  (1896-1897). 

1.  Temperature  of  Turkey  Lake 
(Ind.).  In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1895,  pp.  235-239. 


WILLIAM  COLUMBUS  DRAPER,  B.b.   (1867), 
Trinidad,  Col. 

1.     Esmeralda,  and  other  stories.    Trin- 
idad, Colo.,  1902.     Pp.  120 ;  3  illustrations. 


FLETCHER  BASCOM  DRESSLAR,  A.B.  (1889), 
A.M.  (1892),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Profes- 
sor of  Pedagogy,  University  of  Califor- 
nia, Berkley,  Cal. 

1.  A   review   of   the   genus    Semotilus. 
(Joint   author    with    E.    P.    Bicknell.)      In 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  for  1885. 

2.  A  review  of  the  mackerels   (Scom- 
brinse)     of    America    and    Europe.      (Joint 
author  with  Bert  Fesler.)      In  Bull.  U.   S. 
Fish  Comm.  for  1887. 

3.  Fatigue.     In  Ped.  Sera.,  II.  pp.  102- 
106.     (June,  1892.) 

4.  A   sketch   of  old  schoolhouses.      In 
Ped.  Sem.,  II,  pp.  115-125.     (June,  is'.fj.  > 

5.  Some  influences  which  affect  the  ra- 
pidity of  voluntary  movement.    In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  IV,  pp.  514-527.     (August,  1892.) 

6.  On   facial   vision   and   the   pressure 
sense  of  the  drum  of  the  ear.    In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  \,  pp.  344-350.      (April,  1893.) 

7.  A  new  illusion  for  touch  and  an  ex- 
planation for  the  illusion  of  displacement  of 
certain  cross  lines  in  vision.     In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  VI,  pp.  275-276. 

8.  A  new  and  simple  method  for  com 


270 


Edwards^ 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


paring  the  perception  of  rate  of  movement  in 
the  direct  and  indirect  fields  of  vision.  In 
Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  VI,  p.  312. 

9.     Psychology  of  touch.     In  Am.  Jour. 
Psych.,  VI,  pp.  50-54. 

10.  Outline  for  a  study  of  habit-degen- 
eration.    In  Teachers'   Handbook  for  Chil- 
dren,    published    by     Illinois     Society     for 
Child-Study,  I,  pp.  21-23.     (May,  1895.) 

11.  Preparation     for     history     in     the 
grades.     In  Normal  Exponent  for  1895. 

12.  The  new  psychology  and  its  peda- 
gogical   significance.      In    Proc.    California 
Teachers'  Asso.  for  Dec.,  1895. 

13.  Experiments     in     psychology.       In 
Overland  Mo.  for  Aug.-Dec.,  1896,  and  Feb.- 
June,  1897. 

14.  Education    in    Hawaii.      In    Educ. 
Rev.,  XV,  pp.  50-54.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

15.  Genetic  psychology.     In  Northwest- 
ern Mo.,  IX,  pp.  355-358.     (April,  1899.) 

16.  Guessing,  as  influenced  by  number 
preferences.      In   Pop.    Sci.    Mo.,    LIV,   pp. 
781-786.     (April,  1899.) 


FRANK  DREW,  A.B.  (1890),  A.M.  (1891), 
Ph.D.  Instructor  in  Philosophy,  Indiana 
University,  1895-96.  Now  Professor  of 
Psychology,  State  Normal  School,  Wor- 
cester, Mass. 

1.  Field    notes    on    the    birds    of    San 
Juan    county.    Colorado.     In    Bull.    Nuttall 
Ornith.  Club,  VI.     (1881.) 

2.  On  the  vertical  range  of  birds  in 
Colorado.    In  Auk,  II.     (1885.) 

3.  Adenoids  in  children.    In  Ped.  Sem., 
II,  pp.  307-309.     (March,  1893.) 

4.  Love  poems  of  college  students.     In 
Ped.  Sem.,  II,  pp.  504-505.     (Dec.,  1893.) 

5.  Attention,    experimental    and    criti- 
cal.    In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  VII,  pp.  533-572. 
(July,  1896.) 


JOHN  WALTER  DUNN,  A.B.  (1897).    County 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Knox,  Ind. 

1.  The  Starke  County  (Ind.)  Child 
Study  Association.  In  Child-Study  Mo.,  V, 
No.  1.  (May,  1899.) 


CHARLES  LINCOLN  EDWARDS,  B.S.  (1886), 
A.M.  (1887),  Ph.D.  Professor  of 
Natural  History,  Trinity  College,  Hart- 
ford, Conn. 

1.  The  relation  of  pectoral  muscles  in 
birds  to  the  power  of  flight.     In  Am.  Nat., 
XX,  pp.  25-29.     (Jan.,  1886.) 

2.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
the     Tetraodontidse.       (Joint     author     with 
David  Starr  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1886,  p.  232. 

3.  The  influence  of  warmth  upon  the 
irritability  of  frogs'  muscle  and  nerve.     In 
Studies  from  Biol.  Lab.  Johns  Hopkins  Uni- 
versity. 

4.  An  expression  of  animal  sympathy. 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XXI,  p.  1129.     (Dec.,  1887.) 

5.  Winter  roosting  colonies  of  crows. 
In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  I,  pp.  436-459.     (May, 
1888.) 

6.  Notes  on  the  embryology  of  Mulle- 
ria  Agassizii.  Sel.,  a  Holthurian  common  at 
Green    Turtle    Cay,    Bahamas.      In    Johns 
Hopkins   University   Circular,   VIII,   p.   37. 
(1889.) 

7.  Folk-lore   of    the   Bahama   negroes. 
In    Am.    Jour.     Psych.,     II,    pp.     519-542. 
(August,  1889.) 

8.  Beschreibung  einiger  neuen  Copepo- 
den    und    eines    neuen    copepoden-iihnlichen 
Krebses,  Leuckartella  paradoxa.     In  Archiv 
f.  Naturgeschichte,  Jahrg.  57,  Bd.  I,  p.  35. 
(1891.) 

9.  Some  tales  from  Bahama  folk-lore. 
In  Jour,  of  Am.   Folk-Lore,  IV,  pp.  47-54. 
(1891.) 

10.     Some  tales  from  Bahama  folk-lore. 


277 


Indiana  University 


[Edwards 


Fairy   tales.      In   Jour,    of   Am.    Folk-Lore, 
IV,  pp.  247-252.     (1891.) 

11.  Bahama    songs    and    stories.       In 
Memoirs  of  the  Am.  Folk-Lore  Soc.,  Ill,  p. 
111.     (1895.) 

12.  Notes  on  the  biology  of  Phrynosoma 
cornutum   Harlan.     In   Zool.   Anzeiger,   No. 
498.     (1896.) 

13.  Variation  and  regeneration  in  Syn- 
apta   inherens.      In   Science,   N.    S.,   XI,   p. 
178. 

14.  Animal    myths,    and    their    origin. 
(Address    as    president    of    the    American 
Folk-Lore  Society.)     In  Jour,  of  Am.  Folk- 
Lore  Soc.,  XIII.      (Jan.-March,  1900.) 

15.  The  lower  temperature  limits  of  in- 
cubation for  the  egg  of  the  common  fowl. 
In  Science,  N.  S.,  XII,  pp.  310-311.     (Au- 
gust 24,  1900.) 

16.  Contributions    from    the    biological 
laboratory    of    the    department    of    Natural 
History,    Trinity    College,    Hartford,    Conn. 
Under  the  direction  of  C.  L.  Edwards. 

17.  The  physiological  zero  and  the  in- 
dex of  development  from  the  egg  of  the  do- 
mestic  fowl,   Callus   domesticus.     A  contri- 
bution to  the  subject  of  the  influence  of  tem- 
perature on  growth.    In  Am.  Jour,  of  Physi- 
ology, VI.  pp.  351-397.     (Feb.,  1902.)     Ab- 
stract in  Science,  N.   S.,   XV,   pp.   521-522. 
(April  4,  1902.) 

18.  A  note  on  Phrynosoma.    In  Science, 
N.  S.,  XVII,  pp.  826-827.     (May  22,  1903.) 


ROSA   (SMITH)   EIGENMANN   (Mrs.  Carl  H 
Eigenmann.)     Student,  1880-1882. 

1.  *On  the  occurrence  of  a  species  of 
Cremnobates  at  San  Diego,  California.     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1880,  III,  pp.  147- 
149. 

2.  *Description  of  a  new  gobioid  fish 
(Othonops  eos)  from  San  Diego,  California. 


*  Titles  marked  '•'  appeared  under   the   name 
Rosa  Smith. 


In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1881,  IV,  pp. 
19-21. 

3.  *Description   of   a    new   species   of 
Gobiesox    (Gobiesox    rhessodon)    from    San 
Diego,  California.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1881,  IV,  pp.  140-141. 

4.  *  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Johnston's  Island,  including  descriptions  of 
five  new  species.     (Joint  author  with  Joseph 
Swain.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882, 
V,  pp.  119-143. 

5.  *On  the  life  coloration  of  the  young 
of  Pomacentrus  rubicundus.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  V,  pp.  652-<;r,:;. 

6.  *Description   of   a    new    species   of 
Uranidea  (Uranidea  rhothea)  from  Spokane 
River,  Washington  Territory.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  V,  pp.  347-348. 

7.  *The    life    colors    of    Cremnobates 
integripinnis.  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1883,  VI  pp.  216-217. 

8.  *Notes  on  the  occurrence  of  Gaster- 
osteus  williamsoni  Grd.,  in  an  artesian  well 
at  San  Bernardino,  California.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.   Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  VI,  p.  217. 

9.  *  Notes     on     the     fishes     of     Todos 
Santos    Bay,    Lower   California.      In    Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  VI,  pp.  232-236. 

10.  *Description    of    a   new    species   of 
Squalius.    In  Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1884. 

11.  *Notes    on   fishes  collected   at   San 
Cristobal,  Lower  California,  by  Mr.  Charles 
H.  Townsend,   Assistant,  U.   S.   Fish   Com- 
mission.   In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1885, 
VII,  pp.  551-553. 

12.  *The  fishes  of  San  Diego,  Califor- 
nia.    A  list  in  two  parts.     In  W.  Am.  Sci. 
for  1885,  pp.  45-47,  53-55.      (July,  August. 
1885.) 

13.  *On  the  occurrence  of  a  new  species 
of    Rhinoptera     (R.    encenadse)     in    Todos 
Santos    Bay,    Lower   California.      In    Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1886,  IX,  p.  220. 

14.  *On    Tetraodon    setosus.      In   Bull. 


Eigenmann] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


California  Acad.  Sci.,  II,  No.  6,  pp.  155-156. 
(Nov.  13,  1886.) 

15.  A   chapter   on   sharks.      In   Golden 
Era  for  August,  1887. 

16.  A  chapter  on  sting  rays.    In  Golden 
Era  for   Sept.,   1887,  pp.   489-490. 

17.  Charles  L.  McKay.    In  W.  Am.  Sci. 
for  1887,  pp.  189-191. 

18.  Women  in  science.    In  W.  Am.  Sci. 
for  1887,  pp.  230-236. 

19.  A  list  of  the  American  Gobiidse  and 
Callionymidse,  with  notes  on   the  specimens 
contained   in   the    Museum   of   Comparative 
Zoology,  at  Cambridge,  Mass.     (Joint  author 
with  Carl  H.  Eigenmann.)      In  Proc.  Cali- 
fornia   Acad.    Sci.,    2d    ser.,    I,    pp.    51-78. 
(Jan.  25,  1888.) 

20.  South       American      Nematognathi. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Am.    Nat.,    XXIII,    pp.    647-649.       (July, 
1888.) 

21.  Preliminary  notes  on  South  Ameri- 
can Nematognathi.     I.      (Joint  author  with 
C.    H.    Eigenmann.)      In    Proc.    California 
Acad.   Sci.  2d  ser.,   I,  pp.   119-172.      (July, 
1888. ) 

22.  Cypriouodon   californiensis,   Girard. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)      In 
W.  Am.  Sci.,  V,  pp.  3-4.     (Sept.,  1888.) 

23.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Cyprinodon.       (Joint    author    with    C.    H. 
Eigenmann.)      In  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d 
ser.,    I,    p.    270.      (Jan.    8,    1889.) 

24.  Notes    on    some    California    fishes, 
with     descriptions     of     two     new     species. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)      In 
W.  Am.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  7-8.     (April,  1889.) 

25.  Preliminary  notes  on  South  Ameri- 
can Nematognathi.     II.     (Joint  author  with 
C.    H.    Eigenmann.)      In    Proc.    California 
Acad.  Sci.,  2d  ser.,  II,  pp.  28-56.     (August 
18,    1889.) 

26.  On     the    phosphorescent    spots     of 
Porichthys     margaritatus.        (Joint    author 


with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)      In  W.  Am.  Sci., 
VI,   pp.   32-34.      (May,   1888.) 

27.  Contributions  from   the   San  Diego 
Biological    Laboratory.      I.      (Joint   author 
with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)      In  W.  Am.  Sci., 
VI,  pp.  44-47.     (June,  1889.) 

28.  Notes  from  the  San  Diego  Biologi- 
cal    Laboratory.       The     fishes     of     Cortes 
Banks.      (Joint   author  with   C.   H.   Eigen- 
mann.)     In  W.  Am.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.   123-132. 
(Oct.,  1889.) 

29.  Notes  from  the  San  Diego  Biological 
Laboratory.     II.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Eigenmann.)     In  W.  Am.  feci.,  VI,  pp.  147- 
151.     (Nov.,  1889.) 

30.  A      review      of      the      Erythriniiia1. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmanu. )     In 
Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d  ser.,  II,  pp. 
100-116.     1  plate.     (Nov.  8,  1889.) 

31.  A  revision  of  the  edentulous  genera 
of  Curimatina^.      (Joint  author  with  C.   H. 
Eigenmann.)       In    Ann.    New    York    Acad. 
Sci.,  IV,  pp.  1-32.     (Nov.,  1889.) 

32.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Euprotomicrus.     In  Proc.  California  Acad. 
Sci.,   2d  ser.,   III.      (1890.) 

3.3.     New  California  fishes.    In  Am.  Nat. 
for  1890,  pp.  153-156. 

34.  Additions    to     the    fauna    of     San 
Diego.      (Joint   author   with    C.    H.   Eigen- 
mann.)     In  Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci..  2d 
ser.,  Ill,  pp.  1-25.     (March  24,  1890.) 

35.  A  revision  of  the  South  American 
Nematognathi    or    catfishes.      (Joint    author 
with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)    In  Occasional  pa- 
pers, Proc.  California  Acad.   Sci.,  I,  pp.   1- 
508,  plates,  map.     (July,  1890.) 

36.  Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Se- 
bastodes.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigen- 
mann.)    In  Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d 
ser.,  Ill,  pp.  36-38.     (May  28,  1890.) 

37.  A  catalogue  of  the  fresh-water  fishes 
of  South  America.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Eigenmann.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1891,  XIV,  pp.  1-81. 


279 


Indiana  University 


\_Eigenmann 


38.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  the  Pa- 
cific coast  of  America  north  of  Cerros  island. 

(Joint  author  with  C.  II.  Eigenmann. )  In 
Ann.  New  York  Acad.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  349-358. 
(June,  1892.) 

39.  Recent   additions   to   the   fauna   cf 
California.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigen- 
mann.)     Abstract  in   Proc.    Indiana    Acad. 
Sci.  for  1891,  pp.  159-161. 

40.  New   fishes   from   Western  Canada. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Am.    Nat,     XXVI,    pp.    961-96-*.       (Nov., 
1892.) 

41.  Preliminary     description     of     new 
fishes  from  the  Northwest.      (Joint   author 
with    C.    H.    Eigenmann.)      In    Am.    Nat., 
XXVII,  pp.  151-154.     (Feb.,  1893.) 


WILLIAM  HARRIS  ELSON,  A.B.  (1895). 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Grand 
Rapids,  Michigan. 

1.  Outlines  of  masterpieces  of  Ameri- 
can literature.     Boston,  1893.     Pp.  22. 

2.  The    necessity    of    stimulating    the 
child's    full    mental    power    in    kindergarten 
work.     In   Kindergarten   Magazine,   X,   pp. 
357-363.     (Feb.,  1898.) 


BARTON  WARREN  EVERMANN,  B.S.  (1886), 
A.M.  (1888),  Ph.D.  (1891).  Assistant 
in  charge  Division  of  Scientific  Inquiry, 
Bureau  of  Fisheries,  Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  California  bird  notes.     In  Ornithol- 
ogist and  Oologist,  VI,  p.  7.    (March,  1881.) 

2.  Least  titmouse,  its  nesting  habits  .  n 
California.     In   Ornithologist  and   Oologist, 
VI,  p.  19.     (May,  1881.) 

3.  Large  clutches  of  eggs.     In  Ornithol- 
ogist and  Oologist,  VI,  p.  40.     (July,  1881.) 

4.  Unusual  nesting  site  of  the  chewink. 
In    Ornithologist    and    Oologist,    VI,    p.    61. 
(Oct.,  1881.) 


5.  Animal    analysis.      Chicago,    1882. 
Pp.   iv,   123. 

6.  The  road-runner.     In  Ornithologist 
and  Oologist,  VI,  p.  85.     (Jan.,  1882.) 

7.  American  barn  owl,  Aluco  flammeiw 
americanus    (Aud.)    Ridgw.     In   Ornitholo- 
gist and  Oologist,  VII,  pp.  97-98,  109-110. 
(March,  April,  1882.) 

8.  Bluebirds'    eggs.      In    Ornithologist 
and  Oologist,  VII,  p.  147.     (August,  1882.) 

9.  American   barn   owl,   further  notes. 
In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  VII,  pp.  166- 
167.      (Oct.,   1882.) 

10.  The    black-crested    fly-catcher.      In 
Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  VII,  pp.  169-170, 
177-179.     (Nov.,  Dec.,  1882.) 

11.  Bird  notes  from  Bloomington,  Indi- 
ana.    In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  VIII, 
pp.  27-28.     (April,  1883.) 

12.  A  review  of  the  species  of  Gerres 
found  in  American  waters.      (Joint  author 
with  Seth  E.   Meek.)     In  Proc.,  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.   Phila.   for   1883,   pp.   116-124. 

33.  Bird  migration.  In  American  Field, 
XXI,  pp.  544-545.  (1884.) 

14.  Arrivals  of  birds  at  Camden,  Indi- 
ana, 1884.  In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist, 
IX,  p.  74.  (June,  1884.) 

15.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Harvey 
and  Cowley  counties,  Kansas.  (Joint 
author  with  Morton  W.  Fordice. )  In  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  for  1885,  p.  412 ;  also 
in  Bull.  Washburn  College  Lab.  Nat.  Hist., 

I,  pp.  184-186.     (July,  1886.) 

16.  A  list  of  the  birds  observed  in  Ven- 
tura county,   California.     In  Auk,   III,  pp. 
86-94,  179-186.     (Jan.,  Feb.,  1886.) 

17.  Birds  observed  in   Ventura  county, 
California.    In  Pacific  Science  Mo.,  I,  pp.  77- 
89.     (Jan.,  1886.) 

18.  A  list  of  birds  observed  at  Pensa- 
cola,  Florida.    In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist, 

II,  pp.  81-83,  97-98.     (June,  July,  1886.) 

19.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the  Monongahela  River.     (Joint  author  with 


280 


Evermann~\  Bibliography:     Alumni 


Charles  H.  Bollman.)     In  Proc.  New  York 
Acad.   Sci.  for  1886,  pp.  335-340. 

20.  Descriptions  of  six  new  species  of 
fishes  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  with  notes 
on  other  species.     (Joint  author  with  David 
Starr  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1886,  pp.   466-476. 

21.  A  list  of  the  fishes  observed  in  the 
vicinity  of  Brookville,  Franklin  county,  In- 
diana.   In  Bull.  2,  Brookville  Soc.  Nat.  Hist, 
for  1886,  pp.  1-11. 

22.  A  revision  of  the  American  species 
of  the   genus  Gerres.      (Joint  author   with 
S.   E.    Meek.)      In   Proc.   Acad.    Nat.    Sci., 
Phila.,  for  1886,  pp.  256-272. 

23.  The  food  fishes  of  Indiana.     (Joint 
author  with  D.   S.  Jordan.)     In  Rep.  Indi- 
ana  State   Board   of  Agriculture  for   1886, 
pp.  156-173. 

24.  The  yellow-billed  magpie.     In  Am. 
Nat,  XX,  pp.  607-611.     (July,  1886.) 

25.  A  day  with  the  birds  of  a  Hoosier 
swamp.     In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  II, 
pp.  99-101.     (July,  1886.) 

26.  Some  rare   Indiana  birds.     In  Am. 
Nat.,  XXI,  pp.  290-291.     (March,  1887.) 

27.  Bird  migration.     In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo., 
XXXI,  pp.  803-810.     (April,  1887.) 

28.  Birds   of   Monroe   county,   Indiana. 
In    Hoosier    Naturalist,    II,     pp.     137-145. 
(May,  1887.) 

29.  An  addition  to  the  list  of  birds  of 
Monroe  county,   Indiana.     In  Hoosier  Nat- 
uralist, II,  p.  164.     (June,  1887.) 

30.  The   occurrence  in   Indiana   of   the 
star-nosed  mole.    In  Am.  Nat.,  XXII,  p.  359. 
(April,  1888.) 

31.  Ornithology  from  a   railroad  trnin. 
(Joint  author  with  Oliver  P.  Jenkins.)     In 
Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  XIII,  pp.  65-69. 

(May,  1888.) 

32.  Notes    on    Indiana    fishes.       (Joint 
author  with  O.  P.  Jenkins.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  pp.  43-57. 

33.  Description  of  eighteen  new  species 
of  fishes  from  the  Gulf  of  California.     (Joint 


author  with  O.  P.  Jenkins.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  pp.  137-158. 

34.  Birds   of   Carroll   county,    Indiana. 
In  Auk,  V,  pp.  344-351,  22-30.     (Oct.,  1888 ; 
Jan.,  1889.) 

35.  The  wood  ibis  in  Indiana.     In  Auk, 
VI,  pp.  186-187.     (April,  1889.) 

36.  Description     of     the    yellow-finned 
trout    of    Twin    Lakes,    Colorado.       (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1889,  pp.  453-454.     (1890.) 

37.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  fish 
from  the  Tippecanoe  river,  Indiana.     (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1890,  pp.  3-4. 

38.  Report   upon  a  collection  of  fishes 
made    at    Guaymas,    Sonora,    Mexico,    with 
descriptions  of  new  species.      (Joint  author 
with  O.  P.  Jenkins.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1891,  pp.  121-165 ;  2  plates. 

39.  A  reconnaissance  of  the  streams  and 
lakes  of  western  Montana  and  northwestern 
Wyoming.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for 
1891  (1892),  pp.  3-60;  27  plates. 

40.  A  report  upon  investigations  made 
in    Texas    in    1891.      In    Bull.    U.    S.    Fish 
Comm.  for  1891  (1892),  pp.  61-90,  9  plates. 

41.  Two-Ocean  Pass.    In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  pp.  29-34 ;  1  plate. 

42.  The  work  of  the  U.   S.   Fish  Com- 
mission   steamer    Albatross    in    the    North 
Pacific  and  Bering  Sea  in  1892.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1892,  pp.  56-57. 

43.  The     ptarmigan     of     the    Aleutian 
Islands.     In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.    Sci.    for 
1892,  pp.  78-81. 

44.  The  work  of  the  United  States  Fish 
Commission  and  its  relation  to  the  farmer. 
In  Rep.   Indiana  Fish  Comm.   for  1893-94, 
pp.  15-25. 

45.  Description      of     a      new      sucker, 
Pantosteus  jordani,  from  the  upper  Missouri 
Basin.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1892 
(1893),  pp.  51-56,  1  plate. 

46.  The   fishes   of   Texas   and   the   Rio 
Grande   Basin,   considered  chiefly  with  ref 


281 


Indiana  University 


'.vermann 


erence  to  their  geographic  distribution. 
(Joint  author  with  William  C.  Kendall.)  In 
Bull.  U,  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1892  (1894),  pp. 
57-126,  31  plates. 

47.  The    ichthyologic    features    of    the 
Black  Hills  region.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1892,  pp.  73-78. 

48.  Bibliography  of  Indiana  mammals. 
(Joint  author  with  Amos  W.  Butler.)      In 
Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for  1893    (1894), 
pp.  120-124. 

49.  A  preliminary  list  of  Indiana  mam- 
mals.     (Joint  author  with  A.  W.  Butler.) 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893  (1894), 
pp.  124-139. 

50.  Notes   on   the  fur-seal   rookeries  of 
the  Pribilof  Islands,  July  18  to  31,   1892. 
In  Proc.  Tribunal  of  Fur   Seal  Arbitration 
at  Paris,  1893,  VII,  pp.  264-273. 

51.  The  investigation  of  rivers  and  lakes 
with  reference  to  the  fish  environment.     In 
Bull.  IT.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1893,  pp.  69-73. 

52.  A  skeleton  of  Steller's  sea  cow.     In 
Science,  p.  59.     (Feb.,  1893.) 

53.  Report  upon  the  advisability  of  es- 
tablishing   a    fish-hatching    station    in    the 
State  of  Tennessee.    In  Senate  Mis.  Doc.  No. 
52,    53d   Cong.,    2d    Sess.,   pp.    1-3.      (Jan., 
1894.) 

54.  Report  upon  the  advisability  of  es- 
tablishing fish-hatchery  stations  at  suitable 
points  in  \Vyoming  and  the  states  of  South 
Dakota,   Iowa  and   Nebraska.     Senate  Mis. 
Doc.   No.   53,  53d  Cong.,  2d   Sess.,  pp.   1-5. 
(Jan.,  1894.) 

55.  The  salmon  fisheries  of  the  Colum- 
bia    River     Basin.      (Joint     author     with 
Charles  H.  Gilbert.)     Senate  Mis.  Doc.  No. 
200,  53d  Cong.,  2d  Sess.,  pp.  1-55,  13  plates. 
(August,  1894.) 

56.  A  report  upon  investigations  in  the 
Columbia  River  Basin,  with  descriptions  of 
four   new  species  of  fishes.      (Joint  author 
with  C.  H.  Gilbert.)      In  Bull.  U.   S.   Fish 
Comm.  for  1894,  pp.  153-207 ;  13  plates. 


57.  A  list  of  the  species  ot  fishes  known 
from     the     vicinity     of     Neosho,     Missouri. 
(Joint    author    with    W.    C.    Kendall.)      In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1894  (1895),  pp. 
469-472. 

58.  The   fishes  of  the   Colorado  Basin. 
(Joint  author  with  Cloudsley  Rutter. )     In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1894  (1895),  pp. 
473-486. 

59.  Recent  investigations  concerning  the 
redfish,  Oncorhynchus  nerka,  at  its  spawning 
grounds  in  Idaho.     (Joint  author  with  J.  T. 
Scovell.)      In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1895,  pp.  131-134. 

60.  The  fishes  of   the   Missouri   Basin. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  T.  Scovell.)     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  126-138. 

61.  Two-Ocean  Pass.    In  Pop.  Sci.  Mo., 
XLVII,  pp.   175-186;  with  plates.      (June, 
1895.) 

62.  In    the    Sawtooth    Mountains.      In 
American    Angler,    XXV,    p.    285.       (Oct., 
1895.) 

63.  The  whitefishes  of  North  America. 
(Joint  author  with  Hugh   M.   Smith.)      In 
Rep.   U.   S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1894   (1896), 
pp.  283-324  ;  18  plates. 

64.  An    annotated     list    of    the    fishes 
known  from  the  state  of  Vermont.      (Joint 
author  with  W.  C.  Kendall. )     In  Rep.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.  for  1894  (1896),  pp.  579-604. 

65.  Report  upon  the  fishes  of  the  Mis- 
souri   River    Basin.       (Joint    author    with 
Ulysses  O.  Cox.)     In  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm. 
for  1894  (1896),  pp.  325-429. 

66.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  pipe- 
fish,     Siphostoma     scovelli,     from     Texas. 
(JMnt   author   with   W.    C.    Kendall.)      In 

Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mas.  for  1895   (1896),  p. 
113. 

67.  A  preliminary   report  upon  salmon 
investigations   in   Idaho   in   1894.     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1895  (1896),  pp.  253- 
284. 

68.  The  fishes  of  the  Neuse  River  Basin. 


282 


Evermann  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


(Joint  author  with  U.  O.  Cox.)  In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1895  (1896),  pp.  303- 
310. 

69.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  shad 
(Alosa  alabamse)    from  Alabama.     In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1895  (1896),  pp.  203- 
205. 

70.  A  check-list  of  the  fishes  and  fish- 
like  vertebrates  of  North  and  Middle  Ameri- 
ca.    (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In 
Rep.   U.   S.   Fish  Comm.   for   1895    (1896), 
pp.  207-584. 

71.  The    fishes    of    North    and    Middle 
America.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.^* 
Bull.  47,  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Part  I,  pp.  lx, 
1240   (1896)  ;   Part  II,  pp.  xxx,  1241-2183 
(1898)  ;    Part    III,    pp.    xxix,    2183a-3136 
(1898)  ;    Part   IV,   pp.    ci,   3137-3313,   392 
plates  (1900). 

72.  Indian  River  and  its  fishes.     (Joint 
author  with  Barton  A.  Bean.)     Senate  Doc. 
46,  54th  Cong.,  2d  Sess.,  pp.  5-26 ;  37  plates. 
Also  in  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1896,  pp. 
223-262;    36   plates. 

73.  The  opah  (Lampris  luna)  in  Monte- 
rey Bay.     In  Recreation,  IV,  p.  41.     (Jan., 
1896.) 

74.  Two-Ocean   Pass.      In    Inland-Edu- 
cator,   II,   pp.    299-306;    5   plates.      (July, 
1896.) 

75.  Something  about  snipes.    In  Recre- 
ation, V,  p.  147.     (Sept.,  1896.) 

76.  Review  of  E.  T.  D.  Chambers's  'The 
ouananiche  and  its  Canadian  environment.' 
In    American   Angler,   XXVI,   pp.   359-360. 
(Oct.-Nov.,  1896.) 

77.  In    the    Sawtooth    Mountains.      In 
Recreation,    V,    pp.    135-137,    196-197,   252- 
253.     (Sept.,  Oct.,  Nov.,  1896.) 

78.  Idaho  grouse.     In  Recreation,  V,  p. 
274. 

79.  The  mountain  lion  (Felis  concolor). 
In  Recreation,   V,  p.  332,  1  plate.      (Dec., 
1896.) 

80.  How  many  kinds  of  bears  are  there 


in  this  country?    In  Recreation,  V,  pp.  322- 
323.     (Dec.,  1896.) 

81.  Trouting    in    Klamath    Lakes.      In 
Recreation,  V,  p.  336.     (Dec.,  1896.) 

82.  Report  on  the  fish  and  fisheries  of 
the  coastal  waters  of  Florida.     In   Senate 
Doc.  No.   100,  54th  Cong.,   2d   Sess.,  1897, 
pp.   1-80 ;   also  in  Rep.   U.   S.   Fish  Comm. 
for    1896    (1897),    pp.    263-342. 

83.  A  report  upon  salmon  investigations 
in  the  headwaters  of  the  Columbia  River,  in 
the  state  of  Idaho,  in  1895.     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.  for  1896,  pp.  149-202,  6  plates. 

84.  U.    S.    Fish   Commission   investiga- 
tions at  Crater  Lake.     In  Mazama,   I,  pp. 
230-238.      (1897.) 

85.  The  fish  fauna  of  Florida.    In  Bull. 
U.   S.   Fish  Comm.   for  1897,  pp.  201-208; 
also  in  Recreation,  XII,  pp.  292-295  (April, 
1900)  ;  and  in  Southern  Sportsman,  II,  pp. 
9-14  (Jan.,  1899). 

86.  A  report  upon  salmon  investigations 
in  the  Columbia  River  Basin  and  elsewhere 
on  the  Pacific  coast  in  1896.     (Joint  author 
with    S.    E.    Meek.     In    Bull.    U.    S.    Fish 
Comm.  for  1897,  pp.  15-84 ;  8  plates. 

87.  Review   of   Florence   A.   Merriam's 
'A-birding    on    a    broncho.'      In    Recreation, 
VI,  p.  290.      (April,  1897.) 

88.  Review    of    David    Starr    Jordan's 
'Science  Sketches.'  In  Recreation,  VI,  p.  290. 

(April,  1897.) 

89.  Review  of  W.  Furneaux's   'Life  in 
pond  and  stream.'   In  Recreation,  VI,  p.  291. 
(April,  1897.) 

90.  Review    of    Frank    Cramer's    'The 
method  of  Darwin.'    In  Recreation,   VI,  p. 
291.     (April,  1897.) 

91.  Review  of  Nathaniel  Lord  Britton 
and  Addison  Brown's  'An  illustrated  flora  of 
the  northern  United  States,  Canada  and  the 
British  Possessions,  I.'    In  Inland  Educator, 
IV,  p.  251.     (June,  1897.) 

92.  Lake  trout  from  Montana.    In  Rec 
reation,  VII,  pp.  54-55.     (July,  1897.) 


283 


Indiana  University 


'.vermann 


t)3.     Catfish    in    Louisiana.      In    Ilecrea- 
lion.  VII,  p.  56.     (July,  1897.) 

94.  Trout  culture  in  Montana.    In  Rec- 
reation, VII,  pp.  140.     (August,  1897.) 

95.  White  and  yellow  perch.    In  Recre- 
ation, VII,  p.  178,  494.     (Sept.,  Dec.,  1897.) 

96.  Descriptions  of  new  or  little  known 
genera  and  species  of  fishes  from  the  United 
States.     (Joint  author  with  W.  C.  Kendall.) 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1897  (1898), 
pp.  125-133 ;  4  plates. 

97.  Notes  on  fishes  collected  by  E.  W. 
Nelson  on  the  Tres  Marias  Islands  and  in 
Sinaloa  and  Jalisco,  Mexico.     In  Proc.  Biol. 
Soc.  Wash.,  XII,  pp.  1-3.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

98.  Crater  Lake.    In  Recreation,  VIII, 
pp.  18-20;  2  illustrations.     (Jan.,  1898.) 

99.  Note    on    the    Columbia    sturgeon. 
In  Recreation,  VIII,  p.  301.     (April,  1898.) 

100.  Crater  Lake  to  be  a  national  park. 
In  Recreation,  VIII,  p.  396.     (May,  1898.) 

101.  The  teaching  of  biology  in  the  pub- 
lic schools.     In  Plant  World,  I,  pp.  119-122. 
(May,  1898.) 

102.  The  teaching  of  biology  in  the  pub- 
lic   schools.      In    Inland-Educator,    VI,    pp. 
141-143.     (May,  1898.) 

103.  Review  of  Nathaniel  Lord  Britton 
and  Addison  Brown's  'An  illustrated  flora  of 
the  northern  United  States,  Canada  and  the 
British    Possessions,    II.'      In    Inland-Edu- 
cator, VI,  p.  180.     (May,  1898.) 

104.  Note  on  the  Loch  Leven  trout.     In 
Recreation,  VIII,  p.  465.     (June,  1898.) 

105.  Key  to   the  species  of  Lucius.     In 
Recreation,   IX,  p.  207.      (Sept.,  1898.) 

106.  Artificial  key  to  the  families  of  true 
fishes    or    Teleostei    of    North    and    Middle 
America.    (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Bull.  47,  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  pp.  2875-2890. 
(1898.) 

107.  Report  on  investigations  by  the  U. 
S.  Fish   Commission  in  Mississippi,  Louisi- 
ana, and  Texas  in  1897.     In  Rop.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.   for   1898    (1899),   pp.   285310;   29 
plates. 


108.  Check-list  of  the  fishes  of  Florida. 
(Joint  author  with  W.  C.  Kendall.)  In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1899,  pp.  35-103. 

109.  Descriptions    of    new    genera    and 
species  of  fishes  from  Puerto  Rico.     (Joint 
author  with  Millard  C.  Marsh.)      In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1899,  pp.  351-362. 

110.  Something    about    Porto    Rico.     In 
Inland-Educator,   pp.   7-10;   5   illustrations. 
(August,  1899.) 

111.  Review  of  S.  Reynolds  Hale's  'Our 
garden.'    In  Recreation,  XI,  p.  234.     (Sept., 
1899.) 

112.  Review  of  Albert  Gardner   Robin- 
son's  'Porto   Rico   to-day.'      In    Recreation, 
XI,  p.  322.     (Oct.,  1899.) 

113.  Review  of  Sir  Edward  Grey's  'Fly 
fishing.'     In  Recreation,  XI,  p.  322.     (Oct., 
1899.) 

114.  A  note  on  Roccus  lineatus,  Roccus 
chrysops,  and  Morone  interrupta.    In  Recre- 
ation, XI,  pp.  287-288.     (Oct.,  1899.) 

115.  The  ling  and  other  fishes  of  Lake 
Chelan,  Washington.    In  Recreation,  XI,  pp. 
371-372.      (Nov.,  1899.) 

116.  Note  on  a  specimen  of  the  wolf-fish, 
Alepisaurus  sesculapias.     In  Recreation,  XI, 
p.  373.     (Nov.,  1899.) 

117.  Review     of     Frederic     A.     Ober's 
'Puerto  Rico  and  its  resources.'  In  Recrea- 
tion, XI,  p.  397.     (Nov.,  1899.) 

118.  Review    of    David    Starr    Jordan's 
'Manual  of  vertebrates.'    In  Recreation,  XI, 
p.  397.     (Nov.,  1899.) 

119.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
darters  from  Lake  Maxinkuckee,  Indiana.  In 
Rep.   U.   S.  Fish  Comm.   for  1899    (1900), 
pp.  363-367;  1  plate. 

120.  Investigations    of    the    aquatic    re- 
sources and  fisheries  of  Porto  Rico  by   the 
United     States     Fish    Commission    steamer 
Fish   Hawk   in  1899.     In  Bull.   U.   S.  Fish 
Comm.  for  1900,  pp.   1-350;  52  plates,  112 
figures. 

121.  The   fishes  of   Porto   Rico.      (Joinl 


284 


Evermann  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


author  with  M.  C.  Marsh.)     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.  for  1900,  pp.  51-350 ;  164  plates. 

122.  Some        observations        concerning 
species  and  sub-species.     In  Science,  N.   S., 
XI,  pp.  451-455.     (March,  1900.) 

123.  Keview     of     William     Dinwiddie's 
'Puerto  Rico.'     In  Recreation,  XII,  p.  399. 
(May,  1900.) 

124.  The  United  States  Fish  Commision. 
In  Current  Encyclopedia,  I,  pp.  457-461 ;  6 
illustrations.     (Oct.,  1901.) 

125.  Investigations  of  the  United  States 
Fish    Commission    steamer    Albatross.      In 
Current  Encyclopedia,  I,  pp.  689-693;  3  il- 
lustrations.    (Dec.,  1901.) 

126.  Bait  minnows.     In  Rep.  New  York 
Forest,    Fish    and    Game    Comm.    for    1900 
(1902),    pp.    307-352;    16    text-figures    and 
colored  plates  of  12  species. 

127.  Notes  on  the  fishes  and  mollusks  of 
Chautauqua     Lake,     New     York.        (Joint 
author  with  Edmund  L.  Goldsborough.)     In 
Rep.    New    York    Forest,    Fish    and    Game 
Comm.    for    1900    (1902),    pp.    357-366;    1 
plate. 

128.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  Lake  On- 
tario. (Joint  author  with  W.  C.  Kendall.) 
In  Rep.  N.  Y.  Forest,  Fish  and  Game  Comm. 
for  1900  (1902),  pp.  479-488. 

129.  Summary  of  the  scientific  results  of 
the    Fish    Commission    expedition    to    Porto 
Rico.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1900 
(1902),  XI-XV,  First  Part. 

130.  General  report  on  the  investigations 
in   Porto    Rico   of   the   United   States   Fish 
Commission    steamer    Fish    Hawk    in    1899. 
In    Bull.     U.     S.     Fish     Comm.     for    1900 
(1902),  pp.  1-26,  Part  1. 

131.  List  of  species  of  fishes  known  to 
occur  in  the  Great  Lakes  or  their  connecting 
waters.      In   Bull.    U.    S.    Fish   Comm.    for 
1901  (1902),  pp.  95-96. 

132.  A  report  on  fishes  collected  in  Mex- 
ico  and   Central    America,   with   notes   and 
descriptions    of    five    new    species.       (Joint 


author  with  E.  L.  Goldsborough.)  In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1901  (1902),  pp.  137- 
159 ;  8  text-figures. 

133.  Notes  on  the  fishes  and  mollusks  of 
Lake     Chautauqua,     New     York.        (Joint 
author  with  E.  L.  Goldsborough.)     In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1901  (1902),  pp.  169- 
175. 

134.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  Lake  Ontario. 
(Joint   author   with    W.    C.    Kendall.)      In 
Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1901  (1902),  pp. 
209-216. 

135.  An    annotated    list    of    the    fishes 
known  to  occur  in  Lake  Champlain  and  its 
tributary  waters.     (Joint  author  with  W.  C. 
Kendall.)      In  Rep.   U.   S.  Fish  Comm.   for 
1901  (1902),  pp.  217-226. 

136.  An    annotated    list    of    the    fishes 
known  to  occur  in  the  St.  Lawrence  River. 
(Joint   author   with   W.    C.    Kendall.)      In 
Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1901  (1902),  pp. 
227-240. 

137.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  shad 
(Alosa  ohiensis)   with  notes  on  other  food- 
fishes  of  the  Ohio  River.    In  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.    for    1901    (1902),    pp.    273-288;    6 
plates. 

138.  The  fishes  and  fisheries  of  the  Ha- 
waiian Islands.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In  Rep.   U.   S.   Fish   Comm.   for 
1901  (1902),  pp.  353-499;  7  plates. 

139.  Preliminary   report  on   the   investi- 
gations of  the  fishes  and  fisheries  of  the  Ha- 
vvaiian    Islands.      (Joint   author  with  D.    S. 
Jordan.)       In    House    Doc.    No.    249,    57th 
Cong.,  1st  Sess.,  pp.  1-33.     (Jan.,  1902.) 

140.  Lopho,  the  quail.    In  Harper's  Mo., 
CIV,  pp.  487-492.     (Feb.,  1902.) 

141.  Facts  about  the  eel.    In  Recreation, 
XVI,  p.  222.     (March,  1902.) 

142.  Lake  Mashipacong.     In  Recreation, 
XVI,  pp.  291-293.     (April,  1902.) 

143.  Nature    study     and    nature     study 
books.     In  Recreation,  XVI,  p.  317.     (April, 
1902.) 


285 


Indiana  University 


'.vermann 


144.  Porto  Rico,  its  fishes  and  fisheries. 
(Joint  author  with  M.  C.  Marsh.)     In  Cur- 
rent Encyclopedia,  II,  pp.  1274-1279  ;  8  text- 
illustrations.     (April,  1902.) 

145.  The  feeding  habits  of  the  coot  and 
other  water  birds.     In  Osprey,  I,  pp.  57-64. 
(April,  1902.) 

146.  American   food  and  game  fishes :  a 
popular  account  of  all  the  species  found  in 
America  north  of  the  Equator,  with  keys  for 
ready  identification,  life  histories,  and  meth- 
ods of  capture.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      New    York,    1902.      Pp.    1,   573; 
10   colored    plates,   63    photographic   plates, 
and  220  text-figures. 

147.  Notes     on     some     Mexican     fishes. 
(Joint   author   with    E.   L.    Goldsborough. ) 
In  Science,  N.  S.,  XV,  pp.  746-749.     (May, 
1902.) 

148.  A  new  species  of  shad  from  the  Ohio 
River.     In  Forest  and  Stream,  LVIII,   pp. 
408-409;  6  plates.      (May,  1902.) 

149.  Strange  fishes  of  the  deep  sea.     In 
The  World   To-day,   II,   pp.   1398-1406;    18 
plates.     (June,  1902.) 

150.  A  new  species  of  shad.     In  Sports 
Afield,  XXIX,  pp.  63-66;  3  plates.     (July, 
1902.) 

151.  Fishes    of    the    Great    Lakes.      In 
Sports  Afield,  XXIX,  p.  70.     (July,  1902.) 

J52.     The  mystery  of  the  salmon.    In  Out- 
ing, pp.  562-568.     (August,  1902.) 

153.  Pike,      pickerel,      muscalonge.      In 
Forest  and   Stream,   LIX,   p.   193.      (Sept., 
1902.) 

154.  The    big    trees    of    California.      In 
Sports     Afield,     XXIX,     p.     272.        (Sept., 
1902.) 

155.  Some  strange  ocean  fishes.      (Joint 
author  with  M.  C.  Marsh.)      In  World  To- 
day, III,  pp.  1800-1805,  10  plates.      (Sept., 
1902.) 

156.  Hawaiian      Island      fisheries.        In 
Sports  Afield,  XXIX,  p.  273.     (Sept.,  1902.) 


157.  Water  the  birds.     In  Country  Life 
in  America,  III,  pp.  17-19.     (Nov.,  1902.) 

158.  Nerka,    the    blueback    salmon.      In 
World  To-day,  III,  pp.  2221-2228;  9  plates. 
(Dec.,  1902.) 

159.  Descriptions    of    new    genera    and 
species  of  fishes  from  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1902  (1903),  pp.  161- 
208. 

160.  Descriptions   of   a    new   genus   and 
two  new  species  of  fishes  from  the  Hawaiian 
Islands.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  for  1902  (1903), 
pp.  209-210. 

161.  The   cutthroat   trout   and    its   rela- 
tives.    In  Country  Life  in  America,  IV,  p. 
130;    1   illustration.      (June,   1903.) 

162.  The  United  States  Bureau  of  Fish- 
eries.    In  Pacific  Fisherman    II,  pp.  16-18; 
3  plates.     (Jan.,  1904.) 

163.  The    fishes    and    other    aquatic    re- 
sources  of   the   Hawaiian    Islands.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish   Conirn.   for   1903    (1904)  ;   73   colored 
plates,  300  lithographs  and  text-figures. 

164.  Preliminary    report   of    the   Alaska 
Salmon    Commission.      (Joint   author   with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  House  Doc.  No.  477,  58th 
Cong.,  2d  Sess.,  pp.  1-37.     (Jan.,  1904.) 

165.  The  native  fishermen  of  Hawaii.    In 
Outing,  XLIII,  pp.  660-667 ;  7  illustrations. 

166.  Modesty    itself,    the   brown   towhee. 
In   Recreation,    XX,   pp.   277-279;    1    plate. 
(April,  1904.) 

167.  Statistics    of    the    fisheries    of    the 
Middle  Atlantic  States.     In  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.  for  1902,  pp.  433-540.     (1903.) 

168.  Report  of  the  Division  of  Statistics 
and  Methods  of  the  Fisheries.     In  Rep.  U. 
S.     Fish     Comm.     for     1903,     pp.     101-122. 
(1904.) 

169.  The  Bureau  of  Fisheries.     In  Nat 
Geog.    Mag.,  XV,  pp.   191-212;   14  illustra- 
tions.    (May,  1904.) 


286 


Fesler] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


BERT  FESLER,  A.B.  (1889).     Duluth,  Miun. 

1.  A  review  of  the  mackerels  (Scom- 
brinae)  of  America  and  Europe.  (Joint 
author  with  Fletcher  B.  Dresslar.)  In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1887. 


FRANK  ALBERT  FETTER,  A.B.  ( 1891 ) ,  Ph.D. 
Professor  of  Economics  and  Social 
Science,  Indiana  University,  1895-1898. 
Now  Professor  of  Political  Economy 
and  Finance,  Cornell  University. 

1.  Versuch     einer     Bevolkerungslehre, 
Jena,  1894.     Pp.  105. 

2.  History  of  the  city  of  Peru,  Indiana. 
In    History    of    Miami    county,     (Chicago, 
1887),  pp.  362-392. 

3.  Theories  of  value  and  deferred  pay- 
ments.    In  Ann.  Am.   Acad.  Pol.  and   Soc. 
Sci.,  V,  pp.  882-896.     (May,  1895.) 

4.  The  gold  reserve,  its  functions  and 
its  maintenance.     In  Pol.   Sci.   Quart.,  XI, 
pp.  237-247.     (June,  1896.) 

5.  Review  of  Julius  Lehr's  'Produktion 
und  Consumption.'     In  Pol.  Sci.  Quart.,  XI, 
p.  336.     (June,  1896.) 

6.  Review  of  F.  W.  Taussig's  'Wages 
and  capital.'     In  Pol.  Sci.  Quart.,  XII,  p. 
146.    (March,  1897.) 

7.  The  improvement  of  methods  of  poor 
relief  in  Indiana.     In  Bull.   Indiana  State 
Board  of  Charities.     (June,  1898.) 

8.  The  essay  of  Malthus :  a  centennial 
review.   In  Yale  Rev.,  VII,  p.  153.    (August, 
1898.) 

9.  Review  of  John  Davidson's  'Bargain 
theory  of  wages.'    In  Pol.  Sci.  Quart.,  XIII, 
p.  556.     (Sept.,  1898.) 

10.  Politics   in   the    charitable    institu- 
tions  of   the   Pacific  coast.     In  Proc.   Nat. 
Conf.   Char,   and   Cor.    for   1899. 

11.  Social   progress  and  race  degenera- 


tion.    In  Forum,   XXVIII,  p.   228.      (Oct., 
1899.) 

12.  Recent    discussion    of    the    capital 
concept.    In  Quart.  Jour.  Econ.,  XV,  pp.  1- 
45.     (Nov.,  1900.) 

13.  The  next  decade  of  economic  theory. 
In  Pub.  Am.  Econ.  Asso.,  Third  series,  II, 
pp.  236-246.     (Feb.,  1901.) 

14.  The  passing  of  the  old  rent  concept. 
In    Quart.    Jour.    Econ.,    XV,   pp.    416-445. 
(May,  1901.) 

15.  Public  subsidies  to  private  charities. 
In    Proc.    Nat.    Conf.    Char,   and    Cor.    for 
1901,  p.  118. 

16.  An     American     economist     (J.     B. 
Clark).    In  Internat.  Mo.     (July,  1901.) 

17.  The  maps,  diagrams,  data,  and  sta- 
tistical tables  on  housing  conditions  in  Chi- 
cago  (about  100  pages).     In  Report  of  the 
City  Homes  Association  on  Tenement  Con- 
ditions in  Chicago.     Chicago,  1901. 

18.  The  subsidizing  of  private  charities. 
In    Am.    Jour.    Soc.,    VII,    p.    359.      (Nov., 
1901.) 

19.  Review  of  A.  H.  Gibson's  'Natural 
economy.'     In  Jour.  Pol.  Econ.,  X,  p.  289. 
(March,  1902.) 

20.  Review  of  E.  A.  Ross's  'Social  con- 
trol.'    In  Charities,  VIII,  p.  213.      (March, 
1902.) 

21.  Review  of  E.   von   Bohm-Bawerk's 
'Einige  strittige  Fragen  der  Capitalstheorie.' 
In  Pol.  Sci.  Quar.,  XVII,  p.  169.     (March, 
1902.) 

22.  Editor  of  'Papers  and  proceedings  of 
the  14th   annual   meeting   of   the  American 
Economic    Association.'     New    York,    1902. 
Pp.  400.      (Pub.  Am.  Econ.  Asso.,  3d  ser., 
Ill,  No.  1.) 

23.  The  roundabout  process  in  the  inter- 
est  theory.      In   Quar.   Jour.   Econ.,   XVII, 
pp.   163-180.      (Nov.,  1902.) 

24.  Review   of   G.   B.   Lockwood's   'The 
New  Harmony  communities.'     In  Jour.  Pol. 
Econ.,  XI,  p.  175.     (Dec.,  1902.) 


287 


Indiana  University 


[Fetter 


25.  Review  of  I.  Broome,  'The  last  days 
of  the   Ruskin   community.'     In  Jour.   Pol. 
Econ.,  XI.  p.  177.     (Dec.,  1902.) 

26.  Editor  of  'Papers  and  proceedings  of 
the   15th   annual   meeting  of   the  American 
Economic    Association.'     New    York,    1903. 
Pp.  298.     (Pub.  Am.  Econ.  Asso.,  3d  sen, 
IV,  No.  1.) 

27.  Taxation  in  the  American  States  in 

1902.  In  Legislative  Bull.  New  York  State 
Library,  No.  19,  p.  785.      (1903.) 

28.  The  relations  between  rent  and  in- 
terest.    Paper  read  at  the  sixteenth  annual 
meeting  of  the  Am.  Econ.  Assoc.,  Dec.,  1903. 
In   Pub.  Am.   Econ.  Assoc.    3d  ser.,  V,  pp. 
176-198.      (Feb.,  1904.)      Reprint,  with  dis- 
cussion, 74  pp.     (April,  1904.) 

29.  Taxation  in  the  American  States  in 

1903.  In  Legis.  Bull.  N.  Y.  State  Library 
for  May,  1904. 

30.  Editor  of   'Papers   and   proceedings 
of  the  16th  annual  meeting  of  the  American 
Economic  Association.'     Part  I.     New  York, 

1904.  Pp.  250.      (Pub.  Am.   Econ.   Assoc., 
3d  ser.,  V,  No.  1.) 

31.  Editor   of  'Papers   and   proceedings 
of  the  16th  annual  meeting  of  the  American 
Economic     Association.'      Part     II.      New 
York,   1904.      Pp.  210.      (Pub.    Am.     Econ. 
Assoc.,  3d.  ser.,  V,  No.  2.) 

32.  Principles  of  economies,  with  appli- 
cations  to   practical   problems.      New   York, 
1904.     About  500  pp.     (In  press.) 


3.  Avoidable  causes  of  mortality  in  tu- 
berculosis in  the  Southwest.  In  Cleveland 
Med.  Jour.,  for  Nov.,  1903. 


GUY   HARLAND   FITZGERALD,   A.B.    (1896), 
M.D.     Albuquerque,  N.  M. 

1.  Etiology  of  appendicitis.     In  Cleve- 
land Medical  Gaz.  for  1901. 

2.  The    Southwest   for   pulmonary   tu- 
berculosis.     In    Cleveland    Med.    Jour.,    X. 
(March,  1902.) 


ARTHUR    LEE    FOLEY,   A.B.    (1890),    A.M. 
(1891),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


MORTON    WILLIAM    FORDICE,    B.S.    (1886). 
Kussellville,  Ind. 

1.  A  review  of  the  American  Stromat- 
eidse.    In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia, 
for  1884,  pp.  311-317. 

2.  A  review  of  the  American  Eleotrid 
inse.     (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.j 
In   Proc.   Acad.   Nat.   Sci.   Philadelphia   for 
1885,  pp.  66-80. 

3.  A   catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Bean 
Blossom    Creek,     Monroe    county,    Indiana. 
(Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann.)     In 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia,  for  1885, 
pp.  410-411. 

4.  List   of   fishes   collected   in    Harvey 
and   Cowley   counties,   Kansas.      (Joint  au- 
thor with  Barton  W.  Evermann.     In  Proc. 
Acad.   Nat.    Sci.   Philadelphia,   for  1885,  p. 
412. 

5.  Some  Kansas  fishes.     (Joint  author 
with   B.   W.   Evermann.)      In  Bull.   Wash- 
burn  College  Nat.  Hist,  for  1885. 

6.  A    review    of   the    North    American 
species   of  Petromyzontidae.      (Joint  author 
with  David  Starr  Jordan.)      In  Ann.  Aoad. 
Nat.  Sci.  N.  Y.,  for  1886. 

7.  A   review   of   the   American  species 
of   Bellonida?.      (Joint   author   with    D.    S. 
Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.    S.    Nat   Mus.,    IX, 
pp.  338-361.     (1886.) 

8.  A  review  of  the  sturgeons   (Acipen- 
seridse)    of  North  America.      (Joint  author 
with   Philip   H.    Kirsch.)      7n    Proc.    Acnd. 
Nat.    Sci.    Philadelphia,   for   1889,   pp.   245- 
257. 


288 


Foster  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


FlNLEY     MlLLIGAN     FOSTER,     A.B.      (1876), 

Ph.D.     Clergyman,  New  York. 

1.  The  witnessing  church.     New  York, 
3890.     Pp.  233. 

2.  A   plea   for   the   old   church.     New 
York,  1896.     Pp.  44. 


JOHN  MITCHELL  FOSTER,  A.B.  (1871).  Pas- 
tor Second  Reformed  Presbyterian 
Church,  Boston,  Mass. 

1.  Review  of   S.   L.  Loomis's  'Modern 
cities.'      In    Christian    Statesman.       (Sept., 
1888.) 

2.  Reformation  principles.     Cincinnati, 
1890.     Pp.  448. 

3.  Review    of    Elisha    Mul ford's    'The 
nation.'     In  Christian   Statesman.      (Sept., 
1890.) 

4.  Distinctive  principles  of  the  Cove- 
nanters.   Boston,  1892.     Pp.  56. 

5.  Our  triple  foe.     Boston,  1892.     Pp. 
48. 

6.  Romanism :     The  evil  and  its  rem- 
edy.    Boston,  1892.     Pp.  64. 

7.  Principles   of   the  covenanters.     In 
Our  Day  (Boston)  for  March,  1894,  pp.  102- 
113. 

8.  Christ  the  king.    Boston,  1895.    Pp. 
448. 

9.  Secret  societies  and  the  state.     In 
Arena,  XIX,  pp.  229-240.     (Feb.,  1898.) 

10.  Review   *of     James     Bryce's     'The 
American     commonwealth.'       In     Christian 
Statesman.      (June,  1900.) 

11.  Review  of  A.  J.  Gordon's  'The  Holy 
Spirit  in  missions.'    In  Olive  Tree.     (1900.^ 

12.  Review  of  R.  W.  Thompson's  'The 
papacy  and  the  civil  power.'     In  Am.  Citi- 
zen.     (April,  1901.) 

13.  Review  of  James  Bryce's  'The  Holy 
Roman   Empire  of  the  Germans.'     In   Am. 
Citizen.      (March,  1901.) 


14.  Review    of    Josiah     Strong's    'The 
new  era.'     In  Christian  Statesman.     (June, 
1901.) 

15.  Review    of    Stephen    L.    Baldwin's 
'Foreign  missions  of  the  Protestant  Church.' 
In  Olive  Tree.     (Dec.,  1901.) 

16.  Ten  lectures  on  Romanism.     In  Am. 
Citizen.     (Boston.) 

17.  One  hundred  lectures  on  the  Chris- 
tian state.    In  Christian  Statesman.     (Pitts- 
burg,  Pa.) 

18.  Twenty  lectures  on  foreign  missions. 
In  Olive  Tree.      (New  York.) 

19.  Fifty    addresses    on    the    Messiah's 
kingdom.     In  Midland.      (Chicago.) 

20.  Review  of  Harlan  P.  Beach's  'The 
geography  and  atlas  of  Protestant  missions.' 
In  Olive  Tree.      (Feb.,  1904.) 

21.  Review   of  Josiah   Strong's   'Twen- 
tieth century  cities.'     In  Midland. 

22.  Review   of  A.   T.   Pierson's   'Evan- 
gelistic work.'     In  Christian  Nation. 


JOHN  WATSON  FOSTER,  A.B.  (1855),  LL.D. 
Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  Coffee  cultivation  in  Mexico.  Agri- 
cultural Department.     (3876.) 

2.  International   awards   and   national 
honor.     Washington,  1886. 

3.  Visit  to  foreign  mission  lands,  Pres. 
bd.,  New  York,  1895. 

4.  Bering  Sea  arbitration.    In  No.  Am. 
Rev.,  CLXI,  pp.  693-702.     (Dec.,  1895.) 

5.  Biography  of  Matthew  Watson  Fos- 
ter.    New  York,  1896.     Pp.  86. 

6.  The  Viceroy  Li   Hung  Chang.     In 
Century,  LII,  pp.  560-571.     (August,  1896.) 

7.  The    Hawaiian    Islands.      In    Nat. 
Geog.  Mag.,  for  Nov.,  1899. 

9.     Rank  of  ambassadors.    In  Columbia 
Univ.   Pub.,  for  Dec.,   1899. 

10.     A  century  of  American  diplomacy. 
Boston,   1900.     Pp.  i-xiii,  495. 


(20) 


289 


Indiana  University 


[Foster 


11.  A  foreign  sovereign  in  an  American 
court.     In  Yale  Law  Jour.,  May,  1900. 

12.  A  permanent  method  of  arbitration. 
In  Independent,  LI  I,  pp.  1420-1422.     (June 
14,  1900.) 

13.  The  right  of  missionaries  to  protec- 
tion.    In  Rev.  of  Revs.,  August,  1900. 

14.  The  great  Chinese  viceroy  and  dip- 
lomat.    In   Internat.   Mo.,   II,   pp.   584-596. 
(Nov.,  1900.) 

15.  Reciprocity  treaties  and  the  Senate. 
In  Independent,  LIT,  p.  289t>. 

16.  La  Doctrina  de  Monroe.     In  Bull. 
Am.  Republics,  Dec.,  1900. 

17.  The  United   States,  is  or  are?     In 
New  York  Sat.  Rev.,  May  4,  1901. 

18.  The  Clayton-Bulwer  treaty.     In  In- 
dependent,   LIU,    pp.    1167-1171.       (May, 
1901.) 

19.  Latin-American    constitutions     and 
revolutions.     In  Jour.  Am.  Sci.,  Nov.,  1901. 

20.  Treaty    making    power    under    the 
Constitution.      In    Yale    Law    Jour.,    Dec., 
1901. 

21.  The    New    Mexico.      In    Nat.    Geo. 
Mag.,  Jan.,  1902. 

22.  Canada   and   the   Monroe  Doctrine. 
In  Independent,  LIV,  pp.  721-723.     (March 
27,  1902.) 

23.  Pan-American   diplomacy.      In  Atl. 
Mo.,  LXXXIX,  pp.  482-491.     (April,  1902.) 

24.  Gifts    from     foreign    governments : 
Art.   1,   Sec.   9,   Cl.   8,    U.    S.   Constitution. 
In  Columbia  Univ.  Pub.,  Dec.,  1902. 

25.  American  diplomacy  in  the  Orient. 
Boston,  1903.     Pp.  i-xiv,  498. 

26.  The  Canadian   boundary.     In   Nat. 
Geo.  Mag..  March,  1903. 

27.  Porfirio  Diaz :     Soldier  and  states- 
man.    In  Internat.  Quar.,  VIII,  pp.  342-353. 
(Dec.,  1903.) 

28.  The    Alaskan    Boundary    Tribunal. 
In  Nat.  Geo.  Mag.,  Jan.,  1904. 

29.  What  the  United  States   has  done 
for     international     arbitration.      In     Green 
Bag.   March,   1904. 


ADDISOX  LUTHKB  FULWIDER,  A.B.  (1895). 
Principal  of  High  School,  Jacksonville, 
111. 

1.  History  in  the  high  school.     In  In- 
land-Educator,   VI,    pp.    100-104.       (April, 
1898.) 

2.  Relative  value  of  history.     In  Proo. 
Illinois  State  Teachers'  Asso.,  Dec.,  1899. 


CHARLES  HENRY  GILBERT,  M.  S.  (1882), 
Ph.D.  (1883).  Professor  of  Zoology, 
Indiana  University,  1888-1891.  Now 
Professor  of  Zoology,  Leland  Stanford 
Junior  University,  Stanford  University, 
Cal. 

1.  List  of   fishes   of   Indiana.      (Joint 
author  with  David  Starr  Jordan.)     In  Indi- 
ana Farmer,  Jan.  17,  1877. 

2.  On  the  genera  of  North  American 
fresh-water  fishes.      (Joint  author  with   D. 
S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phil- 
adelphia, XXIX,  pp.  83-104. 

3.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  Beaufort  Har- 
bor,   North    Carolina.      (Joint  author   with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
I,  pp.  365-388.     (1878.) 

4.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
San  Diego,  California.     (Joint  author  with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  23-34.     (1880.) 

5.  Description  of  a  new  flounder  ( Xys- 
treurys    liolepis)    from    Santa   Catalina   Is- 
land, California.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.   Mus.,  Ill, 
pp.    34-36.      (1880.) 

6.  Description   of  a   new  ray    (Platy- 
rhina    triseriata)    from    the   coast   of    Cali- 
fornia.    (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  36-38. 
(1880.) 

7.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
rock    cod     ( Sebastichthys    serriceps)     from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 


290 


Gilbert'] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  40-42. 

8.  On  the  occurrence   of   Cephaloscyl- 
lium  laticeps' (Dumeril)    Gill   on   the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with   D.    S. 
Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill, 
pp.  40-42.     (1880.) 

9.  On  the  oil  shark  of  Southern  Cal- 
ifornia (Galeorhinus  galeus).     (Joint  author 
with  U.   S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  42-43.      (1880.). 

10.  Description  of  a  new  flounder  ( Pleu- 
ronichthys  verticalis)  from  the  coast  of  Cal- 
ifornia, with  notes  on  other  species.   (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  49-51.      (1880.) 

11.  Notes  on  sharks  from  the  coast  of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  D.   S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
51-52.      (1880.) 

12.  On   the  generic  relations   of  Platy- 
rhina  exasperata.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.,   Ill, 
p.  53.      (1880.) 

13.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Se- 
bastichthys    ( Sebastichthys    miniatus')    from 
Monterey   Bay,   California.      (Joint   author 
with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  70-73.      (1880.) 

14.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  rock- 
fish     (Sebastichthys     carnatus)      from     the 
coast    of    California.       (Joint    author    with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  73-75.     (1880.) 

15.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  ray 
(Raia   stellulata)    from   Monterey,   Califor- 
nia.     (Joint   author   with    D.    S.    Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  133-135. 
(1880.) 

1C.  Descriptions  of  new  species  of  Xiph- 
ister  and  Apodichthys,  from  Monterey,  Cal- 
ifornia. (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  135-140. 
(1880.) 

17.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
Sebastichthys  (Sebastichthys  entomelas  and 


Sebastichthys  rhodochloris )  from  Monterey 
Bay,  California.  (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill, 
pp.  142-146.  (1880.) 

18.  Description  of  a  new  Agonoid  fish 
(Brachyopsis    xyosternus)     from    Monterey 
Bay,  California.      (Joint  author  witn  D.  S. 
Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
152-154.      (1880.) 

19.  Description  of  a  new  flounder  ( Hip- 
poglossoides  exilis)    from  the  coast  of  Cali- 
fornia.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  154-150. 
(1880.) 

20.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  ray 
(Raia  rhina)   from  the  coast  of  California. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  251-253.     (1880.) 

21.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes   (Ascelichthys  rhodorus  and  Scytalina 
cerdale)    from  Neah  Bay,  Washington  Ter- 
ritory.     (Joint  author  with   D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  264-268. 
(1880.) 

22.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
Scopeloid  fishes   (Sudis  ringens  and  Mycto- 
phum  crenulare)  from  Santa  Barbara  Chan- 
nel, California.      (Joint  author  with  D.   S. 
Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
273-276.     (1880.) 

23.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
flounders    (Parophrys   ischyrus   and   Hippo- 
glossoides    elassodon)     from    Puget    Sound. 
(Joint    author    with    D.    S.    Jordan.)       In 
Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,   pp.    276-280. 
(1880.) 

24.  Description  of  seven  new  species  of 
Sebastoid  fishes  from  the  coast  of  California. 
(Joint    author    with    D.    S.    Jordan.)       In 
Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   287-298. 
(1880.) 

25.  Description  of  a   new   Embiotocoid 
(Abeona  aurora)  from  Monterey,  California, 
with    notes    on    a    related    species.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  299-301.      (1880.) 


291 


Indiana  University 


[Gilbert 


26.  Description  of  a  new  flounder  (Plat- 
ysomatichthys   stomias)    from   the   coast  of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  I).  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.   Mus.,   III.  pp. 
301-303.      (1880.) 

27.  Description  of  a   new   Embiotocoid 
fish  (Cymatogaster  rosaceus)  from  the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with    D.    S. 
Jordan.)      In    Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.    Mus.,    Ill, 
pp.  303-305.     (1880.) 

28.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
deep-water  fish  (Icichthys  lockingtoni)  from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  pp.  305-308.     (1880.) 

29.  Description   of  a   new   Embiotocoid 
fish    (Ditrema   atripes)    from   the   coast   of 
California.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,   Ill,  pp. 
320-322.      (1880.) 

30.  Description    of   a    new    Scorpaenoid 
fish   ( Sebastichthys  maliger)   from  the  coast 
of   California.      (Joint   author   with   D.    S. 
Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   Ill, 
pp.  322-324.      (1880.) 

31.  Description   of   a    new    Scorpaenoid 
fish  ( Sebastichthys  proriger )  from  Monterey 
Bay,  California.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In  Proc.    U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,    Ill, 
pp.   327-329.      (1880.) 

32.  Description  of  a  new  Agonoid  (Ago- 
nus   vulsus)    from   the  coast  of   California. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  330-332.     (1880.) 

33.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Hemirhamphus  (Hemirhamphus  roses)  from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
III.  pp.  335-336.     (1880.) 

34.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  No- 
tidanoid   shark    (Hexanchus   corinus)    from 
the    Pacific    coast    of    the    United    States. 
(Joint    author    with    D.    S.    Jordan.)       In 
Proc.    U.   S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   352-355. 
(1880.) 

35.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 


Nemichthys  (Nemichthys  avocetta)  from 
Pugpt  Sound.  (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill, 
pp.  409-410.  (1881.) 

36.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Paralepis    (Paralepis   coruscans)    from    the 
Straits   of    Juan   de    Fuca.      (Joint   author 
with  D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat. 
Mus.,    Ill,   pp.   411-413.      (1881.) 

37.  List    of    the    fishes    of    the    Pacific 
coast    of   the    United    States,    with   a   table 
showing    the    distribution    of    the    species. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp.  452-458.     (1881.) 

38.  On  the  generic  relations  of  Belone 
exilis.      (Joint  author  with  D.   S.  Jordan.) 
In    Proc.    T.T.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    Ill,    p.    459. 
(1881.) 

39.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Utah  Lake.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  Ill,  pp. 
359-465.     (1881.) 

40.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
rock-fish    (Sebastichthys  chrysomelas)   from 
the  coast  of  California.     (Joint  author  with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Ill,  p.  465.      (1881.) 

41.  Observations  on  the  salmon  of  the 
Pacific.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XV,  pp.  177-186.     (1881.) 

42.  Notes   on   the  fishes  of  the   Pacific 
coast  of  the  United   States.      (Joint  author 
with  D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat. 
Mus.,   IV,   pp.   29-70.      (1881.) 

43.  Description    of    Sebastichthys    mys- 
tinus.      (Joint  author  with   D.   S.  Jordan.) 
In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   IV,   pp.   70-72. 
(1881.) 

44.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Pty- 
chochilus  (Ptychochilus  harfordi)  from  Sac- 
ramento  River.      (Joint  author  with  D.   S. 
Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,    IV, 
pp.  72-73.     (1881.) 

45.  Note    on     Ilaia     inornata.       (Joint 
author  with  I).  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  I".  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  pp.  73-74.      (1881.) 


292 


Gilbert] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


46.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  made 
by  Lieut.   Henry  E.   Nichols,  U.   S.   N.,  on 
the  west  coast  of  Mexico,  with  descriptions 
of  new   species.      (Joint  author  with   I).   S. 
Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,    IV, 
pp.   225-233.      (1881.) 

47.  List    of    fishes    collected    by    Lieut. 
Henry   E.   Nichols,   U.   S.    N.,   in   the   Gulf 
of    California,    and    on    the    west    coast    of 
Lower  California,  with  descriptions  of  four 
new  species.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,  IV,  pp. 
273-279.     (1882.) 

48.  Descriptions     of    thirty-three     new 
species  of  fishes  from  Mazatlan,  Mexico.     In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    IV,    pp.   338-365. 
(1882.) 

49.  Descriptions    of    a    new    species    of 
Pomadasys   from   Mazatlan,   with  a  key   to 
the   species    known    to    inhabit    the    Pacific 
coast   of   tropical   America.      (Joint   author 
with  I).   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,   IV,   pp.  383-388.      (1882.) 

50.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Xenichthys   (Xenichthys  xenurus)   from  the 
west  coast  of  Central  America.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IV,  p.  454.      (1882.) 

51.  Description   of   five  new  species   of 
fishes  from  Mazatlan,  Mexico.      (Joint   au- 
thor with  D.    S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,   IV,  pp.  458-463.      (1882.) 

52.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
sharks    from     Mazatlan,     Mexico.       (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.,   V,  pp.   102-110.      (1882.) 

53.  Description  of  a  new  shark    (Car- 
charias  lainiella)    from  San  Diego,  Califor- 
nia.    (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    V,    pp.    110-111. 
(1882.) 

54.  Descriptions  of  nineteen  new  species 
of  fishes  from  the  Bay  of  Panama.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  I,  pp.  306-335.     (1882.) 

55.  Description   of  a  new  Cyprinodont 


(Zygonectes  inurus)  from  southern  Illinois. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)  In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  143-144.  (1882.) 

56.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Uranidea    (Uranidea  pollicaris)    from   Lake 
Michigan.      (Joint  author  with  D.    S.   Jor- 
dan.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  222- 
223.     (1882.) 

57.  Notes  on  fishes  observed  about  Pen- 
sacola,  Florida,  and  Galveston,  Texas,  with 
descriptions  of  new  species.      (Joint  author 
with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  241-307.     (1882.) 

58.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Con- 
odon  (Conodon  serrifer)  from  Boca  Soledad, 
Lower  California.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp. 
351-352.     (1882.) 

59.  Catalogue  of  the  fishes  collected  by 
Mr.  John  Xantus  at  Cape  San  Lucas,  which 
are  now  in  the  United  States  National  Mu- 
seum, with  descriptions  of  eight  new  species. 
(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Xat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  353-371.     (1882.) 

60.  List  of  fishes  collected  by  Mr.  John 
Xantus  at  Colima,  Mexico.      (Joint  author 
with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  371-372.     (1882.) 

61.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Panama 
by  Capt.  John  M.  Dow,  now  in  the  United 
States    National    Museum.       (Joint    author 
with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  373-378.     (1882.) 

62.  List  of  a  collection  of  fishes  made  by 
Mr.  L.  Belding,  near  Cape  San  Lucas,  Lower 
California.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  378- 
381.     (1882.) 

63.  List  of   fishes  collected  at  Panama 
by  Rev.  Mr.  Rowell,  now  preserved  in  the 
United    States    National    Museum.       (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  381-382.     (1882.) 

64.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes   ( Sebastichthys  umbrosus  and  Cithar- 
ichthys  stigrnseus)    collected  at   Santa   Bar- 


293 


Indiana  University 


[Gilbert 


barn,  California,  by  Andrea  Laroo.  (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)  In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  410-412.  (1882.) 

05.  A  review  of  the  Siluroid  fishes 
found  on  the  Pacific  coast  of  tropical  Amer- 
ica, with  descriptions  of  three  new  species. 
(Joint  author  with  I).  S.  Jordan.)  In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  pp.  34-54.  (1882.) 

(56.  List,  of  fishes  collected  at  Mazatlan, 
Mexico,  by  Charles  H.  Gilbert.  (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)  In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  II,  pp.  105-108.  (1882.) 

67.  List  of  fishes  collected  at  Panama 
by  C.  II.  Gilbert.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)      In    Bull.   U.   S.   Fish   Comm.,   II, 
pp.  109-111.      (1882.) 

68.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Goby     (Gobiosoma    ios)    from    Vancouver's 
Island.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,    V,  pp.  437-438. 
(1882.) 

61).  List  of  fishes  observed  at  Punta 
Arenas,  on  the  Pacific  coast  of  Central  Amer- 
ica. In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  II,  p.  112. 
(1882.) 

70.  On  certain  neglected  generic  names 
of  Lact-pede.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V, 
pp.  570-576.     (1883.) 

71.  On    the    synonymy    of    the    genus 
Bothus  Rafinesque.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S. 
Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp. 
576-577.     (1883.) 

72.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Artedius   (Artedius  fenestralis)   from  Puget 
Sound.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  577-579. 
(1883.) 

73.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Urolophus    (Urolophus   asterias)    from   Ma- 
zatlan and  Panama.     (Joint  author  with  D. 
S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., '  V, 
pp.  579-580.     (1883.) 

74.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Charleston,    South    Carolina,    with    descrip- 
tions of  three  new  species.      (Joint  author 


with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In   Proc.  U.  S.   N.H. 
Mus.,  V,  pp.  580-620.     (1883.) 

75.  List  of  fishes  now  in  the  museum  of 
Yale  College,  collected   by   Prof.    Frank   H. 
Bradley  at  Panama,  with  description  of  three 
new    species.       (Joint    author    with    D.    S. 
Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp. 
6^0-632.     (1883.) 

76.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes   (Myrophis  vafer  and  Chloroscombrus 
orqueta)  from  Panama.     (Joint  author  with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)       In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
V,  pp.  645-647.     (1883.) 

77.  Description   of   a   new   eel    (Sidera 
castanea)    from   Mazatlan,   Mexico.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  647-648.     (1883.) 

78.  On  the   nomenclature  of  the  genus 
Ophichthys.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  648- 
651.      (1883.) 

79.  Contributions    to    North    American 
ichthyology,  based   primarily   on   the  collec- 
tions of  the  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  IV.    A  synopsis 
of    the    fishes    of    North    America.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  1145  p.     (1883.) 

80.  Notes  on  the  nomenclature  of  cer- 
tain North  American  fishes.     (Joint  author 
with   D.   S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  VI,  pp.  110-111.     (1883.) 

81.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
fishes     (Aprion     ariomnus     and     Ophidium 
beani)     from    Pensacola,    Florida.       (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  142-144.     (1883.) 

82.  A  review  of  the  American  Carangi- 
nap.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)    In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VI,    pp.    188-208. 
(1883). 

83.  Note  on  the  genera  of  Petromyzon- 
tidsp.     (Joint  author   with    D.    S.    Jordan.) 
/»    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VI,    p.    208. 
(1883.) 

84.  Description  of  a  new  Murocnoid  eel 


294 


Gilbert'] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


(Sidera  chlevastes)  from  the  Galapagos 
Islands.  (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI,  pp.  208-210. 
(1883.) 

85.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Rhinobatus  (Rhinobatus  glaucostigma)  from 
Mazatlan,   Mexico.      (Joint  author  with  D. 
S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI, 
pp.  210-211.     (1883.) 

86.  A  list  of  fishes  collected  in  the  east 
fork  of  White  River,  Indiana,  with  descrip- 
tions of  two  new  species.     In  Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  .199-205.     (1884.) 

87.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of   Switz   City 
Swamp,  Greene  county,  Indiana.     In   Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  206-210.     (1884.) 

88.  Descriptions    of    three    new     fishes 
from   Kansas.     In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.    Mus., 
VII,   pp.  512-514.      (1884.) 

89.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  Kansas.     In 
Bull.  Washburn  Col.  Lab.  Nat.  Hist.,  I,  pp. 
10-16.     (1884.) 

90.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Calamus.    (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,   VII,  pp.  14-24. 
(1884.) 

91.  Descriptions  of  ten  new  species  of 
fishes    from    Key    West,    Florida.       (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  24-32.      (1884.) 

92.  Note  on  Caranx  ruber  and  Caranx 
bartholomsei.       (Joint    author    with    D.    S. 
Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.,   VII, 
pp.  32-33.      (1884.) 

93.  Note  on  Calamus  proridens,  a  new 
species  of  Calamus.     (Joint  author  with  D. 
S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII, 
p.  150.     (1884.) 

94.  Description     of     Sciaena     sciera,    a 
new  species  of  Scisena  from  Mazatlan  and 
Panama.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    VII,    p.    480. 
(1884.) 

95.  Second  series  of  notes  on  the  fishes 
of  Kansas.     In  Bull.   Washburn   Col.   Lab. 
Nat.  Hist.,  I,  pp.  97-99.     (1885.) 


96.  The  fisheries  and  fishery  industries 
of  the  United  States,  prepared  through  the 
cooperation  of  the  Commissioner  of  Fisher- 
ies   and   the    Superintendent   of    the    Tenth 
Census,  by  George  Brown  Goode,  Assistant 
Director    of   the    U.    S.    National    Museum, 
and  a  staff  of  associates.     Section  I.     Nat- 
ural history  of  useful  aquatic  animals,  with 
an  atlas  of  227  plates.     Washington  :  Gov- 
ernment Printing  Office,  1884.     (Feb.,  1885.) 
Pp.  895.     (Discussions  of  fresh-water  fishes, 
chiefly   by   D.    S.   Jordan ;   of   Pacific   coast 
fishes,  in  collaboration  with  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 

97.  Third    series    of    notes    on    Kansas 
fishes.     In  Bull.   Washburn   Col.  Lab.  Nat. 
Hist.,  I,  pp.  207-211.     (1886.) 

98.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Arkansas, 
Indian  Territory,  and  Texas,  in  September, 
1884,  with   notes   and   descriptions.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  IX,  pp.  1-25.     (1886.) 

99.  Descriptions     of     new     and     little 
known  Etheostomoids.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  X,  pp.  47-64.     (1887.) 

100.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Thalassophryne       (Thalassophryne       dowi) 
from   Punta   Arenas   and   Panama.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  X,  p.  388.     (1887.) 

101.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Bathy master  from  Puget  Sound  and  Alaska. 
In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.,    XI,    p.    554. 
(1888.) 

102.  A  list  of  fishes  from  a  small  tribu- 
tary   of    the    Poteau    river,     Scott    county, 
Arkansas.     In   Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.   Mus.,  XI, 
pp.  609-610.     (1888.) 

103.  The  fisheries  and  fishery  interests  of 
the  United  States,  by  George  Brown  Goode 
and  a  staff  of   associates.      Section   II.     A 
geographical  review  of  the  fishery  industries 
and  fishing  communities  for  the  year  1880. 
Pp.  787.    Washington,  1887.     (Part  on  fish- 
eries of  California,  Oregon,  and  Washington, 
by  D.  S.  Jordan  and  C.  H.  Gilbert.) 

104.  Notes  on  the  occurrence  of  Gillich- 


295 


Indiana  University 


[Gilbert 


thys  y-cauda  at  San  Diego,  California.  In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XII,  p.  363.  (1889.) 

105.  Report  upon  certain  investigations 
relating  to  the  planting  of  oysters  in  South- 
ern California.  In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
IX,  pp.  95-98 ;  3  maps,  34  plates.  (1889.) 

100.  Report  of  explorations  made  in  Ala- 
bama during  1889,  with  notes  on  the  fishes 
of  the  Tennessee,  Alabama,  and  Escambia 
rivers.  In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  IX,  pp. 
143-159.  (1889.) 

107.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the   U.    S.    Fish   Commission  steamer   Alba- 
tross.    No.  XII.     A  preliminary  report  on 
the  fishes  collected  by  the  steamer  Albatross 
on  the  Pacific  coast  of  North  America  during 
the   year   1889,  with  descriptions  of  twelve 
new  genera  and  ninety-two  new  species.     In 
Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,   XIII,   pp.   49-126. 
(1890.) 

108.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Etheostoma    (E.  micropterus)   from  Chihua- 
hua,  Mexico.      In    Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.   Mus., 
XIII,  pp.  289-290.     ( 1890. ) 

109.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the   U.    S.    Fish   Commission   steamer   Alba- 
tross.  No.   XIX.     A  supplementary   list  of 
fishes  collected  at  the  Galapagos  Islands  and 
Panama,  with  descriptions  of  one  new  genus 
and  three  new  species.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  XIII,  pp.  449-455.     (1890.) 

110.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the   U.    S.   Fish   Commission   steamer   Alba- 
tross.    No.    XXI.     Descriptions    of    Apodal 
fishes  from   the   tropical   Pacific.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XIV,  pp.  347-352.     (1891.) 

111.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the   U.    S.   Fish   Commission   steamer   Alba- 
tross.    No.   XXII.     Descriptions  of  thirty- 
four  new  species  of  fishes  collected  in  1888 
and  1889,  principally  among  the  Santa  Bar- 
bara Islands  and  the  Gulf  of  California.     In 
Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XIV,  pp.  539-566. 
(1891.) 

112.  Report  on   the  fishes  of  the  Death 
Valley  expedition  collected  in  Southern  Cal- 


ifornia and  Nevada  in  1891,  with  descrip- 
tions of  new  species.  In  North  American 
Fauna,  No.  7,  pt.  II,  pp.  229-234,  pi.  v-vi. 
(1893.) 

113.  Note  on  the  wall-eyed  pollack   (Pol- 
lachius   chalcogrammus   fucensis)    of   Puget 
Sound.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XVI,  pp.  315-316. 
(1893.) 

114.  A  report  upon  investigations  in  the 
Columbia  River  Basin,  with  descriptions  of 
four     new     species.       (Joint     author     with 
Barton  Warren  Evermann.)     In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.,  XIV,  pp.  169-207,  pi.  xvi-xxv. 
(1894.)      Also  issued  as  part  of  Sen.  Misc. 
Doc.  200,  Fifty-third  Congress,  2d  Ses. 

115.  Notes  on  fishes  from  the  basin  of  the 
Mackenzie    River    in    British    America.      In 
Bull.   U.   S.   Fish   Comm..   XIV,   pp.   23-25. 
(1894.) 

116.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
ribbon-fish.    (Trachypterus  rex-.salmonorum) 
from  San  Francisco.     (Joint  author  with  D. 
S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci., 
2d  ser.,  IV,  pp.  144-146.     (1894). 

117.  List  of  fishes  inhabiting  Clear  Lake, 
California.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)    In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  XIV,  pp. 
139-140.     (1894.) 

118.  The  ichthyological  collections  of  the 
steamer    Albatross    during    the   years    1890- 
1891.     In  Rep.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1893, 
pp.  393-476,  pi.  xx-xxxv. 

119.  Report  on  the  fishes  dredged  in  deep 
water  near  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  with  de- 
scriptions and   figures   of  twenty-three  new 
species.    (Joint  author  with  Frank  Cramer.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XIX,  pp.  403-435, 
pi.  xxxv-xlviii.      (1897.) 

120.  Descriptions     of     twenty-two     new 
species    of    fishes    collected   by    the   steamer 
Albatross  of  the   United  States   Fish  Com- 
mission.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XIX, 
pp.  437-457,  pi.  xlix-lv.     (1897.) 

121.  The  fishes  of  the  Klamath  Basin.   In 


296 


Griggs  ] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


Bull.   U.   S.   Fish   Comin.,   XVII,   pp.   1-13. 
(1897.) 

122.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the    Colorado    Basin    in    Arizona.       (Joint 
author  with   Norman   Bishop   Scofield.)     In 
Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.,   XX,   pp.  487-499; 
pi.  xxxvi-xxxix.     (1898.) 

123.  The  fishes  of  Bering  Sea.     In  'Re- 
port of  Fur  Seal  Investigations,  1896-1897,' 
Part    III,   sec.    xviii,   pp.   433-492,    pi.    xlii- 
Ixxv.     (1898.) 

124.  On    the    occurrence    of    Caulolepis 
longidens   Gill,   on   the  coast  of   California. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  XII,  pp.  565-566. 
(1899.) 

125.  Report    on   fishes    obtained   by    the 
steamer  Albatross  in  the  vicinity  of  Santa 
Catalina  Island  and  Monterey  Bay.    In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Fish  Cornm.  for  1898,  pp.  25-29,  pi.  i-ii. 

126.  Results  of  the  Branner-Agassiz  ex- 
pedition   to    Brazil.      III.      The    fishes.      In 
Proc.  Washington  Acad.  Sci.,  II,  pp.  161-183, 
pi.  ix.      (1900.) 

127.  The  fishes  of  Panama  Bay.     (Joint 
author    with    Edwin    Chapin    Starks.)       In 
Proc.    California   Acad.    Sci.,    IV,    pp.   304, 
pi.  xxxiii.     (1904.) 

128.  Notes  on  fishes  of  the  Pacific  coast 
of    North    America.      In    Proc.    California 
Acad.  Sci.,  1904. 

129.  Deep-sea    fishes    of    the    Hawaiian 
Islands.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1904. 


3.  Motion  of  a  particle  on  the  helix 
surface.  In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1903,  pp.  75-79. 


OLIVER  EDMUNDS  GLENN,  A.B.  (1902), 
A.M.  (1903).  Instructor  in  Mathemat- 
ics, Indiana  University,  1902-1903.  Now 
Harrison  Fellow,  University  of  Penn- 
sylvania. Philadelphia. 

1.  The  existence  theorem  ;  a  compari- 
son of  the  proofs  of  Gauss  and  Cayley.     In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903,  p.  75. 

2.  Method  of  transvection   in   the  ac- 
tual coefficients.     In  Am,  Math.  Mo.,  XI,  p. 
10.     (March,  1904.) 


WILLIAM  EXHARD  GOLDEN,  A.B.  (1888), 
A.M.  (1889).  Teacher  of  English  in  the 
Polytechnic  Preparatory  School,  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y. 

1.  A     brief    history    of    the    English 
drama.     New  York,   1890.     Pp.   227. 

2.  Hearts,    a    one-act    comedy.      New 
York,  1901. 


DAVID  KOPP  Goss,  A.B.  (1887),  Principal 
of  the  American  College,  Strassburg, 
Germany. 

1.  A   review   of  the  American  species 
of  Hemirhamphus.     (Joint  author  with  Seth 
E.  Meek.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila- 
delphia for  1884,  pp.  221-226. 

2.  A   review   of   the  American  species 
of    the   genus   Trachynotus.      (Joint   author 
with  S.  E.  Meek.)    In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Philadelphia  for  1884,  pp.  121-129. 

3.  A  review  of  the  flounders  and  soles 
of    America    and    Europe.       (Joint    author 
with  David  Starr  Jordan.)     In  Rep.  U.  S. 
Fish  Comm.  for  1886.    pp.  225-342 ;  9  plates. 


EDWARD    HOWARD    GRIGGS,    A.B.     (1889), 
A.M.  (1890).   Lecturer,  Montclair,  N.  J. 

1.  The  new  humanism.     Philadelphia, 
1899.     Pp.  239. 

2.  A   book   of   meditations.      Philadel- 
phia, 1902. 


NATHAN     KIRK     GRIGGS,     LL.B.     (1867). 
Lincoln,  Neb. 

1.     The   lilies.     A  collection   of  sacred 
songs.     Chicago. 


297 


Indiana  University 


[Griggs 


2.  Griggs'   collection.     A  collection  of 
sacred  songs.     Chicago. 

3.  Voices    of    the    winds    series:    (a) 
Croouings  of  the  winds — 12  lullabies,      (b) 
Sighings  of  the  winds — 12  love  songs,     (c) 
Meanings   of   the   winds — 12   sorrow   songs. 

(d)  Rumblings  of  the  winds — 12  bass  songs. 

(e)  Sportings  of  the  winds — 12  negro  songs. 

(f)  Windings  of  the  winds — 12  sundry  songs. 
Chicago. 

4.  Lyrics    of    the    lariat.      Volume    of 
poems.     Chicago. 

5.  Hell's    canyon.      Illustrated    poem. 
Chicago. 


FRANK   SCHMIDT   GRIMSLEY,   A.B.    (1899). 
Milwaukee. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1899.  Pp.  247. 


RAYMOND  LAWRENCE  HALL,  A.B.    (1904). 
Kentland,  Ind. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1904.  Pp.  312. 


CLAUDE  MC-DONALD  HAMILTON,  A.B.  (1898). 
New  York  City. 


1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus' 
class  annual,  Indiana  University), 
ington,  Ind.,  1898.  Pp.  255. 


(Senior 
Bloom- 


JAMES  HENRY  HAMILTON,  A.M.  (1894), 
Ph.D.  Head  worker,  University  Set- 
tlement, New  York  City. 

1.  Syracuse  water  supply.     In  Munic- 
ipal Affairs,  IV,  pp.  60-70.     (March,  1900.) 

2.  School    finance.     In   Jour,   of   Ped. 
(March,  1900.) 


3.  History    of   the    leisure    class.      In 
Jour,  of  Ped.     (March,  1900.) 

4.  Review  of  Patten's  'History  of  Eng- 
lish.'   In  Jour,  of  Ped.     (March,  1900.) 

5.  Review  of  Conrad's  'American  col- 
leges.'    In  Jour,  of  Ped.     (March,  1900.) 

6.  The  neglected  principle  in  civic  re- 
form.    In  Am.  Jour.   Soc.,   V,  pp.  746-760. 
(May,  lyOO.) 

7.  Reviews  of  different  authors  in  Am. 
Jour.  Soc.  and  Jour.  Pol.  Econ. 

8.  Educational  aspects  of  savings.     In 
Jour.  Pol.  Econ. 

9.  The  place  of  the  service  tax  in  mod- 
ern finance.     In  Jour.  Pol.  Econ.,  VIII,  pp. 
303-320. 

10.  Savings    and    savings    institutions. 
New  York,  1902.     Pp.  436. 

11.  Savings  banks  vs.  commercial  banks. 
In  Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Pol.  and  Soc.   Sci.,  XI, 
pp.  44-53. 


ESTHER  (ALLERDICE)  HARDING  (Mrs.  Wil- 
liam Fletcher  Harding),  A.B.  (1892). 
Died  March  12,  1902,  at  Indianapolis, 
Ind. 

1.     Lucindy    listens.      Verse.      In    St. 
Nicholas,  XXVI,  p.  551.     (May,  1899.) 


CAROLINE  HIRST  (BROWN)  HARDING  (Mrs. 
Samuel  Bannister  Harding),  A.B. 
(1890).  Bloomington,  Ind. 

1.  Greek    gods,    heroes,    and    men :    a 
primer  of  the  mythology  and  history  of  the 
Greeks.       (Joint    author    with    Samuel    B. 
Harding.)     Chicago,  1897.     Pp.  vi,  195.     Il- 
lustrated. 

2.  The  city  of  the  seven  hills :  a  book 
of  stories  from  the  history  of  ancient  Rome. 
(Joint   author   with    Samuel    B.    Harding.) 
Chicago,  1898.     Pp.  274.      (Revised  edition, 
1902,  pp.  2G8.)     Illustrated. 


298 


Harwood~\ 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


SAMUEL  BANNISTER  HARDING,  A.B.  (1890), 
Ph.D.    See  Faculty  list. 


WILLIAM  FLETCHER  HARDING,  A.B.  (1893), 
Ph.M.    Washington,  D.  C. 

1.     State   bank   of   Indiana.      In  Jour. 
Pol.  Econ.,  IV,  pp.  1-36.     (Dec.,  1895.) 


CHARLES  HARRIS,  A.B.  (1879),  Ph.D.  Pro- 
fessor of  German,  Adelbert  College, 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

1.  German  composition.    Boston,  1890. 
Pp.  vi,   143. 

2.  German  lessons.    Boston,  1892.    Pp. 
vi,  192. 

3.  German  reader.     New  York,   1895. 
Pp.  viii,  356. 

4.  Wichert's  'An  der  Majorsecke.'  New 
York,  1895.     Pp.  41. 

5.  Goethe's  poems,  selected  and  edited, 
Boston,  1899.    Pp.  xvii,  286. 

6.  Lessing's  'Hamburgische  Dramatur- 
gie,'  abridged  and  edited.     New  York,  1901. 
Pp.  xl,  356. 

7.  Review    of    Gerhart    Hauptmann's 
tragi-comedy,   'Der  rote  Hahn.'    In  Nation, 
LXXIII,  p.  490.      (Dec.  26,  1901.) 

8.  Review    of    Ompteda's    novels.     In 
Nation,  LXXIV,  p.  128.     (Feb.  13,  1902.) 

9.  Review    of    Hermann    Sudermann's 
'Es  lebe  das  Leben.'     In  Nation,  LXXIV, 
p.  169.     (Feb.  27,  1902.) 

10.  Baedeker    and    the    modern    guide- 
book.    In  Bookman,  XVII,  p.  495.      (July, 
1903.) 

11.  Gerhart      Hauptmann.       In      Mod. 
Lang.  Notes,  XIX,  p.  33.     (Feb.,  1904.) 


THOMAS    LEGRAND    HARRIS,    A.B.     (1892), 
A.M.   (1895).     Sheridan,  Ind. 

1.     The  evolution  of  the  college  curricu- 


lum   in    the    United    States.      Indianapolis, 
1892.      (Magazine  article.) 

2.  The  Trent  affair  and  relations  with 
England  at  the  beginning  of  the  Civil  War. 
Indianapolis,  1896.  Pp.  288. 


NOBLE  HARTER,  A.B.  (1895),  A.M.  (1896). 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Warsaw, 
Indiana. 

1.  Studies  in  the  physiology  and  psy- 
chology of  the  telegraphic  language.     (Joint 
author    with    William    Lowe    Bryan.)       In 
Psych.  Rev.,  IV,  pp.  27-54.    8  plates. 

2.  Studies     on     the     telegraphic     lan- 
guage— the    acquisition    of    a    hierarchy    of 
habits.      (Joint  author  with  W.  L.  Bryan.) 
In  Psych.  Rev.,  VI,  pp.  345-375;  2  plates. 


SAMUEL  ERNEST  HARWOOD,  A.B.  (1876), 
A.M.  (1892).  Professor  of  Mathemat- 
ics in  Southern  Illinois  Normal  School, 
Carbondale,  111. 

1.  Harwood's  writing  speller.    Carbon- 
dale,  111.,  1879. 

2.  Heredity  and  the  school.     In  Pub. 
Sch.  Jour.,  XIII,  p.  260.     (Jan.,  1894.) 

3.  Typical  plans  for  teaching  number 
ideas :    the   idea   six.      In   Pub.    Sch.   Jour., 
XIV,  p.  151.     (Nov.,  1894.) 

4.  Plan  for  teaching  number  symbols. 
In   Pub.    Sch.   Jour.,   XIV,  p.  206.      (Dec., 
1894.) 

5.  Conscious   analysis  of  the   learning 
process.     In  Pub.   Sch.  Jour.,  XIV,  p.  340. 
(Feb.,  1895.) 

6.  Some  vital   questions  in  education. 
In   School  News,   1895-1896.    The  introduc- 
tion (Oct.,  1895).     The  center  of  the  school 
course    (Nov.,   1895).    Adjustment   of  men- 
tal and  manual  exercises  (Dec.,  1895).    The 
one    or    the    many    (Jan.,    1896).     Sex   in 
education   (Feb.,  1896).     Interest  and  duty 


299 


Indiana  University 


\_Harwood 


(March,  1896).  The  child  and  the  race 
(April,  189G).  Religion  and  the  school 
(June.  1896).  The  school  and  the  home 
(July,  1896).  Shall  the  school  prepare  one 
for  his  calling  or  for  living?  (Sept.,  1896.) 

7.  Happiness  and  the  school.     In  In- 
land Educator,  II,  p.  256.     (June,  1896.) 

8.  Homesick  in  heaven.    In  Inland  Ed- 
ucator, III.  p.  69.     (Sept.,  1896.) 

9.  Closer  organization  of  the  [Illinois] 
school   system.     In    School    News,    1896.     A 
state  board  of  education    (Nov.).     County 
and  township  institutes   (Dec.).     The  town- 
ship   system     (Jan.).       Examinations    and 
certificates  ( Feb. ) . 

10.  Notes    on     method     in     arithmetic. 
Terre  Haute,  1897.     Pp.  68. 

11.  Method     in     reading.       In     School 
News,     XI,     1898-1899.      The    outline    pre- 
sented  (Sept.,  1898).  .The  language  group 
(Oct.,   1898).     Purposes   in  reading    (Nov., 
1898).      Uses   of   definitions    (Dec.,    1898). 
Questionable  devices  (Jan.,  1899).     Steps  in 
the   process    (Feb.,   1899).     A  second-grade 
lesson   (March,  1899).     Classifying  reading 
exercises  (April,  1899).    To  be  kept  in  mind 
(June,  1899). 

12.  Some  relations  of  form  and  number. 
In  School  News.      (Jan.,  1900.) 

13.  The  attitude  of  the  school   toward 
reforms  in  the  English  language.    In  Intelli- 
gence.    (Jan.,  1903.) 


PAUL  LELAND  HAWORTH,  A.B.  (1899), 
A.M.  (1901).  Instructor  in  History, 
Teachers'  College,  Columbia  University, 
New  York  City. 

1.  The   professor's   scar    (story).      In 
Outing,  XXXVI,  pp.  161-165.     (May,  1900.) 

2.  Negro   disfranchisement   in   Louisi- 
ana.      In     Outlook,     LXXI,     pp.     163-166. 
(May  17,  1902.) 

3.  The  skee  tournament  at  Ishpeming 


(story).     In  Youth's  Companion,  LXXVII, 
pp.1-2.     (New  Year's  number  for  1903.) 

4.  Bread    upon    the    waters     (story). 
Accepted  by  Youth's  Companion. 

5.  The  dog  sledge  mail    (story).     Ac- 
cepted by  Youth's  Companion. 

6.  Articles  on  topics  in  biography  and 
American  history,  about  150,000  words.     In 
New  International  Encyclopaedia. 

7.  Tholocco  Sam's  canoe  fight  (story). 
Accepted  by  the  Success  Co.  for  a  new  mag- 
azine, the  name  of  which  has  not  yet  been 
announced. 

8.  Frederick  the  Great  and  the  revolted 
thirteen  colonies.     In  Am.  Hist.  Rev.,  April, 
1904. 

9.  Historical    note   continuing   an    ar- 
ticle on  a  proposed  change  in  the  method  of 
electing  the   President,   written   in   1884  by 
Senator  J.  B.  Doolittle.     To  appear  in  the 
Pol.  Sci.  Quart. 


THOMAS  J.  HEADLEE,  A.B.  1902.     Teacher, 
Rensselaer,  Ind. 

1.  Discussion  of   botany   requirements 
as  outlined  by  the  college  entrance  exami- 
nation board  of  the  Middle  States  and  Mary- 
land.     In    Proc.    Central   Asso.    Math,    and 
Sci.  Teachers,  for  Nov.,  1903. 

2.  Ecology  of  the  mussels  of  Winona 
Lake.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1904. 
2  plates. 


NOBVAL  CHASE  HEIBONIMUS,  A.B.  (1895). 
Principal  Central  Grammar  School, 
Richmond,  Indiana. 

1.  Type  studies  in  American  history 
for  grammar  grades.  Missouri  Compromise, 
Richmond,  Ind.,  1898.  Pp.  39.  Stamp  act, 
Richmond,  Ind.,  1899.  Pp.  38.  Louisiana 
purchase,  Richmond,  Ind.,  1900.  Pp.  36. 
Colonial  life,  Richmond,  Ind.,  1901.  Pp.  60. 


300 


Hooper] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


ROBERT     HESSLER,     A.B.      (1890),     A.M. 
(1893),  M.D.     Logansport,  Ind. 

1.  Railroad    migrants   among   Indiana 
plants.    In  Indiana  Farmer,  XXIII,  No.  34, 
p.  1.     (August,  1888.) 

2.  Notes    on    a    rare    form    of    brain 
tumor,  Psammoma.     In  Indiana  Med.  Jour, 
for  April,  1892. 

3.  The    preparation    of    microscopical 
sections.     In   Indiana  Med.  Jour,  for  Jan., 
1893. 

4.  An  extreme  case  of  parasitism.     In 
Am.    Nat.,    XXVII,    pp.    346-352.       (April, 
1893.) 

5.  The  adventitious  plants  of  Fayette 
county,   Ind.     In   Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci. 
for  1893,  p.  258. 

6.  A  case  of  Norway  itch.     (The  first 
reported  American  case.)     In  Medical  News, 
Philadelphia,  LXII,  p.  517. 

7.  The   flora   of   lake   Cicott   and   lake 
Maxinkuckee,  Ind.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1896,  pp.  116-129. 

8.  Thyroid     medication.      In     Indiana 
Med.    Jour.,     XIV,    pp.    431-435.       (June, 
1896.) 

9.  Epilepsy  and  erysipelas.     (The  use 
of    Erysipelas    antitoxin.)      In    Jour.    Am. 
Med.  Asso.,  XXX,  p.  1157.     (May,  1898.) 

10.  Lymphadenoma    or    Hodgkin's    dis- 
ease.     In    Indiana    Med.    Jour,    for    July, 
1898. 

11.  Blastomycetic      dermatitis.         (The 
fifth  known  case.)     In  Indiana  Med.  Jour., 
XVII,  p.  48.     (August,  1898.) 

12.  Mosquitos    and    malaria.     In    Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.   Sci.  for   1900,  pp.  74-81. 

13.  Featherbeds  and  colds.    In  Indiana 
Med.  Jour,  for  August,  1901. 

14.  Reclreaming     dreams.      In     Psych. 
Rev.,  VIII,  pp.  606-609.      (Nov.,  1901.) 

15.  The  mineral  waters  of  Indiana.    In 
Trans.  Indiana  State  Med.  Soc.  for  1902,  p. 
365. 

16.  The  medicinal  properties  of  Indiana 


mineral  waters.     In  26th  Ann.  Rep.  Indiana 
State  Geologist,  p.  159-224. 

17.  Cold  and  'colds.'    In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1903. 

18.  Myxedema.      Notes    on    two    cases. 
In  Indiana  Med.  Jour,  for  June,  1904. 

19.  Dust — A    neglected    factor    in    the 
production  of  ill  health.     In  Trans.  Indiana 
State  Med.  Assn.  for  1904. 


MARTIN   LUTHER   HOFFMAN,   A.B.    (1885), 
Auburn,  Ind. 

1.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
the  genus  teuthis.  (Joint  author  with 
Seth  E.  Meek.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1884,  pp.  227-231. 


CYRUS  LAURON  HOOPER,  Ph.B.  (1887), 
A.M.  (1888).  Instructor  in  English  in 
the  North-West  Division  High  School, 
Chicago. 

1.  A  Cloverdale  skeleton.     New  York, 
1889.     Pp.  170. 

2.  XXth  century   Shakespeare.    Julius 
Csesar.      Edited    with    an    introduction    and 
notes.    Chicago,  1901.    Pp.  153. 

3.  XXth   century   Shakespeare.      Mac- 
beth.      Edited    with    an    introduction    and 
notes.     Chicago,  1902.    Pp.  155. 

4.  XXth  century   Shakespeare.     Ham- 
let.    Edited  with  an  introduction  and  notes. 
Chicago,  1902.     Pp.  208. 

5.  Gee-boy.     Chicago,   1903.     Pp.  271. 

6.  XXth     century     Shakespeare.      As 
You  Like  It.     Edited  with  an  introduction 
and  notes.    Chicago,  1904.     (In  press.) 

7.  Lamb's   literary   motive.      Introduc- 
tion to  The  Village  Press's  edition  de  luxe  of 
'A    dissertation    upon    roast   pig.'     Chicago, 
1904.      (In  press.) 

8.  Introduction  to  The  Village  Press's 
edition  de  luxe  of  William  Morris's  'Hollow 
land.'    Chicago,  1904.     (In  press.) 


301 


Indiana  University 


\_Hornbrook 


ADEXIA  ROBERTS  HORNBBOOK,  A.B.  (1893), 
A.M.  (1894).  Principal  of  the  Uni- 
versity Academy,  Chicago. 

1.  The    pedagogical    value    of    number 
forms.      In    Educ.    Rev.,    Ill,    pp.    407-480. 
(May,  1893.) 

2.  Laboratory     methods     of     teaching 
mathematics    in    secondary    schools.       New 
York,  1895.     Pp.  16. 

3.  Concrete    geometry    for    beginners. 
New  York,  1896.     Pp.  201. 

4.  An   experiment   in    Latin   teaching. 
In  Education.     (Dec.,  1896.) 

5.  Geometry      under     the     laboratory 
method.     In  Indiana  Sch.  Jour.,  XLII,  pp. 
141-147.     (March,  1897.) 

6.  The  laboratory   method   again.      In 
Indiana     Sch.    Jour.,    XLII,    pp.    512-516. 
(August,  1897.) 

7.  Hornbrook's      primary     arithmetic. 
New  York,  1898.     Pp.  252. 

8.  Hornbrook's  grammar  school  arith- 
metic.    New  York,  1900.     Pp.  416. 

9.  Key     to     Hornbrook's     arithmetics. 
New  York,  1901.     Pp.  116. 


JENNIE    E    HORNING.     See    Mrs.    Francis 
Marion  Walters. 


WALTER  RALEIGH  HOUGHTON,  A.B.  (1871), 
A.M.  (1873).  Principal  of  the  Prepara- 
tory Department,  Indiana  University, 
1873-1884.  Now  Principal  of  High 
School,  Connersville,  Ind. 

1.  A  history  of  American  politics.     In- 
dianapolis, 1883.     Pp.  x,  550. 

2.  Rules  of  etiquette  and  home  culture. 
Chicago,  1884. 

3.  The    lives    of    Elaine    and    Logan. 
Chicago,  1884. 

4.  New    reversible    political    map    and 
United  States  map  combined.      (A  conspec- 
tus  of  the   history   of  political   parties   and 
the  Federal  government.)     Chicago,  1888. 


JOSEPH  HENRY  HOWARD,  A.B.  (1888),  A.M. 
(1890),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of 
Latin,  1894-1901.  Now  Professor  of 
Latin,  University  of  South  Dakota, 
Vermillion,  S.  D. 

1.  Case    usage    in    Petronius'    satires. 
Leland  Stanford  Jr.  University,  1902.     Pp. 
95. 

2.  The   quantitative   reading  of   Latin 
verse.    Chicago,  1898.    Pp.  30. 


GEORGE  MAXWELL  HOWE,  A.B.  (1894),  Ph. 
D.  Instructor  in  German,  1893-1895. 
Now  Instructor  in  German,  Cornell  Uni- 
versity, Ithaca,  N.  Y. 

1.  The  artificial  palate.     One  way   of 
making    it  and    of    keeping   its   records.      In 
Jour.   Eng.   and   Ger.   Philo.,   V,   pp.   77-82. 
(Sept.,  1903.) 

2.  German  prose  composition  based  ou 
Storm's  'Immensee.'     New  York,  1904.     Pp. 
vi,  64. 


ELIZABETH  GREEN  HUGHES,  A.B.  (1875), 
M.S.  (1886).  Teacher,  Stanford  Uni- 
versity, Cal. 

1.  A  review  of  the  genera  and  species 
of    Julidinse    found     in     American    waters. 

(Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.)     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1886,  pp.  56-70. 

2.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
the   genus   Prionotus.      (Joint   author   with 
D.  S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1886,  pp.  327-338. 

3.  A  review  of  the  genera  Archosargus, 
Lagodon,   and   Diplodus  with   definitions   of 
related  genera.      (Joint  autnor  with  C.   H. 
Eigenmann.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1886. 


302 


Jenkins  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


OLIVER  PEEBLES  JENKINS,  M.S.  (1886), 
Ph.D.  (1889).  Professor  of  Physiology, 
Leland  Stanford  Junior  University, 
Stanford  University,  Cal. 

1.  Natural   science   in   the  elementary 
schools.     In  Educational  Weekly,  Indianap- 
olis, IV,  Nos.  16,  17.      (1885.) 

2.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  Beaufort  Har- 
bor,   North    Carolina.      In    Johns    Hopkins 
Circulars,   V,  p.   11.      (1885.) 

3.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Vigo  coun- 
ty, Indiana,  in  1885  and  1888.     In  Hoosier 
Naturalist,  II,  pp.  93-96.      (1887.) 

4.  Notes  on  Indiana  fishes.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  Barton  Warren  Evermann. )      In 
Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888,  pp.  43-57. 
(1888.) 

5.  Ornithology  from  a  railroad  train. 
(Joint  author  with  B.  W.  Evermann.)      In 
Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  XIII,  pp.  65-70. 
(1888.) 

6.  Physiology    in    the   college   curricu- 
lum.    In  Addresses  and  Proc.  Indiana  Col- 
lege   Asso.,     14th    Ann.     Sess.,    pp.    39-46. 
(1890.) 

7.  Description  of  eighteen  new  species 
of  fishes  from  the  Gulf  of  California.     (Joint 
author  with  B.    W.    Evermann.)      In.  Proc. 
U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for    1888,    pp.    137-158. 
(1889.) 

8.  Report    on    a    collection    of    fishes 
made  at  Guaymas,  Sonora,  Mexico,  with  de- 
scriptions   of    new   species.      (Joint   author 
with   B.    W.    Evermann.)      In   Proc.    U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1891,  pp.  121-165,  17  plates. 
(1891.) 

9.  The    Hopkins    Seaside    Laboratory. 
In  Zoe,  IV,  No.  1 ;   26  plates.     (1893.) 

10.  Primary   lessons  in  human  physiol- 
ogy.    Indianapolis,  1896.     Pp.  211.     2d  ed., 
rev. 

11.  Advanced   lessons   in  human   physi- 
ology.   Indianapolis,  1896.    Pp.  318.    2d  ed., 


12.  Suggestions  in  nature  study  in  the 
primary  grades.     Stanford  University,  Cal., 
1896.     Pp.  29. 

13.  Nature  study.     In  School  Report  of 
Oakland,  Cal.,  for  1896-97,  pp.  1-44. 

14.  The   passing  of  Plato.     Address  at 
the    sixth    annual    commencement,     Leland 
Stanford     Junior     University,     May     26th. 
Stanford  University,  Cal.,  1897.     Pp.  23. 

15.  Nature  study.    In  School  Report  of 
Oakland,  Cal.,  for  1897-98,  pp.  15-34.     (Sup- 
plement to  article  in  Report  of  1896-97.) 

16.  Plan  of  report  of  subcommittee  on 
nature  study.    In  Overland  Monthly,  XXXI, 
No.  183;  Educational  Department,  II,  No.  9. 
(1898.) 

17.  Lessons    in    nature    study.      (Joint 
author   with   Vernon   Lyman   Kellogg.)     In 
West.  Jour,  of  Educ.     A  series  of  articles 
running  through  the  years   1899-1900. 

18.  Lessons    in    nature    study.      (Joint 
author    with    V.    L.    Kellogg.)      San    Fran- 
cisco, 1900.     Pp.  196. 

19.  Description  of  new  species  of  fishes 
from  the  Hawaiian  Islands  belonging  to  the 
families  of  Labridse  and  Scaridse.     In  Bull. 
U.  S.   Fish   Comm.  for  1899,  pp.  45-65,  22 
plates.      (August  30,   1900.) 

20.  Description   of   fifteen   new   species 
of   fishes   from   the   Hawaiian   Islands.      In 
Bull,  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1899,  pp. 
187-404,   16  plates.      (June  3,  1901.) 

21.  The  rate  of  the  nervous  impulse  in 
certain  mollusca.     (Joint  author  with  Anton 
Julius  Carlson.)      In  Am.  Jour.  Physiology, 
VIII,  pp.  251-268.      (1903.) 

22.  Report  on  collections  of  fishes  made 
in  the  Hawaiian   Islands,  with  descriptions 
of  new  species.    In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm., 
for    1902,    p.    417,    54    plates.       (Sept.    23, 
1903.) 

23.  The  rate  of  the  nervous  impulse  in 
the  ventral  cord  of  certain  worms.      (Joint 
author  with  A.  J.  Carlson.)     In  Jour.  Comp. 
Neurology,  XIII,   No.  4.      (Dec.,  1903.) 


303 


Indiana  University 


[Jenkins 


24.  Physiological  evidence  of  the  fluid- 
ity of  the  conducting  substance  in  the  pedal 
nerves  of  the  slug,  Ariolimax  columbianus. 
(Joint    author    with    A.    J.    Carlson.)       In 
Jour,  of  Comp.  Neurology  and  Psychology. 
(1904.) 

25.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Ranzania   from   the  Hawaiian   Islands.     In 
Proc.  California  Acad.  Sci.,  2d  ser.,  V,  pp. 
779-784,  1  plate. 

26.  Notes    on    the   fauna   of    Beaufort, 
North    Carolina.      The    fishes.      In    Studies 
from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  Johns  Hop- 
kins Univ.,  IV,  p.  83. 


FRED  BATES  JOHNSON,  A.B.  (1902),  Super- 
intendent of  Schools,  Carlisle,  Ind. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1902.  Pp.  283. 


MANSON   ULVAIN   JOHNSON,   A.B.    (1890), 
A.M.   (1892).     Anderson,  Ind. 

1.  The  cotton-seed  oil  trust.     In  Lit. 
Rev.,  July,  1899. 

2.  The  tariff  as  viewed  from  a  taxation 
standpoint.     Indianapolis,  1891.     Pp.  525. 


NEWTON  CARU  JOHNSON,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
(1898).  Dean  of  Normal  Department, 
Oakland  City  College.  Oakland  City, 
Ind. 

1.  Habits  of  work  and  methods  of 
study  of  high  school  pupils  in  some  cities 
in  Indiana.  In  School  Review,  V,  pp.  257- 
277,  11  plates.  (May,  1899.) 


FRANK  LEONARD  JONES,  A.B.  (1898).  Ex- 
State  Superintendent  Public  Instruc- 
tion, Indianapolis.  South  Bend,  Ind. 

1.     20th  biennial  report  of  the  Indiana 


State  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction. 
Indianapolis,  1900.    Pp.  800. 

2.  The    rural    schools.       Indianapolis, 
1900.     Pp.  125. 

3.  21st  biennial  report  of  the  Indiana 
State  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction. 
Indianapolis,  1902.     Pp.  870. 


JESSIE  (KNIGHT)  JORDAN  (Mrs.  David 
Starr  Jordan),  A.B.  (1890).  Stanford 
University,  Cal. 

1.     Red  letter  days  :   The  Canyon  of  the 
Colorado.    In  Land  of  Sunshine,  IX,  p.  126. 

(1898.) 


ClIANCEY       JUDAY,       A.B.        (1896),        A.M. 

(1897).     Acting  Professor  of  Biology, 
University  of  Colorado,  Boulder,  Colo. 

1.  Hydrographic  map  of  Turkey  Lake, 
Indiana.     In   Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for 
1895. 

2.  The  plankton  of  Turkey  Lake. 
Proc.    Indiana    Acad.    Sci.    for    1896, 
287-296;  1  map. 

3.  The  plankton  of  Winona  Lake. 
Proc.    Indiana    Acad.    Sci.    for    1902, 
120-133;   2  plates. 

4.  The  diurnal  movement  of  plankton 
Crustacea.     In  Trans.  Wisconsin  Acad.  Sci., 
Arts,  and  Letters.     (In  press.) 

5.  The  plankton  of  Lake  Maxinkuckee 
in  1899.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.      (In 
press. ) 


In 
PP- 

In 
pp. 


WILLIAM  HENRY  KELLY,  A.B.  (1894),  Win- 
amac.  Ind. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1894.  Pp.  120. 


304 


Kindle] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


OSCAR  LYNN  KELSO,  B.S.  (1884),  A.M. 
(1890).  Professor  of  Mathematics,  In- 
diana State  Normal  School,  Terre 
Haute,  Ind. 

1.  Arithmetic   for   high  schools,   acad- 
emies and  normal  schools.     New  York,  1903, 
Pp.  x,  274. 

2.  Revision  of  Cook-Cropsey  series  of 
arithmetics.      (Joint  author  with  Robert  J. 
Aley.)     New  York,  1904.    Elementary  book, 
pp.  xi,  276.     Advanced  book,  pp.  xiii,  327. 

3.  Some  contributions  to  geometry.    In 
Add.   and   Proc.   Indiana   College  Asso.   for 
1900,  pp.  29-36. 

4.  The    relations    of    mathematics    to 
the  sciences  in  the  High  School.     In  Proc. 
State    Sci.    Teachers'    Asso.    for    1900,    pp. 
62-69. 

5.  Some  errors  in  teaching  arithmetic. 
In  New  York  Teachers'  Monographs.      (To 
be  published.) 


CLARENCE  HAMILTON  KENNEDY,  A.B. 
( 1902 ) ,  A.M.  ( 1903 ) .  Scientific  Assist- 
ant U.  S.  Bureau  of  Fisheries,  Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 

1.  Unilateral  coloration  with  a  bilat- 
eral effect.      (Joint  author  with  C.  H.  Ei- 
genmann.)     In  Science,  XIII,  pp.  828-830. 
(May,  1901.) 

2.  Tne  Leptocephalus  of  the  American 
eel  and  other  American  Leptocephali.    (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.   Eigenmann.)      In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1901,  pp.  81-92. 

3.  Variation     notes.        (Joint     author 
with   C.    H.    Eigenmann.)      In   Biol.    Bull., 
IV,  pp.  227-230.      (April,  1903.) 

4.  A  list  of  the  dragonflies  of  Winona 
Lake.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903, 
pp.  159-164.     (1903.) 

5.  A  new  diagnostic  character  for  the 
species  of  the  genus  Argia.     In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana   Acad.    Sci.    for    1902,    pp.    164-169,    2 
plates.     (1903.) 


6.  On  a  collection  of  fishes  from  Par- 
aguay, with  a  synopsis  of  the  American  gen- 
era of  Cichlids.  (Joint  author  with  C.  H. 
Eigenmann.)  In  Proc.  Acad.  Sci.  Phila- 
delphia for  1903,  pp.  497-537.  (Sept.,  1903.) 


WALTER  MCCULLOUGH  KERN,  A.B.  (1896). 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Columbus, 
Neb. 

1.     Editor  of  'The  Nebraska  Teacher,' 
published  at  Lincoln,  Neb. 


EDWARD  MARTIN  KINDLE,  A.B.  (1893), 
Ph.D.  Assistant  Geologist,  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey.  New  Haven,  Conn. 

1.  Geologic  literature  of  Indiana,  strat- 
igraphic  and  economic.     (Joint  author  with 
V.  F.   Marsters.)      In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  156-191. 

2.  The   South   American  cat-fishes  be- 
longing to  Cornell  University.     In  Ann.  N. 
Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  VI,  pp.  249-256.     (1893.) 

3.  A  note  on  rock  flexure.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  49-50. 

4.  Dip  of  the  Keokuk  rocks  at  Bloom- 
ington,    Indiana.      In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad. 
Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  52-53. 

5.  Preliminary    list    of    the    birds    of 
Brown  county,  Indiana.     In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1894,  pp.  68-73. 

6.  The  whetstone  and  grindstone  rocks 
of   Indiana.     In   20th  Ann.   Rept.   Indiana 
Dept.  of  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  for  1896,  pp. 
329-368,  with  geologic  map. 

7.  The   relation   of   the  fauna   of   the 
Ithaca  group  to  the  faunas  of  the  Portage 
and  Chemung.     In  Bull.  Am.  Pal.,  II,  No. 
6,  pp.  1-54;   1  plate.     (1896.) 

8.  On  some  Paleozoic  fossils  from  Baf- 
finland.     In  Am.  Jour.   Sci.,  LII,  pp.  455- 
456.     (1896.) 

9.  Pleistocene  fossils  from  Baffinlaud 


(21) 


305 


Indiana  University 


\_Kindle 


and  Greenland.     In  Science,  N.  S.,  V,  pp. 
91-93.     (1897.) 

10.  A  catalogue  of  the  fossils  of  Indi- 
ana, accompanied  by  a  bibliography  of  the 
literature   relating   to   them.     In   22d  Ann. 
Kept.  Indiana  Dept.  of  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res. 
for  1898,  pp.  407-514. 

11.  The  Devonian  and   Lower  Carbon- 
iferous faunas  of  southern  Indiana  and  cen- 
tral Kentucky.     In  Bull.  Am.  Pal.,  No.  12, 
pp.  1-112.     (1889.) 

12.  The  Devonian  fossils  and  stratigra- 
phy of  Indiana.     In  25th  Ann.  Kept.  Geol. 
Nat.    Res.    of   Indiana   for    1900,    pp.    530- 
758 ;   31  plates. 

13.  Geological   maps  of  southern  Indi- 
ana  limestones    (Salem   sheet   and   Corydon 
sheet).     (Joint  author  with  G.  H.  Ashley.) 
In  27th  Rep.  Indiana  Geol.  Surv.  for  1901 
and  1902. 

14.  The    Niagara    rocks    of    Hamilton 
county,  Indiana.     In  Am.  Jour.   Sci.,  XIV, 
pp.  221-224.      (July,  1902.) 

15.  The  Niagara  domes  of  northern  In- 
diana.    In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  XV,  459-468;    4 
plates.     (June,  1903.) 

16.  The  Niagara  stratigraphy  and  pal- 
eontology of  northern  Indiana.  In  28th  Ann. 
Rep.  Indiana  Geol.  Surv.,  30  plates.      (Not 
yet  issued.) 

17.  The  fossil  faunas  of  the  Devonian 
and  Lower  Carboniferous  of  Virginia,  West 
Virginia  and  Kentucky.     (Joint  author  with 
H.  S.  Williams.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv. 
1904.      (Not  yet  published.) 

18.  The  folio  of  the  WatkSns  Glen  quad- 
rangle.      (Joint    author    with    H.    S.    Wil- 
liams.)    In  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey.     (Not  yet 
published. ) 


CYRUS  AMBROSE  KING,  A.B.  (1893),  Ph.D. 
Instructor  in  Botany,  1900-1902.  Now 
teacher  of  Botany  in  the  DeWitt  Clin- 
ton High  School,  New  York  City. 

1.     Explosive  discharge  of  antherozoids 


in    Conocephalum.      In   Torreya   for   April, 
1903,  pp.  60-61. 

2.  Observations  on  the  cytology  of 
Aroiospora  pulchra,  Thaxter.  In  Trans. 
Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  Nov.,  1903,  pp. 
211-245 ;  5  plates. 


PHILIP  HENRY  KIRSCH,  A.B.  (1888),  A.M. 
(1889),  Ph.D.  (1893).  Died  Sept.  8, 
1900,  at  El  Paso,  Texas. 

1.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
the   Rio   Gila   at  Fort  Thomas,   Ariz.,   ob- 
tained by  Lieut.  W.  L.  Carpenter,  U.  S.  A. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888. 

2.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of  thread-fins  ( Polynemidae. )     In  Ann.  New 
York  Acad.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1890. 

3.  A    review    of   the   sturgeons    (Aci- 
penseridse)    of  North  America.      (Joint  au- 
thor with  Morton  W.   Fordice.)      In  Proc. 
Acad.   Nat.   Sci.   Philadelphia   for   1889,  pp. 
245-257. 


OTTO  PAUL  KLOPSCH,  A.B.  (1896).     Super- 
intendent of  schools,  Mascoutah,  111. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1896.  Pp.  239. 


CHARLES  TOBIAS  KNIPP,  A.B.  (1894),  A.M. 
(1896),  Ph.D.  Instructor  in  Physics, 
1893-1900;  Assistant  Professor,  1900- 
1903,  Indiana  University.  Now  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  Physics,  University  of 
Illinois,  Urbana,  111. 

1.  A   new   form   of   make   and   break. 
In  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  V,  pp.  283-284.     (1898.) 

2.  Surface  tension  of  water  above  100° 
C.    In  Phys.  Rev.,  XI,  pp.  129-154.     (Sept., 
1900.) 

3.  The  use  of  the  bicycle  wheel  in  illus- 
trating the  principles  of  the  gyroscope.     In 
Phys.  Rev.,  XII,  pp.  43-46.      (Jan.,  1901.) 


306 


Loeb] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


4.  An  automatic   temperature   regula- 
tor.   In  Phys.  Rev.,  XII,  pp.  47-49.     (Jan., 
1901.) 

5.  On  the  density  and  surfaee  tension 
of  liquid  air.     In  Phys.  Rev.,  XIV,  pp.  75- 
82.     (Feb.,  1902.) 

6.  A  method  for  maintaining  interme- 
diate temperatures.     In  Phys.  Rev.,  XV,  pp. 
125-126.     (August,  1902.) 


HENRY  HIGGINS  LANE,  A.M.  (1903).  As- 
sistant in  Zoology,  University  of  Chi- 
cago, Chicago. 

1.  The  green  heron  (Ardea  virescens). 
In  Birds  and  Nature,  May,  1902.     1  full- 
page  plate  in  color. 

2.  The    solitary    sandpiper     (Totanus 
solitarius).      In    Birds    and    Nature,    Oct., 
1902. 

3.  The  ovarian  structures  of  the  vivi- 
parous blind  fishes,  Lucifuga  and  Stygicola. 
In    Biol.    Bull.,    VI,    pp.    38-54;     2   plates. 
(Dec.,  1903.) 


ALEXANDER  DOWNING  LEMON,  B.S.  (1858), 
LL.B.   (1859).     San  Francisco,  Cal. 

1.  The  union   of   the    States   must  be 
maintained.     Bedford,   Indiana,   1861.     Pp. 
10. 

2.  Reconstruction  of  the  States.     Bed- 
ford, Indiana,  1868.     Pp.  Iz. 

3.  An  address  in  support  of  the  elec- 
tion of  Samuel  J.  Tilden   for   President  of 
the    United    States.      San    Francisco,    Cal., 
1876.     Pp.  12. 

4.  Fourth  of  July  Centennial  address. 
San  Diego,   Cal.,   1876.     Pp.   10. 

5.  Prison    reforms,    and    libraries    for 
penal     institutions.      Phoenix,    Ariz.,    1883. 
Pp.  8. 

6.  An   address  on   the  silver   question 
and  bi-metallism.    San  Francisco,  Cal.,  1895. 
Pp.  15. 


WILLIAM   HARRISON  LEMON,  A.B.   (1854), 
Ph.D.     Lawrence,  Kansas. 

1.  Evidence    of    pre-glacial    man,     in 
Greene  county,  Indiana.     Papers  to  Smith- 
sonian Inst.     (1856.) 

2.  The   valley   of   the   Ghor,   and    the 
Noachian  deluge.     1859.     Pp.  200. 

3.  Olam  Haba,  or  the  world  arrested 
at  the  theism  of  the  Jews.     1882.     Pp.  240. 

4.  Gisdubar,     the     pre-Adamite     man. 
1886.     Pp.  180. 

5.  Bichloride  of  gold,  or  the  skeleton  in 
the  closet.     1890.     Pp.  200. 

6.  Ithuriel,  or  the   legend  of  Eros ;  n 
romance  of  eschatology.     1903.     Pp.  450. 


JESSE  LEWIS,  A.B.  (1901).  Professor  of 
History  and  Civics,  State  Normal 
School,  Mayville,  N.  D. 

1.  A  topical  analysis  of  American  his- 
tory and  government.     Chicago,  1902.     Pp. 
185. 

2.  The    educational   value    of    history. 
In  Quar.  Bull.  State  Normal  School,  May- 
ville, N.  D. 


ERNEST  HIRAM  LINDLEY,  A.B.  (1893),  A.M. 
(1894),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


CLARENCE  GUY  LITTELL,  A.B.   (1.903). 

1.  The  birds  of  Winona  Lake  (sum- 
mer). In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1902; 
reprinted  in  Indiana  Univ.  Bull.,  I,  No.  4, 
pp.  41-72;  27  figures  (Nov.,  1903). 


ISAAC  ANDERSON  LOEB,  A.B.  (1890 1,  LL.B. 
Chicago,  111. 

1.     The  Jewess  of  the  Apocrypha.    Chi- 
cago, 1901. 


307 


Indiana  University 


\_Leeb 


2.  Editor  of  'The  Independent  Order 
Free  Sons  of  Israel.'  I  (1903),  II  (1904). 
Chicago. 


ROBERT  EDWARD  LYONS,  A.B.  (1889),  A.M. 
(1890),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


JEFFERSON     MCANNELLY, 
Ft.  Collins,  Colo. 


LL.B.     (1872), 


1.  A  guide  to  administrators,  execu- 
tors, and  guardians.  Fort  Collins,  Colo., 
1886.  Pp.  60. 


AMANDA  McCoMB,  A.M.   (1900).     Teacher 
High  School,  South  Bend,  Ind. 

1.  The  development  of  the  karyokinetic 
spindle  in  vegetative  cells  of  higher  plants. 
In  Bull.  Tor.  Bot.  Club,  XXVII,  pp.  451- 
459,  2  plates.  (August,  1900.) 


WILLIAM  HARRISON  MACE,  A.M.  (1889), 
Ph.D.  Professor  of  History,  Syracuse 
University,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

1.  A  series  of  articles  in  Indiana  Sch. 
Jour.,  Indianapolis,  1888-1890. 

2.  A  series  on  method  in  history.     In 
Inter-State  Sch.  Rev.,  Danville,   111.,  1891- 
1892. 

3.  The  organization   of  historical  ma- 
terial.    In  Papers  Am.   Hist.  Asso.,  V,  pp. 
143-161 ;    abstract  in  Ann.   Rep.  Am.  Hist. 
Asso.  for  1890,  pp.  103-107.     (1891.) 

4.  Review  of  G.  P.  Fisher's  'The  colo- 
nial era.'    In  Sch.  Rev.  for  1893. 

5.  A  series  of  five  syllabi  on  American 
history.     Albany,  N.  Y.  1892-1897. 

6.  A  working  manual  of  American  his- 
tory.    Syracuse,  1895. 

7.  Method  in  history  for  teachers  and 
students.    Boston,  1897.    Pp.  xvii,  306. 


8.  Des   Ultern    Pitt,    Beziehungen   zur 
amerikanischen  Revolution.    Jena,  1897. 

9.  The   central   defect  of   the   normal 
school.     In  Educ.  Rev.,  XXI,  pp.  132-139. 
(Feb.,  1901.) 

10.  The   method  of  the  last  course  in 
history  in  the   high  school.     In  Jour.   Ped. 
for  1901. 

11.  Political  history  in  the  elementary 
In  Elementary  School  Teacher  for 


school. 
1904. 
12. 


Graduate  work  and  a  school  of  edu- 


cation.   In  Michigan  Alumnus  for  1904. 

13.  Review  of  Frank  McMurry's  'Spe- 
cial method  in  history.'  In  Educ.  Rev., 
XXVII,  pp.  203-205.  (Feb.,  1904.) 


DUDLEY    ODELL   McGovNEY,    A.B.    (1901). 
Cambridge,  Mass. 

1.  Civil  government  in  the  Philippines. 
Chicago,  1904.     Pp.  xi,  209. 

2.  The   navigation   acts   as   applied   to 
European  trade.    In  Am.  Hist.  Rev.,  IX,  pp. 
725-734.     (July,  1904.) 


CHARLES  LESLIE  McKAY,  B.S.  (1881). 
Drowned  April  19,  1883,  near  Cape 
Constantine,  Alaska. 

1.  A  review  of  the  genera  and  species 
of  the  family  Centrarchidse,  with  a  descrip- 
tion of  one  new  species.  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1881,  pp.  87-93. 


ADAH     MCMAHAN,     A.B.      (1889),     A.M. 
(1892),  M.D.     Lafayette,  Ind. 

1.  Membranous    ententis.      In    Trans. 
Indiana  State  Med.  Soc.  for  1899,  pp.  77-87. 

2.  Treatment  of  infantile  convulsions. 
In  New  York  Med.  Jour.,  LXX\1,  p.  461. 
(March,  1903.) 


308 


Martin  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


JEROME  FEE  MCNEIL,  B.S.  (1886).    Teach- 
er, Richmond,  Ind. 

1.  Description  of  twelve  new   species 
of    Myriapoda,    chiefly    from    Indiana.      In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1886. 

2.  Revision  of  the  Truxalinae  of  North 
America.      In   Proc.    Davenport  Acad.    Sci., 
VI,  pp.  179-274;   6  plates.     (1897.) 

3.  Hopkins-Stanford    Galapagos    expe- 
dition, IV,  Orthoptera.     In  Proc.  Washing- 
ton  Acad.    Sci.,    Ill,    pp.   487-506.      (Nov., 
1901.) 


GEORGE  WASHINGTON  MARTIN,  Ph.D. 
(1892).  Professor  of  Biology,  Vander- 
bilt  University,  Nashville,  Tenn. 

1.  The  organology  of  Aster  and  Solid- 
ago.    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVII,  p.  5 ;   1  plate. 

2.  The  embryology  of  Aster  and  Solid- 
ago.    In  Bot.  Gaz.,  XVII,  p.  6  ;    1  plate. 

3.  The  Florideae.     Indianapolis,   1894. 
Pp.  3. 

4.  Indiana   Academy   of    Science.      In 
Indiana  Sch.  Jour,  for  Dec.,  1895,  pp.  66-67. 

5.  Biology  in  secondary  schools.    Roch- 
ester, 1900.     Pp.  iii,  8. 

6.  The  secondary  school  and  prepara- 
tion for  citizenship.     Nashville,  1901.     Pp. 
10. 


WILLIAM  ALEXANDER  PARSONS  MARTIN, 
A.B.  (1846),  A.M.  (1849),  D.D.,  LL.D. 
President  University  of  Wuchong,  Wu- 
chong,  China. 

1.  Account    of    an    overland    journey 
from  Peking  to  Shanghai  made  in  February 
and  March,  1866.    In  Jour.  Roy.  Asiat.  Soc. 
North    China    branch,    N.    S.    Ill,    p.    26. 
(1866.) 

2.  On  the  style  of  Chinese  epistolary 
composition.      In    Jour.    Roy.     Asiat.     Soc. 
North    China    branch,    N.    S.    XI,    p.    113. 
<1877.) 


3.  Report  on  the  system  of  public  in- 
struction in  China.      (U.   S.  Education  Bu- 
reau,    Circulars    of    Information,    No.    1.) 
Washington,  1877.    Pp.  28. 

4.  Three   systems   of   the   religions    of 
China.    In  New  Englander,  XXVIII,  p.  223. 
(1877.) 

5.  Editor    of    'The    Peking    Scientific 
Magazine'  (Chinese).    1875-78. 

6.  The  Chinese  :    their  education,  phil- 
osophy and  letters.     New  York,  1881.     Pp. 
viii,  319. 

7.  Mathematical     physics      (Chinese). 
1885. 

8.  Tonquin  ;    or  the  French  in  Annam. 
In  New  Englander,  XLV,  p.  665.     (1886.) 

9.  The  advisability  or  the  reverse  of 
endeavoring  to  convey  western  knowledge  to 
the   Chinese   through   the   medium   of    their 
own  language.      (Joint  author  with  others.) 
In    Jour.    Roy.    Asiat.    Soc.    North    China 
branch,  N.  S.  XXI,  p.  1.     (1887.) 

10.  The  Lusiad  :   the  epic  of  the  opening 
of  the  east.     In   New   Englander,   LIII,  p. 
542.     (1890.) 

11.  Does  China  menace  the  world?     In 
Forum,  X,  pp.  433-441.     (Dec.,  1890.) 

12.  As  the  Chinese  see  us.     In  Forum, 
X,  pp.  678-688.     ( Feb. ,  1891. ) 

13.  America's  duty  to  China.     In  John 
H.    Barrow's    'The    World's    Parliament    of 
Religions'    (Chicago,    1893),    II,    pp.    1137- 
1144. 

14.  The  Chinese  (Hanleii  papers).     1st 
ser.,  Shanghai,  1880 ;    2d  ser.,  Shanghai  and 
London,  1894. 

15.  Editor  of   'Science   Monthly'    (Chi- 
nese), 1897-98. 

16.  A  cycle  of  Cathay  ;    or  China  south 
and     north,     with     personal     reminiscences. 
New  York,  1896.    Pp.  464. 

17.  The   fall  of  Peking.     In  Independ- 
ent, LII,  pp.  2419-2421.     (Oct.  11,  1900.) 

18.  The  siege  of  Peking.     In  Nat.  Geog. 
Mag.,  XII,  p.  53.     (Feb.,  1901.) 

19.  The  poetry  of  the  Chinese.     In  No. 


309 


Indiana  University 


[Martin 


Am.   Rev.,  CLXXII,  pp.   853-8G2.      (June, 
1901.) 

20.  Li  Hung  Chang.     In  Independent, 
LI  1 1,  pp.  268G-2G88.     (Nov.  14,  1901.) 

21.  The  lore  of  Cathay  ;  or,  the  intellect 
of  China.     New  York,  1901.    Pp.  iv,  480. 

22.  History  of  the  classic  ages  of  China. 

23.  Les  vestiges  d'un  droit  international 
dans  1'ancienne  Chine.     In  Revue  de  Droit 
Internationale. 

24.  Natural   theology   and   evidences   of 
Christianity    (Chinese).      Reprinted   in   nu- 
merous editions  in  China  and  Japan. 

25.  Natural   Philosophy    (Chinese).      7 
vols.     "This  work  contained  the  first  formal 
treatise  on  chemistry  and   the  first  regular 
course    of    physics    ever    published    in    the 
Chinese  language." 

26.  Translations  into  Chinese  of  Whea- 
ton's      'International     law,"      De     Marten's 
'Guide    diplomatique,'     Woolsey's     'Interna- 
tional law,'  and  Bluntschli's  'Le  droit  inter- 
national codifieV 


JAMES  RARIDEN  MEEK,  A.B.  (1897).    Prin- 
cipal of  High  School,  Durango,  Colo. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1897.  Pp.  287. 


SETH  EUGENE  MEEK,  B.S.  (1884),  M.S. 
(188G),  Ph.D.  (1891).  Assistant  Cu- 
rator of  Zoology,  Field  Columbian  Mu- 
seum, Chicago. 

1.  A  review  of  the  species  of  Gerres 
found  in  American  waters.      (Joint  author 
with  Barton  Warren  Evermann.)     In  Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.   Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1883,  pp. 
116-124. 

2.  Note    on    the    genus   Anguilla.      In 
Bull.  U.  S.  P'ish  Comm.  for  1883,  p.  430. 

3.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of   Scomberomorus.      (Joint  author  with  R. 


G.   Ncwland.)      In    Proc.   Acad.    Nat.    Sci. 
Philadelphia  for  1883,  pp.  219-232. 

4.  A  review  of  the  genus  Sphyrsena. 
(Joint   author   with   R.   G.   Newland.)      In 
Proc.    Acad.    Nat.     Sci.    Philadelphia     for 
1884,  pp.  67-75. 

5.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of  Hemirhamphus.      (Joint  author  with  D. 
K.  Goss.)      In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila- 
delphia for  1884,  pp.  221-235. 

6.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  anchovies 
from   Havana  and  Key  West,  with  an  ac- 
count of  a  new  species    (Stolephorus  eury- 
stole)   from  Woods  Hole,  Mass.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  Joseph  Swain.)      In  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1884,  pp.  34-46. 

7.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of  the  genus  Synodus.     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat. 
Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1884,  pp.  130-136. 

8.  A  review   of  the  American  species 
of   the  genus  Trachynotus.      (Joint  author 
with  D.  K.  Goss.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Philadelphia  for  1884,  pp.  121-129. 

9.  Note  on   the  Cuban   eel.      In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1884,  p.  111. 

10.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  the   St. 
John's  river   at  Jacksonville,    Fla.      (Joint 
author  with  David  Starr  Jordan.)     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  1884,  p.  233-237. 

11.  Description   of   Zygonectes   zonifer, 
a    new   species    of    Zygonectes    from    Nash- 
ville,  Ga.      (Joint  author  with   D.   S.  Jor- 
dan.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884, 
pp.  526-627. 

12.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Hy- 
bopsis    (Hybopsis  montanus).     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  pp.  526-527. 

13.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
Cyprinidse.      (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884, 
pp.  474-477. 

14.  Notes   on    the   pipe    fishes    of    Key 
West,   Fla.,  with   descriptions   of  two   new 
species.     (Joint  author  with  Joseph  Swain.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  pp.  237- 
239. 


310 


Meek'} 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


15.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  Iowa  and 
Missouri,  in  August,  1884,  with  descriptions 
of  three  new  species.      (Joint  author  with 
D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1885,  pp.  1-17. 

16.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
flying  fishes.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1885, 
pp.  44-67. 

17.  A   review   of   the   American  genera 
and  species  of  Batrachidae.      (Joint  author 
with  E.  A.  Hall.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Philadelphia  for  1885,  pp.  52-62. 

18.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
the   genus    Scorpaena.      (Joint   author   with 
R.  G.  Newland.)     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.  for  1885,  pp.  394-403. 

19.  A  review  of  the  genus  Esox.     (Joint 
author   with    R.    G.    Newland.)       In    Proc. 
Acad.   Nat.   Sci.  Philadelphia  for   1885,  pp. 
367-375. 

20.  A  revision  of  the  American  species 
of   the  genus   Gerres.      (Joint  author   with 
B.    W.    Evermann.)      In   Proc.   Acad.    Nat. 
Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1886,  pp.  256-272. 

21.  A  note  on  the  lamprey  of  Cayuga 
Lake.      In   Ann.   New  York  Acad.    Sci.   for 
1886,  pp.  285-289. 

22.  Note      on      Elagatis      bipinnulatus. 
(Joint  author   with   C.   H.    Bollman.)      In 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1889, 
pp.  42-44. 

23.  Report  on  the  explorations  made  in 
Missouri   and   Arkansas   during   1889,   with 
an   account  of   the   fishes  observed   in   each 
of  the  river  basins  examined.     In  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1889,  pp.  113-141. 

24.  Note    on    Ammocoetes    branchialis. 
In  Am.  Nat.,  XXIII,  pp.  640-642.     (1890.) 

25.  The  native  food  fishes  of  Iowa.     In 
Proc.   Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1890,  pp.  68-76. 

26.  Report  on  the  fishes  of  Iowa  based 
on  observations  and  collections  made  during 
1889,  1890  and  1891.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.  for  1890,  pp.  217-248. 


27.  The  fishes  of  the  Cedar  river  basin. 
In  Iowa  Acad.  Sci.  for  1891,  pp.  1-8. 

28.  A  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  Arkan- 
sas.    In  Ann.  Rept.  Arkansas  State  Geol. 
for  1891,  pp.  215-276. 

29.  A  description  of  Etheostoma  pagei. 
In  Am.  Nat,  XXVIII,  p.  957.     (1894.) 

30.  A  new  Cambarus   (Cambarus  faxo- 
nii)  from  Arkansas.    In  Am.  Nat.,  XXVIII, 
pp.  1042-1043,  1  plate.     (1894.) 

31.  Report  of  investigations  respecting 
the    fishes    of    Arkansas    conducted    during 
1891,   1892   and    1893,   with  a  synopsis   of 
previous  explorations  in  the  same  State.     In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1894,  pp.  67-94. 

32.  Notes  on  the  fishes  of  western  Iowa 
and  eastern  Nebraska.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish 
Comm.  for  1894,  pp.  133-138. 

33.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Go- 
biesox  (Gobiesox  muscarum).    (Joint  author 
with  C.   J.   Pierson.)      In  Proc.   California 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  571-573. 

34.  A   list  of  fishes   and   mollusks   col- 
lected  in   Arkansas   and   the   Indian   Terri- 
tory in  1894.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm. 
for  1895,  pp.  341-349. 

35.  Salmon    investigations    in    the    Co- 
lumbia  river    basin    and    elsewhere    on    the 
Pacific  coast  in  1896.      (Joint  author  with 
B.   W.    Evermann.)      In   Bull.    U.    S.   Fish 
Comm.  for  1897,  pp.  15-84. 

36.  A  list  of  fishes  and  reptiles  obtained 
by  the  Field  Columbian  Museum  East  Af- 
rican   Expedition    to    Somali-land    in    1896. 
In  Field  Col.  Mus.  Pub.,  Zool.  Series,  I,  pp. 
163-184.     (1897.) 

37.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  cold-blooded 
vertebrates  from  the  Olympic  mountains.    In 
Field  Col.   Mus.   Pub.,   Zool.   Series,   I,   pp. 
225-236.     (1899.) 

38.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  and 
amphibians  from  Muskoka  and  Gull  lakes. 
In  Field  Col.  Mus.  Pub.,  Zool.  Series,  I,  pp. 
307-311.     (1899.) 

39.  Contribution  to  the  ichthyology  of 


311 


Indiana  University 


[Meek 


Mexico.     In    Field    Col.    Mus.    Pub.,    Zool. 
Series  III,  pp.  63-128,  18  plates.     (1902.) 

40.  The  growth  and  variation  of  fishes. 
In    Birds    and    Nature,    VIII,    pp.    84-89. 
(1900.) 

41.  The  geological  succession  of  fishes. 
In    Birds   and   Nature,   VIII,   pp.   133-139. 
(1900.) 

42.  The     geographical     distribution     of 
fishes.     In  Birds  and  Nature,  VIII,  pp.  161- 
164.     (1900.) 

43.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  cold-blooded 
vertebrates    from    Ontario.      (Joint   author 
with   H.  W.   Clark.)      In   Field   Col.   Mus. 
Pub.,  Zool.  Series,  III,  pp.  131-140.    (1902.) 

44.  Contribution  to  museum  technique. 
In   Am.  Nat,  XXXVI,  pp.  53-62.      (Jan., 
1902.) 

45.  Review  of  D.  S.  Jordan  and  B.  W. 
Evermann's     'American     game     and     food 
fishes.'    In  Am.  Nat.,  XXXVI,  pp.  557-558. 
(August,  1903.) 

46.  Distribution  of  fresh-water  fishes  in 
Mexico.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XXXVII,  pp.  771- 
784.     (Nov.,  1903.) 

47.  The    fresh-water   fishes    of   Mexico. 
In  Field  Col.  Mus.  Pub.,  Zool.  Series,  V,  pp. 
1-300.     (In  press.) 


OSCAR    MARION    MEYNCKE,    A.B.    (1896). 
Brookville,  Ind. 

1.  The  flora  of  Franklin  county,  Indi- 
ana.    In  Bulletins  Nos.  1-2,  Brookville  Soc. 
Nat.  Hist. 

2.  The  study   of   the   bird's   nest.     In 
Teachers'  Jour.     Also  in  Nature  Study  Mo. 


GEORGE  MOREY  MILLER,  A.B.  (1892),  A.M. 
Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and 
English  Literature,  University  of  Cin- 
cinnati, Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

1.  The  agitation  about  English.  In 
Proc.  Mod.  Lang.  Asso.  of  Ohio,  pp.  46-57. 
(1898-1899.) 


2.  The  dramatic  element  in  the  popu- 
lar ballad.  In  Univ.  Cincinnati  Bull.,  No. 
19,  Series  II,  Vol.  II,  pp.  viii,  35.  (1904.) 


JOHN  ANTHONY  MILLER,  A.B.  (1890),  Ph.D. 
See  Faculty  list. 


KATE  MILNER.    See  Mrs.  Albert  Rabb. 


GEORGE  ELBERT  MITCHELL,  A.B.  (1898). 
Teacher  of  Science,  High  School,  Rens- 
selaer,  Ind. 

1.  Note  on  the  aberrant  follicles  In 
the  ovary  of  Cymatogaster.  In  Proc.  Indi- 
ana Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  229-232,  1 
plate.  (1899.) 


WILLIAM    J     MOENKHAXJS,    A.B.     (1894), 
A.M.   (1895),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


HAMILTON  BYRON  MOORE,  A.M.  (1901). 
Instructor  in  English,  Indiana  Uni- 
versity, 1898-1901 ;  Assistant  Professor, 
1901-1903.  Now  Instructor  in  English, 
Manual  Training  High  School,  Indi- 
anapolis. 

1.  Dickens's  'The  tale  of   two  cities.' 
Edited  with   introduction   and  notes.     Bos- 
ton, 1901. 

2.  Thackeray's  'Henry   Esmond.'     Ed- 
ited with   introduction  and  notes.     Boston, 
1904. 


WALTER  PIETY  MORGAN,  A.M.  (1900).  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Mathematics,  Indi- 
ana State  Normal  School,  Terre  Haute, 
Ind. 

1.  Teachers'  manual  for  Cook  and 
Cropsey  arithmetics.  Terre  Haute,  Ind., 
1902.  Pp.  302. 


312 


Newsom  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


SARAH  PARKE  MORRISON,  A.B.  (1869),  A.M. 
(1871).  Adjunct  Professor  of  English 
Literature,  Indiana  University,  1873-75. 
Knightstown,  Ind. 

1.  I'm    coming    home,    song.       (Sheet 
music.)     St.  Louis,  1888.     Pp.  5. 

2.  A   monody    to    a   father's    memory. 
Cambridge,  Mass.,  1891.     Pp.  49,  1  plate. 

3.  Among    ourselves :    to    a    mother's 
memory.      Vol.    I,   Out   of   North    Carolina. 
Pp.  170,  6  plates.     Vol.   II,  Catherine  and 
her  surroundings.     Pp.  214,  5  plates.    Plain- 
field,  Ind.,  1901  and  1902. 


ROBERT   NEWLAND,  A.B.    (1887). 
in  High  School,  Denver,  Colo. 


Teacher 


WILLIAM  LAGRANGE  MORRISON,  A.B. 
(1888).  Superintendent  of  Schools, 
Scottsburg,  Ind. 

1.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of  Priacanthidae  or  big-eyes.  In  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia  for  1889. 


CHARLES  ALFRED  MOSEMILLER,  A.B.  (1890), 
See  Faculty  list. 


DAVID  MYERS  MOTTIER,  A.B.   (1891),  A.M. 
(1892),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


ARTHUR    LEROY    MURRAY,    A.B.     (1901). 
Teacher,  Muncie,  Ind. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1901.  Pp.  250. 


EDWIN  MANSON  NEHER,  A.B.  (1901),  S.B. 
Student,  Rush  Medical  College,  Chicago. 

1.     The  eye  of  Palsemonetes  antrorum. 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1902. 


1.  A  review  of   the  American  species 
of  the  genus  Scorpsena.     (Joint  author  with 
S.    E.    Meek.)      In   Proc.    Acad.    Nat.    Sci. 
Philadelphia  for  1885,  pp.  294-403. 

2.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Esox.      (Joint   author   with    S.    E.    Meek.) 
In   Proc.   Acad.   Nat.   Sci.   Philadelphia  for 
1885,  pp.  52-62. 


ADELAIDE  (PERRY)  NEWSOM  (Mrs.  John 
F.  Newsom),  A.B.  (1894).  Stanford 
University,  Cal. 

1.  Editor  of  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior 
class  annual,  Indiana  University).  (Joint 
editor  with  Clarence  Arthur  Zaring).  Bloom- 
ington,  Ind.,  1895.  Pp.  240. 


JOHN  FLESHER  NEWSOM,  A.B.  (1891),  Ph.D. 
Instructor  in  Geology,  Indiana  Univer- 
sity, 1894-96 ;  Assistant  Professor, 
1896-99.  Now  Associate  Professor  of 
Mining,  Leland  Stanford  Junior  Uni- 
versity, Stanford  University,  Cal. 

1.  Syllabus    of    lectures    on    economic 
geology.     (Joint  author  with  J.  C.  Branner.) 
Stanford  University,  1895.     Pp.  282. 

2.  A  relief  map  of  Arkansas.    In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.,  for  1895,  p.  56. 

3.  A   geological   section   across   south- 
ern  Indiana    from    Hanover    to    Vincennes. 
In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci.,  for  1897,  pp. 
250-253. 

4.  The  Knobstone  group  in  the  region 
of  New  Albany,  Indiana.     In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  253-256. 

5.  The  Red  River  and  Clinton  mono- 
clines, Arkansas.     (Joint  author  with  J.  C. 
Branner.)      In   Am.    Geol.,    XX,    pp.    1-13, 
map,  3  plates.     (1897.)    . 


Indiana  University 


[Nnusom 


6.  Notes    on    the    distribution    of    the 
Knobstone  group  in  Indiana.     (Joint  author 
with  J.  A.  Price.)     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1898,  pp.  289-297.    Map. 

7.  The  effect  of  sea  barriers  upon  ulti- 
mate drainage.     In  Jour,  of  Geol.,  VII,  pp. 
445-451,  4  figures.     (1899.) 

8.  Syllabus      of      economic      geology. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  C.  Branner.)      Stan- 
ford University,  1900.     2d  ed.     Illustrated. 
Pp.  viii,  368. 

9.  Drainage  of  southern   Indiana.     In 
Journal  of  Geology,   X,   pp.   166-181,  map. 
(1902.) 

10.  The   phosphate   rocks   of   Arkansas. 
(Joint  author  with  J.  C.  Branner.)     In  Bull. 
74  Arkansas   Agr.   Exp.    Sta.,    1   plate,  23 
figures.     (1902.) 

11.  A  natural  gas  explosion  near  Wal- 
dron,   Indiana.     In  Jour,   of  Geol.,   X,   pp. 
803-814,  5  figures.     ( 1902. ) 

12.  A  geologic  and  topographic  section 
across  southern  Indiana,   from   Hanover  to 
Vincennes,  with  a  discussion  of  the  Knob- 
stone  group   in   the    State   of   Indiana.     In 
26th   Ann.    Rep.    Indiana    Dept.    Geol.    and 
Nat.  Hist. 

13.  Review  of  Davies's   'A  treatise  on 
metalliferous  minerals  and  mining.'     In  En- 
gineering and  Mining  Jour.,  June  6,   1903, 
pp.  863-864. 


4.  Lists  of  Mollusca  of  Pike,  Winona 
and  Center  Lakes,  Kosciusko  county,  Ind. 
In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1901. 
(1902.) 


ALLEN  ANSON  NORRIS,  A.B.  (1902).    Super- 
intendent of  Schools,  Syracuse,  Indiana. 

1.  Studies    in    the    life    of    St.    Paul. 
(Joint     author     with     Chas.     O.     Davis.) 
Bloomington,  Ind.,   1898. 

2.  Sabre  alguns  peixes  de  Sao  Paulo, 
Brazil.      (Joint  author   with   C.   H.   Eigen- 
mann.)     In  Revista  do  Museu  Paulista,  IV, 
pp.  349-362.     (1900.) 

3.  Maps  of  Winona,  Pike,  and  Center 
Lakes.      In    Proc.    Indiana    Acad.    Sci.    for 
1901.     (1902.) 


REUBEN  EDSON  NYSWANDER,  A.B.  (1901). 
Magnetic  Observer,  U.  S.  Coast  and 
Geodetic  Survey,  Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  A    modified     Wehnelt    interrupter. 
(Joint  author  with  A.  L.  Foley.)     In  Elec- 
trical   World    and    Engineer,    XXXIX,    pp. 
373-374.     (March  1,  1902.) 

2.  The  lunar  diurnal  variation  as  ob- 
tained at  the  Cheltenham  magnetic  observ- 
atory from  a  single  complete  lunation  during 
February,    1903.      (Abstract.)       (Joint  au- 
thor  with   L.    A.    Bauer.)      In   Terrestrial 
Magnetism     and     Atmospheric     Electricity, 
VIII,  pp.  144-146.     (Sept.,  1903.) 


FREDERIC  AUSTIN  OGG,  A.M.  (1900).  In- 
structor in  History,  1902-1903.  Now 
Graduate  student,  Harvard  University, 
Cambridge,  Mass. 

1.  Geography  from  Homer  to  Colum- 
bus.     In    Chautauquan,    XXXII,    pp.    473- 
478.     (Feb.,  1901.) 

2.  Jay's  treaty  and  the  slavery  inter- 
ests of  the  United   States.     In  Ann.    Rep. 
Am.    Hist.    Assoc.    for    1901,    pp.    273-298. 
(1902.) 

3.  On  the  literary  decline  of  history. 
In  Dial,  XXXII,   pp.   233-235.      (April   1, 
1902.) 

4.  Slav  and  Saxon.     In  Chautauquan, 
XXXVI-XXXVII.    (Oct.,  1902- June,  1903.) 

5.  The  proportion  of  city  and  country 
population  in  the  United  States.    In  World's 
Work,  V,  pp.  3003-3005.     (Jan.,  1903.) 

6.  Indian  money  in  the  New  England 
colonies.     In  New  Eng.  Mag.,  XXVII,   pp. 
749-760.     (Feb.,  1903.) 


314 


Rabb~\ 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


7.  German  iiiterests  and  tendencies  in 
South  America.     In  World's  Work,  V,  pp. 
3168-3170.     (March,  1903.) 

8.  Coins  and  coinage  in  the  New  Eng- 
land colonies.    In  New  Eng.  Mag.,  XXVIII, 
pp.  739-752.     (Aug.,  1903.) 

9.  The   Pope   and  the   Italian   nation. 
In     Chautauquan,     XXXVIII,     pp.     14-19. 
(Sept.,  1903.) 

10.  The  opening  of  the  Mississippi :   a 
struggle  for  supremacy  in  the  American  in- 
terior.    New  York,  1904.     Pp.  viii,  656. 

11.  Review  of  Willis  Fletcher  Johnson's 
'A  century  of  expansion.'    In  Dial,  XXXVI, 
pp.  47-48.     (Jan.  16,  1904.) 

12.  Paper  money  in   the  New  England 
colonies.     In   New  Eng.    Mag.,   XXIX,   pp. 
772-783.     (Feb.,  1904.) 

13.  Newspaper  satire  during  the  Amer- 
ican Revolution.    In  New  Eng.  Mag.,  XXX, 
pp.  366-376.     (May,  1904.) 

14.  Review  of  William  Garrott  Brown's 
'The  foe  of  compromise,  and  other  essays.' 
In  Dial,  XXXVI,   pp.   323-324.      (May  16, 
1904.) 


ROY    HENDERSON    PEERING,    A.B.    (1894), 
A.M.  (1896).    See  Faculty  list. 


EDWARD  CHARLES  O'DONNELL,  A.B.  (1890). 
Mitchell,  Ind. 

1.     The  Standard  Oil  Trust.    In  States- 
man for  1890. 


CAM.  WLLHELM  FERDINAND  OSTHAUS,  A.M. 
(1890).     See  Faculty  list. 


HENRY  ALLISON   PARSONS,   LL.B.    (1864). 
Kansas  City,  Kansas. 

1.  The  rise  and  fall  of  nations.     Kan- 
sas City,  1878.    Pp.  28. 

2.  Abridged  history  of  Greece  from  the 
earliest  times  to  the  present  dynasty.    Kan- 
sas City,  1904.     Pp.  149. 


ADELAIDE  PERRY.     See  Mrs.  John  F.  New- 
som. 


BURR  HARRISON  POLK,  LL.B.  (1857).   Died 
May  15,  1886,  at  Lincoln,  Neb. 

1.     The  big  American  caravan  in   Eu- 
rope.    (Letters  republished  in  book  form.) 


JAMES  P  PORTER,  A.B.  (1898),  A.M. 
(1901).  Instructor  in  Psychology, 
Indiana  University,  1900-1902.  Now 
Instructor  in  Psychology,  Clark  Univer- 
sity, Worcester,  Mass. 

1.  The  psychology  of  the  English  spar- 
row. In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  XV.  (April, 
1904.) 


WILLIAM  HENRY  PYLE,  A.B.  (1898).  Su- 
perintendent City  Schools,  Vandalia, 
111. 

1.     Nature  study  in  the  country  schools, 
Vandalia,  111.,  1901.    Pp.  22. 


KATE  (MILNER)  RABB  (Mrs.  Albert  Rabb), 
A.B.  (1886),  A.M.  (1888).  Indianap- 
olis, Ind. 

1.  Indiana  in  fiction.     In  Kate  Field's 
Washington  for  May,  1892. 

2.  A  Kentucky  'Harnt.'    In  New  York 
Ledger  for  March  5,  1892. 

3.  The   whitecaps.     In    Worthington's 
Mai?,  for  Jan.,  1893. 

4.  To  him  who  waits.     In  Interior  for 
June  15,  1893. 

5.  Bjornson  and  Ibsen.     In  Dominion 
Illustrated  Mo.  for  Sept.,  1893. 


315 


Indiana  University 


[Rabb 


6.  Mikado  tea.    In  Kate  Field's  Wash- 
ington for  Sept.  27,  1893. 

7.  Lias.      In   Worthington's   Mag.   for 
Nov.,  1893. 

8.  The  things  which  are  Caesar's.     In 
Once  a  Week  for  March  3,  1894. 

9.  A  bit  of   Sevres.     In  Kate  Field's 
Washington  for  August  29,  1894. 

10.  The  snub.    In  Lippincott's  Mag.  for 
Oct.,  1894. 

11.  At   the   institute.      In    N.    Y.    Sch. 
Jour,  for  July  13,  1895. 

12.  Claude      Matthews.       In     Leslie's 
Weekly  for  May  23,  1895. 

13.  The   destruction    of   a   theory.      In 
Kate  Field's  Washington  for  Jan.  12,  1895. 

14.  National  epics.    Chicago,  1896.    Pp. 
398. 

15.  A  municipal   experiment.      In  Les- 
lie's Weekly  for  May  13,  1897. 

16.  The  pilgrim  and  the  palmer.    In  In- 
terior for  May  16,  1897. 

17.  Dido.      In    Self   Culture  for   April, 
1898. 

18.  A   club   election.     In  Designer    for 
Sept.,  1898. 

19.  The  Boer  boy.     Philadelphia,  1900. 
Pp.  348. 

20.  The  romance  of  a  co-ed.     In  Delin- 
eator for  Nov.,  1900. 

21.  The  institute  at  Glendeane.     In  De- 
lineator for  May,  1901. 

22.  A  letter  from  O.   W.   Holmes.     In 
St.  Nicholas  for  March,  1902. 

23.  Miss  Petrie's  avocation.     In  Atlan. 
Mo.  for  July,  1902. 

24.  Hyacinths.     In  Leslie's  Weekly  for 
August  7,  1902. 

25.  The  plateau  of  fatigue.     In  Atlan. 
Mo.  for  Jan.,  1903. 

26.  By   grace   of  Linnseus.     In   Delin- 
eator for  June,  1903. 

27.  The  new   hunting.     In  Atlan.   Mo. 
for  Jan..  1904. 


ROLLA   ROY   RAMSEY,   A.B.    (1895),   A.M. 
(1898),  Ph.D.    -See  Faculty  list. 


RICHARD  RATHBUN,  M.S.  (1883),  D.Sc. 
Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian 
Institution  in  charge  of  the  U.  S.  Na- 
tional Museum.  Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  On    the   Devonian   Brachiopoda  of 
Erere,  Province  of  Para,  Brazil.     In  Bull. 
Buffalo  Soc.  of  Nat.  Sci.  for  1874,  I,  No.  4, 
pp.  236-261,  plates  viii-x. 

2.  Morgan     expedition,     1870,     Chas. 
Fred.  Hartt,  in  charge.     Preliminary  report 
on   the  Cretaceous   lamellibranchs   collected 
in  the  vicinity  of  Pernambuco,   Brazil.     In 
Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1874,  XVII, 
pp.  241-256. 

3.  The  geological  commission  of  Brazil. 
Additions  to  the  Echinoid  fauna  of  Brazil. 
In  Ainer.  Jour.  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  series,  XV, 
pp.  82-84.     (1878.) 

4.  The  Devonian   Brachiopoda   of  the 
Province  of  Para,  Brazil.     In  Proc.  Boston 
Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1878,  XX,  pp.  14-39. 

5.  Notes    on    the    coral    reefs    of    the 
Island  of  Itaparica,  Bahia,  and  of  Parahyba 
do  Norte.     In  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist, 
for  1878,  XX,  pp.  39-41. 

6.  Observagoes   sobre    a    Geologia    as- 
pecto    do    Ilha   de   Itaparica,   na   Bahia    de 
Todos   os    Santos.      In   Archives   do   Museu 
Nacional  do  Rio  de  Janeiro,   III,  pp.   159- 
183.     (1878.) 

7.  Sketch  of  Professor  C.  F.  Hartt.  In 
Pop.  Sci.  Mo.,  XIII,  pp.  231-235,  with  por- 
trait as  frontispiece.     (June,  1878.) 

8.  Sketch  of  the  life  and  scientific  work 
of  Prof.  Charles  Fred.  Hartt.    In  Proc.  Bos- 
ton Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1878,  XIX,  pp.  338- 
364.     Reprinted.     New  Haven,   1879.     Pp. 
38. 

9.  A  list  of  the  Brazilian  echinoderms, 
with   notes   on    their   distribution,    etc.      In 


316 


Rathbun  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


Trans.     Connecticut     Acad.     of    Arts     and 
Sciences  for  1879,  V,  pp.  139-158. 

10.  List   of    marine    invertebrata    from 
the  New  England  coast,  distributed  by  the 
United  States  Commission  of  Fish  and  Fish- 
eries.    Series  I.      (Distributed  in  fifty  sets, 
put  up  by  Mr.  Richard  Rathbun,  under  the 
direction  of  Prof.  A.  E.  Verrill.     1879.)     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1879,  II,  pp.  227- 
232. 

11.  List  of  the  dredging  stations  of  the 
United  States  Fish  Commission  from  1871 
to    1879,    inclusive,    with    temperature    and 
other   observations.      Arranged   for  publica- 
tion by  Sanderson  Smith  and  Richard  Rath- 
bun.     In  Ann.   Rep.   Commissioner  of  Fish 
and  Fisheries  for  1879,  pp.  1-43. 

12.  Prof.  Hartt  on  the  Brazilian  sand- 
stone reefs.     In  Am.  Nat.,  XIII,  pp.  347- 
358.     (June,  1879.) 

13.  Review  of  O.  A.  Derby's  'The  geol- 
ogy of  the  Lower  Amazonas.'     In  Am.  Jour, 
of  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  series,  XVII,  pp.  464- 
468.     (June,  1879.) 

14.  Brazilian  corals  and  coral  reefs.    In 
Am.  Nat,  XIII,  pp.  539-551,  one  text  figure. 
(Sept.,  1879.) 

15.  Review  of  O.  A.  Derby's  'The  geol- 
ogy   of   the   Diamantiferous    region    of    the 
Province  of  Parana,  Brazil.'     (Proc.  Ameri- 
can Phil.  Soc.,  May  16,  1879. )     In  Am.  Jour, 
of  Sci.  and  Arts,  3d  series,  XVIII,  pp.  310, 
311.     (Oct.,  1879.) 

16.  The  littoral  marine   fauna  of  Pro- 
vincetown,    Cape    Cod,    Massachusetts.      In 
Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.  for  1880,   III,  pp. 
116-133. 

17.  List  of  marine  invertebrates,  mainly 
from  the  New  England  coast,  distributed  by 
the  United  States  National  Museum.     Series 
II.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1881,  IV, 
pp.  298-303. 

18.  List   of   marine   invertebrates   from 
the  New  England  coast,  distributed  by  the 
United    States    National    Museum.      Series 


III.     Educational   Series.     In  Proc.  U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1881,  IV,  pp.  304-307. 

19.  The  giant  squid.     In  St.  Nicholas, 
VIII,  pp.  266-270,  5  plates.     (Feb.,  1881.) 

20.  Dredging    stations    of    the    United 
States     Fish     Commission      Steamer     Fish 
Hawk,  Lieut.  Z.  L.  Tanner  commanding,  for 
1880,  1881,  and  1882,  with  temperature  and 
other   observations.      In    Bull.    U.    S.    Fish 
Comm.  for  1882,  II,  pp.  119-131. 

21.  Notes    on    the   shrimp    and    prawn 
fisheries  of  the  United  States.     In  Bull.  U. 
S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1882,  II,  pp.  139-152. 

22.  The  American  initiative  in  methods 
of  deep-sea  dredging.     In   Science,   IV,  pp. 
54-57.     (1884.) 

23.  American    appliances    for    deep-sea 
investigation.     In  Science,  IV,  pp.  146-151, 
225-229,  400-404,  with  numerous  text  illus- 
trations.     (1884.) 

24.  Annotated     list     of     the     described 
species    of    parasitic    Copepoda    (Siphonos- 
toma)    from  American  waters  contained  in 
the   United   States    National   Museum.      In 
Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  VII,  pp. 
483-492. 

25.  Collection  of  economic  crustaceans, 
worms,   Echinoderms   and  sponges.      (Great 
international    fisheries    exhibition,    London, 
1883;     exhibit   of   U.    S.   of  America.)      In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  No.  27,  pp. 
107-137. 

26.  Descriptive  catalogue  of  the  collec- 
tion  illustrating  the   scientific   investigation 
of  the  sea  and  fresh  waters.      (Great  inter- 
national fisheries  exhibition,  London,  1883 ; 
exhibit  of  U.  S.  of  America.)    In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  No.  27,  pp.  511-622. 

27.  Notes  on  the  decrease  of  lobsters. 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1884,  IV,  pp. 
421-426. 

28.  Crustaceans,    worms,    radiates    and 
sponges.     In  The  fisheries  and  fishery  indus- 
tries of  the  United  States,  prepared  through 
the    co-operation    of    the    Commissioner    of 
Fisheries    and    the    Superintendent    of    the 


317 


Indiana  University 


[Rath  bun 


Tenth  Census  by  George  Brown  Goode,  As- 
sistant Director  of  the  U.  S.  National  Muse- 
um, and  a  staff  of  associates.  Section  I. 
Natural  history  of  aquatic  animals.  Part  V, 
pp.  759-850,  plates  cclx-cclxxvii.  Washing- 
ton, Government  Printing  Office,  1884. 

29.  Reports  on  the  Department  of  Ma- 
rine   Invertebrates    in    the   U.    S.    National 
Museum  for  years  1883-1892,  inclusive.     By 
Richard  Rathbun,  curator.     In  Annual  Re- 
ports of  the  Board  of  Regents  of  the  Smith- 
sonian  Institution,  showing  the  operations, 
expenditures  and  condition  of  the  Institution 
for  the  several  years.     Washington,  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office,  various  dates. 

30.  Report  upon  the  Echini  collected  by 
the  United  States  Fish  Commission  Steamer 
Albatross,  in  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  January  to   May,   1884.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1885,  VIII,  pp.  83-89. 

31.  Report  upon  the  Echini  collecteoTby 
the  U.   S.   Fish  Commission   Steamer  Alba- 
tross in  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  from  January  to 
March,  1885.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1885,  VIII,  pp.  606-620. 

32.  Notice    of    a    collection    of    stalked 
crinoids  made  by  the  Steamer  Albatross  in 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  Caribbean  Sea,  1884 
and  1885.     In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.   for 
1885,  VIII,  pp.  628-635. 

33.  Catalogue  of  the  collection  of  recent 
Echini  in  the  United  States  National  Muse- 
um  (corrected  to  July  1,   1886).     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1886,  IX,  pp.  255-293. 

34.  Descriptions   of   parasitic   copepods 
belonging     to     the     genera     Pandarus     and 
Chondracanthus.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1886,  IX,  pp.  310-324,  plates  v-xi. 

35.  Notes  on  lobster  culture.     In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1886,  VI,  pp.  17-32. 

36.  Catalogue  of   the  species   of  corals 
belonging  to  the  genus  Madrepora,  contained 
in  the  United  States  National  Museum.     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1887,  X,  pp.  10-19. 

37.  Annotated  catalogue  of  the  species 
of    Porites    and    Synarspa    in    the    United 


States  National  Museum,  with  a  description 
of  a  new  species  of  Porites.  In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1887,  X,  pp.  354-366,  plates 
xv-xix. 

38.  Descriptions  of  the  species  of  Heli- 
aster  (a  genus  of  starfishes)   represented  in 
the  U.  S.  National  Museum.    In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1887,  X,  pp.  440-449,  plates 
xxiii-xxvi. 

39.  Descriptions  of  new  species  of  para- 
sitic copepods,  belonging  to  the  genera  Tre- 
bius,    Perissopus,    and    Lernanthropus.      In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1887,  X,  pp.  559- 
571,  plates  xxix-xxxv. 

40.  The  fishing  grounds  of  North  Amer- 
ica.    Edited  by  Richard  Rathbun.     In  The 
fisheries  and  fishery  industries  of  the  United 
States,  prepared  through  the  co-operation  of 
the  Commissioner  of  Fisheries  and  the  Su- 
perintendent of  the  Tenth  Census  by  George 
Brown   Goode,    Assistant    Secretary    of    the 
Smithsonian  Institution,  and  a  staff  of  as- 
sociates.     Section    III,   pp.   vii-xviii,   5-154, 
49  charts.     Washington,  Government  Print- 
ing Office,  1887. 

41.  Ocean  temperatures  of  the  Eastern 
coast  of  the  United  States,  with  thirty-two 
charts.     In  The  fisheries  and  fishery  indus- 
tries of  the  United  States,  prepared  through 
the    co-operation    of    the    Commissioner    of 
Fisheries    and    the    Superintendent    of    the 
Tenth  Census  by  George  Brown  Goode,  As- 
sistant Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian  Insti- 
tution, and  a  staff  of  associates.    Section  III, 
pp.   155-238,   32  plates.      Washington,   Gov- 
ernment Printing  Office,  1887. 

42.  The  crab,  lobster,  crayfish,  rock  lob- 
ster, shrimp  and   prawn   fisheries.     In  The 
fisheries  and  fishery  industries  of  the  United 
States,  prepared  through  the  co-operation  of 
the  Commissioner  of  Fisheries  and  the  Su- 
perintendent    of     the     Tenth     Census     by 
George    Brown    Goode,    Assistant    Secretary 
of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  and  a  staff 
of    associates.      Section    V.      History    and 
methods  of  the  fisheries.    II.     Part  XXI,  pp. 


318 


Reagan  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


627-841,     plates     ccxlvi-cclv.      Washington, 
Government  Printing  Office,  1887. 

43.  Results    of    investigations    by    the 
schooner   Grampus   on   the   Southern   mack- 
erel grounds  in  the  spring  of  1887.      (Joint 
author  with  D.  E.  Collins  and  T.  H.  Bean.) 
In  Bull.  U.   S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1887,  VII, 
pp.  217-267. 

44.  The  transplanting  of  lobsters  to  the 
Pacific  Coast  of  the  United  States.    In  Bull. 
U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  for  1888,  VIII,  pp.  453- 
472,  plate  Ixxi. 

45.  Reports  upon  the  inquiry  respecting 
food    fishes    and    the    fishing    grounds.     In 
Ann.  Reports  U.  S.  Commission  of  Fish  and 
Fisheries.     Reports  of  the  Commissioner  for 
years     1888-1889,     inclusive.       Washington, 
Government  Printing  Office,  various  dates. 

46.  The  United  States  Fish  Commission. 
Some  of  its  work.    In  Century  Mag.,  XLIII, 
pp.  679-697,  19  text  figures.     (1892.) 

47.  Jerome    Henry    Kidder.      In    Bull. 
Philos.  Soc.  of  Washington,  XI,  pp.  480-488. 
(1892.) 

48.  Report  of  the  joint   commission   of 
the  United  States  and  Great  Britain  relative 
to  the  preservation  of  the  fisheries  in  waters 
contiguous  to  the  United  States  and  Canada, 
under  agreement  of  December   6,   1892,   by 
Richard   Rathbun,  representative  on   behalf 
of  the  United  States,  and  William  Wakeham, 
representative   on  behalf   of    Great  Britain. 
Transmitted  to  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States  by  the  President,  under  date  of  Feb- 
ruary 24,  1897.     Washington,  D.  C.     Gov- 
ernment Printing  Office,  1897,  pp.  178. 

49.  A  review  of  the  fisheries  in  the  con- 
tiguous waters  of  the  State  of  Washington 
and  British  Columbia.     In  Report  of  the  U. 
S.  Commissioner  of  Fish  and  Fisheries  for 
1899,  pp.  251-350,  plates  viii-xvi. 

50.  Reports  upon  the  condition  and  pro- 
gress of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum  during 
the  years  ending  June  30,  1899,  1900,  1901, 
and   1902,   by   Richard   Rathbun,   Assistant 


Secretary  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  in 
charge  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum.  In 
Annual  Reports  of  the  Board  of  Regents  of 
the  Smithsonian  Institution,  showing  the 
operations,  expenditures  and  condition  of  the 
Institution  for  the  years  ending  June  30, 
1899,  1900,  1901,  and  1902.  Reports  of  the 
U.  S.  National  Museum.  Washington.  Gov- 
ernment Printing  Office,  various  dates. 


WILLIAM   A   RAWLES,   A.B.    (1884),   A.M. 
(1895),  Ph.D.    See  Faculty  list. 


ALBERT  B  REAGAN,  A.M.  (1903).    Teacher, 
Indian  Service. 

1.  Jarnez   vocabulary.     In  Rep.   U.   S. 
Bureau  Ethnology.    Pp.  14. 

2.  Grammar  treatise  of  the  Jamez  lan- 
guage.    In   Rep.   U.    S.   Bureau   Ethnology. 
Pp.  18. 

3.  Jamez — open  and  secret.     In  Rep. 
U.  S.  Bureau  Ethnology.     Pp.  60,  22  plates. 

4.  The    Apache   pole    game.      In    Rep. 
U.    S.    Bureau    Ethnology;     also    in    Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.   Sci.   for   1902.     Pp.   14;    26 
plates. 

5.  The  Apache  Indians,  their  manners, 
customs,  etc.    In  Rep.  U.  S.  Bureau  Ethnol- 
ogy, pp.  120.  40  plates. 

6.  The  Jamez-Albuquerque   region,   N. 
M.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1902  ; 
also  in  Am.  Geol.,  Feb.,  1903.     Pp.  45,   8 
plates. 

7.  The  Jamez  coal  fields.    In  Proc.  In- 
diana Acad.  Sci.  for  1902.    Pp.  3. 

8.  The  Apache  stick  game.    In  Rep.  U. 
S.  Bureau  Ethnology ;    also  in  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad   Sci.  for  1903. 

9.  Age  of  the  lava  flows  of  the  plateau 
region.     In  Am.  Geol.,  XXXII,  pp.  170-177. 
(Sept.,  1903.) 

10.     Geology  of  the  Fort  Apache  region, 


319 


Indiana  University 


[Reagan 


Arizona.  In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for 
1903 ;  also  in  Am.  Geol.,  XXXII,  pp.  295- 
358,  5  plates.  (Nov.,  1903.) 

11.  Age  of  the  Aubrey   limestone.     In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903.    Pp.  5. 

12.  The  fossils  of  the  Upper  Red  Wall 
of  Arizona,  compared  with  those  of  the  Kan- 
sas coal-measures.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1903.    Pp.  3. 

13.  Some  fossils  from  the  Upper  Red 
Wall  of  Arizona.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1903.     Pp.  14,  1  plate. 

14.  Geology  of  Monroe  county,  Indiana, 
North  of  Latitude  of  Bloomington.  In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903.    Pp.  20. 

15.  The    Apache     medicine     disk.       In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1903 ;  in  Proc. 
A.  A.  A.  S.  for  1903.    Pp.  2,  1  plate. 

16.  Some    paintings    from    one    of    the 
Estufas  at  Jamez,  N.  M.    In  Proc.  Indiana 
Acad.  Sci.  for  1903 :    also  in  Proc.  A.  A.  A. 
S.  for  1903.    Pp.  2,  6  plates. 


HERBERT   GILSON    REDDICK,    A.B.    (1887), 
A.M.   (1898).    Indianapolis,  Ind. 

1.  The  snakes  of  Turkey  Lake.  In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  261- 
262. 


WILLIAM  ALLAN  REED,  A.B.  (1898).     Gov- 
ernor of  Lepanto-Bontoc,  P.  I. 

1.     The  Negritos  of  Zambales.     Manila, 
1904.    Pp.  xii,  65 ;   80  plates. 


ERNEST  WILLIAM  RETTGER,  A.B.  (1893), 
Ph.D.  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  Indi- 
ana University,  1898-1900.  Now  Pro- 
fessor of  Mathematics,  Missouri  State 
Normal  School,  Warrensburg,  Mo. 

1.     Note  on   the  projective  group.     In 


Proc.  Am.  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898,  XXXIII,  pp. 
491-499. 

2.     On     Lie's     theory     of     continuous 
groups.    In  Am.  Jour.  Math,  for  1899. 


LEO  FREDERICK  RETTGER,  A.B.  (1896),  A.M. 
(1897),  Ph.D.  Instructor  in  charge  of 
Bacteriology,  Yale  University,  New 
Haven,  Conn. 

1.  Septicaemia  in  young  chickens.     In 
New  York  Med.  Jour.,  May,   1900,  p.  803, 
and  Feb.,  1901,  p.  267. 

2.  The  liberation  of   volatile  sulphide 
from    milk    on     heating.       In    Am.     Jour. 
Physiol.,  VI,  p.  450.     (1902.) 

3.  The   formation    of   film   on    heated 
milk.     In  Am.  Jour.  Physiol.,  VII,  p.  325. 
(1902.) 

4.  Experimental  observations  on  pan- 
creatic  digestion   and   the  spleen.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Physiol.,  VII,  p.  387.  (1902.) 

5.  An  experimental  study  of  the  chem- 
ical products  of  bacillus  coli  communis  and 
bacillus    lactis    aerogennes.     In   Am.    Jour. 
Physiol.,  VIII,  p.  284.     (1903.) 

6.  Mucin  as  a  bacterial  product.     In 
Jour.  Med.  Research,  X,  p.  101.     (1903.) 

7.  On  the  spore  germination  of  bacil- 
lus subtilis  and   bacillus  megatherium.     In 
Centralbl.     fiir     Bakt.     Par.     und     Infek., 
XXXIII.      (1903.) 

8.  A    contribution    to    the     study   of 
pathogenic  yeasts.     In  Centralbl.  fur  Bakt. 
Par.  und  Infek.     (1904.)      (In  press.) 


BESSIE  (BUSHING)  RIDGELEY   (Mrs.  Doug- 
las Clay  Ridgeley),  A.B.    (1893). 

1.     Annelids  of  Turkey  Lake.    In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  p.  241. 


320 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


DOUGLAS  CLAY  RIDGELEY,  A.B.  (1893). 
Professor  of  Geography,  Illinois  State 
Normal  University. 

1.  A  preliminary  report  on  the  physical 
features  of  Turkey  Lake,  with  hydrographic 
map.      (Joint  author  with  J.  P.  Dolan  and 
Chancey  Juday.)      In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  216-239. 

2.  The  school  excursion  and  the  school 
museum  as  aids  in  the  teaching  of  geography. 
In  Normal  Sell.  Quar.,  Series  2,  No.  11,  pp. 
1-16. 

3.  Alexis     Everett    Frye's     'Grammar 
school  geography.'     In  Jour,  of  Geography, 
I,  pp.  341-342.     (Sept.,  1902.) 


ROBERT  RIDGWAY,  M.S.  (1884).  Curator  of 
Birds,  U.  S.  National  Museum,  Brook- 
land,  D.  C. 

1.  The  belted  kingfisher  again.    In  Am. 
Nat.,  Ill,  pp.  53-54.     (March,  1869.) 

2.  Notices  of  certain  obscurely  known 
species  of  American  birds.     In  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  for  1869,  XXI,  pp.  125-135. 

3.  A  true  story  of  a  pet  bird.     In  Am. 
Nat.,  Ill,  pp.  309-312.     (August,  1869.) 

4.  A  new  classification   of  the   North 
American    Falconidae,    with    descriptions    of 
three  new  species.    In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci. 
Phila.  for  1870,  XXII,  pp.  138-150. 

5.  Relationship  of  the  American  white- 
fronted  owl.    In  Am.  Nat.,  VI,  pp.  283-285. 
(May,  1872.) 

6.  New  birds  in  southern  Illinois.     In 
Am.  Nat.,  VI,  pp.  430-431.     (July,  1872.) 

7.  On  the  occurrence   of  a  near  rela- 
tion of  Aegiothus  flavirostris,  at  Waltham, 
Mass.   In  Am.  Nat.,  VI,  pp.  433-434.     (July, 
1872.) 

8.  On    the    occurrence    of    Setophaga 
picta  in  Arizona.     In  Am.  Nat.,  VI,  p.  436. 
(July,  1872.) 

9.  Notes  on  the  vegetation  of  the  lower 


Wabash  valley.  I.  The  forests  of  the  bot- 
tom lands.  In  Am.  Nat.,  VI,  pp.  658-065. 
(Nov.,  1872.) 

10.  Notes  on  the  vegetation  of  the  lower 
Wabash   valley.      II.     Peculiar   features   of 
the  bottom  lands.    In  Am.  Nat.,  VI,  pp.  724- 
732.     (Dec.,  1872.) 

11.  On  the  relation  between  color  and 
geographical  distribution  in  birds,  as  exhib- 
ited   in   melanism   and   hyperchromism.      In 
Am.    Jour.    Sci.,    IV,    pp.    454-460     (Dec., 
1872)  ;   V,  pp.  39-44  (Jan.,  1873). 

12.  Notes  on  the  vegetation  of  the  lower 
Wabash     valley.       III.       The     woods     and 
prairies  of  the  upland  portions.   In  Am.  Nat., 
VII,  pp.  154-157.      (March,  1873.) 

13.  Descriptions  of  the  type  specimen  of 
Pyranga  roseogularis  Cabot.    In  Ibis,  III,  p. 
126;  3  plates.     (April,  1873.) 

14.  The   prairie  birds  of  southern   Illi- 
nois.      In    Am.     Nat.,     VII,     pp.     195-203. 
(April,  1873.) 

15.  Description  of  Centronyx  ochroceph- 
alus    Aiken.      In    Am.    Nat.,    VI i,    p.    237. 
(April,  1873.) 

16.  The  relation  between  the  color  and 
geographical  distribution  of  birds.     In  Am. 
Nat.,  VII,  pp.  548-555.      (Sept.,  1873.) 

17.  On   some   new   forms    of  American 
birds.       In    Am.    Nat.,     VII,    pp.    602-619. 

.  (Oct.,  1873.) 

18.  Notes  on  the  bird  fauna  of  the  Salt 
Lake  valley  and  the  adjacent  portion  of  the 
Wasatch  Mountains.     In  Bull.   Essex   Inst. 
for  Nov.,  1873,  V,  pp.  168-173. 

19.  The   birds    of   Colorado.      In   Bull. 
Essex  Inst.  for  Nov.,  1873,  V,  pp.  174-195. 

20.  On    some   new   forms   of  American 
birds.     In  Bull.  Essex  Inst.  for  Dec.,  1S73, 
V,  pp.  194-201. 

21.  Catalogue  of  the  ornithological  col- 
lection in   the    Museum   of   the  Boston    So- 
ciety of  Natural  History.     Part  II,  Falcon- 
idse.     In  Proc.   Boston   Soc.   Nat.   Hist,   for 
Dec.,  1873,  XVI,  pp.  43-72. 


(22) 


321 


Indiana  University 


[.Ridgu'ay 


22.  Revision    of    the    Falconine    genera 
Micrastun,   Geranospiza  and  Rupornis,  and 
the    Strigine  genus   Glaucidium.     In   Proc. 
Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  Dec.,  1873,  XVI, 
pp.  73-106. 

23.  The    grouse    and    quails    of    North 
America,  discussed  in  relation  to  their  varia- 
tion with  habitat.     In  Forest  and   Stream, 
I.  pp.  289-290.     (Dec.,  1873.) 

24.  A  history  of  North  American  birds. 
<. Joint  author  with  S.  F.  Baird  and  T.  M. 
Brewer.)     Boston,  1874.     Vol.  I,  pp.  i-xxvii, 
1-596 :  6  cuts  ;  26  plates.    Vol.  II,  pp.  1-590  ; 
6  cuts;  29  plates.     Vol.  Ill,  pp.   1-560;   1 
cut ;  7  plates. 

25.  Letter  to  the  editor  of  Forest  and 
Stream  concerning  the  question,  argued  pro 
and   con   by   various   correspondents,    as    to 
whether  snakes  hiss.     In  Forest  and  Stream, 
I,  p.  327.     (Jan.,  1874.) 

26.  The  nomenclature  of  American  game 
birds.     In  Forest  and  Stream,  III,  pp.  210- 
211.  226-227.     (Jan.,  1874.) 

-~.  Catalogue  of  the  birds  ascertained  to 
occur  in  Illinois.  In  Ann.  Lye.  Nat.  Hist., 
New  York,  for  January,  1874,  pp.  364-394. 

28.  Notes  upon  American  water  birds. 
In    Am.    Nat,    VIII,   pp.    108-111.      (Feb., 
1874.) 

29.  Why  and  how  does  the  ruffed  grouse 
drum?    In  American  Sportsman,  III,  p.  322. 
(Feb.,  1874.) 

30.  The   lower   Wabash   valley,   consid- 
ered in  its  relation  to  the  faunal  districts  of 
the  eastern  region  of  North  America ;  with 
a   synopsis   of   its   avian   fauna.      In   Proc. 
Boston  Soc.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1874,  XVI,  pp. 
304-332. 

31.  Description    of    Hydrochelidon    cu- 
coptera,    from    a   specimen    taken    at   Lake 
Koshkonong,  Wisconsin.    In  Am.  Nat,  VIII, 
p.  189.     (March,  1874.) 

32.  On  local  variations  in  the  notes  and 
nesting  habits  of  birds.    In  Am.  Nat,  VIII, 
pp.  197-201.     (April,  1874.) 


33.  Two  rare  owls  from  Arizona.     In 
Am.  Nat,  VIII,  pp.  239-240.    (April,  1874.) 

34.  A  remarkable  peculiarity  of  Centro- 
cercus   urophasianus.      In  Am.   Nat,   VIII, 
p.  240.     (April,  1874.) 

35.  The  dodo.     In  Forest  and  Stream. 
II,  p.  244.     (May,  1874.) 

36.  Notice  of  a  species  of  tern  new  to 
the  Atlantic  coast  of  North  America.     In 
Am.  Nat.,  VIII,  p.  433.     (July,  1874.) 

37.  Birds  new  to  the  North  American 
fauna.      In   Am.    Nat,   VIII,   pp.   434-435. 
(July,  1874.) 

38.  Discovery   of   a    burrowing   owl    in 
Florida.     In  Am.  Sportsman,  IV,  p.  216;  1 
plate.     (July,  1874.) 

39.  Description    of    a    new    bird    from 
Colorado.     In  Am.   Sportsman,   IV,  p.  241. 
(July,  1874.) 

40.  Opinion  (requested  by  editor)  as  to 
question    whether   the   excessive   abundance 
of  grasshoppers  in  Kansas,  etc.,  has  any  con- 
nection with  the  decrease  in  number  of  game 
birds  in  the  same  districts.    In  Am.  Sports- 
man, IV,  p.  249.     (July,  1874.) 

41.  Story    of   a   wild    goose.      In   Am. 
Sportsman,  IV,  pp.  258-259.     (July,  1874.) 

42.  An  unusually  large  wild  goose.    In 
Am.    Sportsman,    IV,    p.    274.       (August, 
1874.) 

43.  Breeding  ground  of  white  pelicans 
at  Pyramid  Lake,  Nevada.     In  Am.  Sports- 
man, IV,  p.  289.     (August,  1874.) 

44.  Game   birds   and   grasshoppers.      A 
reply  to   Vix.     In   Am.   Sportsman,   IV,   p. 
356.     (Sept.,  1874.) 

45.  Concerning     a    'strange     bird'     de- 
scribed  by   a  correspondent  in   a  preceding 
number.     In  Forest  and  Stream,  III,  p.  85. 
(Sept.,  1874.) 

46.  The    snow    goose.      In    Am.    Nat.. 
VIII,  pp.  636-637.     (Oct.,  1874.) 

47.  List  of   birds   observed  at   various 
localities  contiguous  to  the  Central  Pacific 
Railroad,    from    Sacramento,   California    to 


322 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


Salt  Lake  Valley,  Utah.  In  Bull.  Essex 
Inst.  for  Oct.,  1874,  VI,  pp.  169-174;  Jan., 
1875,  VII,  pp.  10-40. 

48.  A  contribution  to  the  sparrow  war. 
In    Am.    Sportsman,    III,    p.    161.      (Dec., 
1874.) 

49.  Concerning    the    so-called    English 
sparrow,  Passer  domesticus.    In  Forest  and 
Stream,  III,  p.  309.     (Dec.,  1874.) 

50.  Note  on  Sterna  longipennis,  Nord- 
mann.     In  Am.  Nat.,  IX,  pp.  54-55.     (Jan., 
1875.) 

51.  A  heronry  in  the  Wabash  bottoms. 
In  Am.  Sportsman,  V,  pp.  312-313.      (Feb., 
1875. ) 

52.  Big  trees.     In  Am.   Sportsman,  V, 
pp.  321-322;  337;  353-354;  367-370.     (Feb. 
20  to  March  13,  inc.,  1875.) 

53.  Snow  birds  and  little  owls.    In  Am. 
Sportsman,  V,  p.  393.     (March,  1875.) 

54.  On  Nisus  cooperi   (Bonaparte)  and 
N.  gundlachi    (Lawrence).     In  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  for  1875,  pp.  78-88. 

55.  On  the  Buteonine  subgenus  Craxi- 
rex  Gould.     In  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila. 
for  1875,  pp.  89-119. 

56.  More  about  the  Florida  burrowing 
owl.     In  Rod  and  Gun,  VI,  p.  7.      (April, 
1875.) 

57.  Notice   of  a  very   rare   hawk.     In 
Rod  and  Gun,  VI,  p.  65.     (May,  1875.) 

58.  A  monograph  of  the  genus  Leucos- 
ticte,    or   gray-crowned    purple    finches.      In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  and  Geog.  Surv.  Terr,  for 
May,  1875.     No.  2,  2d  series,  pp.  51-82. 

59.  Outlines  of  a  natural  arrangement 
of  the  Falconidae.      (Read  before  the  Philo- 
sophical    Society     of     Washington,     April, 
1875.)     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  and  Geog.  Surv. 
Terr,   for  June,  1875,  No.  4,  2d  series,  pp. 
1-17.  plates  xi-xviii. 

60.  Nesting  of  the  worm-eating  warbler. 
In  Forest  and  Stream,  I,  pp.  10-12.      (July, 
1875.) 

61.  The    sparrow    hawk    or    American 


kestril.    In  Rod  and  Gun,  Vi,  p.  109.     (July, 
1875.) 

62.  Description    of   a   new   wren   from 
Florida.       In     Am.     Nat.,     IX,     p.     469. 
(August,  1875.) 

63.  First  impressions  of  the  bird  fauna 
of  California,  and  general  remarks  on  west- 
ern ornithology.     In  Sci.  Mon.,  I,  pp.  2-13. 
(Oct.,  1875.) 

64.  Our  native  trees.     The  tulip  tree, 
Liriodendron  tulipifera.     In  Field  and  For- 
est, I,  pp.  49-53.     (Dec.,  1875.) 

65.  Studies  of  the  American  Falconidse. 
Monograph   of   genus   Micrastur.      In   Proc. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  Phila.,  for  1875,  pp.  470- 
502,  figures  i-ix. 

66.  Second  thoughts  on  the  genus  Mi- 
crastur.   In  Ibis,  VI,  pp.  1-5.     (Jan.,  1876.) 

67.  The  genus  Glaucidium.    In  Ibis,  VI, 
pp.  11-17,  1  pi.     (Jan.,  1876.) 

68.  Studies  of  the  American  Falconidae. 
Monograph  of  the  Polybori.    In  Bull.  U.  S. 
Geol.  and  Geog.  Surv.  Terr,  for  February, 
1876,  No.  6,  2d  series,  pp.  451-473;  plates 
xxii-xxvi. 

69.  Studies  of  the  American  Falconidae. 
In  Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  and  Geog.  Surv.  Terr, 
for  April,  1876,  II,  No.  2,  pp.  91-182 ;  plates 
xxx-xxxi. 

70.  Ornithology    of    Guadeloupe     (lege 
Guadalupe)   Island,  based  on  notes  and  col- 
lections made  by  Dr.  Edward  Palmer.     In 
Bull.  U.  S.  Geol.  and  Geog.  Surv.  Terr,  for 
April,  1876,  II,  No.  2,  pp.  183-195. 

71.  Notes  on  the  genus  Helminthophaga. 
In  Ibis,  VI,  pp.  166-171.     (April,  1876.) 

72.  Regarding  Buteo  vulgaris  in  North 
America.      In    Bull.    Nutt.    Orn.    Club'  for 
April,  1876.     I,  pp.  32-39. 

73.  Maximum  length  of  the  black  snake. 
In  Forest  and  Stream,  VI,  p.  318.     (June, 
1876.) 

74.  Giant  pear   trees.     In   Forest  and 
Stream,  VI,  p.  337.     (June,  1876.) 

75.  Notes  on  the  catalpa.     Catalpa  big- 


323 


Indiana  University 


[  Ridgway 


nonioides.     In  Field  and  Forest,  II,  pp.  27- 
29.     (August,  1876.) 

76.  The  black  snake  again.     In  Forest 
and  Stream,  VII,  p.  20.     (August,  1876.) 

77.  On   geographical   variation  in   Den- 
drceca  palmarum.    In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club, 
for  Sept.,  1876,  I  pp.  81-87. 

78.  Sexual,     individual    and    geograph- 
ical variation  in  the  genus  Leucosticte.     In 
Field  and  Forest,  II,  pp.  37-43.     (Septem- 
ber, 1876.) 

79.  The  little  cypress  swamp  of  Indiana. 
In  Field  and  Forest,  II,  pp.  93-96.     (Dec., 
1876.) 

80.  Ornithology.     In  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv. 
w.  40th  Parallel,  IV,  part  III,  pp.  303-670. 
Washington,    Government    Printing    Office, 
1877. 

81.  On  geographical  variation  in  Turdus 
migratorius.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  for 
Jan.,  1877,  II,  pp.  8-9. 

82.  Mrs.    Maxwell's   Colorado    museum. 
In  Field  and  Forest,  II,  pp.  195-198;  208- 
214.     (May  and  June,  1877.) 

83.  Mrs.    Maxwell's    Colorado    museum. 
Additional  notes.     In  Field  and  Forest,  III, 
p.  11.-    (July,  1877.) 

84. .  The  birds  of  Guadalupe  Island,  dis- 
cussed with  reference  to  the  present  genesis 
of  species.  In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for 
July,  1877,  II,  pp.  58-66. 

85.  Description  of  a   new  wren  of  the 
Tres  Marias  Islands.     In  Bull.  Nutt.   Orn. 
Club,  for  Jan.,  1878,  III,  pp.  10-11. 

86.  Three  additions  to  the  avifauna  of 
North  America.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club, 
for  Jan.,  1878,  III,  pp.  37-38. 

87.  Eastward      range      of      Chondestes 
grammaca.     In    Bull.   Nutt.   Orn.   Club,  for 
Jan.,  1878,  III,  pp.  43-44. 

88.  Studies  of  the  American  Herodiones. 
Part  I.     Synopsis  of  the  American  genera  of 
Ardeidse  and  Ciconiidse :    including  descrip- 
tions of  three  new  genera  and  a  monograph 
of  the  genus  Ardea,  Linnaeus.     In  Bull.  U. 


S.   Geol.   and   Geog.   Surv.   Terr.,   for   Feb., 
1878,  IV,  pp.  219-251. 

89.  On   a   new   humming   bird    (Atthis 
ellioti),  from  Guatemala.     In   Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  for  1878,  I,  pp.  8-10. 

90.  Notes  on  some  of  the  birds  of  Cal- 
averas    county,    California,    and    adjoining 
localities.     In   Bull.   Nutt.    Orn.   Club,   for 
April,  1878,  III,  pp.  64-68. 

91.  Song  birds  of  the  West.     In   Har- 
per's Mag.,  LVI,  pp.  857-880,  19  wood  <-uts. 
(May,  1878.) 

92.  A  review  of  the  American  species 
of  the  genus  Scops,  Savigny.    In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.  for  August,  1878,   I,  sig.   1,   pp. 
85-117. 

93.  Notes  on  birds  observed  at  Mount 
Carmel,  southern   Illinois,   in  the  spring  of 
1878.     In   Bull.   Nutt.   Orn.   Club  for   Oct., 
1878,  III,  pp.  162-166. 

94.  Editor  of  'Notes  on  the  ornithology 
of  southern  Texas,  being  a  list  of  birds  ob- 
served in  the  vicinity  of  Fort  Brown,  Texas, 
from   February,   1876   to   June,    1878.'      By 
James  C.  Merrill,  Assistant  Surgeon,  U.  S. 
Army.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct., 
1878,  I,  pp.  118-173. 

95.  Descriptions  of  several  new  species 
and  geographical  races  of  birds  contained  in 
the  collection  of  the  United  States  National 
Museum.   In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Dec., 
1878,  I,  pp.  247-252. 

96.  Description   of  two  new  species  of 
birds  from  Costa  Kica,  and  notes  on  other 
rare   species   from   that   country.     In    Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Dec.,  1878,  I,  pp.  252- 
255. 

97.  Editor  of  'A  partial  list  of  the  birds 
of   central   California.'      By   L.   Belding,   of 
Stockton.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for 
March,  1879,  I,  pp.  388-449. 

98.  Descriptions    of    new    species    and 
races  of  American  birds,  including  a  synop- 
sis   of    the    genus    Tyrannus,    Cuvier.      In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.   Mus.   for   April   1879,    I, 
pp.  466-486. 


324 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


99.  Portion  of  letter  to  Mr.  Geo.  B. 
Grinnell  in  relation  to  the  bird  afterward 
described  as  Seiurus  nsevius  notabilis.  In 
Forest  and  Stream,  XII,  p.  307.  (May, 
1879.) 

100.  On  the  use  of  trinomials  in  zoolog- 
ical   nomenclature.      In    Bull.    Nutt.    Orn. 
Club  for  July,  1879.    IV,  pp.  129-134. 

101.  On  a  new  species  of  Peucaea  from 
southern    Illinois    and    central    Texas.      In 
Bull.   Nutt.   Orn.   Club  for   Oct.,    1879,   IV, 
pp.  218-222. 

102.  Note     on    Helminthophaga    gunnii, 
Gibfos.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  Oct., 
1879,  IV,  pp.  233-234. 

103.  Henslow's     bunting      ( Coturniculus 
henslowi)   near  Washington.    In  Bull.  Nutt. 
Orn.  Club  for  Oct.,  1879,  IV,  p.  238. 

104.  On  six  species  of  birds  new  to  the 
fauna  of  Illinois,  with  notes  on  other  rare 
Illinois  birds.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for 
June,  1880,  V,  pp.  30-32. 

105.  On  current  objectionable  names  of 
North  American  birds.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn. 
Club  for  Jan.,  1880,  V,  pp.  36-38. 

106.  Note     on     Peucsea     illinoensis.     In 
Bull.    Nutt.   Orn.   Club   for   Jan.,    1880,   V, 
p.  52. 

107.  Late  breeding  of  the  blue  grosbeak. 
In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  Jan.,  1880,  V, 
p.  53. 

108.  Description     of     an     unusual      (?) 
plumage  of  Buteo  harlani.     In  Bull.   Nutt. 
Orn.  Club  for  Jan.,  1880,  V,  pp.  58-59. 

109.  Revisions   of    nomenclature   of   cer- 
tain North  American  birds.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  March,  1880,  III,  pp.  1-16. 

110.  Notes    on    the    American    vultures 
( Sarcorhamphidse ) ,    with   special   reference 
to    their    generic    nomenclature.      In    Bull. 
Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  April,  1880,  V,  pp.  77- 
84. 

111.  Description  of  the  adult  plumage  of 
Hierofalco  gyrfalco  obsoletus.   In  Bull.  Nutt. 
Orn.  Club  for  April,  1880,  V,  pp.  92-95. 


112.  The    northern    waxwing     (Ampelis 
garrulus)     in    southern    Illinois.     In    Bull. 
Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  April,  1880,  V,  p.  118. 

113.  Note   concerning   the  capture   of  a 
specimen     of     the     greenfinch      (Ligurinus 
chloris)    at    Lowville,    Lewie    county,    New 
York.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  April, 
1880,  V,  p.  119. 

114.  On  the  supposed  identity  of  Ardea 
occidentalis,     Aud.,     and     A.     wurdemanni, 
Baird.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  April, 
1880,  V,  pp.  123-124. 

115.  On  the  moult  of  the  bill,  or  parts  of 
its    covering    in    certain    Alcidse.     In    Bull. 
Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  April,  1880,  V,  pp.  126, 
127. 

116.  On  Rallus   longirostris,   Bodd.,   and 
its  geographical  races.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn. 
Club  for  July,  ISS'O,  V,  pp.  138-140. 

117.  On   Macrohsephus   griseus    (Gmel.) 
and  M.  scotopaceus   ( Say ) .     In  Bull.  Nutt 
Orn.  Club  for  July,  1880,  V,  pp.  156-160. 

118.  On  a  new  Alaskan  sandpiper.     In 
Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  July,  1880,  V,  pp. 
160-163. 

119.  Scops    flammeola    in    Colorado.     In 
Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club  for  July,  1880,  V,  p. 
185. 

120.  The  little  brown   crane    (Grus  fra- 
terculus,    Cassin).       In    Bull.     Nutt.    Orn. 
Club  for  July,  1880,  V,  pp.  187-188. 

121.  A  catalogue  of  the  birds  of  North 
America.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for 
August,  1880,  III,  pp.  163-246. 

122.  Description  of  the  eggs  of  the  Cas- 
pian tern   (Sterna  caspia).     In  Bull.  Nutt. 
Orn.  Club  for  October,  1880,  V,  pp.  221-223. 

123.  Note  on  Helminthophaga  cincinnati- 
ensis,  Langdon.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club 
for  Oct.,  1880,  V,  pp.  237-238. 

124.  Catalogue  of  the  Trochilidse  in  the 
collection  of  the  United  States  National  Mu- 
seum.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct., 
1880,  III,  pp.  308-320. 

125.  Nomenclature    of    North    American 


325 


Indiana  University 


\_Ridgway 


birds,  chiefly  contained  in  the  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  Washington,  Government  Printing 
Office.  11881.) 

126.  Swainson's   warbler   in   Texas.      In 
Bull.    Nutt.     Orn.    Club,    VI,     pp.    54-55. 
(Jan.,  1881.) 

127.  Southern  range  of  the  raven  on  the 
Atlantic   Coast   of   the   United   States.      In 
Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VI,  p.  118.      (April, 
1881.) 

128.  An  unaccountable  migration  of  the 
red-headed  woodpecker.    In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn. 
Club,  VI,  pp.  120-122.     (April,  1881.) 

129.  The  Caspian  tern  in  California.    In 
Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VI,  p.  124.     (April, 
1881.) 

130.  A  hawk  new  to  the  United  States. 
In  Forest  and  Stream,  XVI,  p.  206.    (April 
14,  1881.) 

131.  On  a  duck  new  to  the  North  Amer- 
ican fauna.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1881,  IV,  pp.  22-24. 

132.  On  Amazilia  yucatanensis    (Cabot) 
and  A.  cerviniventris,  Gould.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1881,  IV,  pp.  25-26. 

133.  A  catalogue  of  the  birds  of  Illinois. 
In  Bull.   Illinois   State  Laboratory  of  Nat- 
ural History  for  May,  1881,  pp.  164-208. 

134.  A   review    of   the   genus   Centurus, 
Swainson.     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1881,  IV,  pp.  93-119. 

135.  List  of  species  of  Middle  and  South 
American  birds  not  contained  in  the  United 
States  National  Museum.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1881,  IV,  pp.  165-203. 

136.  On  a  tropical  hawk  to  be  added  Lo 
the  North  American  fauna.     In  Bull.  Nutt. 
Orn.  Club,  VI,  pp.  207-214.     (Oct.,  1881.) 

137.  List    of    special    desiderata    among 
North  American  birds.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1881,  IV,  pp.  207-223. 

138.  On  an  apparently  new  heron  from 
Florida.     In   Bull.   Nutt.    Orn.   Club,   VII, 
pp.  1-6.     (Jan.,  1882.) 

139.  Notes  on  some  birds  observed  near 


Wheatland,  Knox  County,  Indiana,  in  the 
spring  of  1881.  In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club, 
VII,  pp.  15-23.  (Jan.,  1882.) 

140.  On    the    generic    name   of    Helmin- 
th ophaga.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VII, 
pp.  53-54.      (Jan.,  1882.) 

141.  The  great  black-backed  gull  (Larus 
marinus)    from    a    new    locality.      In    Bull. 
Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VII,  p.  60.     (Jan.,  1882.) 

142.  Correction  of  an  erroneous  identifi- 
cation  of   Milvulus   tyrannus   for   M.   forfi- 
catus.    In   Ornithologist   and    Oologist,    VI, 
p.  93.     (Feb.,  1882.) 

143.  Catalogue  of  Old  World  birds  in  the 
United  States  National  Museum.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  IV,  pp.  317-333. 

144.  Notes  on  some  Costa  Rican  birds. 
.In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  IV,  pp. 

333-337. 

145.  Description  of  the  adult  female  r<t 
Falco  peregrinus  pealei.     In   Ibis,  VI,   pp. 
294-298.     (April,  1882.) 

146.  Description  of  a  new  flycatcher  and 
supposed    new    petrel    from    the    Sandwich 
Islands.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882, 

IV,  pp.  337-338. 

147.  Description    of    a    new    owl    from 
Porto  Rico.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
1882,  IV,  pp.  366-371. 

148.  Descriptions   of    two   new   thrushes 
from  the  United  States.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1882,  IV,  pp.  374-379. 

149.  On    two    recent    additions    to    the 
North  American  bird  fauna,  by  L.  Belding. 
In  Proc.    U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  IV,  pp. 
414-415. 

150.  Descriptions  of  several  new  races  of 
American  birds.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat  Mus. 
for  1882,  V,  pp.  9-15. 

151.  On     the     genera     Harporhynchus, 
Cabanis,    and    Methriopterus,    Reichenbach, 
with  a  description  of  a  new  genus  of  Mim- 
ing.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat  Mus.   for  1882, 

V,  pp.  43-46. 

152.  Notes    on    the   native   trees   of    the 


326 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


lower  Wabash  and  White  River  valleys, 
in  Illinois  and  Indiana.  In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  V,  pp.  49-88. 

153.  Critical  remarks  on  the  tree  creep- 
ers   (Certhia)   of  Europe  and  North  Amer- 
ica.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  V, 
pp.  111-116. 

154.  Description     of    some    new    North 
American  birds.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1882,  V,  pp.  343-346. 

155.  On   a  collection   of  birds   from   the 
Hacienda  'La  Palma,'  Gulf  of  Nicoya,  Costa 
Rica.     By    C.    C.    Nutting.     With    critical 
notes  by  R.  Ridgway.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1882,  V,  pp.  382-409. 

156.  Distribution      of      the      fish      crow 
(Corvus  ossifragus).     In   Bull.   Nutt.   Orn. 
Club,   VII,   p.  250.      (Oct.,   1882.) 

157.  Birds  new   to  or  rare   in   the   Dis- 
trict   of    Columbia.      In    Bull.    Nutt.    Orn. 
Club,  VII,  p.  253.     (Oct.,  1882.) 

158.  List  of  additions  to  the  catalogue  of 
North  American  birds.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn. 
Club,  VII,   pp.  254-258.      (Oct.,  1882.) 

159.  On    Le    Conte's   bunting    (Coturni- 
culus  lecontei)    and  other  birds  observed  in 
southeastern   Illinois.     In  Bull.   Nutt.   Orn, 
Club,  VIII,  p.  58.     (Jan.,  1883.) 

160.  The   scissor-tail    (Milvulus    forfica- 
tus)    at  Norfolk,  Va.     In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn. 
Club,  VIII,  p.  59.     (Jan.,  1883.) 

161.  On  some  remarkable   points  of  re- 
lationship   between   the   American   kingfish- 
ers.    In  Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VIII,  p.  59. 
(Jan.,  1883.) 

162.  Geographical      variation      in      size 
among    certain    Anatidse    and    Gruidse.     In 
Bull.  Nutt.  Orn.  Club,  VIII,  p.  62.     (Jan., 
1883.) 

163.  Corrections.      In    Ornithologist  and 
Oi'.logist,  VIII,  p.  13.     (Feb.,  1883.) 

164.  Catalogue  of  a  collection  of  birds 
made  in  the  interior  of  Costa  Rica,  by  Mr. 
C.  C.  Nutting.     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1883,  V,  pp.  493-502. 

165.  Description  of  a  new  warbler  from 


the  islands  of  Santa  Lucia,  West  Indies, 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  V,  pp. 
525-526. 

166.  Description     of     a     supposed     new 
plover,    from   Chili.      In   Proc.    U.    S.    Nat, 
Mus.  for  1883,  V,  pp.  526-527. 

167.  Catalogue   of  a   collection   of   birds- 
made  at   various   points   along   the  western, 
coast    of    lower    California,    north    of    Cape 
St.    Eugenio.      By    L.    Belding.      Edited    by 
R.   Ridgway.      Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for 
1883,  V,  pp.  527-532. 

168.  Catalogue   of   a   collection   of   birds 
made   near    the   southern    extremity   of   the 
peninsula     of    Lower     California.       By     L. 
Belding.     Edited  by  R.  Ridgway.     In  Proc~ 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  V,  pp.  532-550. 

169.  On  the  genus  Tantalus  Linn.,   and", 
its  allies.     In  Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.   for 
1883,  V,  pp.  550-551. 

170.  Catalogue  of  the  aquatic  and  fisn- 
eating  birds  exhibited  by  the  United  States 
National  Museum  at  the  Great  International 
Fisheries  Exhibition,  London,  1883.     Wash- 
ington,   Government    Printing    Office,    1S83. 
Pp.  1-46. 

171.  Description   of   a   new   petrel   from 
Alaska.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883, 
V,  pp.  656-658. 

172.  Descriptions    of    some    birds,    sup- 
posed to  be  undescribed,  from  the  Command- 
er Islands  and  Petropaulovski,  collected  by 
Dr.  Leonhard  Stejneger,  U.  S.  Signal  Serv- 
ice.   In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  VI, 
pp.  90-96. 

173.  Notes  on  the  black  racer.     In  For- 
est and  Stream,  XXI,  p.  63.     (August  23, 
1883.) 

174.  On  the  probable  identity  of  Motac- 
illa  ocularis  Swinhoe  and  M.  amurensis  See- 
bohm,  with  remarks  on  a  supposed  species,. 
M.  blakistoni  Seebohm.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1883,  VI,  pp.  144-147. 

175.  Notes    on    some    rare    species    of 
Neotropical  birds.     In  Ibis,  I,  pp.  399-401. 
(Oct.,  1883.) 


327 


Indiana  University 


\_Ridgtuay 


176.  Letters    to    the    editors    concerning 
the    U.    S.    National    Museum    exhibit    of 
aquatic  and  fish-eating  birds  at  the  London 
International      Fisheries      Exhibition.        In 
Ibis.  I,  pp.  548-580.     (Oct.,  1883.) 

177.  Descriptions    of    some    new    birds 
from  Lower  California.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  1883,  VI,  pp.  154-156. 

178.  Anthus  cervinus  (Pallas)   in  Lower 
California.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 

1883,  VI,  pp.  156-157. 

179.  Note  on   Merula  confinis    (Baird). 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1883,  VI,  pp. 
158-159. 

180.  Additions  and  corrections  to  the  list 
of  native  trees  of  the  Lower  Wabash.     In 
Bot.  Gaz.,  VIII,  pp.  345-352.     (Dec.  1883.) 

181.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
TJ.  S.  National  Museum.   In  Ann.  Rep.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1882,  1883,  pp.  13-17. 

382.     Note    on     Zenaidura     yucatanensis 
Lawr.    In  Auk,  I,  p.  96.     (Jan.,  1884.) 

183.  On  a  new  Carpodectes  from  south- 
western Costa  Rica.     In  Ibis,  II,  for  Jan., 

1884,  pp.  27-28,  pi.  2. 

184.  Notes   on   three   Guatemalan   birds. 
In  Ibis,  II,  for  Jan.,  1884,  pp.  43-45. 

185.  List   of   birds    found    at    Guaymas, 
Sonora,  in  December  and  April,  1883.     By 
L.  Belding.      (Edited  by  R.  Ridgway.)      In 
Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.  for  Jan.,   1884,  VI, 
pp.  343-344. 

186.  Second  catalogue  of  a  collection  of 
birds  made  near  the  southern  extremity  of 
Lower  California.     By  L.  Belding.     (Edited 
by  R.  Ridgway.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  Jan.,  1884,  VI,  pp.  344-b52. 

187.  Notes  on   some  Japanese   birds   re- 
lated to  North  American  species.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Jan.,  April,  1884,  VI, 
pp.  368-371. 

188.  Ortyx   virginianus   not  in   Arizona. 
In    Forest    and     Stream,     XXII,     p.     124. 
(March  13,  1884.) 

189.  The  water  birds  of  North  America. 
(Joint  author  with  S.  F.  Baird  and  T.  M. 


Brewer.)  In  Memoirs  of  the  Museum  of 
Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  College, 
Vol.  XII.  (Issued  in  continuation  of  the 
publications  of  the  geological  survey  of  Cali- 
fornia.) Boston,  1884.  Vol.  I,  pp.  i-xi, 
1-537;  Vol.  II,  pp.  1-552. 

190.  Remarks   concerning   Phalacrocorar 
violaceus  and  P.  v.  resplendens.     In  Auk,  I, 
p.  165.     (April,  1884.) 

191.  Remarks    concerning    two    Central 
American  species  commonly  referred  to  the 
genus  Compsothlypis  cabanis.     In  Auk,  I,  p. 
169.     (April,  1884.) 

192.  Descriptions    of    some    new    North 
American  birds.     In  Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash., 
II,  1885   (author's  edition  distributed  April 
10,  1884) ,  pp.  89-95. 

193.  Description    of    a    new    American 
kingfisher.     In  Proc.   Biol.   Soc.   Wash.,   II, 
1885    (author's   edition  published  April   10, 
1884),  pp.  95-96. 

194.  Note  on   Psaltriparus  grindae,  Bel- 
ding.     In  Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  II,  1885 
( author's  edition  published  April  10,  1884), 
pp.  96. 

195.  Note  on  the  generic  name  Calodro- 
mus.     In   Proc.   Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  II,  1885 
(author's  edition  published  April  10,  1884), 
p.  97. 

196.  Southern  limit  of  quail  and  grouse. 
In  Forest  and  Stream,  XXII,  p.  243.  (April 
24,  1884.) 

197.  On  a  collection  of  birds  from  Nica- 
ragua.    By  Charles  C.  Nutting.     Edited  by 
R.  Ridgway.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
April,  1884,  VI,  pp.  24-26. 

198.  On  some  Costa   Rican   birds,   with 
descriptions  of  several  supposed  new  species. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  April,  1884, 
VI,  pp.  410-415. 

199.  A  review  of  the  American  crossbills 
(Loxia)    of   the   L.    curvirostra    type.       In 
Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  II,  1885   (author's 
edition  published  April  28,  1884),  pp.  101- 
107. 

200.  Note     on     the     Anas     hyperboreus, 


328 


Ridgivay  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


Pall.,  and  Anser  albatus,  Cass.  In  Proc. 
Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  II,  1885  (author's  edition 
published  April  28,  1884),  pp.  107-108. 

201.  Remarks  on  the  type  specimens  of 
Mu.scicapa  fulvifrous,  Girard,  and  Mitre- 
phorus  pallescens,  Coues.  In  Proc.  Biol. 
Soc.  Wasn.,  II,  1885  (author's  edition  pub- 
lished April  28,  1884),  pp.  108-110. 

L'U2.  Note  regarding  the  earliest  name  for 
Carpodacus  hsemorrhous  ( Wagler ) .  In 
Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  II,  1885  (author's 
edition  published  April  28,  1884),  pp.  110- 
111. 

203.  Note  concerning  the  correct  specific 
name  of  Cypselus  saxatilis  Woodhouse.     In 
Auk.  I,  p.  230,  footnote.     (July,  1884.) 

204.  Remarks  upon  the  close  relationship 
between  the  white  and  scarlet  ibises   (Eudo- 
cimus  albus  and  E.  ruber). 

205.  Note  on  Astur  atricapillus  striatu- 
lus.    In  Auk,  I,  pp.  252-253.     (July,  1884.) 

206.  On  the  possible  specific  identity  of 
Buteo   cooperi   Cass.   with   B.   harlani   Autl. 
In  Auk,  I,  p.  254.     (July,  1884.) 

207.  Probable  breeding  of  the  red  cross- 
bill   (Loxia  curvirostra   americana)    in  cen- 
tral  Maryland.     In  Auk,   I,  p.  292.    (July, 
1884.) 

208.  The  probable  breeding  place  of  Pas- 
serculus  princeps.     In  Auk,  1,  pp.  292-293. 
(July,  1884.) 

209.  Note   on    Selasphorus   torridus   Sal- 
vin.      In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.   for   July, 
1884,  VII,  p.  14. 

210.  Melanetta  fusca  (Linn.)  in  Alaska. 
In   Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July,  1884, 
VII,  p.  68. 

211.  Description  of  a  new  snow  bunting 
from  Alaska.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
July,  1884,  VII,  pp.  68-70. 

212.  On   a   collection   of  birds   made   by 
Messrs.    J.    E.    Benedict   and    W.    Nye,    of 
United    States    Fish    Commission    Steamer 
Albatross.     In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.  for 
Sept.,  1884,  VII,  pp.  172-180. 


213.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  the 
field  sparrow  from  New  Mexico.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1884,  VII,  p.  254. 

214.  Another    Kirtland's    warbler    from 
Michigan..  In  Auk,  I,  p.  389.     (Oct.,  1884.) 

215.  Note  concerning  bird  exhibit  of  the 
U.  S.  National  Museum  at  the  New  Orleans 
Exposition.      In    Auk,    I,    p.    403.       (Oct., 
1884.) 

216.  Note  relative  to  extent  of  bird  col- 
lection in  the  U.  S.  National  Museum.     In 
Auk,  I,  pp.  403-404.     (Oct.,  1884.) 

217.  On  a  new  species  of  coot  from  the 
West  Indies.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
Oct.,  1884,  VII,  p.  358. 

218.  The  bird  collection  of  the  U.  S.  Na- 
tional   Museum.      In    Science,    IV,    p.    497. 
(Nov.  28,  1884.) 

219.  Grouse   and   mallard   plumage.      In 
Forest  and  Stream,  XXIX,  p.  463.      (Jan. 
5,  1885.) 

220.  Extract   from   letter   to   the   editor 
concerning     the     name,     etc.,     of     Spizella 
wortheni.    In  Ornithologist  and  Oologist,  X, 
p.  24.     (Feb.,  1885.) 

221.  Description  of  some  new  species  jf 
birds    from    Cozumel    Island,   Yucatan.      In 
Proc.  Biol.  Soc.  Wash.,  Ill,  1886   (author's 
edition  published  Feb.  20,  1885),  pp.  21-24. 

222.  Description   of   a   new  race   of   the 
red-shouldered  hawk  from  Florida.    In  Proc. 
U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.    for   Feb.,    1885,   VII,   p. 
514. 

223.  On  two  hitherto  unnamed  sparrows 
from  the  coast  of  California.    In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Feb.,  1885,  pp.  516-578. 

224.  The  European  sparrow.     In  Ameri- 
can   Field,    XXIII,    p.    295.      (March    28, 
1885.) 

225.  On   Buteo  harlani    (Aud.)    and   B. 
cooperi    Cass.      In    Auk,    II,    pp.    165-166. 
(April,  1885.) 

226.  Remarks  on  the  California  vulture 
( Pseudogryphus     californianus. )      In    Auk, 
II,  pp.  167-169.     (April,  1885.) 


329 


Indiana  University 


\_Ridguay 


227.  Note   on   Sarcorhamphus  sequatori- 
alis     Sharpe.     In    Auk,    II,    pp.     169-171. 
(April,  1885.) 

228.  Review    of    Gurney's    'List    of    the 
diurnal  birds  of  prey.'    In  Auk,  II,  pp.  203- 
205.     (April  1885.) 

229.  Where  did  it  come  from?    In  Forest 
and    Stream,    XXIV,    p.    204.      (April    9, 
18S5.) 

230.  On  CEstrelata  fisheri  and  CE.  defilip- 
piana.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  May, 
1885,  VIII,  pp.  17-18. 

231.  Icterus    cucullatus,    Swainson,    and 
its  geographical  variations.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  March,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  18-19. 

232.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Contopus  from  tropical  America.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  May,  1885,  VIII,  p.  21. 

233.  Note  on  the  Anser  leucopareius  of 
Brandt.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  May, 
1885,  VIII,  pp.  21-22. 

234.  Description  of  a  new  warbler  from 
Yucatan.     In   Proc.    U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.    for 
May,  1885,  VIII,  p.  23. 

235.  Description  of  two  new  birds  from 
Costa  Rica.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
May,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  23-24. 

236.  Description  of  three  supposed  new 
honey    creepers    from    the    Lesser    Antilles, 
with  a  synopsis  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Certhiola.      In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.   for 
May,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  25-30. 

237.  On   Cathartes  burrovianus,  Cassin, 
and  C.  urubitinga,  Pelzeln.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  May,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  34-36. 

238.  On  Onychotes  gruberi.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  May,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  36-38. 

239.  Remarks  on  the  type  specimens  of 
Buteo   oxypterus,   Cassin.     In   Proc.   U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  May,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  75-77. 

240.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
boat-billed  heron  from  Central  America.     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  June,  1885,  VIII, 
pp.  93-94. 

241 .  Description    of   a    new   hawk    from 


Cozumel.     In   Proc.    U.    S.   Nat   Mus..    f.«r 
June,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  94-95. 

242.  On    Peucsea    mexicana    (Lawr.  i.    ;i 
sparrow  new  to  the  United  States.    In  Pcoc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  June,  1885,  VIII.  pp. 
98-99. 

243.  A   review   of  the  American  golden 
warblers.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for 
Sept.,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  348-350. 

244.  Some    emended    names     of     North 
American  birds.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  M;i-. 
for    Sept.,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  354-356. 

245.  Description  of  a  new  cardinal  ^r.«s- 
beak   from  Arizona.     In  Auk,   II,  pp.   :'.4:'. 
345.     (Oct.,  1885.) 

246.  Helminthophila  leucobronchialis.    In 
Auk,  II,  pp.  259-363.     (Oct.,  1885.) 

247.  On  Junco  cinereus    (Swains.)    and 
its  geographical  races.    In  Auk,  II,  pp.  ::»'•: 
364.     (Oct.,  1885.) 

248.  A  new  petrel   for   North  America. 
In  Auk,  II,  pp.  386-387.     (Oct.,  1885.) 

249.  Description   of   an   apparently    ne\v 
species  of  Dromococcyx   from  British  Gui- 
ana.    In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.. 
1885,  VIII,  p.  559. 

250.  Catalogue  of  a  collection  of  birds 
made  on  the  islands  of  Cozumel,  Yucatan,  t>y 
the  naturalists  of  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commis- 
sion Steamer  Albatross,  Capt.  Z.  L.  Tanner 
commanding.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
Oct.,  1885,  VIII,  pp.  560-583. 

251.  Report  on  the  department  of  bini-. 
U.    S.    National    Museum,    1883.      In    Ann. 
Rep.      Smithsonian     Institution     for     1883 
(1885),  pp.  220-225. 

252.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.    S.   National   Museum,   1884.      In   Ann. 
Rep.  Smithsonian  Institution  (Report  of  U. 
S.  National  Museum)  for  1884  (1885),  pp. 
143-155. 

253.  On  the  proper  name  of  the  prairie 
hen.       In  Auk,    III,    pp.    132-133.      (Jan., 
1886.) 

254.  The  scissor-tail  flycatcher.     (Milvu- 


330 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


lus  forficatus)  at  Key  West.     In  Auk,  III, 
p.  134.     (Jan.,  1886.) 

255.  The  vernacular  name  of  Plectrophe- 
nax    hyperboreus.      In    Auk,    III,    p.    135. 
(Jan.,  1886.) 

256.  Arizona     quail.       In     Forest     and 
Stream.     (Jan.  14,  1886.) 

257.  Birds  and  bonnets.     In  Forest  and 
Stream,  XXVI,  p.  5.     (Jan.  28,  1886.) 

258.  Is   the   dodo   an   extinct  bird?     In 
Science,  VII,  p.  190.     (Feb.  26,  1886.) 

259.  Water  birds  of  North  America.    'A 
few  corrections'  rectified.     In  Auk,  III,  pp. 
266-268.     (April,  1886.) 

260.  Tringa     damacensis      (Horsf.)      in 
Alaska ;    a    sandpiper    new    to    the    North 
American    fauna.      In    Auk,    III,    p.    275. 
(April,  1886.) 

261.  Discovery  of  the  breeding  place  of 
McKay's   snowflake    (Plectrophenax   hyper- 
boreus.)    In  Auk,  III,  pp,  276-277.     (April, 
1886.) 

262.  On   two   abnormally   colored   speci- 
mens  of  the   bluebird    (Sialia   sialis).     In 
Auk,  III,  pp.  282-283.     (April,  1886.) 

263.  Note   announcing  departure   of  the 
Fish  Commission  steamer  Albatross  on  a  sci- 
entific cruise  among  the  Bahamas  and  other 
islands  of  the  West  Indies.     In  Auk,  III,  p. 
286.     (April,  1886.) 

264.  On  the  glaucous  gull  of  Bering  Sea 
and   contiguous   waters.      In  Auk,   III,    pp. 
330-331.     (July,  1886.) 

265.  A  nomenclature  of  colors  for  natu- 
ralists, and  compendium  of  useful  knowledge 
for   ornithologists.      Boston,    1886.      Pp.    1- 
129 ;  17  plates. 

256.  Description  of  new  species  of  oys- 
ter-catcher from  the  Galapagos  Islands.  In 
Auk,  III,  p.  331.  (July,  1886.) 

267.  Preliminary    descriptions    of    some 
new  species  of  birds  from  southern  Mexico, 
in  the  collection  of  the  Mexican  Geograph- 
ical  and   Exploring   Commission.      In  Auk, 
III.     (July,  1886.) 

268.  Descriptions  of  two  new  species  of 


birds  supposed  to  be  from  the  interior  of 
Venezuela.  In  Auk,  III,  p.  333.  (July, 
1886.) 

269.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  elf 
owl   from   Socorro   Island,   western   Mexico. 
In  Auk,  III,  pp.  333-334.     (July,  1886.) 

270.  Description    of    a    new    genus    of 
Oceanitidse.     In  Auk,  III,  p.  334.      (July, 
1886.) 

271.  Description  of  four  new  species  of 
birds   from  the  Bahama  Islands.     In   Auk, 

III,  pp.  334-337.     (July,  1886.) 

272.  Description  of  a  new  genus  of  Ty- 
rannidse  from  Santo  Domingo.    In  Auk,  III, 
p.  382.     (July,  1886.) 

273.  Remarks  concerning  certain  correc- 
tions of  alleged  errors  in  'Water  birds  of 
North  America.'     In  Auk,  III,  pp.  403-404. 
(July,  1886.) 

274.  Descriptions  of  some  new  species  of 
birds,  supposed  to  be  from  the  interior  of 
Venezuela.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
Sept.  17,  1886,  IX,  pp.  92-94. 

275.  On  JEstrelata  sandwichensis  Ridgw. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Sept.  17,  1886, 
IX,  pp.  95-96. 

276.  Catalogue  of  the  animals  collected 
by  the  Geographical  and  Exploring  Commis- 
sion  of   the  Republic  of  Mexico.     By  Fer- 
nando Ferrari-Perez,   Chief  of  the  Natural 
History   Section.     II.     Birds.     By   F.   Fer- 
rari-Perez.    With  descriptions  of  five  new 
species,   and  critical   remarks  on  others   of 
greater  or  less  rarity  or  interest,  by  Robert 
Ridgway.     In   Proc.   U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.  for 
Oct.,  1886,  IX,  pp.  130-182. 

277.  Description  of  the  young  and  first 
plumage  of  Sterna  fuliginosa.    In  Auk,  III, 
pp.  433-434.     (Oct.,  1886.) 

278.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  the 
genus    Empidonax    from    Guatemala.      In 
Ibis,  IV,  pp.  459-460.     (Oct.,  1886.) 

279.  On  Empidochanes  fuscatus  (Max.) 
and  Empidonax  brunneus,  Ridgw.     Iv  Ibis, 

IV,  pp.  460-461.     (Oct..  1886.) 


331 


Indiana  University 


\_Ridgu. ay 


280.  On  the  species  of  the  genus  Empi- 
donax.     In   Ibis,    IV,   pp.   401-468.      (Oct., 
1886.) 

281.  Description   of   a   melanistic   speci- 
men of  Buteo  latissimus  (Wils.).     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1886,  IX,  pp.  248- 
249. 

282.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.  S.  National  Museum,  Jan.  1  to  June  30, 
1885.     In  Ann.   Rep.    Smithsonian   Institu- 
tion   (Report  of  U.  S.   National   Museum) 
for  1885  (1886),  pp.  85-91. 

283.  A    singularly    marked   specimen    of 
Sphyrapicus   thyroideus.      In    Auk,   IV,   pp. 
75-76.     (Jan.,  1887.) 

284.  Description  of  a  recently  new  oyster- 
catcher     (Hncmatopus    galapagoensis)     from 
the  Galapagos  Islands.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  Feb.,  1887,  IX,  pp.  325-326. 

285.  Description  of  a  new  subspecies  of 
Cyclorhis   from   Yucatan.      In   Proc.   U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Feb.,  1887,  IX,  p.  519. 

286.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  My- 
iarchus,   presumably   from   the   Orinoco   dis- 
trict of  South  America.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  Feb.,  1887,  IX,  p.  520. 

287.  On  a  probable  hybrid  between  Dry- 
ebates  nuttalli    (Gamb.)    and  D.   pubescens 
gairdnerii  (Aud.).   In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  Feb.,  1887,  IX,  pp.  521-522. 

288.  Description   of   an   apparently   new 
species  of  Picolaptes,  from   the  lower  Ama- 
zon.    In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.   for   Feb., 
1887,  IX,  p.  523. 

289.  Description  of  a  new  plumed  part- 
ridge from  Sonora.     In  Forest  and  Stream, 
XXVIII,  p.  106.     (March  3,  1887.) 

290.  List  of  birds  found  breeding  within 
the  corporate  limits  of  Mt.  Carmel,  Illinois. 
In    Bull.    Ridgway    Orn.    Club    for    April, 
1887,  pp.  26-35. 

29.1.  The  imperial  woodpecker  (Campe- 
philus  imperialis)  in  northern  Sonora.  In 
Auk,  IV,  p.  161.  (April,  1887.) 

292.     The  coppery-tailed  trogon    (Trogon 


ambiguus)     breeding    in    southern    Arizona. 
In  Auk,  IV,  pp.  161-162.     (April,  1887.) 

293.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Co- 
tinga  from  the  Pacific  Coast  of  Costa  Rica. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  April,  1877, 
X,  pp.  1-2. 

294.  Description  of  a  new  form  of  Spin- 
dalis   from   the  Bahamas.     In   Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  April,  1887,  X,  p.  3. 

295.  Description  of  the  adult  female  of 
Carpodectes  antoniae,  Zeledon,  with  critical 
remarks,   notes  on   habits,  etc.,  by   Jos6   C. 
Zeledon.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for 
April,  1877,  X,  p.  20. 

296.  Feathered  songsters.    Great  western 
bird  center.    A  list  of  the  birds  found  breed- 
ing within  the  corporate  limits  of  Mt.  Car- 
mel,    Illinois.     In    Mount   Carmel   Register, 
April  28,  1887. 

297.  Description  of  a  new  species  of  Por- 
zana  from  Costa  Rica.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  July,  1887,  Vol.  X,  p.  111. 

298.  Notes      on      Ardea      wuerdemanni 
Baird.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July, 
1887,  X,  pp.  112-115. 

299.  Trogon   ambiguus   breeding   in   Ari- 
zona.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July, 
1887,  p.  147. 

300.  Description  of  a  new  plumed  part- 
ridge  from    Sonora.     In   Proc.    U.    S.    Nat. 
Mus.  for  July,  1887,  X,  p.  148-150. 

301.  Description  of  a  new  genus  of  Den- 
drocolaptine   bird   from   the   lower   Amazon. 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July,  1887,  X, 
p.  151. 

302.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Phacellodomus  from  Venezuela.    In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July,  1887,  X,  p.  152. 

303.  Clarke's      nutcracker      (Picicorvus 
columbianus)     in    the    Bristol    Bay    region, 
Alaska.    In  Auk,  IV,  p.  255.     (July,  1887.) 

304.  Clarke's   nutcracker   from   the   Ko- 
wak   River,   Alaska.      In   Auk,   IV,   p.   256. 
(July,  1887.) 

305.  Yellow-headed    blackbird     (Xantho- 


332 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


cephalus    xanthocephalus)     in    Maine.      In 
Auk,  IV,  p.  256.     (July,  1887.) 

300.  Note  on  Spizella  monticola  ochracea 
Brewst.  In  Auk,  IV,  pp.  258-259.  (July, 
1887.) 

307.  Letter  to  the  editor  concerning  the 
supposed  breeding  plumage  of  Podiceps  occi- 
dentalis  Lawrence.     In  Ibis,  V,  pp.  261-362. 
(July,  1887.) 

308.  Description  of  two  new  species  of 
Kaup's   genus   Megascops.     In   Proc.   U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Aug.,  1887,  X,  pp.  267-268. 

309.  Description    of    two    new    races    of 
Pyrrhuloxia  sinuata  Bonap.     In  Auk,  IV,  p. 
347.     (Oct.,  1887.) 

310.  On   the   correct  subspecific   title   of 
Baird's   wren    (No.   719b,   A.   O.   U.   check- 
list).     In    Auk,    IV.    pp.    249-250.       (Oct., 
1887.) 

311.  A  correction.     In  Ornithologist  and 
Oologist,  XII,  p.  192.     (Nov.,  1887.) 

312.  Description    of    a    new    Muscisaxi- 
cola,  from  Lake   Titicaca,   Peru.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Nov.,  1887,  X,  p.  430. 

313.  On  Phrygilus  gayi  (Eyd.  and  Gerv.) 
and  allied  species.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  Nov.,  1887,  X,  pp.  431-435. 

314.  Spencer   Fullerton   Baird.    (In   me- 
moriam.)      In    Auk,    V,    pp.    1-14.      (Jan., 
1888.) 

315.  Notes    on    some    type-specimens    of 
American    Troglodytidae    in   the   Lafresnaye 
collection.     In  Proc.  Bost.   Soc.   Nat.  Hist, 
for  March,  1888,  XXIII,  pp.  383-388. 

316.  Description  of  a  new  Tityra  from 
western  Mexico.    In  Auk,  V,  p.  263.     (July, 
1888.) 

317.  A  review  of  the  genus  Dendrocincla 
Gray.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  1888, 
X,  pp.  32,  488-497. 

318.  Remarks    on     Catharus    berlepschi 
Lawr.   In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  August, 
1888,  p.  504. 

319.  Descriptions    of   some    new    species 
and  subspecies  of  birds  from  Middle  America. 


In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  August.  1888, 
X,  pp.  505-510. 

320.  Note  on  the  generic  name  Uropsila, 
Sc.   and   Salv.     In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus. 
for  August    1888,  X,  p.  511. 

321.  Descriptions  of  new  species  and  ge- 
nera of  birds  from  the  lower  Amazon.     In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  August,  1888,  X, 
pp.  529-548. 

322.  A  review  of  the  genus  Psittacula  of 
Brisson.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Au- 
gust, 1888,  X,  pp.  529-548. 

323.  Catalogue   of   a   collection   of  birds 
made  by  Mr.  Chas.  H.  Townsend,  on  islands 
in  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  in  Honduras.     In 
Proc.   U.    S.    Nat.   Mus.   for   August,    1888, 
pp.  572-597. 

324.  Charles  Wiekliffe  Beckham :     Obit- 
uary.     In    Auk,    V,    pp.    445-446.       (Oct., 
1888.) 

325.  Supplementary  remarks  on   the  ge- 
nus   Psittacula    Brisson.      In    Auk,    V,    pp. 
460-462.      (Oct.,  1888.) 

326.  Description  of   a   new   Psaltriparus 
from    southern    Arizona.     In    Proc.    U.     S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1888,  X,  p.  697. 

327.  Description  of  a  new  western  sub- 
species   of    Accipiter    velox    (Wilson),    and 
subspecific    diagnosis    of    A.    cooperi    mexi- 
canus   (Swains).     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for   Nov.,    1888,   XI,    p.   92. 

328.  Note    on    ^Estrelata    sandwichensis 
Kidgw.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Nov., 
1888,  XI,  p.   104. 

329.  Description  of  a  new  pigeon   from 
Guayaquil,   Ecuador.     In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat. 
Mus.  for  Nov.,  1888,  XI,  p.  112. 

330.  Description    of    the    adult    male    of 
Acanthidops   bairdi.      In   Proc.    U.    S.    Nat. 
Mus.  for  March,  1889,  XI,  p.  196. 

331.  Spring    notes    on    migratory    birds. 
In    Forest    and    Stream,    XXXII,    p.    420 
(Jan.    13,   1889.) 

332.  Notes   on   Costa   Rican   birds,   with 
descriptions  of  seven  new  species  and  sub- 


333 


Indiana  University 


[Ridgway 


species  and  one  new  genus.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Sept.,  1889,  XI,  pp.  537-546. 

333.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.  S.  National  Museum,  for  1885-1886.    In 
Ann.  Rep.  Smithsonian  Institution  (Report 
of  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.),  for  1885-1886  (1889), 
pp.   153-162. 

334.  The  ornithology  of   Illinois.     Part 
I,     Descriptive    catalogue.     In    Nat    Hist. 
Survey   of   Illinois.      Springfield,    111.      Vol. 
I,  pp.  viii,  520,  22  plates   (1889)  ;    vol.  II, 
pp.  282,  22  plates  (1895). 

335.  Buteo   brachyurus  and   B.   fulgino- 
sus.     In  Auk,  VII,  p.  90.     (Jan.,  1890.) 

336.  Intergradation  between  Zonotrichia 
leucophrys  and  Z.  intermedia,  and  between 
the  latter  and  Z.  gambeli.    In  Auk,  VII,  p. 
96.      (Jan.,  1890.) 

337.  A  chart  of  standard  colors.    In  Gar- 
den  and   Forest,   III,   pp.   22-23.      (Jan.   3, 
1890.) 

338.  A  review  of  the  genus  Xiphocolap- 
tes  of  Lesson.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for   Feb.,   1890,   XII,  pp.   1-20. 

339.  A  review  of  the  genus  Sclerurus  of 
Swainson.     In   Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.   for 
Feb..   1890,  XII,  pp.  21-31. 

340.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Steamer  Alba- 
tross.     (Published   by   permission   of   Hon. 
Marshall  McDonald,  U.  S.  Commissioner  of 
Fisheries.)      No.   I — Birds   collected  on   the 
Galapagos  Islands  in  1888.     In  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Feb.,  1890,  XII,  p.  101-128. 

341.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the  U.   S.   Fish  Commission   Steamer  Alba- 
tross.     (Published   by   permission   of   Hon. 
Marshall  McDonald,  Commissioner  of  Fish- 
eries.) No.  II — Birds  collected  on  the  Island 
of  Santa  Lucia,  West  Indies,  the  Abrolhos 
Islands.   Brazil,  and  at  the  Straits  of  Ma- 
gellan, in  1887-1888.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  Feb.,  1890,  XII,  pp.  129-139. 

342.  A  northern  station  for  Quercus  lyr- 
ata.     In   Garden  and   Forest,   III,   p.   129. 
(March  12,  1890.) 


343.  Review    of    Salvin    and    Godmnn's 
'Biologia     Centrali-  Americana  —  Aves.'      In 
Auk,  VII,  pp.  189-195.     (April,  1890.) 

344.  Harlan's  hawk  a  race  of  the  red- 
tail,  and   not  a  distinct  species.     In  Auk, 
VII,  p.  205.     (April,  1890.) 

345.  Further  notes  on  the  genus  Xiph- 
ocolaptes  of  Lesson.     In  Proc.   U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  July,  1890,  XIII,  pp.  47-48. 

346.  Junco  hyemalis  shufeldti   in  Mary- 
land.    In  Auk,  VII,  p.  289.     (July,  1890.) 

347.  A    yellow-crowned    Regulus    calen- 
dula.    In  Auk,  VII,  p.  292.     (July,  1890.) 

348.  Review     of     Allen's     'Birds     from 
Quito.'     In  Auk,  VII,  pp.  380-381.      (Oct. 
1890.) 

349.  Review  of  Allen's  'Birds  collected  in 
Bolivia.'     In  Auk,  VII,  pp.  381-382.     (Oct., 
1890.) 

350.  Review  of  Allen's   'The  genus   Cy- 
clprhis.'    In  Auk,  VII,  pp.  382-384.     (Oct., 
1890.) 

351.  Review  of  Allen's  'Descriptions  of 
new  South  American  birds.'     In  Auk,  VII, 
pp.  384-385.     (Oct.,  1890.) 

352.  Review  of  Allen's   'Individual   and 
seasonal  variation  in  the  genus  Elainea.'    In 
Auk,  VII,  pp.  385-386.     (Oct.,  1890.) 

353.  Review  of  Allen's  'The  Maximilian 
types  of   South  American  birds.'     In  Auk, 
VII,  pp.  386-387.     (Oct.,  1890.) 

354.  Observations   on    the   Farallon  rail 
(Porzana  jamaicensis   coturniculus   Baird). 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Nov.,  1890, 
XIII,  pp.  309-311. 

355.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds 
U.  S.  National  Museum,  for  1887-1888.     In 
Ann.  Rep.  Smithsonian  Institution   (Report 
of  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.)   for  1888   (1890),  pp. 
145-150. 

356.  Falco     dominicensis     Gmel.     versus 
Falco  sparverioides  Vig.     In  Auk,  VIII,  pp. 
113-114.      (Jan.,  1891.) 

357.  A  new   name  necessary  for   Selas- 
phorus  floresii  Gould.    In  Auk,  VIII,  p.  114. 
(Jan.,   1891.) 


334 


Ridgway  J 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


358.  Note  on   the  alleged   occurrence   of 
Trochilus  heloisa  (Less,  and  DeLatt.)  with- 
in the  North  American  limits.  In  Auk,  VIII, 
p.  115.      (Jan.,  1891.) 

359.  Cistothorus  marianse    (i.  e.  C.  gri- 
seus),   Buteo  lineatus  alleni,   and   Syrnium 
nebulosum  alleni,  in  South  Carolina. 

360.  Fulvous  tree  duck  in  Missouri.     In 
Forest  and  Stream,  XXXVI,  p.  435.     (June 
8.    1891.) 

301.  List  of  birds  collected  on  the  Ba- 
hama Islands  by  the  naturalists  of  the  Fish 
Commission  Steamer  Albatross.  In  Auk, 
VIII.  pp.  333-339.  (Oct.,  1891.) 

•"•t'.J.  Description  of  a  new  species  of 
Avijippoorwill  from  Costa  Rica.  In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1891,  pp.  465-466. 

303.  Notes  on  some  birds  from  the  in- 
terior of  Honduras.  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
.Mus.  for  Oct.,  1891,  XIV,  pp.  467-471. 

364.  Notes  on  some  Costa  Rican  birds. 
I,,    I'roc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1891, 
XIV.  pp.  473-478. 

365.  Note  on  Pachyrhamphus  albinucha, 
Burmeister.     In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
Oct.,    1891,   XIV,   pp.   479-480. 

366.  Description    of    two    supposed    new 
forms    of    Thamnophilus.      In    Proc.    U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1891,  XIV,  p.  481. 

367.  Description   of   a   new   sharp-tailed 
sparrow   from   California.     In  Proc.   U.    S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  Oct.,  1891,  XIV,  pp.  483-484. 

368.  Notes   on  the  genus   Sittasomus  of 
Swainson.     In  Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.  for 
Oct..    1891,    XIV,.  pp.    507-510. 

369.  Directions  for  collecting  birds.     In 
Part  A  of  Bull.   U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,   No.  39, 

370.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.  S.  National  Museum,  for  1888-1889.    In 
Ann.  Rep.  Smithsonian  Institution   (Report 
of  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.),  for  1888-1889  (1891), 
pp.  357-361. 

371.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.  S.  National  Museum,  for  1889-1890.     In 
Ann.  Rep.  Smithsonian  Institution   (Report 


of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum)    for  1889- 
1890  (1891),  pp.  195-198. 

372.  Zonotrichia  albicollis  in  California. 
In  Auk,  IX,  p.  302.      (July,  1892.) 

373.  Spring  arrivals  at  Washington,  D. 
C.    In  Auk,  IX,  pp.  307-308.     (July,  1892.) 

374.  The  humming  birds.    In  Rep.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  1890  (published  July,  1892), 
pp.  253-383,  plates  i-xlvi. 

375.  Descriptions  of  two  new  forms   of 
Basileuterus    rufifrons     from     Mexico.      In 
Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  July,  1892,  XV, 
p.  119. 

376.  The    systematic    position    of    hum- 
ming-birds.    Reply   to   Dr.   Shufeldt's   'Dis- 
cussion.'    In   Pop.    Sci.    News,   XXVI,   pp. 
164-165.      (Nov.,   1892.) 

377.  Shufeldt    on    the    anatomy    of    the 
humming  birds   and  swifts.     In  Am.   Nat., 
XXVI,  pp.  1040-1041.      (Dec.,  1892.) 

378.  Nocturnal  songsters,  and  other  bird- 
notes.      Science,   XX,   pp.   343-344.      (Dec. 
16,  1892.) 

379.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds. 
U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.   for   1890-1891.     In  Ann. 
Rep.    Smithsonian    Institution    (Report    of 
U.    S.   Nat.   Mus.),   for   1890-1891    (1892), 
pp.  207-211. 

380.  Destruction  of  crows  during  the  re- 
cent  cold   spell.      In   Science,   XXI,    p.    77, 
(Feb.  10,  1893.) 

381.  On   the   local   segregation   of   trees. 
In    Garden    and    Forest,    VI,    pp.    148-149. 
(March  29,  1893.) 

382.  The  American  plane  tree.    In  Mee- 
han's  Monthly,  for  May,  1893,  pp.  69-70. 

383.  Description    of    two   supposed    new 
species  of  swifts.    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  June,   1893,   XVI,  pp.  43-44. 

384.  Age  of  guano  deposits.    In  Science, 
XXI,  p.  360.      (June,  1893.) 

385.  Description  of  a  supposed  new  spe- 
cies of  Odontophorus   from  southern  Mex- 
ico.    In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.  for  July, 
1893,  XVI,  pp.  469-470. 

386.  Remarks  concerning  the  type-spec- 


335 


Indiana  University 


\_Ridgway 


imen  of  Malnooptila  fulginosa  Ridgway,  de- 
scribed on  pp.  572-573  of  the  same  paper  by 
Charles  W.  Richmond.  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  Oct.,  1893,  XVI,  p.  513. 

387.  Descriptions  of  some  new  birds  col- 
lected  on   the   islands   of   Aldabra   and   As- 
sumption, northwest  of  Madagascar,  by  Dr. 
W.   L.   Abbot.     In   Proc.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus. 
for  Oct..   1893,  XVI,  pp.  597-600. 

388.  Remarks  on  the  avian  gentis  Myiar- 
chus,  with  special  reference  to  M.  yucatan- 
en.sis  Lawrence.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  Oct.,   1893,  XVI,  pp.  605-608. 

389.  On  a  small  collection  of  birds  from 
Costa  Rica.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for 
Oct..  1893.  XVI,  pp.  609-614. 

390.  Scientific  results  of  explorations  by 
the  U.   S.  Fish  Commission   Steamer  Alba- 
tross.    (Published    by    permission    of    Hon. 
Marshall  McDonald,  Commissioner  of  Fish- 
eries.)     No.    XXVII — Catalogue   of   a   col- 
lection of  birds  made  in  Alaska  by  Mr.  C. 
H.  Townsend  during  the  cruise  of  the  U.  S. 
Fish  Commission  Steamer  Albatross,  in  the 
summer  and  autumn  of  1888.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.    Nat.    Mus.    for    Nov.,    1893,    XVI,    pp. 
663-665. 

391.  A  revision  of  the  genus  Formicarius 
Boddaert.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.   for 
Nov.,   1893,   Vol.   XVI,   pp.   667-686. 

392.  Description  of  a  new  storm  petrel 
from  the  coast  of  western  Mexico.     In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Nov.,  1893,  XVI,  pp. 
687-688. 

393.  Report  on  the  department  of  birds, 
U.   S.  Nat.   Mus.  for  1891-1892.     In  Ann. 
Rep.    Smithsonian    Institution     (Report    of 
U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.)    for    1891-1892    (1893), 
pp.   147-152. 

394.  Note  on  Rougetius  aldabranus.     In 
Auk,  XI,  p.  74.     (Jan.,  1894.) 

395.  Description    of    a    new    Geothlypis 
from   Brownsville,   Texas.     In  Proc.   U.    S. 
Nat.   Mus.   for   Feb.,   1894,   XVI,   pp.  691- 
692. 

396.  On  geographical  variation  in  Sialia 


mexicana  Swainson.     In  Auk,  XI,  pp.  145- 
160.     (April,  1894.) 

397.  Description  of  Pipilo  orizabse  Cox. 
In  Auk,  XI,  p.  161.     (April,  1894.) 

398.  Picicorvus  an  untenable  genus.     In 
Auk,  XI,  p.  179.      (April,  1894.; 

399.  Geographical    versus    sexual    varia- 
tions in  Oreortyx  pictus.     In  Auk,  XI,  pp. 
193-197,  6  plates.     (July,  1894.) 

400.  Colinus  virginianus  cubanensis   not 
a    Florida    bird.       In    Auk,     XI,    p.    324. 
(Oct.,  1894.) 

401.  We,  also,   take  exceptions.     In   Ni- 
dologist,   II,   p.   29.      (Oct.,   1894.) 

402.  Descriptions  of  twenty-two  new  spe- 
cies  of   birds   from   the   Galapagos    Islands. 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  Nov.,  1894, 
XVII,  pp.  357-370. 

403.  Descriptions    of    some    new    birds 
from    Aldabra,    Assumption,    and    Gloriosa 
Islands,    collected    by    Dr.    W.    L.    Abbott. 
In  Proc.   U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.,  for  Nov.,  1894, 
XVII,  pp.  371-373. 

404.  Additional  notes  of  the  trees  of  the 
lower  Wabash  Valley.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.  for  Jan.,  1895,  XVII,  pp.  409-421,  5 
plates. 

405.  Letter     to     the     editor     concerning 
nearly  total  annihilation  of  bluebirds  in  the 
District   of   Columbia  by   the   "blizzard"   of 
February  7-9,  1895.     In  Christian  Register, 
for  May,  1895,  p.  301. 

406.  On  Fisher's  petrel   (^strelata  foh- 
eri).      In    Auk,    XII,    pp.- 319-322,    pi.    Iv. 
(October,  1895.) 

407.  On  the  correct  subspecific  names  of 
the  Texan   and   Mexican  screech   owls.      In 
Auk,  XII,  pp.  389-390.     (Oct.,  1895.) 

408.  Junco    phsponotus    Wagler,    not    J. 
cinereus     (Swainson).      In    Auk,    XII.    p. 
391.      (Oct.,  1895.) 

409.  Nesting  of  the  duck  hawk  in  trees. 
In  Nidologijrt,  III,  pp.  42-44.     (Dec.,  1895.) 

410.  A  manual  of  North  American  birds. 
Philadelphia,    1887.      Pp.    i-xi ;    1-631:    123 
plates.      Second   edition   revised,    with    uew 


336 


Ridgway  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


preface   and  appendix.     Philadelphia,   1896.       tris  Stejneger.    In  Cat.  Birds  Brit.  Mus.  for 


Pp.  i-xiii ;  1-653  ;  123  plates. 

411.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
ground   warbler   from   eastern   Mexico.      In 
Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.    for    April,    1896, 
XVIII,  pp.  119-120. 

412.  Preliminary    descriptions    of    some 
new  birds  from  the  Galapagos  archipelago. 
In  Proc.  U.   S.   Nat.  Mus.  for  April,  1896, 
XVIII,  pp.  293-294. 

413.  Letter  to  the  editor  and  publisher  of 
The  Nidologist  concerning  his  contemplated 
return  to  California.     In  Nidologist,  III,  p. 
98.     (May,  1896.) 

414.  Description  of  a  new  subspecies  of 
the  genus  Peucedramus,  Coues.     In  Proc.  U. 
S.  Nat.  Mus.  for  May,  1896,  XVIII,  p.  441. 

415.  Characters     of     a     new     American 
family  of  Passerine  birds.     In  Proc.  U.   S. 
Nat.  Mus.  for  June,  1896,  XVIII,  pp.  449- 
450. 

416.  On   birds   collected   by    Dr.    W.    L. 
Abbot  in  the   Seychelles,  Amirantes,   Glori- 
osa,     Assumption,     Aldabra     and     adjacent 
islands,  with  notes   on   habits,   etc.,   by   the 
collector.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat.    Mus.   for 
June,  1896,  XVIII,  pp.  509-546. 

417.  Description  of  Oceanodroma  macro- 
dactyla     (Bryant).      In    Cat.    Birds,    Brit. 
Mus.  for  1896,  XXV,  p.  351. 

418.  Description  of  Oceanodroma  socor- 
roensis  Townsend.    In  Cat.  Birds  Brit.  Mus. 
for  1896,  XXV,  p.  352. 

419.  Description  of  Oceanodroma  tristra- 
mi  Stejneger.     In  Cat.  Birds  Brit.  Mus.  for 
1896,  XXV,  pp.  354-355. 

420.  Results   of  comparison   of   a  speci- 
men of  ^strelata  affinis   (Buller)   with  the 
type  of  M.  gularis    (Peale)   and  IE.  fisheri 
Ridgway.      In    Cat.    Birds    Brit.    Mus.    for 
1896,  XXV,  p.  415. 

421.  Comparative  characters   of  JEstrel- 
ata      fisheri      Ridgway      and      2E.      gularis 

(Peale).      In    Cat.    Birds    Brit.    Mus.    for 
1896,  XXV,  pp.  415-4-6. 

422.  Description   of   ^Estrelata   longiros- 

(23)  337 


1896,  XXV,  p.  418. 

423.  Letter  to  Dr.  G.  Brown  Goode  con- 
cerning the  writer's  opinion  of  the  services 
to  ornithology  of  the  eminent  ornithologist, 
Dr.  P.  L.  Sclater.     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
for  1896,  No.  49,  pp.  xviii-xix. 

424.  List  of  private  collections  of  birds 
containing  over  1,000  specimens  which  have 
been  presented  at  various  times  to  the  U.  S. 
Nat.   Mus.     In   Rep.   U.   S.   Nat.   Mus.   for 
1893-4,  pp.  48-49.     (1896.) 

425.  Melopelia     leucoptera     in     Osceola 
county,  Florida.     In  Auk,  XIV,  pp.  88-89. 
(Jan.,  189Y.) 

426.  Note  on  Junco  annectens  Baird  and 
J.  ridgwayi  Mearus.     In  Auk,  XIV,  p.  94. 
(Jan.,  1897.) 

427.  Correct  nomenclature  of  the  Texas 
cardinal.     In    Auk,    XIV,     p.    95.       (Jan., 
1897.) 

428.  Dendroica    caerulea     vs.     Dendroica 
rara.     In  Auk,  XIV,  p.  97.      (Jan.,  1897.) 

429.  Birds  of  the  Galapagos  archipelago. 
In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus.   for   1897,  XIX, 
pp.  459-670. 

430.  Where  Junco  roosts.     In  Bull.  Wil- 
son   Orn.    Chapt.    Agassiz    Assn.    for    May, 

1897,  pp.  25-26. 

431.  Description  of  the  nest  and  eggs  of 
Bachman's  warbler.     In  Auk,  XIV,  pp.  309- 
310.     (July,  1897.) 

432.  An  earlier  name  for  Ammodramus 
lecontei.     In    Auk,    XIV,    p.    320.      (July, 
1897.) 

433.  On   the   status   of   Lanius   robustus 
Baird  as  a  North  American  bird.     In  Auk, 
XIV,  p.  323.     (July,  1897). 

434.  Review  of   Chapman's   'Bird   Life.' 
In  Auk,  XIV,  pp.  336-338.     (July,  1897.) 

435.  Remarks      concerning       Megascops 
pinosus  Nelson  and  Palmer.     In  Biol.  Cent. 
Amer.  Aves.,  Ill,  p.  17.     (Nov.,  1897.) 

436.  An      amateur's      experiment.        In 
Garden  and  Forest  for  1897,  pp.  504-507. 


Indiana  University 


[Ridgway 


437.  Birds  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.     In 
Am.    Nat.,    XXXII,    pp.    386-389.       (May, 
1898.) 

438.  Descriptions  of  supposed  new  gen- 
era,   species    and    subspecies    of    American 
birds.      I.      Fringillidse.     In  Auk,    XV,   pp. 
223-230.     (July,  1898.) 

439.  New  species  of  American  birds.    II. 
Fringillidre    (continued).     In  Auk,  XV,  pp. 
319-324.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

440.  Description  of  new  species  of  hum- 
ming bird  from  Arizona.     In  Auk,  XV,  pp. 
325-326.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

441.  Hemithraupis.      A     correction.      In 
Auk,  XV,  pp.  330-331.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

442.  The     home    of    the     ivory-bill.     In 
Osprey,  III,  pp.  35-36.     (Nov.,  1898.) 

443.  New    species    of    American    birds. 
Fringillidae   (continued).     In  Auk,  XVI,  pp. 
35-37.     (Jan.,  1897.) 

444.  On  the  genus  Astragalinus  cabanis. 
In  Auk,  XVI,  pp.  79-80.      (Jan.,  1899.) 

445.  On    the    generic    name    Aimophila 
versus   Peucsea.      In  Auk,   XVI,   pp.   80-81. 
(Jan.,  1899.) 

446.  A    fraud — look    out    for    him.     In 
Osprey,  III,  p.  94.      (Feb.,  1899.) 

447.  New  species  of  American  birds.   IV. 
Fringillida?     (concluded).      In    Auk,    XVI, 
pp.  254-256.     (July,  1899.) 

448.  New  species  of  American  birds.    V. 
Corvidse    (concluded).      In  Auk,  XVII,  pp. 
27-29.      (Jan.,  1900.) 

449.  New  species  of  American  birds.   VI. 
Fringillidse    (supplement).      In  Auk,  XVII, 
pp.  29-30.      (Jan.,  1900.) 

450.  Concerning    the    use     of    scientific 
names.      In    Condor,    II,    p.    41.       (March, 
1900.) 

451.  Song   birds   of   Europe   and   Amer- 
ica.    In   Bird-Lore,   II,  pp.   69-75.      (June, 
1900.) 

452.  Description  of  Buteo  borealis  socor- 
roensis.     In    Biol.    Cent.    Amer.    Aves,    for 
Nov.,  1900,  III,  p.  64. 


453.  New    birds    of   the    families    Tana- 
gridn>  and  leteridir.     In  Proc.  Wash.  Acad. 
Sci.  for  April,  1901,  III,  pp.  149-155. 

454.  Descriptions  of  three  new  birds  of 
the  families   Mniotiltidsc  and   Corvidse.     In 
Auk,  XIX,  pp.  69-70.     (Jan.,  1902.) 

455.  The    birds    of    North    and    Middle 
America.     Part   I.     Washington,   1901,   pp. 
i-xxx,  1-715,  19  plates.     Part  II.     Washing- 
ton, 1902,  pp.  i-xx,  1-834,  22  plates. 

456.  The    elf    owl     in    California.       In 
Condor,  IV,  pp.  18-19.     (Jan.,  1902.) 

457.  Review   of   Pycraft's   'Classification 
of   the   Falcon  if  ormes.'     In   Science,   N.    S., 
XVII,  pp.  509-511.     (March,  1903.) 

458.  Leophophanes     vs.     Baeolophus.     In 
Auk,  XX,  p.  308.     (July,  1903. > 

459.  Descriptions  of  new  genera,  species 
and  subspecies  of  American  birds.     In  Proc. 
Biol.  Soc.  Wash,  for  Sept.,  1903.    Vol.  XVI, 
pp.  105-111. 


DAVID    ANDREW    ROTHBOCK,    A.B.    (1892), 
A.M.    (1893),  Ph.D.     Sec  Faculty  list. 


EDWAKD  EARNEST  RUBY,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
Tutor  in  Greek,  1897-1898;  Tutor  in 
French,  1898-1899;  Instructor  in 
French,  1901-1902.  Now  Professor  of 
Latin,  Whitman  College,  Walla  Walla, 
Wash. 

1.  Register  of  graduates  of  the   Indi- 
ana University,  including  advanced  and  hon- 
orary   degrees.     Third    edition.      Blooming- 
ton,  Ind.,  1901.     Pp.  112. 

2.  The    catalogue    of    the    Phi    Delta 
Theta  fraternity.    Seventh  edition.    Chicago, 
1904.     Pp.  xvi,  650  ;   1  plate. 


HENRY    WOLDMAN    RUOFF,    A.B.     (1890), 
D.C.L. 

1.     Origin  of  the  family  ;    ethical  duties 
of  the  home ;  the  home  and  the  state ;  the 


338 


Shinn^ 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


home  in  literature.  Chapters  contributed  to 
'Our  Home.'  Springfield,  Mass.,  1898.  Pp. 
98. 

2.  The  century  book  of  facts.     Spring- 
field, 1899.    Pp.  688  ;   8  plates. 

3.  Woman     during    the    Dark    Ages ; 
woman    under    medieval     institutions ;     the 
dawn  of  woman's  power.     Chapters  contrib- 
uted  to   'Woman.'      Springfield,   1900.      Pp. 
121 ;    17  plates. 

4.  Leaders  of  men.     Springfield,  1901. 
Pp.  695  ;   33  plates. 

5.  The  capitals  of  the  world.     Spring- 
field,   1902.      Vol.    I,   pp.   414;   vol.    II,   pp. 
532 ;  800  plates. 

6.  Universal    manual    of    ready    refer- 
ence.     Springfield,   1904.     Vol.   I,    pp.   741 ; 
5  plates. 

7.  One      hundred      immortals.        New 
York.     (In  press.) 


grammar  and  analysis,  with  diagrams.     Con- 
nersville,  Ind.,  1891.     Pp.  269. 


NEWELL    SANDERS,    B.S.    (1873).      Chatta- 
nooga, Tenn. 

1.     Wendell   Sanders.     1893.     Pp.  112; 
37  plates. 


THOMAS  E  SANDERS,  A.B.  (1895).  Super- 
intendent of  Schools,  Batesville,  Ark. 
(After  July  1,  1904,  Editor  Progressive 
Teacher. ) 

1.  Opening      exercises      for      schools. 
Batesville,  Ark.,  1901.     Pp.  150. 

2.  A  guide  to  the  study  of  literature  in 
our  schools.     Batesville,  Ark.,  1903.     Pp.  56. 

3.  Students'   and  teachers'   aid   to  the 
study  of  civil  government.     Batesville,  Ark., 
1904.     Pp.  136. 


WILLIAM  FRANCIS  LEWIS  SANDERS,  A.B. 
(1873).  Teacher  in  High  School,  Con- 
nersville,  Ind. 

1.     The  English  sentence,  a  treatise  on 
(24) 


GEORGE  L  SCHERGER,  A.B.  (1894),  Ph.D. 
Professor  of  History,  Armour  Institute 
of  Technology,  Chicago. 

1.     The    evolution    of    modern    liberty. 
New  York,  1904.     Pp.  xiv,  284. 


JOHN  ANDREW  SHAFER,  A.B.   (1894),  A.M. 
(1895).     Valparaiso,  Ind. 

1.  Hygiene  of  school  architecture.  Tn 
Inland  Educator,  III,  pp.  311-312  (Jan., 
1897)  ;  IV,  pp.  20-23  (Feb.,  1897)  ;  IV,  pp. 
75-78  (March,  1897). 


JOHN  WILKES  SHEPHERD,  A.B.  (1896), 
A.M.  (1898).  Professor  of  Chemistry, 
Chicago  Normal  School,  Chicago,  111. 

1.  The  determination  of  methane,  car- 
bon monoxide,  and  hydrogen  by  explosion  in 
technical  gas  analysis.  (Joint  author  with 
W.  A.  Noyes.)  In  Jour.  Am.  Chem.  Soc., 
XX,  pp.  343-348. 


EVERETT  SHEPARDSON,  A.B.  (1890),  A.M. 
(1892.)  Assistant  Professor  of  Psychol- 
ogy and  Pedagogy,  Los  Angeles  State 
Normal,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

1.  Should  fairy  stories  and  folk  tales 
be  used  in  first  and  second  grades?  In  Los 
Angeles  State  Normal  Exponent,  IV,  pp. 
150-158.  (Jan.,  1896.) 


FREDERICK  LAFAYETTE  SIIINN,  A.B.  (1901), 
A.M.  (1902).  Assistant  in  Physical 
Chemistry,  University  of  Wisconsin, 
Madison,  Wis. 

1.     The    quantitative    determination    of 
selenium  in  organic  compounds.     (Joint  au- 


Indiana  University 


\_Shi 


inn 


thor    with    H.    E.    Lyons.)      In    Jour.    Am.       stone  of  southeastern  Indiana.    In  '2~tt\\  Ann. 


Chem.  Soo.,  XXIV,  pp.  1087-1093. 

2.  On  double  and  triple  thiocyanates 
of  caesium,  cobalt,  and  silver.  (Joint  au- 
thor with  II.  L.  Wells.)  In  Am.  Chem. 
Jour.,  XXIX,  pp.  474-478. 


CLAUDE  E.  SIEBENTHAL.  Student,  1890-93. 
Assistant,  U.  S.  Geological  Survey, 
Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  The  geology  of  Dallas  county,  Ar- 
kansas.   In  Ann.  Kept.  Arkansas  Geol.  Surv. 
for  1891,  II,  pp.  279-318.     (1894.) 

2.  The  Bedford  oolitic  limestone  of  In- 
diana.    (Joint  author  with  T.  C.  Hopkins.) 
In  21st   Ann.   Kept.   Dept.   Geol.   and   Nat. 
Res.    of    Indiana    for    1896,    pp.    291-413. 
(1897.) 

3.  The  Bedford  oolitic  limestone.     In 
19th  Ann.  Kept.  U.  S.  Geol.   Surv.,  pt.  VI 

(  continued  )  ,  pp.  292-296.     (  1898.  ) 

4.  The  Bedford  oolitic  limestone.     In 
Mineral   Industry   for   1898,   vol.   VIII,   pp. 
479-482.     (1899.) 

5.  The  coal  deposits  of  Indiana.  (Joint 
author  with  W.  S.  Blatchley,  G.  H.  Ashby, 
and  others.)     In  23d  Ann.  Kept.  Dept.  Geol. 
-and  Nat.  Res.  of  Indiana  for  1898,  pp.   1- 
1741.     (1899.) 

6.  Review    of   24th    annual    report    of 
the  Department  of  Geology  and  Natural  Re- 
•sources  of  Indiana.     In  Jour.  Geol.,   VIII, 
pp.  475-477.     (1900.) 

7.  On    the   use   of   the    term    Bedford 
limestone.     In  Jour.  Geol.,  IX,  pp.  234-235. 


8.  Review  of  25th  annual  report  of  the 
Department    of    Geology    and    Natural    Re- 
sources of  Indiana.     In  Jour.  Geol.,  IV,  pp. 
354-356.     (1901.) 

9.  Review  of  William  Battle  Phillips's 
'Texas  Petroleum.'     In  Jour.  Geol.,  IX,  pp. 
637-638.     (1901.) 

10.     The    Silver    Creek    hydraulic    lime- 


Rept.  Dept.  Geol.  and  Nat.  Res.  of  Indiana, 
pp.  331-389;  pis.  xiii-xiv,  (igs.  Ixxi-lxxii. 
(1901.) 

11.  The  Indiana  oolitic  industry  in 
1900.  In  25th  Ann.  Rept.  Dept.  Geol.  and 
Nat.  Res.  of  Indiana,  pp.  390-393.  (1901.) 


FRANK  DARIUS  SIMONS,  A.B.  (1895),  M.S. 
Assistant  Chemist,  Bureau  Internal 
Revenue,  U.  S.  Treasury  Department, 
Washington,  D.  O. 

1.  The  action  of  certain  bodies  on  the 
digestive    ferments.      In    Jour.    Am.    Chem. 
Soc.,  XIX,  pp.  744-754. 

2.  Detection  of  caramel  in  spirits  and 
vinegar.      (Joint  author  with  C.  A.  Cramp- 
ton.)     In  Jour.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.,  XXI,  pp. 
355-358. 

3.  Detection  of  foreign  coloring  matter 
in  spirits.     (Joint  author  with  C.  S.  Cramp- 
ton.)     In  Jour.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.,  XXII,  pp. 
810-813.     1  plate. 

4.  Synthetic  chemicals  under  the  War 
Revenue    Act.      (Joint   author   with   C.    A. 
Crampton.)      In  Am.  Jour.  Phar.,  LXXI1, 
p.  107. 


VESTO  MAXVIN  SLIPHER,  A.B.  (1901),  A.M. 
(1902).  Assistant  in  charge  of  Lowell 
Observatory,  Flagstaff,  Ariz. 

1.  Spectrograms  of  Jupiter.     In  Pop. 
Ast.,   No.    101,   pp.    1-4;    2   plates.      (Jan., 
1903.) 

2.  The  spectroscopic  binary   /?  Scorpii. 
In  Lowell   Observatory   Bull.,   No.   1,  p.   4. 
(June,  1903.) 

3.  A    spectrographic    investigation    of 
the    rotation    velocity    of    Venus.      In    Ast. 
Nach.,  Nos.  3891-3892,  pp.  35-52.     (August, 
1903.) 

4.  On    the    efficiency    of    the    spectro- 
graph   for   investigating  planetary   rotations 


340 


Sparling  ] 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


and  on  the  accuracy  of  the  inclination 
method  of  measurement.  Tests  on  the  rota- 
tion of  the  planet  Mars.  In  Lowell  Observ- 
atory Bull.,  No.  4,  pp.  19-23.  (August, 
1903.) 

5.  Variable  velocity  of  'k  Scorpii  in 
the  line  of  sight.  In  Lowell  Observatory 
Bull.,  No.  4,  p.  23.  (August,  1903.) 


FREDERICK  MILLER  SMITH,  A.B.  (1899). 
Associate  Editor  Woman's  Home  Com- 
panion, New  York  City. 

1.  Thoreau.     In  Critic,  XXXVII,  pp. 
60-67.      (July,  1900.) 

2.  The    literary    aspirant    again.      In 
Critic,  XXXIX,  pp.  270-272.    (Sept.,  1901.) 

3.  Christine :    a    serial    novelette.      In 
Ladies'   Home   Journal.      (Nov.,    1901-Feb., 
1902. )     Illustrated. 

4.  Review  of  Robert  Louis  Stevenson's 
'Essays.'      In    Poet-Lore,    XIV,    pp.    70-83. 
(Oct.,  1902.) 

5.  The    trilemma     of    Albertine.       In 
Woman's  Home  Companion, '1903-1904. 


ROSA    SMITH.      See    Mrs.    Carl    H.    Eigen- 
mann. 


WILLIAM  WESLEY  SPANGLER,  A.B.  (1880), 
B.S.  (1880),  A.M.  (1886.)  Librarian, 
1881-1893.  Auburn  Junction,  Ind. 

1.     Genealogy  of  the  Weyer  family   in 
Germany.     Bloomington,  Ind.,  1886. 


SAMUEL  EDWIN  SPARLING,  A.B.  (1892), 
Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of  Political 
Science,  University  of  Wisconsin,  Mad- 
ison, Wis. 

1.  Municipal  history  and  present  or- 
ganization of  Chicago.  In  Bull.  Univ.  of 
Wisconsin,  Madison,  1898.  Pp.  188. 


2.  The     small     city     and     the     model 
charter.     In   Proc.   Nat.   Municipal   League 
for  1899,  pp.  15. 

3.  Uniform  accounting  for  cities.     In 
Proc.  Nat.  Municipal  League  for  1899,  pp. 
15. 

4.  Uniform   accounting  for  Wisconsin 
cities.     In  Bull.   League  of  Wisconsin  Mu- 
nicipalities, No.  3,  1899. 

5.  Notes     on     municipal     government. 
(League  of  Wisconsin  Municipalities.)      In 
Ann.   Am.  Acad.  Pol.   and   Soc.   Sci.,  XIII, 
pp.  269-270.     (1899.) 

6.  Review  of  Frank  Parson's  'The  City 
for  the  people.'     In   Municipal  Affairs,  IV, 
pp.  405-406.     (1900.) 

7.  Notes  on  municipal  government.    In 
Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci.,  XIV,  pp. 
lld-m.     (1901.) 

8.  Responsible  county  government.    In 
Pol.  Sci.  Quart.,  XVI,  pp.  437-449.     (1901.) 

9.  State  boards   of   control.     In  Ann. 
Am.    Acad.    Pol.    and   Soc.    Sci.,   XVII,   pp. 
74-91.     (1901.) 

10.  Syllabus  on  municipal  government. 
In    Pub.    Nat.    Municipal    League.      Second 
Report  of  Committee  on  Instruction  in  Mu- 
nicipal   Government    in    American    Educa- 
tional Institutions,  June,  1902. 

11.  Chicago's   voters'   league.      In   Out- 
look, LXXI,  pp.  495-498.      (June,  1902.) 

12.  Municipal  history  and  organization 
of    Chicago.      In    Bull.    No.    29.      Pol.    Sci. 
Series.     University  of  Wisconsin. 

13.  Municipal  conditions  in  Wisconsin. 
In  Ann.  Am.  Acad.  Pol.  and  Soc.  Sci.    (Feb., 
1904.) 

14.  An  American  Political  Science  As- 
sociation.    In  Review  of  Reviews,   XXIX, 
pp.  212-213.     (Feb.,  1904.) 

15.  The  work  of  the  league  of  Wiscon- 
sin municipalities.     In  Proc.  Mich.  Pol.  Sci. 
Asso.,  Feb.,  1904. 

16.  History  of  the  league  of  Wisconsin 
municipalities.     In  Iowa   Hist.  Rev.,  April, 
1904. 


Indiana  University 


\_Sparling 


17..  Editor  of  'The  Municipality,'  a 
monthly  journal  devoted  to  the  discussion  of 
municipal  questions.  In  its  fourth  year. 


WILLIAM  MCKENDREE  SPRINGER,  A.B. 
(1858),  A.M.  (1861),  LL.D.  Washing- 
ton, D.  C. 

1.  The    telegraph    monopoly.     In    No. 
Am.   Rev.,  CXXXII,   pp.  369-382.      (April, 
1881.) 

2.  Gold    and    silver :     what    shall    the 
ratio  be?     In  No.  Am.  Rev.,  CLV,  pp.  4-6. 
(July,  1892.) 

3.  Why  the  Democrats  should  elect  the 
next  President.     In  Arena,  VI,  pp.  198-201. 
(July,  1892.) 

4.  How   to   revise   the  tariff.      In   No. 
Am.  Rev.,  CLVI,  pp.  127-135.     (Feb.,  1893.) 

5.  The  financial  muddle.   (Joint  author 
with  J.  Sterling  Morton  and  Henry  W.  Can- 
non.)    In  No.  Am.  Rev.,  CLX,  pp.  129-156. 
(Feb.,  1895.) 


EDWIN  DLLLER  STARBUCK,  A.B.  (1890), 
Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of  Educa- 
tion, Leland  Stanford  Jr.  University, 
Stanford  University,  Cal. 

1.  A    study    of    conversion.      In    Am. 
Jour.    Psych.,    VIII,    pp.    268-308.       (Jan., 
1897.) 

2.  Some   aspects    of   religious   growth. 
In  Am.  Jour.  Psych.,  IX,  pp.  70-124.     (Oct., 
1897.) 

3.  Child  study  and  its  possibilities  as 
a  science.     In    Northwestern    Mo.,   IX,   pp. 
358-362.      (March- April,  1899.) 

4.  The   psychology   of   religion.      With 
an  introduction  by  Professor  William  James. 
London,  1899.     Pp.  xx,  423. 


WARDER  W  STEVENS,  LL.B.  (1867).   Salem, 
Ind. 

1.  Swine      husbandry.        Indianapolis, 
1899.  Pp.  200. 

2.  History  of  Washington  county,  Ind. 
1904.  Pp.  600.     (In  press.) 


ELMER  BRYAN  STEWART,  A.B.  Pastor 
Third  United  Presbyterian  Church,  Chi- 
cago. 

1.  The    tithe.       Chicago,     1903.       Pp. 
xxii,  82. 

2.  The  tithe  covenant  plan  for  financ- 
ing the  Kingdom  of  Christ.     Chicago,  1903. 
Pp.  15. 


JOHN  CHARLES  STONE,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
(1897).  Associate  Professor  of  Mathe- 
matics, State  Normal  School,  Y'psilanti, 

Mich. 

1.  Algebra  by  correspondence.     (Joint 
author  with  E.  A.  Lyinan.)     Chicago,  1902. 
Pp.  100. 

2.  Geometry  by  correspondence.   (Joint 
author  with  E.  A.  Lyman.)     Chicago,  1902. 
Pp.  100. 

3.  Monograph  on   teaching  arithmetic. 
Boston,  1903.     Pp.  25. 

4.  Southworth-Stone  arithmetic.  (Joint 
author   with   G.    S.    Southworth.)      Boston, 
1904.     Book  I,  pp.  184;  book  II,  pp.  237; 
book  III,  pp.  287. 

5.  Monograph  on  method  in  geometry. 
Boston,  1904.     Pp.  36. 


EDGAR  HOWARD  STURTEVANT,  A.B.  (1898), 
Ph.D.  Tutor  in  Latin,  1895-1898,  In- 
structor in  Latin,  1901-1902.  Now 
Acting  Assistant  Professor  of  Latin, 
University  of  Missouri,  Columbia.  Mo. 

1.     Contraction  in  the  case  forms  of  the 


342 


Swain  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


Latin  to  and  ia  stems,  and  of  deus,  is,  and 
idem.    Chicago,  1902.    Pp.  36. 

2.     Latin  rs  from  rss.     In  Clas.  Rev., 
XVIII,  1904. 


JOSEPH  SWAIN,  B.L.  (1883),  M.S.  (1895), 
LL.D.  Instructor  in  Mathematics  and 
Zoology,  Indiana  University,  1883-1885  ; 
Professor  of  Mathematics,  1886-1891; 
President  of  the  University,  1893-1902. 
Now  President  of  Swarthmore  College, 
Swarthmore,  Pa. 

1.  Notes  on  a  collection  of  fishes  from 
Johnston's  Island,  including  descriptions  of 
five  new  species.      (Joint  author  with  Rosa 
Smith. )     In  Proc.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  119-143. 
(1882.) 

2.  A    review    of    the    Syngnathinae    of 
the    United    States,    with    a    description    of 
one  new  species.     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus. 
V,  pp.  307-315.     (Aug.  15,  1882.) 

3.  A   review   of   the   species   of   Stole- 
phorus.  found  on  the  Atlantic  coast  of  the 
United  States,     In  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm. 
for  1882,  II,  pp.  55-57.     (Oct.  6,  1882.) 

4.  A  review  of   Swainson's  genera   of 
fishes.     /H   Proc.   Acad.   Nat.   Sci.   Philadel- 
phia for  1882,  pp.  272-284. 

5.  An   identification  of  the  species   of 
fishes  described  in  Shaw's  General  Zoology. 
In   Proc.    Acad.    Nat.    Sci.   Philadelphia  for 
1882.    Pp.  303-309. 

6.  A  review  of  the  genus  Noturus,  with 
a  description  of  one  new  species.  (Joint 
author  with  George  B.  Kalb. )  In  Proc. 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  V,  pp.  638-644.  (May  23, 
1883.) 

7.  List  of  fishes  collected  in  the  Clear 
Fork  of  the  Cumberland,  Whitley  county, 
Kentucky,  with  description  of  three  new 
species.  (Joint  author  with  David  Stan- 
Jordan.)  In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VI, 
pp.  248-251.  (Nov.  27,  1883.) 


8.  Description    of    a    new    species    of 
Hadropterus     (Hadropterus    scierus)     from 
southern    Indiana.      In    Proc.    U.    S.    Nat. 
Mus.,  VI,  p.  252.      (Nov.  27,  1883.) 

9.  Descriptions  of  Scaroid  fishes  from 
Havana  and  Key  West,  Fla.,  including  five 
new  species.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.   U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp. 
81-102.     (July  1,  1884.) 

10.  Notes  on   fishes  collected  by  D.   S. 
Jordan,    Cedar    Keys,    Fla.      (Joint   author 
with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.   U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  VII,  pp.  230-234.     (August  5,  1884.) 

11.  Notes    on    the    pipe-fishes    of    Key 
West,  Fla.,  with  description  of  Siphostoma 
McKayi,  a  new  species.     (Joint  author  with 
Seth  E.  Meek.)-    In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
VII,  pp.  -37-239.      (August  5,  1884.) 

12.  A  review   of  the  American  species 
of    marine    Mugilidae.      (Joint    author    with 
D.   S.  Jordan.)      In  Proc.  U.   S.  Nat.  Mus., 
VII,  pp.  261-275.     (August  22,  1884.) 

13.  A  review  of  the  species  of  the  genus 
Efemulon.      (Joint   author  with   D.    S.    Jor- 
dan.)     In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp. 
281-317.     (August  28,  1884.) 

14.  A  review  of  the  American  species  of 
Epinephalus  and  related  genera.     (Joint  au- 
thor with  D.   S.  Jordan.)      In   Proc.   U.   S. 
Nat.   Mus.,  VII,   pp.   358-410.      (1884.) 

15.  A  review  of  the  species  of  Lutjan- 
in?e   and   Hoplopagrina?   found    in   American 
waters.     (Joint  author  with  D.  S.  Jordan.) 
In  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  VII,  pp.  427-474. 
(Sept.  19,  1884.) 

16.  Inaugural  address  at  Indiana  Uni- 
versity.   1893.      Published   by   Indiana   Uni- 
versity, July,  1893. 

17.  The     State    University.       In    17th 
Bien.  Rep.   Sup.  Pub.  Inst,  Dec.  27,  1893, 
p.  111. 

18.  What  should  the  high  school  do  for 
the  graduate  of  the  elementary  schools?     In 
Proc.   Nat.   Educ.  Asso.  for   1896,   pp.  362- 


343 


Indiana  University 


[_Swait 


19.  University  ideals  at  Stanford.     In 
Proc.  Nat.  Educ.  Asso.  for  1897,  pp.  366- 
373. 

20.  College  entrance  requirements.      In 
Proc.  Nat.   Educ.   Asso.  for  1899,  pp.  630, 
827. 

21.  The    State    University.      In    Proc. 
Nat.  Educ.  Asso.  for  1900,  p.  106. 

22.  State    aid    to    higher    education    in 
Europe  and  America.     In  Proc.  Nat.  Educ. 
Asso.  for  1900,  p.  457. 

23.  Inaugural    address    at    Swarthmore 
College.     Published  by  Swarthmore  College, 
Dec.,  1902,  pp.  457-463. 

24.  Address  to  Alumni  of  Swarthmore 
College,    1903.      Published    by    Swarthmore 
College,  July,  1903,  pp.  1-8. 

Numerous    other    short    papers    and    ad- 
dresses published  in  various  years. 


10.  Articles  on  pedagogy.  In  Indiana 
Sch.  Jour,  monthly  from  1890-1899;  articles 
in  school  journals,  at  various  times,  on 
pedagogical  subjects. 


ARNOLD  TOMPKINS,  A.B.  (1889),  A.M. 
(1892),  Ph.D.  Principal  of  the  Chi- 
cago JNormal  School,  Chicago. 

1.  A  graded  course  of  study.     Frank- 
lin, Ind.,  1883.     Pp.  iii,  242. 

2.  The   philosophy   of  teaching.     Bos- 
ton, 1895.     Pp.  xii,  280. 

3.  The   philosophy   of  school   manage- 
ment.   Boston,  1895.    Pp.  xiv,  222. 

4.  The  relation  of  sociology  and  peda- 
gogy.    In  Am.  Jour.  Soc.  for  Nov.,  1895. 

5.  Literary    interpretations.      Boston, 

1896.  Pp.  vi,  204. 

6.  The  science  of  discourse.      Boston, 

1897.  Pp.  xiv,  252. 

7.  Review    of    Vincent's    'The    social 
mind   and   education.'      In    Am.   Jour.    Soc. 
(1897.) 

8.  Herbart's   philosophy   and   his   edu- 
cational  theory.      In   Educ.   Rev.,  XVI,  pp. 
233-243.     (Oct.,  1898.) 

9.  Review  of  J.  O.  Quantz's  'Problems 
in    the   psychology    of   reading.'      In    Educ. 
Rev.,  XVI,  pp.  513-517.     (Dec.,  1898). 


FREDERICK  WILSON  TRUSCOTT,  A.B.  (1891), 
A.M.  (1892),  Ph.D.  Instructor  in 
German,  1891-1893.  Now  Professor  of 
Germanic  Languages  and  Literature, 
West  Virginia  University,  Morgantown, 
W.  Va. 

1.  Laplace's     essay     on     probabilities. 
(Joint  translator  with  F.  L.  Emory.)    New 
York,  1902.    Pp.  iv,  196. 

2.  Wildenbruch's  Kinderthriinen.    New 
York,    1904.      Pp.    iii,   90.      2   plates.      (In 
press. ) 


ALBERT  BRENNUS  ULREY,  A.B.  (1892), 
A.M.  (1893).  Instructor  in  Zoology, 
1892-1894.  Now  Professor  of  Biology 
University  of  Southern  California,  Los 
Angeles,  Cal. 

1.  A     review     of     the     Embiotocidse. 
(Joint   author   with   Carl    H.    Eigenmann.) 
In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.    for   1891,   p. 
176  (abstract)  ;  in  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm. 
for  1892,  pp.  381-400. 

2.  Notes     on     the    American     bittern 
(Botaurus    lentiginosus).      In   Ornithologist 

and     Oologist,     XVII,     pp.     76-77.      (May. 
1892.) 

3.  The  fishes  of  Wabash   county.      In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893,  pp.  229- 
231. 

4.  Preliminary    descriptions    of    some 
South     American     Characinidee.      In     Am. 
Nat.,  XXVIII,  pp.  610-611.     (July,  1894.) 

5.  On  some  South  American  Characin- 
idse.     In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1893, 
p.  226.      (Abstract.) 


344 


Warthin  ] 


Bibliography:     Alumni 


6.  On    the    occurrence    of    Kirtland's 
warbler  in  Indiana.    In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad. 
Sci.  for  1894,  p.  224. 

7.  Contributions  to  the  biological  sur- 
vey of  Wabash   county.     In  Proc.   Indiana 
Acad.   Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  147-148, 

8.  Birds  of  Wabash  county.     In  Proc. 
Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1895,  pp.  148-159. 

9.  On  the  increasing  abundance  of  the 
opossum    (Didelphis    virginiana)    in   North- 
ern Indiana.     In  Proc.   Indiana  Acad.   Sci. 
for  1890,  p.  279. 

10.  The    South    American    Characinidae 
collected    by    Charles    F.    Hartt.      In    Ann. 
New   York   Acad.    Sci.,    VIII,   pp.   257-300. 
(Jan.,  1895.) 

11.  On  the  occurrence  of  the   Russian 
thistle     (Salsola    kali    tragus)     in    Wabash 
county.      In   Proc.    Indiana   Acad.    Sci.   for 
1896,  p.  224. 

12.  Notes  on  the  embryology  of  Para- 
gordius     ( Gordinus )     varius     ( Leidy ) .      In 
Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1897,  pp.  232- 
233. 


BENJAMIN  VAIL,  JR.,  A.B,  (1878).     Wash- 
ington, D.  C. 

1.     The  poet's  tribute  to  Garfield.   Cam- 
bridge, Mass. 


JAMES  M.  VAN  HOOK,  A.B.  (1899),  A.M. 
(1900).  Plant  Pathologist,  Ohio  Agri- 
cultural Experiment  Station,  Wooster, 
Ohio. 

1.  Notes   on   the   division   of   the   cell 
and   nucleus   in   liverworts.      In   Bot.   Gaz., 
XXX,  pp.  394-399  ;   1  plate.     (Dec.,  1900.) 

2.  Pink    rotj    an    attendant    of    apple 
scab.      (Joint   author   with   J.   Craig.)      In 
Cornell  Univ.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.  Bull.,  No.  207, 
pp.  161-171 ;   5  figures,  2  plates. 

3.  Diseases    of    ginseng.      In     Cornell 
Univ.    Agr.    Exp.    Sta.    Bull.,    25    figures. 
(1904.) 


JOSEPH  H  VORIS,  A.B.  (1896).     Teacher  of 
Biology,   High  School,   Evansville,  Ind. 

1.  Material  for  the  study  of  the  vari- 
ation of  Pimephales  notatus  (Rafinesque), 
in  Turkey  Lake  and  in  Shoe  and  Tippecanoe 
lakes.  In  Proc.  Indiana  Acad.  Sci.  for  1898, 
pp.  233-239. 


FRANCIS  MARION   WALTERS,  A.B.    (1887), 

A.M.   (1891).     Professor  of  Chemistry, 

Missouri    State    Normal  School,    War- 
rensburg,  Mo. 

1.     The   elements    of    physiology.      Co- 
lumbia, Mo.,  1902.     Pp.  198. 


JENNIE  E.  (HORNING)  WALTERS  (Mrs. 
Francis  Marion  Walters ) .  Student, 
1886-1888.  Warrensburg,  Mo. 

1.  A  review  of  the  American  genera 
and  species  of  Chaetodontidse.  (Joint 
author  with  C.  H.  Eigenmann. )  In  Ann. 
Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  New  York,  for  1887,  pp. 
1-18. 


ALDEED  SCOTT  WARTHIN,  A.B.  (1888), 
M.D.,  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Pathology 
and  Director  of  the  Pathological  Lab- 
oratory, University  of  Michigan,  Ann 
Arbor. 

1.  Scheme  for  the  systematic  study  of 
medical  cases.     Ann  Arbor,   1892.     Pp.   16. 

2.  Additional  notes  on  the  diazo-reac- 
tion.     In  Med.  News,  1893.     Pp.   12. 

3.  Some    physiologic    effects   of   music 
in  hypnotized  subjects.    In  Med.  News,  1894. 
Pp.  13. 

4.  Accentuation     of     the     pulmonary 
second  sound  an  important  sign  in  the  di- 
agnosis   of    pericarditis.      In    Med.    News, 
1895.     Pp.  15. 

5.  Report  of  a  case  of  ectopic  gesta- 
tion   associated    with    tuberculosis    of    the 


345 


Indiana  University 


\_Warthin 


tubes,  placenta,  and  fetus.     In  Med.  News, 

1896.  Pp.  16.     2  plates. 

6.  Ilypoleueocytosis  in  acute  tubercu- 
losis.   In  Med.  News,  1890.     Pp.  8. 

7.  Fibrolipoma     of    the    kidney.       In 
Jour.   Path,   and   Bact.,-  1897,   pp.   404-411. 
2  plates. 

8.  The   diagnosis   of  primary  sarcoma 
of  the  pleura   from   tlje  cells  found  in  the 
pleuritic  exudate.    In  Med.  News,  1897.    Pp. 
16,  5  plates. 

9.  Some     experimental     investigations 
as   to   the   effects   of   the   administration   of 
yeast  nuclein  upon  the  leucocytes.     In  New 
York  Med.  Jour,  for  1897.     Pp.  45. 

10.  Practical    pathology.      Ann    Arbor, 

1897.  Pp.  150. 

11.  The     minute     pathology     of     acute 
haemorrhagic     pancreatitis    associated    with 
multiple  fat-necrosis.     In  Phila.  Med.  Jour, 
for  1898.     Pp.  19.     1  plate. 

12.  A    primary    polymorphous-cell    sar- 
coma of  the  nose.    In  New  York  Med.  Jour, 
for  1899.     Pp.  18. 

13.  The  statistics  of  fifty  autopsies  on 
tuberculosis    subjects.      Usual    localizations 
of  tuberculosis.     In  Med.  News,  1899.     Pp. 
16. 

14.  The  pathology  of  the  Pacinian  cor- 
puscle.      (Prize    essay.)       In    Phila.     Med. 
Jour,  for  1899.     Pp.  20,  9  plates. 

15.  Multiple    primary    carcinoma.      In 
Jour.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.  for  1899.     Pp.  20. 

16.  The   coexistence   of   carcinoma   and 
tuberculosis  of  the  mammary  gland.    In  Am. 
Jour.  Med.  Sci.  for  1899.     Pp.  11,  1  plate. 

17.  A  case  of  primary  adenocarcinoma 
of  the  gallbladder  with  secondaries  in  both 
adrenals,  melanosis  of  skin    (Addison's  dis- 
ease?), vitiligo,  and  hypertrophy  of  the  pan- 
creas.    In  Phila.  Med.  Jour,  for  1900.     Pp. 
28. 

18.  Multiple    traumatic    hemorrhage    of 
the    liver    associated    with    multiple    pulmo- 
nary emboli  of  liver-cells  and  giant  cells  re- 


sembling bone-marrow  cells.     In  Med.  News 
for  1900.    Pp.  31 ;    1  plate. 

19.  Accessory  adrenal  body  in  the  broad 
ligament.     In  Am.  Jour.  Obstet.,  1900.     Pp. 
9,  2  plates. 

20.  Adenoma   of   both    adrenals    in    the 
new-born,      associated      with      retrogressive 
changes    in   the  adrenals  of   Marchand.      In 
Archives  of  Pediatrics.     1901.     Pp.  16;     2 
plates. 

21.  A  case  of  endothelioma  of  the  lach- 
rymal    gland      (myxo-chondro-endothelioma 
cylindromatodes),  with  an  analysis  of  previ- 
ously   reported    cases    of    lachrymal    gland 
tumors.      In    Archives    of    Ophthalmology, 
1901.    Pp.  20  ;   2  plates. 

22.  Multiple  primary  neoplasms  in  one 
individual.     In   Phila.  Med.  Jour,  for  1901. 
Pp.  7. 

23.  Disappearing  tumors.    (Joint  author 
with  AV.  A.   Spitzler. )      In  Med.  News  for 
1901.    Pp.  14. 

24.  A   contribution   to   the   normal   his- 
tology   and    pathology    of    the    hemolymph 
glands.     In  Jour.  Boston  Soc.  of  Med.  Sci. 
for  1901.    Pp.  22.     In  Jour.  Med.  Research, 
1901,  pp.  3-25. 

25.  The  normal  histology  of  the  human 
hemolymph  glands.     In  Am.  Jour.  Anat.,  I, 
pp.  63-79. 

26.  Section  on  'The  voluntary  muscles, 
tendons,     tendon-sheaths     and     bursse.'      In 
Am.  Textbook  of  Path.  Philadelphia,  1901. 
Pp.  724-745. 

27.  The  changes  produced  in  the  hemo- 
lymph   glands    of    the    sheep    and    goat    by 
splenectomy,   hemolytic  poisons   and   hemor- 
rhage.    In  Jour.   Med.   Research,  for  1902. 
In  Vaughan  Festschrift,   1903,   pp.  21;    15 
plates. 

28.  Are    the    hemolymph    nodes    organs 
sui  generis?    In  Trans.  Chicago  Pathol.  Soc. 
for  1902,  pp.  151-174. 

29.  The   pathology    of   pernicious    anae- 
mia,  with   special  reference  to  the  changes 


34  fl 


Wittier^ 


Bibliography :     Alumni 


occurring  in  the  hemolymph  nodes.     In  Am. 
Jour.  Med.  Sci.  for  1902,  pp.  45,  7  plates. 

30.  Translator  and  editor  of  Ziegler's 
'German  pathology.'  New  York,  1903.  Pp. 
760 ;  586  figures. 

31.  A  contribution  to  the  casuistry  of 
placental  and  congenital  tuberculosis.  (Joint 
author  with  D.  M.  Cowie. )  In  Jour,  of  In- 
fectious Diseases,  1904,  pp.  140-169. 

32.  A  clinical  and  pathological  study  of 
two  cases  of  splenic  anaemia,  with  early  and 
late  stages  of  cirrhosis.     (Joint  author  with 
G.  Dock.)     In  Am.  Jour.  Med.  Sci.  for  1904. 
Pp.  32,  10  plates. 

33.  The     development     of     hemolympy 
nodes   in  adipose   tissue.     In  Trans.   Phila- 
delphian  Pathol.  Soc.  for  1904. 

34.  Editor     department     of     pathology, 
Reference  Handbook  of  Medical  Sciences,  2d 
edition,   New   York,   1900-1904.     Author   of 
numerous  articles  for  same. 


JOSHUA  HOWE  WATTS,  A.B.  (1857),  Santa 
Cruz  de  Vojoa,  Honduras. 

1.     Banana  culture  in  Central  America. 
In  Self-Culture  Mag.,  for  May,  1900. 


LYDIA   WHITAKER,  A.B.    (1900). 
of  Latin,  Terre  Haute,  ind. 

1.     The   prophet   of    St.    Pierre. 
York,  1904.     Pp.  200.     6  plates. 


Teacher 


New 


JOHN  EDWARD  WILEY,  A.B.    (1885),  A.M. 
(1889),  LL.B.   (1891).    Anderson,  Ind. 


The  tornado  (a  story). 
Books  and  reading  for  pupils. 


HOWARD  LAFAYETTE  WILSON,  A.B.  (1889), 
A.M.  (1891).  Teacher  of  Literature 
and  General  History,  State  Normal 
School.  River  Falls,  Wis. 

1.  President  Buchanan's  proposed  in- 
tervention in  Mexico.  In  Am.  Hist.  Rev., 
V,  pp.  087-701.  (July,  1900.) 


2.  The  function  of  the  high  school.     In 
South    Dakota    Educator,    XV,    pp.    43-47. 
(March,  1902.) 

3.  Intervention     in     Mexico.       (1904.) 
Pp.  xii,  250.     (In  press.) 


JOHN  BENJAMIN  WISELY,  A.B.  (1890), 
A.M.  (1891).  Head  of  Department  of 
Grammar  and  Composition,  Indiana 
State  Normal  School,  Terre  Haute,  Ind. 

1.  Studies   in   the   science   of   English 
grammar.      Terre   Haute,    Ind.,    1895.      Pp. 
185. 

2.  A    new    English    grammar.      Terre 
Haute,  Ind.,  1896.     Pp.  227.   . 

3.  Language    for    the    grades.     Terre 
Haute,  Ind.,  1896-1903.     Pp.  237. 


CLARK  WISSLER,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
(1899),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Curator  in 
Department  of  Ethnology,  American 
Museum  of  Natural  History.  Assistant 
in  Anthropology,  Columbia  University, 
New  York  City. 

1.  Interest  of  children  in  the  reading 
work   of   the   elementary   schools.      In   Ped. 
Sem.,  V,  pp.  523-541.     (April,  1898.) 

2.  The  diffusion  of  the  motor  impulse. 
(Joint  author  with  N.  R.  Richardson.)     In 
Psych.  Rev.,  VII,  pp.  29-38.     (Jan.,  1900.) 

3.  The  correlation  of  mental  and  physi- 
cal   tests.      Monograph    supplement    to    the 
Psych.  Rev.,  No.  16,  New  York,  1901.     Pp. 
62. 

4.  The  growth  of  boys  :   correlation  for 
the  annual  increments.     In  Am.  Anthropol- 
ogist, V,  pp.  81-88. 

5.  Decorative  and  symbolic  art  of  the 
Dakotas.      In     Proc.     International     Cong. 
Americanists,    for    1902.     New    York.     Pp. 
10,  2  plates.      ( In  press. ) 


Indiana  University 


[ffissler 


6.  Development  of  the  decorative  and 
symbolic  art  of  the  Sioux.  In  Bull.  Am. 
Mus.  Nat.  Hist,  for  1904,  pp.  250,  40  plates. 
(In  press.) 


JOHN  ANDERSON  WOOD,  A.B.  (1897),  A.M. 
(1901).  Superintendent  of  Schools,  La 
Porte,  Ind. 

1.  High  school  statistics.      (Joint   au- 
thor with  W.  H.   Sanders.)      In  Kep.   Sub- 
Committee  to  Indiana  Town  and  City   Su- 
perintendents' Assoc.  for  1899,  pp.  28-62. 

2.  Relations  of  the  schools  to  growing 
disregard    of    authority.     In    Indiana    Sch. 
Jour.,  XLIV,  pp.  189-198.     (April,  1899.) 

3.  Use   of   pictures    in   teaching  geog- 
raphy.    In  Bull.  Am.  Bureau  of  Geography, 
for  Dec.,  1900,  p.  309;    in  Educ.  Jour,  for 
Oct.  and  Nov.,  1901,  pp.  71  and   118;    in 
N.  Y.  Teachers'  Monographs,  for  June,  1903. 

4.  Work   books.      In  Teachers'   Jour., 
II,  p.  554.     (June,  1903.) 

5.  Heating,    ventilating    and    fuel    for 
school  buildings.     La  Porte,  Ind.,  1903.    Pp. 
40. 


JAMES   ALBERT    WOODBURN,    A.B.    (1876), 
A.M.    (1885),  Ph.D.     See  Faculty  list. 


WILLIAM   THEODORE  WYLIE,   A.B.    (1848). 
Sparta,  111. 

1.  Lessons  and  papers   for  the  school 
and  family. 

2.  Editor  of  'The  Christian  Giver.' 


ALBERT  HENRY  YODER,  A.B.  (1893).  Pro- 
fessor of  Pedagogy  University  of  Wash- 
ington, Seattle,  Wash. 

1.  The  study  of  the  boyhood  of  great 
men.    In  Ped.  Sem.,  Ill,  pp.  134-156.     (Oct., 
1894.) 

2.  Investigations    in    pubescence.      In 


Trans.  Illinois  Soc.  for  Child-Study,  II,  pp. 
81-84. 

3.  Pubescence.      In     North     Western 
Mo.,  VIII,  pp.  592-600. 

4.  Editor  of  Journal  of  Childhood  and 
Adolescence,  3  volumes,  114  issues. 

5.  Incorrigibles.      In   Jour.    Childhood 
and  Adolescence,  II,  pp.  22-54. 

6.  Mouth-breathing.      In   Jour.   Child- 
hood and  Adolescence,  II,  pp.  255-263. 

7.  Discussion  on  psychology  of  puberty 
and    adolescence    by    Dr.    Colin    Scott.     In 
Proc.  Nat.  Educ.  Assoc.  for  1897,  p.  951. 

8.  Sex    defferentiation    in    relation    to 
secondary  education.     In  Proc.   Nat.   Educ. 
Assoc.  for  1903,  pp.  785-790. 

9.  Numerous    short    reviews    of   peda- 
gogical  literature.      In  Jour,   of   Childhood 
and  Adolescence. 


PETER  A.  YODER,  A.B.  (1894),  A.M.  (1896), 
Ph.D.  Associate  Professor  of  Chemis- 
try, University  of  Utah. 

1.  Ueber     Dehydroschleimsaure :     eine 
neue    Darstellungsmethode,    sowie    verschie- 
dene  Salze  und  Ester  derselben.     Disserta- 
tion.   Gottingen,  1901.     Pp.  63  ;    1  plate. 

2.  A   new   centrifugal   soil   elutriator. 
(Preliminary  report.)     In  Proc.  Fifth  Inter- 
national   Congress    of    Applied    Chemistry, 
Sec.  VII,  pp.  9-21,  4  plates. 

3.  A    new   centrifugal    soil    elutriator. 
In  Bull.  Utah  Agri.  Exp.  Sta.   (1901).     13 
plates.     (In  press.) 

4.  Some    observations    on    farming    in 
Germany.     In  5th  An.  Rep.  Utah  Farmers' 
Institutes,  for  1901,  pp.  82-92. 


CLARENCE    ARTHUR   ZARING,    A.B.    (1895), 
LL.B.  (1896). 

1.  'The  Arbutus'  (Senior  class  annual, 
Indiana  University).  (Joint  editor  with 
Adelaide  Perry  Newsom).  Bloomington, 
Ind.,  1895.  Pp.  240. 


348 


LD 


THE  LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

Santa  Barbara 


STACK  COLLECTION 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
"TAMPED  BELOW. 


819W 


30w-8,'65(F644784)D482 


,.,U.S,f?"LH™  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FAC 


